THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


THE 

* 


HOLOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


BY 


IOU  OF     "A    SYSTEM    OF    PHOXOSCRIPT    AND    PHOXOTYPY,"    ETC. 


CHICAGO: 
THE    MORRELL   VE. 

1901. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1901,  by 

CHARLES  MORRELL, 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 

ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

PREFACE 5 

I NTRODUCTION 11 

PROLOGUE  23 

THE  ELEMENTARY  STYLE. 

CHAPTER 

I.    The  Consonants  and  Breathings  29 

II.     The  Vowels,  Semivowels,  Etc 39 

III.  Circles    and    Loops.      Initials  of  Proper  Names.    Punctuation 

and  Other  Murks 60 

IV.  Hooks,  Etc 79 

V.     Downward  and  Upward  R,  L  and  Sh 98 

VI.    The  Halving  and  Lengthening  Principles 102 

VII.    Prefixes,  Affixes,  Etc 116 

Elementary  Style  Reading  Lessons  and  Exercises 133 

Elementary  Style  Writing  Lessons  and  Exercises 171 

THE  REPORTING  STYLE. 

VIII.    Omission    of    Vowels  and  Diphthongs.     The  Vowel  Scale  and 

Position.     Logographs  and  Seinigraphs 207 

IX.     Words  Other  than  Logographs  and  Semigraphs.     Homographs, 

Variagraphs.  Voeagraphs,  Brevigraphs  and  Vocabulary 230 

X.     Phraseography 344 

XI.     Various  Expedients 419 

XII.    Significant  Marks,  Etc.    Reporting  Trials,  Hearings,  Etc 434 

Reporting  Exercises 441 

Reporting  Style  Reading  Exercises 443 

Reporting  Style  Writing  Exercises 463 

Directions  for  Attaining  Speed 484 

Stenotypic  Connected  Matter 485 

Index 487 

3 


PREFACE. 


The  new  work  on  phonography  here  presented  is  the 
result  of  recent  discoveries  in  phonetics.  When  the 
author  first  began  the  study  of  Greek,  he  was  im- 
pressed with  the  peculiarity  of  the  representation  of 
the  spiritus  or  breathings.  He  also  observed  that 
while  the  aspirate  or  rough  breathing  (spiritus  asper, 
Trvevfjia  Saa-v)  was  stated  to  be  equivalent  in  pronunci- 
ation to  the  English  II,  either  no  explanation  of  the 
other,  the  lene  or  smooth  breathing  (spiritus  lenis, 
Trveu/j-a  i/rtXoV)  was  given  or  a  very  indefinite  one.  In 
the  early  part  of  the  year  1884  he  began  the  prepara- 
tion of  a  system  of  connective  vowel  phonography 
which  was  in  due  course  published  in  the  year  1890 
under  the  title  of  "A  System  of  Phonic  Writing. " 

«'  O 

While  engaged  on  this  work  and  in  the  study  of  phonet- 
ics in  its  application  to  the  practice  of  phonography 
he  made  the  discovery  of  the  nature  of  the  lene  and 
aspirate  and  their  relation  to  each  other.  At  once  the 
beauty  and  philosophy  of  the  Greek  representation  of 
the  breathings  became  apparent  and  the  mystery  per- 
taining to  them  which  had  hitherto  baffled  modern 
scholarship  was  solved  and  a  means  obtained  by  which 
all  the  ancient  alphabets  might  be  interpreted.  The 
author  believes  he  is  the  first  to  make  this  discovery, 
wThich  is  explained  hereafter  and  was  first  published  in 
the  "System  of  Phonic  Writing"  above  mentioned. 

In  this  work  also  was  published  the  pairing  of  the 
vowel  sounds  as  short  and  long  according  to  the  Eng- 
lish instead  of  the  continental  method  which  up  to  that 
time  had  been  followed  by  all  works  on  phonetics. 


(3  PREFACE. 

The  author  has  since  adhered  to  this  method  although 
for  a  long  time  he  had  no  authority  for  so  doing  except 
his  disbelief  in  the  scientific  correctness  of  the  other. 
Eventually,  however,  while  perfecting  the  "System  of 
Phonoscript  and  Phonotypy"  mentioned  in  the  Intro- 
duction following,  he  made  the  discovery,  explained 
in  that  treatise,  of  the  positions  of  vowel  approx- 
imation and  thus  was  enabled  to  demonstrate  the  cor- 
rectness of  his  pairing  of  the  vowel  sounds  by  the 
physiological  method.  The  English  method  is  accord- 
ingly considered  as  phonetically  established  and  is 
therefore  also  followed  in  the  present  volume  and  will 
be  found  to  lend  additional  legibility  to  phonography 
besides  rendering  it  more  acceptable  and  easy  of  ac- 
quisition by  English  writers  and  readers. 

In  the  present  work  the  vowels  are  represented  by 
small  semicircles  and  dashes  instead  of  dots  and  dashes 
as  in  other  works  on  phonography— which  method  was 
inaugurated  to  a  certain  extent  in  the  "System  of 
Phonic  Writing"  above  mentioned.  In  consequence 
each  vowel  has  a  different  form  and  therefore  does  not 
depend  upon  its  position  either  to  the  line  of  writing 
or  to  the  stem  letter  to  distinguish  it,  but  may  be 
written  anywhere  in  respect  to  either.  Vowel  repre- 
sentation and  vocalization  are  thus  rendered  simple 
instead  of  complex.  Again,  the  discovery  of  the 
nature  of  the  breathings  led  also  to  the  discovery  of 
that  of  the  consonants  and  vowels  as  smooth  and  rough 
while  the  method  of  representing  the  vowels  by  small 
semicircles  and  dashes  made  it  possible  to  dispense 
altogether  with  stem  letters  for  the  lene  and  aspirate- 
analogously  to  the  (latter)  Greek  representation — and 
to  indicate  them  respectively  by  leaving  unshaded  or 
by  shading  the  initial  parts  of  vowels  when  the  latter 
occur  alone  and  in  other  cases  by  light  and  heavy  dots 
and  dashes,  as  explained  hereafter  in  the  text,  thus 


PREFACE.  7 

solving  the  aspirate  problem  of  phonography  and  at 
the  same  time  increasing  its  speed.  Another  feature 
of  the  present  work  which  adds  to  the  legibility  of 
phonography  is  that  downward  li  and  L  are  never  em- 
ployed initially  or  when  they  would  be  the  first  stems 
in  words,  but  if  used  at  all  are  written  only  medially 
or  finally.  They  thus  never  conflict  with  the  same 
forms  for  W  and  Y  when  the  latter  are  the  first  stems 
in  words.  Furthermore,  the  small  semicircles  for  AY 
and  Y  are  abolished,  being  employed  for  vowels  as 
explained  above.  In  lieu  of  them  are  substituted  the 
small  angular  characters  hitherto  mostly  used  for  diph- 
thongs, thus  practically  adding  four  new  letters  to 
phonography  and  thereby  still  further  increasing  its 
power  and  legibility. 

There  are  many  other  improvements  of  phonography 
in  the  following  pages  besides  the  above  which  are 
original  with  the  author  but  which  need  not  be  here 
specified.  The  system  of  stenotypy  also  is  an  improve- 
ment and  believed  to  be  the  best  thus  far  published. 
By  the  use  of  this  art  much  engraving  of  phono- 
graphic characters  for  illustrative  purposes  in  the  body 
of  text  books  can  be  dispensed  with.  It  is  also  much 
more  preferable  for  dictionaries  than  the  engraved 
forms  since  the  latter  sometimes  become  blurred  or 
are  otherwise  faulty.  Finally,  the  arrangement  of  the 
various  subjects  of  the  book,  each  complete  in  a 
separate  chapter,  presents  advantages  for  easily  and 
thoroughly  mastering  phonography  not  previously 
attained. 

Much  has  been  said,  pro  and  con,  on  the  phono- 
graphic vowel  scales  known  as  the  ' '  old "  and  the 
"new.'*  When  phonography  was  first  published  by 
Isnno  Pitman,  in  1837,  he  took  the  scale  of  vowel 
sounds  from  Walker's  "Principles  of  Pronunciation" 
prefixed  to  his  dictionary.  This  scale,  called  the  old, 
was  used  in  phonography  up  till  1858.  In  March  of 


PREFACE. 

that  year  the  order  of  the  first  and  third  place  vowels 
r-  and  ;i  was  inverted  thus  bringing  into  existence  the 
new  vowel  scale,  which  was  then  adopted  by  Mr.  Pit- 
man and  has  since  been  used  in  his  works.  Most 
phonographers  and  phonographic  authors,  however, 
refused,  and  still  refuse,  to  adopt  the  new  scale.  The 
following  groupings  represent  the  scales  in  contrast 
with  each  other.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  new 
differs  from  the  old  only  in  the  transposition  of  the 
first  and  third  place  vowels  e  and  ii. 

OLD  SCALE.  NEW  SCALE.' 


0 


u 


The  old  is  preferred  in  this  work  for  the  reason 
that  in  it  more  words  are  written  in  the  first  position 
than  in  either  the  second  or  third  and  consequently  a 
higher  degree  of  speed  can  be  attained  than  in  the  new 
scale  where  many  more  words  are  written  in  the  third 
position  than  in  either  of  the  other  two.  Another 
reason  for  preferring  the  old  scale  is  that  in  the  new 
or  inverted  one,  too  many  words  of  allied  sound  are 
written  in  the  same  position.  This  requires  them  to 
be  so  frequently  distinguished  by  vocalization  as  to 
seriously  retard  the  speed  of  the  writing.  On  the 
other  hand  in  the  old  scale  a  greater  number  of  unlike, 
that  is,  unallied,  sounds  are  placed  in  the  same  position 
and  thus  vocalization  is  generally  rendered  unnecessary. 

In  preparing  this  work  the  author  has  examined  all 
the  English  and  American  books  and  periodicals  access- 
ible, both  stenographic  and  phonographic,  many  of 
which  are  out  of  print.  A  few  of  these,  as  "The 
Phonographic  Class  Book,"  by  Andrews  and  Boyle,  and 
"The  Phonographic  Instructor, "  by  James  C.  Booth, 
have,  in  some  respects,  never  been  surpassed  Among 
other  works  and  treatises  on  phonetics,  consulted  or 


PREFACE.  0 

read  in  full,  the  following  are  worthy  of  special  men- 
tion: "A  Hand  Book  of  the  English  Language"  and 
"A  Defense  of  Phonetic  Spelling,"  by  Dr.  K.  G. 
Latham.  Also  the  General  Introduction  to  Storrs  and 
Smaliey's  "American  Phonetic  Dictionary,"  by  Dr.  A. 
J.  Ellis,  and  numerous  tracts  and  pamphlets  published 
by  Mr.  Isaac  Pitman. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE  SPIR1TI,  OR  BREATHINGS. 


The  sounds,  whether  whispered  or  vocal,  of  every 
language  are  produced  by  the  breath  passing  through 
the  sounding,  vowel  and  articulating  organisms,  situ- 
ated in  the  throat  and  mouth.  A  sound  can  not  be 
made  without  breath.  The  breath  is  of  two  degrees, 
either  light  or  heavy,  and  is  called  smooth  or  rough. 
These  are  also  called  Spiriti,*  or  Breathings.  The 
Romans  called  the  one  Spiritus  Lenis,  which  means 
soft  or  smooth  breath,  and  the  other  Spiritus  Asper, 
which  means  rough  breath.  The  light  or  smooth 
breath,  spiritus  lenis,  is  the  breath  we  breathe  every 
instant  of  our  lives,  sleeping  or  waking,  and  which  is 
necessary  for  our  existence.  The  heavy  or  rough  breath, 
spiritus  asper,  is  the  smooth  breath,  spiritus  lenis, 
made  heavy  or  rough.  Sounds  are  also  of  two 
degrees  or  kinds,  either  smooth  or  rough.  A  smooth 
sound  is  produced  by  the  smooth  and  a  rough  sound  by 
the  rough  breath  passing  through  the  sounding 
organism. 

The  Greeks,  in  their  latest  alphabet,  had  no  letter 
to  represent  either  of  these  breathings,  but  indicated 
them  by  two  different  marks,  one  of  which  was  placed 
over  every  vowel  letter  that  began  a  word.  The 

*The  term  "spiriti''  is  used  to  indicate  the  plural  in  prefer- 
ence to  the  classical  one  "spiritus.  ' 


.  .,  INTRODUCTION'. 

Romans  had  no  marks  for  these  breathings,  hut  rep- 
resented one  of  them,  the  spiritus  asper,  or  rough 
breath,  b,'  the  letter  h.  The  other  the  spiritus  lenis, 
they  left"  out  of  their  alphabet  altogether.  In  the 
Latin  lan£rua:ro  it  had  no  mark  or  letter  of  any 
kind  to  indicate  its  existence,  the  vowel  letter  itself 
without  a  mark  standing  for  the  sound  produced 
by  the  smooth  breathing.  The  Moderns  adopted 
the  alphabet  of  the  Romans,  and,  accordingly,  we 
have  only  one  breath  letter,  that  of  the  spiritus 
r,  or  rough  breath,  which  is  the  letter  h,  and 
nothing  to  indicate  the  existence  of  the  other,  it.-: 
corresponding  smooth  breath.  This  has  been  the 
cause  of  great  confusion,  for  the  letter  h  has  thus 
been  .  considered  a  consonant,  which  it  is  not. 
Neither  is  it  a  vowel  or  sonant;  it  simply  stands 
for  the  rough  breath.  The  Greeks,  therefore, 
considered  the  vowel  letters  as  representing  the  differ- 
ent sounds,  and  the  smooth  and  the  rough  marks  a-; 
representing  the  breath,  both  smooth  and  rough  which 
created  those  sounds.  The  Romans  considered  the 
vowel  letters  as  representing  the  different  sounds,  and 
the  letter  h  not  as  creating,  but  as  simply  making  the 
sound  rough.  The  Greek  alphabet  was,  perhaps,  the 
more  philosophic  of  the  two,  though  the  Roman  was 
the  more  practicable  and  legible. 

This  rough  or  smooth  ?jreathtng  is  the  connecting 
link,  or  power,  between  the  consonants  and  sonants, 
for  the  consonants  could  not  accompany  the  sonants  if 
there  was  no  breath.  Again,  no  language  can  bo 
properly  represented  that  does  not  have  a  sign  for 
each  of  these  spiriti,  or  breathings.  Also,  botlrshould 
bo  1-3 presented  or  both  not.  The  smooth  breathing  is 
a*  much  of  an  existence  as  thorough.  To  represent 
one  and  not  the  other  is  liable  to  lead  to  errors  in 
language  and  in  the  interpretation  of  alphabets,  or 
else  prevent  them  from  being  understood,;  for  wo  can 


IXTUOD17CTIOM.  };; 

not  understand  any  alphabet  unless  we  can  perceive 
the  reason  of  its  formation. 

Were  the  alphabet  to  be  represented  in  a  manner 
similar  to  that  of  the  Greeks  (which  should  not 
be  done),  tho  spiritin  lenis,  or  smooth  breathing 
before  the  first  letter  "a"  in  the  word  "aha", 
would  have  a  sign  or  letter  to  represent  it  as  the 
spiritus  asper  or  rough  breathing  before  the  third 
letter  "a"  has  a  sign  to  represent  it,  which  is  the 
letter  "h".  The  Greeks  held,  and  they  were 
correct  from  their  standpoint  and  also  as  far  as 
they  went,  that  the  breathing,  either  smooth  or 
rough,  and  not  the  vowel  commenced  the  word 
and  accordingly  should  be  represented.  That  no 
word,  strictly  speaking,  commenced  with  a  vowel  and 
could  not,  but  that  every  word  began  with  either  a 
breathing  smooth  or  rough  or  a  consonant.  Hence 
the  mirks  for  the  smooth  and  rough  breathings  over 
the  first  vowels  of  all  words  that  did  not  commence 
with  a  consonant. 

Although  the  smooth  breathing  exists,  it  is  not 
ordinarily  noticeable  to  the  ear  in  vocal  speech  any 
more  than  is  the  wind  which  makes  the  voice  through 
a  trumpet.  We  know  that  the  wind  or  breath  makes 
the  voice,  but  we  hear  the  voice,  not  the  breath.  The 
same  reasoning  applies  to  a  steam  whistle.  This  wind, 
breath  or  steam  that  we  do  not  hear  in  the  voice  of 
this  class  of  instruments  corresponds  to  the  'spiritus 
lenis  or  smooth  breath  that  makes  the  smooth  voice 
through  the  human  sonant  organism  and  the  latter 
corresponds  to  the  trumpet,  whistle  or  other  instru- 
ment. 

In  the  system  of  phonography  in  this  book  the 
breathing  and  vowel  sounding  organism  are  practically 
considered  together  and  unseparated,  because  one  can 
not  exist  in  speech  without  the  other.  The  smooth  or 
light  sounds  produced,  therefore,  are  represented  by 


14  IN'THOin-OTlON. 

smooth  or  light   characters,  and  the   rough   or  heavy 
sounds  by  rough  or  heavy  characters. 

The  name  of  the  smooth  breath  letter  -f-  is  Aitch 
(that  is  to  say  -f-  aitch);  that  of  the  rough  breath  letter 
H  is  Haitch.  The  sound  of  the  former  is  a  smooth 
breath  .sound  only,*  that  of  the  latter  is  a  rough  breath 
sound  only,  neither  of  which  is  sonant. 

PHONOGRAPHY. 

Phonography  is  a  system  of  shorthand  based  strictly 
on  the  sounds  of  language  and  intended  to  attain  the 
swiftness  of  rapid  speech.  Accordingly,  the  letters  of 
its  alphabet  are  written  with  the  simplest  characters 
possible.  These  are  obtained  from  geometry  and  con- 
sist fundamentally  of  a  straight  and  a  curved  line  and 
a  dot,  each  of  which  is  formed  with  only  a  single  motion 
of  the  pen.  The  manner  in  which  they  are  used  is 
explained  in  the  following. 

There  are  only  two  primary  courses  by  which  we  can 
go  from  a  first  point  to  a  second  one ;  namely,  by  a 
straight  line  and  a  curve.  The  straight  line  we  can  not 
vary,  but  we  can  the  curve,  by  starting  from  the  first 
point  and  proceeding  on  either  side  of  the  straight  line 
to  the  second  point.  This  gives  us  three  ways  only  of 
going  from  a  first  to  a  second  point ;  namely,  by 
a  straight  line  and  two  curves.  The  same  is  the  case 
in  writing.  Now  each  of  these  lines  can  be  made  only 
in  five  different  directions  to  or  from  the  same  point, 
practicable  for  the  hand  in  writing.  We  thus  have 
fifteen  directions  in  all,  and  as  each  form  and  direction 
can  be  readily  distinguished  apart  and  accordingly  used 

*The  smooth  breathing  is  not  silent.  It  can  be  heard  by 
lengthening  it  out  before  it  strikes  the  whispering  or  vocal 
sonant  organism,  the  same  as  in  pronouncing  the  syllable 
"ha",  the  "h"  can  be  lengthened  out  before  it  strikes  the 
whispered  or  vocal  "a".  Both  breathings  may  also  be  distinctly 
heard  by  pronouncing  the  syllables  "+ a"  and  "ha"  and  drawing 
the  breath  inwardlj'. 


INTRODUCTION*  J5 

for  a  letter  we  thus  have  fifteen  letters,    which  are 
known  as  the  light  stem  letters  of  phonography. 

The  different  directions  in  which  the  three  strokes 
above  described  are  written  are  obtained  from  the 
angles  at  which  they  stand  in  the  following  diagrams. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  straight  strokes  are  radii  and 
the  curved  ones  portions  of  circumferences  of  the 
circle. 


In  the  first  diagram  the  circumference  of  the  circle 
is  divided  by  two  diameters  into  four  equal  parts.  Each 
of  the  latter  is,  therefore,  called  a  quadrant  or  quarter 
circumference,  or,  loosely,  a  quarter  circle.  Every 
pair  of  semi-diameters  encloses  an  angle  of  ninety  de- 
grees from  the  horizontal,  consequently  the  quadrants 
slope  at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  from  it.  In  the 
second  diagram  the  diameters  are  made  at  a  different 
angle  from  those  of  the  first,  namely,  forty-five  degrees 
from  the  horizontal,  consequently  the  quadrants  are 
either  horizontal  or  perpendicular.  In  the  third  dia- 
gram only  the  halves  of  the  diameters — for  convenience 
the  first  halves — are  used.  The  second  halves  are  not 
needed  since  they  are  simply  continuations  of  the  first 
ones.  In  practical  writing  the  quadrants  are  reduced 
in  length  till  they  become  arcs  of  the  chords  repre- 
sented by  the  similarly  inclined  radii  or  halved  diam- 
eters. 

in  the  fourth  diagram  only  one  diameter  is  used,  but 
at  an  angle  different  from  any  of  the  others  ;  namely, 
thirty  degrees  from  the  horizontal.  By  measuring 
up  or  down  from  the  horizontal  fifteen  degrees  (or 
from  the  diameter  forty-five  degrees)  and  drawing 
through  these  points  two  lines  parallel  with  the  dia- 
meter, two  more  quadrants  of  the  circumference  are 


n; 


INTRODUCTION. 


obtained  which,  when  reduced  in  practical  writing,  be- 
come arcs  of  the  chord  represented  by  one-half  the 
diameter.  These  with  the  radius,  or  one-half  the 
diameter — for  convenience  the  last  half — slope,  of 
course,  the  same  as  the  whole  diameter ;  namely,  at 
thirty  degrees  from  the  horizontal. 

The  first  three  diagrams  contain  twelve  and  the  last 
diagram  three  stems,  or  fifteen  altogether,  which  are 
all  the  light  ones  that  are  used  in  phonography.  Each 
of  these  may  be  shaded,  making  thirty.  In  the  present 
system,  however,  two  of  the  upward  stems  are  left 
unshaded ;  namely,  the  upper  curve  and  the  straight 
stroke  in  the  last  diagram. 

It  will  be  observed  that  tne  strokes  in  the  third  dia- 
gram all  end  at  the  same  point.  If  the  circumference 
were  to  be  divided  into  more  than  four  equal  parts — 
for  instance  by  using  four  diameters,  thus  creating  eight 
radii  and  their  corresponding  arcs — the  letters  would 
be  at  so  nearly  the  same  angle  as  not  to  be  readily 
distinguishable  from  one  another,  as  will  be  evident  if 
an  additional  stroke  is  put  between  the  horizontal  and 
perpendicular  ones,  all  four  strokes  being  placed  at 
equal  distances  apart.  It  has  been  found,  however, 
from  experience  that  the  stems  inclined  downward  to 
the  left  and  upward  to  the  right  may  be  thus  arranged 
and  still  be  legible.  This  happens  because  the  former 
are  usually  written  at  an  angle  of  sixty  and  the  latter 
frequently  at  one  of  thirty  degrees,  thus  presenting  a 
strong  contrast  to  each  other  and  also  because  they  are 
traced  in  different  directions,  so  that  when  joined  to 
other  stems  their  identity  is  apparent  without  regard 
to  their  inclination. 

The  breathings  are  represented  by  dots,  while  the 
vowels  are  indicated  by  dashes  and  small  semicircles  on 
the  same  principle  as  the  stem  letters.  All  are  ex- 
hibited in  the  phonographic  alphabet,  or  peebeta, 
following. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


17 


From  the  precc.Ung  the  learner  will  percoivo  that 
the  difference  between  shorthand  and  script  or  print 
arises  from  the  fact  that  script  or  printed  letters  can 
all  he  made  at  the  same  angle  because  they  are  differ- 
ent in  form;  whereas  shorthand  letters  must  be  made 
at  different  angles  because  they  are  similar  in  form. 


T 

I) 
K 

G 

S 

z 


It 

L 

w 

Y 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  ALPHABET. 

CONSONANTS. 

SMOOTH. 

ROUGH. 

\             as  in  peep 

F       V. 

as  in  fief 

"     babe/ 

V      ^ 

'  '    valve 

1                  "     taught 

Th      ( 

"    thirtieth 

'  •     deed 

Dh     ( 

"    thither 

"      kick 

Ch     / 

.   "    church 

—                "     idff 

o    O 

J       / 

"    judge 

)                 '  '      sauce 

sh   y 

.  "    she 

)                "     /ones 

Zh     J 

"    vision 

^--               "     mum 

-  "     nun 

^s               "     rinjr 

O 

up      "     roar 

UP        "       lull 

A                "      we 

f                                  C  .         v/i 

18  IXTHOULCnoX. 


BREATHINGS. 

as  in  4-0  j    H     .  as  in   he 

VOWELS. 


mon. 


is  c  ell          u  Uz 

eyes        c  eel         u  ooze 


LOW. 


\  ask       _  at          i  odd 
•v  art        —  ate        I    ode 


DIPHTHONGS. 

h  out       £/  oil       y  Cruickshank 

REMARKS  OX  THE  ALPHABET. 

The  learner  should  first  endeavor  to  understand  the 
alphabet  (or  peebeta)  before  hev  proceeds  to  learn  it  by 
heart  or  write  it.  Most  of  the  sounds  of  human  speech 
are  very  much  alike;  thus,  P  is  like  B,  T  is  like  D,  etc., 
except  that  B  is  a  heavier  sound  than  P,  and  D  heavier 
than  T.  Now,,  these  and  all  other  sounds  in  language 
which  are  alike,  are  paired  and  represented  by  signs 
which  are  alike  and  paired,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  pre- 
ceding alphabet.  There  are  eight  pairs  of  consonants, 
four  smooth  and  four  rough,  commencing  with  P  B 
and  ending  writh  Sh  Zh.  These  consonant  pairs  are  so 
similar  in  sound  that  frequently  one  sound  can  be  used 
for  the  other  in  speaking,  without  mistaking  which 
was  intended.  Therefore,  in  the  phonographic  alpha- 
bet a  similar  sign  has  been  chosen  for  each,  the  light 
stroke  representing  the  light  and  the  heavy  stroke  the 
heavy  sound,  either  of  which  strokes,  like  their 
sounds,  as  said  above,  can  frequently  be  used  for  the 
other  and  in  swift  writing  it  often  happens  that  the 
light  stroke  alone  is  used,  for  the  reason  that  the  hand 
does  not  always  take  time  to  shade  the  heavy  letters; 
but  no  mistake  thereby  arises,  because  the  letters  rep- 


INTRODUCTION.  19 

resent  sounds  that  are  almost  identical.  This  is  the 
case  also  with  the  breathings.  Consequently,  all  the 
writing  could  be  made  with  light  strokes  and  yet  be 
almost  as  legible  as  when  both  light  and  shaded  ones 
are  used.  It  would  also  remain  legible  if  shaded  let- 
ters were  used  throughout.  The  learner  is  instructed, 
however,  to  use  both  the  light  and  the  shaded  strokes, 
but  if  he  makes  either  exclusively,  he  should  employ 
the  light  rather  than  the  shaded  ones,  because  the 
former  are  much  more  swiftly  made  than  the  latter. 
Again,  sounds  which  are  allied  are  mostly  made  in  the 
same  direction;  thus  F  takes  the  direction  of  P,  Th 
that  of  T,  N  of  M,  etc.  Also  each  letter  of  each  group 
is  placed  in  the  order  of  its  utterance  from  the  lips  to 
the  throat  in  what  is  termed  the  phonetic  order.  This 
can  be  very  plainly  seen  in  the  case  of  the  rough  let- 
ters beginning  with  F  and  ending  with  Zh.  The  learner 
is  also  informed  that  each  letter  of  the  above  alphabet 
stands  for  one  sound  and  no  more. 

As  to  the  vowels  it  will  be  observed  that  they  are 
divided  into  two  groups  of  High  and  Low,  the  upper 
line  of  each  representing  what  are  usually  known  as 
the  short,  and  the  lower  one  the  long  vowels.  The 
upper  and  lower  lines  of  each  group  are  also  arranged 
in  phonetic  order.  Furthermore,  the  short  vowels  are 
represented  by  light  characters  and  the  long  vowels  by 
similar  ones  shaded  at  the  end.  Also  the  high  vowels 
are  represented  by  semicircles  and  the  low  ones  by 
dashes.  The  diphthongs  are  simply  combinations  of 
the  vowels  of  which  they  are  composed  as  will  be  here- 
after more  fully  explained. 

ORGANIC  CLASSIFICATION  OF  THE  SOUNDS 
OF  THE  ALPHABET. 

The  sounds  of  the  alphabet  arc  classified  according 
to  the  organs  which  form  them,  as  follows: 


I'll  INTKODrCTIOX. 

1.  Explodente.— P,  13,  T,  D,  K,  G,  Ch,  J  are  called 
explodents   because  they    are  produced  by  exploding 
the  breath  through  the  organs  of  speech  previously  ia 
total  contact;    and  being  quicker,    more    direct    and 
abrupt  than  the  other  sounds  of  the  alphabet,  are  best 
represented  by  straight  lines  whoso  formation  is  of  the 
same  nature.      All  the  other  sounds   being  more  flow- 
ing in  their  utterance  are  best  represented  by  curved 
or  flowing  lines,  except  R  which  has  assigned  to  it  the 
remaining  straight  upward  letter. 

2.  Continuants.— F,   V,   Th,  Dh,    S,  Z,  Sh,  Zh  are 
called  continuants  since  their  sounds  may  be  continued 
any  length  of  time.     They  are  produced  by  bringing 
one  organ  of  speech  close  to  another  but  not  in  con- 
tact  with  it   and  then    emitting   the  breath    between 
them. 

3.  Nasals. — M,  X  and  Ng  are  called  nasals  since  they 
are  produced  by  sending  the  breath  through  the  nose, 
the  organs  of  speech  previously  being  in  total  contact. 

4.  Liquids. — R  and  L  are  called  liquids   from  the 
fact  that  they  flow  into  or  unite  with  the  other  sounds. 
R,   like  the  continuants,   is  produced  by  b ringing  one 
organ  of  speech  close  to  another,   but  not  in  contact 
with  it  and  then  omitting  the  breath  between  them.    L 
is   produced  by  a  partial  contact   of   the  organs    of 
speech    and  then,   while    this  contact    is   maintained, 
expelling  the  breath 

a.  The  above  are  what  are  called  the  articulated 
sounds  of  the  alphabet,  or  consonants.  Four  more 
sounds  remain,  two  of  wrhich,  W  and  Y,  are  only  par- 
tially or  semi  articulated  and  hence  are  known  as  semi- 
consonants.  They  are  also  known  as  semi  vowels.  The 
other  two  sounds,  -f-  and  its  rough  mate  H,  are  not 
articulated.  Therefore  these  are  called  the  unarticu- 
lated  or  free  breathings,  or  simply  the  breathings. 

5.  Coalescents. — W    and    Y  are  used    only   before 
vowels  as  in   "we,  ye."     They  are  called    coalescents 


INTRODUCTIOX. 


bec;!viS3  they  closely  coalesce  with  them.  \V  and  Y 
have  a  medial  character  between  the  consonants  and 
vo \vels;  W  consisting  partly  of  a  sound  resembling 
tho  short  vowel  u  and  Y  partly  of  one  resembling  the 
short  vowel  i.  Thus  "way,  you"  are,  as  it  were, 
'•u(  w  )ay,  i(y)ou."'  For  this  reason  they  are  also  called 
semivowels.  W  and  Y  are  thus  always  preceded  by 
either  the  smooth  or  the  rough  breathing,  as  in  "way, 
yon,  whey,  hue  (hwey,  hyue),"  the  theoretical  spelling 
of  which  is  '<+ way  [+u(w)ay],  +  you  [  +  i(y)ou],  hwey 
[hufwjeyj,  hyue  [hi(y)ue]."  In  practical  spelling  in 
script  and  print  the  +  or  smooth  breathing  is  omitted 
the  same  as  it  is  in  words  commencing  with  a  vowel. 

(3.  Breathings. — The  smooth  and  rough  breathings, 
called  the  lene  and  aspirate,  are  not  articulated  and 
have  already  been  explained.  (See  page  11.) 

7.  Vowels. — The  vowels  are  produced  by  approx- 
imations of  the  organs  of  speech  and,  like  the  breath- 
ings, are  not  articulated. 

The  following  arrangement  exhibits  the  classifica- 
tion of  the  sounds  of  the  alphabet  both  according  to 
their  nature  or  quality  and  mode  of  formation.  It 
will  be  observed  that  the  latter  consists  of  three  di- 
visions termed  Labials,  Linguals  and  Gutterals.  F 
V  and  Th  Dh  are  also  sometimes  called  Dentals,  or  if 
great  precision  is  desired,  Labio-Dentals  and  Linguo- 
Dentals.  Furthermore,  the  linguals  (except  Th  and 
Dh  i  are  often  designated  Palatals,  the  front  and  middle 
ones  being  produced  by  the  hard  and  the  back  ones  by 
the  soft  palate.  Again,  Ch  and  J  are  theoretically 
considered  as  compound  sounds  composed  respectively 
of  TSh  and  DZh,  though  practically  they  are  deemed 
single  sounds  and  therefore  represented  with  single 
characters.  For  the  theory  of  the  vowel  arrangement 
the  learner  is  referred  to  the  author's  "System  of 
Phonoscript  and  Phonotypy"  mentioned  on  page  28 
hereafter. 


INTRODUCTION*. 


Labi- 
als. 

Linguals. 

Gut- 
terals 

Front 

Middle 

Buck 

1.  Explodents   -i  „ 
',  Heavy 

P 
B 

T 
D 

Ch 

J 

K 
Q 

2.  Continuants  \    *e 
;  Heavy 

F 
V 

Th        S 
Dh       Z 

Sh 
Zh 

3.  Nasals 

M 

N 

Kg 

4.  Liquids 

L 

R 

5.  Coalescents 

W 

Y 

6.  Breathings  f^en.e 
j  Aspirate 

H 

7.  Vowels       |?igh 

i  Low 

i    I 

ii  a 

e  e 
a  a 

u  u 

0    0 

PROLOGUE. 


LESSONS  AND  EXERCISES. 

The  engraved  lessons  and  exercises  illustrating  the 
text  of  the  Elementary  Style  begin  after  the  latter  on 
page  133  and  are  followed  by  a  printed  key  commenc- 
ing on  page  171.  The  former  are  called  Reading 
Lessons  and  Exercises  and  are  intended  to  be  read  and 
copied,  while  the  latter  are  designated  Writing  Les- 
sons and  Exercises  and  are  intended  to  be  written  from 
memory.  By  having  the  engravings  thus  grouped 
together  they  can  be  mastered  and  referred  to,  as  a 
whole,  much  better  than  if  they  were  scattered 
throughout  the  book.  The  figures  and  letters  in  heavy 
face  type  at  the  beginning  of  the  paragraphs  of  the 
text  refer  to  the  corresponding  characters  of  the 
engravings.  After  the  exercises  of  the  Elementary 
Style,  the  Reporting  Style  commences  followed  by 
reading  exercises  and  a  key  in  the  same  manner  as 
those  of  the  Elementary  Style. 

STENOSCRIPT  AND  STENOTYPY. 

Stenoscript  and  Stenotypy  are  methods  of  repre- 
senting phonography  by  ordinary  script  or  printed 
letters,  one  or  more  being  employed  for  each  phono- 
graph. When  thus  used  the  names  of  the  script  or 
printed  character  or  combination  and  that  of  its  cor- 
responding phonograph  are  the  same.  All  the  conso- 
nant stems  and  the  two  breath  dots  are  represented  by 
large  capitals  or  by  these  and  body  letters  combined. 
All  other  phonographic  characters,  as  will  hereafter 

28 


PRO:.; 


appear,  are  usually  represented  by  regular  or  italic 
body  letters  and,  occasionally  by  small  capitals.  The 
following  are  the  stenotypes  or  stenotypic  combina- 
tions for  the  phonographic  stems.  It  will  be  seen  that 
with  the  exception  of  the  fifth  in  the  second  line  they 
are  the  same  as  the  characters  already  given  in  the 
alphabet  on  page  17 

P,  B,  T,  D,  K,  G,  S,  Z,  M,  N,  Ng,  R,  L,  W,  Y. 
F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh. 

In  stenoscript  and  stenotypy  Ch  is  represented  by  C. 

In  this  -system  a  phonograph  is  usually  represented 
by  its  stenoscript  or  stenotypic  character  or  combina- 
tion and  not  by  its  name;  thus,  T  or  Th  and  not  Tee 
or  Thee. 

As  the  name  of  each  script  or  printed  combination 
is  the  same  as  its  phonograph  (see  the  first  paragraph 
above)  the  former  when  it  occurs  in  stenoscript  or 
stenotypy,  is  read  by  its  name  and  not  by  its  compo- 
nent parts.  Thus  Th  or  Dh  is  read  Thee  or  Dhee  and 
not  Tee  Haitch  or  Dee  Haitch. 

In  the  following  pages  the  phonographs  and  their 
stenotypic  representation  are  usually  given  together. 
Also  whatever  remarks  apply  to  stenotypy  generally 
apply  to  stenoscript. 

MATERIALS  FOR  WRITING. 

Shorthand,  like  longhand,  should  ordinarily  be 
written  on  ruled  paper,  though  paper  that  is  unruled 
may  be  employed  if  the  other  is  not  at  hand.  The 
paper,  whether  ruled  or  unruled,  should  generally 
have  a  "margin  on  the  left  of  about  one-half  to  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch.  If  no  marginal  line  exists  the 
learner  may  draw  one  either  with  a  ruler  or  off-hand 
or  confine  his  writing  to  these  limits,  or  legal  cap, 
cic.,  may  be  used.  Notes  or  corrections  in  regard  to 
anything  in  the  text  may  then  be  made  or  indicated  in 


PROLOGUE. 


the  margin  opposite— a  short  vertical  line,  if  no  mar- 
ginal one  exists,  being  drawn  between  the  two.  The 
same  course  may  be  pursued  if  a  note-book  is  em- 
ployed. 

The  learner  may  use  either  a  pen  or  pencil — prefer- 
ably a  pen  if  convenient.  If  a  pencil  is  employed  the 
lead  should  be  of  medium  hardness  and  rather  small 
diameter  so  as  to  form  the  outlines  clearly  without  too 
much  sharpening.  In  the  case  of  a  pen  any  one  which 
makes  a  fine  mark  without  scratching  is  suitable.  For 
ordinary  every  day  writing,  however,  a  gold  pen  is 
preferable  to  a  steel  one  since  it  is  more  durable  and 
does  not  corrode,  but  for  very  fine  writing  a  fine 
pointed  steel  pen  is  the  best.  The  ink  used,  if  it  can  be 
obtained  conveniently,  should  be  jet  black  when  put 
on  the  paper  and  flow  freely.  A  purple  or  violet  ink 
may  also  be  employed  if  preferred. 

METHOD  OF  HOLDING  THE  PEN  OR  PENCIL. 

> 

The  learner  can  hold  the  pen  or  pencil  in  whatever 
way  is  most  convenient  consistent  with  accuracy,  speed 
and  ease  and  change  from  one  way  to  another  if  the 
hand  or  wrist  becomes  fatigued,  but  he  should  always 
hold  it  lightly  so  that  (in  the  case  of  the  pen)  the  nib 
may  be  readily  turned  to  strike  the  characters  in  any 
direction  that  may  be  necessary.  Finally  neither  the 
pen  nor  pencil  should  be  lifted  up  too  high  between 
words,  but  only  enough  for  convenience  or  to  clear 
the  paper,  otherwise  much  time  will  be  unnecessarily 
lost. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  LEARNING  THE   LESSONS 
AND    EXERCISES. 

After  the  learner  has  read  arid  comprehended  tho 
first  lesson  as  given  in  the  text  and  engraving,  he  should 
read  tho  latter  and  then  proceed  to  copy  it,  making  tho 


2C  PnOLOGL'E. 

stems  as  nearly  as  possible  of  the  same  length  ::>  tho 
engraved  ones  which  throughout  this  book,  is  one- 
eighth  of  an  inch  between  the  ends  of  simple  perpendi- 
cular stems.  This  size  is  the  standard  one  for  this 
system.  Some  phonographers,  however,  employ  a 
larger  size  making  the  stems  as  above  about  five  thirty- 
seconds  or  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  and  a  few  much 
larger.  The  shaded  letters  should  not  be  made  too  heavy, 
but  simply  heavy  enough  to  distinguish  them  from  the 
light  ones.  The  learner  must  not  write  very  fast  :il 
first.  Speed  will  come  of  itself  when  least  expected. 

The  stems  sloping  downward  to  the  right  when 
occurring  alone  or  initially  are  written  at  an  angle  of 
forty -five  degrees  from  the  horizontal  and  those  down- 
ward to  the  left  at  one  of  sixty  degrees.  Sometimes, 
however,  when  they  occur  medially  or  finally  the 
former  are  written  at  thirty  and  the  latter  at  forty-five 
degrees.  Of  the  stems  sloping  upward  to  the  right 
R  and  L  when  they  occur  alone  are  written  at  thirty 
and  in  other  cases  usually  at  forty-five  degrees,  except 
that  R  before  M  and  after  N,  or  L  before  R  joined 
to  M  is  made  at  thirty  degrees.  Upward  Sh,  which 
never  occurs  alone,  as  will  be  hereafter  explained,  is 
usually  written  at  forty-five  degrees,  except  when  it 
occurs  before  R  followed  by  M,  when  it  is  written  at 
thirty  degrees.  All  the  remaining  letters  are  made 
either  perpendicularly  or  horizontally. 

The  above  is  the  general  rule  for  the  angles  of  the 
stems.  Frequently,  however,  in  rapid  or  careless  writ- 
ing they  vary  more  or  less  from  the  true  angles,  but 
not  enough  to  affect  their  legibility. 

If  preferred  the  downward  letters  to  the  left  may 
always  be  written  at  sixty  and  the  up  ward  ones  at  thirty 
degrees,  making  the  single  length  upward  stems  a  little 
longer  than  usual  before  single  length  downward  ones 
so  that  the  latter  may  be  made  their  full  length  and  at 
the  same  time  rest  on  the  line. 


PROLOGUE.  27 

When  the  learner  has  mastered  the  letters  of  the  first 
engraved  lesson  as  directed  above  he  may  write  them 
from  memory,  using  the  printed  lesson  or  key  of  the 
Writing  Exercises.  He  should  first  write  and  re-write 
the  latter  until  the  phonographic  characters  can  be 
formed  with  accuracy  and  ease.  He  should  then  read 
the  shorthand  thus  made  and  carefully  compare  it  with 
the  corresponding  matter  of  the  engraving. 

After  having  mastered  the  first  engraved  and  printed 
lessons  as  above  directed  the  learner  should  next  master 
in  the  same  way  the  first  engraved  and  printed  exer- 
cises which  follow  them.  The  same  process  should  be 
gone  through  with  for  every  subsequent  lesson  and 
exercise  in  the  book;  the  lessons  always  being  learned 
first. 

Finally  the  learner  should  be  careful  to  note  the 
forms  of  the  words  in  each  lesson  and  exercise  and  fix 
them  thoroughly  in  his  memory,  since  with  but  very 
few  exceptions  (which  will  give  him  no  trouble)  they 
are  all  employed  in  reporting. 

IS^T"  If  he  desires  the  learner  may  make  a  copy  of 
the  engraved  lessons  with  their  marginal  figures  and 
letters  for  speedy  reference  in  review.  For  which 
purpose  either  separate  sheets  of  paper  or  a  note-book 
may  be  employed. 

PHONETIC  SPELLING. 

In  phonography  most  words  are  spelled  phonetically, 
that  is  according  to  sound.  Thus  each  letter  has  one 
sound  and  no  more — the  same  as  the  notes  in  music — 
and  is  never  silent.  Accordingly  no  more  letters  are 
employed  in  a  word  than  there  are  sounds.  Words, 
therefore,  are  spelled  exactly  as  they  are  pronounced; 
as,  for  example,  "can"  and  "cent"  which  are  spelled 
"kan"  and  "sent." 

The  learner  is  recommended  to  procure  the  author's 


PROLOGUE. 

"System  of  Phonoscript  and  Phonotypy"  containing 
the  phonoscript  and  phonotypic  alphabets  ^  which,  as 
they  very  closely  resemble  the  ordinary  ones  (from  the 
fact  that  they  contain  nearly  all  of  the  old  letters)  will 
enable  him  in  a  few  hours  to  write  and  read  phonetic- 
ally with  the  same  facility  as  in  the  ordinary  script  and 
print.  This  accomplishment  will  greatly  assist  him  in 
mastering  phonography,  since  the  spelling  in  the  latter 
and  in  'phonoscript  and  phonotypy  is  mostly  the  same. 

THE    LEGIBILITY    OF    PRINT,    SCRIPT    AND 
PHONOGRAPHY. 

When  uncial,  cursive  and  single  line  writing — in 
other  words  print,  script  and  phonography — are  equally 
well  executed  their  legibility  is  in  the  order  given;  the 
reason  for  which  is  that  their  speed  is  in  the  reverse 
order  While,  therefore,  phonography,  considered  as 
a  system  of  shorthand  is  very  legible,  it  is  not  so  much 
so  as  script,  and,  consequently,  as  print. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 

THE  ELEMENTARY  STYLE. 


CHAPTER   I. 

THE  CONSONANTS  AND  BREATHINGS. 


LESSON  1. 
THE  CONSONANTS. 


THE    SMOOTH    CONSONANTS. 

1.  There  are  fifteen  articulated  smooth  breathings 
or  smooth  consonants  in  the  English  language  repre- 
sented in  roman  print  as  follows  ;  namely,  P,  B,  T,  D, 
K,  G,  S,  Z,  M,  N,  Ng,  R,  L,  W,  Y.  They  are  repre- 
sented in  phonography  by  straight  and  curved  lines — 
the  latter  being  quarter  circles- — as  in  the  engraving, 
page  133,  line  1  and  in  the  alphabet,  or  peebeta,  page 
17.  The  names  of  the  phonographs  or  stems  are 
respectively  Pee,  Bee,  Tee,  Dee,  Kee,  Gee  (or  Kay, 
Gay),  See  (or  Ess),  Zee,  Mee,  Nee,  Eeng  (or  Em,  En, 
Eng),  Ilee,  Lee,  Wee,  Yee.  The  characters  for  the 
heavy  sounds  are  shaded — those  for  B,  D  and  G  through- 
out and  that  for  Z  in  the  middle,  tapering  at  each  end." 
The  phonograph  for  the  palatal  nazal  Ng  is  also  shaded 
in  the  middle  the  same  as  that  for  Z.  The  phono- 
graphs for  li  and  L  are  made  upward. 


.'JO  THE   PHONOGRAPH  If    MAXL'AT.. 

THK    HOUGH    CONSONANTS. 

2.  Each  of  the  articulated  smooth  breathings,  or  con- 
sonants, P,  B,  T,  D,  K,  G,  8,  Z,  eight  in  number,  has 
its  corresponding  articulated  rough  breathing  or  con- 
sonant ;  namely,  F,  V,  Th,  Dh,  Ch,  J,  Sh,  Zh,   repre- 
sented as  in  the  engraving,  line  2,  and  in  the  alphabet, 
or  peebeta.      The  names  of  the  phonographs  or  stems 
are  respectively,  Fee  (or  Ef),  Vee,  Thee,   Dhee,  Chee, 
Jee  (or  Chay,  Jay),  Shee,  Zhee.    The  character  for  the 
heavy  sound  J  is  shaded  throughout,  but  the  characters 
for  V,  Dh  and  Zh  are  shaded  in  the  middle,   tapering 
at  each  end  the  same  as  that  for  Z.      The  two  semi- 
articulated  smooth  consonants  W  and  Y  have  also  their 
corresponding   semi-articulated    rough    breathings    or 
consonants  HWand  HY.  The  phonographs  for  the  latter 
are  shaded  from  the   beginning  in  order  to  represent 
the  aspirate  sound  and  are  named  respectively  Hwee 
and  Hyee.      (See  the  last  two  phonographs  in  line  2). 

3.  In  a  stenoscript  and  stenotypy  small  cap  H  indi- 
cates an  initial  shading  of  the  phonograph  of  the  letter 
before  which  it  is  placed  and  is  named  Hotch,  while 
its  sound  is  usually  pronounced  in  the  same  syllable, 
as  in  Hwee  and  Hvee  (see  sec.  2)  which  are  stenotyped 
nW  and  nY. 

LESSOX  2. 

STEMS    STANDING    ALONE    OR    JOINED. 

4.  When  phonographic  stems  are  written  alone  they 
rest  on  the  line,    except  K  and  G  which  are  placed 
slightly  above  so  as  not  to  be  confused  with  it.      (See 
also  lines  1  and  2). 

5.  In  joining  two  or  more  stems  the  learner  must 
make  one  after  the    other    without    lifting  the  pen, 
each  following  stem  beginning  where  the  preceding  one 
ends,   no  matter  how  far  above  or  below  the  line  the 
writing  may  extend. 


Till-:    PHONOGRAPHIC    M  \\IA1.  3] 

P>.  Iii  stenoscript  and  slenotvpy  the  letters  usually 
follow  one  another  the  same  as  in  script  and  print  with- 
out anything  between  them.  Sometimes,  as  will 
eventually  be  explained,  a  hyphen  is  placed  between 
two  letters  to  indicate  some  peculiarity  of  the  phono- 
graphic writing — usually  a  joining  of  characters  that 
are  ordinarily  written  disjoined. 

7.  When  a  straight  letter  follows  another  in  the 
same  direction  the  two  are  joined  together  forming  a 
double  length  letter.     When  one  of  them  is  heavy  the 
double  length  is  shaded  at  the  end  or  beginning  accord- 
ing as  the  heavy  letter  follows  or  precedes  the  light 
one.      Downward  double  length  letters  are  written  with 
the  first  half  on  the  line  and  the  second  half  below  it. 
Upward  and  horizontal  double  length  letters  are  made 
on  the  line.      (See  sec.  4). 

8.  A  horizontal  letter  is  written  on  the  line  when 
it  is  followed  by  an  upward  one  and  (a)  above  the  line 
when  followed  by  a  downward  one  so  that  the  latter 
may  rest  on  the  line. 

1.  The  learner  will  perceive  in  the  course  of  his 
progress  that  the  stems  sometimes  vary  in  length  or 
curvature,  or  both,  in  order  to  keep  them  on  the  line 
or  to  facilitate  joining. 

9.  When   one    horizontal   letter    is    followed    by 
another  both  rest  on  the  line  (except  KX  or  NK  where 
only  the  N  can  be  so  written)   unless  (a)  the  second  is 
followed  by  a  downward  one,  in  which  case  both  the 
first  and  second  are  made  above  the  line.      The  same 
principle  is  followed  when  three  or  more  horizontal 
letters  precede  a  downward  stem. 

1 0.  When  a  downward  letter  commences  a  word  or 
combination  of  letters  it  rests   upon  the  line,  except 
Avhen  N  is  the  second  letter,  in  which  case  the  latter 
rests  on  the  line.    (a).  When  a  heavy  curved  letter  is 
joined  to  a  heavy  straight  one  without  an  angle  it  is 


;;_'  THE  PiioxoGUAPiiir  MANTAL. 

made  heavy  at  the  point  of  junction  as  well  as  in  the 
middle.      (See  the  joinings  BZ  and  VG). 

LESSON   3. 

W    AND    Y    USED    FOli    K    AND    L. 

11.  W  and  Y  being  semivowels  can  never  follow  a 
vowel  in  the  same  syllable;  and  being  semiconsonants 
can  never  follow  another  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
syllable,  they  having  no  final  utterance  of  their  own. 
Consequently,  they  can  never  end  a  syllable  or  word, 
being  in  this  respect  different  from  both  vowels  and 
consonants. 

1 2.  The  above  being  true,  their  phonographic  forms 
can  be  used  at  the  end  of  syllables  and  words  for  those 
full  consonants  which  are  nearest  to  them  in  utterance, 
namely  R  and  L.      When  so  employed  they  are  named 
either  Downward  Ar  or  El  or  simply  Air  and  Ail, 
their  stenotypes  being  7?  and  L.    They  are  never  writ- 
ten alone  or  initially  or  as  the  first  stems  in  words  so 
as  not  to  conflict  with  W  and  Y. 

13.  The  regular  phonographic  letters  are  indicated 
in  'stenoscript  and  stenotypy  by  regular    script   and 
print  letters  (see  Prologue,  page  23),  but  when  they 
have  alternate  forms  the  latter  are  usually  indicated  in 
italics  as  in  the  last  section. 

14.  If  desired  the   strokes  W  and  Y  when  they 
occur  in  the  final  syllable  of  a  word  of  two  or  more 
syllables  may  be  distinguished  from  the  downward  R 
and  L  strokes  by  shading  them  in  the  middle  tapering 
at  each  end,  but  this  will  seldom  be  necessary.     When 
thus  used,    however,  they  are  named  "Way  and  Yay, 
their  stenotypes  being  W  and  Y. 

Y    AND    UPWARD    L. 

16.     Y  and  upward  L  thus  have  similar    forms. 
When  alone  the  stems  are  known  by  their  ditlc-rcncc  of 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  ;>;> 

inclination,  the  down  stroke  verging  more  toward  the 
perpendicular  and  the  up  one  toward  the  horizontal, 
the  former  being  at  an  angle  of  sixty  and  the  latter  at 
one  of  thirty  degrees.  When  joined  to  other  letters 
they  are  distinguished  by  the  direction  they  take  to  or 
from  the  point  of  junction.  (See  Prologue,  page  26.) 
a.  If  preferred  upward  L  may  be  written  at  thirty 
degrees  after  N. 

UPWARD    AND    DOWNWARD    L. 

16.  L  also  thus  has  two  similar  forms  made  up  or 
down.     When  L  is  written  alone  the  upward  form  is 
always  used.      When  joined  to  other  letters  either  form 
is  distinguished  by  the  direction  it  takes  to  or  from 
the  point  of  junction.     (See  Prologue,  page  26.) 

CH    AND    UPWARD    R. 

17.  Ch  and  upward  R  must  not  be  mistaken  for 
each  other.     These  two  letters  have  a  resemblance  in 
the  same  manner  as  do  Y  and  upward  L  (see  sec.  15); 
Ch  when  alone  being  at  an  angle  of  sixty  and  R  at  one 
of  thirty  degrees  from  the  horizontal.      When  joined 
to  other  letters,  the  distinction  between  them  is  appar- 
ent from  their  course  to  or  from  thepointof  junction. 
(See  Prologue,  page  26.) 

UPWARD    AND    DOWNWARD    SH. 

1 8.  Sh  also  has  two  similar  forms  made  up  or  down; 
the  downward  form  when  alone  or  initial  being  written  at 
sixty  degrees,  which  is  also  usually  the  case  when  it 
occurs  medially  or  finally.     The  upward  character  is 
usually  written  at  forty-five  degrees  and  never  occurs 
alone.     (See  Prologue,  page  26.)     Upward  Zh  is  sel- 
dom employed.     The  upward  stems  are  named  Shay 
and  Zhay  and  are  indicated  in  stenotypy  by  8h  and  Zh. 

a.     If  preferred  upward  Sh  may  be  made  at  thirty 


•M  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MAXr.U.. 

degrees  before  M  and  after  N,  the  same  as  upward  R. 
t^See  page  20  and  also  sec.  15,  a.) 

b.  If  upward  Sh  were  to  be  written  alone  it  would 
be  made  at  thirty  degrees  the  same  as  upward  li  and  L. 

19.  Whatever  observations  apply  to  a  light  letter 
in  the  pages  of  this  book  usually  apply  also  to  the  cor- 
responding heavy  one.     Thus,  for  example,  the  rules 
in  the  first  two  sentences  of  the  last  section  apply  also 
to  the  heavy  letter  Zh  or  Zh. 

LESSON   4. 

STRAIGHT  AND  CURVED  STEMS  JOINED  AT  RIGHT    ANGLES. 

20.  When  a  straight  and  a  curved  stem  are  joined 
at  right  angles  to  each  other,  if  the  angle  is  on  the 
inside  of  the  curve,  it  should  be  distinctly  defined. 
There  are  twelve  such  junctions  in  phonography  as  in 
the  engraving. 

a.  It  will  be  observed,  in  accordance  with  the 
remarks  in  the  Prologue,  page  26,  that  Sh  and  Ch 
after  P  and  W  are  written  at  forty-five,  while  F  and  P 
after  Ch  and  Y  are  made  at  thirty  degrees.  (See  also 
Sh  after  Wj  and  F  after  Y  in  engraving  21,  line  2. 

STEMS    JOINED    WITHOUT    ANGLES. 

21.  The  three  lines  of  engraving  21  contain  all  the 
junctions  without  angles  in  phonography.     They  are 
thirty  in  number.      A  straight  line  running   into  a 
curve  has  no  angle  with  that  curve.      When  a  straight 
line  will  run  into  or  form  a  curve  or  a  curve  will  make 
a  half  circle  with  another  curve,  or  run  into  an  opposite 
one  it  is  joined  without  an  angle.    Every  other  junction 
of  a  straight  line  and  a  curve  is  made  with  an  angle 
greater  or  less. 

a.  Some  of  the  junctions  above,  such  as  Y  with 
T  and  S  with  Ch  would  not  be  without  angles  if  the 
curves  were  strictly  quarter  circles,  since  Y  andCh  are 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  '],") 

made  at  sixty  instead  of  forty-five  degrees.  In  such 
cases  the  curves  are  slightly  flattened  so  as  to  eliminate 
the  angle.  Again  the  junction  of  N  with  M  or  the 
reverse — both  being  written  on  the  line — is  effected  by 
slightly  flattening  both  stems  at  or  near  the  point  of 
junction.  (See  also  sec.  8,  1.) 

b.  If  the  upward  letters  are  always  made  at  thirty 
degrees  (see  page  26,  last  paragraph),  upward  L  and 
W  and  F  and  upward  Sh  would  also  be  slightly  flat- 
tened at  or  near  the  point  of  junction  in  order  to  elim- 
inate the  angle. 

22.  As  upward  R  is  made  before  M  and  after  N 
at  thirty  degrees   (See  Prologue,    page  20)    it    must 
always  be  joined  to  them  with  an  angle.    Furthermore 
it  is  also  necessarily  joined  with  an  angle  to  every  other 
curved  letter.     The  remarks  above,  therefore,  in  ref- 
erence to  straight  lines  running  into  or  from  curves  do 
not  apply  to  upward  li  for  the  reason  that  in  phono- 
graphy the  latter  does  not  run  into  or  from  any  curved 
letter.      (See  also  the  last  diagram  on  page  15  of  the 
Introduction. ) 

M    SHADED    FOR    MP    OR    MB. 

23.  The  letter  M  shaded  in  the  middle  stands  for 
Mp  or  Mb.     If  at  any  time  there  would  be  danger  of 
conflict  between  the  two  the  latter  may  be  written  in 
full  with  the  stems  M  and  B. 

2-i.  The  name  for  M  shaded  as  above,  whether  rep- 
resenting Mp  or  Mb,  is  Meep  (or  Eemp)  and  its  steno- 
types  are  Mp. 

a.  If  the  learner  prefers  he  may  employ  the 
shaded  M  stem  to  represent  Mp  only  and  write  Mb 
with  the  two  stems  M  and  B. 

FOREIGN    CONSONANTS. 

25.  Any  consonant  peculiar  to  a  foreign  language 
may  be  indicated  by  striking  through  the  nearest  cor- 


36  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

responding  English  one  at  right  angles  to  it  a  small 
character  like  the  Roman  S.  Such  are  the  light  and 
heavy  gutterals  Kh,  Ch  and  Ge  or  Gh  heard  in  the 
Russian,  German  and  other  languages; also  the  Welsh 
LI,  French  N  and  Italian  R,  as  in  the  following  words: 
Russian,  Kharkov;  German,  ich,  einige;  Scotch,  loch; 
Irish,  lough;  Welsh,  Llan;  French,  bonmot;  Italian, 
amor.  They  may  be  designated  either  by  their  for- 
eign names  or  by  their  English  ones  as  just  given. 
Their  stenotypes  are  the  nearest  corresponding  English 
letters  enclosed  in  quotation  points;  thus,  "K,"  "G," 
"L,"  "N,"  "R"  or  "7?."  The  foreign  consonant 
mark  is  not  always  employed. 

THE  BREATHING. 

26.  As  the  learner  has  read  in  the  Introduction 
the   sounds   of  speech  are   made   by  the  breathings, 
smooth   or   rough.      The   smooth    breath   or   lene   is 
represented  by  a  light  dot  and  the  rough  breath  or 
aspirate  by  a  heavy  one.     When  used  alone  the  dots 
are  written  on  the  line     The  names  of  the  dots  are 
Eetch  and  Heetch  (or  Aitch  and  Haitch)  respectively, 
and  their  stenotypes  are  -{-  and  H. 

27.  The  rough  breathing  may  also  be  represented 
by  two  ticks  one  shaded  throughout  and  made  down- 
ward in  the  direction  of  J  and  the  other  light  and  made 
upward  in  that  of  R  and  named  respectively  Hetch  and 
Hutch;  their  stenotypes  being  h  and  k.    They  are  used 
only  initially  in  connection  with  consonant  stems  and 
never  stand  alone,  the  dot  then  being  employed  instead 
as  stated  in  section  26.     The  downward  tick  joins  best 
with  M,  Mp,  W,  S,  downward  Sh  and  upward  L;  the 
upward  one  with  the  opposite  curves  N,  Ng,  F,  Th,  Y 
and  upward  Sh.     The  latter,  however,  is  seldom  used, 
and  then  never  when  upward  Sh  stands  alone.     On 
straight  stems  the  downward  tick  joins  best  with  K 
and  upward  R  and  the  upward  one  with  the  downward 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  37 

forms  P,  T  and  Ch.  Both  ticks  are  always  pro- 
nounced separately  from  the  stems  to  which  they  are 
attached;  thus  hM  and  AN  and  uttered  Hetch  Mee 
and  Hutch  Nee. 

a.  The  smooth  breathing  may  also  be  represented, 
if  desired,   by  two  light  characters,  the  one  a  down- 
ward tick  in  the  direction  of  Ch  and  the  other  an  up- 
ward short  quarter  circle  curve,  called  a  curvet,  in  the 
direction  of  Sh  and  of  the  same  length  between  the 
ends  as  the  tick;  but  these  are  not  usually  necessary  in 
ordinary  writing.       Their   names  and   stenotypes  are 
Etch,  Utch  (  +etch,  +utch)  and  -f,  -j-. 

1.  If  preferred  -j-  may  be  represented  by  two  light 
ticks  made  downward  and  upward  in  the  direction  of 
Ch  and  R,  and  H  by  two  heavy  ones  in  that  of  J  and 
K  (See,  however,  par.  b). 

b.  Upward  +  and  II  as  in  paragraph  a  are  repres- 
ented by  light  strokes  and  distinguished  by"  different 
forms  for  stenographic  convenience  since  it  is  usually 
somewhat  difficult  to  shade  an  upward  letter.      In  all 
other  cases  -f-  and  II  have  tho  same  forms,   but  are 
distinguished  by  shading.      Upward  +  and  H  are  thus 
distinguished  according  to  the  same  principle  as  the 
script  and  printed  forms. 

c.  When  the  downward  ticks  occur  before  R.  and 
L  standing  alone  the  latter  are  written  at  an  angle  of 
thirty  degrees. 

28.  The  H  ticK  on  W  and  Y  is  never  employed  in 
the  same  syllable  with  the  latter.     If  extra  distinction 
is  desired  on  nW  or  nY  (see  sec.  3),  the  aspirate  dot 
may   be  placed   before  the  center   in  addition  to  the 
initial  shading  of  the  stem.     This,  howerer,  will  not 
often  be   necessary.      The  H  tick  is  also   never   em- 
ployed on  downward  R  and  L  (See  sec.  12). 

29.  The  learner  will  understand  in  regard  to  "W 
and  Y  as  was  explained  in  the  Introduction,  page  20, 
paragraphs  4,  a  and  5,  that  the  letter  W  stands  for 

452204 


38  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

the  sounds  +W  and  the  letter  Y  for  the  sounds  -r  Y; 
that  is  ~\V  and  Y  are  semi-consonants  uttered  with  the 
smooth  breathing.  Consequently  they  can  take  the 
rough  breathing  H.  In  other  words  the  smooth 
breathing  can  be  changed  into  the  rough;  as  in  the 
rough  breath  semi-consonant  sounds  HW  and  HY  in 
section  2  and  line  2. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  39 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE   VOWELS,   SEMIVOWELS,    ETC. 


LESSON  5. 
THE  VOWELS. 


THE  SMOOTH    VOWELS. 

SO.  The  English  language  contains  six  short, 
smooth  breath  vowels  as  heard  in  the  words  "is,  ell, 
Uz,  ask,  at,  odd."  They  are  named  by  uttering  them 
alone,  as  follows:  i,  e,  u,  a,  a,  o;  or  if  this  is  at  first 
found  difficult,  by  attaching  to  them  the  letter  t,  as  in 
the  following;  namely,  "it,  et,  ut,  at,  at,  ot."  It  is 
preferable,  however,  to  sound  them  alone  without  any 
consonant.  Sounding  them  thus  is  naming  them.  The 
sound  should  not  be  cut  off,  as  it  were,  or  stopped 
suddenly,  when  uttered  alone,  but  should  be  prolonged 
to  its  full  utterance  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  the  long 
vowels,  which  will  presently  be  considered. 

3 1 .  From  the  engraving  and  alphabet,  or  peebeta, 
(pages  133  and  ITi,  it  will  be  seen  that  they  are  rep- 
resented by  small  light  half  circles  and  ticks  or  dashes 
(the  former  standing  for  the  high  and  the  latter  for 
the  low  vowels)  each  of  which  is  always  made  in  its 
own  proper  direction;  namely,  that  of  the  full  sized 
stem  which  corresponds  or  most  nearly  corresponds 
to  it  in  form.  All  the  characters  are  usually  made  of 


40  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

the  same  length  and  may  be  written  alone  or  joined  to 
one  another  or  to  other  letters,  as  will  hereafter  appear. 
Their  stenotypes  are  the  small  body  letters  above  given, 
a.  If  preferred  the  dashes  may  be  made  a  little 
longer  than  the  semicircles  when  separated  from  the 
latter  by  other  letters. 

32.  Each  of  the  vowel  phonographs  except  e  has 
an  alternative  form  which  is  employed  >vhen  the  regular 
one  will  not  join  conveniently,  the  stenotypes  being  in 
italics  as  in  the  following.     Thus  i  is  made  in  the  di- 
rection of  downward  Sh,  u  in  that  of  M,  a  downward 
at  an  angle  of  thirty  instead  of  forty- five  degrees,  a 
upward  in  the  direction  of  R  and  o  downward  in  that 
of  Ch. 

33.  Each  of  the  six  short  smooth  vowels  explained 
in  section  30  has  its  corresponding  long  smooth  vowel. 
These  are  represented  like  the  others,  except  that  the 
characters  are  shaded  at  the  end  to  indicate  their  long 
sound,  as  heard  in  the  words  "eyes,  eel,  ooze,  art,  ate, 
ode."     They  are  named  by  uttering  them  alone,  as 
follows :     I,   e,   u,   a,   a,   6.     In  the  third  vowel  the 
sound  is  given  as  in  the  word  "ooze"  and  not  as  in  the 
verb   "use,"  or  the  noun  "union;"  that  is  to  say  the 
Y  sound  is  omitted.     They  are  represented  in  stenotypy 
as  above,  the  alternates  being  in  italics. 

a.  The  learner  is  informed  that  the  terms  Short 
and  Long  as  applied  to  the  vowels  above  are  merely 
conventional  ones  and  do  not  strictly  express  the  rela- 
tion between  them,  since  they  have  no  reference  to 
the  duration  of  the  sound.  For  example  the  vowel 
e  as  in  "  ell "  may  be  shortened  or  prolonged  to  the 
same  extent  as  that  of  e  as  in  "eel."  (See  sec.  30). 
Consequently  all  the  vowels  are  of  the  same  nature  as 
the  notes  on  a  piano,  or  other  musical  instrument, 
which  may  be  abbreviated  or  lengthened  at  will.  In 
the  author's  l '  System  of  Phonoscript  and  Phonotypy" 
(see  Prologue,  page  28)  the  vowels  are  distinguished 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  41 

according  to  the  positions  of  their  utterance  (see  Pre- 
face, page  6),  the  short  vowels  being  termed  Fore  and 
the  long  ones  Aft.  And  as  they  are  also  distinguished 
as  High  and  Low  (see  Introduction,  table,  page  22), 
each  one  can  be  definitely  located.  Thus  o  as  in  "ell" 
is  the  high-mid-fore  and  e  as  in  "eel"  the  high-mid-aft 
vowel,  while  o  as  in  ' '  odd  "  is  the  low-back-fore  and  o 
as  in  "ode,"  the  low-back-aft  vowel,  and  so  on  for  the 
others.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  while  the  short  and 
long  (fore  and  aft)  vowels  of  each  locality  have  a 
certain  resemblance  to  each  other  it  does  not  consist 
in  their  being  the  short  and  long  sounds  of  the  same 
vowel. 

b.  The  long  vowel  u,  as  in  paragraph  33,  is  first 
drawn  with  the  light  form  and  then  without  lifting  the 
pen  or  pencil  is  shaded  downward  at  the  end.  If, 
preferred,  however,  it  may  be  shaded  in  the  middle. 

34.  There  are  three  smooth  diphthongs  in  the  English 
language  as  heard  in  the  words  "out,  oil,  Cruick  shank" 
or  "good."     A  diphthong  is  the  "union  of  two  vowel 
sounds  in  one  syllable"  and  is  produced  by  sounding 
one  vowel  quickly  after  another.     They  are  each  repre- 
sented   by    two   letters,    namely,   ou,    oi,   ui,  and  are 
named  from  their  sounds  alone.     They  are  made  in 
phonography  the  same  as  in  script  and  print  by  joining 
the  two  letters  of  which  they  are  composed.     In  the 
case  of  ou  the  phonograph  for  u  is  reversed  in  the 
direction  of  M.      In  that  of  oi  the  o  is  inclined  in  the 
direction  of  Ch  and  the  i  made  in  the  direction  of  up- 
ward Sh,    while  in  that  of   ui  the  i  is  written  in  the 
direction  of  downward  Sh.     (See  sec.  32).     The  steno- 
types  for  the  phonographs  are  on,  oi,  ui. 

35.  The  learner  is  instructed  that  the  proper  repre- 
sentation of  on  is  with  the  long  u  as  in  ou ;  but  it  is 
represented  in  the  present  script  and  print  for  conven- 
ience by  the  short  u. 


42  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

THE    ROUGH    VOWELS. 

36.  Each  of  the  twelve  smooth  vowels  and  the  three 
smooth  diphthongs  above  explained  has  its  corresponding 
rough  vowel  or  diphthong.     The  latter  are  represented 
like  the  former  except  that  they  are  shaded  at  the  be- 
ginning to  indicate  their  rough  sound.      In  consequence 
of  this  the  rough  long  vowels  are  shaded  their  full 
length. 

37.  The  short  rough  vowels  are  hi,  he,  hu,  ha,  ha, 
ho,   and  are  heard  in  the  words    "his,   head,  hu/zy, 
hasp,   hat,  hod. "     The  long  rough  vowels  are  hi,  he, 
hu,  ha,  ha,  ho,  as  heard  in  the  words    "hies,   heed, 
whose,   hart,   hate,  hoed. v     The  rough  diphthongs  are 
hou,  hoi,    hui,    as    heard  in   the  words    "how,    hoy, 
hook."     They  are  shaded  only  at  the  beginning  of  the 
first  letter.     The  stenotypes  for  the  rough  vowels  and 
diphthongs  are  the  same  as   the  smooth    ones  except 
that  the  small  capital    H  (see  sec.  3)  is  placed  before 
them  to  represent  the  shading  for  the  aspirate;  thus, 
HOW,   noij   urn. 

38.  In   practical    writing   the    rough    vowels    and 
diphthongs,    as   well  as  the  smooth  long  vowels,  are 
frequently  left  unshaded.      In  such    cases  the  sense  of 
the    writing  usually  distinguishes  them  apart.      (See 
also  Prologue,  page  26  and  sec.  27,  a  and  Remarks  on 
the  Alphabet  in  the  Introduction,  page  18.) 

THE    ASPIRATE    AND    LONG    VOWEL    DOTS. 

39.  If  at  any  time  the  initial  or  final  shading  for 
the  aspirate  or    long  vowel  should  not  be  considered 
sufficiently   distinct   either  may    bo   additionally   dis- 
tinguished  by  writing  before  or  above  a  vo\yel  the 
heavy  dot  for  the  aspirate  and  after  or  under  it  a  heavy 
dot  for  the  long  sound.   This,  however,  will  not  often  bo 
necessary.     The  learner  will  observe  that  the  dots  are 
made  before  or  after  perpendicular  or  inclined  vowels 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   .MANUAL.  43 

and  above  or  under  horizontal  ones,  whether  straight  or 
curved.  They  may  be  placed  opposite  either  the  be- 
ginning, center  or  end  of  the  characters.  Usually, 
however,  when  the  vowels  stand  alone,  they  are  writ- 
ten opposite  the  center.  The  lene  and  the  short  vowel 
may  also  be  indicated  by  light  dots  in  the  same  man- 
ner, if  desired,  but  these,  the  same  as  the  -f-  tick  and 
curvet  (see  sec.  27,  a)  are  never  necessary  in  ordinary 
writing,  except  that  the  lene  dot  is  sometimes  used  to 
represent  the  substitution  of  the  smooth  for  the  rough 
breath  as  in  the  dialecticisms  "-t-e"  and  "+a"  (indi- 
cated in  the  present  script  and  print  by  "V  and 
"'ay1')  for  "he"  and  "hay."  Usually,  however,  when 
no  error  would  be  liable  to  occur,  the  smooth  vowel 
without  the  lene  dot  is  then  employed.  (See  the  last 
four  examples  in  line  39.) 

40.  The  stenotype  for    the  long  vowel  dot  is  an 
inverted  period  placed  after  the  stenotype  or  stenotpyes 
for  the  vowel,  all  enclosed  in  brackets;  thus  [a-],  [Ha-]. 

a.  The  lene  and  aspirate  dots  are  always  pro- 
nounced separately  from  the  letters  before  which  they 
are  placed;  thus,  -fe  and  He  are  uttered  Eeetch  Eee 
and  Heetch  Eee. 

JOINED    VOWELS. 

41.  Two  or  more  vowels  may  be  joined  together 
the  same  as  are  the   diphthongs  6r  consonant  stems, 
(a).     The  dots  for  the  aspirate  and  the  long  sound— 
the  lene  and  short  vowel  dots  never  being  necessary 
in  ordinary  writing  except  as  explained  in  section  39 
— may  then    be  placed,   when   they  occur  outside  the 
angles,  opposite  the  beginning,  center  or  end  of  each 
vowel.     Usually,  however,  they  are  written  opposite 
the  center.     When  they  occur  inside  the  angles  they 
are  written   opposite  the  beginning   or    end   of  each 
vowel  except  in  the    case  of  the  middle  vowels  when 
they    are    placed     opposite    the    center.        In    other 


44  THE  PHONOGRAP'S'lC  MANUAL. 

words  the  interior  dots  are  always  kept  away 
from  the  angles  for  if  written  within  or  near 
them  it  is  not  always  certain  to  which  vowel 
they  belong.  The  learner  will  also  observe  that 
the  long  vowel  dot  is  always  placed  after  the  vowel. 
Jt  is  thus  distinguished  from  the  aspirate  dot  which  is 
placed  before  it. 

b.  When  the  vowels  ft  or  hi  or  the  corresponding 
long  ones  follow  each  other  they  are  usually  disjoined 
and  written  close  together.      In  the  similar  case  of  the 
other  tick  vowels  the    alternative  forms  are  usually 
employed. 

c.  Any  two  or  more  vowels  composing  a  word,  or 
the  two  vowels  of  a  diphthong,  may  be  disjoined  and 
written  close  together.      In  every  case  the  aspirate  and 
long  vowel  dots  may  be  inserted  as  usual. 

d.  Any  two  vowels  whatever  may  be  joined  by 
using   the   alternative   forms.       (See    third    line     of 
Reading  Exercise,    30  to  48,   and   also  paragraph  e 
below. 

e.  If  two  vowels  would  be  liable  to  make  an  indis- 
tinct joining  in  rapid  writing  as  ft  or  ha  and  the   alter- 
nate for  either  (see  par.  b)  or  e  and  the  upward  alter- 
native form  for  '  'a, "  it  is  usually  better  to  write  them 
separately. 

42.  To  indicate  in  stenotypy  that  two  phonographs 
are  disjoined  and  written  close  together  an  inverted 
semicolon  is  placed  between  them;  thus,  ftift 

43.  The  learner  will  not  have  much  occasion  to  join 
the  vowels,    smooth  or  rough,   together   alone,  since 
there  are  not  more  than  five  or  six  words  in  English, 
consisting  of  more  than  one  syllable,  that  are  composed 
wholly  of  smooth  vowels  and  they  are  of  such  rare 
occurrence  as  to  be  used,  even  by  the  busiest  speakers 
and  writers,  on  an  average,  perhaps  hot   more  than 
twice  or  thrice  in  a  lifetime,  if  that  of  ten.      There  are 
also  very  few  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  coin- 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL  45 

posed  wholly  of  rough  vowels  or  of  smooth  and  rough 
ones  combined. 

44-.  All  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  above  mentioned 
both  smooth  and  rough  when  written  alone  are  invar- 
iably placed  upon  or  near  the  line  of  writing  in  the 
same  manner  as  are  the  stem  letters.  (See  sec.  4.) 
This  is  also  the  case  with  all  words  composed  wholly 
of  vowels. 

VOCALIZATION. 

45.  When  the  vowels  or  diphthongs  occur  in  con- 
nection   with    consonants  they    are  written   disjoined 
beside  the  stems — which  process  is  termed  Vocaliza- 
tion— and  may  be  placed  opposite  the  beginning,  center 
or  end  according  to  convenience.     When  so  written 
they  are  said  to  be  in  the  first,  second  and  third  posi- 
tions respectively.     Usually,  however,  they  are  writ- 
ten in  the  second  position,  that  is  opposite  the  centers 
of  the  stems. 

46.  In  stenotypy  the  position  of  a  phonographic 
vowel  or  diphthong  as  above  is  indicated  by  a  small 
superior  figure  1  or  3  placed  after  its  stenotype  accord- 
ing as  it  is  in  the  first  or  third  position.     When  no 
figure  appears  it  is  understood  to  be  in  the  second  posi- 
tion.    Thus,  Po1,  Po3,  Po. 

47.  When  a  vowel  is  placed  on  the  left  or  upper 
side  of  a  stem  it  is  read  before  it,  when  on  the  right  or 
under  side  it  is  read  after  it.     Two  or  more  vowels, 
smooth  or  rough,  coming  together  in  a  word  are  joined 
or  disjoined  the  same  as  when  alone.     When  "a"  fol- 
lows e  they  may  be  joined  without  an  angle  if  preferred. 
This,  however,  should  not  be  done  when  e  and  "a"1 
stand  alone.      When  e  and   "a"  are  thus  joined  with- 
out the  angle  it  is  seldom  necessary  to  shade  the  e  for 
the  long  sound.     The  aspirate  and  long  sound  may  in 
all  cases  also  be  distinguished  by  the  heavy  dots  if 
necessary. 


40  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    .MANl'AI. 

:i.  .  The  letters  T  and  K  in  engraving  47  are  em- 
ployed merely  to  show  the  manner  of  writing  the  vow- 
els to  the  stems,  whether  the  syllables  thus  formed 
constitute  regular  words  or  not. 

48.  In  words  of  two  stems  the  second  place  or 
position  (see  sec.  45)  of  the  second  stem  will  ordinar- 
ily   be    more    readily    used    than    the    second    place 
of  the  first  one,  because  the  pen  will  not  have  to  go 
back  so  far.     In  words  of  three  or  more  stems  the  sec- 
ond  place   of   each   should   generally    be   employed. 
When,  however,  there  would  not  be  sufficient  room 
between  the  stems  for  the  vowels  to  be  placed  in  the 
second  position,  or  when  for  any  other  reason  it  would 
be  inconvenient  to  do  so,  it  is  preferable  to  write  some 
or  all  of  them  in  the  third  or  even  in  the  first  position. 

49.  The   leiie  dot  may  be  used  when  vocalizing  to 
represent  the  substitution  of  the  smooth  breath  for  the 
rough  one,  or  for  any  consonant,  as  in  the  dialecticisms 
u+im<1'  and   "-hem"'  for   "him"  and    "them"    in   the 
same  manner  as  when  the  vowels  stand  alone.   Usually, 
however,  only  the  smooth  vowel  is  employed.     (See 
sec.  39.) 

50.  Occasionally  when  convenient  a  vowel  may  be 
joined  to  a  stem.      In  such  cases  in  stenotypy,  the  junc- 
tion is  indicated  by  a  hyphen  between  the  letters;  thus, 
i-dea.     (See  sec.  6.)     If  a  vowel  occurs  between  the 
joined  one  and  the  stem  it  is  enclosed  in  brackets;  thus, 
I-[o]N.     (See  also  sec.  40. ) 

5 1 .  An  intermediate  vowel  may  be  indicated  between 
M  and  P  or  M  and  B  of  the  stem  Mp  or  Mb  by  strik- 
ing it  through  the  latter.     In  the  case  of  two  or  more 
vowels  they  should  be  joined  or  all  struck  through  the 
stem  and  may  then  if  necessary  to  secure  legibility  be 
made  somewhat  larger  than  usual.     The  dash  vowel 
"a,"  which  is  made  in  the  same  direction  as  Mp,  is 
written  with  the  alternative  form.      A  vowel  may  be 
written  after  the  stem. 


THE    PTIOXOtiKAl'llir    MANUAL.  .J~ 

52.  In  stenotypy  the  striking  of  a    phonographic 
character   through   a   preceding  one  is    indicated    by 
placing  a  dagger  between  the  stenotypes;    thus,  Mf#p, 
Mfoap,  Mfot^p,  Mfopi. 

53.  The  consonant  Ng  never   commences  a   word 
in  English.     Consequently  when  it  stands  alone  or   is 
the  first  stem  in  a  word  it  is  known  to  be  preceded  by 
a  vowel  smooth  or  rough.     A  vowel  may  be  written 
after   the   stem,    in  which   case  the  sound  of  G  is  us- 
ually included,  as  in  "lingo." 

54.  Any  observations  that  apply  to  the  vowels  in 
this  book,  as  for  example,  sections  47  to  51,  usually 
apply  also  to  the  diphthongs. 

a.  The  sound  of  o  in  "odd"  and  that  of  "a"  in  "all" 
are  considered  the  same  in  this  system  of  phonography. 
Accordingly  they  are  both  written  with  the  same 
character;  namely,  the  light  perpendicular  dash,  or  its 
alternate. 

55.  The  learner  is  informed  that  in  speech  a  vowel 
is  always  preceded  by  a  breath  in  the   same   syllable 
and  a  consonant  followed  by  one;  and  that  a  breath 
can  then  never  follow  a  vowel  or  precede  a  consonant. 
Also  that  a  vowel  is  always  smooth  or  rough  according 
as  it  is    preceded  by  a  smooth  or  rough  consonant  in 
the   same  syllable.     Thus  the  vowel  in  "pa"  or  "ba" 
is  a  smooth  one.     In  "fa"  or  "va"  it  is  a  rough  one. 
This  comes  from  the  fact  that  a   vowel   in  the   same 
syllable  as  a  preceding  consonant  is  always  uttered  by 
the  same  kind  of  a  breath  as  the  latter.     Consequently 
an  aspirate   dot  is    never  placed  before  a  vowel  when 
the  latter  is  in  the  same   syllable  as  a  preceding  con- 
sonant, since  the  consonant  itself  in  speech    invariably 
determines  whether  the  vowel  is  smooth  or  rough. 

FOREIGN    VOWELS. 

53.  Any  vowel  peculiar  to  a  foreign  language  may 
be  indicated  by  striking  through  the  nearest  cor  re- 


48  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 

spending  English  one  at  right  angles  to  it  the  small 
character  like  the  Roman  S  in  the  same  manner  as  in 
the  case  of  the  foreign  consonants.  (See  sec.  '2~>.  i 
Thus  the  German  oe  and  ue  are  written  as  above  with 
long  a  and  e  and  the  French  eu  and  u  with  short  u  and 
long  u  respectively.  Their  stenotypes  are  the  letters 
for  the  long  and  short  sounds  just  given,  enclosed  in 
quotation  points  the  same  as  are  the  stenotypes  for  the 
foreign  consonants;  thus,  "a,"  "e,"  "u,"  "a." 

LESSON  6. 
THE  SEMIVOWELS  OR  SEMICONSONANTS  W  AND  Y 

57.  W  and  Y  being  semivowels  or  semiconsonants 
can  be  represented  as  either.     They  are  the  only  con- 
sonants that  in  phonographic  writing  can  be  omitted 
when  they  begin  a  word  and  the  only  vowels  that  can 
be  inserted  between  a  consonant  and  a  following  vowel 
in  the  same  syllable,  as   in   "twit"  or  "beauty,"   and 
the  only  vowels  or  consonants  that  can  not  end  a  syl- 
lable.    (See  also  sec.  11). 

58.  In  speech  AY  consists  partly  of  a  sound  resemb- 
ling the  short  vowel  u  and  Y  partly  of  one  resembling 
the  short  vowel  i,    and  the  approximate  construction 
of  each  may  be  said  to  be  as  in  the  examples  "u(w)arm, 
i(y)ore,"  and  "u(w)eed,  i(y)ou."     Thus  the  consonant 
parts  of  W  and  Y  are  medial  and  are  made   between 
say  u  or   i  and  a  following  vowel  or  diphthong;  W 
being  formed  by  the  lips  and  Y  by   the  tongue.      By 
beginning  with  say  a    brief  short   u  or  i  and  gliding 
from  either  sound  to  that  of  any  vowel  or  diphthong 
and  putting  the  accent  on  the  latter  the   full  sound  of 
W  or   Y  will   be  produced  as  just  explained.     Any 
vowel  or  diphthong,    accordingly,  can  follow  either  u 
or  i  in  the  same  syllable.     When  a   vowel  in  speech, 
therefore,  follows  either  of  these  vowels  in  the  same 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  49 

syllable  in  the  manner  mentioned  it  also  of  course  fol- 
lows W  or  Y. 

59.  The  learner  should  remember  that  u  and  i  are 
the  vowel  sounds  of  W  and  Y  and  are  always  uttered 
in  the  same  syllable  with  them.     The  consonant  sounds 
are  medial  as  just  stated  and  are  made  between  the  u 
or  i  and  a  following  vowel  or  diphthong      In  uttering 
W,  u  is  first  heard,  then  the  lips  take  the  position  to 
articulate   (or  semiarticulate)  W,  and  the    following 
vowel  is  uttered  after  the  W  is  articulated,  as  in  the 
examples  above.     The  same  occurs  with  Y.     I  is  first 
heard,  then  the  tongue  takes  the  position  to  articulate 
(or    semiarticulate)     Y   and   the   following   vowel   is 
uttered  after  the  Y  is  articulated.     If  this  did  not  hap- 
pen, that  is,  if  the  vowels  u  and  i  were  not  first  briefly 
uttered  the  articulations — or  semiarticulations — of  W 
and  Y  could  not  exist  and  consequently  be  heard.     This 
is  the  reason  the  sounds  and  characters  W  and  Y  are 
termed  semivowels  or  semiconsonants  and  is  also  the 
reason  they  can  take  the  breathings  smooth  or  rough — 
which  are  prefixed  to  the  vowels  u  and  i  and  not  to 
the   consonants  W  and  Y.     W  and  Y  thus  have  the 
breathings    both    before   and   after   them — before   as 

O 

vowels  and  after  as  consonants — and  are  the  only 
sounds  in  language  of  this  nature,  which  is  the  reason 
they  cannot  be  uttered  at  the  end  of  syllables.  (See 
also  see's.  29,  55  and  11,  and  the  Introduction,  page 
20,  par.'s  4,  a  and  5.) 

THE    SMALL   ALTERNATIVE    FORMS    FOR    W  AND  Y,    ETC. 

60.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  to  represent  W  and  Y 
at  the  beginning  or  in  the  body  of  stem  words  by  small 
acute-angle  characters  joined  or  disjoined  as  in  the  en- 
graving instead  of  by  their  stems  when  the  latter  will 
not  make  a  good  or  sufficiently  speedy  junction;  which  in 
the  case  of  W  isbeforeT,  Ch,  Th,  S,  Sh,  and  in  that  of 
Y  before  P,  T,  F,  Th,  S;  those  opening  to  the  right  and 


50  THE    PHOXOGRAPHH     MAVTAL. 

left  representing  W  and  those  upward  and  downward 
standing  for  Y.  When  these  characters  are  joined  to 
a  following  stem  the  vocalization  of  the  latter  is  the 
same  as  usual.  When  they  are  disjoined  from  the 
stems  they  are  joined  to  the  vowel  or  diphthong  im- 
mediately following.  The  small  W  and  Y  may  be 
shaded  initially  for  the  aspirate.  The  aspirate  dot 
may  also  be  employed  if  the  initial  shading  is  not 
deemed  sufficiently  distinct.  The  H  tick  is  seldom  or 
never  prefixed.  (See  sec.  28.) 

1 .  The  letter  T  in  the  first  four  lines  of  the  engrav- 
ing is  employed  merely  to  illustrate  the  manner  of 
joining  the  small  AY  and  Y  to  the  vowels — both  being 
usually  written  in  the  second  position  to  the  stems. 
(See  also  sec.  and  eng.  47,  a. ) 

a.  When  small  AY  and  Y  are  joined,   whether  to 
stems  or  vowels,  that  form  is  chosen  which  in  each 
case  makes  the  best  junction.     They  are  usually  em- 
ployed before  Tand  S  only  when  the  latter  are  followed 
by  a  vowel,  but  are  used  before  the  other  stems  men- 
tioned in  paragraph  60  whether  a    vowel  follows  or 
not. 

b.  In  short  words  of  very  frequent  occurrence, 
such  as   "was,  youth,"  etc.,   small  W  and  Y  are  dis- 
joined initially.     These  words  are  thus  written  in  order 
that  they  may  be  used  with  the  greatest  rapidity  in 
the  Reporting  Style  (the  method  employed  when  writ- 
ing connectedly)  where  also  all  the  vowels  both  smooth 
and  rough  are  generally  omitted. 

c.  W  and  Y  may  each  be  properly  represented  by 
two   ticks  or   characters  because  they  are  each  com- 
posed of  two  sounds  as  explained  in  sections  57  to  59 
preceding.      In  other  words,  being  compound  sounds, 
they  may  be  represented  by  compound  signs.      On  the 
other-  hand  it  is  also  proper  to  represent  them  by  sim- 
ple characters  as  in  the  case  of  the  stems  and  as  would 
be  the  case  if  the  alternates  were  represented  by  sin- 


TUP]    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  51 

gle  ticks  or  half  circles.  The  same  principle  is  thus  fol- 
lowed with  W  and  Y  as  with  the  vowels  each  of  which 
represents  a  breathing  and  the  sonant  organism,  and 
with  Ch  and  J  which  consist  respectively  of  TSh, 
and  DZh.  (See  Introduction,  pages  13  and  21, 
last  paragraphs.)  The  reason,  however,  the  small  alter- 
native forms  are  not  presented  with  single  signs  is  be 
cause  the  stenographic  material  is  so  limited  that  it  is 
inconvenient  to  do  so. 

d.  The  proper  size  for  the  small  W  and  Y  charac- 
ters is  a  little  larger  than  that  for  the  semicircles,  the 
angles   being  made  sharp  so  as  to  additionally  distin- 
guish them  from  the  latter. 

e.  If  desired  the  W  and  Y  angles  opening  to  the 
left  and  downward  may  be  abolished  and  small  W  and 
Y  stems  (quarter  circles)  a  little  longer  than  the  ticks 
or  half  circles;  namely,  about  one-third  the  length  of 
a  full  sized  curved  stem,   may  be  employed  instead, 
but  joined  only  to  vowels. 

61.  As  Y  and  the  long  vowel  n  occur  very  fre- 
quently   together   the    sign   for    the   former  opening 
downward  is  generally  written   alone  for  both,  as  in 
the  word  "beauty."     If  at  any  time  the  a  is  desired 
to  be  added  (which  is  seldom  or  never  necessary)  the 
reversed  alternative  half  circle  for  the  latter  may  be 
employed;  or  the  opposite  characters  written.      Again, 
the    angular    sign    opening    downward    is    sometimes 
joined  finally  when  thus  representing  both  sounds,  in 
which  case  it  is  attached  only  to  the  four  stems  P,  F, 
M,  K,  and  their  heavy  forms.     (See  par.  63  follow- 
ing-) 

a.      If  small  Y,  opening  downward  is  abolished  the 

small  Y  stem,  as  explained  in  section  60,  e,  would  be 
employed  instead  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the  last 
paragraph  except  that  it  would  not  be  joined  finally  to 
F,  K,  etc. 

62.  The  stenotypes  for  the  small  alternative  W  and 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXUAL. 


Y  forma  are  small  cap  roman  and  italic  w,  Y,  and  wt 
r;  the  first  two  representing  the  characters  opening 
to  the  right  and  upward  and  the  second  two  those 
opening  to  the  left  and  downward,  their  names  being 
respectively  Wo,  Yo  and  Woo,  Yoo.  Their  stenotypy 
is  the  same  as  for  the  vowels.  (See  see's.  47  and  50.) 
a.  If  small  Wand  Y  opening  to  the  right  and  down- 
ward are  abolished,  as  explained  in  section  60,  e,  the 
stenotypes  remain  unchanged. 

Y   BEFORE   U   EMPLOYED    ONLY    AFTER  LABIALS  AND  BACK 
LINGUALS. 

63.  In  this  system  of  phonography  the  sound  of  Y 
before  the  long  vowel  u  as  in  section  61  is  indicated 
only  after  P,  B,  F,  V,  M,  K  and  G — labials  and  back- 
linguals — as    in  the    words    "puny,    repute,    beauty, 
few,    view,    mew,  cube,   skew"  and  "  gubernatorial." 
After  all  other  consonants ;  namely,  front  and  middle 
linguals  (see  Introduction,  page  21,  last  paragraph  and 
table  following)  it  is  omitted,  and  the  long  vowel   a 
alone  written  as  in  the  words   "Tuesday,   endue,   sue, 
resume."    (See  sees.  64  to  75  following). 

64.  The  reasons  for  the  above  pronunciation  are 
given  in  the  Introduction  to  the  author's  ' '  System  of 
Phonoscript  and  Phonotypy,"  page  9,  et  seq.,  and  are, 
briefly,  that  T,  D,  S,  Z,  etc.,  followed  by  Y  and  long 
ft  are  liable  to  be  changed  into  Ch,   J,   Sh,   Zh,  thus 
causing  words  like  "Tuesday,  literature,  duel,  endue, 
education,   sue,   ensue,    zumic,    resume,"    to    be    pro- 
nounced "Chuesday,   literachure,  juel,  enjue,  edjuca- 
tion,  shue,  enshue,  zhumic,  rezhume ;"  with  the  result 
that  original  words  are  entirely  changed  while  derivative 
ones  lose  their  primitive  forms.      Consequently  the  Y 
sound  should  be  abolished. 

65.  Attention  is  also  directed  to  the  following  ob- 
servations by  Dr.  Latham  in  his  ' '  Defence  of  Phonetic 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC'    MAXUAL.  53 

Spelling."'  section  XXIV  on  the  subject  of  T  and  D 
followed  by  Y  becoming  Ch  and  J. 

" — tsh  and  dzh  [Ch  and  J]  can  be  developed  out  of  t  and 
d  as  independent,  roots.  For  instance; 

"1.     1  'a,  tya,  tsha. 

"  2.     Da,  dyn,  dzha. 

"Now  we  have  tsh's  and  dzh's  of  both  kinds  in  English,  but 
they  are  treated  very  differently  iu  our  orthography.  The 
sound  given  to  u.  yoo  and  ew  after  t  and  d  as  in  nature,  verdure, 
dew  when  pronounced  natshur,  verdzhur  and  dzfiew  [nachur, 
verjur,  juj  has  already  been  noticed.  That  this  is  condemned 
as  a  vulgarism  I  admit.  I  may  also  add  that,  according-  to  the 
information  of  Mr.  [Isaac]  Pitman,  who,  from  having  exhibited 
the  so-called  vulgarism  phonetically,  and  subseqnentJy  recog- 
nized the  ordinary  pronunciation,  is  a  good  authority  on  the 
matter,  the  practice  of  so  sounding'  the  combination  is  on  the 
decrease — perhaps  passing  away  altogether.  It  may  be  so.  It 
is  possible  that  with  so  many  of  us  reading  and  writing  and 
cultivating  our  pronunciation,  the  influence  of  the  orthoepisis 
may  succeed  in  checking-  the  tendency  to  change;  and  if  they 
do  this  they  will,  to  some  small  extent,  have  succeeded  in  what 
is  called  the  fixation  of  some  part  of  the  language.  I  do  not 
care  to  prophecy  upon  this  point.  I  only  know  that  ta  and  da 
at  the  beginning  of  the  [above]  series,  and  that  tshd  and  dzha 
[cha  and  ja]  at  the  end,  are,  comparatively  speaking,  stable 
combinations;  and  that  ty  and  dy  in  the  middle,  are,  compara- 
tively speaking,  remarkably  ?t?istable  ones.  If  then,  I  were  to 
prophecy  at  all,  it  would  be  in  favor  of  the  vulgar  pronunciation 
eventually  winning." 

a.  The  ordinary  pronunciation  of  Ty  and  Dy  as 
recognized  by  Mr.  Pitman  is  preferable  to  that  of  Ch 
and  J  because  it  is  more  etymological ;  butit  isclear  from 
the  remarks  of  Dr.  Latham  that  it  can  not  be  retained. 
We  should,  therefore,  abolish  the  Y  sound  for  the  sake 
of  proper  etymology.  Accordingly  in  this  system 
words  like  the  above  are  written  and  pronounced  "Tus- 
day,  literatur,  duel,"  etc.,  "natur,  verdur,  du,"  and 
not  according  to  the  present  standard  ;  namely,  ' '  Tyues- 
day,  literatyure,  dyuel,"  etc.,  "natyure,  verdyure, 
dyew."  (Tyiisday,  literatyur,  dyfiel,  etc.,  natynr, 
verdyur,  dyn).  Nevertheless  the  learner  may  if  he 
prefers  follow  the  latter. 

66.      The  pronunciation  recognized  and  adopted  by 


-,4  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 

Mr.  Pitman  is  that  of  Y  followed  by  the  long  vowel  n 
and  not  by  the  short  one,  u.  That  is  "nature"  and 
"verdure"  are  written  by  Mr.  Pitman  "natynr"  and 
"verdyor"  and  not  "natyur"  and  "verdyur."  Also 
"thew,  new,  annual,  annuity,  penury"  and  "pen- 
urious" are  written  "thn,  nyn,  anynal,  anynity, 
penyury"  and  "penyurious.'"'  This  is  practically  the 
same  pronunciation  as  that  in  Webster's  "International 
Dictionary"  (copyright  1890)  in  which  also  "shew" 
(obsolete)  is  written  (practically)  "shya."  Mr.  Pit- 
man, however,  writes  "Jew,  Jn"  as  also  does  the 
dictionary  just  mentioned  but  with  the  alternative 
"Jyn"  They  disagree,  however,  on  "lieu,"  the 
former  writing  it  "la"  and  the  latter  (practically) 
"lya."  On  the  remaining  letters  of  the  phonetic 
alphabet;  namely,  Ch,  Sh,  R  as  in  "chew,  sure,  rue," 
they  practically  agree  and  write  them,  the  former  act- 
ually and  the  latter  substantially,  "chn,  shnr,  rfi." 

a.  From  the  above  it  is  evident  that  the  past  and 
present  pronunciation  is  practically  the  long  vowel  a. 
It  is  therefore  adopted  in  this  system  and  the  additional 
words  just  given  expressed  "thu,  nii,  anaal,  anility, 
penury,  penurious,  shu,  Ju,  lu,  chu,  shiir,  ru." 

67.  In  addition  to  the  preceding  observations  by  Dr. 
Latham  the  following  on  the  same  subject,  except  the 
first  paragraph,  are  made  by  Dr.  A.  J.  Ellis  in  his 
work  "On  Early  English  Pronunciation,"  Part  I, 
page  203. 

"  The  pronunciation  of  P,  B  does  not  seem  to  have  varied 
in  any  respect. 

"  T,  D  have  now  a  tendency,  ignored  by  most  orthoepists, 
under  particular  circumstance  to  pass  into  ch,  j  ;  thus  lutture, 
verdure  are,  perhaps  most  frequently,  pronounced  nachur,  ver- 
jur,  the  last  word. being  in  that  case  identified  with  verger. 
This  alteration  takes  place  generally  through  the  action  of  a 
palatal  sound,  originally  ii  then  eu,  yu  so  that  the  transition 
was  tiir,  teur,  tyur,  tyur,  chur.  I  have  not  found  traces  of  the 
change,  however,  but  the  pronunciation  nfrtur  or  its  equivalent 
given  by  Jones  seems  to  show  an  effort  to  avoid  it  by  omitting 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    31AXUAL.  "),", 

the  palatal  element  y.  In  the  XVIIIth  century  Sheridan  carried 
this  still  further  and  allowed  for  such  pronunciations  as  chu'tur 
for  tutor.  The  palatals  e,  y  have  always  had  a  great  effect 
upon  preceding-  consonants  of  the  dental  and  guttural  class,  as 
they  tend  to  materially  alter  the  position  of  the  tongue  in  order 
to  facilitate  the  transition  to  a  following  vowel.  The  languages 
derived  from  the  Latin  are  full  of  instances.  It  is  a  fashion  in 
modern  English  to  resist,  or  to  believe  that  we  resist,  this  tend- 
ency iu  the  especial  case  of  ture  and  dure,  but  we  have  given 
into  it  completely  in  tirm,  where  the  t,  hesitating  in  classical 
times  between  c  and  t,  underwent  a  change  which  gave  seox  in 
French,  whence  English,  first  seun  and  then  shun — never,  ex- 
cept in  orthoepical  fancies,  shon — and  in  Italian  produced 
tseu'ne.  A  similar  change  is  recognized  in  clous,  cial.  And  it 
is  in  vain  to  protest  against  ture,  dure  becomming  chur,  jur  at  a 
time  when  even  tyo5r,  dyoor  though  far  less  pedantic  than  teur, 
deur,  have  a  singularly  orthoepistic  effect." 

a.  Xow  if  P,  B  have  not  varied  in  any  respect  there 
is  no  reason  why  other  sounds  should  do  so  (say  T,  D) 
except  from  faulty  pronunciation.  Accordingly  the 
interpolated  Y  sound  should  be  abolished. 

68.  Dr.  Ellis  states,  it  will  be  observed,  that 
"nature,  verdure  are,  perhaps  most  frequently,  pro- 
nounced nfichur,  verjur,"  that  is  with  the  short  vowel 
u  in  the  termination;  thus,  "chur,  jur."  But  it  is 
shown  above  (sec.  60)  that  the  ordinary  pronunciation 
was  and  is  with  the  long  vowel;  namely  u.  His  obser- 
vations, however,  are  fully  as  applicable  to  the  one  as 
to  the  other.-  He  also  states,  in  effect,  that  "natyu.r" 
and  "  verdyur  "  are  far  less  pedantic  than  "nateiir" 
and  "verdeur"  (nate-ar  and  verde-nr.)  This  is  true, 
yet  the  latter  are  far  more  etymological — being  only 
one  degree  removed  from  the  (supposed)  originals 
"tur"  and  "diir."  But  then  they  are  not  so  quickly 
pronounced,  since  they  are  composed  of  two  syllables, 
which  is  the  reason  the  Y  was  next  adopted  and  now, 
inchoately,  the  Ch  and  J.  ''Tur  "  and  "dtir, "  how- 
ever, (natur  and  verdur)  are  fully  as  quick  as  "chur" 
and  "jar"  (nachur  and  verjnr)  and  are  also  strictly 
etymological,  which  the  latter  are  not,  inasmuch  as 
they  destroy  the  T  and  D.  Consequently  "  nfitnr  " 


5(5  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANTAL. 

and  "  verdiir  "  are  preferable  pronunciations  to  either 
"natynr  "and  "  verdynr  "or  "  nfichnr  "and  "verjar" 
and  much  nearer,  if  not  actually,  the  original  sounds, 
since  it  is  by  no  means  certain  that  these  were  "tlir" 
and  "  difr,"  though  the  latter  were  no  doubt  very  close 
approximations  to  the  originals;  particularly  when 
quickly  pronounced.  The  dictionary  above  mentioned 
has  the  following  on  this  point,  Guide  to  Pronuncia- 
tion, page  Ixiv,  section  135,  Note: 

"The  original  sound  of  the  letter  u,  as  in  the  Latin— and  as 
still  retained  in  the  Italian,  Spanish  and  German — was  the 
simple  sound  of  oo  (food)  and  o7>  (foot)  [u,  ui].  In  the  time  of 
Chaucer,  the  pronunciation  of  this  letter  in  the  English — which 
was  then  substantially,  if  not  absolutely,  the  same  as  in  the 
French — may  even  then  have  fluctuated  between  the  perfectly 
simple  sound  now  heard  in  the  French  and  a  sound  more  or  less 
decidedly  diphthongal;  as  it  appears  to  have  done  in  England, 
for  the  leading  sound  of  the  letter,  down  through  the  seven- 
teenth and  far  into  the  eighteenth  century.  The  y  sound 
made  its  way  into  the  diphthong  and  gained  prominence  in  it 
by  degrees,  while  the  diphthong  itself  gradually  gained  a  more 
full  development,  with  greater  weight  and  a  tongue  position 
farther  back  given  to  the  terminal  element. 

a.  All  of  which  plainly  means  that  the  sound  was 
originally  fl  or  ui  and  eventually  became  more  or  less 
of  a  diphthong  with  a  Y  sound  (either  consonantal  or 
vowel,  since  Y  is  a  semiconsonant  or  semivowel)  pre- 
ceding the  latter.  Now  as  ui  (oo)  in  "foot"  is  a  diph- 
thong (see  the  author's  "System  of  Phonoscript  and 
Phonotypy, "  page  13)  and  not  a  simple  sound,  and  as 
the  present  pronunciation  of  u  as  shown  in  sections  65 
and  66  is  long  Q  it  follows  that  the  original  sound  was 
also  long  0,  or  practically  so. 

69.  One,  if  not  the  principal  reason,  for  the  exist- 
ence of  the  Y  sound  as  above  is  that  it  came  in  mostly 
from  the  French,  which  is  a  nasal  language  and  there- 
fore can  easily  employ  the  Y  sound  in  such  connec- 
tions; which  the  English  can  not  do,  as  it  is  not  a  nasal 
tongue.  Accordingly  the  tendency  of  English  is  either 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  .',7 

to  eliminate  nasals  altogether  or  to  strictly  limit  them. 
As  a  result  any  pronunciations  by  which  they  are 
encouraged  will  eventually  be  abolished  one  way  or 
another.  They  consequently  should  be  abolished 
according  to  proper  etymology,  which  is  effected  when 
we  say  "  natnr,  verdar, "  etc.,  as  above,  instead  of 
"nachnr,  verjnr,"  etc. 

70.  The  Y  sound  should  also  be  abolished  from 
before  other  vowels  than  long  n.     (See  the  dictionary 
above  mentioned,  Guide  to  Pronunciation,  page  Ixiii, 
section  106).     In  other  words,  it  should  be  abolished 
whenever  the  resulting  combination  would  be  liable  to 
conflict  with  Ch,  J,  Sh,  Zh,  etc.     As  examples  of  this, 
when  te  (ty),  ti  (ty)  become  Ch  before  "ous  (us),  on 
(un)"  and  "an"  as  in  "righteous,  question,  Christian," 
(richus,  queschun,  chrischan),  the  e  (y),  i  (y)  is  omitted 
in  this  system;  thus,  "rltus,  questun,  christan."     The 
learner,  however,  as  in  the  case  of  long  n  (see  last 
sentence  of  sec.  65,  a)  may,  if  he  prefers,  insert  the 
Y  sound;  thus,    "rltyus,  questyun,  christyan. " 

71.  Finally   the   Y   sound    in   such    connections, 
namely  after  the  front  and  middle  linguals  (see  sec. 
63)  does  not  enrich  the  language,  since  it  conveys  no 
additional  meaning.     Therefore  it  is  a  useless  burden 
on  the  tongue. 

72.  Again,  Dr.    Ellis  in  the  quotation  above  (see 
sec.  67)  speaking  of  the  tendency  of  the  palatals  e,  y 
to  alter  the  position  of  the  tongue  says  that  "we  have 
given  into  it  completely  in  tlon  "  which  finally  became 
"shun — never,  except  in  orthoepical  fancies,  shon" — 
and  that   "A  similar  change  is  recognized  in  dous, 
cial." 

73.  This  is  probably  true  as  to  "tion"  (shun)  and 
is  mostly  so  as  to  ''cious,  cial"  (shus,  shal).     The  same 
may    be  said  as  to   "sion,   cian,     sian,     cean,"    etc., 
and  "tious,  teous,  ceous,  seous,  tial,  zier,"  etc.      (See 
the  dictionary  above  mentioned,  pages  Ixii  and  Ixiii, 


58  THE   PHOXOCRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

sections  97  and  106).  Nevertheless  these  terminations 
will  perhaps  eventually  he  pronounced  without  the  o 
or  i  (that  is  the  Y)  sound,  thus  abolishing  the  indirect 
or  corrupt  derivative  Sh  (or  Zh.)  Accordingly  such 
words  as  "motion,  notion,  edition,  mission,  vision, 
Milesian,  musician,  crustacean,  facetious,  gracious, 
micaceous,  nauseous,  partial,  facial,  glazier"  will  then 
be  uttered  ''motun,  notun,  editun,  misun,  vizun,  Mllf- 
zan,  myazikan,  krustasan,  fasetus,  grasus,  mikasus, 
nausue,  partal,  fasal,  glfizer. " 

74.  From   the   above   it   will    be    perceived    that 
phonetic  spelling  is  essentially  etymological   spelling 
and  that  when  it  comes  into  general  use  there  will  be 
many  radical  changes  from  our  present  pronunciation. 
These,  however,  will  be  for  the  better,  since  they  will 
be  strictly  logical,  while  in  addition  the  way  will  be 
opened  for  enriching  the  language  by  the  employment 
of  the  displaced  words  with  a  different  meaning. 

75.  At  present,  however,  the  only  changes  adopted 
in  this  system  are  those  mentioned  in  sections  65,   a, 
66,  a  and  70. 

LESSON   7. 
THE  +  TICK  AND  CURVET  AND  II  TICKS. 


THE    +    TICK    AND    CURVET. 

76.  The  -f  tick  and  curvet,  as  stated  in  section  27, 
a,  are  not  usually  necessary  in  ordinary  writing.  If 
desired,  however,  they  may  be  inserted  according  to 
the  same  principle  as  the  lene  dot  in  section  49. 

THE     H    TICKS. 

77-  A  vowel  occurring  before  either  H  tick  is 
written  disjoined  before  it,  while  one  between  it  and 
the  stem  is  written  before  the  latter. 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXUAL.  59 

78.  The  ticks  should  generally  be  inserted  initially 
in  monosyllables  and  dissyllables. 

79.  In  short  words  which  occur  very  frequently, 
however,  they  may  be  omitted  and  the  initial  rough 
vowels,  or  the  aspirate  dot  and  rough  vowels,  used  in- 
stead after  the  manner  of  small  W  and  Y  explained  in 
section    60,    b.      The    ticks   may  also  occasionally  be 
omitted   initially  from    long  words  whose  forms  are 
sufficiently  legible  without  them. 

80.  The  ticks  may  frequently  be  omitted  medially 
from  words  of  three  syllables  and  over  and  also  some- 
times from  compound  words  of  two  syllables.     The 
rough  breathing  or  aspirate  can  then,  if  additional  dis- 
tinction  is   ever   desired,    be  represented  before   the 
rough  vowels  by  the  heavy  dot. 

OMISSION    OF    THE    II    TICKS. 

81.  If  desired  the  H  ticks  may  be  omitted  alto- 
gether in  ordinary  writing  the  same  as  the  -f-  tick  and 
curvet  and  the  rough  vowels  or  the  latter  and  the  aspir- 
ate dot  inserted  instead  where  necessary.      It  is  usually 
preferable,  however,  to  insert  them  as  above  directed. 


60  THE  riioxoriRApHic  MANUAL. 


CHAPTER  III. 

CIRCLES     AND     LOOPS-        INITIALS     OP     PROPER 
NAMES.      PUNCTUATION  AND  OTHER  MARKS. 


LESSON   8. 
CIRCLES. 

82.  As  Sand Z  are  very  frequent  sounds  each  is  pro- 
vided, in  addition  to  the  sign  already  given,  with  a 
small  circle;  the  one  made  light  for  S  and  the  other 
heavy  on  the  most  convenient  side  for  Z.      Both  char- 
acters are  written  initially,  medially  and  finally.      It  is 
not   often    necessary  to  shade  the  circle  for  Z  when 
medial  or  final,  because  the  context  will  usually  indi- 
cate which  sound  is  meant.     When  it  occurs  initially, 
however,  which  is  but  seldom  in  writing  English,  and 
then,   as  will  hereafter  be  explained,  only  on  double 
consonants;  as  in  "Zwolle,"  it  is  shaded,   but  usually 
only  slightly,  or  it  may  be  written  unshaded  if  pre- 
ferred.     (See    sec.    38,    etc.)     These    characters    are 
adopted  for  the  sake  of  speed,  the  stems  S  and  Z  being 
too  large  and  cumbersome  to  be  always  made  with  suf- 
ficient quickness. 

83.  The  names  of  the  small  circles  are  Is  and  Iz 
and  their  stenotypes  are  s  and  z. 

THE    INITIAL    S    CIRCLE. 

84.  The  circle  S  (see  sec.  19)  is  made  initially  on 
the  right  or  upper  side  of  straight  stems  and  on  the 
inner  side  of  curved  ones  and  is  always  read  before 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANTAL.  Gl 

the  stem.      It  is  not  used  initially  on  downward  R  or 
L.     (See  sec.  12). 


THE    FINAL    S    CIRCLE. 

85.  The  circle   S  is  made  finally  on  the  right  or 
upper  side  of  straight  stems  and  on  the  inner  side  of 
curved  ones.      Initial  and  final  S  are  thus  made  on  the 
same  side  of  stems  which  stand  alone. 

THE    MEDIAL    S    CIRCLE. 

86.  The  circle  S  when  written  between  two  straight 
stems  struck  in  the  same  direction  is  made  on  the  same 
side    as  when   final.       When   written    between    two 
straight  stems  that  form  an  argle  it  is  made  on  the 
outside  of  the  angle  and  does  not  form  a  perfect  circle. 

87.  When  it  occurs  between  a  curve  and  a  straight 
stem  it  follows  the  direction  of  the  curve,     (a).      Be- 
tween too  similar  curves  it  is  turned  in  the  direction 
of  both.    Between  two  opposite  curves  that  do  not  form 
an  angle  it  is  turned  in  the  direction  of  the  first.     Be- 
tween two  opposite  curves  that  form  an  angle,    it  is 
turned  in  the  direction  of  the   second  and  does  not 
form  a  perfect  circle,  as  in  the  last  three  examples  in 
the  engraving.     In  such  cases  it  is  named  Us  or  Uz 
and  stenotyped  .v  or  z. 

88.  A   circle   is   always  equally   divided  between 
two  stems — half  on  one  and  half  on  the  other. 

89.  The  circle  S  may  be  attached  initially  to  small 
W,  but  not  usually  to  small  Y  to  represent  the   con- 
sonant S  or  Z,  as  will  hereafter  appear. 

a.  It  may   also   be   attached  finally  to  a  vowel  or 
diphthong   standing   alone   or    to  a    word    composed 
wholly   of   vowels  to  indicate  the  plural  number   or 
possessive   case.     It  is  never   attached  initially   as  a 
consonant  to  either  as  will  hereafter  appear. 

b.  The  circle  S    when  attached  to  the  vowels  and 


G2  TIIK    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

diphthongs  should  be  proportioned  to  the  size  of  these 
characters. 

THE  S  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

90.  The  consonant  S  when  initial  in  addition  to  its 
ordinary  use  as  in  the  word    "seek,"    frequently  pre- 
cedes and  apparently  unites  with  other    consonants    in 
the   same   syllable   as    in  Spe,    Ste,    Sle,    Swe,    Sye. 
These   consonants  when    so    united   are  called   the   S 
Double  Consonants  and  never   have  a  vowel  between 
them  as  such. 

a.-  The  remarks  above  apply  also  to  the  Z  double 
consonants.  The  latter,  however,  seldom  occur  in- 
itially in  English.  (See  sec.  82). 

91.  When  the  S  and  Z  double  consonants    happen 
in  connection  with  the  cognates  P,  B,  etc.,  and   F,   V, 
etc.,  the  initial  S  circle  usually  belongs  on  light  stems 
and  the  initial  Z  circle  on   heavy  ones.      Consequently 
if  a  circle  on  such  stems  should  happen  to  be  unshaded 
it  is  usually  known  to  be  S  or  Z  according  as  the  stem 
is  light  or  heavy.      (See  sec.  82). 

92.  The  initial  S  circle  may  be  employed  to  form 
an  S  double  consonant  on  any  stem  except  S  and  Ng  or 
downward    R  and    L.      (See  sec.  84).      Usually,  how- 
ever, in  English    the  S    double  consonants  occur  only 
on  the  stems  P,  T,  K,  F,  M,  N,  L,  and  W. 

93.  The  circle  S  is  always  employed  when  the  con- 
sonant  S    begins  a    word  except    in  cases  mentioned 
hereafter.      When  the  consonant  Z  begins  a  word  the 
stem  Z  is  always  employed  except  occasionally  in  the 
case  of  a  double  consonant  as  explained  in  see's.    82 
and  90). 

NOMENCLATURE     AND     STENOTYPY     OF     THE     STEMS     AND 
CIRCLES  WHEN  JOINED  TOGETHER. 

94.  A  single  stem  and  S  or  Z  circle  joined  together 
and  standing  alone  are  usually  pronounced  in  one    syl- 


THE    PHOXOCiUAPIlIC    MANTAL.  63 

lable  the  stems  receiving  the  same  names  as  when  with- 
out the  circles;  thus  sP,  Ps,  sPs,  Ps,  sB,  sV,  zV,  sSh, 
sR,  sN,  sNg  are  named  Spee,  Spees,  Pees,  Sbee,  Svee, 
Zvee,  Sshee,  Sree,  Snee,  Seeng. 

95.  When  a  circle  occurs  between  two  stems  it  is 
usually  pronounced  in  the  same  syllable  with  the  first, 
thus,    PsP,  TsK,    RsN,   MsN,    are    uttered    PeesPee, 
Tees  Kee,  Rees  Nee,  Mees  Nee. 

96.  When,    however,   it  occurs  between  two  oppo- 
site curves  and  is  made  in  the  direction  of  the  second 
(see  sec.  and  eng.  87,  a)  half  on  the  back  of  the  first 
(see  sec.  88)  it  is  pronounced  separately,  thus,  F.sLT 
are  spoken  Fee  Us  Lee  Tee. 

97.  In  the  stenotypic  examples  above,  as  well  as  in 
those    which  follow,   the  spelling  is  phonetic.      Conse- 
quently they  should  be  pronounced  as  written.     Thus 
Pees  is  uttered  with  the  S  and  not   with  the  Z  sound. 

VOCALIZATION  OF  STEMS  HAVING  THE  8  CIRCLE. 

98.  In  the  case  of  double  consonants   the   vowels 
are  written  after  the  stern. 

99.  In  other  cases  a  vowel  between  the  circle  and 
sterm  is  written  before  the  latter   while  one  following 
the  stem  is  written  after  it.      (See  also  sec.  100). 

100.  If  the  vowel  or  diphthong  is  a  medial  one, 
that  is  one  between  two  stems  joined  by  a  circle  it  is 
written  after  the  first  stem  or   before  the  second  ac- 
cording as  it  precedes  or  follows  the  circle.      In  the 
case  of  two  or  more  vowels  or  diphthongs  before  or 
after  the  circle  the  same  rule  is  followed. 

101.  When  a  stem  has  a  final  circle  it  is  vocalized 
the  same  as  when  without  it. 

102.  The  circle  S  is    never  followed  by    a   final 
vowel.      When  a  final  vowel  occurs  after  S  the    stem 
form  of  the  latter  is  always  used. 


(34  THE    PHONOGRAPHH1    MANUAL. 

LESSON  '.». 

THE  INITIALS  SIS  OR  SIZ,   ETC.,   AND  SI,    ETC.,   SYLLABLES. 

103.  In  words  other  than  monosyllables  when  initial 
S  is  followed  by  a  vowel  and  S  or  Z,  whether  the  sec- 
ond S  or  Z  belongs  to  the  initial  syllable  or  not,  the 
first  S  and  the  second  S  or  Z  are  written  either  with  a 
large  circle  double  the  diameter  of  the  small  S  circle 
and  in  the  same  manner  or  with  the  small  circle  and  S 
stem,  or  vice  versa,  with  the  S  stem  and  small  circle, 
as  follows : 

a.  When  the  second  S  or  Z  is  followed  immediately 
by  a  consonant,   the  large  circle  is  used.     It  may  be 
shaded  to  represent  the  Z,  but  this  is  seldom  necessary. 
If  desired  the  intervening  vowel  may  be  placed  in  the 
circle  as  in  the  engraving. 

1.  The  name  of  the  initial  large  circle  is  Ses  or  Sez 
and  its  stenotypic  representation  is  ss,  sz.    It  is  always 
pronounced  as  a  separate  word  ;  thus  the  combination 
ssP  is  uttered  Ses  Pee. 

2.  The  large  circle  by  reason  of  its  diameter  being 
twice  the  length  of  the  diameter  of  the  small  one,  is 
often  called  the  Double  Size  Circle  although  its  area  is 
really  four  times  that  of  the  latter.      If  preferred  it 
may  also  be  called  the    Double   Diameter  or    Double 
Width  Circle. 

b.  When  the  second  S  or  Z  is  followed  immediately 
by  a  vowel  which  is  the  end  of  the  second  syllable — 
whether  this  vowel  is  a  syllable  of  itself  or  belongs  to 
the  second  S  or  Z — the  circle  S  and  the  stem  S  or  Z 
are  employed. 

C.  When  the  second  S  or  Z  is  followed  immediately 
by  a  vowel  which  is  not  the  end  of  the  second  syllable, 
the  stem  S  and  the  circle  are  written. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

104.  The  above  rules  do  not  apply  to  derivative 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  (J-, 

words  whose  primitive  forms  should  be  maintained ; 
as  in  "schismatize"  or  "Sicilian,"  etc.  (See  eng.  199, 
line  6.) 

105.  They  also  do  not  apply  to  compound  words, 
or  to  their  plural  or  verbal  forms;  as  in  "sauce-box, 
so-so,  so-sos." 

106.  Rule  b,  however,  applies  to  derivative  words 
having  S  or  Z  sounds  only  that  have  a  different  appli- 
cation from  their  primitives;  as  "saucy,  sizy,"  etc., 
or  if   not  of   different  application,   yet  where  much 
greater  speed  is  obtained  by  writing  them  thus  than  by 
preserving  their  primitive  forms  as  in  "sauce,   size," 
etc.     (See  sec.  116). 

1  07.  The  learner  is  instructed  that  in  phonography 
it  is  a  general  rule  that  all  derivative  words  should 
maintain  the  form  of  their  primitives.  Sometimes, 
however,  this  is  not  practicable  when  speed  is  neces- 
sary. In  such  cases  the  rule  is  infringed,  as  in  the 
word  "saucy,"  noticed  above.  It  is  also  infringed  for 
the  sake  of  speed  in  the  case  of  the  word  "society" 
which  is  written  according  to  rule  c  as  in  the  last  form 
but  one  in  engraving  106.  The  learner  may,  however, 
write  it  according  to  rule  b  if  he  chooses  (see  last  ex- 
ample in  engraving  106)  thus  maintaining  its  primitive 
form  as  in  the  Latin  word  "socius,"  the  last  example 
in  engraving  103,  b. 

108.  The  learner  is  furthermore  instructed  that  it 
is  a  general  rule  for  writing  all  words  in  phonography 
that  those  outlines  should  be  chosen  which  are  most 
easily  written.  Sometimes,  however,  this  rule  also  is 
infringed  either  for  stenographic  reasons  or  for  the 
sake  of  extra  legibility  or  uniformity  as  will  appear  in 
the  course  of  the  exercises. 

THE  FINAL  OR  MEDIAL  SIS  OR  SIZ,  ETC.,   ZIS  OR  ZIZ,    ETC., 
AND  IS  OR  IZ,    ETC.,   SYLLABLES. 


1 09.     Final  or  medial  Ss  or  Sz  and  Zs  or  Zz  with  a 


Gf»  THE    PHOXOORAPHfC    MAN  I 'AT.. 

vowel  between,  whether  the  lirst  8  or  Z  belongs  to  this 
vowel  or  not,  are  represented  the  sumo  as  initial  Ss  or  Sz 
by  the  large  circle  which  if  desired,  may  be  shaded  on 
one  side  to  indicate  Z  or  shaded  throughout  to  indicate 
Zz.  The  shading,  however,  is  not  usually  necessary. 
The  final  or  medial  large  circle  may  be  vocalized  by 
placing  the  intervening  vowel  within  it  the  same  as 
in  the  case  of  the  initial  one  and  is  attached  to  stems 
in  the  same  manner  as  is  the  final  or  medial  small  circle. 

110.  It  will  thus  be  observed  that  in  addition  to 
its  use  in  the  medial  and  final  syllables  Sis  or  Siz,  etc., 
the  large  circle  is  employed  to  represent  the  final  S  or 
Z  of  a  primitive  word  together  with  the  addition  to  it 
of  a  complete  syllable,  usually  Es  or  Ez,  as  in  "pieces" 
and  "phazes  "—the  derivatives  of  "piece"  and  "phaze. " 

111.  Final  S  or  Z  may  be  added  to  the  final  large 
circle  by  a  small  imperfect  circle  light  or  shaded  and 
turned  on     the    other    side    of   the  stem — the  latter 
forming  part  of  the  circle.      Its  name  and  stenotype 
are  the  same  as  for  the  other  small  circle. 

112.  The  large  circle  may  be  written  between  two 
opposite  curves  that  form  an  angle.      In  which  case  it 
is  named  by  prefixing  the  short  vowel  U  to  the  name 
of  the  large  circle ;  thus,  Uses,  Usez,  Uzes,  Uzez  and 
stenotyped  ss,  sz,  zs,  zz  in  like  manner  with  the  similar 
small  circle. 

113.  The  largo  circle  is  never  followed  by  a  final 
vowel.     When  a  final  vowel  occurs  after  Ss,  Sz,  etc., 
one  of  the  stem  forms  of  S  or  Z  is  always  used. 

114.  The  large  circle  is  never  attached  to  small  "VV 
or  Y.      It  is,  however,  sometimes  attached  to  a  vowel 
or  diphthong  but  never  initially  to  represent  the  con- 
sonants Ss  or  Sz,  as  will  hereafter  appear.      (See  also 
par's.  89  and  a). 

a.  The  large  circle  when  attached  to  the  vowels  and 
diphthongs,  should,  like  the  circle  S,  be  proportioned 
to  the  size  of  these  characters.  (See  sec.  89,  b). 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MAXL'AL.  07 

1  15.  The  final  or  me<lial  large  circle  is  pronounced 
the  same  as  when  initial  but  as  a  syllable  instead  of  a 
word  ;  thus,  Pss,  Psss  are  uttered  Peeses,  Peeses  Is. 

WORDS  HAVING  S  OR  S  AND  Z  CONSONANT  SOUNDS  ONLY. 

116.  Monosyllables  containing  only  S  or  S  and  Z 
consonant  sounds  that  begin  with  S  and  end  with  S  or 
Z    and   similar  dissyllables    that    are  not  compounds 
are  always  written  with  the  initial  S  stem  and  the 
small  or  large  final  circle;  as  in   "sauce,  size,  sauces, 
sizes."  (See  sec.  106). 

117.  Likewise  dissyllables  and  trissyllables  that 
begin  with  a  voAvel  and  contain  only  S  or  S  and  Z 
consonants  are  written  with  the  S  stem  and  small  or 
large  circle;  as  in  "asses,  assize,  assesses,  assizes." 

a.  Words  other  than  monosyllables  and  having 
only  S  or  S  and  Z  consonants  and  which  begin  with  S 
and  whose  second  vowel  is  the  end  of  the  second 
syllable  or  are  compounds  are  written  as  in  engravings 
103,  b  and  105. 

LESSON  10. 
WHEN  TO  USE  THE  S  AND  Z  STEMS. 


THE  STEM  S. 

118.  S  is  written  with  the  stem: 

a.  After  an  initial  vowel  and  before  a  final  one. 

b.  Initially  or  finally  before  or  after  two  vowels 
or  a  diphthong  and  a  vowel  and  also  medially  if  con- 
venient,   but   if    not   the    circle    is    employed.      (See 
'•miasma"   and    "museum,"    sec.    and   eng.    100  and 
"siesta,"  Reading  Exercise  84  to  132,  line  9). 

119.  In  all  cases    above  derivative  words  usually 
maintain   the   forms  of   their  primitives.     (See   also 
sec.    105.) 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


120.  8  is  also  written  with  the  stem  as  explained 
in  sections  103,  b,  c  and  110  and  117. 

a.  It  is  also  written  with  the  stem  in  the  words 
"cession"  and  "session."  (See  eng.  214,  line  4.) 


THE    STEM    '/.. 


121.  The  above  rules  apply  also  to  Z  except  that 
initially  the  stem  is  always  used  unless  a  /  double 
consonant  occurs,  in  which  case  the  circle  is  written. 
(See  sees.  82  and  90,  a  and  93). 


LESSON  11. 
LOOPS. 


THE    INITIAL    ST    LOOP. 

122.  The  double  consonant   St    (see  sec.   !»»»)    is 
represented  initially  by  a  loop  on  the  right  or  upper 
side  of  straight  stems  and  on  the  inner  side  of  curved 
ones.     The  loop  is  made  half  as  long  as  the  stem  to 
which  it  is  attached.     It  is  not  used  initially  on  down- 
ward R  or  L.     (See  sec.  12.)     Its  name  is  Stay  and 
its  stenotypes  are  st.     When  it  occurs  initially  it  is 
always   pronounced  as  a  separate  word ;  thus,  stP,   stR 
are  spoken,  Stay  Pee,  Stay  Ree. 

123.  A  vowel  between  the  loop  and  stem  is  writ- 
ten before  the  latter  while  one  following  the  stem  is 
written  after  it,  as  in  the  similar  case  of  the  initial  S 
circle.     Stems  with  the  initial  St  loop  never  take  an 
initial  vowel. 

124.  The  St  loop  is  used  in  all  cases  when  the 
double  consonant  St  occurs  initially  except  when  it  is 
followed  only  by  a  vowel  as  in  "stow"  or  as  in  the 
derivatives  "stower,  stowage,"  in  which  cases  the  circle 
S  and  stem  T  are  employed.      The  latter  are  also  always 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  69 

employed  when  a  vowel  occurs  between  intitial  S  and  a 
following  T,  as  in   "site,"     (See  eng.  99). 

a.  When  the  St  loop  is  written  initially,  particu- 
larly on  the  left  curves  F  and  N,  it  should  be  made  of 
the  full  length  and  proper  form  so  as  not  to  conflict 
writh  an  initial  S  or  Ss  circle. 

THE    FINAL    OR     MEDIAL    ST    LOOP. 

125.  The  St  loop  is  made  finally  and  sometimes 
medially  on  the  same  side  of  the  stems  as  described  in 
section   122  and  may  indicate  either  St  or  Zd.      Stems 
with  the  final  or  medial  St  loop  are  vocalized  the  same 
as  stems  with  the  final  circle;  namely  as  if  no  loop 
were  attached. 

a.  If  at  any  time  extra  distinction  is  desired  in  the 
case  of  words  of  one  stroke,  the  loop  may  be  shaded  to 
represent  Zd;  or  the  S  circle  and  stem  D  may  be 
employed. 

126.  The  loop11  St  is   not  employed  before  a  final 
vowel.      When  the  sounds  St  occur  thus  the  circle  S 
and  the  stem  T  are  alwa}rs  written.,     The  loop  St  is 
also  never  attached  to  a  vowel. 

127-  Final  S  or  Z  may  be  added  to  the  final  St 
loop  by  the  small  imperfect  circle  light  or  shaded. 

128.  When  the  St  loop  is  shaded  to  represent  Zd 
it  is  named  Zday  and  stenotyped  zd. 

129.  When  the  St  or  Zd  loop  occurs  finally  on  a 
stem  it  is  usually  pronounced  in  the  same  syllable  with 
the  latter;  thus,  Pst,  Fst,  Psts,  Fsts,  Kzd  are  uttered 
Peest,    Feest    (or    Efst),    Peests,    Feests    (or   Efsts), 
Eeezd. 

THE    FTNAL    OR    MEDIAL    STR    LOOP. 

130.  The  three  sounds  Str,  with  a  vowel,  usually 
short  c,  between   the  T  and  K — the  first  two  sounds 
being  the  double  consonant  St — are  represented  finally 
and  .sometimes  medially  by  a  loop  two-thirds  as  long 


70  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

as  the  stem  to  which  it  is  attached  and  somewhat  fuller 
than  the  St  loop  and  on  the  same  side  of  the  stems  as 
the  latter.  It  is  vocalized  in  the  same  manner.  The 
intermediate  vowel  may  be  indicated  by  striking  it 
through  the  loop  just  after  the  swell.  This,  however, 
is  seldom  necessary. 

131.  The  Str  loop,  the  same  as  the  St  loop,  is  not 
used  before  a  final  vowel.     The  manner  of  represent- 
ing  the  sounds  Str  in  such  connection    Avill   appear 
hereafter. 

132.  Final   S  or  Z  may  be  added  to  the  final  Sty 
loop  by  the  small  imperfect  circle  light  or  shaded. 

a.     The    Str    loop    is    never    written    initially,    or 
attached  to  a  vowel. 

133.  The  name  of  the  Str  loop  is  Ster  and  its  steii- 
otypic  representation  is  str.      A  stem  Avith  this  attach- 
ment is  usually  pronounced  the   same  as  without  it, 
simply  the   syllable  for  the  loop  being  added;  thus, 
Pstr,  Pstrs  are  named  Peester,  Peesters. 

INITIALS  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

134.  The  initials  of  proper  names  are  written  with 
the  phonographic  characters  on  the  line — X  with  the 
letter  K  and  the  final  S  circle — except  C  and  Q,  which 
are  written,  the  first  with  the  S  circle  on  the  line  and 
the  second  with  K  below  and  touching  an  imaginary 
line  half  the  length  of  a  T  stem  below  the  ordinary  one. 
When  thus  employed  as  initials  the  consonant  stems, 
are  not  vocalized. 

135.  The  initials  of  such  names  as  Phillip,  George, 
Gerrit  and  Artemus  are  written  with  the  shorthand 
stems  P,  G  and  the  tick  "a"  as  in  "at"  and  not  with 
the  phonographs  F,  J  and  "a"  as  in   "art;"  while  the 
initials  of  Cecilia,  Camilla  and  Uriah,  are  expressed 
with  the  character  C  as  in  the  last  paragraph  and  the 
short  vowel  u  and  not  with  S,  K  and  Y.     The  initials 
of  Theodore,   Sherwin  and  Charles  are  represented  by 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANVAL.  71 

Th,  Sh  and  Ch — or  if  preferred,  by  T,  S  and  C,  as 
above.  Likewise  the  heavy  sounds  of  Th  and  Sh,  if 
used,  would  be  expressed  by  the  heavy  letters  Dh  arid 
Zh  (or  D  and  Z)  just  as  the  heavy  sound  of  Ch  is  indi- 
cated by  J.  The  initials  of  Whistler  and  Hugh  are 
written  with  W  and  H  and  not  with  nW  and  HY. 

a.  By  following  the  directions  in  the  above  para- 
graphs the  initial  of  every  name  will  either  receive  the 
same  representation  as  in  the  ordinary  spelling  or  be 
thus  unmistakably  indicated.      When  phonetic  spelling  • 
is  adopted  in   script  and  print,  as  well  as  in   phono- 
graphy, the  initials  of  all  proper  names  will  of  course 
be  represented  invariably  with  the  proper  letters  of 
the  phonographic,  phonoscript  and  phonotypic  alpha- 
bets.     (1).      When  the  pronunciation  of  a  proper  name 
is  uncertain  it  should  be  written  in  the  common  long- 
hand or  in  phonoscript — preferably  the  latter  if  the 
pronunciation  is  exceptional.    (See  Prologue,  page  28). 

b.  If  preferred,    and  time   is   had,   all  initials  of 
proper  names  may  be  written  in  script. 

PUNCTUATION  AND  OTHER  MARKS. 

136.  In  reporting  in  this  system  of  phonography  it 
is  not  customary  to  punctuate  except  to  indicate  the 
period  or  the  end  of  a  sentence  by  a  blank  space  about 
as  long  as  a  triple  length  K  which  size  Avill  of  course 
vary  according  as  the  writer's  phonographic  charac- 
ters are  of  the  standard  dimensions  or  larger.  (See 
Prologue,  page  26.)  If  a  sentence  should  finish  near 
the  end  of  a  line  the  next  one  should  commence  on  the 
following  line  with  an  indentation  the  length  of  the 
period  from  the  margin;  the  space  left  on  the  line 
above  not  being  considered.  A  paragraph  should 
commence  on  a  new  line  with  an  indentation  about 
twice  as  long  as  that  for  the  period.  An  indentation 
thus  always  indicates  a  period,  the  end  of  a  sentence  or 
a  paragraph.  Sometimes,  however,  evon  in  reporting 


72  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

but  particularly  when  writing  for  one's  own  private 
use,  or  when  the  matter  is  to  be  read  by  others  it  is 
necessary  or  convenient  to  employ  both  punctuation 
and  other  marks  and  then  they  are  written  as  in  the 
following  table,  some  of  which  are  modified  from  their 
ordinary  script  or  print  forms  so  that  they  may  not 
be  mistaken  for  shorthand  characters.  As  a  general 
rule  even  when  the  punctuation  marks  are  used  the  first 
three;  viz.,  the  comma,  semicolon  and  colon  are  omit- 
ted, while  the  period,  dash  and  parentheses  are  much 
more  frequently  inserted  than  any  of  the  remaining 
forms  and  in  the  order  named.  Any  other  typo- 
graphical marks  employed  in  short  hand  than  those  in 
the  table  are  the  same  as  usual. 

a.  The  periods  and  paragraphs  instead  of  being  in- 
dicated when  reporting,  by  spacing  and  indentation  as 
explained  above,    may,    if  preferred,  be  written  with 
the  strokes  for  the  period  and  break  given  in  the  table. 

b.  As  the  length  of  a  simple  T  stem  is  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  (see  Prologue,   page  26)  that  of  a  simple  K 
stem  will  average  about  five  thirty-seconds  of  an  inch. 
Consequently  the  spacing  and  indentation  for  the  per- 
iod and  paragraph  in  the  engraved  exercises  of  this 
book  are  fifteen  thirty-seconds  and  fifteen  sixteenths  of 
an  inch,  respectively.     The  learner,  however,  need  not 
confine  himself  strictly  to  these  sizes  unless  he  prefers 
to  do  so  but  may  adopt  longer  ones  as  explained  in 
paragraph  136  above. 

c.  The  spacing  between  words  in  the  engravings 
of   this    book   average   about   three  thirty-seconds  of 
an  inch  and  is  the  standard  for  this  system.     But  the 
learner  may  adopt  a  longer  one  if  he  prefers  as  in  the 
case  of  the  spaces  mentioned  in  the  last  paragraph. 


THE  PHOXOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

137.  TABLE. 

PUNCTUATION  MARKS. 


73 


Comma 

Semicolon 

Colon 

Period 

Interrogation  (UP) 

Dash 


Doubt  (up) 

Exclamation  or  Wonder 
Ironical  Exclamation 
Parentheses 
Brackets 


/ 
(/) 
(  ) 


ORTHOGRAPHICAL  MARKS. 


Quotations  **    lf 

Hyphen  (up)  // 

Accent  / 

Apostrophe  ' 

Roman  ^ 

"     Small  Capitals  £= 
"     Large       "         = 
Heavy  Face  Roman     s  / 

Heavy  Face  Roman,  ) 
Small  Capitals      \ 


Heavy  Face  Roman, 
Large  Capitals 

Italic 

* 

"     Small  Capitals   =z 
' '     Large     ' ' 
Heavy  Face  Italic          /_ 

Heavy  Face  Italic, 
Small  Capitals 

Heavy  Face  Italic, 
Large  Capitals 


DIVISION   MARKS. 


Section 
Paragraph 

Caret 


1 


Break 


INSERTION    MARK. 


/I 


74  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC    MAKUAL. 

REFERENCE    MARKS. 


Asterisk 


Dagger  f 

MATHEMATICAL    MARKS. 


Double  Dagger 


Equals 


Minus 
Into 


Plus  4; 

Times  x 

THE    PUNCTUATION    MARKS. 

138.  The   punctuation  marks  are  also  called  Gram- 
matical Marks.     The  fir.st  three;  namely,  the  comma 
semicolon  and  colon  are  the  same  as  in  script  and  print. 
The   period  is  formed  like  a  double  length  Ch  except 
that  it  is  somewhat  longer  and  is  termed  the  Stroke 
Period  in  contradistinction  to  the  space  one.     The  in- 
terrogation mark  is  made  upward  like  a  double  length 
R  but  somewhat  longer  and  is  struck  through  the  lino 
with  about  its  first  quarter  below  it.     The  horizontal 
stroke  for  the  dash  is  made  about  the  length  of  the 
stem  K,  the  downward  tick  in  the  direction  of  Ch  be- 
ing struck  through  it  near  the  end. 

139.  The  parentheses  are  the  same  as  in  script  and 
print  except  that  they  are  made  longer  than  a  double 
length  Th  or  S  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  tho 
latter.     The  brackets  are  for  distinction  also  made  of 
the  same  length  as  the  parentheses.     The  punctuation 
or  grammatical  marks  are  eleven  in  number. 

THE    ORTHOGRAPHICAL    MARKS. 

140.  In  short  quotations  the  quotation  marks  are 
written  as  in  the  engraving.     In  long  ones,  however, 
they  may,  if  desired,  be  enclosed  in  circles  about  twice 
the  size  of  the  Ss  circle  so  as  to  be  more  readily  found. 
The  marks  may  also  for  extra  distinction  be  written  in 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


the  margin.  (See  Prologue,  page  24.")  The  joined 
marks  should  always  be  written  first  and  the  disjoined 
ones  second,  as  in  the  table,  so  as  to  distinguish  the 
beginning  and  end  of  the  quotation.  Single  quota- 
tion marks  are  made  the  same  as  in  script  but  are  sel- 
dom employed, 

a.  In  this  book  quotation  marks  are  usually  em- 
ployed only  for  quotations  or  distinction.  (  See  also 
sec.  144,  a  and  b.) 

141.  The    hyphen    is  mostly    employed    in    com- 
pound words,  but   only   when   the    component    parts 
will  not  join  readily,   as  in   "chain-gang."      In  other 
cases,  as  in   "day-book,"  it  is  omitted,  the  component 
parts  being  joined. 

142.  -    The  accent  mark  is  always  made  downward 
in  the  direction  of  Ch,  as  in  the  list.      It  is  used  only 
in  connection  with  vowels  or  diphthongs  and  is  placed 
according  to  legibility  either  directly  above  or  under- 
neath them  or  partly  higher   or  lower  and  a  little  to 
one  side — after  if  higher  and  before  if  lower;  but  always 
in  such  a  manner  that  the  end  next  the  vowel  points 
directly  toward  it.     It  is  never  placed  between  a  vowel 
and  stem.    In  the  case  of  a  vowel  before  a  perpendicu- 
lar stem  it  is  written  under,  or  under  and  before  the 
vowel  so  that  it  may  not  interfere  with  the  aspirate 
dot  should  it  be  necessary  to  write  the  latter. 

143.  The  apostrophe  is  used  to  denote  the  omis- 
sion of  letters  in  a  word  and  to  indicate  the  possessive 
case  after  the  manner  employed  in  script  and  print. 
To  denote  omission  it  is  placed  in  the  first  position  to 
the    stem.       To    indicate    the    possessive    case    it    is 
placed    in    the   third    position —  above  the   stem   on 
horizontal  and  upward  strokes  and  to  the  right  of  it 
on    downward    ones.       The    apostrophe    is    not  often 
employed. 

144.  The  remaining  orthographical  marks  are  em- 
ployed   to    indicate    roman    and    italic    letters.      The 


7G  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

intersecting  mark,  which  is  called  the  Heavy  Face  Mark, 
is  written  in  the  direction  of  Ch  and  is  struck  through 
the  horizontal  one  at  or  near  the  center,  if  the  latter 
is  short,  but  if  long,  near  the  beginning.  All  the 
characters  are  placed  under  or  near  one  or  more  letters 
according  to  convenience.  The  orthographical  marks 
are  sixteen  in  number.' 

a.  In   this  book   heavy    face  type  is  usually  em- 
ployed to  represent  letters,  words  and  figures  that  are 
to   be  distinguished   from    the  rest  of  the   text,   but 
which  are  not  emphatic.      When  thus  used  they  are 
said  to  be  for  distinction.    (See  also  par.  b.) 

b.  Again,  in  this  book  italic  is  usually  employed 
(outside  of  its  stenotyp'ic  representation)  only  for  em- 
phasis.     (See.also  sec.  140,  a.) 

THE  DIVISION  MARKS. 

145.  In  this  system  a  section  consists  of  one  or 
more  paragraphs — a  paragraph,  as  usual,  consisting  of 
a  break  in  the  writing  or  printing.     The  mark  for  the 
section  in  the  list  should  usually  be  made  without  lift- 
ing the  pen.     The  mark  for  the  paragraph  is  the  same 
as  in  script — and  also  like  the  one  in  print  except  that 
the  black  or  shaded  part  is  left  white  or  unshaded. 
Both  the  marks  for  the  section  and  paragraph  may  be 
employed  in  connected  writing  if  desired.     Usually, 
however,  the  mark  for  the  break  is  used  indiscrimin- 
ately for  either,  since  it  is  more  swiftly  written.      The 
sections  and  paragraphs  are  then  arranged  when  tran- 
scribing. 

146.  Sometimes  an  explanatory  paragraph  occurs 
within  a  section.     In  such  a  case  it  is  termed  a  Remark 
and  is  distinguished  differently  from  the  other  sul>- 
paragraphs,  namely,  by  a  number.     No  division  sign 
is  necessary  for  the  remark.     Again,  unindented  por- 
tions of   a   section    when  lettered   or    numbered    are 
called  Parts — the  letters  or  numbers  usually  being  in 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  77 

parentheses.  Finally  a  subparagraph  and  a  remark 
together  are  termed  a  Subsection.  The  division  signs 
are  three  in  number. 

147.  In  this  book  the  specific  marks  or  names  are 
not  employed  at  the  beginning  of  the  paragraphs,  but 
instead  numbers  or  letters  are  used;  the  sections  and 
remarks  being  numbered  and  the  other  breaks  which 
are  usually  for  convenience  specified  as  paragraphs, 
lettered.      Thus  "103,  a,  1"  or  "118  b,"  is  read  "Sec- 
tion  103,  paragraph  a,  remark  1,"  or  "Section  118, 
paragraph  b."      Also  "8,  (a)"  or  "135,  a  (1)"  is  read 
"Section  8,  part  a"  or   "Section  135,  paragraph,  a, 
part  1."     In  each  instance  when  the  above  notation  is 
employed    the   last    member    "1,   b,   (a)"  or   "(1)"  is 
specially  referred  to,  the  same  as  in    book,   chapter 
and  verse  in  scriptural  references;  or  the  method  may 
be  reversed;  thus  "1,  a.  103;  b,  118;  (a),  8,"  or  "(1), 
a,  135"  when  the  first  member  is  meant.     When  the 
term  '  'subsection"  is  employed,  it  includes  the  remark 
or  remarks;  thus  "Section  103,   subsection  a,"  indi- 
cates both  paragraph  a  and  the  remark  under  it. 

THE  INSERTION  MARK. 

148.  The  caret  is  employed  to  show  where  inter- 
lined  words   are   introduced   and   is   used  mostly  in 
private  composition.     It  should  be  made  quite  acute 
and  of  sufficient  length  to  be  easily  distinguished  from 
the  short  hand  characters.      It  is  written  with  its  point 
in  the   direction    of    the   interlined    matter    which  is 
usually  above  the  lino  through  which  the  caret  points. 
Sometimes,  however,   the    interlineation  is  bel'ow  the 
line  in  which  case  the  caret  is  made  with   its   point 
downward. 

THE  REFERENCE  MARKS. 

149.  There  are  three  reference  marks;  namely,  the 
asterisk,  dagger  and  double  dagger,  to  indicate  foot  or 


78  THE    PUo\or;i.'APHIC   MANTAL. 

marginal  notes.  They  are  mostly  employed  in  private 
composition. .  If  any  more  are  required  they  may  be 
doubled  or  trebled.  The  better  way,  however,  is  to 
use  numbers  or  letters  enclosed  by  circles  after  the 
manner  of  the  small  figures  or  letters  technically 
called  "superiors,"  employed  in  script  and  print.  (See 
also  sec.  46). 

THE  MATHEMATICAL,  MARKS. 

150.  The  five  fundamental  mathematical  marks, 
being  often  useful  in  shorthand,  are  included  in  the 
table.  They  should  be  made  of  the  ordinary  size. 


THE  PilONooKAPHIC  JIAXITAL.  79 


CHAPTER  IV. 

HOOKS,    ETC. 


LESSOX  12. 
INITIAL  HOOKS. 


THE  U  AND  L  HOOKS. 

151.  If  the  circumference    of  a  circle  were  to  re- 
volve around   us  it  could  do  so  only  in  two  ways — 
either  to  the  right  or  left.      Therefore  all  arcs  are  por- 
tions of  circumferences  traced   either  to  the  right  or 
left  and  called  right  or  left  arcs  or  curves. 

152.  When  a  letter,   except    upward  R  or  L,   is 
made  with  a  small  initial  right  hook  it  indicates  that  R 
is  added  to  it;  when,   except  N,   Ng   and  upward  R, 
with  a  small  left  one,   that  L    is  added.      A    curved 
stem  written  alone  or  initially  can  not  receive  a   hook 
on  its  convex  side  and  be  written   quickly  as  it  turns 
more  or  less  into  an  opposite  curve  with  a  hook  on  the 
concave  side.      Accordingly  as  the  double  consonant 
Sr  or  Zr  with  a    vowel  following  it  in  the  same  syl- 
lable does  not  exist  initially  in  English  and  the  phon- 
ograph for  it  is  thus  not  needed  in  writing,  and  as  S  or 
Z  with  a  vowel  and  R  following  is  represented  as  ex- 
yjlained  in  Chapter  III,  the  stem  S  or  Z  with  an  initial 
hook  is  used  to  represent  Thr  or  Dhr;  and  as  similar 
rules  govern  \V,  the  latter,  when  it  receives  an  initial 
hook,  becomes  Fr  and  may  be  shaded  for  Vr.      In  the 
case  of  M  and  N,  however,  which  can  not  be  so  treated 
for  lack   of  stenographic  material,   the  small  hook  on 


SO  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

these  letters  represents  R  and  a  large  one,  twice  its 
size,  L.  The  same  is  true  of  Mp  or  Mb  and  Ng, 
which  will  presently  be  further  considered,  (a.) 
Again,  a  double  sized  L  hook  is  used  on  downward  Sh 
in  addition  to  the  small  R  hook,  the  same  as  on  M  and 
N.  Upward  Shi,  the  same  as  upward  Sh  (see  sec. 
18,)  is  never  written  alone.  Downward  and  upward 
Shi  are  usually  written  initially  before  the  same  stems 
as  downward  and  upward  Sh,  as  will  be  explained  in 
the  next  chapter. 

153.  A  double  sized  left  hook   on  upward  R  adds 
L  and  a  similar  right  one  on  upward  L  adds  R.     The 
small    hooks    on    these    letters    will    be    considered 
presently. 

154.  The  large  hooks  on  upward  Sh  and  on  Y  and 
the  large  right  one  on  upward  R  are  not  used. 

155.  Downward   R  and  L   do  not  receive   initial 
hooks   in  order  that   they  may   not  conflict   with  Fr 
and  Yl. 

a.     An  initial  hook  is  never  attached  to  a  vowel. 

156.  From  the  preceding  it  will  be  seen  that  simi- 
lar hooks,  circles  and  loops  are  always  placed  on   sim- 
ilar  curves.     Also  that  the   more   frequently   occur- 
ring R  sounds  are  represented  with  right  hooks,  which 
are  more  easily  written  than  the  left  ones  because  the 
hand  proceeds  from  left  to  right.     Thus  these  hooks 
are  mostly  made  in  the  direction  of  the  writing.     If 
we  wrote  from  right  to   left  the  R   sounds  would  be 
represented   with  left   hooks  because  then  the   latter 
would  be  more  easily  written. 

THE  R  AND  L  HOOKS  ON  MP  OR  MB  AND  NG. 

157.  When  Mp  or  Mb  (see  sec.   24)    receives   an 
initial  hook  R  or  L  is  added  the  same  as  to  the  other 
letters,  the  combination  becoming  Mpr,   Mbr,    Mpl  or 
Mbl.     (See  sec.  152.) 

158.  When  Ng  receives  an  initial   hook,  however, 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXUAL. 

not  only  is  R  or  L  added  the  same  as  to  other  letters 
and  to  Mp  or  Mb,  but  also  G  is  frequently  repre- 
sented, the  combination  becoming  in  the  case  of  R 
either  Ngr  or  Nggr  and  in  that  of  L  either  Ngl  or 
Nggl.  (See  see's.  152  and  53.) 

a.  If  extra  distinction  is  ev.^r  desired  in  the  case 
of  words  containing  the  consonants  in  paragraphs  157 
and  158  those  ending  in  Br,  Bl,  Gr  or  Gl  may  be  writ- 
ten in  full  with  the  B  or  G  'hooked  stems.     This,  how- 
ever, will  seldom  be  necessary. 

b.  From  paragraph  158  it  will  be  seen  that  K  is 
not  represented  in  the  combination  of  Ng  with  an  in- 
itial hook.     Accordingly  the  combinations   Nkr    and 
Nkl  are  written  with  the  two  stems  NgKr  and  NgKl; 
as  in  "inker,  inkle,  ranker"  and  "rankle."     (See  eng. 
165.) 

THE  R  AND  L  AND  THE  W  AND  Y  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

159.  The  consonants  R,  L,  W  and  Y  often  follow 
and  apparently  unite  with  other  consonants  at  the  be- 
ginning of  syllables  and  form  a  syllable  with  the   fol- 
lowing vowel  as  in   Pre,   Pie,   Twe  and  Tye.     These 
consonants  when  so  united  are  called  the  R  and  L  and 
the  W  and  Y  double  consonants  and  never  have  a  vowel 
between  them  as  such. 

THE  R  AND  L,  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS,    ETC. 

160.  The  R  and  L  double  consonants  are  formed 
with  the  R  and  L  hooks  as  above  described  mostly  on 
the  stems  P,  T,  K,  F,  Thand  Sh  (see  sec.  19.)    The  L 
hook  on  T  is  not  usually  employed  in  English  words. 
It   is    employed    in    foreign    ones,    however,    as    in 
"Tlascala."     (See  eng.  164,  line  6.) 

161.  The  double  consonant   stems  are,  when  more 
convenient,    also  employed  to  represent  the  single  con- 
sonants; namely,   the    same  sounds    with  a   vowel  be- 
tween as  in  Per  or    Pel.     This  is    usually  the   course 
pursued  with  the  stems  Sh  and  Th  standing  alone. 


82  THE   PHOXOORAPIUC    MANUAL. 

a.  Upward  R  with  the  largo  L  hook  (see  sec.  153) 
is  usually  employed  only  as  a  single  consonant  stem  ; 
that  is  when  a  word  occurs  between  the  R  and  L  as  in 
"oral,  rule''  or  "carol.'*     (See  eng's.  165,  line  2  and 
166,  line  2). 

b.  When  R  or  L  without  a  following  vowel  occurs 
after  M  and  before  Ch  or  Sh  a's  in  "march,  marcher, 
merge,  marsh,-  milch  "  it  is  generally  written  with  the 
hook  on  the  M  stem. 

102.     The  names  of  the  R  and  L  hooks  are  Ir  and 
11  and  their  stenotypes  are  r  and  1. 

NOMENCLATURE  AND    STENOTYPY    OF    THE  R  AND   L 
HOOKED    STEMS. 

163.  The  R  and  L  hooked  stems  and  their  steno- 
types, whether  representing  double  or  single  consonants, 
are  named  by  uttering  the  vjowel  after  the  hook,  except 
in  the  cases  of  C,  J,  M,  X,  R,  L,  Y,  Mp  and  Ng,  when 
it  is  uttered  before  it ;   thus  Pr,   PI,   Tr,    Tl,  Cr,  Cl, 
Jr,  Jl,   Mr,   Ml,  Nr,  Nl,   Rl,  Lr,  Yl,   Y\,  Mpr,  Mpl, 
Xgr,    Ngl,   are  named  Pree,   Plee,   Tree,  Tlee,  Ceer, 
Ceel,    Jeer,    Jeel,    Meer,    Meel,     Neer,  .Neel,     Reel, 
Leer,  Yeel,  Yayl,  Meeper,  Meepel,  Eenger,  Eengel  (not 
Eengger,  Eenggel). 

VOCALIZATION    OF    THE    R    AND    L    HOOKED    STEMS. 

164.  Double   consonant   stems   are    vocalized  the 
same  as  if  no  hooks  were  attached  ;  namely,  by  writing 
the  vowels  before  or  after  them. 

165.  Single  consonant  stems  are  vocalized  in  the 
same  manner,  except  that  the  intermediate  vowel,  that 
is  the  one  between  the  stem  and  hook,  is  struck  through 
the  former,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Mp  or  Mb  stem.    (See 
sec.  .M). 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  JSlJ 

a.  If  the  intermediate  vowel  is  a  dash  made  in 
the  same  direction  as  the  stem  it  is  written  with  its 
alternative  form  as  explained  in  section  32.  In  any 
case  if  necessary  for  legibility  the  intermediate  vowel 
may  be  made  somewhat  larger  than  usual.  (See  also 
sec.  51). 

1.  For  the  stenotypic  vocalization  of  the  single 
consonant  stems  see  section  52. 

166.  When  the  R  and  L  hooked  stems  occur  in  un- 
accented syllables  they  frequently  denote  Pr,  PI,  etc., 
with  what  is  called  the  Protean  Vowel  between  them. 
This  closely  resembles  short  u,  or  a  sound  between  it 
and  short  e  or  i ;  but,  as  its  name  indicates,  it  is  not  an 
accurate  or  fixed,  that  is  a  regular,  vowel,  for  it  may 
be  slightly  different  in  the  same  word  at  different  times, 
byt  not  to  extent  of  being  very  noticeable  in  ordinary 
speech.      When  inserted  it  is  usually  represented  by 
short  e.   (See  the  words  ' '  upper,  apple,  temper,  temple, 
inker,  inkle,"  etc.,  in  eng. ) 

167.  It  is  not  always  necessary  .to  write  the  inter- 
mediate vowel,   whether  regular  or  protean  (see  last 
paragraph) — particularly  the  latter — between  the  stem 
and  the  R  or  L.     When,  therefore,  it  is  omitted  in  the 
course  of  the  exercises,  the  learner  will  understand  that 
it  is  done  intentionally. 

METHOD    OF  WRITING  WORDS    CONTAINING    THE    MEDIAL 
OR    FINAL    SOUNDS    MR    OR    ML. 

168.  When  the  sounds  MR  or  ML  occur  medially 
or   finally  they  are  usually  written  with  the  Mr  or 
Ml  hooked  stem — in  the  case  of  Sh  after  the  upward 
form. 

a.  If  preferred  the  hooked  stem  may  be  employed 
after  downward  Sh  instead -of  after  the  upward  form, 
or  the  M  and  R  or  L  stems  may  be  written  if  the  hooked 
stem  is  not  thought  to  make  a  sufficiently  convenient  or 
distinct  joining.  (See  also  sec.  169,  1). 


rtl  THI-:  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

METHOD    OF  WRITING   WORDS    CONTAINING    THK    SOfNlXS 
MI'  OR  MB. 

WHEN    MP    OR    MB    IS    FOLLOWED    BT    K    OR    L. 

169.  The  Mpr  or  Mpl  hooked  stem  (see  sec.  157) 
is  generally  used  when  the  accent  is  on  the  vowel  pre- 
ceding the  MP  or  MB  and  a  vowel  and  It.  or  L  follows 
the  P  or  B ;  as  in  "umpire,  simper,  temper,  amber, 
somber,  lumber,  ample "  or  "amble,  assemble,  sample '' 
or  "cymbal,  rumple"  or  "rumble,  jumper  " —Mpr, 
sMpr,  TMpr,  Mpr,  sMpr,  LMpr,  Mpl,  SMpl,  sAIpl, 
RMpl,  JMpr.  (See  paragraphs  1  and  d). 

1.  The  Mpr  or  Mpl  .hooked  stem,  the  same  as  the 
Mr  or  Ml  one  (see  sec.  168)  is  usually  written  after 
upward  Sh  instead  of  after  the  downward  form.  If 
preferred,  however,  it  may  be  written  after  the  lattdr 
or  the  Mplt  or  MpL  stems  may  be  employed  if  the 
hooked  stem  is  not  thought  to  make  a  sufficiently  con- 
venient and  distinct  joining. 

a.  The  Mpr  or'Mpl  hooked  stem  is  never  used  when 
M  is  the  initial  sound  in  a  word. 

b.  The  Pr,  PI  or  Br,  Bl  hooked  stems  are  generally 
used  after  M  .when  PR,  PL,  etc.,  occur  as  double  con- 
sonants and  also  as  single  consonants  (the  intervening 
vowel  being  unaccented)  after  initial  M,  or  when  M  is 
followed  by  two  vowels  before  PR,   PL,  etc.,  as  in 
"empress,    ambrosia,    employ,     emblem,      lamprey, 
Bimbley,   Mabley,  May  per,  maple,  mobile"  or  "ami- 
able"—MPrs,    MBrZh,   MP1,   MB1M,  LMPr,  BMB1, 
MB1,  MPr,  MP1,  MB1. 

1.  The  last  paragraph,  of  course,  does  not  apply 
to  derivative  words,  which  are  usually  written  with 
the  forms  of  their  primitives  ;  thus,  MpR,  mobber. 

c.  In  all  other  cases,   that  is  when  MPR,    MPL, 
etc.,  occur  after  an  initial  vowel  the  accent  (except  in 
derivative  words)  being  after  MP  or  MB  and  before 
R  or  L,  the  Mp  and  R  or  L  stems  are  generally  em- 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    5IAXUAL.  85 

ployed,  as  in  "impair,  embark,  embarras,  impale, 
embellish "  — MpR,  MpRK,  MpRs,  MpL,  MpLSh. 
d.  The  Mp  and  R  or  L  stems  are  also  employed  for 
alternative  forms  for  words  having  the  same  or  similar 
consonants  in  which  the  accented  vowel  precedes  MP 
or  MB  as  in  paragraph  169  above.  Thus  "symbol" 
is  written  sMpL  so  as  to  distinguish  it  from  sMpl  ijpr 
"cymbal,"  when  the  vowels  are  omitted  in  the  Report- 
ing Style.  (See  also  sec.  60,  b). 

170.  From  the  preceding  it  will  be  observed  that 
except  after  an  initial  vowel  and  when  M  is  the  initial 
sound    (see   paragraphs    169    and   a)    the   same  rules 
mostly  govern  the  writing  of  Mpr  and  Mpl  as  Mr  and 
Ml.      (See  sec.  168). 

WHEN  MP  OR  MB  IS    NOT  FOLLOWED  BY  R  OR  L. 

171.  The  Mp  stem  (and  not  the  stems  M  and  P  or 
M  and  B)   is  generally  used  when  R  or  L  does  not 
follow  MP  or   MB;  as  in  "map,   mob"  or    "imbue, 
impeach,    humbug,     campana" — Mp,     MpC,     hMpG, 
KMpX. 

a.  From  the  last  paragraph  it  will  be  perceived 
that  the  P  or  B  simple  stem  is  seldom  employed 
after  M. 

THE  W  AND  Y  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 

THE    LARGE    W    HOOK. 

172.  The  W  double  consonants  (see  sec.  159)  are 
formed  with  a  large  initial  left  hook,  twice  the  size  of 
a  small  one,  on  the  straight  stems  P,  T,  Ch  and  K  and 
on  the  left  curves  F  and  Th  and  are  vocalized  the 
same  as  the  L  double   consonant   stems.       (See  sec. 
104). 

a.  The  large  initial  W  hook  is  not  formed  on 
upward  R  or  on  the  left  curves  N,  Y  and  upward  Sh, 
since  the  two  former  already  have  a  large  L  hook  and  the 


8G  THE   PHOXOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

two  latter  do  not  take  a  large  hook.  (See  sees.  152 
to  154). 

173.  The  W  double  consonant  stems  are  not 
employed  to  represent  the  single  consonants;  such 
words  as  '  'Kewaunee"  being  written  with  the  stems  K 
and  W. 

.174.  The  W  hook  is  not  used  in  the  middle  of 
words  if  inconvenient  to  join.  In  such  cases  it  should 
be  omitted  and  the  small  W  consonant  stem  and  vowel 
as  in  section  60  inserted,  disjoined  after  the  stem  let- 
ter instead.  (See  the  word  "esquire,"  the  last  in 
eng.  174;  and  the  word  "frequency,"  the  third  from 
the  end  of  the  first  line  of  eng.  200). 

175.  The  Y  double  consonants,  which  mostly  occur 
before  the  long  vowel  u,  are  written  as  in  sections  00 
and  62,  the  double  sized  initial  right  hook  not  being 
employed. 

176.  The  name  of  the  large  "W  hook  is  Wi.     (See 
sec.  97). 

177.  The  large  W  hooked  stems  and  their  steno- 
types  are  named  with  the  long  vowel  e  after  them  in 
the  same  syllable;  thus,  Pw,  Bw,   Tw,   Dw  are  pro- 
nounced Pwee,  Bwee,  Twee,  Dwee. 

THE    SMALL    W    AND    Y    HOOKS. 

178  A  small  initial  left  hook  on  upward  R  pre- 
fixes W  and  a  right  one  prefixes  Y.  Either  hook  may 
be  shaded  initially  for  the  aspirate  sound.  The  stem 
is  vocalized  the  same  as  stems  with  the  breath  ticks  or 
initial  S  circle.  In  the  case  of  such  words  as  "aware" 
and  "oyer"  the  initial  vowel  is  placed  before  the  AV 
hook  or  under  the  Y  hook,  but  not  before  the  begin- 
ning of  the  stem. 

179.  A  small  initial  right  hook  on  upward  L  pre- 
fixes W.  It  may  be  shaded  to  represent  the  aspirate. 
The  stem  is  vocalized  the  same  as  R  with  the  initial  Y 
hook  in  the  last  paragraph. 


THE   PHOXOGRAPIirr    MANUAL.  S7 

180.  The  small  W  or  Y  hook  on  R  or  the  small  W 
hook   on    L    is  always   employed  except    where  two 
vowels  intervene  between  the  W  or  Y  and  the  R  or  L, 
in  which  case  the  stems  W  and  Y  are  used  with  the  R 
or  L  stem. 

181.  The  names  of  the  small  W  and  Y  hooks  are 
Weh  and  Yeh — pronounced  without  the  h;  viz,   We 
and  Ye — and  their  stenotypes  are  w  and  y. 

182.  The  small  W  and  Y  hooked  steins  and  their 
stenotypes  are  named  with  the  long  vowel  e  between 
the  hook  and  stem,  thus,    ?«?R,   ?/R,   ?/?L   are  uttered 
Weer,  Yeer,  Weel. 

IMPERFECT    INITIAL     HOOKS,     ETC. 

183.  Sometimes  when  an  initial  hook  is  joined  to 
a  preceding  letter  it  can  not  be  perfectly  formed.      In 
such  cases  the  hook  is  made  writh  a  slight  offset  of  the 
pen,  usually  on  the    preceding  stem;  as    in    "taper, 
trigger,  trimmer,    trammel,    chimer,   assnmer,   color, 
ripple,  camel,  chamber,  jumble,  assemble,"  in  engrav- 
ing 167  and  "Rockwell"  in  engraving  179. 

a.  L  with  initial  hooks  or  R  with  the  initial  right 
hook  is  not  usually  written  after  T,  S,  Ch  and  clown- 
ward  Sh.  In  such  cases  the  words  are  written  with 
the  initial  L  hook  stems,  the  R  and  L  stems  or  with 
one  of  the  latter  and  the  small  disjoined  W  and  Y 
characters  as  explained  in  Section  60;  or  in  the  case  of 
Sh,  with  the  upward  form  before  the  W  hook  on  L 
and  the  Y  one  on  R.  (See  also  sees.  168  and  169). 

LESSON  13. 

S    PREFIXED    TO     INITIAL    HOOKS. 

184.  A    .small    initial    right    circle    on    straight 
stems    (thus    changing    the    It    hook    into    a    circle) 
and  on  the   hooks  of  right  curves,  prefixes  S  to  the  R 
scries  of  hooked  stems,  to  the  Y  hook  on  R,  to  the  W 


88  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

hook  on.  L  and  to  the  large  'L  hooks  on  M,  Mp 
and  Sh. 

a.  S  is  used  on  the  Y  hook  only  in  the  Reporting 
Style. 

185.  A  small  initial  left  circle  on  the  hooks  of 
straight  stems  and  left  curves  prefixes  S  to  the  L  and 
W  series  of  hooked  stems,  to  the  W  hook  on  R  and  to 
the  small  R  hook  on  N  and  IS'g. 

a.  When  the  circle  is  written  within  the  hook  as 
above,  it  is  made  smaller  and  more  oval  than  usual. 

186  The  circle  S  as  above  is  used  to  represent 
initial  S  whether  the  latter  is  followed  immediately  1  >y 
a  vowel  or  forms  part  of  an  S  double  consonant  or 
occurs  as  in  section  188  hereafter.  ' 

187.  The  double  consonant  Sw  is  written  before  R 
or  L  according  to  the  principle  in  section  163;  that  is  it 
is  written  with  the  circle  and  hook  when  one  vowel 
intervenes  between  the  W  and  the  R  or  L  and  with  the 
circle  and  stem  when  two  vowels  intervene.      Sw  is 
also  written  with  the  circle  antl  stem  when  a  vowel 
intervenes  between  the  S  and  W,  as  in  "suwarrow"  or 
"Sewell. v     The  last  observation  applies  also  to  Sy. 

THE    S    TREBLE  CONSONANTS,     ETC. 

188.  The  consonant  S  apparently   unites   with  the 
R,  L  and  W  and  sometimes  the  Y  double  consonants, 
as  in  the  syllables  Spre,  Sple,  Skwe,  Spye.     These  are 
called  the  S  Treble  consonants  and  never  have  a  vowel 
among  them  as  such.     They  are  usually  formed  in 
English  only  on  the  straight  stems  P,  T  and  K. 

189.  When  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the 
R  and  L  hooks  should,  if  possible,  be  formed  after  the 
circle  S.      Sometimes,  however,  they  may  be  indicated 
by  making  a  loop  on  the  previous    stem,    as  in  the 
words   "dispraise"  and  "explicit."     Where  it  is  not 
convenient  to  plainly  indicate  the  hook  with  the  loop, 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  89 

it  should  be  omitted,  as  in  the  word  "sensible."  (a). 
Again,  the  R  hook  on  K,  F  and  their  heavy  cognate 
letters,  when  they  occur  after  T  or  D  maybe  indicated 
by  making  a  left  circle  on  the  T  or  D.  The  R  hook  on 
P  or  B  likewise  may  be  indicated  by  the  left  circle  on 
Ch  or  J,  as  in  "jasper." 

NOMENCLATURE    AND  STENOTYPY    OF    THE    INITIAL    HOOK 
STEMS    WITH  S  PREFIXED. 

190.  When  the  S  circle  is  prefixed  to  an  initial 
hook  stem   standing  alone  the  phonograph  is  usually 
pronounced  simply  by  prefixing  the  S  sound  to  that  of 
the  hooked  stem;  thus,  sPr,  sPl,  sBr,   sShr,  sNr,  sNl, 
s»'R,  s.yR,   sKw, -sMpr,  sMpl,  sNgr,  sNgl  are  named 
Spree,  Splee,Sbree,  Sshree,  Sneer,  Sneel,  Sweer,Skwee, 
Smeeper,  Smeepel,  Seenger,   Seengel.     (See  eng.  184 
to  186.) 

191.  When   the  S  circle  is  made  regularly  within 
an  initial  hook   on  a  final  or  medial  stem  it  is  pro- 
nounced in  the  same  syllable  with  the  stem  which  pre- 
cedes;   thus    KsTr,    DsPr,    PrsKr,    DsPl,    KsPl   are 
spoken  Kees  Tree,  Dees  Pree,  Prees  Kree,  Dees  Plee, 
Kees  Plee,  (see  the  words  "extra,  dispraise,  prescribe, 
display"  and  "explore"  eng.  1S9.) 

192.  If,  however,  it  is  not  made  regularly  within 
the  hook  but  half  on  the  back  of  a  preceding  opposite 
curve  to  that  of  the  hook  it  is  named  and  represented 
in   stenotypy  the  same  as  in  section  96;  thus  VsPr, 
V*Tr  are  pronounced  Vee  Us  Pree,  Vee  Us  Tree.     (See 
the  words  "vesper"  and  "vestry"  in  eng.  189  line  2.) 

193.  The  same  method  is  followed  when  the  circle 
is  not  made  within  the  hook;  thus  D-s-Kr,  D.s-Fr,  JsPr 
are  uttered  Dee  Us  Kree,  Dee  Us  Free,  Jee  Us  Pree. 
(See  the  words  "descry,  decipher"  and  "jasper,"  eng. 
l<s:->,  a.) 


90  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

SS   AND    ST    PREFIXED    TO    THE    R    HOOK    ON    STRAIGHT 
STEMS. 

194.  A  large  right  Ss  circle  or  a  right  St  loop 
may   be   prefixed  to  the  R  series  of  straight  stems. 
Neither  character  is  ever  made  within  the  hook. 

a.  In  the  reporting  style  the  right  Ss  circle  is  also 
prefixed  to  the  Y  hook  on  R.  The  right  St  loop4,  how- 
ever, is  not  used.  (See  also  see's.  154  and  175.) 

SS    PREFIXED    TO    THE  L    HOOK    ON    FINAL    UPWARD    R. 

195.  Ss  may  be  prefixed  by  the  large  left  circle  to 
the  L  hook  on  final  upward  R,  half  of  the  circle  being 
made  on  the  hook  and  half  on  the  preceding  stem;  as 
NssRl,  necessarily.       (See  also  sec.  88.) 

THE    H  TICKS  JOINED  TO    ALL  INITIAL    HOOK    STEMS. 

196.  The  H  ticks  may  be  joined  to  all  initial  hook 
stems,  either  the  downward  or  upward  form  being  em- 
ployed  according    to   convenience.       The   downward 
form  is  used  on  all  hooks  except  those  on  K,  R,  up- 
ward Sh,  M,  L  and  the  R  hook  on  F,  in  which  cases 
the  upward  one  is  written.     (See,  also,  paragraphs  27 
and  a  and  76  to  81.) 

a.  These  ticks  are  seldom  joined  to  the  hooked 
stems  when  the  latter  occur  medially  or  finally. 

THE    H    TICKS    AND     THE     SMALL    W     AND    Y    HOOKS. 

197.  The  H  ticks  are  never  joined  to  the  small  W 
and  Y  hooks  in  the  same  syllable  with  the  latter  on 
upward   R   and   L;   these   hooks   being  then  usually 
shaded   initially  instead.      If   extra  distinction  is  de- 
sired, however,  the  aspirate  dot  may  be  written  before 
the  hook  in  addition.      But  this  will  seldom  be  neces- 
sary.    (See  also  sec.  28.) 


THE   PHONOGRAPAIC   MANUAL.  91 

OMISSION  OF  THE  H  TICKS. 

198.     The  H  ticks  may  be  omitted  altogether  be- 
fore the  hooked  stems  if  desired.     (See  also  sec.  81.) 

LESSON  U. 
FINAL  HOOKS. 


THE    N    HOOK. 

199.  A   small  final  right  hook  on  straight  stems 
adds  N.     On  curved  ones  N  is  added  by  a  small  hook 
on  the  concave  side.      The  stems,  like  those  with  the 
final  S  circle,   are  vocalized  the  same  as  if  no  hook 
were  attached. 

200.  The  N  hook  is  often  used  medially  as  well  as 
finally  in  a.  word. 

a.  When   two   Ns   with   a   vowel   between   occur 
medially,  the  first  is  usually  written  with  the  hook  and 
the  second  with  the  stem  if  the  accent  precedes  both 
Ns,  but  if  it  precedes  the  second  N  the  method  is  re- 
versed.    The  latter  method  is  also  usually  followed  in 
compound  words.      In  all  cases  derivatives  usually  re- 
tain the  forms  of  their  primitives.     (See  see's.    107 
and  108.) 

b.  When  N  without  a  following  vowel  occurs  be- 
fore   Ch   after    straight   stems   and  right  curves  the 
hook  is  used.     When  it  occurs  thus  after  left  curves 
the  stem  is  employed.     The  hook  is  never  used  before 
a  final  vowel;  the  stem  then  being  written  instead  as 
in  the  word  "penny." 

c.  If  the  learner  prefers   he  may    write  the    stem 
N  in  all  cases  when  N  occurs  medially  before  Ch,  ex- 
cept after  K  and  W. 

d.  When    the    word   "stone,"    or  one  of   similar 
formation,  occurs  finally  in  a  word  it  is  usually  writ- 
ten with  the  S  circle,  the   T  stem  and  N  hook;  thus, 
ShNsTn,     Shcnstone,     LMsTn,   limestone.       When  it 


;>_  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

occurs  alone  or  initially  it  is  written  with  the  initial 
St  loop  and  X  stem  as  explained  in  section  124,  thus, 
stN,  stone;  stXPL,  stone-pile;  stXMsX,  stone-mason. 

201.  The  X  hook  on  straight  stems   formed  into  a 
circle  represents   Xs.     The    large    circle    so   formed 
represents   Xss.     The  Xs  and   Xss  circles   are   easily 
distinguishable   from  the   S  and  Ss  circles  since   the 
former  are  right  circles   and  the  latter  left  ones,  and 
are  also  on  opposite  sides  of  the  stems. 

202.  The  S  circle  may  be  added  to  the  X'  hook  on 
curves,  but  the  Ss  circle  cannot  be  so  added;  the  stem 
X  and  the  Ss  circle  always  then   being  used.      The  S 
circle  may   sometimes  be   added    medially  to   the   X' 
hook,   as  in    "ransom."     An,S  treble  consonant  may 
also  be  written  within  the  X  hook,  if  there  is  room,  to 
indicate  the  K  hook    by  lengthening  the  circle  into  a 
loop,  as  in  "minstrel." 

203.  Xst  and  Xstr  may  be  added  to  straight  stems 
by  making  the  N  hook  into  a  right  St  and  Str  loop. 
When  Xst  and  Xstr  occur  after  curved  letters  they  are 
usually  written  with  the  N  stem  and  St  and  Str  loops. 

204.  The  names  of  the  X"  hook,  Xs  and  Xss  circles, 
Xst  and  Xstr  loops  are  In,  Ins,   Insess,  Inst  and   Instr 
and  their  stenotypes  are  n,  ns,  nss,  nst  and  nstr. 

205.  A  stem  with  any  of  the  above  attachments  is 
usually  pronounced  the  same  as  without  it,  simply  the 
syllable   for   the  attachment   being  added;  thus,    Pn, 
Prn,  Pin,  X'n,  Xns,  Nr,  Ngn,  Pns,  Pnss,  Pnst,    Pnstr, 
Pnsts,  Pnstrs  are  spoken  Peen,    Preen,   Pleen,    Neen, 
Xeens,    Xeern,     Eengeen,     Peens,     Peenses,     Peenst, 
Peenster,  Peensts,  Peensters. 

a.  When  the  S  circle  is  made  within  the  X  hook 
on  a  straight  stem  they  are  pronounced  separately; 
thus  RnsM  are  uttered  Keo  In  Iss  Mee. 

THI:  F  HOOK. 

206.  A  small  final  left  hook  on  straight  sU-msadds 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  93 

F  or  V.  The  stems  are  vocalized  like  those  with  the 
N  hook.  (a).  This  hook  is  used  medially  as  well  as 
finally  (b),  bat  never  before  .a  final  vowel;  the  F  or  V 
stem  then  being  employed,  (c).  The  circle  S  may  be 
written  within  the  hook;  but  not  the  Ss  circle.  In 
such  cases  the  stem  F  or  V  is  employed,  (d).  If  de- 
sired the  hook  may  be  shaded  to  indicate  V;  but  this 
is  seldom  necessary. 

207.  The  name  for  the  F  hook  is  If  or  Iv  and  its 
stenotype  is  f  or  v. 

208.  A  stem  with  the  hook,  or  hook  and  circle,  is 
pronounced  as  usual,  simply,  the  sound  for  these  being 
added;  thus,  Pf,   Prf,    Prfs  are  uttered  Peef,   Preef, 
Preefs. 

a.  When  Fr  occurs  finally  after  a  straight  stem  it 
is  usually  written  with  the  F  hook  and  upward  R  stem 
as  in  "coffer,  puffer,  tougher,  devour,  chaffer,  river." 
(KfR,  PfR,  TfR,  DfR,  CfR,  RfR). 

b.  But  when  Fl    thus  occurs   it  is  usually  written 
with  the.  Fl  stem    as  in    "cavil,   bevel,    trifle,   jovial, 
ruffle,  revel,"  (KV1,  BV1,  TrFl,  JV1,  RF1,  RV1). 

LESSON    15. 

THE  TEE  HOOK. 

209.  A  large  final  right  hook  on  all  straight  stems 
adds  Tr,  Dr,  Thr  or  Dhr  (the  context  indicating  which) 
with  a  vowel  between  the  T,  D,  Th  or  Dh  and  the  R. 
The  stems  are  vocalized  like  those  with  the  N  and  F 
hooks.     The   hook,  which  is  called  the  Ter  hook,  is 
vocalized  by  striking  the  intermediate  vowel  or  char- 
acter through  it  just  after  the  curve  after  the  manner 
of  vocalizing  the  Str  loop.     This,  however,   is  seldom 
necessary.      Stems  with  the  Ter  hook  may  be  used  in 
connection  with  other  stems  as  well  as  alo'ne. 

a.      If  extra  distinction  is  ever  desired  b'etween  or 
among  words  ending  with  the  above  syllables  those  in 


(|  (.  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

Dr,  Thr  or  Dh.r  may  be  written  in  full  with  the  I>r, 
Thr  or  Dhr  hooked  stems.  But  these  distinctions  will 
seldom  l>e  needed. 

b.  The  terminal  sounds  Thr  with  a  vowel  between 
the  Th  and  R  as  in  "Arthur1'  seldom  occur.  Those 
of  Dhr,  however,  their  heavy  sounds  as  in  "gather," 
happen  very  frequently. 

210.  S  or    Z  is   added  to  this  hook   by  the  small 
circle. 

211.  When  the  Ter  hook — which  is  a  right  hook- 
occurs  on  a  stem  that  follows  a  right  curved  one  with- 
out an  angle    it  is  somewhat  difficult  to  preserve  the 
straightness  of  the  stem,  since  both  the  curve  and  hook 
are  on  the  same  side  of  the  latter.      In   such  cases.  a> 
in  the  words   "elector,  selector"  and  "escheator"   the 
termination  may  be  written  with  the  R  hooked  stem 
Tr  instead  of  the  Ter  hook,  if  preferred,  as  in  the  last 
three  examples  in  the  engraving. 

a.  It  is  not  usually  necessary  to  shade  the  hook  to 
indicate  the  heavy  sound  Dr  or  Dhr. 

b.  The   Ter    hook    is    never    used    before    a    final 
vowel. 

212.  The  stenotypes  for  the  Ter  hook  are  tr  or  dr, 
the  latter  being  employed  if  the  hook  is  shaded. 

213.  A.  stem  with  the  Ter  hook  is  usually  named 
by  adding  the  syllable  for  the  hook  to  that  of  the  stem ; 
thus,    Dtr,    sTter,    Rtr,    sRtr   stRtr   are   pronounced 
Deeter,   Steeter,  Reeter,   Sreeter,   Stay  Reeter.     The 
same  course   is  pursued  if  the  hook  is  shaded  for  Dr 
or  Dhr. 

LESSOX  16. 

THE    SHUN    HOOK. 

214.  A  large  final  left  hook  on  straight  stems  and 
a  large   final-  one  on  curves  adds  Shn  or  Zhn  with  a 
vowel  between  the  Sh  or  /£h  and  X.      The  hook,  which 
is  called  the  Shun  hook,  may  be  used  medially  when 


THE    PHOXOfiRAPHrC    MAXCAK  <J5 

convenient.  The  stems  are  vocalized  like  those  with  the 
N,  FandTer  hooks.  The  Shun  hook  may  be  vocalized 
the  same  as  the  Ter  hook.  This,  however,  is  seldom 
necessary  as  the  intermediate  vowel  is  usually  short  u. 
S  or  Z  is  added  to  this  hook  by  the  small  circle. 

a.  It  is  not  usually  necessary  to  shade  the  hook  to 
indicate  the  heavy  sound  Zh. 

b.  The   Shun   hook    is  never  used  before  a  final 
vowel. 

215.  The  stenotypes  for  the  Shun  hook  are  shn  or 
zhn,  the  latter  being  employed  if  the  hook  is  shaded 

216.  A  stem   with  the  Shun  hook  is  usually  pro- 
nounced the  same  as  when  without  it,  simply  the  syllable 
for    the    hook    being  added ;    thus    Dshn   is   spoken 
Deeshun.     The  same  course  is  pursued  if  the  Zhun 
hook  is  added. 

a.  When  upward  R  or  L  follows  the  Shun  hook  on 
a  perpendicular  stem  the  junction  is  rendered  some- 
what easier  by  curving  the  end  of  the  hook  slightly 
inward.  (See  engraving  214,  line  6). 

THE    SHUN    CURL    Oil    QUADRANT. 

217.  Shn  or  Zhn,  with  a  vowel  between  the  Sh  or 
Zh  and  the  X,  is  added  to  a  final  S  or  Ns  circle  by  con- 
tinuing the  latter  through  to  the  other  side  of  the  stem 
and  there  forming  a  small  curl  or  quarter  circle.     It 
may  also  be  occasionally  added  to  a  circle  on  a  final 
hook.     The  curl,  which  is  called  the  Shun  curl  or  Shun 
quadrant,  may  be  used  medially  as  well  as  finally.    The 
vowel  immediately  following  the  circle  is  written  before 
or  above  the  curl,  whichever  is  most  convenient.     The 
Shun  curl  may  be  vocalized  after  the  manner  of  the 
Shun  hook  by  striking  the  intermediate  vowel  through 
it.     This,  however,  is  seldom  necessary  as  the  vowel 
is  usually  short  u.     S  or  Z  is  added  to  this  curl  by  the 
small  circle. 


<j(j  TlfE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANTAL. 

218.  The   curl    is    written    with   its  end  at  right 
angles  to  that  of  its  stem  except  on  horizontal  curves 
when  the  end  is  brought  around  somewhat  more  than 
at  right  angles.      Sometimes,  again,  when  the  curl  oc- 
curs medially  it  is  turned  in  whatever  direction  may  l>e 
convenient  to  form  an  angle  with  the  following  letter ; 
as  in  "processionary." 

a.  It  is  not  usually  necessary  to  shade  the  curl  to 
indicate  Zhun. 

b.  The  Shun  curl  is  never  used  before  a  final  vowel. 

219.  The  stenotypes  for  the  Shun  curl  are  tskn  or 
zJu'i.  the  latter  being  used  if  the  curl  is  shaded. 

220.  A  stem  and  circle  with  the  Shun  curl  are 
usually  pronounced  the  same  as  when  without  it,  simply 
the  name  for  the  curl  being  added;  thus  Ps.s7//?  are  spoken 
Peesshun.     The  same  course  is  pursued  if  the  Zhun 
curl  is  added. 


DOWNWARD    K    AND    L    AND    FINAL    HOOKS,    ETC. 

221.  As   downward  R  and  L  never   stand   alone 
they  can  take  a  final  hook  or -curl  only  when  occurring 
after  other  stems. 

222.  The  St  or  Str  loop  is  never  written  within  a 
final  hook. 

223.  A  final  hook  or  curl  is  never  attached  to  a 
vowel. 

224.  An  attachment  to  a-stem  is  a  circle,  loop,  hook 
or  curl. 

225.  In  this  book  a  stem  is  said  to  be  simple  when 
it  is  without  attachments  and  compound   when  it  is 
with  them. 

226.  A  prependage  is  an  initial  attachment  and  an 
appendage  is  a  final  one. 

227.  Whatever  applies  to  a  simple  stem    usually 
applies  also  to  a  compound  one. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANt'AL  97 

HOOKS  <;I:NERALLY  WRITTEN  MEDIALLY  WHEN 
POSSIBLE. 

228.  In  this  system  for  the  sake  of  uniformity  a 
hook  is  generally  written  medially  when  possible  un- 
less greater  speed  and  legibility  can  be  obtained  by 
using  the  stem  or  stems. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANTAT.. 


CHAPTER  V. 

DOWNWARD  AND   UPWARD  R,  L  AND  SH. 


LESSON  17. 

229.  In  the  first  chapter,  sections  12  to  18,  rules 
were  given  for  distinguishing  downward  and  upward 
R  and  L  from   W,    Y   and  Ch   and   downward   and 
upward  Sh  from  each  other.      In  the  present  chapter, 
rules  will  be  given  for  writing  either  form  of  R,  L 
and  Sh  in  connection  with  other  letters. 

DOWNWARD   AND    UPWARD   R. 

230.  Downward   R   (as   explained   in    Chapter    I) 
never  stands  alone  in  order  that  it  may  not  conflict 
with  AV.      For   the    same    reason    it    is    never    used 
initially  or  as  the  first  stem  in  a  word,  but  only  medi- 
ally or  finally. 

231.  Downward  R  is  generally  employed  after  the 
left  curve  F  without  appendages  when  R  is  the  last 
stem  in  a  syllable  or  word  and  not  followed  by  a  vowel. 
(See  sec.  19). 

232.  In  all  other  cases  upward  R  is  generally  used. 
It  is  also  generally  written  medially  after  F  to  avoid 
an  awkward  junction. 

a.  If  the  learner  prefers  he  may,  in  addition  to 
writing  downward  R  after  F,  write  it  also  after  the 
four  straight  stems,  P,  T,  Ch  and  K  (see  sec.  19)  with- 
out appendages — the  three  first,  with  or  without  pre- 
pendages  and  the  last  with  or  without  left  ones. 


«.o.  **.*«* 

. 

THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  Of) 

:XA5 

UPWARD    R    AFTER    FINAL    HOOKS. 

233.  Upward  R  is  usually  written  after  final  left 
hooks.     (See  par.  c  below  and  also  sec.   208,  a). 

a.  After  final  right  ones  it  is  usually  written  only 
in  derivative  words.     In  other  cases  the  initial  hook 
stems  are  generally  employed.     In  derivative  words 
after  final  right   hooks  on  perpendicular   stems   and 
those  made  downward  to  the  left,  it  is  either  written 
disjoined  or  the  initial  hook  stems  are  employed — usu- 
ally the  latter.     (See  par.  c  below). 

b.  If  preferred,  downward  R  joined  may  usually 
be  written  in  the  case  of  derivative  words  mentioned 
in  the  last  sentence  above. 

c.  Paragraphs  233  and  a  do  not  usually  apply  when 
it  is  necessary  to  preserve  a  primitive  form,   as  in 
"diverse15  or    "renerve."     In  such  cases   the   initial 
hook  stems  are  generally  written;  thus,  DVrs,  RNrV. 

234.  If  preferred,  upward  R  may  be  written  after 
final  hooks  only  in  derivative  words  and  the  initial 
hook  stems  written  in  primitives  or  compounds.. 

DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  L. 

235.  Downward  L  (as  explained  in  Chapter  I)  never 
stands  alone  in  order  that  it  may  not  conflict  with  Y. 
For  the  same  reason  it  is  never  used  initially  or  as  the 
first  stem  in  a  word,  but  only  medially  or  finally. 

236.  Downward  L  is  generally  used: 

a.  After  the  left  curve  F  without  appendages  when 
L  is  the  final  stem  in  a  syllable  or  word  and  not  fol- 
lowed by  a  vowel. 

b.  After  N  without  appendages. 

C.      After  a  final  circle  on  a  left  curve. 

d.  After  a  left  Shun  curl. 

237.  In  all  other  cases   upward  L   is   generally 
employed.     It  is  also  generally  employed  medially  to 
avoid  an  awkward  junction,  or  it  may  be  written  finally  • 
to  vary  a  form. 


100  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXt'AI.. 

UPWARD    L,    AFTER    FINAL    HOOKS. 

238.  Upward  L  is  not  usually  written  after  the 
F  hook.      Instead  the  initial  hook  stem  Fl  is  generally 
employed.      (See  also  sec.  208,  b). 

a.  It   is  usually  written   after    large    final   hooks 
except  after  right  ones  on  perpendicular  stems  and 
those  made  downward  to  the  left,  when  it  is  either 
written  disjoined  or  the  initial  hook  stems  are  emplo}red 
— usually  the  latter. 

1.  After  the  N  hook  it  is  usually  written  only  in 
derivative  words.  In  other  cases  the  initial  hook  stem 
M  is  generally  employed.  In  derivative  words  after 
the  right  N  hooks  where  the  exception  in  paragraph  a 
governs,  it  is  written  according  to  the  same  principle; 
namely,  either  disjoined  or  with  the  initial  Nl  stem. 

b.  If  preferred,  downward  L  joined  may  usually 
be  written  in  the  case  of  the  right  hooks  in  the  excep- 
tion/in paragraph  a  and  the  derivative  words  in  the  last 
sentence  of  paragraph  1. 

c.  Paragraph  1  does  not  usually  apply  when  it  is 
necessary  to  preserve  a  primitive  form  as  in  "re-enlist." 
When  this  is  the  case  the  initial  hook  stem  is  gener- 
ally written;  thus,  RNlst. 

239.  If  preferred,  upward  L  may  be  written  only 
in  derivative  words    and    the   initial  hook    stems   in 
primitives  or  compounds. 

LESSON  18. 
i 

DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  SH. 

240.  Upward  Sh  (as  explained  in  Chapter  I)  ia 
never  written  alone.     It  is  generally  used : 

a.  Before  M  with  initial  hooks,  L  with  the  AY  and 
R  with  the  Y  hook. 

b.  After  the  left  curve  F  without  appendages. 

c.  After  a  final  circle  on  a  left  curve. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  101 

d.     After  final  hooka  on  F,  N  and  upward  Sh  and 
final  left  ones  on  P,  K  and  K. 

241.  The  same  rules  govern  upward  Shi  initially 
as  upward  Sh.      (See  par.    240).      It  is  also  generally 
used  finally  after  P  and  the  left  curves  F  and  N. 

242.  In    all    other   cases    than   in   the   last    two 
sections  downward  Sh  is  generally   employed.     The 
same  is  true  of  downward  Shi.      Downward  Sh  and 
Shi  are  also  generally  employed  medially  to  avoid  an 
awkward  junction.     Sometimes,  however,   upward  Sh 
may  bo  written,  if  preferred,  as  in  '  'Schiller,  associa- 
tion" or  "rhetorician."     (See  also  sees.    152,   a  and 
183,  a). 

243.  From  the  above  it  will  be  seen  that  downward 
Shi,  except  after  P  and  the  left  curves  F  -and  N  is 
written  according  to  the  same  rules  as  Shr,  to  which 
the  above  rules,  of  course,  do  not  apply,  since  it  is 
always  made  downward. 


102  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE    HALVING  AND  LENGTHENING   PRINCIPLES. 


LESSON    19.- 
THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

244.  T  or  D  is  added  indiscriminately — the  context 
determining  which — to  any  single  length  stem,  with  or 
without  a  tinal  hook,  whether  alone  or  joined  (except 
W  or  Y  which  will  presently  be  considered)  by  making 
it  half  its  ordinary  length.     This  stem  is  vocalized  the 
same  as  a  single  length.     A  vowel  character  is  never 
halved. 

a.  It  will  be  observed  from  the  engraving  that  in 
monosyllables,  when  the  vowel  precedes  the  halved 
stem,  T  or  D  is  added  according  as  the  stem  is  light  or 
shaded. 

245.  When  a  letter  is  halved  the  added  T  or  D  is 
read  after  the  vowel  or  consonant  and  in  the  same  syl- 
lable.    The  T  or  D  is  thus  always  the  last  sound  in  a 
monosyllable  or  final  syllable  except  only  when  the 
circle  S  is  appended  in  which  case  the  latter  is  the 
last  sound  as  in  the  word  "pits"  in  engraving  244. 

246.  A  halved  stem  may  have  a  final  curl.     In 
which  case  it  is  vocalized  like  the  similar  single  length 
stem,  the  T  or  D  always  being  the  last  sound  except 
when  the  circle  S  is  added. 

247.  If  at  any  time  uncertainty  might  result  from 
halving  for  both  T  and  D  as  above,  it  is  avoided  in  the 
case  of  stems  without  final  hooks,  by  .halving  for  T 
only  and  writing  D  with  the  stem  and  in  that  of  stems 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  103 

with  final  hooks  or  a  curl  by  shading  the  latter.  This 
distinction,  however,  js  only  occasionally  necessary  in 
the  first  case  and  seldom  or  never  in  the  second. 

a.  From  the  above  paragraph  it  will  be  seen  that 
T  and  D,  when  added  indiscriminately,  are  added  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principle  as  the  circles  S  and  Z. 
(See  sec.  82). 

248-  When  two  Ns  with  T  or  D  and  a  vowel  be- 
tween occur  medially  the  first  N  is  usually  written  with 
the  hook,  the  stem  of  the  latter  being  halved  and  the 
second  with  the  stem,  if  the  accent  precedes  both  Ns, 
but  if  it  precedes  the  second  N  the  first  one  is  also 
written  with  the  hook  but  on  its  full  sized  stem  and 
the  second  N  with  the  hook  on  the  full-sized  T  or  D 
stem.  The  latter  method  is  also  usually  followed  in 
compound  words.  In  all  cases  derivatives  usually 
retain  the  forms  of  their  primitives.  (See  also  sec. 
200,  a). 

249.  When  two  vowels  occur  between  a  consonant 
and  a  following  T  or  D  the  stem  for  the  former  is  uot 
usually   halved,    but   instead  its  full  outline  and  the 
stem  T  or  D  is  employed. 

250.  A  halved  letter  is  never  used  before  a  final 
vowel.     When  a  final  vowel  follows  T  or  D  the  stem 
for  the  latter  is  always  employed. 

MP    HALVED. 

251.  When  'L'  follows  Mp  as  in  '  'stamped' '  (stampt) 
or  "tempt"  the  combination  Mpt  is  written  with  the 
Mp  halved  stem. 

a.  In  this  book  the  sound  of  P  is  not  considered 
as  omitted  between  M  and  T  as  in  "tempt"  for  the 
reason  that  all  three  consonants  M,  P  and  T  are  uttered 
one  after  the  other  the  same  as  are  Ng,  K  and  T  in 
"ranked"  and  analogously,  P  and  T  in  "tapped." 
See  also  Webster's  "International  Dictionary"  §  215 
which  (although  in  the  Vocabulary  it  pronounces  term- 


1(14  THE   PHOXOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

inal  Erapt  as  Emt)  fully  sustains  this  position  when  it 
states  among  other  observations  of  the  same  or  greater 
trend,  that  "In  a  word  like  exempt  we  have  the  first 
part  of  a  p  *  *  and  the  last  part  'of  a  t ;  thus  the 
total  combination  empt  will  not  be  simply  m  followed 
by#." 

b.     It  will  be  observed  that  the  rule  in  paragraph  a 
applies  to  derivative  words  whose  primitive.-;  end  in'P. . 
In  derivatives  like    "dreamt"    however,  whose  primi- 
tives do  not  end  in  P,  T  only  is  added. 

NG    HALVED 

252.  When  Ng  is  halved  it  does  not  include  the 
sound  of  K  as  in  "inked"  but  only  that  of  Ng  or  G 
as  in   "hanged"  or   "angered."    (See  also  sec.  158). 
Words   like"  "inked"  and    "ranked,"    therefore,   are 
written  with  the  full-sized  stem  Ng  and  halved  K.    (See 
eng.  252). 

a.  The  above  does  not  preclude  the  employment  of 
Ng  halved  to  indicate  Ngt  as  in  ' '  Wrington. ".  (See  also 
the  word  "sanctioned"  in  sec.  and  engraving  348,  b). 

1.  When  the  final  syllables  Ington  are  written  as 
in  "Irvington,  Lexington,"  etc.,  they  are  represented 
by  Ng  halved  and  N  full-sized  as  in  "Wington"  above, 
except  after  Th,  where  the  junction  is  not  distinct,  as 
in  ' '  Worthington, "  when  Ng  and  Tn  are  employed. 

W    AND    Y    HALVED. 

253.  The  light  halved  strokes  of  W  and  Y  without 
hooks  indicate  the  addition  of  T     When  shaded  in  the 
middle  they  indicate  that  of  D.      Both  the  light  and 
the   heavy   strokes   may    be  shaded    initially   for  the 
aspirate,  or  the  aspirate  dot  may  be  employed  if  the 
shading  is  not  deemed  sufficiently  distinct. 

1.  Halved  AV  and  Y  are  shaded  as  above  for  steno- 
graphic convenience  since  in  the  cases  mentioned  in 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  105 

section  236  the  stem  D  is  somewhat  awkward  to  write 
without  an  angle  after  the  full  W  and  Y  forms.  There- 
fore an  exception  is  made  as  to  them  so  that  the  halved 
light  strokes  always  represent  the  addition  of  T  and 
the  heavy  ones  that  of  D. 

a.     W  and  Y  with  hooks  are  halved  without  shading 
to  add  T  or  D  indiscriminately. 

S  HALVED  AND  WRITTEN  UPWARD. 

254.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  to  write  St  after 
the  Shun  hook  with  S  halved  and  made  upward.      The 
vowel  preceding  the  St  is  always  short  i  unless  some 
peculiarity  of  pronunciation  occurs.      It  is  therefore 
not  necessary  to  vocalize  the  halved  S  except  in  such 
cases.     The  circle.  S  may  be  added  to  it.     Its  name  is 
Aist  (or  Sayt). 

STENOTYPY  AND  NOMENCLATURE  OF   THE  HALVED  STEMS. 

255.  A  halved  stem  without  an  appendage  is  indi- 
cated in  stenotypy  by  the  character  or  characters  for 
the  full  sized  one  with  a  body  t  after  it  or  them  for  T 
or  D  indiscriminately.     When  a  hook  is  appended  it 
is  stenotyped  the  same  as  after  the  full  sized  stem  with 
the  body  t  or  d  added  according  as  the  appendage  is 
light  or  shaded.     The  same  course  is  pursued  if  two 
attachments  are  added,  as  a  hook  and  circle  or  a  circle 
and  curl.     A  halved  stem  is  usually  named  by  adding 
the  T  sound  (or  the  D  one  if  the  appendage  is  shaded) 
to  the  name  of  the  full  sized  stem.      When  the  circle  is 
added  finally  it  is  pronounced  after  the  halved  stem, 
Thus  Pt,  Bt,  Mt,  Ngt,~Wt,    IFt,  Prt,  Nrt,  sPrt,  Prnt, 
Pft,  Pvd,  Ptrt,  Pshnt,  P&shnt,  Pts,  Pfts,  Ps*/m&,  Ptss 
are   spoken  Peet,   Beet,    Meet,  Eengt,  Weet,    Wayt, 
Preet,  Neert,   Spreet,   Preent,  Peeft,  Peevd,  Peetert, 
Peeshunt,     Peesshunt,     Peets,      Peefts,      Peesshunts, 
Peetses. 


106  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

256.  The  name  of  the  T  or  D  indicated  by  halving 
is  It,  except  in  the  case  of  a  shaded  appendage  when 
the  added  D  is  named  Id. 

LESSON  20. 

LONE  OR  INITIAL  K  AND  L  HALVED. 

257.  Upward,  R  and  L  without  hooks  or  a  final  circle 
or  loop,  when  standing  alone,  are  halved  to  represent 
monosyllables.     In  which  case  if  distinction  is  ever  de- 
sired between  words  ending  in  T  and  D,  the  rule  in  sec- 
tion  247   should  be  followed,      (a.)     Dissyllables  and 
over  which  consist  of   the  letters  represented  by  the 
forms  just  mentioned  wrhether  derivatives  of  the  mon- 
osyllables  or    not   are  usually  written  with  the  two 
stems  R  or  L  and  T  or  D.   . 

b.     If  preferred  T  may  always  be  indicated  in  the 
above  words  by  halving  and  D  by  writing  the  stem  D. 

258.  Upward  R  and  L  with  hooks  when  standing 
alone  are  halved  to  add  T*  or  D  indiscriminately  the 
same  as  the  other  letters  except  W  and  Y  preceding. 

259.  The  same  rules  for  halving  usually  govern 
R  and  L  initially  as  when  standing  alone.     Also  deriva- 
tive words  in  both  cases  generally  retain  the  form  of 
their  primitives,  except  those  ending  in  Er,  etc. ,  which 
are  written  according,  to  sections  209  and  282. 

FINAL  OR  MEDIAL  R  AND  L  HALVED. 

260.  Final  or  medial  R  and  L,  simple  or  compound, 
are  usually  halved  to  add  T  or  D  in  the  same  manner 
as  when  alone  or  initial.     Ther  halved  stems  are  then 
generally  written  up  or  down  according  to  the  rules  in 
Chapter  V,  for  the  full  sized  ones.      Derivative  words 
thus  ordinarily  retain  the  forms  of  their  primatives. 

261.  The  downward  forms  never  stand  alone  l>eing 
like  their  full  sized  stems  always  used  to  end  syllables 
and  words  except  usually  L  halved  after  N  and  a  circle 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  107 

on  a  left  curve.      They  are  never  shaded  to  add  D. 

a.  Downward  R  and  L  halved  never  have  a  vowel  • 
between  the  R  or  L  and  the  T  or  D,  except  only  L 
halved  after  N  or  the  circle  on  a  left  curve.  (See  the 
last  paragraph).  This  is  because  the  vowel  always  oc- 
c'urs  before  and  never  after  the  full  sized  stems  in  the 
same  syllable  except  only  after  L  as  stated  in  section 
234.  Consequently  when  a  vowel  is  inserted  after 
either  of  these  forms,  whether  single  or  half  length, 
it  always,  except  sometimes  in  the  case  of  L  after  N  and 
the  circle  as  just  remarked  indicates  that  it  is  W  or  Y 
(see  also  sec.  14)  and  in  that  case  if  the  light  halved  Y 
stem  and  downward  L  halved  should  conflict  the  former 
may  be  distinguished  from  the  latter  by  striking  the 
vowel  through  it.  This,  however,  will  seldom  occur. 
(See  sec.  52.) 

STENOTYPY  AND  NOMENCLATURE  OF  R  AND  L  HALVED. 

262.  The  Rand  L  halved  stems,  with  or  without  ap- 
pendages, are  stenotyped  and  named  in  the  manner  ex- 
plained in  section  255;  thus  Rt,  Rts,  sRt,  stRt,   %'Rt, 
swRt,   Rft,  Rnt,   Lt,   sLt,   stLt,   ^Lt,  Lrt,   Lnt,  are 
spoken  Reet,  Reets,  Sreet,  Stay  Reet,  Weert,  Sweert, 
Reeft,  Reent,   Leet,  Sleet,  Stay  Leet,  Weelt,   Leert, 
Leent. 

LESSON  21. 

DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  SH  HALVED. 

263.  Sh  halved  whether  standing  alone  or  joined 
to   other    stems,   is  usually    written   up  or  down  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  in  Chapter  V.     After  F,  W  and 
Fr  without  appendages,  hovrever,  it  is  usually  written 
downward  after  the  first  and  upward  after  the  others. 

a.  Halved  Sh  is  written  downward  after  F  and  up- 
ward after  W  and  Fr  because  the  opposite  forms  do  not 
make  an  angle  with  these  stems,  since  the  latter  and  full 
sized  downward  and  upward  Sh  form  half  circles. 


108  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

b.  Care  should  be  taken  to  form  a  distinct  angle 
between  M  or  upward  Land  downward  Sh  halved  (see 
eng.  line  8)  so  that  the  outline  may  not  be  mistaken 
for  either  of  these  forms  with  a  Shun  hook;  to  do 
which  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  write  the  halved  stem 
at  its  proper  slope  of  sixty  degrees  as  explained  in  page 
26  and  section  18  in'  the  case  of  the  full  sized  one. 
The  halved  stem  should  also  not  be  made  too  short  or 
curved. 

264.  If  preferred  the  upward  halved  form  may  be 
written  after  T,  M  and  upward  L  instead  of  the  down- 
ward one.  Also  after  T  and  M,  the  two  full  sized  stems, 
downward  Sh  and  T,  and  after  upward  L  the  same  or  up- 
ward Sh  and  T  may  be  used  instead  of  either  of  the 
halved  Sh  strokes;  thus,  TS/it,  MSht,  LSAt,  TShT, 
MShT,  LShT  or  L#AT.  -(See,  however,  sec.  266 
following). 

THE  JUNCTION  OF  HALVED  CURVED  LETTERS    WITHOUT 
AMJLES,   ETC. 


265.  Ordinarily  a  joined  halved  curved  letter  to  be 
recognized  must  make  an  angle.    Sometimes,  however, 
it  is  necessary  to  join  halved  curves  to  other  stems 
without  angles.     When  this  happens  they  are  gener- 
ally written  only  in  the  case  of  opposite  curves  and 
after  straight  stems  as  in  the  following  section. 

266.  Any  half  length  curve  may  run  into  or  follow 
an  opposite  half  or  full  length  or  follow  any  straight 
stem  except  upward  R. 

a.  If  upward  R  were  written  at  forty-five  degrees, 
half  length  M  could  follow  it  without  an  angle,  but  as 
it  is  made  at  thirty  degrees,  the  angle  must  be  formed 
between  them.  The  same  remarks  apply  to  upward 
R  and  halved  upward  S.  The  latter  however,  is  not 
employed  after  upward  R.  Again,  halved  upward  Sh 
is  not  generally  written  after  K.  As  to  the  right  curve 
after  Ch  it  is  not  used  since  it  is  a  backward  N  stem. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  109 

b.  It  will  be  observed  that  only  two  curves  can  be 
joined   without  angles — that  is  at  a,  tangent — to  the 
same  straight  stem  and  that  they  are  always  at  right 
angles  to  each  other,  except  after  upward  R  as  above 
explained. 

c.  If  preferred  such  words  as  "defeat,  devote,"  etc., 
may  be  written  with  the  F  hook  and  T  or  D  stem  as 
in  Exercise  199  to  206,  line  17. 

HALF  LENGTHS  NOT  WRITTEN  OR  JOINED  IN  CERTAIN 
CASES. 

267.  A  half  length  curve  is  not  usually  employed 
when  it  would  run  into  or  form  a  curve  made  in  the 
same  circular  direction,  as  in  "Medusa"  and  "thanet;v 
or   into   a   straight  stem,   as  in    "viaduct;"  nor  is  a 
halved  straight  stem  when  it  would  run  into  or  from  a 
curve,    as   in    "Betsey"  and   "locked."     In  all  such 
cases,  or  in  any  case  where  the  junction  would  not;  be 
quickly  recognized,  the  full  size  stem  T  or  D  should 
be  written  with  the  preceding  or  following  full  sized 
stem,  except  where  an  alternative  form  is  used  when 

.the  latter  may  be  halved  as  in  "fished."    (See  see's,  and 
eng's.  263  and  264). 

268.  Two  halved  straight  stems  made  in  the  same 
direction  cannot  be  joined  but  must  be  written  sepa- 
rately.   Such  stems  usually  occur  in  compound  words, 
as  "chitchat,  kitcat,"  etc. 

269.  A  halved  straight  stem  can  not  be  joined  to  a 
full  sized  one  made  in  the  same  direction.     Accord- 
ingly  when  T  or  D  follows   two  similar   or  cognate 
sounds  represented  by  straight  stems  all  three  charac- 
ters are  written  in  full;  as  in  "popped,  peebeta,  cogged, 
gagged."     (See  Reading  Exercise,  5  to  10,  line  5). 

THE  FINAL  SYLLABLE  ED. 

270.  The  past  tense  and  past  participle  of  verbs 
whoso  present  tense  ends  in  T  or^l)  is  formed  by  halv- 


110  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

ing  the  stroke  T  or  D  for  Ted  or  Dec!  attached  to  a 
preceding  full  sized  stem  It  is  not  necessary  to 
vocalize  the  halved  T  or  D.  Participal  adjectives  are 
formed  in  the  same  manner. 

271.  When  the  present  tense  contains   only  the 
stem  T  or  D  with  a  breathing  or  initial  circle  or  loop 
the  past  tense  is  written  by  halving  the  stem. 

272.  When  the  present  tense  ends  with  an  St  loop 
the  past  tense  is  indicated  with  the  S  circle  and  a  half 
length  T. 

273.  When  the  halved  T  or  D  occurs  after  the 
downward  stems  W,  Fr,  T  or  Y,  where  no  angle  can 
be  made,  it  may  be  written  detached  with  its  center 
opposite  the  end  of  the  main  stem.     It  will  thus  be 
distinguished    from    the    vowel    o  should  the  latter 
happen  to  be  written  near  the  end  of  the  stem.      (For 
the    indication  of   the  disjunction   in  stenotypy,    see 
sec.  42). 

a.  The  final  syllable  Ed  of  course  never  occurs  in 
monosyllables.  Consequently  when  a  word  ends  with 
or  contains  a  halved  T  or  D  stem,  it  is  known  not  to  be 
a  monosyllable  except  halved  T  or  D  standing  alone 
with  or  without  attachments. 

274.  In  connected  writing  the  past  tense  of  those 
verbs  ending  in  Ed  whose  present  ends  in  a  halved 
stem  without  an  appendage  or  with  an  N  or  F  hook — 
that   is   in   T,  Nt  or  Ft  or  their   heavy   sounds —  is 
usually  written  with  the  same  form  as  the  present, 
except  when  extra  distinction  is  desired  in  which  case 
the  rule  in  section  270  is  followed. 

a.  The  reason  the  above  method  is  pursued  in  con- 
nected writing  is  because  the  form  for  the  past  tense 
of  such  verbs  is  longer  than  that  for  the  present. 

THE  FINAL  ST  AND  NST  LOOPS    AND    HALVED    STEMS,   ETC. 

.  275.  The  loop  St  is  added  to  halved  stems  with  or 
without  prependages  whether  ending  in  T  or  D.  If  a 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC     MANUAL  111 

vowel  occurs  between  the  loop  and  the  T  or  D  repre- 
sented by  the  halved  stem'  it  may  be  indicated  by 
striking  it  through  the  part  of  the  stem  inclosed  by 
the  loop.  This,  however  is  seldom  necessary  since  the 
vowel  is  usually  short  e. 

276.  The  loop  Nst  may  also  be  added  to  a  halved 
straight  stem  with  or  without  prependages.     It  may 
be  vocalized  in  the  same  manner  as  the  St  loop  above, 
if  desired. 

277.  When  St  occurs  after  a  hook  on  a  halved 
curve  the  halved  stem  St  is  employed.     It  is  seldom 
necessary  to  vocalize  the  latter,  since  the  vowel  is  usu- 
ally short  e. 

a,  When  the  positive  degree  ends  in  an  S  circle  or 
F  or  N  hook  on  a  full  stem  the  superlative  is  written 
with  the  large  S  circle  and  the  stemT  or  with  the  stem 
F  or  N  and  the  St  loop.  (See  the  words  "nicest, 
wisest,  choicest"  and  "basest,"  eng.  109,  line  4,  and 
"finest,  thinnest,  keenest"  and  "toughest,"  eng.  125. 
See  also  sees.  107  and  108). 

2T8.     The  Str  loop  is  never  added  to  a  halved  stem. 
.  279.     The  halved  stems  and  St  and  Nst  loops  are 
stenotyped  and  named  as  in  the  following;  thus,  Rtst, 
Rntst,  Ltst  are  spoken  Reetest,  Reentest,  Leetest. 

WORDS    ENDING    IN    TIVE    OR    TIVELY. 

280.  When  a  word  ends  in  Tive  it  is  usually  writ- 
ten with  a  halved  stem  followed  by  the  full  length  V 
one  when  convenient,  but  if  not,  with  the  stem  T  and 
F  hook.     The  termination  Tively  is  formed  in  the  same 
manner  except  that  the  VI  stem  is  added  when  con- 
venient and  when  not,  the  upward  stem  L  is  added  to 
the  V  stem. 

WORDS    ENDING    IN    TL    OR    DL. 

281.  Words  ending  in   Tl  or  Dl  preceded  by  a 
vowel  as  in   "petal,  pedal,  metal,  medal"  are  written 


112  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

with  the  halved  stem  and  L,  in  which  case  the  latter  is 
written  according  to  the  rules  in  Chapter  V. 

a.  If  extra  distinction  is  ever  desired  between  or 
among  words  ending  as  above  those  in  Dl  may  be  writ- 
ten in  full  writh  the  Dl  hooked  stem.  This  distinction, 
however,  will  seldom  be  needed. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  words  ending  in  Tl  and 
Dl  as  above  are  of  the  same  nature  as  those  in  Tr  or 
Dr  in  section  209.  Consequently  they  are  represented 
according  to  the  same  principle,  namely  by  one  termina- 
tion. If  sufficient  stenographic  material  existed  Tl 
and  Dl  could  be  represented  by  a  hook  the  same  as  Tr 
and  Dr;  but  as  this  is  not  the  case  they  are  uniformly 
indicated  with  the  halved  stem  and  L.  (See  also  sec. 
282  following). 

LESSON   22. 
THE   LENGTHENING   PRINCIPLE. 

282.  Tr,    Dr,  Thr  or  Dhr  with  a  vowel  between 
the  T,  D,  Th  or  Dh  and  the  R  are  added  to  any  curved 
letter  without  appendages  by  making  the  stem  twice 
its  ordinary  length.     The  stems  are  vocalized  the  same 
as  the  single  and  half  length  ones.     A  vowel  character 
is  never  lengthened  or  a  double  length  curve  halved. 

a.  If  extra  distinction  is  ever  desired  between  or 
among  words  ending  with  the  above  s}rllables  those  in 
Dr,  Thr  or  Dhr  may  be  written  in  full  with  the  Dr, 
Thr  or  Dhr  hooked  stems.     These  distinctions,  how- 
ever, will  seldom  be  needed.      (See  also  sees.  209  a, 
and  281,  a  and  1). 

b.  The  terminal  sounds  Thr  with  a  vowel  between 
the  Th  and  R  as  in  "ether"  or  "zither"  seldom  occur. 
Those   of   Dhr,  however,   their   heavy   sounds   as  in 
"either"  or  "neither"  happen  very  frequently.     (See 
also  sec.  209,  b). 

283.  The  sound  of  P  is  not  considered  as  omitted 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  113 

between  M  and  T  as  in -"tempter"  and  "sumpter," 
though  it  is  in  "Sumter."  (See  sec.  251,  a  and  b). 
a.  The  sound  of  K  is  usually  included  in  length- 
ened Ng,  as  in  "puncture."  If,  however,  extra  dis- 
tinction is  at  any  time  desired  for  the  termination  con- 
taining K  it  may  be  written  with  the  Ng  single  length 
stem  and  K  with  the  Ter  hook;  thus,  NgKtr.  (See 
also  sees.  158  and  252). 

284.  A  downward  double  length  curved  letter  is 
written  through  the  line  of  writing,  half  above  and 
half  below  it.     (See  also  sec.  7.) 

285.  The  light  forms  of  double  length  W  and  Y 
indicate  the  addition  of  Tr  or  Thr.     When  shaded  in 
the  middle  they  indicate  that  of  Dr  or  Dhr.     Double 
length  downward  R  and  L  are  seldom  used  and  then 
only  finally  and   are   never   shaded.      If  a  vowel  is 
inserted  after  a  light  final  or  medial  form  it  is  usually 
known  to  be  W  or  Y.     (See  also  pars.  261  and  a). 

286.  Words  ending  in  Ntr  or   Ndr   are   usually 
written  with  the  double  length  N  after  all  stems,  simple 
or  compound. 

a.  If  the  learner  prefers,  he  may  write  words  end- 
ing in  Ntr  or  Ndr  after  P,  as  "painter,  ponder,"  etc., 
writh  the  halved  stems,  the  N  hook  and  upward  R.  In 
which  cases  it  is  seldom  necessary  to  insert  the  vowel 
before  the  latter,  since  it  is  usually  short  e. 

287.  The  past  tense  of  words  written  with  double 
length  curved  strokes  is  usually  made  by  adding  to  the 
lengthened  stems  the  letter  D  joined  or  disjoined.     In 
connected  writing  the  form  for  the  present  tense  gen- 
erally stands  for  both.     If,  however,  extra  distinction 
is  desired  the  past  tense  may  be  written  in  full  without 
the  lengthened  forms;  namely,  with  the  halved  Dr, 
Thr  or  Dhr  hooked  stems.      (See  also  sec.    282,  a  and 
sec.  274). 

288.  The  vowel  may  be  indicated  before  the  R  in 
any  of  the  above  terminations  by  striking  it  through 


114  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 

the  stem  near  the  end,  according  to  the  principle  for 
vocalizing  explained  in  section  51.  It  is  not  usually 
necessary  to  vocalize  for  the  short  vowel  e,  a.s  most  of 
the  terminations  contain  this  letter. 

289.  When  an  appendage  is  added  tq  any  of  the 
double  length  curves  it  is  read  after  the  Tr,  Dr,   etc., 
as     in    the    words     "northern,     eastern,     maternity, 
moderation. " 

290.  Such  words  as  "moderation"  are  vocalixed 
by  placing  the  vowel  which  occurs  before  the  final  hook 
under  or  above  it. 

STENOTYPY  AND    NOMENCLATURE    OF    THE     LENGTHENED 

STEMS. 

291.  Lengthened    stems  with  or  without  append- 
ages are  stenotyped  and  named  after  the  manner  ex- 
plained in  section  255  for  halved  ones,  the  body  letters 
tr  standing  for  Tr,  Dr,  Thr,  or  Dhr  indiscriminately, 
thus  Ftr,  Vtr,  Mtr,  Mrtr,    Mptr,    Mprtr,    Ngtr,    Ltr, 
Ztr,  toLtr,  Wtr,   TFtr,   Nrtrn,  Ltrn,    Mprtrn,    Ltrshn 
are  uttered  Feeter,  Veeter,  Meeter,  Meerter,  Empter, 
Emperter,  Eengter,  Leeter,   Layter,  Weelter,   Weeter, 
Wayter,  Neertern,  Leetern,    Empertern,    Leetershun. 

LONG  AND  SHORT  OUTLINES. 

292.  In  concluding  this  chapter  on  the  halving  and 
lengthening  principles  the  learner  is  informed  that  he 
will  soon  ascertain  by  practice  which  a>re  the  best  out- 
lines to  use.      It  is  sometimes  speedier  to  write  a  long 
outline   for  a   word  than  a    short   and  cramped  one. 
When  he  meets  with  such  forms,   therefore,    he   will 
know  that  they  are  given  in  preference  to  the  shorter 
ones.     The  learner  should  always    be  very  careful  to 
preserve  in  his  writing  a  marked  distinction  between 
the  full,  half  and  double  length  letters  so  that  they  can 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  11  T) 

l>e  readily  distinguished  from  one  another.  This 
should  be  done  as  much  as  possible  whether  writing  at 
his  swiftest  or  slowest  speed,  since  it  is  upon  this  dis- 
tinction and  the  average  proper  slope  of  the  letters 
that  most  of  the  legibility  of  his  writing  will  depend. 


THE   PHOXOGRAPUIC   MANUAL 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PREFIXES,   AFFIXES,    ETC. 


LESSON   23. 
PREFIXES. 

293.  Cm,  On,  Km  or  Kn — the  context  determ- 
ining the  m  or  n— with  any'  vowel  or  dipthong  be- 
tween, are  represented  initially  by  a  light  dot,  called 
the  Con  dot,  written  before  the  beginning  of  the  re- 
mainder of  the  word.  When  the  syllable  immediately 
following  Cm  or  Km  begins  with  M  the  latter  is  writ- 
ten. The  same  is  true  when  Cn  or  Kn  is  followed  by 
N.  When  a  Cm,  etc.,  syllable  occurs  medially  it  is 
indicated  by  writing  the  part  of  the  word  following  it 
so  that  the  end  of  the  part  before  it  shall  stand  in  the 
place  of  the  Con  dot.  When  a  syllable  occurs  thus 
medially  it  is  not  often  necessary  to  vocalize  the  pre- 
ceding one.  When  the  latter  is  In,  Un  or  Cir  it  may 
be  joined  in  the  case  of  a  few  familiar  words,  as  in  '  'in- 
complete, unconcern"  or  "circumnavigate." 

a.  When  Cm,  etc. ,  are  followed  immediately  by  a 
vowel  the  word   is  written  in  full  except  when  the 
vowel  occurs  before  the  stem  S,   as  in    "comestible'' 
(see   eng.,   last  word  in    line    2)    when    the    dot  is 
employed. 

b.  From  the  preceding  it  will  be  perceived  that  the 
dot  or  medial  space  is  always  written  or  left  before  a 
consonant  but  not  before  a  vowel,    except  when  the 
latter  occurs  before  the  S  stem. 

C.      Cm,  etc,,   may  at  any  time  be  vocalized,  if  de- 


THE    PHOXCKiKAPHIC    MANUAL.  117 

sired,  by  inserting  the  vowel  or  diphthong  imme- 
diately after  the  dot  or  medial  space,  as  in  the  engrav- 
ing. This,  however,  will  seldom  be  necessary. 

d.  In  connected  writing  the  Con  dot  may  /be  omit- 
ted from  frequent  words  when  the  remaining  outlines 
are    sufficiently   suggestive;    as    for    example,    from 
"compliment,    concern,    confidence,   contrary,  conven- 

'lent,  conversation,  canvas"  or  "canvass." 

e.  The  Con  dot  should  usually  be  made  first,  but 
care  should  be  taken   to  place  it   high  enough  above 
downward  stems  to  permit  the  latter  to  be  of  the  proper 
length  when  resting  on  the  line  of  writing. 

f.  Cm  or  Km  with  an  initial   vowel  are  indicated 
the  same  as  when  without  it.      In  which  case  the  vowel 
may  at  any  time,   if  desired,   be   inserted    before   the 
dot  or  medially  after   the  preceding  stem  as  in  the  en- 
graving.    But  this  will  seldom  be  necessary. 

g.  The  Con  dot  and  juxtaposition  are  usually  em- 
ployed  in   all   cases   except  monosyllables  and  their 
plurals,  or  derivatives  ending  in  Ng. 

1.  The  course  in  the  above  paragraph  is  followed 
for  the  sake  of  speed  and  uniformity  in  writing  al- 
though by  so  doing  derivatives  are  occasionally  varied 
from  the  forms  of  their  primitives.  (See  see's.  107 
and  108). 

294.  Concom.     "Concomitant"  and  its  derivatives 
are  written  with  two  Con  dots  side  by  side  before  the 
remainder    of    the    word    after  the    manner   of    the 
Con  dot. 

295.  Contra,   Contro,    Counter,    or  Canter.     The 
prefix  Contra,   Contro,    Counter   or  Canter  is  repre- 
sented by  the  stem  K  halved  for  Kt  with  the  first 
stem    of    the    remainder    of    the    word    written    dis- 
joined underneath  or  above  it  (the  latter  in  the  case  of 
upward  stems)   in  such  a  manner  that  its  beginning 
shall  bo  at  or  near  the  middle  of  the  prefix.      It  may 
be  omitted  in  "controversy"  and  its  derivatives. 


118  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

a.  When  Con  or  Com  follows  Counter  as  in  '  'coun- 
terconnect"  or  "countercompony"  the  two  prefixes  are 
written  with    the   halved  stem  Kt  and  the  Con  dot 
underneath;    the  latter  before    the  beginning  of  the 
remainder  of  the  word. 

b.  In  or  Un  is    prefixed   to  the    sign  Contra  or 
Contro  by  the  N  stem  joined. 

296.  "  Contri.     The    word     "contribute"    and    its 
derivatives,    with    the    exception   of    '  'contribution'', 
should  be  written  with  the  Con  dot.     In  the  case  of 
"contribution"  the  accent  being  on  the  third  instead 
of  the  second  syllable;  that  is  to  say  after  the  contri, 
changes  the  latter  two  syllables  into  a  prefix  of  the 
same  nature  as  Contra,   Contro,  Counter  and  Canter, 
which  occur  as  prefixes  only  when  the  accent  is  on  the 
first  or   after   the   second   syllable.      "Contribution" 
may,   therefore,   be  written  with   Kt  as  a  prefix  for 
Contri.     If,  however,  uniformity  in  writing  is  desired 
it  should  be  written  with  the  Con  dot,   the  same  as 
are  the  other  words  of  the  series.      It  is  here,  how- 
ever, written  with  Kt. 

297.  When  Cog  occurs  initially  it  is  written  with 
the  stems  K  and  G;  but  when  it  occurs  medially  it  is 
indicated  by  juxtaposition  the  same  as  Cm,  etc.,    in 
section  293. 

a.  If  desired  Cog,  when  it  occurs  medially,  may 
be  indicated  by  striking  the  first  part  of  the  stem  of 
the  remainder  of  the  word  through  the  first  stem  of 
the  word  near  the  end. 

298.  En,  In  or  Un  is  prefixed  to  the  S  circle  on  R 
initial  hooks,  and  on  the  L  hook  on  downward  Sh,  and 
on  right  curves  by  a  small  right  curl. 

a.  Each  syllable  is  also  prefixed  to  the  S  circle  on 
left  initial  hooks  by  a  small  left  curl. 

b.  The  above  curl,  whether  right  or  left,  is  called 
the  N  curl.      Its  stenotype  is  n  and  its  specific  name 
Jn;  thus,  nsTrMnt  or  nsPlt  is  spoken  In  Stree  Meent 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  119 

jr  In  sPleet.     Either  form  may  also  be  particularly 
designated,  if  desired,  as  the  right  or  left  X  curl. 

c.  If  preferred  the  stem  N  may  be  employed  on 
the  left  hooks  on  K  and  upward  R  instead  of  the  curl; 
thus,  NsKlt,  XsKwrt,  NswRft. 

d.  If  desired  the  curl  may  be  vocalized  by  placing 
the  vowel  before  or  above  it.     But  this  will  seldom  be 
necessary.     (See  also  sec.  217). 

e.  When   the   circle   occurs   on   left    curves    and 
straight  stems    without  initial   hooks    the    stem   N  is 
used;  as  in  "unseen"  and  "insurgent." 

299.  Incon  or  Uncon  is  sometimes  prefixed  to  the 
S  circle  by  the  N  curl;  as  in  the  word  "inconsiderable" 
or  '  'unconsidered. " 

300.  Enter,  Inter,  Intra  or  Intro  is  indicated  by 
Xt  disjoined  with  its  center  above  the  beginning  of 
horizontal  stems  and  its  end  before  the  center  of  all 
others.     In  most   words,    however,    the   Nt   may   be 
joined. 

301.  Trans  is  represented    by   Trs  or  Tr  joined 
when  no  error  would  be  liable  to  occur,  as  in  "trans- 
act,   transfigure''     and     "transcript".       When    error 
would  be  liable  as  in   "transept"  it  is  written  in  full 
with  the  stem  N;  thus,   TrNs.      It  is  not  necessary  to 
vocalize  the  prefix.     Its  stenotypes  are  Trs  whether 
Trs  or  Tr  is  written. 

a.  The  above  is  used  only  when  Trans  occurs  as  a 
prefix.  When  this  is  not  the  case,  as  in  "transom", 
the  word  is  written  in  full  with  the  stem  X;  thus,Tr- 
XsM.  Furthermore  when  Trans  occurs  before  the 
Shun  curl  as  in  "transition"  the  prefix  is  not  employed 
but  instead  the  word  is  written  in  full  with  the  Xs 
circle;  thus  Trass///*-  as  in  engraving  217. 

302.  Magna  or  Magni  (from  the  Latin  meaning 
great)  is  indicated  by  M  written  with  its  center  above 
the  beginning  of  all    stems    except  half  length  hori- 


120  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

zontal  and  upward  ones  when  it  is  written  with  its  end 
above  or  before  the  center  of  the  latter.  It  is  used 
only  in  words  of  three  syllables  and  over. 

303-  MK  (Me  or  Mac)  may  be  indicated  the  same 
as  Magna  or  Magni  above  except  when  it  is  followed 
by  a  vowel,  C  (with  the  K  sound)  or  K  or  G  (as  in 
gay)  when  the  word  is  written  with  the  stem  K  or  G; 
in  which  case  it  is  not  usually  necessary  to  vocalize 
the  first  syllable. 

a.  From  the  last  paragraph  it  will  be  perceived 
that  the  prefix  MK  is  written  only  before  consonants 
— except  when  another  K  or  a  G  (as  in  gay)  follows. 

304.  Self  is  made  a  prefix  and  represented  by  the 
8  circle,  as  follows: 

a-  In  its  derivatives;  namely,  "selfish,  selfishly, 
selfishness",  the  circle  being  joined  to  the  remainder 
of  the  word,  Un  in  '  'unselfish",  etc. ,  is  then  written 
with  the  N  curl.  (See  sec.  298). 

b-  In  compounds  composed  of  self  and  some  other 
word  which  does  not  contain  initial  Cm  or  Cn;  in 
which  case  the  circle  is  usually  written  disjoined  oppo- 
site or  near  the  middle  of  the  first  stem  of  the 
remainder  of  the  word.  In  a  few  frequent  words, 
however,  it  may  be  joined. 

305.  Self-con  or  Self-corn  is  represented  by  the  S 
circle  written  before  the  beginning  of  the  first  stem  of 
the  remainder  of  the  word  after  the  manner   of  the 
Con  dot. 

a-  Self -con  or  Self-corn  may  also  be  written  writh 
the  circle  placed  alongside  the  middle  of  the  first  stem 
as  in  section  304,  b;  the  Con  dot  being  inserted  in  its 
proper  place  before  the  beginning  of  the  stem.  In 
frequent  words  the  dot  may  usually  be  omitted.  (See 
sec.  293,  d).  The  method  in  paragraph  305,  however, 
is  the  one  usually  followed  in  this  system. 

306.  Self-contra,    or    Self-contro.      Self,    in  Self- 
contra  or  Self-contro,   is  represented  by  the  S  circle 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  121 

disjoined  above  the  prefix  Kt  for  Contra  or  Contro 
(See  sec.  295). 

307.  A  prefix  never  occurs  in  a  word  consisting 
wholly  of  vowels. 

STENOTYPY. 

308.  An  inverted  period  before  a  stenotype  indi- 
cates the  Con  dot ;  thus,   '  Tnt.     It  is   vocalized    by 
placing  the  vowel  or  diphthong  after  or  before  it ; 
thus,    'aFr,   'owsL,    a-MDt,   a-iB,    camphor,  council  or 
counsel,  accommodate,  akimbo.     (See  sec.  293). 

309.  Two  inverted  periods  before  a  stenotype  indi- 
cate the  prefix  Concom;  thus,  "Tnt.     (See  sec.  295). 

310.  An   apostrophe   between   a  preceding  and  a 
following  stenotype  indicates  juxtaposition  by  placing 
the  phonographs  end  to  end  or  before  one  another,  as 
in  medial  Con,   etc.,    and  in  Self -con ;  thus,   Ds'Tnt, 
s'Trl.     (See  sections  293  and  305  and  also  sec.  40,  a). 

311.  An  inverted  semicolon  between  two  steno types 
indicates   any   other   kind   of  juxtaposition   than  the 
above;     thus,      KttVn,       Kt'.RTnt,       Nt'.Mt,     MtTt, 
MtNt,   siLf.      (See  sections  295,   300,    302,  303    and 
304,  b  and  also  sections  42  and  273). 

312.  If  an  inverted  period  is  placed  after  the  semi- 
colon it  indicates  that  the  Con  dot  is  to  be  inserted  before 
the  beginning  of  the  second  stem  ;  thus,  Kt'.  'Kt,   si  'Trl. 
See  see's.  295,  a  and  305,  a). 

313.  For  the  stenotypic  indication  of  intersection 
as  in  paragraph  297,  a,  see  section  52. 

LESSON   24. 
AFFIXES. 


THE    FINAL    SYL.LAIJLE    INC.. 

314.      The   final    syllable   Ing  is   represented   by  a 


122  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

light  dot,  called  the  Ing  dot,  written  after  the  end  of 
the  preceding  part  of  the  word,  or  by  the  stroke  Ng 
joined  to  the  preceding  stem.  For  the  plural  Ings  the 
circle  S  in  the  place  of  the  dot  or  the  stroke  Ng  with 
the  circle  S  is  used.  It  is  not  usually  necessary  in  the 
case  of  the  stroke  to  insert  the  vowel  i. 

a.  The  Ing  dot  is  represented  in  stenotypy  with  an 
inverted  period  and  the  Ings  circle  with  a  similar  circle 
or  degree  mark  placed  after  the  character  for  the  pre- 
ceding stem  ;  thus,  K',  D°. 

315.  This  termination  being  a  syllable  of  itself  in 
speech  and  not  a  word  never  occurs  in  monosyllabic 
words.     In  writing,  therefore,  it  can  never  be  attached 
to  a  vowel  or  consonant  in  the  same  syllable  with  itself. 
Consequently,  it  should  be  so  written  that  it  may  always 
be  known,  Avhen  the  vowels  are  omitted  (see  sec.  60,  b) 
and  thus  the  words  in  which  it  ends  not  be  taken  for 
monosyllables  ending  with  consonant  Ng. 

316.  Monosyllables  ending  in  Ng  always  consist  of 
one  or  two  single  length  stems  ,  namely : 

a.  Ng  or  Ngs  with  an  initial  breathing,   circle  or 
loop. 

b.  Ng  or  Ngs  preceded  by  any  other  stem  without 
appendages  except  one  with  an  initial  loop  and  upward 
R  and  L  with  initial  hooks. 

317.  Accordingly  the  stroke  Ng  for  the  termination 
Ing  is  always  omitted  and   the   dot   inserted   at   the 
end   of   a  vowel  word  and  when  the  resulting  word 
would  otherwise  consist  of  two  single  length  stems  as 
above.     Consequently  monosyllables  ending  in  Ng  and 
words  ending  with  the  syllable  Ing  can  not  conflict. 

318.  In  all  other  cases  the  stem  is  inserted  for  this 
termination  whenever  convenient,  namely  : 

a.  After  all  stems  without  appendages  (except 
halved  P,  T,  Th  and  Y)  and  after  all  stems  with  linal 
hooks. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  123 

b.  After  final  circles  except  Xs  circles  and  a  circle 
on  a  hook. 

c.  After  final  loops  on  Th,  Y  and  upward  L,  left 
ones  on  T  and  Ch  and  right  ones  on  upward  R. 

d.  When   it  is  not  convenient  to  write  the  stem, 
that  is  in  the  exceptions  in  paragraphs  a  and  b  and  after 
the  unspecified  loops  in  paragraph  c,  the  dot  is  inserted. 
(See  engraving  a,  b,  c). 

319.  The  learner  will  understand  that  Ing  could  be 
written  with  the  dot  in  all  cases  in  section  318.      But 
the  stem  is  the  quicker  of  the  two.     Consequently  the 
dot  is  employed  only  when  it  is  inconvenient  to  use  the 
stem. 

320.  In  connected  writing  the  stem  and  dot  may 
usually  be  omitted  at  the  end  of  verbs  (participles) — 
the    context   determining   the    meaning.      Sometimes, 
however,  when  a  noun  or  adjective  and  a  verb  have 
the  same  form,  as  "being"  or  "writing"  (BNg,  KtNg) 
the  outline  for  the  former  is  used  for  both. 

321.  The  stem  and  dot  need  not  be  written  in  com- 
pound  words,    but   instead  the  syllable  Ing  may  be 
indicated  by  juxtaposition  after  the  manner  of  Con  and 
Com   (see  section  293)  by  writing  the  beginning  of 
the  first  stem  of  the  following  word  in  the  place  of 
the  Ing  dot. 

322.  Ingly  is  represented  by  the  hooked  stem  Ngl 
after  all  stems  without  appendages  and  after  the  S  circle 
on  P,  T  or  Ch  and  on  those  left  curves  which  are  in- 
clined in  the  same  direction  as  the  latter ;  namely,  F, 
Th  or  Y.   .  In  all  other  cases  it  is  represented  by  the 
stem  NG  and  downward  L  joined  or  disjoined. 

323.  Ington  may  be  represented  by  Ngt  disjoined 
with  its  center  under  the  end  of  the  preceding  stem, 
or  it  may  be  joined,  if  convenient,  and  no  error  would 
be  liable  to  occur.     (See  also  sec.  252,  a,  1). 


Ili4  THE  PHONCXJUAPIIIC  MANUAL 

LESSON  25. 

AFFIXES,    CONTINUED. 

324.  Ble  or  Ely  is  indicated  by  the  stem  B  joined 
when  the  hooked  stern  Bl  can  not  be  written — except 
in   the   latter  case   after  downward  and  upward   Sh 
without  appendages.     Usually  the  vowel  preceding  the 
termination  may  be  omitted. 

a.  When  this  termination  occurs  after  downward 
Sh  standing  alone  either  simple  or  with  an  initial  hook 
it  should  be  written  with  the  Bl  stem  if  error  would  be 
liable  to  occur,  which  will  usually  be  only  in  proper 
names ;  thus,  ShrBl,  Shruble. 

325.  Bleness  is  represented  by  Bns  or  Bins  joined 
to  the  preceding  part  of  the  word  in  the  same  manner 
as  Ble  and  Bly  above. 

326.  Full  or    Fully  is    indicated  by   joining  the 
stem  F  when  the  hooked  stem  Fl  can  not  be  made. 

327.  Fulness  is  indicated  by  Fs  struck  beneath  a 
preceding  stem  in  such  a  manner  that  its  beginning 
shall  be  under  the  middle  of  a  horizontal  or  upward 
stem  and  before  the  two-third's  point'  of  a  downward 
one.      Its  beginning  is  thus  after  the  former  and  before 
the  latter.     When  there  is  no  preceding  stem,  as  in 
*  'awf ulness, "  the  word  is  written  in  full. 

1.  Fs  as  above  is  not  always  employed  after  a  single 
length  straight  stem  without  an  appendage. 

328.  Iveness  is  indicated  by  Vs  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  Fulness  in  paragraph  327  and  usually  follows 
the  sounds  T  and  S. 

1.  Vs  as  above  is  not  usually  employed  after  a 
straight  stem  with  a  final  loop. 

239.  Lessness  is  indicated  by  Ls  struck  through 
the  preceding  stem. 


THE    PHON-OGUAPniC   MANUAL.  125 

LESSON  26. 

AFFIXES,     CONCLUDED. 

330.  Graph-y,    and,    usually,    also    graphic-al-ly, 
may  be  indicated  by  the  stem  G  joined  to  the  preced- 
ing part  of  the  word.     The  loop  St  may  be  added  to 
the  termination,  as  in  "telegraphist." 

1.  If  at  any  time  words  of  two  simple  stems,  as 
the  first  three  in  the  engraving,  would  be  liable  to 
cause  conflict,  the  F  hook  may  be  added;  thus,  BGf, 
JGf,  hlGf,  or  the  words  may  be  written  in  full. 
Again,  Graphy  may  at  any  time  be  distinguished  from 
Graph  by  placing  the  short  vowel  i  after  the  stem 
G,  the  same  as  if  the  latter  were  the  stem  F. 
Finally  the  stem  K  or  Kl,  may  be  added  whenever 
desired  to  the  G  stem  for  graphic  or  graphical-ly. 
But  none  of  these  cases  will  often  happen. 

a.  Grapher  may  be   represented    by   the    hooked 
stem  Gr  joine'd. 

b.  Gram  may  be  designated  by  G  struck  through 
the  preceding  stem,  or,  in  the  case  of  a  preceding  G, 
above    it,    with    its    center    opposite  the   end  of  the 
latter. 

C.  In  each  instance  above  when  only  one  vowel 
precedes  the  termination  it  may  usually  be  omitted. 

331.  Ncy.    Any  termination  beginning  with  a  qon- 
sonant,  with  the  accent  before  or  after  it,  and  ending 
in  Ncy,  as  in  the  words  "potency,  vacancy,  vagrancy, 
Montmorency, "  etc.,    in  the  engraving  may  be  indi- 
cated by  writing  its  first  consonant  stem  simple  or 
with  prependages  fall  length  and  placed  close  to  the 
preceding  part  of  the  word      The  termination  is  not 
usually  vocalized.      When  there  is  no  preceding  stem, 
as  in"sequency"  or  when  the  termination  begins  with 
a  vowel  as  is   "truancy,  buoyancy,  fluency"  the  word 
is  written  in  full. 

a.     When    writing    this    termination    disjoined   as 


126  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

above,  it  should  be  placed  with  its  center  under  or  to 
the  right  of  the  end  of  a  preceding  horizontal  or  down- 
ward stem  and  its  beginning  under  or  to  the  right  of 
the  center  of  an  upward  one.  A  downward  termina- 
tion, however,  should  never  be  Avritten  with  its  begin- 
ning under  a  horizontal  stem  or  before  a  downward 
one.  (See  the  word  "discrepancy"  and  the  forms  TiP 
and  JiV  in  the  engraving,  line  1,  and  also  sees,  and 
engs.  327  and  328,  where  this  method  is  followed.) 

b.  If  preferred,  this  termination  may  usually  be 
represented  as  above  with  a  final  N  hook,  and  joined  to 
the  preceding  part  of  the  word.  In  which  case  if  con- 
flict should  ever  occur  it  may  be  disjoined  according 
to  the  rules  in  the  last  paragraph.  This,  however, 
will  seldom  be  necessary  and  then  usually  only  in 
words  of  two  stems  whose  terminations  are  without 
prependages. 

332.  Ity,  Idity.  Any  halved  stem,  except  one 
ending  in  a  circle  or  loop,  ma3r,  if  compound,  be 
attached  to  any  previous  stem,  or  if  simple,  placed 
close  to  it  and  allowed  to  stand  for  any  termination 
beginning  with  the  first  of  the  consonants  represented 
by  such  halved  stem  and  ending  in  Ity  or  Idity  and 
consisting  of  three  or  four  syllables  with  the  accent  of 
the  word  on  the  first  or  second  syllable  of  the  termina- 
tion, as  in  the  words  "barbarity"  to  "validity"  in  the 
engraving.  The  termination  is  not  usually  vocalized. 
When  an  initial  hook  can  not  be  conveniently  formed, 
as  in  "accountability,  sensibility,  accessibility"  it -is 
omitted.  It  is  also  omitted  in  the  termination  Bility 
after  downward  or  upward  Sh,  as  in  "sociability, 
finishability."  (See  also  sec.  324).  This  principle  is 
not  applied  to  words  having  a  Shun  hook  when  the 
remainder  of  the  word  after  Shun  contains  only  the  con- 
sonants E,  or  L  and  T,  as  in  cautionarity,  motionarity, 
nationality,  rationality."  It  is  also  not  applied  to 
words  ending  in  Tivity,  whose  primitives  ending  in 


THE    PI10NS-XIUAPIUC    MANUAL.  127 

* 

Tive  are  written  with  a  halved  stem  followed  bv  the 
stem  V,  as  explained  in  section  280  as  in  "activity, 
receptivity."  In  all  such  cases  the  words  are  written 
in  full. 

a.  If  at  any  time  there  would  be  danger  of  con- 
flict between  or  among  words  ending  as  above,  those 
ending  in  Idity  may  be  written  in  full  or  the  termina- 
tion vocalized  with  the  accented  vowel.      Either,  how- 
ever, will  seldom  be  necessary. 

b.  Again,  if  at  any  time,  error  should  be  liable  to 
occur  in  the  case  of  the  joined  terminations  they  may 
be  disjoined.     This  again,  however,   will   seldom    be 
necessary. 

333.  'Sometimes  a  termination  of  similar  nature  to 
those  in  sec.  332  may  be  written  according  to  the  sam3 
principle;  as  "asafetida." 

334.  When  writing  the  above   terminations  dis- 
joined, the  rules  in  sec.  331,  a,  forNcy  should  be  fol- 
lowed. 

335.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  above  termina- 
tions are  always  indicated  by  a  simple  or  compound 
halved  stem  and  that  the  accent  follows  the  first  of  the 
consonants  represented   by  the  latter.      When  these 
conditions    cannot    be   fulfilled  as  in  "integrity,   ubi- 
quity," the  terminations  are  written  in  full. 

336.  The  principle  in  section  332  is  not  usually 
applied  when  the  resulting  word  would  consist  of  one 
stem,  which  is  the  case  when  there  is  no  stem  preced- 
ing the  termination,  the  preceding  part  then  consisting 
only  of  a  vowel,  circle,   loop,  or  curl  and  circle;  as  in 
"agility,   hilarity,   solidity,   civility,   stability,  stupid- 
ity,   insularity;"    in  all    which   cases    the  words   are 
written  in  full. 

337.  Section  332,    as  therein  indicated  does  not 
apply  to  terminations  of  three  or  four  syllables  begin- 
ning with  a  vowel,  as  Ality;  or  containing  only  the 
final   syllable    Ity.      Words  like  "duality,  mutuality, 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


materiality,  reality"  or  "parity  /'therefore,  are  written 
in  full.  (See  also  "activity"  and  "receptivity,"  thu 
l.-i-t  two  examples  in  eng.  332,  line  2). 

338.  The  principle  in  sec.  332  is  not  applied  when 
it  would  change  a  primitive  form.     It  may,  however, 
be  so  applied  if  desired.    Thus  for  example,  "maturity, 
paternity,   mutuality,  fatality,   vitality,    instrumental- 
ity, activity,  receptivity,"  may  be  written  Mtrt,  PTrnt, 
MTlt,  FTlt,  VTlt,  nsTrMTlt,  KTft,  RsPTft. 

339.  Words  like    "penalty,"   which    end  in   Ty 
without  a  vowel  before  the  final  T,   should  not  be  con- 
founded with  those  in  section  332  but  be  written  in 
full.    (See  "penality,"  and  "penalty"  in  eng.  332  to 
339.) 

340.  City,  Sity  or  Xity.     Any  termination  begin- 
ning writh  any  consonant  except  S  and  ending  in  City, 
Sity  or  Xity  with  the  number  of  syllables  and  the 
accent  the  same  as  in  paragraph  332  as  in  the  words 
"sphericity,  verbosity,  duplicity,  laxity,"  etc.,  in  the 
engraving  may  be  indicated  by  writing  its  first  conson- 
ant stem  simple  or  with  prependages  full  length  with  a 
final  St  loop  and  joined  to  the  preceding  part  of  the 
word.      Occasionally,   in  order  to  avoid  an  awkward 
junction,  the  loop  may  be  added  to  a  lengthened  stem, 
as  in  "eccentricity."     The  termination  is  not  usually 
vocalized.     When  there   is  no  preceding  stem  as  in 
"sagacity,"  or  when  the  termination  begins  with  a 
vowel,  as  in  "curiosity,"  or  commences  with  S  as  in 
"necessity,"  the  word  is  written  in  full. 

a.  If  at  any  time  words  written  as  above  would  be 
liable  to  conflict  with  those  ending  in  St  they  may  be 
written  in  full  or  the  terminations  disjoined,  in  which 
case  the  rule  in  section  331,  a,  for  Ncy  should  be  fol- 
lowed. Conflict,  however,  will  seldom  occur  and  then 
usually  only  in  words  of  two  stems  whose  terminations 
are  without  prependages.  (See  also  sec.  331,  b.) 

341.  Self  or   Selves  is   added,   the   former  by  a 


TIIK   PHONOGRAPH  1C   MANUAL.  129 

small  and  the  latter  by  a  large  circle  placed  under  or 
after  the  middle  of  the  preceding  stem  or  it  may  be 
joined. 

342.  Ship  is  added  by  the  stroke  Sh  joined  or  dis- 
joined in  cases  where  ShP  is  not  preferred. 

343.  In  general,  where  a  final  or  medial  syllable 
cannot  be  joined  conveniently  it  may  be  disjoined  as 
in  the  words  "friendly"  and  "winsomeness. "    In  such 
cases  it  is  not  often  necessary  to  vocalize  it. 

LESSON  27. 
DERIVATIVES  AND  NEGATIVES. 

344.  Derivative  words,  as  previously  stated  (see 
sec.  107),  should  contain  their  primitive  forms,  except 
where  speed  or  legibility  would  suffer,  in  which  case 
the  most  facile  outline  should  always  be  written  with- 
out regard  to  the  exact  primitive  one. 

a.  Derivative  words  ending  in  Y,  whose  primitives 
end  in  L  as,  "shrilly,  facilely,  are  in  this  system  of 
phonography  written  with  one  L. 

345.  Negative  words  whose  first   consonants   are 
M,  N,  R,  or  L  and  whose  positives  begin  with  these 
letters  are  written  by  prefixing  the  negative  vowel  to 
the  positive  form,    except   those  beginning  with  Un 
which   are  written    by  doubling  the  first  consonant; 
namely,  the  letter  N.  (a)    The  same  rules  apply  to  words 
of  similar  formation  that  are  not  negative   in  their 
nature.     (See  also  par.  293). 

346.  Although   in   pronunciation    apparently  but 
one  consonant  is  heard  in  words  like  those  in  the  last 
section — the  first  gliding  so  readily  into  the  second  as 
to  give  an  impression  of  their   being   only   one — in 
reality  there  are  two  consonants.     The  first  part  of 
such  negatives  is  thus  composed  of  two  syllables,  the 
final   and   initial  consonants   of   which,  for   the  sake 
of  euphony  being  the  same,  give   the  impression  of 


130  THE   PHOXOfillAIMIK'    MANl-AT- 

there  being  but  one  consonant.  This  will  immediately 
be  evident  by  considering  the  words  "can"  and  "not" 
which  often  appear  in  script  and  print  joined  together 
in  one  phrase,  "cannot.*'  Here  although  only  one 
consonant  is  apparently  heard  yet  we  know  there  are 
two  and  that  it  would  be  incorrect  to  write  and  print 
them  with  one,  as  in  "canot."  Accordingly  a  correct 
phonetic  representation  requires  that  all  such  words 
should  in  script  and  print  be  represented  with  two  con- 
sonants. In  shorthand,  -however,  where  speed  is  neces- 
sary, the  first  one  is  omitted  as  just  explained.  The 
same  observations  apply  to  the  words  described  in 
paragraph  293,  except  that  the  second  consonant, 
namely  the  letter  M  or  N  is  always  written.  (See  also 
sec  344,  a). 

a.  If  the  learner  prefers  he  may  always  write  the 
first  consonant  of  negatives  the  same  as  when  the 
letter  N  (or  Un)  precedes,  or  as  in  section  293.  The 
method  in  section  345,  however,  is  usually  more 
speedy. 

347.  Negative  words  whose  first  consonant  is  X 
and  whose  positives  begin  with  L  are  usually  written 
with  the  initial  hooked  stem  Nl.     Those  whose  positives 
begin  with  R  are  usually  written  with  the  stems  N  and 
R,  thus  avoiding  conflict  with  the  Nl  series  and  also 
preserving  the  positive  form.     The  same  rules  apply 
to  similarly  formed  words  that  are  not  negative. 

OMISSION  OF  MEDIAL  T,  K  OR  G,  N  AND  W. 

348.  It  is  sometimes   inconvenient  on  account  of 
the   lengthy  forms  which  would  ensue  to  write   the 
above  full  sized  stems  medially.     When  this    is  the 
case  they  may  be  omitted  as  follows: 

a.  After  the  circle  S  on  a  full  sized  stem  a  medial 
T  can  usually  be  omitted  before  another  consonant. 

b.  K.  G.    In  some  words  K  can  be  omitted  after 
Ng  and  before  T,  Sh  and  Shn;  and  G  before  Sh. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  1'.',] 

e.  N.  The  N  stem  or  hook  may  be  omitted  medially 
when  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  it  and  no  error  would 
l>e  liable  to  occur. 

d.  The  W  stem  may,  if  desired,  be  omitted  from 
the  word  "swift"  and  its  derivatives  and  the  series 
written  with  the  small  W  instead.  (See  sec.  60).  The 
usual  method,  however,  in  this  system,  is  to  write  it 
with  the  light  stem;  thus  sWFt,  sWFtL,  sWFtst, 
sWFtr. 

CONCLUSION  OF  THE  ELEMENTARY  STYLE. 

349.  Phonography  has  now  been  presented  to  the 
learner  complete,  considered  simply  as  a  system  of 
writing.  If  he  has  carefully  studied  the  preceding 
pages  he  can  represent  in  it  any  word  in  the  English 
language.  There  would,  however,  be  but  little  advan- 
tage in  employing  it  thus  in  its  elementary  form  since 
it  would  be  too  slow  to  be  practicable  as  a  system  of 
shorthand.  The  remaining  chapters,  therefore,  will 
be  devoted  to  the  Reporting  Style  by  means  of  which 
phonography  may  be  written  with  the  swiftness  of 
rapid  speech. 


ELEMENTARY  STYLE 

READING  LESSONS  AND  EXERCISES. 

LKSSON   1.     CONSONANTS. 

1    \\    1     I  __  )    )~~    ~/   ^    ^ 

ft  vv  (  c  .  /  /  v.'ji  A  ir 

EXERCISE,  1-2. 
1     \\       \\        \\       \\       \\      '\\        \\ 

2\\    ;  i    ;  i    1  1    ii    M    it 

*..)')      )  )     M     )  )      J  )     )  )     )  > 

5  v^  ^  v^  vv  a   v^  ^^ 

6  (  (     (  (     i  (     (  (     i  (     (  (     (  ( 

7 


12    ,'    /     /     /    / 

133 


THE  PHOXOCKAPHIC   MAXT'AL. 


13  r 


r 


15 

4 

7 
8 


(  c  (   (  f  y  /  r  c  c 

LESSON  2.     CONSOXAXTS,  CONTINUED. 


\  I  / 


r 


//      \\ 


10 


EXERCISE,  1-10. 


\\      \\       I     I       I     I       //      // 

((      (    (     JJ    JJ      )    )       )) 


r  r 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


1  3.") 


—  V 


J      I 

<_-/     V  —  -  —  i 

\         I 


EXERCISE,  CONTINUED,  5-10. 


u 


8 
9 

10 
11 
12 

in 


cy 


L. 


> 

n_  ^  ^  n  .  ^ 

v.    i 

X  \-^  i_ 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


14 

15  L. 

IB  r~ 


r 


-T\ 


18 


LESSON  3.     W  AND  Y  AND  DOWNWARD  R  AND  L,  ETC 

.14  ^  ^v^^r  ^  Y  v 

15  (  r  C^.  ^    (L  ( — 


16 


V 


j  j 


n 


EXERCISE,  12-18. 


"r  r  w  r  /-  v 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 


137 


V  n 


) 


V 


9  ^  r  r 

10   S~  /      \    ' 


/  / 


)  ) 


EXERCISE,  CONTINUED,  12-18. 


. 


/t 


/r 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANTAL 


20 
21 


26-7      .     . 


LESSON  4.     RKiHT  ANCJLES.  ETC. 


r 

^ 


1  /.  -\ 


EXEHCISK.  -.MI  -j;. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


139 


>.M-V.* 


LESSON  5.     VOWELS  AND  VOCALIZATION. 
30-5      3CV>_l»c«v-»       h        ix^ 
36-7       5CI/V-13CUN-I         V,          *        V 

39    .»     -.c     0     .\     .1.    -t      s>    «•    v     v     -r     *•    •!«     •>    r- 

A^  c'-ui^^^-N"^"!!.         L. 

41      3       c  1  v 


-        V        ^V      V:      -\       -Tl- 

I-  -I 

-iu-     Sy    ^j.    tv    •*>• 


b    \\ 


\\    \\      \\ 


140 


T11K   PHoNoGUAPiiK'   MANUAL. 


C  33      _    —       II       lu       ID       v   D       131       -CO       A.\        I-    -|-       ^-    -,        iS. 


47 


J  i.  U  '\ 


.S 


50-6    r 


EXERCISE,  30-48. 


*  >  f;  ^    V  V  V  S    \    7    * 

5  \  \  h  l«  .  K  )«\  At 


6    /- 


^    X 


THE  PHONOGRAPH K1  MANUAL. 

7  \   'i    I-  ^  ^         )•    (- 


EXERCISE,  CONTINUED,  48-53. 

^ '  r  \r  -^ 


H2 


THE  iMi;>\<>.  :KAPHIC  MANUAL. 


5    -= 


-^  vri-  i 
-- 


18    ^K 

LESSON  6.    THE  SMALL  ALTERNATIVE  FORMS  FOR  W  AND  Y,  ETC. 
60-r.l       3J       *|        e|       <|       »I       «i|      -J       i|       ?| 


l    <l 


'-si 


THK  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


143 


"    li    It    l« 

a-b  •>     '7  '/   -/ 


- 


fil 


\ 

*> 


/   /r 


EXERCISE,  60-63. 


,>  3  ^  .-j,  ,>  /  jf   V 

x  "/  7 

^    1-  4  r*      "^1 


e    ^* 

U-i»i 


LESSON  7.    THE  H  TICKS. 
"1      -1      LL      -1      I* 


144 


THE  PHONOORAPHU-  MANUAL. 


1 


79  -\  \  ^  *&  *r\ 

80    ^  -NT    _!T 

EXERCISE,  77-80. 


4  '     V  4  :  / 


j  / 


t   /  > 
~\ 


7  \y 


9 
10 


-v  ^y  4,  ^xf. 

.  _  )>  ^  ^  > 


X 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


145 


84 


LESSON  8.     SMALL  CIRCLES. 

\  r  ,  i  /  /  > 

I.  r  c  r  r 
^   °)  1   ?  )  r 

>\o      It      £    £     S 

o     Vo        X)       (a        o       b 


NO       C       6 


b       fa 


\o  [,  / 


89-a    I    s       acj 

91-2  \ra_v<r 

"    \  f  ^  ^.r 


y 


y  i 


L 


1  Jt! 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


100-2 


103,  a 


-^  o_o  «y  <^>  A  I    \ 


LESSON  9.     LARGE  CIRCLES,  ETC. 

PP     />  /°   cx_    0-     O/ 


c     ^d:    )X   <Li 

f\€V          v^ 
Y    f 

106-7    >      <^     ^ 
109-13    -r>    \>      1 

>°y^    eVr    ^   ^ 
/   4 

^  ^  n 
!/  \*  ^    \l 

/      C\^       X-J-0       )l 

V   V  ^ 

^  »•  A  . 

0^ 

9 

],  ]:  J: 

aV. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANTA1..  14 


**«  V 

116   J'       >      >      >      &       <}>      ^      ^ 


117 


LESSON  10.    THE  S  AND  Z  STEMS. 


-)  5 


^  \  .  '  S),  ^  ^  <<  ^  /.  n' 

xL 

~^V^    I     I    L>1\(    \     / 
-)        -)   N    "1    <)     >]   -) 

119  ~^  jc  ^'  i     /^'   i^,  lip  \^_   / 
\*  yf  »Y 

121    fc)    J)    ^     ^    ^     \       I      ~^D     ^3 

LESSON  11.     LOOPS. 

122-4   <\     -P     ^    y     »P    y    cf,    ^   ^     \ 

/l/ 

125   \    \f  _^*  /"  S?  \*  -^  ? 


^^k  ^ 


14S 

,» 

127 

130 
132 


|r  (,; 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

xf,         "%  ^ 

/<    X     ^ 


EXERCISE,  84-132. 


rv 


5 

6 

7     \>    - 


9 
10 

12 


"     A 

t' 


JL 


f 


V 


I        - 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


149 


15    - 


Y 


LESSON  12.     INITIAL  HOOKS,  ETC. 


152-3   NX    1  1 

\\  rr 

164    \-     \ 


-V 


v; 

165-6  X'X    -X     f     ?      $     ? 

1  v--»       *^7        C^     v£_<        ^rx^ 


/ 


150 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.. 

y//^^'      x/^^^  r  j  /**^^  ~ 


167 


%       (T~ 


4=, 


172-4 
" 

178 

179-80 


v  rr     CL 


v 


EXERCISE,  152-180. 


<V<  N  V^  V 


> 


^  ,/    *•    * 


THE  PHOXOGKAPIIIO  MANUAL. 


151 


\  %  > 


9 

10 
11 
12 
13 


r  r 


14  cf    /     Ci    P> 

15  ^    ^    ^ 


€- 


-  rr 


16 


is      A.  rv_^  rT^r     ^v     r  r 

LESSON  13.    S  PREFIXED  TO  INITIAL  HOOKS,  ETC. 

184  °\  1  ;  a-  s   ^   Iv?^  <-  <r-  / 


152 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


8 

f       -/ 


IBS   N  ^SS  N  V 


1 


\  (= 


189 


194-5 


V   -1    -/  J-   K    -1   -/  ^- 

s,  1  /  r  p^  ^  x*'  1  ^x  ^  r 


LESSON  14.     FINAL  HOOKS.    THE  N  AND  F  HOOKS. 


199 


\\   J  J   </  S 
^^   (,  (,    6  C 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 
J     )        J  J       r 


153 


v 


200-a 


201 


V     V 

^       V 


202^ 
203  \h 
206- 


/ 


\> 


r\ 


V     J- 


V 


\x° 


V      V      V 
lc     ^     /»     x€ 


^       I 


17)4 


THE  PHOXOiiUAPHIC   MANIAI-. 


EXERCISE,  199-306. 


1     V      J"    /? 

2  u\-    -j.  ^ 


•)* 


^      /T 

<C<   -/r 


-  31 


V    V    ^ 


\       \  I 

Xs   \°  "J1 
4  V?  l>,  /     -**  - 


6 

7 
8 

9 

10 
11 
12 

13 

14 

15 

16 


*•  fr 

V 


3- 


N:  1' 


TIIK  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


155 


18 

w\^ 
LESSON  15.     FINAL  HOOKS,  CONTINUED.     THE  TER  HOOK. 

209   -=3   V    ^J    J-  </-   ^=    -=-s  V  V  V  V      Jc    cA 


210-11 


LESSON  16.     THE  SHUN  FINAL  HOOK  AND  THE  SHUN  CURL. 


214 


^  Ur>  -Lp  -I     cV^A 

>     /    '/ 

kU      M      -lj       aNo 


156 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


X 


-ir 


217    ^    ^    4'   ^     ^e    X<'     K     f=,  i-   W 


4- 


LESSON  17.     DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  R  AND  L. 


231 


"    \X 


IX  «^C 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 


157 


236-d 


237 /T 


V"  V'  ^  f^ 


K      «/ 


LESSON  18.     DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  SH. 


158 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANTAL. 


y 


241  "v  v 


4 


1  1?       - 

LESSON  i;».    THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 
244-6  \-        <'      <\>       N-      <i-      V       N        <\-     \-      V 

* 
-\  a.  C/  6)  O  *.  V  c\  i  C/ 


«.     \- 

V    \" 

•V     V 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MAM  Al, 


159 


V        "*•         -J         -*          3=       J-       $9         p        V 

<?»        ff^       <J»      ^fj  Li»        \f>         -^         ^y        £, 


<     ic    i.  c.  is?  v    cy 


; 


"      G,  X-      -+\.\-   /{ 

"246-8    /**   /^    %«.    \       1       «-; 
V    3v 


249-50 
251 -a     £     ~ 

252-a    «,     c 


-\ 


1    \  \    ^1    \ 
H     «    «J  <>   k 


T 


25M-a    V      V      "s3    ^<-      >-    » 

/*>  <r     N^ 

LESSOX  -Jd.      THKHALVINC  PRTNCIPLE,  CONT'D.      R  AND  L  HALVED. 

257   /i     /-    >"     ^     f    -r     t^     i^    &-     A    \f>     £? 


100 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC1  MANUAL. 


258 


-A-AAAAA  A  A  A  A 
i  -/I  YJJ  n  rt  -ft  fa  fa  n 


259    A 


c     /? 


260-1    ft   fc,  _i/c   VX    V^,    - 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


1G1 


LESSON  21.     THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,  CONCLUDED. 

263    *      Jo      A     y{       /J      ^«     A     A     ./- 


•!(> 


266-8 


V.     ~\    ">    ^v    >    «J  ( 
«S      V      v      v^      V     («  ) 


270 


i>^  v  V"1 


271    -i  -  ,1  ^  ,1 

272   ^  |f    -/         "V 


IG2 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANT.U.. 


273 

275-7 
280 

281    ^ 


v 


LESSOX  2-2.    THE  LENGTHEXIXO  PRIXCIPLE. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


1C.3 


285 


287 


288 


289-90 


LESSON  23.     PREFIXES. 


293  J-  J*  1-  y  .k- V"  L 

"  J'  L3  >  r  ^  «r  jc  j^  4  'V  -^  cJ 

\-  \  \  r        \  N^-  u  x 


104 


THE  PliOXcKiKAPHK'  MANUAL. 
.-P.  .-IT?       .rti, 

--3^    •'^  •-?      ^      -V- 

y       .^-^  -^ 


'  X 


_  \  \ 


;•  -a  N^  —v  "--^  /ii  X      X' 

Xj^-        Vr  Vo   ^ 

f,294  '^   \  X^  -m-   \  ""^    "* 


/.  r  \  -. 

7 

^  o^  v  ( 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


105 


95-6 


297 


I 


a.e,299 


-A 


300 


3- 


302  -^_>h 


303 


166 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


304-b    > 


305-6 


316-b  >i 


317 


318-a 


«f  ^    J-  .o  U 

LESSON"  ,'4.     AFFIXES. 


=^      V2*-      Ni/ 


\l»   1*   ( 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


L67 


V  *\ 


^  X- 


322-3 


^L  4^  -V  -^  4 


LESSON  ^'5.     AFFIXES,  COXT1NUEU. 


324-5 

326 

327 

328 
329 


, 


168 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


LESSON  26.     AFFIXES,  CONCLUDED. 
330       \-£-     Zl    JT  L.      ^ 


a-b 


/I. 


>U. 


-f 


331-a      \i  >C_ 


/^-      V 


i»     i 

7  '\ 


332-4 


A 


H  A, 


335-9     ^ 


340 


r    fa  ^  -vq 


J 

^ 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


160 


341 
342 
343 

344-a 
345 


LESSON  27.     DERIVATIVES,  NEGATIVES,  ETC. 
•JTr       -2s?    T\*     ~^— *    &   &    &*-*    * 


"a, 347    -^—    V  '^X     V    -^ 


348-a   '^TT=-      y^     TP         /o     x> 

v*    -^.y   Q^Z>    «    Ih-'  v*-?)       (^ 


-  r^  )•  t  P  ^  "7  tv 


ELEMENTARY  STYLE 

AVRITING  LESSONS  AND  EXERCISES. 

(KEY  TO  HEADING  EXEKCISES.) 


LESSON  1. 

CONSONANTS. 

1.  P,B,T,D,K,G,S,Z,M,N,Ng,R,L,W,Y. 

2.  F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh,HW,HY. 

EXERCISE,     1-2. 

1.  P,B,   P,B,  P,B,   P,B,   P,B,   P,B,   P,B. 

2.  T,D,  T,D,  T,D,   T,D,  T,D,  T,D,  T,D. 

3.  K,G,  K,G,  K,G,  K,G,  K,G. 

5.  F,V,  F,V,  F,V,    F,V,  F,V,   F,V,  F,V. 

6.  Th,Dh,  Th,Dh,  Th,Dh,  Th.Dh,  Th,Dh,  Th,Dh, 
Th,Dh. 

7    C  T     C  J     (^  J     C  J     C  J     C  J     C  J 

8.  Sh,Zh,  'sh,Zh,  'sh,Zh,   Sh,'zh,' Sh,Zh,   Sh,Zh, 
Sh,Zh. 

9.  M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M. 

10.  N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N, 

11.  Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng. 

12.  R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R. 

13.  L, Lj Lj L,  L, L, L,  L, L, J_/. 

1 4.  W,  \V, W,  W,  W, nW, nW,  H W, nW, 

15.  Y,Y,Y,Y,Y,nY,nY,nY,nY,iiY. 

171 


172  THE    PHOXOCJKAPH1C    MANUAL. 

LESSON  2. 

CONSONANTS,     CONTINUED. 

4.   K,N,M,P,T,C,Y,Sh,R,L. 

7.  PP,  BB,  TT,  DD,  KK,  GG,  CC,  JJ,  KR,  PB, 
BP. 

8.  KR,  KL,  MR,  ML,  NR,  NL. 

a.   KP,  KF,  KSh,  NB,  NV,  NSh,  MP,  MF,  MSh. 

9.  KN,  KM,  NK,  MK,  NN,  NM,  MN,  MM. 

a.   KNP,  KMF,  NKT,  MKTH,  NNS,  NMC.  MMC. 
10.   PK,  WM,  ThK,  PN,  FN,  WN,  TN,  ThX,  SN. 
ChN,  YN,  ShN. 

a.   PT,  BTh,  BZ,  VG,  VD,  FTh,  VS,  WT,  DR,  WL. 

EXERCISE,     1-10. 

1.  P,B,  P,B,  T,D,  T,D,  C,J,  C,J,  K,G,  K,G. 

2.  F,V,  FV,  Th.Dh,  Th.Dh,  Sh,Zh,  Sh,Zh,  S,Z, 
S  Z 

3.  M,M,M,  N,N,Ng,  R,R,R,  L,L,L. 

4.  W,W,W,   Y,Y,Y,   HW.nW.nW,  HY,HY,nY. 

5.  PB,  TD,  CJ,  RR,  KG,  BP,  DT,  JC,  GK. 

»>•  PK,  PC,  CK,  TTh,  BT,  KF,  BTh,  PM,  TN. 

7.  YT,  MN,  DNM,  TXD,  FTG,  MThNg,  NVGT. 

8.  KTK,   TMNg,    BKM,   GTL,   ShNTh,   TMNT, 
NMTK. 

9.  ThP,  ThPK,  ThNK,  JMK,  JKB,  JLT,  NVT. 

EXERCISE,   CONTINUED,    5-10. 

1.  ThM,  ThC,  YNff,  PJ,  CN,  DhT,  FP,  MD,  XF. 

2.  GD,  DG,  NT,   ND,  CP,  JN,   VN,   SK,  DhD. 

3.  BT,  PD,  WNg,  JV,  JSh,  SN,   GN,  BM.   JM. 

4.  SNg,  JB,  NG,  NB,  NJ,  FJ,  CM,  FM,  SM. 

5.  PPt,  PBT,    BBD,    JJD,   KKT,  KGD,   GGD, 
RRD,  KKX. 

6.  XBB,  PTT,  RJJ,  XKG,  MGG,  KRR,  TRR. 

7.  DKT.  XVD,  WMNg,  YT,  TNS,   LBM,  LZN, 
RZX,  YVP. 


TIIK  i'iio.\;x;i;Ai'Hir  MANUAL.  173 

8.  LBX,  FND,  BFL,  ThK,  LMR,  YTK,  WG,  TG. 

9.  LTN,      RDNg,     FT,    JNT,     LGN,    ShNgG.  , 
LKMNir. 

10.  ShKG,  GLN,  KNgKK,  PR,  KR,  ShL,  DPJ. 

11.  PMR,   ZN,    LDL,   MRT.    MDN,    LM,    TLD, 
MM,  RVX. 

12.  KKM,    WBSh,     NGL,    W,     TPKN,     PDK, 
LKNg. 

13.  RNK,  ShNND,  RNDLF,  YNS,  BNgKM,  MRN, 
RL. 

14.  PXgKX,  SL,  TLL,  TNJP,  GLD,  WK,  LPS. 

15.  DBK,    KKK,    MKN,     LLN,    KNSh,    WKSh, 
DLF. 

16.  ZRK,  TPK,  PGS,  YM,  MRPZ,  WPT,  TKM. 

17.  CRK,    CKT,    KKP,    MRKP,    CKS,  SJ,  PC, 
ShShX,  CXK. 

18.  NTR,  MNTB,    SNB,   WPL,    LThM,    VKTR, 
KND. 

LESSON  3. 

W  AND  Y  AND  DOWNWARD  R  AND  L,    ETC. 

12-14.  W,  WF,  FW  or  F^,  VF,  Y,  YK,  NY  or 
NZ,  NF. 

15.  Y,   L,  YM,  LM,  YK,  LK,  YN,  LN,  YNgK. 

16.  L,  LP,  PL,  BL,  LT,  KL,  GL,  FL,  FZ. 

17.  C,  R,  CP,  RP,  PC,  PR,  MR,  CM,  FR. 

18.  Sh,  ShP,    ShPL,  PSh,    PSA,  TSh,  Zh,   ZhR, 
RZh. 

"  T?Sh,  VM,  ShF,  ShTh,  ShDh,  LSh,  ShSh, 
RSh,  ShL. 

"  ShS,  SSh,  ZSh,  MSh,  MZh,  YS/i,  ShY,  ZhY, 
YSh. 

EXERCISE,    12-18. 


1.  WG,   WN,  WM,  NTF,   LTT,    PW,  TW, 
M. 

2,  YK,  YN,  YNg,  YM,  PL,  TL,   CL,  NZ,  FZ. 


174  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC1   MANTAL. 

3.  LV,   LTh,  LW,  LVL,  LKL,  MNZ,  MNDL. 

4.  PL,  LL,  KL,  NgZ,  SL,  ML,  DL,  JL,  FL. 

5.  OK,  RK,  MC,  NC,  LC,  LR,  DC,  DR,  BR. 

6.  FRTh,     MRTh,    MRL,    MKN,    LThNg,    LM, 
MLC,  NLD. 

7.  SK,  ShK,  SN,   ShN,  ShD,  ShW,   ZhW,   ShM, 
STh,  SDh. 

s.  WK,  w^,  WTT;    HWM,  YK,  YTh,  YZ, 

nYM,  YL,  YLSh. 

9.  W,W,  Y,Y,  L,L,  C,C,  R,R,  S,Z,  Sh,Zh. 
10.  L,  R,  TZh,   MpSh,  NSh,   ShC,    ShLNg,  ZhF, 
ZhSh,  RZhM. 

EXERCISE,   CONTINUED,    12-18. 

1.  WR,  nWK,  lAVF,  nWN,  H\VP,  iiWK,  nWG. 
nWM,  WGSh. 

2.  CW,  JW,  K\V.  GW,  CPW,  RJW,  F  If,    KR, 
TR. 

3.  YD,    YZ,    YS,    YMS,    YG,     YKR,     YNgSh, 
YKFL,  YKLM. 

4.  F72L,  BRL,  NZL,  KML,  PKDL,  MNPL. 

5.  VLM,    KLK,     KLP,      MLK,     FL72,     FLS, 
KJLR. 

6.  LFT,  LFJ,    LMNg,  LNgK,  LNGSh,   LDXM, 
LGT. 

7.  LFTL,  LKT,  LGJ,  LLB,  LNC,  LSM,  LRK. 

8.  BNZ,    DNZ,  VNZ,  RNZ,   LRL,   BRL,  SRL, 
NTRL,  FZNg. 

9.  CNT,    CNB,    CKR,   CKD,  CRP,    CSG,  CNS, 
CKML,  FNC. 

10.  RM,  RDM,  RNC,  RFJ,  RCL,   RP7?,  RMND. 

11.  RDL,   RDT,   RDS,    RKSh,   RTN,  RTR,  RTT, 
RMD,  -RNgK. 

12.  NTR,  NTRT,  PRS,  PRK,  KRT,  JRX,  KRND. 

13.  KMR,   MMR,    FLR,   LMNTR,   LFTR,   FRR, 
BRR. 


THE   PIIOXOr.UAPHIC    MAXCAL.  175 

14.  ShR,    ShKR,   ShND,    ShMNir,   ShLL,    ShLR, 
ShLl),  ShKSh,  ZhRR. 

15.  FMSh,   RDSh,    RGSh,   FLSh,    LV£/<,  NV£A, 
IvShMR,  LMZh. 

1(>.  J,  M,  K,  S,  TL,  NV,  RP,  VN,  MN.  (Jehu, 
Omaha,  Kehoe,  Soho,  tallvho,  Navajo,  Arapahoe, 
I  vanhoe,  Minnehaha. ) 

IT.   P,  T.  K,  S,  F,  Th,  C,  Sh. 

18.   M,  N,  Ng,  R,  L,  W,  Y,  nW,  nY. 

LESSON  4. 

RIGHT    ANGLES,    ETC. 

20.  PSh,   PM,  TX,  KS,   CF,  RW,  FR,  ThK,   YP, 
ALT,  WC,  LP. 

21.  PS,  PN,TSh,TF.KW,KM,  CTh,  FK,  ThP,  YT. 
"     SC,   MP,  LK,   WT,  MS,    LW,    AVSh,    F*S'A, 

ThN,  YF. 

• '     MX,  WF,  STh,  ShY,  LSh,  NM,  F7Z,  ThS,  YSh, 
SKL. 

22.  RS,  RSh,  RW,  RM,  RL,  FR,  ThR,  YR,  NR. 
23-5.   Mp,   LMp,  KMp,  TMp,   DMp,  MpG,  MMp, 

YMp,  "N." 

26-7.  +,  H,  hM,  hMp,  hW,  hS,  hShhL,  NhM,  NhL. 
"     7/X,  7>Xg,  AF,  ATh,  AY,  hK,  hR,  AP,  AT,  AC,  +B. 

EXERCISE,    20-27. 

1.  BSh,  TNg,  KZ,  JV,  VR,  ThG,  MD,  WJ,  LB. 

2.  GW,  BNg,  BN,  PNff,  BZ,  DF,  DSh. 

3.  MZ,  MXg,  MB,  WV,  SDh,  SJ,  ZJ. 

4.  V^A,  F  W,  VG,  YN£,  DhS,  Dhp,  ThB,  YD. 

5.  RML,  RS,  RZ,  RF,  RV,  RTh,  RDh,  RN,  RL. 

6.  DML,  TML,  LML,  FML,  PML,  NML,  MML. 

7.  FMLR,  FMLRL,  MBL,  YMS,  LMXT,  GMp. 

8.  H,   AV,  AB,  AD,  AJ,  hG,  hZL,  hML,  hLK. 

U.   //Th,   AND,    //XJ,    AVN,    AFSh    ABB,    AJPJ, 
hLD,  liSliSh,   hSLR. 


170  TIMO    PHONOQRA-PfilC    MANUAL. 

'LESSON  5. 

VOWELS    AND    VOCALIZATION. 

30-5.      i,   e,   n,  a,  a,  o.  1,  e,  u,  a,  a,  o,  o*7,  oi^   ui. 
36-7.     ni,   He,  HU,  Ha,  Ha,  HO,  HI,  ne,  im;  Ha,   Ha, 
HO,  HoiZ,  Hoi,  HIM. 

39.     Hni,  Hne,  HHU,  Hna,  Hna,  HHO,  [!•],  [6-],  [a-], 
[a-],  [a-],  [6-],  Hno'iZ,  Hfm-],  H[na-],  -f-e,  +aore,  a. 
41.     ii,  ee,  uu,  iu,  en,  ue,  aa,  ao,  aa,  ao,  oa,  oa. 
"      ia,  ia,  ea,  eo,  ua,  uo,  eeu,  mi,  iue,  iau,  eoa,  uao. 
'  '      au,  ai,  ia,  oau,  oio,  otZa,  oia,  ui,  anw,  aoa,  aao, 
oao. 

a.  Hni[u-],    Hne[u-],    [1-jHnu,   [e-jHnu,    H[m-]- 
H[HU-],  H[Hu-]H[ne-],    Hnafa-],    [a-][o-],     Hna[a-], 
[a-]Hna,  HaHo,  H[Ha-]H[H5-]. 

"  Hmwa,  Hiioi'a,  Hnuz'a,  Ha[a-]Ha,  Hna[a-][a-], 
HHa[o-][a-],  HHaH[Ho-]Ha,  HHaHHaHno,  H[Ha-]- 
H[Ha-]H[HO-],  [o-JHaHnu,  [o-]H[m-][6-],  aHnai. 

b.  aia,  at  a,    aina,    Haia,    aina,    Haina,    aa, 

H«,   O6>,   OHO. 

c.  iii,    a'.a,    oto,    o'.u,    o'.i,    uii,   o'.i'.o, 


47.     iT,  eT,  uT,  aT,  aT,  oT,  IK,  eK,  nK,  aK,   aK, 
oK. 

"      Ti,  Te,  Tu,  Ta,  Ta,  To,  Kl,  Ke,  Ka,  Ka,  Ka, 
Ko. 

"      eTa,  aTu,  aTo,  ouT,  wT,  u^T,  eKa,  aKu,  aKo, 
Ko?7,  Koi,  Ku^. 

"      iaT,  Tia,  eHuoT,  TeHno,  eaT,  Tea,  iaK,  Kia, 
eHnoK,  KeHno,  eaK,  Kea. 

«'      HiT,  HniT,   H[m-]T,   [e-]T,   HnaT,  H[na-]T, 
HiK,  HmK,  H[m-]K,  [e-]K,  HnaK,  H[na-]K. 

-      Ti,  T[i-],  Te,  T[e-],  Ta,  T[a-],  Ki,  K[I-],  Ke, 
K[e-],  Ka,  K[a-]. 

48-9      TeM,   LaK,  RaR,  PeP,  DiaNa,  MiNenatna, 
PinaHiRoTh    (Pihahiroth),      DlNaMo,      aNDaLuSfia 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MAXUAL.  177 

(Andalusia),  Rw'aL,   RiC,  ShlLi,    -+-1M,    +eM  or  iM, 
eM  (Mm,  'em). 

50-6.  1-Dea,  I-[o]N,  K-eno,  Mfop,  Mfap,  Mfoap, 
MfO'ap,  Mfopi,  TeMpO,  BaMpu,  HoNg,  iNgaM, 
LiNgo,  G  "  a  "  Te.  (Idea,  Ion,  Kehoe,  mop  or  mob, 
map  or  Mab,  Moab,  moppi  or  mobby,  tempo,  bamboo, 
hong,  Ingham,  lingo,  Goethe. 

EXERCISE,   30-48. 

1.  i,  I,  e,  e,  u,  u,  a,  a,  a,  a,  o,  6,  ow,  oi,  ui. 

2.  Hi,  m,  He,  He,  HU,  HO,  Ha,  Ha,  Ha,  Ha,  HO,  HO, 


3.  aia,  aa;  a'.  a,  a«;  oio,  oo\  aii,  a*;  eia,  ea. 

4.  10,  la,  ea,  eea,  ue,  ai,  Hai,  anOa,  ama, 

,  OHIO,  HOIHO,  6aHii.  (lo,  la,  Aea  or  Oea,  Aeaea, 
Ooi,  ai,  hai,  Ahoah,  Ahia,  ahoy,  Hai,  Ohio,  Hoaiho, 
Oahu.) 

5.  Pee,  Bee,  Tee,  Dee,  Kee,  Gee,  See,  Zee,  Fee, 
Vee,  Thee,  Dhee. 

6.  Chee,  Jee,  Shee,  Zhee,  Mee,  Nee,  Eeng,  Ree, 
Lee,  Wee,  Yee,  Hwee,  Hyee,  Way,  Yay. 

7.  Up,  it,  too,  am,  no,  go,  so,  they,  are. 

8.  Ashy,    easy,    Esau,    any,   essay,    ally,    away, 
echo,  obey,  ivy. 

9.  Happy,  hope,  had,  her,  him,  half,  hath,  have. 

10.  Iota,  Iowa,  Idaho,    Isaiah,   lago,   bayou,  via, 
payee. 

11.  Dim,  deem,  limb  or  limn,  lime,   rim,   rime  or 
rhyme,  whim,  deep,  peal  or  peel. 

12.  Top,  chop,  rock  or  rok,  lock,   knock,   mock, 
walk,  talk,  shock. 

13.  Bake,  beck,  rake,  wreck,  tame,   check,   make, 
neck,  lake. 

14.  Dome,  dumb,  roam  or  Rome,  rum,  cope,  cup, 
sheaf,  sheave,  goal. 


17>!  TIIK   PIIONOCJKAl'Hir    MAM'AL. 

15.  Aerate,  parry,  cap,  far,  tap,  balm,  move,  arid, 
aright. 

16.  Back,  tack,   rack,    knack,   whack,    yak,    jack, 
lack,  lag. 

17.  Pious,   dowel,   Lowell,   vowel,   chaos,  voyage, 
rowel,  vial,  piety. 

18.  Kinnikinic,     monogamy,  cachexy,  cacochymy, 
cacochymic. 

EXERCISE,   CONTINUED,   48-53. 

1.  Loom,    room,   Fido,    tarry,  tool,  pool,  moor, 
loop,  tomb. 

2.  Pick,  check,  take,  keg,  pitch,  peach,  tip,  talk, 
tuck. 

3.  Type,  teach,   cheap,   page,   rage,  rope,   catch, 
cage,  rug. 

4.  Palm,    path,     both,    tooth,    faith,   fang,    lath, 
laugh,  leek  or  leak. 

5.  Among,   shady,  penny,   ferry,  many,  shadow, 
tallow,  tabby,  copy. 

6.  Tower,   power,    rowdy,   vouch,   couch,   lower, 
month,  shower,  cower. 

7.  Boil,    toil,    foil,     coil,    moil,    boyish,    decoy, 
envoy,  noisy. 

8.  Book,     cook,    rook,     look,    nook,   took,   pull, 
push,  shook. 

9.  Ruin,  opium,  ammonia,  fiat,  riot,  idiot,  being, 
deity,  deify. 

10.  Cheyenne,   diet,    Taos,    laity,    gaiety,    rawish, 
poet,  poesy,  poem. 

11.  Locate,  timothy,    tamely,     luckily,     luggage, 
leakage,  form,  kodak,  barilla. 

12.  Retire,  verify,  lively,  admire,  terrify,  beneath, 
thickish,  gamely,  parity. 

13.  Apothem,  verity,    bodily,    boiler,    gallop,   de- 
camp, pelf,  baggage,  chimney. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  179 

14.  Bonnet,  readily,  fairly,  affinity,  faulty,  pigmy, 
legatee,  Ridge  way,  Laredo. 

15.  Emanate,  elfish,   Elmira,  Allegheny,  fathom, 
Anthony,  vanity,  academic,  emphatic. 

16.  Ferrying,  marrying,  rallying,   copying,  pity- 
ing, palliate.,  caviat,  period,  orthoepy. 

17.  Variety,    lineage,    foliage,     alleviate,     fealty, 
tapioca,  egoism,  bayonet,  Antioch. 

18.  Mope,    mopish,    moper,    Moabite,    embellish, 
embank,  Eeng,  ink,  inky.  V~ 

LESSON  6. 

THE  SMALL  ALTERNATIVE  FORMS  FOR  W  AND  Y,  ETC. 

60-r.l.    wiT,   weT,   TpiiT,  waT,    w&T,  woT,   wowT, 
wo-£T,  iFu/T. 

"     YiT,   YeT,    YuT,     YaT,    YaT,    YoT,     YoilT, 
YoiT,  YU-/T. 

"     HiFiT,    HweT,     mpuT,    HnFFaT,     HniFaT, 
HnwoT,  HYiT,  HYeT,  HYuT,  HnYaT,  HnYaT,  HHYOT. 
"     TPFI,    Twe,    TPFU,    Twa,    T^a,  Two,    TYi, 
TYO,  TYU,  TYa,  TYa,  TYO. 

a-b.     Witty,   (w-[i]Ti),  watch,  wedge,  wage,  withe, 
wheezy,  wash,  what,  which,  with,  was,  wish. 

"        Yap  (Y-[a]P),  Uba,  Enbcea,  Yattaw,  Youatt, 
Hewitt,  uva,  yeth,  Euethe,  Yassy,  Yesso,  Yazoo. 

"     YQTh,  YfiS,  YuZ,    PYuNi,  ByuTi,  KYUB,  PYU, 
KYQ,  aG-Yn,  FYU,  VYQ,  MYH. 

61.  rTh,    yS,     rZ,    PrNi,    BrTi,     KrB,     P-r, 
F-F,  V-F,  M-F,  K-F,  aG-F. 

63.     Tue,  do,  due  or  dew,   duenna,   duel,    endue, 
sue  or  Sioux,  suet,  ensue,  zumic. 

"       Thew,  Jew,  lieu,  luna,  nubia  or  Nubia,  avenue, 
tuet,  tufa,  tucum. 


180  THK    PIION'OURAPHIC    MANTAf.. 

EXERCISE,    00-63. 

1.  Wyatt,  whitey,  whitish,  widow,  weedy,  woody, 
witch,  Washoe,  bewitch. 

2.  Yap,     Ubii,    Yeddo,     Utah,     Youatt,    lawyer, 
month,  manual,  minuet,  ingenuous. 

3.  Ubiety,     Eudora,      euphony,      unique,     unify, 
unite,  unity,  immunity,  mutiny. 

4.  Review,   nephew,  fewer,  viewer,   musa,   Cuba, 
pure,  bureau,  usurp. 

5.  Mule,  puma,  fury,  fume,   feud,  curio,  annual, 
fuel,  purity. 

6.  Utica,  Utopia,  usury,  cubic,  Dubuque,  rebuke, 
reviewer,  cumuli. 

7.  Tube,    tuba,   dupe,    duke,    tissue,    duty,    duet, 
duad,  assume. 

LESSON  7. 

THE    H   TICK. 

77.  Ahem,  Ahab,  ahead,  hut,  hawk,  hitch,  Harry, 
here,  hero. 

"  Hire,  harrow,  hill,  hall  or  haul,  hul!3  holy, 
hulk,  helm,  unholy. 

78.  Hop,   hod,   heave,   heavy,   hush,   hum,   hump, 
Hun,  Hindoo. 

"  Harp,  herb,  hearth,  hurl,  harsh,  Harvey, 
hackney,  Hallam,  hank. 

"  Havana,  hammock,  humbug,  hark,  harm, 
Harney,  hearer,  hurley. 

79.  Happy,    hope,     him,     happily,     help,    handy, 
hinge,  Helvetia,  homeopathic. 

80.  Unhappy,     uphill,     keyhole,      unhitch,     tom- 
ahawk,  Mohammed,  unhealthy,   unhandy,  unhinge. 

EXERCISE,  77-80. 

1.     Heap,  hub,  hat,  heed,  huff,  hove,  heath,  hatch, 
hodge. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  181 

2.  Hussy,   hush,   Hoang-Ho,   honey,   hong,  hurry, 
hail  or  hale,  heave,  Hiera. 

3.  Hodgely,      hunch,      hotly,      Henley,     hurried, 
huffish,  heavier,  heavily,  hoodlum. 

4.  Helve,    Helena,    hurrying,    hailing,    headache, 
hatchway,  hedgehog,  hedgerow,  hegira. 

5.  Homage,  hiccough,  harm,  hominy,  hectic,  humi- 
lity, herbage,  Nehemiah,  hallelujah,  Himalaya. 

<>.  Hubbub,  hearty,  hardy,  Herod,  hallowed, 
holliday,  hecatamb,  heritage,  homogeneity. 

7.  Happier,  homely,  homily,  health,  healthier, 
healthily,  homelike,  homelier,  handier. 

s.  Jehovah,  behemoth,  Yokohama,  inhale,  upheave, 
behoof,  behoove,  behave,  behavior. 

0.  Sahara,  re-hash,  adhere,  abhor,  shanghai,  Ne- 
maha,  Navajo,  Howell,  Hawaii. 

1<>.  Jehu,  Omaha,  Kehoe,  Soho,  Yahoo,  Fohi, 
Sheehy,  Elihu,  Mahew. 

11.  Tallyho,  Arapahoe,  Mohave,  Tahiti,  Thahash. 
Sihor,  Mohawk,  sahib,  Ivanhoe. 

LESSON  8. 

SMALL    CIRCLES. 

*4.  sK,  sG,  sP,  sB,  sT,  sD,  sC,  sJ,  sK. 

"  sX,  sNg,  sF,  sV,  sTh,  sDh,  sY,  slr. 

"  sM,  sMp,  sW,  s  W,  sS,  sZ,  sSh,  sZh,  sL. 

85.  Ks,  Gs,  Ps,  Bs,  Ts,  Ds,  Cs,  Js,  Rs. 

"  Ns,  Ngs,  Fs,  Vs,  Ths,  Dhs,  Ys,  Ya. 

"  Ms,  Mps,  Ws,   TTs,  Ss,  Zs.  Shs,  Zhs,  Ls. 

' '  sKs,  sPs,  sTs,  sCs,  sKs,  sNs,  sFs,  sThs,  sYs. 

"  sMs,  sMps,  sWs,   sTJs,   sSs,  sZs,    sShs,   sZhs, 
sLs. 

M;.  PsP.  TsT,  CsC,  KsK,  KsR  GsP,  BsT,  TsK, 
JsP,  Rsk 

^7.  MsP,  BsM,  VsJ,  MsJ  KsM,  MsK,  NsT,  RsN, 

WsP,  LsK. 


182  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANVAL. 

a.     MsM,  nWsL,  SsW,   NsN,   FsZ,   ThsZ,  MsX, 
NsM,  FsLT,  NsLT,  L.sTh. 

89-a.  swT,  swSh,  is  es,  us,  as,  as,  os,  cms,  0zs, 
u/s,  ais. 

91-2.  sP,  sT,  sK,  sF,  sM,  sMP,  sN,  sL,  sW, 
sTh,  sC,  sSh,  sR,  sY,  sPR,  sF^. 

"      zB,  zD,  zG,  zV,  zM,  zMp,  zN,  zL,  zAV,  zDh, 
zJ,  zZH,  zR,  zY,  zBR,  zW?. 

98.  Spy,   stay,    sky,   sphere,   small,    snow,    slow, 
sway,  swoop,  swamp,  Sveer,  Znaim. 

99.  Seep,  site   or  cite,  said,  sage,  seek,  safe,  saith 
or  Seth,  such,  sash,  some  or  sum,  simile,  sun,  sing, 
sir,  sell,  sweaty,  (sw-[e]Ti),  swish(sw-[i]Sh.) 

"      Sag,  sabbath,  sodium,  savage,   sachem,  sorry, 
city,  subdue,  Saginaw,  safety,  Savannah,  Seneca. 

100-2  Task,  phthisic,  miasma,  museum,  rice  or 
rise,  Kehoes,  skies,  snows,  seeks,  righteous  (see  sec. 
70),  Tasso,  posy. 

LESSON  9. 

LARGE    CIRCLES     ETC. 


103-a     ssP,  ssB,  ssT,  ^sD,  ssC,  ssJ,  ssK,  ssG,  ssR. 

"  ssN,  ssF,  ssTh,  ssY,  ssM,  ssMp,  ssW,  ssSh, 
ssL. 

"  Sisbee,  suspicious,  suspiciously,  systole, 
sostenuto. 

"         Sisco,  Susquehanna,  suslik,  seismic. 

b.  Saucy,  Sousa,  sisera,  Cicero,  caesura. 

"  Susurrus,  Sesame,  Sicily,  Cecilia,  syzygy, 
Sisyphus,  soeius. 

c.  Sausage,  schism,  season,   Susan,   Sassenach. 
"         Saucer,  Caeser,    caesarism,   Cecil,    sacerdos, 

10i-5  Schismatize,  secede,  seceder,  seceding,  sauce- 
box, so-so,  seesaw,  so-sos,  seesaws. 

106-7  Sauce,  saucing,  saucer,  saucy,  saucier, 
saucilv,  sauciness. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  183 

"         Size,  sizy,  Suzy,  sis,  sissy,  society. 
109-13    Kss,  Pss,  Tss,  Css,  Rss,  Nss,  Fss,  Thss,  Yss. 
Mss,    VVss,    Sss,   Shss,    Lss,   NssT,   NssR, 
MssP,  KsRss. 

"  Insist,  decisive,  dissuasive,  excessive,  em- 
phasis, desist,  possessed,  exist,  resist,  risest,  possessive, 
exhaust. 

"  Apotheosis,  Texas,  dispossess,  discuses  or 
discusses,  capsize,  colossus,  Anchises,  successive,  sur- 
mises, enthusiast,  nicest,  wisest,  choicest,  closest. 

"  Exercise,  exorcise,  peace  or  piece,  pieces, 
phase,  phases,  rouses,  poses  or  possess,  Pss,  KsRsss, 
enthusiasm,  abscissa. 

116.  Sauce,  size,  cease,  souse,  sauces,  sizes,  ceases, 
souses. 

117.  Assess,    assize,    oasis,    Isis,   Isoeus,   assesses, 
assizes. 

LESSON  10. 

THE    S    AND    /    STEMS. 

118-a.      Ace,  ice,  asp,  ask,  assume,  Assyria,  aspire, 
escape,  asleep. 

"  Asa,  icy,  essay,  sigh,  see  or  sea,  sue, 
Sioux  or  Sue,  say,  saw  so. 

"  Lucy,  Bessie,  Casy,  fussy,  lasso,  basso,  Jesse 
or  Jessie,  massy,  chasse,  also. 

b.  Siam,  Sahara,  science,  seance,  scion  or  Sion, 
sciatica,  sower  or  sewer,  sawer,  lyceum. 

"  Chaos,  bias,  alias,  dais,  Taos,  tortuous,  theos, 
pius,  joyous. 

119.     Aces,  ices,    saws  or  sauce,  asps,  lassos,  Siam- 
ese, sciences,  piously,  joyously. 

121.      Ease,  use,  easy,  Zoe,  rosy,  busy,  dizzy,  cozy, 
noisy. 

"  Piazza,  Boa/,  zero,  busily,  dizzily,  cozily, 
noisily,  easily,  rosiness. 


184  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

LESSON  11. 

LOOPS. 

122-4.  Step,  state,  stake,  stage,  stout,  stitch, 
steady,  store,  story,  stP. 

"  Still,    stilly,     stem,     stone,    staff,     starch, 

stork,  stear,  stearic,  stow,  stower,  stowage. 

125.  Past,  test,  cast,  chest,  rest,  fast,   assist,  zest, 
finest,    thinnest,    keenest,    toughest,    testify,    justify, 
Fst. 

"  Post  or  posed,  opposed,  supposed,  based, 
abased,  teased,  dust,  just,  rust,  roused,  aroused, 
gazed. 

"  Whizzed  or  whist,  ceased  or  seized,  least  or 
leased,  amassed,  amazed,  faced  or  phazed,  honest, 
noized,  reposed,  revised,  deposed,  deputized. 

126.  Testy,    tasty,    dusty,     rusty,    vasty,     misty, 
Shasta,  bestow,  Tuesday. 

127.  Pests,  tests,  guests,  chests,  jests,  rests,  fasts, 
mists,  nests,  Psts,  Fsts. 

130.  Caster,  master,  Nestor,  wester,  faster,  jester, 
pastor,  duster,  disturb,  Pstr. 

132.  Casters,  masters,  Nestors,  westers,  f asters, 
jesters,  pastors,  dusters,  rosters,  Pstrs. 

EXERCISE,    84-132. 

1.  Space,  spare,  scheme,  sphericity,  smoke,  snare, 
snail,  slim,  sweep,  Sviaga,  Zvornik,  Zlatoosk. 

2.  Self,    selves,  salute,  salad,    sailor,    salary,   sal- 
aried, select,  saltish. 

3.  Simoom,  Samuel,  seemly,  seeming,  semi-annual, 
sensate,  censor,  sanitary,  sanitarium. 

4.  Safely,  safer,   savagery,  severe,   satiety,  satire, 
satiate,  Saratoga,  Sardinia. 

5.  Saxon,    sagacity,    Saracen,     Samson,    sophism, 
sedulons,  sageness,  sagacious,  saleratus. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  185 

6.  Seismal,  sassaby,  ciselure,  schism,  schisms,  scis- 
sors, sizzle,  sizzles,  sizzling. 

7.  Pauses  or  possess,  adduces,  incisive,  announces, 
peruses,  dieresis  or   diereses,  revises,    advices   or  ad- 
vises, coalesces. 

8.  Assuage,   eschew,    escheat,    espouse,    espousal, 
Eskimo,  Iscariot,  Escurial,  asphyxia. 

9.  Assassin,    Essex,    assegai,  ossify,   assignee,   as- 
aumpsit,  esophagus,  sienna,  siesta. 

10.  Efficacy,    legacy,    policy,   Nancy,   lunacy,    inti- 
macy, galaxy. 

11.  Islam,    Aztec,    Israel,    Ezra,   Ezekiel,     Ozark, 
lazy,  mazy,  hazy. 

12.  Zouave,  zeal,  Zeno,  zinc,  Zachary,  zodiac,  Xer- 
xes, zigzag,  hazily. 

13.  Step,  steam,  Stacey,  stager,   steadiness,  steal th- 
iest,  stammer,  stammerer,  stanch,  stanza,  stirrup. 

14.  Best,    sauced,    assist,    assessed,   sauciest,   text, 
saltest,  reduced,  thickest,  meekest,  weakest,  zoologist. 

15.  Mistify,    majestic,    majestical,    tasteful,   artist, 
artistic,  theistic,  elastic,  statistics. 

16.  Dazed,    devised,    memorized,   majesty,    assists, 
sophists,  suggests,  invests,  texts. 

17.  Songster,    sinister,  roister,   yougster,  Munster, 
dexter,  Rochester,  Lancaster,  Chesterville. 

18.  Imposters,  disasters,  choristers,   barristers,  an- 
cestors, ministers,  monsters,  gamesters,  forresters. 

LESSON  12. 

INITIAL    HOOKS,     ETC. 

152-3.     Pr,  Br,    Tr,  Dr,  Kr,    Gr,  Cr,  Jr,   Fr,    Vr, 
Thr,  Dhr,  Shr,  Zhr,  Mr,  Ml,  Mpr,  Mpl,  Shi,  Zhl. 

PI,  Bl,  Tl,  Dl,  Kl,  Gl,  Cl,  Jl,  Fl,  VI,  Thl,  Dhl, 
Yl,  PI,  Nr,  Nl,  Ngr,  Ngl,  Rl,  Lr. 

164.     Pray,    brow.,    try,    draw,    ecru,    gray,    free, 
through,  shrew. 


18C)  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

"  Preach,  drake,  drum,  frame,  fresh,  froth, 
frank,  thrive,  thrush. 

"  Apprehend,  Graham,  droop,  shrill,  shriller, 
shrillest,  shroff,  shrove,  sassafras. 

"  Play,  plow,  blow,  clay,  claw,  clew,  flay, 
flaw,  Schley. 

"  Pluck,  plash,  bleach,  flour,  flitch,  flash,  flame, 
fling,  flange. 

"  Plead,  pledge,  globe,  Vlissmaki,  thlipsis,  Tlas- 
cala,  Tlemcen,  Tlumacz,  Schleswig. 

165-6.  Per,  upper,  apple,  till,  chair,  dear  or  deer, 
Shelbyville,  persevere,  umpire,  amber,  ample  or  am- 
ble, anger,  angle. 

«'  Turk,  largess,  soldier,  recourse,  engineer, 
full,  oral,  rule,  temper,  temple,  lumper  or  lumber, 
rumple  or  rumble. 

"  Curious,  Cornell,  normal,  north,  moral,  gur- 
gle, gorgeous,  Georgia,  quality,  ringer  or  wringer, 
wrangle,  inker,  inkle,  ranker,  rankle. 

"  Sure,  shawl,  fisher,  official,  visual,  visualize, 
initial,  shelf,  sheriff. 

167.  Perceive,  larghetto,  paper,  taper,  or  tapir, 
teacher,  meager,  trigger,  trimmer,  trammel,  chimer, 
assumer,  enamor,  tanner,  banner,  Bangor,  collar  or 
choler. 

"  Persist,  bourgeois,  ripple,  tunnel,  tingle, 
carol,  enamel,  camel,  chamber,  jumble,  assemble, 
bushel,  woeful,  shovel,  sacerdotal. 

172-4.  Pueblo,  dwell,  quell,  guib,  Cw,  Jw,  voya- 
geur,  thwack,  Banquo,  Kewaunee. 

"  Bois,  etui,  twice,  twist,  twig,  Quay,  quiz, 
quizzical,  queer,  queery,  untwist,  esquire. 

178.  Wear  or  ware,  weary,  aware,  where,  warm, 
beware,  year,  yarrow,  oyer,  yearly. 

179-80.  Wall,  willow,  while,  awhile,  Welsh,  Wil- 
bur, willful,  welcome,  William,  Rockwell,  "weigher, 
Wyal,  ewer,  Ewell, 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  187 

EXERCISE,     152-lM.I. 

1.  Prop,    pretty,   preach,    prior,    priory,    brush, 
broom,  brawl,  breath. 

2.  Trip,    triad,    dredge,    dreary,    trash,     dream, 
drill,  brawny,  bring. 

3.  Crop,  grotto,  grudge,  creek  or  crick,  grassy, 
crush,  grim,  crawl,  growth. 

4.  Frap,    Friday,    friary,    frog,    freer,    frowzy, 
frith,  frump,   freely. 

5.  Threap,  throb,  thrum,   thrash,  throng,   thrill, 
thrall,  thrifty,  threnody. 

6.  Shrap,    shrub,   shrike,   shriek,    shrug,  shrive, 
shrewish,  shrimp,  shrink. 

7.  Blab,    Plato,    blotch,    bleary,    bleak,    blower, 
blowzy,  plush,  plum. 

8.  Bluffy,  blithe,   blithely,  blank,  plank,   blazon, 
plaisance,  Pleyel,  Pliny. 

9.  Club,    cloudy,    clutch,    clique,    Clara,   glassy, 
clash,  glum,  cloth. 

10.  Flap,    flighty,   fledge,    flurry,   flourish,    flake, 
flare,  flume,  flail. 

11.  Fluff,  fluffy,  flesh,  fleshy,  flanch,  flinch,  flung, 
flank. 

12.  Yale,  yell,  yelling,  yawl,  yule,  yowl^  yowling, 
yelk,  yolk. 

13.  Vapor,    maker,    buckle,    tackle,   peril,    rural, 
family,  cooler,  nailer,  lovingly. 

14.  Tweed,  twitch,    twixt,  twirl,  twang,  twankay, 
twill,  dwale,  dwang. 

15.  Quip,    quiet,   queachy,   quick,  choir  or  quire, 
quarry,  quassia,  Quassy,  qualm. 

16.  Quoth,  quail,   quota,   guacho,   guaco,   guaiac, 
guanaco,  guava,  guelph. 

17.  Worth,  worthy,  wearily,  wordy,  wearier,  war- 
ble, yerba,  Europe,  Yarmouth. 

1 8.  AValrus,     wolf,     welfare,    wheeler,    wheeling, 
wheelbarrow,  wooer,  hewer,  Yawa!,  Whcewhel. 


188  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

LESSON  13. 

S    PREFIX    TO    INITIAL    HOOKS,    ETC. 


L     sPr,  sTr,  sCr,   sKr,  syR,    sFr,    sThr,   sShr, 
sShl,  sMr,  sMl,  swL. 

'<  sBr,  sDr,  sJr,  sGr,  sVr,  sDhr,  sZhr,  sZhl, 
sMpr,  sMpl. 

185.  sPl,   sTl,  sCl,  ski,  swR,  sFl,  sThl,   sYl,  sXr, 
sNl,  sKw. 

"        sBl,  sDl,  sJl,  sGl,  sVl,  sDhl,  sNgr,  sXgl,  sGw. 

186.  Supper,  saber,   setter,    cider,  seeker,   suffer, 
sever,  simmer,  simper,  sample,  seizure,  social,  supreme, 
spiritous,  spiritously,  swell. 

"  Supple,  sable,  settle,  satchel,  sickle,  Sigel, 
civil,  sooner,  singer,  single,  skill,  school,  sequoia,  Sa- 
gua,  swarthy,  swarm. 

187.  Swear,  soiree,  swale,  swallow,  Zwolle,  sway- 
er,  suwarrow,  Sewell,  Suyarrow,  Seyell. 

188.  Spry,    spruce,    spray,    stray,    straw,    spring, 
sprawl,  strap,  streak. 

"  Stream,  string,  stroll,  scribe,  scrub,  screech, 
scream,  scrawl,  scroll. 

"  Splice,  spliced,  splash,  squaw,  squeak,  square, 
squelch,  pasquil,  spume. 

189.  Extra,  Uxbridge,  prosper,  destroy,  dispraise, 
prescribe,  display,  explicit,  sensible. 

"  Vesper,  vestry,  mastery,  massacre,  atmos- 
phere, rostrum,  pastry,  disciple,  disable. 

a.  Descry,  discursive,  disagree,  disagreeable,  de- 
cipher, deciphers,  decipherable,  dissever,  jasper. 

104-5.      Suspire,    sister,    sisters,    sesterces,    sastra, 
sisterly,  sisterhood,  sistrum. 

"  Stopper,  stutter,  stitcher,  stoker,  stabber, 
staider,  stager,  stagger,  staggers,  necessarily. 

190.  hPr,  hTr,  hCr,    hTl,  hTw,   hCl,  hCw,   hKl, 
hThr,  hShr,  hFl,  hFw,  hThl,  hThw,  hYl,   hNr,  hM. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  180 


AKr,  AK1.  AKw,  APl,APw,  Aw>R,    AR1, 
A  Mr,  AMI,  AwL,  ALr,  AFr. 

Hopper,  Hebrew,  hatter,  hydra,  Hagar,  hag- 
gle, hatcher,  heifer,  heathen,  hummer,  hobble,  huddle, 
hovel,  Henry. 

LESSON  14. 

FINAL  HOOKS.       THE  N  AND  F  HOOKS. 

199.     Kn,  Gn,  Pn,  Bn,  Tn,  Dn,  Cn,  Jn,    Rn, 
"        Nn,  Ngn,  Fn,  Vn,  Thn,  Dhn,  Yn,   Yu, 
"        Mn,  Mpn,  Wn,    TFn,  Sn,  Zn,  Shn,  Zhn,  Ln, 
"        Pawn,  boom,   ten,    down,    ken,   gain,   chain, 

John,  rain,  rein  or  reign. 

"        Wan,  won  or  one,  assign,  ozone,    men,    im- 

pugn, shown,  lean,   fine,   vine,   thin,  thine,  noun,  yon 

or  yawn. 

"        Happen,    siskin,    sustain,   cistern,  cistercian, 

Sicilian,  sassolin,   cisalpine,   socinian,   secern,   station. 
200-a.      Candy,    mundane,    Fuente,    learner,    learn- 

ing, sustenance,   suspension,    terrapin,   fancy,   pans}", 

tansy,  Chauncey,  frequency,  tenon,  pronoun. 

"  b.    Canch,  bench,  trench,  chinch,  wrench,  munch, 

winch,  lynch,  finch,  penny,  guinea,  finny. 

201.  Coins,  guns,   pounce,   bounce,  tense  or  tens, 
dance,  chance,  jounce,  rinse,  prince. 

"  Kansas,  ganzas,  pounces,  bounces,  tenses, 
dances,  chances,  jounces,  rinses  princes,  or  princess. 

"  Assistance,  cadence,  cadences,  expense,  ex- 
penses, sequence,  suspense,  existence,  resemblance. 

"  Resistance,  distance,  reluctance,  turns,  barns, 
elegance,  allegiance,  variance,  eloquence. 

202.  Nouns,  once  or  ones,   mens,   fence  or  fens, 
fences,  lens,  lenses,  ransom,  minstrel. 

203.  Pounced,    danced,   chanced,  fenced,    punster, 
punsters,  spinster,  spinsters,  minister. 

206.     Cuff,  gaff,  puff,    biff,  tiff,  deaf,   chaff,  Jove, 
reef,  wharf,  swerve. 


190  T11K    I'lloN-ocKAT'IIir    MANTAI.. 

a.  Refer  or  reefer, '  rover,  river,  cover,  paving1, 
drover,  driver,  driveway,  briefer,  approvingly. 

I).  Puffy,  buft'et,  covey,  coffee,  cafe,  chaffy,  Java, 
defy,  review. 

c.  Cuffs,  puffs,  tiffs,  chaffs,  roofs,  refuse,  refuses, 
devise  or  device,  devises  or  devices. 

EXERCISES  199-206. 

1.  Pen,  tun,  wren,  win,  zone,  shone,  mine,  then, 
lawn. 

•2.  Upon,  atone,  again,  Animon,  Essen,  anon, 
even,  heathen,  alone. 

3.  Pippin,   bobbin,   Teuton,  jejune,  cocoon,  Gog- 
gin,  rereign. 

4.  Balloon,   demon,   Japan,    cabin,    rattan,   ma- 
chine, marine,  barn,  turn. 

5.  Flinch,  French,   Manchuria,  lyncher,  granger, 
pincher,  trencher,  ginger,  ranger. 

6.  Prune,  brain,   brown,  train,   drawn,    drown, 
churn,  adjourn,  yarn. 

7.  Crane,    crown,    grain,  frown,  throne,    shrine, 
frowning,  frownings,  frowningly. 

8.  Plain,     plan,     blown,    clean,    cleaner,    glean, 
gleaner,  Klondike,   flown. 

9.  Doubloon,    chaplin,     chagrin,     shagreen,     en- 
shrine, decline,  incline,  recline,  membrane. 

10.  Twain,  twine,  Dwen,   queen,  twenty,  twinge, 
dwindle,  Quincy,   quinsy. 

11.  Satan,  sedan,  spin,  skein,  sprain,  strain,  screen, 
civilian,  swollen. 

12.  Dunce,  prance,  trance,  glance,  quince,  offense, 
announce,  denounce,  renounce. 

13.  Dunces,     prances,    trances,    glances,   quinces, 
dispenses,  reponses,  distances,  instances. 

14.  Mince,  minces,    lance,   lances,    wince,    winces, 
monstrous,  remonstrance,  minstrelsy. 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  ]!»! 

15.  Canst,  against,  rinsed,  pranced,  cleansed, 
glanced,  announced,  denounced,  renounced. 

10.  Proof,  brief  or  breve,  brave,  trough,  groove, 
bluff,  cliff,  quaff,  strive. 

17.  Divide,  devoid,  devote,  David,  davit,  referee, 
reference,  references,  referable,  roughness,  rebuff, 
reproof  or  reprove,  defense,  provoke,  telegraph,  tele- 
phone, dwarf,  groovy,  bluffy. 

LESSON  15. 

FINAL  HOOKS  CONTINUED.      THE  TER  HOOK. 

209.  Actor,  patter,  pouter  or  powder,  tatter, 
chatter,  gather,  gaiter,  batter,  bitter,  biter,  butter, 
debter,  j utter,  Jtr. 

' '  Writer,  orator,  Arthur,  redder,  raider,  rather, 
order,  sector,  scatter,  spider,  sorter,  surder,  starter, 
Ktr. 

"  Crater,  prater,  traitor,  relater  or  relator, 
warder,  greeter,  braider,  brighter,  brother,  blotter, 
character,  collector. 

"  Scudder,  scepter,  cruder,  creature,  platter, 
pleater  or  pleader,  plotter  or  plodder,  clatter,  gladder, 
glitter,  equator,  splutter. 

"  Barter,  border,  tartar,  darter,  curator, 
Jupiter,  debater,  captor  or  capture,  repeater,  rebutter, 
surrebutter. 

"  Nectar,  educator,  agitator,  liberator,  lubrica- 
tor, rejecter,  reporter,  recorder,  regulator,  circulator. 

«'  Proctor,  proprietor,  preceptor,  prosecutor, 
director,  inspector,  desecrater,  dissipater,  deserter, 
disorder,  demonstrator. 

"  Detractor,  protractor,  prospector,  projector, 
investigator,  replicator,  reflector,  structure,  structural, 
subterfuge,  Catherine. 

210-11.  Factors,  vectors,  evictors,  navigators,  elec- 
tor, selector,  escheator,  elector,  selector,  escheator 


192  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

LESSON    16. 
THE  SHUN  FINAL  HOOK  AND  THE  SHUN  CURL. 

214.  Action,  caution,  option,  passion,  addition, 
ration,  mission,  ambition,  nation,  Rshn,  Mshn. 

"  Reaction,  rogation,  caption,  diction,  educa- 
tion, adoption,  ebullition,  eviction,  affection,  volition, 

' '  Rotation,  petition,  dentition,  agitation,  Egyp- 
tian, mutation,  notation,  magician,  logician,  quotation. 

"  Nation,  fashion,  vision,  lesion,  lotion,  session, 
secession,  donation,  revision,  remission. 

"  Creation,  suppression,  secretion,  location, 
election,  repletion,  section,  saltation,  vocation,  avoca- 
tion. 

"  Citationer,  dictionary,  educational,  sectional, 
sectionalism,  rational,  national,  additional,  legations, 
allegations,  terminations. 

217.  Position,  possession,  decision,  excission,  ac- 
cession, recision,  transition,  acquisition,  cessation, 
musician,  sensation,  dispensation,  Psshn,  Truss/in, 
annunciation. 

"  Positional,  oppositional,  possessional,  proces- 
sional prepositional,  transitional,  musicianal,  musician- 
ally,  sensational,  sensationally,  decisions,  excisions, 
accessions,  recisions,  physicians. 

LESSON  17. 

DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  R  AND  L. 

231.  Fear,  sphere,  flare,  veer,  heavier,  surveyor, 
fierce  or  fears,  veers,  flares,  fearful,  fearless,  fearlessly. 

232.  Pair    or    pare,    tear,    chore,    core,    prayer, 
player,  spare,  drear,  clear,  queer,  fear,  fearful,  Greer, 
grower,  grayer,  crier. 

"  Row,  are,  rare,  rarer,  carrier,  arc  or  ark, 
arm,  roam  or  Rome,  mar,  weigher,  sower,  shower, 
lower,  tailor,  newer,  sneer,  Thor,  ewer. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  193 

"  Parry,  tarry,  cherry,  carry,  prairie,  blurry, 
dreary,  Clara,  queery,  merry  Assyria,  showery,  Lyra, 
ferry,  narrow,  theory. 

"  Seer  or  sere,  sorry,  serio,  serious,  seriously, 
surge,  sermon,  star,  -  starry,  stereo,  starch,  storm, 
kaiser,  poser,  Towser,  Chaucer,  racer,  tracer. 

"  Wire,  worry,  warrior,  where,  wherry,  rule, 
sworn,  yore,  Uri,  yarn,  Tortatto,  Shakespeare, 
Borneo,  barge,  retiring,  pureness,  fortuitous,  forth. 
236-d.  Fail,  fuel,  veils  or  vales,  failing,  Nile, 
Nellie,  nasal,  nasally,  nicely,  facile,  facilely,  thistle, 
thistly,  Yosel,  Yosely,  sensational,  sensationally,  sen- 
sationalist. 

237.  Lo  or  low,  lake,  loom,  el  or  ell,  elk,  elm, 
help,  thill,  yellow,  meal,  assail,  shallow,  Ashley, 
lisle. 

"  Poll,  pall  or  Paul,  pull,  Powell,  Buell,  tall, 
towel,  duel,  chill,  jill,  jewel,  keel,  gale,  goel,  rill, 
rowel,  earl,  musicianal,  musicianally. 

"  Spill,  sprawl,  brawl,  Pleyel,  troll,  droll, 
Stowell,  dwell,  Charles,  crawl,  cruel,  scrawl,  sickle, 
scull  or  skull,  stickle,  Cloel,  quell,  squeal. 

"  Felly,  valley,  polly,  tally,  duello,  chilly, 
gayly,  goelin,  rally,  early,  trolley,  scrawly,  sickly, 
Scully,  cruelly,  Cluley,  quickly,  squally. 

"  Seal,  silly,  slow,  Sloan,  still,  stilly,  stolen, 
wall,  willow,  woolen,  wheel,  whilst,  alarm,  learning, 
swell,  sNsZL,  fealty  anility,  facility,  nazality,  V$As- 
LT,  F#AsL,  Fs£AsL. 

LESSON  18. 

DOWNWARD    AND    UPWARD    SH. 


240-a.      £AMr,  #AM1,  ^Mpr,  ShM.pl,  ShwL,  ShyR. 

b.  Fish,  flash,  huffish,  lavish,  slavish,  fishy,  flashy, 
fishes,  flashes,  vicious,  Fashoon,  vitiation,  fishiest, 
flushes  t. 


104  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

"  Officiously,  vitiosity,  officiousness,  lavishness, 
Vashti,  Fashoda,  fish-glue. 

c-d.  FsSfi,  FnSJ,  NnSA,  SknM,  PfSh,  Kf.v//, 
Rfx/,. 

211.  Partial,  bushel,  F.S7/1,  NX/d,  FtfAls,  FSAlshn, 
FSAlst,  Ntf/tlshn,  Ntf/dst. 

242.  Sh,  ShK,  ShR,  ShMp,  ShS,  ShL,  ShX,  ShF, 
ShTh,  ShsR,  ShsX,  ShssN. 

"  ShKr,  ShPr,  ShTr,  ShCr,  ShFr,  ShThr, 
ShShr,  ShShl,  ShKl,  ShPl,  ShTl,  ShCl,  ShwR,  ShRl, 
ShNr,  ShNl,  ShFl,  ShThl,  ShYl,  SbtfAl. 

«  Shape,  shady,  sham,  shewel,  shewelly,  shal- 
low, shyly,  Ashley,  shallower,  ashler,  cash,  rush, 
mush,  lash,  gnash  or  Nash,  bishop,  dishevel. 

"  Bush,  bushy,  dash,  Joshua,  Prussia,  plush, 
crash,  clash,  trash,  trashy. 

"  Shrill,  shroel,  shroelly,  Schlem,  fisher,  fish- 
woman,  fish-trowel,  fish-monger,  bushelman,  FShlMn, 
NShlMn,  Schiller,  association,  rhetorician. 

LESSON  19. 

THE    HALVING    PRINCIPLE 

244-5.  Pat  or  pad,  spot,  sprite,  prate  or  prayed, 
plait,  plate,  plaid  or  played,  bit  or  bid,  brought,  braid 
or  brayed,  blade,  pits,  bits  or  bids,  braids. 

' '  Apt,  act,  etched,  east,  eased,  aft,  ashed,  ebbed, 
egged,  edged,  Crete  or  creed,  greet  or  greed. 

44  Fright  or  fried,  throat,  flight,  hacked,  hedged, 
heft,  haft,  Hittite,  hated,  hooded,  audit,  aided. 

' '  Coat  or  code,  pot  or  pod,  tote  or  toad,  chit 
or  chid,  gate,  bait  or  bayed,  dot  or  Dodd,  jot  or  jawed, 
speed,  prate  or  prayed,  plot  or  plod,  glut. 

4 '  Cute  or  cued,  could,  got  or  God,  good,  pout, 
bout  or  bowed,  taught,  tot  or  Todd,  doubt  or  Dowd, 
chat,  sprout,  spread. 

44        Pride,  proud,  pleat  or  plead,  plight  or  plied, 


TITK   PHOyoORAPIIIC   MAN7r.VL.  105 

bright  or  bride,    bread,   trait  or  trade,    trite  or  tried, 
trout,  skate,  street,  strode. 

"  Abrade,  applied,  occurred,  augured,  uttered, 
ottered,  avert  or  averred,  overt,  afloat,  seated,  suited, 
sated. 

Pent,  pend  or  penned,  attend,  tent  or  tend, 
tents  or  tends,  bent  or  bend,  font  or  fond,  coughed, 
caved,  scant  or  scanned,  tattered,  glittered,  motioned, 
fends,  gifts. 

Mit  or  mid,  aimed,  seamed  or  seemed, 
stemmed,  hammered,  simmered,  meant  or  mend,  mottle 
or  model,  dimmed,  net  or  Ned,  end,  nooned,  sent  or 
send,  honored,  endeavored,  fanatic. 

Battery,  pottage,  detach,  dotage,  detect, 
dedicate,  beautiful,  foundry,  phantom,  freedom, 
grander,  greatly. 

Gladly,  cultivate,  dreadful,  tact  or  tacked, 
tagged,  checked,  joked,  capped,  left,  lapped,  shaved, 
sheaved. 

"  Thickened,  rescued,  insect,  basket,  basked, 
regret,  halberd,  tabled,  shackled,  shepherd,  engraft, 
engraved. 

"  246-8.  Replied,  liquid,  present,  provide, 
tribute,  clubbed,  climate,  alphabet,  frequent,  fre- 
quently, phonetic,  rapidly,  positioned,  fountain,  main- 
tain, mundane. 

240-5U.  Duad,  Druid,  triad,  poet,  pleiad,  Naiad, 
petty,  Tahiti,  dado,  grotto,  cloudy,  Fido. 

251-a.  Impute  or  imbued,  impend,  mopped  or, 
mobbed,  stamped,  hampered,  ambled,  impassioned 
impatiant,  simpered,  sampled,  tempt,  sham  pood,  lam- 
pooned, lumbered,  rumpled,  promptly. 

252-a.  Hanged,  angered,  angled,  singled,  wronged, 
fingered,  tingled,  shingled,  inked,  ranked,  inkled, 
rankled,  anchored,  tinkered,  Langdon,  Wington. 

253-a      Wit,  whit,  white,  sweet,  wade  or  weighed, 


196  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

swayed,  Haywood,  yacht,  yawed,  hewed  or  hued,  went 
or  wend,  wind,  yawned,  yield. 

254.  Separationist,  fusionist,  visionist,  excursion- 
ist, Salvationist,  liberationist,  elocutionist,  prohibition- 
ist, revisionist,  inflationists. 

LESSON  20. 

THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,  -CONTINUED.       R  AND  L  HALVED. 

257.  Right,   Wright,   rite  or  write,  rate  or  raid, 
art,  ord,    erred,  aired,   hart,    heart   or   hard,  herd  or 
heard,  hired,  rites  or  writes,  arts,  herds. 

4 '  Light,  lot  or  laud,  load,  alt,  ailed,  old,  oiled, 
hailed,  halt  or  hauled,  holt  or  hold,  lights,  Leeds. 

4 '  Sort,  surd,  start  or  starred,  stored,  slate,  salt, 
sled,  sailed,  stilt,  stilled,  sorts,  stilts. 

a.  Erret,  aerate,  aright,  arid,  arrayed,  Herod,  har- 
rowed, harried,  hurried,  horrid,  riot,  ruddy. 

"  Elite,  alight,  allot,  allied,  aloud,  helot,  hal- 
lowed, salute,  solid,  stolid,  Elliott,  lady. 

258.  "Wert,   word,   ruled,    yard,    raft,   raved,  rift, 
rent  or  rend,  rafts,  rents  or  rends,  ordered,  ruddered. 

"  Rationed,  warned,  whirred,  relieved,  yarned, 
yearned,  served,  surround,  surrounds,  starved,  swerved, 
Hay  ward. 

44  Wilt  or  willed,  wild,  welt,  weld  or  welled, 
lard,  lord,  lent  or  lend,  eland,  slant,  silent,  swelled 
highland,  Holland. 

259.  Rightly,    rattle,   writing,    written  or  ridden, 
redden,  reddening,  rooting,  rating  or  raiding,  routing. 

4  4  Hartley  or  hardley,  hurtle  or  hurdle,  Hart- 
man,  Harton,  harden,  hardening,  Harding,  sorting, 
starting. 

44  Lightly,  lighten,  lightening,  lighting,  Alton, 
laden,  loaden,  leading,  olden. 

''  Halting,  Holden,  Holding,  slightly,  slighting, 
sledding,  stilting,  warden,  wildly. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  197 

"  Article,  ratify,  ratified,  certify,  certified,  or- 
dinary, ordinal,  ordinally,  ratable,  Hartford,  Rudyard, 
rudely. 

260-1.  Turret,  tarried,  garret,  ferret,  ferried, 
afford,  merit,  smart,  smeared,  desert^  resort,  thwart, 
report,  retort. 

Parrot,  part,  tart  or  tarred,  towered,  Stuart, 
Stewart  or  steward,  dart,  charred,  jarred,  mart  or 
marred,  showered,  feared,  veered,  reward,  inwardly. 

"  Kilt  or  killed,  belt  or  belled,  dolt  or  doled, 
jolt,  broiled,  melt,  molt  or  mold,  assault,  assailed, 
result,  rustled,  desultory. 

"  Hamlet,  runlet,  bustled,  tusseled,  exult, 
exalt,  excellent,  upheld,  uphold,  beheld,  behold,  mildly. 

"  Felt,  failed,  knelt,  nailed,  quilt,  quelled, 
squealed,  dowelled,  jewelled,  Newland,  lowland,  Ash- 
land. 

LESSON  21. 

THE    HALVING    PRINCIPLE,    CONCLUDED. 

263.  Sheet,  shut,  shout,  shot  or  shod,  shoat  or 
showed,  shoot  or  shoed,  shed,  shad,  shade. 

"  Sheets,  shuts,  shouts,  hushed,  hashed,  sheet- 
ing, shedding,  shading,  shadings. 

"  Pushed,  abashed,  cashed,  gashed,  gushed, 
rushed,  gnashed,  splashed,  brushed. 

"  Crushed,  crashed,  clashed,  thrashed,  cherished, 
nourished,  relished,  flourished,  perished. 

"  Sashed,  swished,  shirt  or  shirred,  short, 
shred,  shrewd,  shroud,  shreds,  shrouds. 

"  Shelled,  shield,  Schultz,  shields,  shan't, 
shunt  or  shunned,  shinned,  shined,  shunts. 

"  Shorten,  shortening,  shortened,  shorthand, 
shortly,  shortness,  enshroud,  enshrouds,  shielding, 
shunting,  enshrined. 


198  THE  PHOXOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

"  Dished,  dashed,  mashed,  smashed,  lashed, 
slashed,  abolished,  polished,  fished,  flashed,  vitiate, 
WSht,  freshet,  refreshed. 

266.  Midnight,  intimate,  sentiment,  Hampton, 
nempt,  maiden,  madness,  moneyed,  Medusa,  thanet, 
viaduct,  Betsy,  locked,  chitchat,  kitkat. 

"  Needham,  nomad,  named,  feared,  veered, 
WFt,  int,  WVt,  TFYt,  esthete,  ThSt,  YSht,  ShZt, 
ZhZt,  latish,  leashed,  flashlight. 

"  PNt,  TFt,  CFt,  KWt,  PSt,  TSht,  pennate, 
bonnet,  tiffet,  defeat,  devote,  Jouthet,  key-weight, 
busied,  dashed. 

270.  Fate,  fated,  mate,   mated,  dart,  darted,  belt, 
belted,  create,  created,  plant,   planted,  mend,  mended. 

"  Rate,  rated,  light,  lighted,  alight,  alighted, 
load,  loaded,  allude,  alluded,  fade,  faded,  found, 
founded. 

"  Excite,  excited,  exceed,  exceeded,  decide, 
decided,  recite,  recited,  reside,  resided,  solicit,  solic- 
ited, resist,  resisted. 

271.  Add,  added,  hate,  hated,  heed,  heeded,  cite, 
cited,  side,  sided,  state,  stated. 

272.  Test,  tested,  adjust,  adjusted,   waste,  wasted, 
fast,  fasted,  enlist,  enlisted,  request,  requested. 

273.  Wait,  waited,  wade,  waded,  freight,  freighted, 
treat,  treated,  doubt,  doubted,  yield,  yielded. 

275-7.  Contest,  writest,  rudest,  hardest,  lightest, 
loudest,  oldest,  slightest,  fleetest,  shortest,  proudest, 
brightest,  greatest,  roundest,  grandest,  fondest. 

280.  Active,  motive,   native,  sanative,   relative,   in- 
dicative,  provocative,   dative,   elective,    sensitive,  act- 
ively, indicatively,  electively,  sensitively. 

281.  Petal,  pedal  or  peddle,  beetle  or  beadle,  title, 
tidal,  cattle,  kettle,  rattle,  fatal,  victual,  metal,  medal 
or  meddle,  nettle,  needle. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  199 

LESSON  22. 

THE  LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE. 

282.  Mutter  or  mother,  matter,  madder  or  Mather, 
motor,  meter,  Easter,  oyster,  zither. 

"  Shedder,  sheather,  shutter  or  shudder,  father, 
fetter,  feature,  future,  voter,  thither. 

"  Neater  or  neither,  nadir,  entire,  enter  or  ender, 
another,  smatter,  smother,  Sumpter,  cimeter. 

u  Center  or  sender,  saunter,  softer,  mortar,  mur- 
der, norther,  threader. 

"  Fritter,  flatter,  flutter,  filter  or  philter,  falter, 
shrewder,  shorter,  shelter,  shoulder,  diameter,  promo- 
ter, pander  or  panther. 

"  Letter  or  leather,  leader,  lighter  or  lither, 
looter  or  Luther,  lather,  latter  or  ladder,  older,  elder, 
halter,  holder,  solder,  slighter. 

"  Stilter,  stalder,  alderman,  palter,  beholder, 
Walter,  welter  or  welder,  wielder,  wilder,  wilderness, 
swelter,  larder. 

283.  Sumpter,      embitter,     importer,      imperator, 
tempter,  prompter,  trumpeter,   temperature. 

a.   Cincture,   puncture,    tincture,  juncture,  perfunc- 
tor,  sphincter. 

285.  Wetter,    waiter,     water,     sweeter,    whiter, 
weather,     weeder,     wither,     wider,    wader,     whether 
whither,    yachter,  Yoder,  yielder. 

286.  Tenter    or   tender,  chanter,  janitor,  renter    or 
render,  winter    or    winder,  asunder,  O'Shanter,  absen- 
ter,  Lysander. 

"  Monitor,  fainter,  fender,  thunder,  yonder,  inno- 
vator, originator,  provender,  progenitor. 

"  Canter  or  candor,  lender,  slanter  or  slander, 
painter,  ponder,  binder,  printer,  planter,  sprinter, 
splinter. 

287.  Watered,   weathered,   withered,   fettered,   flat- 
tered, sheltered,  shouldered,  slaughtered,  paltered. 


200  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 

' '  Smothered,  centered,  rendered,  tendered,  foun- 
dered, embittered,  tinctured. 

288.  Entire,  adventure,  feature,  material,  tincto- 
rial, loiter,  imputer,  imparter,  ambulator. 

289-90.  Northern,  eastern,  zittern,  lantern,  leath- 
ern, luthern,  northener,  maternity,  Walderon. 

"  Moderation,  immoderation,  federation,  allitera- 
tion, alteration,  litheration,  puncturation. 

LESSON  23. 

PREFIXES. 

293.  Contain,  condense,  construe,  contrive,  con- 
demn, control,  contract,  contribute,  conquer,  congress, 
conquest,  congregation. 

"  Condone,  condition,  concise,  consult,  convert, 
conceited,  content  or  contend,  contained,  conjecture, 
constable,  comfort,  comestible. 

"  Candy,  cambist,  campaign,  camber,  comber  or 
cumber,  Kemble  or  Kim  ball,  council,  counsel  or  can- 
cel, Campeachy,  Cambridge,  cambric,  Kendrick, 
kimbo, 

"  Commit,  commute,  commode,  commodity, 
common,  commune,  comment  or  commend,  commenta- 
tor, commentatory,  command,  commandment,  com- 
mence. 

"  Commemorate,  commix,  commingle,  commis- 
sure, commissary,  commission,  commerce,  commercial, 
Conner  or  cunner,  connate,  connive,  cognizant. 

"  Cammock,  kummel,  cummin,  cumminic,  Gum- 
ming, cannon,  cannoneer,  cannonade,  cannular,  canny  or 
Kinney,  cannel  or  kennel,  Kennedy. 

"  Discontent,  decompose,  nonconductor,  noncom- 
missioned, recompense,  recommit,  reccommend,  re- 
commence, recognizance,  inconstant,  unconsciously, 
incongruous. 

"     Discomfit,     disconcert,     encumber,     unenciim- 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  201 

bered,  incandescent,  incantation,  uncommon,  uncanny, 
unkennel,  kinnikinic. 

"  Incomplete,  incompletely,  inconvenient,  incom- 
petent, inconsistent,  inconceivable,  unconditional,  un- 
concern, unconcerned. 

"  Circumflex,  circumvent,  circumambient,  cir- 
cumnavigate, circumference,  circumspect,  circumscribe 
circumjacent,  circumlocution. 

c.  Congo,  camphor,  canter,  counter,  cantata,  Kem- 
ble,  Kimball,  condor,  conjure,  Conrad  or  comrade, 
counsel,  Cambridge,  Connellsville,  disconnect,  discom- 
mode, kinnikinic. 

"  -d.  Preconcert,  incumbent,  unconversion,  re- 
condite, reconvey,  reconcile,  complement,  concern, 
confidence,  contrary,  convenient,  conversation,  canvas 
or  canvass,  canvassed. 

f ,  294.  Accomplice,  accomplish,  accompany,  accom- 
modate, akimbo,  O'Connor,  O'Connel,  unaccomplished, 
accommodation,  akimbo,  unaccompanied,  anaconda, 
concomitant,  concomitants,  concomitantly,  concomi- 
tance, concomitancy. 

295-96.  Contravene,  contradict,  contradance,  con- 
trovert, counterfit,  countermand,  countersign,  counter- 
irritant,  Canter  bury,  controversy,  controversial,  contro- 
versialist, counterconnect,  counter-compony,  incontro- 
vertible, uncontradicted,  contribution. 

29T.  Cognition,  cognomen,  cognate,  cognizance, 
recognize,  recognition,  recognizance,  incognito,  unrec- 
ognized. 

298.  Inspire,  inspiration,  inseparable,  instrument, 
unstrung,  insufferable,  unsocial,  insolence,  insulation, 
insular,  unsalable,  enslave,  unseemly,  unswept,  un- 
swayed. 

a,  e,  299.  Unskilled,  unsupplied,  unsettled,  unsad- 
dled, unsatcheled,  unswerved,  unsquared,  uncivil, 
unseen  ,  insurgent,  insurrection,  unsurpassed,  unservice- 


"2(}'2  THE   PHOXOHRAPHIC   MAXTAL. 

able,    inconsiderable,    inconsiderate   or    unconsidered, 
inconsiderately. 

300.  Intermit,  intermittent,  intermission,  inter- 
marry, intermural,  intermeddle,  intermingle,  interme- 
diate, intramundane,  interspersed,  interjacent,  inter- 
view, intervene,  interfusion,  international. 

"  301-a.  Enterprise,  entertain,  introduce,  inter- 
}x>se,  interval,  interpolate,  interrogate,  interpret,  inter- 
cede, interstice,  transact,  transfigure,  transcript,  tran- 
sept, transom. 

302.  Magnanimous,  magnanimously,  magnanimity, 
magnify,  magnifier,   magnificient,  magnficiently,  mag- 
nificence, magniloquence,  magniloquent,  magniloquent- 
ly,  magnitude. 

303.  McBride,  McBurney,    McDonald,  McDowell, 
McFarland,  McKnight,  McLeary,  McLeod,  McLellan, 
McMaster,    McMullen,    McNamara,    McPherson,    Mc- 
Tiernan,  McVicker. 

"  McAdam,  McElroy,  McHenry,  Mclntosh, 
McCleary,  McClellan,  McCoy,  McCook,  McCul lough, 
McKenna,  McKenzie  or  Mackenzie,  McKinley, 
McGee,  McGlynn,  McGregor. 

304-b.  Selfish,  selfishly,  selfishness,  unselfish,  un- 
selfishly, unselfishness,  self-love,  self-denial,  self-made, 
self-reliant,  self-evident,  self-esteem,  self-assertion, 
self-possessed,  self-sufficient'. 

305-6.  Self-control,  self-conquer,  self-conscious, 
self-conceit,  self-conceited,  self-contained,  self-com- 
mand, self-condemned,  self-confidence,  self-composed, 
self-complacent,  self-control,  self-conquer,  self-contra- 
dict, self-controvert. 

LESSON  24. 

AFFIXES. 

316-b.  Ing,  ings,  hong,  hongs,  song,  songs,  sting, 
stings,  pang,  bring,  spring,  tongs,  string,  wrong, 
sling,  Sring. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  203 

317.  Owing,  owings  or  Owings,  hoeing,  hoeings, 
aiming,  knowing,  clewing,  glowing,  paying,  brewing, 
doing,  doings,  strewing,  rowing,  selling,  soaring, 

"  Staking,  stepping,  stating,  stitching,  staying, 
storing,  steaming,  stilling,  stunning,  wearing,  weary- 
ing, ruling,  yarring,  welling. 

318-a.  Mocking,  looking,  shipping,  leaping,  fetch- 
ing, lodging,  marrying,  belting,  melting. 

"  Keeping,  paling,  mailing,  raking,  coaching, 
barring,  rushing,  matching,  moving,  copying,  mellow- 
ing, pirating. 

"  Roaring,  sparing,  scheming,  framing,  loath- 
ing, soothing,  feeling,  fearing,  veering,  rallying,  retir- 
ing, retorting. 

"  Meeting,  impeding,  promoting,  prompting, 
cutting,  chatting,  waiting,  lighting,  flitting,  knitting, 
deserting,  pouting,  treating,  Tht-,  yielding. 

"  Tinning,  winning,  nooning,  accounting,  chant- 
ing, shunting,  lending,  coughing,  pottering,  motion- 
ing, fashioning,  FA^AnXg,  roughing,  rationing,  posi- 
tioning. 

b.  Musing,  whizzing,  leasing,  facing,  causing, 
tossing,  choosing,  racing  or  razing,  spacing,  tracing, 
closing,  freezing. 

"  Cleansing,  glancing,  pouncing,  bouncing, 
prancing,  dancing,  trouncing,  chancing,  rinsing. 

"  Jouncing,  condensing,  entrancing,  wincing, 
fencing,  convincing,  lancing,  mincing,  announcing. 

c,  321.  ThstNg,  yeasting,  lasting,  testing,  jesting, 
RnstNg,  costing,  resting,  feasting,  blustering,  muster- 
ing, frying-pan,  looking-glass,  dancing-master. 

322-3.  Knowingly,  lovingly,  surpassingly,  entic- 
ingly, rejoicingly,  sufficingly,  ThsXgli,  youzeingly, 
jestingly,  approvingly,  cunningly,  amazingly,  entranc- 
ingly,  mincingly,  convincingly,  Worthington,  Elling- 
ton, Kensington. 


204  THE  PHOXOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

LESSON  25. 

AFFIXES,    CONTINUED. 

324-5.  Fashionable,  actionable,  attainable,  account- 
able, unaccountable,  provable,  sensible,  insensible, 
accessible,  sociable,  finishable,  accountableness,  prov- 
ubleness,  sensibleness,  sociableness,  reasonableness. 

326.  Painful,    binful,    spoonful,    tuneful,  manful, 
mindful,  graceful,  binfuls,  spoonfuls. 

327.  Manfulness,  mindfuiness,  lawfulness,  doleful- 
ness,  restf ulness,  artfulness,  boastf ulness,  wastefulness, 
painfulness,  tunefulness. 

"  Fruitf ulness,  doubtfulness,  thoughtf ulness, 
dreadfulness,  ruefulness,  faithfulness,  ruthfulness, 
healthfulness,  bashfulness,  awfulness. 

328.  Attractiveness,  secretiveness,  alimentiveness, 
combativeness,   inhabitiveness,   attentiveness,   passive- 
ness,  evasiveness,  decisiveness,  pensiveness. 

329.  Hopelessness,     carelessness,      recklessness, 
boundlessness,    thoughtlessness,    endlessness,     joyless- 
ness,    restlessness,    artlessness,    listnessness,     souless- 
ness,  Yslessness. 

LESSON  26. 

AFFIXES,   CONCLUDED. 

330.  Biograph-y-ic-al-ly,   geography-ic-al-ly,  helio- 
graph-y-ic-al-ly,     telegraph-y-ic-al-ly,     stenograph-y-ic- 
al-ly,  orthography-ic-al-ly,  lithograph-y-ic-al-ly,  phono- 
graph-y-ic-al-ly,      photograph-y-ic-al-ly,     telegraphist, 
stenographist,  phonographist. 

a-b.  Biographer,  geographer,  heliographer,  tele- 
grapher, orthographer,  lithographer,  photographer, 
telegram,  programme,  phonogram,  mimeogram,  logo- 
gram. 

331-a.  Potency,  vacancy,  vagrancy,  regency,  ten- 
ancy, leniency,  infancy,  relevancy,  necromancy,  dis- 
crepancy, corpulency,  vicegerency,  T:  P,  J;V. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  U 

"  Elegancy,  efficiency,  sufficiency,  currency, 
Montmorency,  emergency,  tangency,  benignancy, 
sequency,  truancy,  buoyancy,  fluency. 

332-4.  Barbarity,  propriety,  temerity,  triviality, 
formality,  popularity,  speciality,  affability,  possi- 
bility, accountability,  accessibility,sensibility,  expansi- 
bility, responsibility. 

"  Vicinity,  docility,  sincerity,  finality,  penality, 
geniality,  plurality,  urbanity,  humanity,  proclivity, 
declivity,  concavity,  divinity,  nationality,  rationality. 

"  Putridity,  placidity,  lucidity,  fatuity,  gratu- 
ity, variety,  notariety,  tenuity,  torpidity,  rapidity, 
insipidity,  turgidity,  torridity,  timidity,  validity, 
asafetida. 

335-9.  Integrity,  ubiquity,  agility,  hilarity,  solid- 
ity, civility,  stability,  stupidity,  insularity,  duality, 
materiality,  reality,  parity,  penalty. 

340.  Sphericity,      veracity,     felicity,     vitiosity, 
precocity,  verbosity,  duplicity,  reciprocity,  electricity, 
elasticity,    perspicacity,    pugnacity,    eccentricity,  lax- 
ity, convexity,  sagacity,  curiosity,  necessity. 

341.  Myself,  thyself,  itself,  oneself,  ourself,  your- 
selves,  myself,  thyself,  itself,  oneself,  ourself,   your- 
selves. 

342.  Lordship,    hardship,  leadership,  partnership, 
seamanship,     friendship,     statesmanship,     ownership, 
fellowship. 

343.  Friendly,  friendliness,  friendless,  confidently, 
winsome,  wrinsomeness,     aptness,     remittance,    appro- 
priateness, achievement. 

LESSON  27.. 

DEKIVATIVES,     NEGATIVES,    ETC. 


344-a.  Keen,  keener,  keenest,  keenly,  keenness, 
slant,  slants,  slanting,  slantly,  slanted,  shrilly, 
facilely. 


206  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 

345.  Immortal,  immigration,  emigration,  innoxi- 
ous, irresolute,  relevant,  irreconcilable,  illegal,  illib- 
eral, unknown,  unnecessary,  unnerve. 

"  a,  347.  Immask,  immerge,  immure,  immesh,  im- 
mingle,  ennoble,  innate,  innocence,  innerve,  unlace, 
unlike,  unroof,  enlighten,  inroad. 

348,  a.  Mistake,  postmaster,  postoffice,  postage, 
postpaid,  postpone,  lastly,  testament,  toastmaster. 

b-d.  Sanctity,  anxious,  unction,  sanction,  sane, 
tioned,  distinction,  distinguish,  extinguish,  languish, 
attainment,  assignment,  appointment,  stationary, 
stationery.  . 

"  Testamentary,  stranger,  transmit,  transla- 
tion, passenger,  messenger,  swift,  swiftly,  swiftest, 
swifter. 


THE  REPORTING  STYLE. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

OMISSION   OF  VOWELS   AND  DIPHTHONGS.      THE 
VOWEL  SCALE   AND  POSITION.      LOGO- 
GRAPHS   AND   SEMIGEAPHS. 


LESSON  28. 
OMISSION  OF  VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS. 

350.  In  the  Reporting  Style  the  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs, with  but  comparatively  few  exceptions  (which 
will  be  mentioned  in  the  next  chapter),    are,    for  the 
sake  of  speed,  omitted  from   all  words   of  consonant 
outline.     This,  it  is  true,  decreases  the  legibility  of  the 
writing,  but  only  to  the  extent  of  the  omissions  stated, 
the  skeleton   outlines   of  the  words  still  being  amply 
legible  for  all  the  purposes  to  which  shorthand  is  ap- 
plied and  by  those  who  have  had  experience  with  them 
are  preferred  to  the   vocalized  forms,   since  the  loss  of 
time  required  to  write   the  latter  more   than  counter- 
balances whatever  gain  might  be  obtained  from  their 
greater  legibility. 

THE  VOWEL  SCALE  AND  POSITION. 

351.  As  many  words   are  of   similar  outline,  par- 
ticularly when  they  consist  of  one  stem  simple  or  com- 
pound or  of  two  simple  stems,    it  becomes  necessary 
when  such  words  are  left    un vocalized  to    distinguish 

207 


208  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

them  apart,  otherwise  they  would  often  conflict  in 
meaning.  Therefore,  if  the  accented  vowel  or  diph- 
thong can  in  some  way  be  indicated  the  word  may  I  >e 
easily  read.  Accordingly,  what  is  called  the  Vowel 
Scale  has  been  adopted  by  shorthand  writers  embracing 
all  the  regular  vowels  and  diphthongs  and  is  formed 
by  alloting  certain  of  the  former  to  one  of  three  posi- 
tions, above,  on  and  through,  or  below  the  line  of 
writing  and  certain  of  the  latter  to  one  of  two  posi- 
tions, above  and  through  or  just  below  it.  These  are 
known  as  the  first,  second  and  third  positions.  (See 
also  sec.  45. )  By  writing  a  word  in  one  of  these,  either 
its  accented  vowel  or  diphthong  is  usually  indicated. 
This  scale  or  arrangement  is  in  the  order  found  by  ex- 
perience to  be  the  best  for  stenographic  purposes  and 
is  as  follows: 

SHORT  VOWELS.   LONG  VOWELS.   DIPHTHONGS. 

First  position         i         o  I         e  oi 

Second     "  e         u  a        o 

Third       "  a         a  a        u  ou       ui 

352.  A  single  or  half  length  sloping  or  perpen- 
dicular letter  when  in  the  first  position  is  placed  with 
the  lower  end  half  the  length  of  a  T  stem  above  the 
line.  When  in  the  second  it  is  placed  on  the  line  as 
heretofore  and  when  in  the  third  it  is  struck  through 
it,  half  above  and  half  below.  Horizontal,  full  and 
half  sized  stems  in  the  first  position  are  placed  below 
and  touching  an  imaginary  upper  line  the  height  of  a  T 
stem  above  the  ordinary  one,  except  in  the  case  of 
simple  straight  stems  which  are  written  just  below  the 
line  so  as  not  to  be  confused  with  it.  In  the  second 
position  horizontal  full  and  half  sized  stems  are  written 
on  the  line  (see  sec.  4),  and  in  the  third  below  and 
touching  an  imaginary  one  half  the  length  of  a  T  stem 
underneath  it  in  the  same  manner  as  when  in  the  first 
position. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL  209 

353.  When  a  double  length  letter  is  written  in  po- 
sition it  begins  at  the  same  point  as  its   corresponding 
single  length. 

a.  A  downward  double  length  letter  in  the  first 
position  thus  has  three-fourths,  in  the  second  one-half 
and  in  the  third  one-fourth  of  its  length  above  the 
line.  An  upward  double  length  letter  in  the  first  and 
second  positions  is  written  in  the  same  manner  as  its 
single  length;  namely  above  and  on  the  line.  When 
in  the  third  position,  however,  its  first  fourth  is 
placed  below  the  line  while  the  remaining  three  fourths 
extend  above  it.  Horizontal  double  length  letters  are 
of  course  written  in  position  in  the  same  manner  as 
are  the  corresponding  single  and  half  lengths. 

354.  When  a  word  consists  of  two  or  more  stems 
it  is  written,  if  all  are  horizontal,    in  the  position  of 
the  first  stem.     In  other  cases  it  is  written  with   the 
first  downward  or  upward  stem,  whether  this  is  initial 
or  not,  in  the  required  position.     An  initial  horizontal 
stem  in  such  words  is  thus  raised  or  lowered  in  each 
position  in  order  to  accommodate  itself  to  that  of  the 
following  stem  except  before  an  upward  stem  in  the 
second  or  a  downward  half  length  one  in  the  first   in 
which  cases  it  is  written  on  or  above  the  line  the  same 
as  when   alone.     The  same   is  truo   of  two  or  more 
initial  horizontal  stems. 

355.  All  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  as  such,  when 
alone  or  words  of  two   syllables  and  over  composed 
wholly  of  both  or  either  are  written,  in  the  second  po- 
sition, that  is  on  the  line,  the  same  as  in  the  Element- 
ary  Style.     Sometimes,   however,    the   vowels   when 
alone,  and  also   the  breath  dots   and  circles,    are  em- 
ployed as  words,  and  are  then  written  either  in  the  first 
or  second  position  according  to  stenographic   conveni- 
ence, as  will  presently   be  explained.     When   written 
in  the  first  position  these  characters  are  placed   just 
below  and   touching  the  imaginary  upper  line.    (See 


210  TI1K    PIl'ONOflKAI'II.r    MANTAL. 

sec.  352.)  If  they  should  ho  written  in  the  third  po- 
sition they  would  be  made  just  below  and  touching  the 
imaginary  lower  line.  They  are,  however,  seldom 
placed  in  the  third  position. 

a.  Sometimes  the  loops  are  employed  to  represent 
phrases,  as  will  be  explained  in  Chapter  X.  In  which 
case  they  are  written  in  position  the  same  as  down- 
ward stems  but  not  often  in  the  third  position. 

356.  Derivative  words  generally  retain  the  position 
of  their  primitives. 

357.  The  position  of  a   consonant  is  indicated  in 
stenotypy  by  small  superiors  in  the  same  manner  as  is 
a  vowel  or  diphthong.      (See  sec.  46.) 

358.  Besides  the  first,    second  and  third  positions 
there  are  two  others,  namely  the  fourth   and  zero,   in 
which  words  are  written.      These  will  be  considered  in 
Chapter  X. 

CAUTION      IN       REGARD     -TO      WRITING      IN       THE       FIRST 
POSITION. 

359.  When  writing  in  the  first  position  the  words 
should  not  be  placed  too  far  above  the  line.     In  the 
case  of  perpendicular  or  slanting  strokes  an  elevation 
of  half  a  T  length  is  a  sufficient  indication  of  position 
while  horizontals  and  small  characters  should  never  be 
written  any  higher  than  the  length  of  a  T  stem. 

SMALL    W    AND    Y    INSERTED    ALONE. 

360.  In  the   Reporting  Style  when  a  word  occurs 
which   in  the  Elementary  Style  is   written  with  the 
small  disjoined  W  or  Y  or  HW  or  HY  as  explained  in 
section   60,    both   the    semiconsonant   and  vowel  are 
usually  omitted.     Sometimes,  however,  only  the  vowel 
is  omitted.     In  which  case  the  outline   of  the  word  is 
written  in  its  proper  position  and  the  small  W  or  Y  or 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  211 

H"W  or  HY  opening  to  the  right  or  upward  (w  or  Y, 
H w  or  HV)  placed  opposite  the  center  of  the  stem  as 
usual. 

THE    BREATHINGS. 

361.  In  the  Reporting  Style  the  same  rules  gov- 
ern  the    breath   letters  as   in  the  Elementary  Style. 
Accordingly  usually  only  the  H  ticks  are  employed. 

a.  If   preferred   in   the  case    of    those  words  in 
which,  when  vocalized,  the  aspirate  is  indicated  by  the 
dot,-  the  latter  only  may  occasionally  be  inserted  and 
the  vowel  omitted  according  to  the  principle  govern- 
ing small  W  and  Y,  explained  above  in  section  360. 

b.  If  the  ticks  are  omitted  altogether  (see  sec.  81), 
the  dot  may  be  employed  instead  and  the  vowels  usu- 
ally omitted  in  accordance  with   the   principle    men- 
tioned in  the  last  paragraph    in  regard   to  small  W 
and  Y. 

LOGOGRAPHS  AND  SEMIGRAPHS. 

LOGOGRAPHS. 

362.  More  than  one  half  of  spoken  English  is  made 
up  of  the  same  words  repeated  over  and  over  again, 
many  of    them    being    monosyllables,    which,    when 
written   in    full,  contain  only  one    consonant    stem, 
simple  or  compound.     Quite  a  number,  however,  are 
dissyllables  of  one  stem,  while  the  remainder  are  prin- 
cipally monosyllables  or  dissyllables,  etc.,  of  two  or 
more  stems.     In  the  Reporting  Style  all  alike  are,  for 
the  sake  of  speed,  represented  by  one  stem  simple  or 
compound,    or   occasionally  by   their  accented  vowel 
only.     All  these  characters  when  thus  used  are  called 
Logographs,  and  each,  as  far  as  is  possible,  stands  for 
one  word,   or  for  such  words  as  will  not  conflict  in 
meaning. 

363.  The  term  Logograph,   properly  speaking,  is 
applied  only  to  the  characters  which  represent  those 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


words  that  occur  most  frequently  in  language.  Two 
words,  accordingly,  may  have  similar  forms  and  only 
one  of  the  latter  be  a  logograph;  the  other  not  being 
made  one  because  of  the  infrequency  of  the  word  it 
represents.  From  the  foregoing,  therefore,  it  will  l>e 
perceived  that  as  a  logograph  never  has  more  than 
one  stem,  simple  or  compound,  a  phonographic  Avon  I 
of  two  or  more  stems  can  never  be  a  logograph,  an<J 
also  that  a  phonographic  word  may  have  a  complete 
outline  of  one  stem  and  yet  not  be  a  logograph.  The 
same  observations  apply  to  the  vowels. 

364.  As  they  consist   of   one   stem    or  character 
logographs  are   generally  written   in  the  position  of 
their  accented  vowel  or  diphthong.     (See  sec.  351.) 
Sometimes,  however,  when  words  of  the  same  outline 
belong  to  the  same  position  and  would  also  conflict, 
one  of  them,  usually  the   least   frequently  occurring 
word  is  written  out  of  position;  as  in  the  case  of  the 
words  number  and  remember   in  the  following  list. 
(See  sec.  381.)     Also  a  few  words  are  written  in  the 
second  position,  the  most  convenient  for  the  writer, 
although  they  do   not   properly  belong   there,  when 
they  will  not  conflict  with  any  other  word  in  that  posi- 
tion; as  "dear." 

365.  A  logograph  of  partial  or  double  length  out- 
line that  represents  a  verb  in  the  present  tense  may 
generally  be  used  to  represent  it  in  the  past  tense. 
Where  doubt  might  occur,  as  for  instance,  sometimes 
after  the  plural  nominative,  the  letter  T  or  D  may  be 
added  disjoined;  as  in  "punished,   remembered,  mat- 
tered," Pn3tT,  Br'.D,  Mtr'.D.     The  form  for  the  pres- 
ent tense  is  also  used   for  the   past   in    half    length 
logographs  without  appendages  or  with  an  N  or  F  hook 
which  represents  those  words  whose  present  ends  in 
T,  Nt,  or  Ft,  or  their  heavy  sounds,  and  past  in  Ed, 
mentioned  in  section  274.      (See  also   see's  L^7,   and 
270  to  273.) 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  213 

366.  When  all  the  outline  letters  of   a  verb  are 
contained  in  a  single  length  logograph,  the  latter  may 
he  halved  to  represent  the  past  tense,  as  in  "believed, 
added,    called,     followed,    valued,     cheered,     issued, 
ushered,  assured." 

367.  Adverbs  ending  in  Ly  or  Y  may  usually  be 
written  with  the  same  forms   as   the  primitive  adjec- 
tives terminating  in  L.    Thus  "hopefully,  principally, 
specially,  inexpressibly,  ably,    idly,    equally,    fully," 
etc.,  may  be  written  with   the  forms   for  "hopeful, 
principal,    special,    inexpressible,     able,     idle,    equal, 
full,"  etc. 

368.  The  circle  S  may  be  added  to  logographs  to 
denote  the  plural  number  or  possessive  case  of  nouns, 
etc.,  or  the  third  person  singular  of  verbs,  as  in  "ad- 
vantages, does,  others,  ifs. "     It  may  also  be  added  to 
represent  the  word  "self ;"  as  in    "himself"   and  the 
large   circle   may  represent  "selves;"    as    in    "them- 
selves," as  explained  in  section  341. 

369.  Derivative  words  like  those  in  the  last  sen- 
tence of   section  365,   and  those  in  sections  366  and 
368,  can  always  be  easily  written,  when  their  primi- 
tives  are   known,  from    the   directions   there   given. 
Consequently  they  are  usually  omitted  from  the   fol- 
lowing list. 

370.  In  the  case  of  the  indefinite  articles  "a"  and 
"an"  if  special  distinction  is  at  anytime  desired  be- 
tween them,  the  latter  can  be  written  in  full.     Like- 
wise when  any  word  represented  by  a  logograph  is  to 
be  specially  distinguished  from  every  other  word  it  is 
written  in  full  or  vocalized  or  both. 

371.  The   upward   alternative   tick  for   "a"   (see 
sec.  32),  is  never  written  alone  or  initially.     Accord- 
ingly it  may,  if  preferred,  be  employed  to  represent 
the  word    "and,"    instead  of  the  logograph  given  in 
the  list. 

372.  For  stenotypic  convenience  a  tick  or  curvet 


214  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

(see  sec.  27,  a)  when  it  is  employed  as  a  word  in  un- 
connected writing,  is  usually  represented  in  stenotypy 
by  the  characters  for  the  half  length  which  it  re- 
sembles, with  the  syllable  Oid  (signifying  "like") 
added,  the  combination  being  pronounced  as  usual. 
Thus  Ptoid  and  Ftoid  represent  the  words  "of"  and 
"all"  and  are  named  Peetoid  and  Feetoid.  If  the  end 
of  the  tick  is  shaded,  the  long  sound  of  the  vowel 
which  it  represents  is  added;  thus  Ttoido,  pronounced 
Teetoido,  represents  O,  oh  or  owe. 

a.  If  preferred  "all "may  be  represented  with  the 
upward  stem  L  in  the  first  position  instead  of  with 
Ftoid. 

373.  The  shading  for   the  long  sound  is    usually 
omitted  for  stenographic  convenience  from  the  right 
half  circle  for  the  pronoun  I,  and  the  left  ones  for  the 
pronouns  "who-m"  and  "whose." 

a.  The  semicircles,  except  those  for  "who-m" 
and  "whose,"  are  written  in  the  first  position  for 
stenographic  convenience. 

374.  The   definite   article    "the"    is    represented 
with  the  light  or  -f  dot  (see  section  26),  written  above 
the  line. 

375.  If  at  any  time  it  is  desired  to  specially  dis- 
tinguish a  long  vowel  word  from  a  short  one,  as  the 
verbs  "owe"  and  "awe"  for  instance,  the  long  vowel 
dot  may  be  inserted  after  the  former  according  to  the 
rule  in  section    39.     This,   however,  will  seldom  be 
necessary. 

376.  When  a  printed  word  is  connected  with  its 
derivatives  by  one  or  more  hyphens  it  signifies  that  the 
logograph  stands  for  all. 

377.  When  a  logograph  consists  of  a  stem,  simple 
or  compound,  it  is  called  a  Stem  Logograph.      When  it 
does   not  contain  a  stem,  that  is  when  it  consists  of 
only  a  circle,  tick,  etc.,   it  is  termed  a  Small  Logo- 
graph. 


THE   PIIOXOORAPIIIC  MANUAL.  215 

378.  Some  of  the  small  logographs,  as  will  here- 
after appear,   have  alternative  forms,  which  are  em- 
ployed for  stenographic  convenience. 

379.  The    logographs    in    the   following    list    are 
known  as    General    Logographs,  since    they  are  em- 
ployed in  general  writing.     There  are  others,  known 
as    Special   Logographs,    or   Technigraphs,     used    in 
special,  that  is  technical,  writing,  which  will  be  con- 
sidered in  a  succeeding  chapter. 

380.  The  list  is  arranged  in  phonetic  order  so  as  to 
be  consulted  by  the  learner  when  reading  his  own  or 
others'  phonography  should  an  outline  at  any  time  be 
met  with  whose  meaning  has  been  forgotten.     It  is 
divided  into  two  parts,  the  first  part  beginning  at  P 
and  the  second  at  F,  at  Lesson  29.     It  should  be  com- 
mitted to  memory  before  proceeding  to  the  next  sub- 
ject.    As  the  characters  are  generally  very  suggestive 
of   the  word   they   represent,    they   are   quite   easily 
learned.     After  studying  the  first  part  of  the  list,  the 
learner  should  cover  a  column  of  the  stenotypy  and 
write  the  printed  words  from  memory.     When  this 
has  been  accomplished  he  should  repeat  from  memory 
.the  words   just  written    in   shorthand.     Only  a   few 
repetitions  of  the  process  will  be  necessary.     After  he 
has  memorized  a  page  of  the  logographs  he  may  take 
up  the  next  one  in  the  same  manner  and  so  on  until 
the  first  part  of  the  list  is  mastered.     He  should  then 
pursue  the  same  course  with  the  second  part;  namely, 
Lesson  29. 


216 
381. 

P  

1 

Pst  

3 

Pn  

91 

Pf  

?, 

Psshn  
Pr  

1 
1 

Prns. 

1 

Prf  

1 

PI  

1 

Pins  
Plf  

3 

9, 

Plshn  .... 
sP  

3 
1 

sPn.  .  . 

?, 

ssPn  
sPrs  
sPrst  
sPrns  .... 
sPrnst  .  .  . 
sPrshn  .  .  . 
sPl  

2 

1 
1 
2 
2 
1 
1 

sPln  
sPlshn,  .. 
nsPrs  .... 
nsPrst  .  .  . 
nsPrns  .  .  . 
nsPrnst  .  . 
Pt  

2 

2 
2 
1 
2 
2 
1 

Prt  

1 

Prf  t  . 
Pit. 

1 
1 

THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

LIST  OF  LOGOGRAPHS. 


STEM  LOGOGRAPHS. 

P 

occupy   2  up   3  hope,  party,  happy 
happiest 

upon    3  punish-ment,  happen 
poverty   3  hopeful, 
opposition   2  position    3  possession 
appear   2  principle-al,  per 
appearance 

perfect-ly-tion    2  proof-ve    3  approve-al 
plea    2  people-d,  play   3  apply 
appliance 
playful 
application 

speak,  speech    2  spoke,  special 
spoken 
suspension 

suppress    2  express    3  surprise 
suppressed    2  expressed    3  surprised 
experience 
experienced 

suppression    2  expression  3  separation 
supply 
explain 
explosion 
inexpressible 

unsuppressed   2  unexpressed 
inexperience 
inexperienced 
occupied    2  put 

particular-ly-ity,   pride     2   part    3  op- 
portunity, proud 
profit 
plead 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


217 


Pint  

a 

stPnt  .... 
sPrt  

i 
1 

sPlt  

9, 

sPlnt  
B  

2 
1 

Bss  

1 

Bsss  

1 

Bn  ...... 

1 

Bf. 

2 

Btr  

2 

Bshn  
Br  

2 
1 

Brn  

8 

Brns  
Brtr  
Bl  

2 
2 
1 

Bins  

9, 

Blf  

2 

sB. 

1 

sBf  

2 

sBshn  .... 
Bt  

1 
3 

Bnt  

1 

Brt  

1 

Brnt  
Bit  

3 

1 

T  

1 

Ts  

2 

Tst  

3 

Tn. 

3 

Tf  

1 

Tr.  . 

1 

2  plaintiff 

1  stipend    2  stupendous-ly-ness 

1  spirit   2  spread    3  separate 

2  explode 

2  explained 

B 

be,  by,  buy    2  but,  object 
business 
businesses 
combine    2  been 
above,  objective    3  behalf 
better 
objection 

liberty   2  member,  remember    3  number 
brethren 
remembrance 
brother 
belong   2  able 
balance 
belief -ve 

subordinate    2  subject 
subjective 

subordination    2  subjection 
about 
behind 

brought    2  bird,  board,  aboard   3  brute 
brand 
built,  build-ing    2  bold 

T 

ought,  aught,  what,  time    2  to,  too,  it 

3  at,  out 
its    3  itself 
attest 
atone 
whatever 
1  internal,  try    2  truth    3  true 


218 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


Trn. 

91 

Trf  

9, 

Trtr  

1 

Trshn  
Tl  

2 

9 

Tlf  
Twn  

2 
1 

Twf  
sT  

2 
3 

sTn  

9, 

sTns  
sTnst  .... 
sTsshn  .  .  . 
ssT  

2 
2 
3 
2 

stT  

•>, 

stTn  

1 

stTshn  .  .  . 
sTr.  

3 

9 

sTrn  
sTrf  .... 
sTrnst  
sTrtr  
sTrshn  .  .  . 
ssTrn  .... 
nsTr  .  . 

2 

i 

2 
2 
2 
I 

9 

nsTrf  
nsTrtr  
nsTrshn  .  . 
Trt  

2 
2 
2 
9 

Tit  
Tlf  t  

2 

9 

stTt  

1 

stTnt.  .  .  . 

1 

D  

1 

eternal,  eternity 

truthful,  turf 

contractor 

contraction    3  attraction 

till,  tell   3  until 

telephone-y-ic-al 

between 

twelve-fth 

satisfy 

circumstantial 

circumstance 

circumstanced 

satisfaction 

system 

state 

constituency 

constitution-al 

external,  externality 

strange-ness 

strife-ve   2  constructive 

strangest 

constructor 

construction 

cistern 

instruct 

instructive 

instructor 

instruction 

trade,  toward 

told 

telephoned 

constitute 

constituent 

D 

dollar     2  do,   defendant    3  add,   had, 
advertise-ment 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


219 


Ds. 

1 

Dst  

1 

Dn  

1 

Dns  

1 

Df  

1 

Dtr.      .    . 

9| 

Dshn  
Dr  

1 
1 

Drn  
Drns  .... 
Drf  .. 

1 

3 
1 

Drtr  
Drshn  
1)1   

2 
1 
1 

Dins  
Dltr  
Dw  

1 

1 

a 

sD  

2 

sDr  

2 

s  Drshn.  .  . 
nsDr  .... 
Dt  

2 
'2 

1 

Dnt  

1 

Dtrt  
Drt  

2 
1 

Dwt  
sDrt  
nsDrt  .... 

K  

2 
2 
2 

1 

Ks  

1 

Kst  
Kn    

1 
9, 

Knst   .... 
Kr  . 

2 
1 

educe    3  adduce 

distinct-ly-ion 

denominate-ion    2  done    3  providential, 

down 

audience    3  providence 
divine   2  differ-ence-ent-ly    3  advance 
debtor,  determine-ing 
edition    2  condition    3  addition 
doctor    2  dear    3  during,  dark 
doctrine    3  darken 
darkens-ness 
derive 
director 

derision    3  duration 
idle,  idol,  idyl    2  deliver-y 
idleness    2  deliverance 
idolater 
dwell-ing 
said 

consider-able 
consideration 
inconsiderable 
did,  deed   3  doubt 
audient   3  provident 
determined-ly 
deride    2  dread 
dwelt 

considered-ate 
inconsidered-ate 

K 

kingdom    2  come,  country 

because,  cause    2  case 

cost   2  cased    3  cast 

can,  countrymen 

canst 

christian-ity    2  care    3  cure 


220 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


Krs  

9, 

Krf  

9, 

Krtr  

1 

Krshn.  .  .  . 
Kl       

2 
1 

Kwst  
Kwn   .... 
Kwf  
Kwtr  
sKs  

1 

2 
1 
1 

1 

sKr  
sKrn  

1 

1 

sKrf  
sKrshn  .  .  . 
sKl  

1 

1 
1 

sKlf  
nsKr  

1 
1 

nsKrf..  .. 
nsKrshn  .  . 
Kt  

1 
1 

-2 

Knt  

] 

Krt..  ..  .. 

1 

Kit  

1 

Kltst  
Kwt  

2 
1 

Kwnt  
sKnt  
sKrt  
nsKrt  .... 
nsKrnt  .  .  . 
nsKlt  

G  

2 
2 
1 
3 
1 
1 

1 

Gn  

1 

Gns  

1 

course,  coarse    3  curious 

careful   3  carve 

creature 

creation 

call,  equal   2  coal    3  clue,  clew 

conquest    2  quest 

question 

equivalent-ly 

quarter,    2  equator 

six-th 

describe,  scripture-al    3  secure 

screen 

descriptive 

description 

skill    2  scale    3  school 

skillful 

inscribe,    3  insecure 

inscriptive 

inscription 

could 

kind    2  account,  county    3  count 

creed,  accord-ing-ly,  concord    2  court 

3  accurate,  cart,  crowd 
equaled   2  cold    3  cloud,  conclude 
coldest 
quite 

acquaint-ance,  quaint 
second 

secret   3  secured 
unsecured 
unscreened 

unskilled    2  unsealed    3  unschooled 
G 


give-n    2  go,  ago 

begin-ning,  organ    2  begun,    again 
3  began 


begins,  organs-ize 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


221 


Gnst 1  organist- ized    2  against 

Gf 2  gave,  govern-ment 

Gtr 2  together    3  gather 

Gns.s/m  .  .   1  organization 

Gr 1  degree 

Grtr 2  greater 

Gl 2  glory 

Gls 2  glorious 

Glf 2  gulf 

sG 1  signify-icant 

sGns 1  significance 

sGf 1  significative 

sGshn.  ...   1  signification 

Gt 1  got,  God   2  get,  good 

Grt 2  great,  girt,  gird    3  guard 

Git 1  guilt-y   2  gold 

S 

S 1  see,  sea,  saw    2  so,  sow,  sew,  say    3  us, 

use  (n.),  sue 

Ss 1  cease,  seize,  size 

Sst 1  ceased,  seized,  sized 

Sn 1  assign 

Sshn 2  cession,  session 

sSshn ....  2  secession 
Ss.s7m  ....  2  cessation 

Str 1  Easter,  oyster    2  Esther    3  aster,  astir 

Strn 1  eastern,  cithern    2  astern 

St 1  east   3  asset 

Snt 2  assent,  ascent,  ascend 

Z 

Z 1  ease-y    2  was    3  those,  use  (v. ) 

Zst 2  zest 

Zn 2  zone 

Ztr 1  zither 

Ztrn 1  zithern 

Zt.  .          .3  used 


222 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


LESSON  29. 

F 

F )  1  if   2  for    3  half 

Fn 1  often 

Fr 1  offer    2  from 

Frst 2  first 

Fl 1  follow-ing,  fill    2  full 

Frtr 2  further    3  farther 

Ft    2  after    3  fact 

Fit 2  flood 

V 

V     1  ever    2  have    3  however,  halve 

Vn 1  even    2  heaven    3  oven 

Vr 1  over    2  very,  every   3  whoever 

Vrs 2  universe 

VrssAfi  ...  2  conversation 

VI 1  evil   3  value 

Vlshn  ....  3  valuation 

s V 2  Savior,  several 

Vtr 2  voter 

Vrt 2  virtue 

Th 

Th 2  think,  oath    3  thank,  thousand-th,   hath, 

youth 

Thr 1  author,  ether    2  three    3  through 

Thrs 1  thrice,  authorize 

Thrst  ....  1  authorized    2  thirst    3  athirst 

Tht 1  thought 

Thrt 1  authority   2  third    3  throughout 

Dh 

Dh 1  thee,  thy,  with    2  them,  they    3  though, 

thou 

Dhs 1  thyself,  these    2  this    3  thus 

Dhss  . .      .2  themselves 


THE   I'llOXOCJKAPinr    MAXt'AL. 


1  thine,  within,  heathen    "1  than,  then 

1  either    2  their,  there 

2  theirs 
2  therein 

1  withal 

2  without    3  that 

2  withheld,  withhold 

Ch 

1  each,  watch    2  which    3  much 
1  watchful    2  whichever 

1  cheer-y,  watcher    2  chair 

2  chairman 

1  cheerful 

2  children 

2  switch   2  such 
2  charity   3  chart 
1  child 

J 
1  joy  2  advantage,  Jesus    3  large 

1  religious    2  advantageous 

2  just   3  largest 

1  religion    2  general   3  imagine-ary-ation 

2  generalize 

1  religionist   2  generalized 

1  joyful 

2  generation 

2  justification 

3  generalization 
3  larger,  jury 

3  jurist 

3  jurisdiction-al 

2  angel    3  evangel,  largely 

3  evangelize 

3  evangelist,  evangelized 
3  evangelization 
2  suo;<rest-ed 


224 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


Jn.  ...    . .  1 1  gentlemen    2  gentleman 

Sh 

Sh 1  she,  wish    2  shall    3  issue 

Shr 1  wisher   2  sure,  usher    3  assure 

Shrns ....  3  assurance 

sSh 2  selfish 

Shrtr  ....  1  shorter 

Shltr 2  shelter  3  shoulder 

Sht 1  wished   2  shalt   3  should 

Shtst 3  shouldst 

Shrt 1  short 

Zh 

Zh 2  usual 

Zhr 2  pleasure,  azure    3  measure 

sZhn 1  scission 

nsZhn.  ...  1  incision 

Zhrt 3  measured 

M 

M 1  my,  me    2  am,  him,  may 

Ms 1  myself   2  himself 

Mst 1  almost   2  most,  must 

Mn 1  men,  mine   2  man   3  moon 

Mr 1  remark-able,  Mr.,  mere   2  more,  mercy- 

iful   3  humor 

Mrs 1  immerse   3  humorous 

Mrst 1  immersed,  merest  3  humorist 

Ml 1  million-th 

sM 1  similar-ly-ity    2  some 

sMn 3  examine 

Mtr 2  matter 

sMtr 3  smoother 

Mt 1  might,   meet-ing,    immediate-ly    2  met, 

mate,  made    3  moot,  mood 

Mnt 2  amount    3  movement 

sMt..        .   2  somewhat 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


225 


sMnt 3  examined 

Mp 1  importance-ant    2  improve-ment    3  map 

Mps 1  impossible-ity    2  impose 

Mpss 1  impossibilities 

Mpsshn.  .  .  2  imposition 

Mpr 1  empire 

Mpl 2  humble    3  ample,  amble 

sMp 1  simple-y-icity 

stMp 2  stump    3  stamp 

sMpt 1  somebody 

N 

N 1  in,  inn,  any    2  no,  know    3  own 

Ns 1  influence    2  hence 

Nst 1  influenced,  honest   2  nest,  next 

Nn 1  opinion    2  known    3  union 

Nshn  ....  1  information    2  nation    3  notion 

Nr 1  near,  nor,  honor    2  manner    3  owner 

Nrs 2  nurse 

Nrshn ....  2  narration 

Nl   2  only    3  annual 

Ms 2  unless 

sN 3  soon 

stN 2  stone-y 

Ntr 1  entire,  neither    2  another 

Nrtr ....  1  norther 

Nrtrn ....  1  northern 

Nt 1  not    2  nature,  under,  hundred-th    3  hand 

sNt 2  cent,  scent,  sent,  send    3  sound 

Ng 

Ng 1  thing,  long,  along    2  language 

Ngst 1  longest 

Ngr 1  longer    2  hunger-y    3  anger-y 

Ngrst  ....  2  hungriest    3  angriest 

Ngl 1  English    3  angle 

Ngln  ....  1  Englishmen 

sNg 1  singular-ly-ity 


220 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXTAL. 


sXijfii 3  sanguine 

sNirshn   .  .  3  sanction 

Ngt I  longed 

\<rnt 1  longhand 

Nglnt ....  1  England 
sNgshnt .  .  3  sanctioned 

R 

R 1  or    2  her,  are,   before    3  our,   hour,   rue 

Rs 2  hers,  herself    3  ours,  ourself 

Rss 3  ourselves 

Rf 1  arrive-al,  reveal    2  revolve 

Rtr 1  writer,  order    3  rather 

Rshn 2  oration 

Rs,s7m ....  1  recission   2  recession 

Rl   1  real,  rely   2  rail,  roll,  role    3  rule 

Rls 1  release,  realize 

Rlst 1  realist 

Rlf 1  relief-ve 

Rltr 2  relater-or 

Rlshn ....  2  relation 
Rls-s'/cM  ...  2  realization 
sRn  ....     2  concern-ing 

2  were    3  aware 
2  where 

..  2  wherein 

..  2  whereof 

yR 1  year    2  your 

?/Rs 2  yours,  yourself 

2/Rss 2  yourselves 

sRt 2  certain-ly-ty 

?#Rt 2  wert,  word 

2/Rt 2  yard 

L 

L 1  law    2  will 

Ln 2  lone,  alone 

Lshn 2  revelation    3  revolution 


TldE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANL'.U.. 


Ptoid  . 
Btoid  . 
Ttoid  . 
Ttoido 


Lrn 2  learn 

sJL 3  salvation 

wLi 2  well 

ir//'L.       .  .  1  while,  awhile 

Ltr 2  letter 

Lt 2  wilt,  world 

Lrt 1  lord 

W 

AV 2  weigh,  way,  away 

H\V 1  why    2  when 

Wn 2  one,  won 

Wns 2  once,  oneself 

n\Vns  ....  2  whence 

Wtr 1  water 

n  irtr  ....  1  whither,    2  whether 

Jltr 1  wider,  wither    2  weather 

TFt 1  wide    2  weighed    3  would 

Wnt 2  went 

Y 

Y 1  ye    2  yea 

nY 3  hew,  hue 

Ys 2  yes 

nYn 3  hewn 

Yt 2  yet 

Ynt 1  beyond 

Ylt 1  yield 

SMALL   LOGOGRAPHS. 
THE  S  CIRCLE. 

s 1  is,  his    2  as,  has,  self 

ss  .  ,2  selves 


TICKS  AND  CURVETS. 

1  of    2  ah 

2  ha 

1  on    2  awe 

2  O,  oh,  owe 


22-8 


TllK    PlloNoiiUAl  HU'    MANUAL. 


Dtoid . . 
Ktoid . . 
Ktoida . 
Ftoid  . . 
Shtoid  . 
Wtoid .. 


ho,  hoe 
a,  an 
aye,  eh 
all 
and 
already 


ANGLES. 


w 

1  we 
2  you 

SEMICIRCLES. 
11 

1  ay,  eye 
1  hie,  high 
1  he 
1  other 
1  others,  otherwise 
2  who-m 
2  whose 

DOTS. 

1  the 
2  how 

Y  

i  

i  

HI  

He  

u.  

us  

HU  

HUS  

+  .. 

H. 

THE  MOST  FREQUENT  LOGOGRAPHIC  WORDS. 

382.  The  following  are  the  most  frequent  words 
represented  by  logographs  in  about  the  order  of 
their  occurrence  in  general  use.  Sometimes,  how- 
ever, after  the  first  seven,  namely,  after  "an,"  the 
order  may  vary  more  or  less  according  to  the  nature 
of  the  subject  matter. 


the  that  on  has  which 

and  is  I  he  all 

of  his  with  but  from 

to  for  you  are  your 

in  it  be  not  we 

a,  an  or  as  have  when 


was 
will 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  22i) 

SEMIGRAPHS. 

383.  Semigraphs  are  words  which  are  either  deriva- 
tives of  logographs  or  contain  a  logograph,  or  its 
alternative  (see  sec.  378);  as  "advantageously,  into, 
also,  although,  onto,  whatsoever, "  etc.  Such  words, 
the  same  as  those  in  section  369  can  usually  be  easily 
written  when  their  primitives  or  compounds  are 
known.  A  few  of  the  most  frequently  occurring  ones 
are  given  in  the  Vocabulary,  section  418.  No  further 
attention  need  be  paid  to  them  at  present. 

a.  When  "ever"  and  "soever"  end  a  semigraph  the 
former  is  never  joined  when  the  preceding  part  of  the 
word  ends  with  a  circle  or  the  latter  when  it  ends 
with  a  circle  on  an  N  hook.  In  such  cases  they  are 
written  disjoined;  thus,  H«s2'.V,  whosever;  nWns'.V, 
whencever;  nWnstsV,  whencesoever.  In  all  other 
cases  they  are  usually  joined;  thus,  Hw?RV,  wherever; 
H?/jRsV,  wheresoever;  TJsV,  whatsoever,  nWsV, 
whensoever;  n>/2sV,  whosoever;  Hwss2V,  whosesoever. 


230 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

WORDS  OTHER   THAN     LOGOGRAPHS    AND  SEMI- 
GRAPHS.    HOMOGRAPHS,    VARIAGRAPHS, 
VOCAGRAPHS,    BREVIGRAPHS 
AND   VOCABULARY. 


LESSON  30. 

WORDS    OTHER   THAN    LOGOGRAPHS    AND   SEMI- 
GRAPHS. 

384.  All  words  other  than   logographs  and  semi- 
graphs  when  of  one  consonant  stem,  simple  or  com- 
pound, or  two  simple  stems  are  usually  written  in  the 
position  of  their  accented  vowel.      (See  sec.  351.) 

385.  When  they  contain  two  stems  either  or  both 
of  which  are  compound  or  have  three  or  more,  whether 
compound  or  not,  they  are  written  in  the  second  posi- 
tion— as  previously  stated  (see  sec.  36-i)  the  most  con- 
venient   for    the    writer — without    regard    to    their 
accented  vowel,  unless  they  have  similar  and  conflict- 
ing outlines — which  is  comparatively  seldom — in  which 
case  they  are  written  in  position  for  distinction.     (See 
also  par.  a  following.) 

a.  The  above  two  paragraphs  relating  to  conflict- 
ing words  being  placed  for  distinction  in  the  position 
of  their  accented  vowel  comprise  the  general  rule. 
AVhen,  however,  such  words  contain  prefixes  beginning 
with  a  vowel  and  would  conflict  with  each  other  or 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  '2'M 

with  their  radicals  in  the  same  position  they  are  usu- 
ally written  in  the  position  of  the  vowel  of  the  prefix 
and  not  in  that  of  the  accented  one  or  of  the  accented 
vowel  of  the  radical;  as,  for  example,  the  words 
"approbation,  attempt,  affect"  and  "affluent,"  which 
are  written  in  the  third  position  to  distinguish  them 
from  "probation,  tempt,  effect"  and  "fluent,"  written 
in  the  second.  (See  list,  sec.  393,  lines  4,  5  and  12.) 

b.  Sometimes,    again,    words   are    written  out  of 
position  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  the  logographs. 
Such,  for  example,  are  "pity"  and  "demand,"  which 
are  thus  written  in  order  not  to  conflict  with  "piety" 
and   "adamant"    placed   in  position.      (See   list,   sec. 
393,  lines  1  and  7.) 

c.  In  all  cases  mentioned  in  paragraphs  a  and  b, 
the  most  frequent  word  is  usually  placed  in  the  second 
position,  whether  it  belongs  there  or  not. 

386.  The  above  paragraphs,  384  to  385,    c,  indi- 
cate the  method  of  distinguishing  by  position  words  of 
the  same  consonants  when  written  alike.     There  are, 
however,  occasionally,  too  many  such  words  for  all  to 
be  written  alike  and  be  distinguished  by  position.     In 
these  cases  those  of  the  same  position  which  would 
conflict  are  written  with  different  outlines,  as  "poor" 
and  "pure"  (see  list,  sec.  397,  line  1)  sometimes  arbi- 
trarily, but   usually   according  to  the   regular   rules 
heretofore  given  in  Chapters  I  to  VII  inclusive. 

a.  The  above  paragraph  does  not  refer  to  words  of 
the  same  consonants  and  different  vowel  position  and 
outline,  as  "appetite"  and  "potato"  or  "pledge"  and 
"apology"  included  in  the  list,  section  397  (lines  1  and 
3)  whose  forms  are  varied  according  to  the  regular 
rules  in  Chapters  I  to  VII  and  written,  the  two  former 
regularly  in  position  and  the  two  latter  in  the  second 
position  according  to  paragraph  385. 

387.  There  are  also,  occasionally,  too  many  words 
of  the  same  consonants  for  all  to  be  distinguished  even 


232  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

by  position  or  difference  of  outline.  In  such  cases  the 
least  frequent  of  those  that  remain  in  each  position  if 
they  would  conflict  with  the  others  are  vocalized.  But 
as  it  would  generally  take  up  too  much  time  to  do  this 
in  full,  ordinarily  only  the  most  suggestive  vowel  or 
diphthong  of  each  word,  usually  the  accented  one,  is 
inserted;  as  in  "aroma"  in  the  list,  section  403, 
line  7. 

388.  From  all  the  preceding  the  learner  will  per- 
ceive that  words  of  the  same  consonants  are  written  in 
two  ways:  with  the  same  and  different  outlines,  and 
that  words  of  the  same  outline  are  distinguished  in  two 
ways:  by  position  and  vocalization.       Also  that  long 
words  are  not  usually  necessary  to  be  written  in  any 
position  but  the  second.     The  reason  of  which  is  that 
their  outlines  being  generally  different  from  each  other 
do  not  often  need  to  be  distinguished  by  position. 

389.  Many  of  the  above  words,  that  is  to  say  words 
other  than  logographs  and  semigraphs,  are  on  account  of 
their  frequency  or  for  some  other  reason  presently  ex- 
plained, separated  from  the  rest  into  different  classes  or 
lists  the  same  as  the  logographs  are  separated  from  the 
great  body  of  words.     These  are  called  Homographs, 
Variagraphs,  Vocagraphs  and  Brevigraphs.     They  are 
arranged  in  phonetic  order  like  the  logographs  for  con- 
venience when  reading  phonography  (see  sec.  380)  and 
will  next  be  considered. 

a.  Before  doing  so,  however,  the  learner  will 
understand  that  these  terms  are  applied  only  to  those 
words  of  each  kind  which  occur  most  frequently. 
Accordingly  a  word  may  have  the  same  form  or  treat- 
ment as  a  homograph,  etc.,  and  yet  not  be  one,  the 
same  as  in  the  case  of  the  logographs.  (See  sec.  363.) 

390.  In  the  following  lists  the  same  rules  apply  in 
similar  cases  for  writing  verbs  in   the  past  tense  and 
adverbs  ending  in  Ly  or  Y,  as  given  in  sections  365 
and  3<>7. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  233 

HOMOGRAPHS. 

391.  Homographs  are  words  of  the  same  or  similar 
consonants  of  frequent  occurrence,  which  are  written 
alike  and  distinguished  by  position.  They  are  invariably 
written  in  full  and  can  thus  always  be  recognized  by 
their  uncontracted  outlines. 

392.  The  following  list  should  be  thoroughly  memo- 
rized.  (See  page  25  and  sec.  380.) 

393.  LIST    OF    HOMOGRAPHS. 


^  >  -T  \  \ 

\>  \  J      \/° 


V  V  •  \  \' 


3    \  \    \- 


v        V  o    v 
~ 


h 


7  I         ^    L          h>    U  U 

~ 


j- •  r7 


oil      J    ^     ,/    / 

10   

11  . 


234 


12     V, V 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


V 


13 


<rS 


15 


394. 


KEY    TO    LIST    OF    HOMOGRAPHS. 


1.  Piety,     pity;     opposite,     apposite;     peaceaMr, 
possible,  passable. 

2.  Epistle,    apostle;    competition,     petition,    com- 
putation; operator,  porter;  operation,  portion,  appor- 
tion. 

3.  Pertain,  appertain;  permit,  promote;  prominent, 
preeminent,  permanent;  promise,  premise. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  235 

4.  Permission,  promotion;  prohibition,  probation, 
approbation;  predict,  protect;  prediction,  protection. 

5.  Preach,    approach;    proffer,     prefer;    obsolete, 
absolute;  baseness,  absence;  tempt,  attempt. 

6.  Tract,   attract;  utterly,    truly;    administration, 
demonstration;  administrate,  demonstrate. 

7.  Adopt,    adapt;    diamond,     demand,     adamant; 
diminish,  admonish;  diminution,  dimension,    admoni- 
tion. 

8.  Domination,  condemnation,  damnation;  desolate, 
dissolute;  desolation,  dissolution;  device,  advice. 

9.  Division,    devotion;   defeat,    devote;   daughter, 
debtor;  auditor,  editor,   doubter. 

10.  Copy,  keep;   except,   accept;  causation,    acces- 
sion, accusation. 

11.  Extricate,  extract; coalition,  collation,  collusion; 
ghostly,  ghastly;  exalt,   exult;  science,  essence. 

12.  Effect,  affect;  fix,    focus,  affix;  fluent,  affluent; 
feeling,  failing;  violent,  valiant. 

13.  Voluble,   available;  giant,   agent;  melioration, 
amelioration;  immaterial,  material. 

14.  Immoderate,    moderate;    imminent,     eminent; 
migration,    emigration;   munition,    mention,   ammuni- 
tion; immature,  mature. 

15.  Immortal,  mortal;  immoral,  moral;  impatient, 
impassioned; anonymous,  unanimous;  anomalous,  name- 
less; unavoidable,  inevitable. 

16.  Inviolable,  unavailable;  interior,  anterior;  indi- 
cate, induct;  national,   notional;   undefined,  indefinite; 
indicted,  indebted,  undoubted. 

17.  Origin,  region;  irritate,  rotate; irritation,  rota- 
tion; irrational,    rational;   irresolute,  resolute;  repeti- 
tion, reputation. 

18.  Illegal,   legal;  illogical,    logical;   element,   ali- 
ment; eliminate,  illuminate;  elimination,  illumination; 
solitary,  salutary;  wait,  await. 


236 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


LESSON  31. 
VARIAGRAPHS. 

395.  Variagraphs  are  words  of  the  same  or  similar 
consonants,  of  frequent  occurrence,  which  are  written 
with  different  outlines  for  distinction  and  always  in 
full.     They  are  thus  of  the  same  nature  as  the  homo- 
graphs, the  only  difference  being  that  their  forms  are 
varied.     It  will   be  observed  that  the  principles   of 
position  and  variation  are  sometimes  combined,   as   in 
the  case  of  the  words  "appetite"  and  "potato." 

396.  The   following    list    should    be    thoroughly 
memorized. 


39 


LIST  OF  VARIAGRAPHS. 


X 


V 


X 

V 


3  v  \yy  \/  \j  x/»  \  \r7 

\r\                   c\  <v 
\ vv.  \ 


NO 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  237 


13 


*  V  —  -- 

„  ^~*\  ^~Q  r>    ^    ^  ~*~f      ^~1  <r-N 

15       1  _  L  _  t/      O>       c    A   v.  5  ^  v 


16 


398.  KEY    TO    LIST    OF    VARIAGRAPHS. 

1.  Poor,    pure;  poorest,   purest;  appetite,    potato; 
patient,  passionate. 

2.  Apparition,     operation;     oppression,     portion; 
prosecute,  persecute;  Persia,  Prussia ;  petrify,  putrefy. 

3.  Oppressor,     pursuer,  peruser;  patron,  pattern; 
pledge,  apology;  optic,  poetic. 

4.  Person,    parson;    proportion,    preparation,   ap- 
propriation; proportioned,  proportionate. 

5.  Present,  personate;  prosper,   perspire;  predict, 
predicate;  prediction,  predication. 

0.  Support,  separate;  beautify,  beatify;  aberra- 
tion, abrasion;  breath,  birth;  bright,  broad;  aband- 
oned, abundant. 

T.  Contrition,  contortion;  citation,  situation ;  train, 
turn;  Tartar,  traitor,  trader. 

8.  Daughter,  auditor;  debtor,  editor;  defense,  de- 
fiance; denned,  definite;  devote,  deviate. 

9.  Idleness,     dullness;     domination,     diminution; 
condemnation,  dimension;  damnation,  admonition. 

10.  Devotion,     deviation;      execrate,      excoriate; 
eclipse,  collapse;  culminate,  calumniate. 

11.  Cost,    caused;  corporal,    corporeal;    credence, 
accordance;  except,  expiate. 


L'iiS  THE    PllOXOllUAl'Hir    MANUAL. 

12.  Cudgel,    cajole;    extension,    extenuation;    col- 
lision, coalition;  God,  guide. 

13.  Garden,     guardian;    grudge,    gorge;    garnet, 
granite;  aspersion,  aspiration. 

14.  Favored,    favorite;   funeral,    funereal;  fierce, 
furious;  frame,  form. 

15.  Mrs.,  Misses;  impassioned,  impassionate;  mis- 
sion,   machine;    ingenious,    ingenuous;   animal,    ano- 
maly. 

16.  Write,    read;    righteous,    riotous;  repression, 
reparation;    resume,  reassume;  ruined,  renewed. 

17.  Labored,    elaborate;  learned,  learn'ed,   learnt; 
let,    laid  or  lade;  latitude,  altitude;    insult,   insulate. 

i 

LESSON  32. 
VOCAGRAPHS. 

399.  Vocagraphs  are  words  vocalized  either  in  part 
or  in  full  to  distinguish  them  from  other  and  more 
frequent  words  of  similar  form  which  are  not  vocal- 
ized.    They  are  always  written  with  their  full  out- 
lines. 

400.  A  vocagraph  may  have  only  a  part  of  a  vowel 
inserted   as    in  the  words    "anew,   new"  or   liknew" 
which  are  written  with  the  first  half  of  the  left  semi- 
circle  for  long  u  joined  to  the  stem  N;   the  halved 
semicircle   standing   for    the  full  vowel.      The  latter 
part  of  the  halved  form  is  seldom  shaded  for  the  long 
sound. 

a.     The  stenotypic  representation  of  "new,"  etc., 
as  above,  is  NFtoid.     (See  sec.  372.) 

401.  "Now"  is  written  with  the  N  stem  and  the 
alternative  tick  for  short  o;  being  an  abbreviation  con- 
sisting of  the  first  half  of  the  diphthong  ou  when  made 
with    the    alternative    tick   and  the  right  semicircle 
for  long  u  as  explained  in  section  34.      Its  stenotypic 
representation  is  NCtoid. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


402.  In  the  following  list  of  vocagraphs  the  first 
eight  lines  contain  also  the  unvocalized  words  from 
which  they  are  distinguished.  Sometimes  when  the 
number  of  words  of  the  same  outline  is  very  great 
merely  the  vocagraphs  are  given,  as  in  line  9,  etc.  The 
list  should  be  thoroughly  memorized. 


403. 


LIST  OF  VOCAGRAPHS. 


2    sUL 


3    V 


J  7 


X   A 


240  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


15    ^    ^ 


17  X     X    ^       ^    *    iT      \  _ 

404.  KEY    TO    LIST   OF   VOCAGRAPHS. 

1.  Opposition,  apposition;  steady,  staid  or  stayed; 
adapt,  depute. 

2.  Squeal,    squall;   sqeak,     squawk;   face,    efface; 
fuse,  effuse;  far,  afar. 

3.  Formula,  formulae;    flee,   fly;    fluent,    effluent; 
join,  adjoin. 

4.  German,    germane;    Germany,    germania;    mo- 
tion, emotion;  mission,  emission,  omission. 

5.  Monarch,  monarchy;  name,  enemy;  sun,  snow; 
endowed,  endued. 

6.  Noxious,    innoxious;  antithesis,  antitheses;  nu- 
trition, innutrition;  nutritious,  innutritious;  honest}', 
insight. 

7.  Arm,  army,  aroma;  russet,  rusty,  roseate;  rele- 
vant, irrelevant. 

8.  Less,  else;  lye,  oil;  sulphate,  sulphite. 

9.  Upper,  pro,  prow;  epic,   opaque;  abbey,  obey. 

10.  Baby,   boquet,  bestow,  settee,  suit,  stow. 

11.  Taboo,  attack,  item,  aid,  ode,  adieu,  idea,  ideal. 

12.  Identify,    identity,    depot,    ache,     echo,    axes 
(pi.  of  axis),  eclat. 

13.  Cuckoo,  croquet,  ague,   ogle,  glow. 

14.  Highest,    sow,    ice,    Isaiah,  ozone,   Isaac,    ivy, 
age,  edge. 

15.  Aim,  aimed,   emit,  omit,  amass,  omen,    mica, 
immigration. 

1C.     Inner,     highness;    anew,    new    or   knew,    now, 
nigh,  nay,  array,  arrow. 
17.      Era,  eyrie,  area,  higher,  ally,  highly,  highway. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  241 

LESSON  33. 
BREVIGRAPHS. 

405.  The  complete  outlines  of  many  words  of  fre- 
quent occurrence,  mostly  of  different  consonants  are 
either  of  such  great  length  or  their  letters  are  of  such 
awkward  junction  that  it  is  impossible  to  write  them 
with  the  swiftness  of  rapid  speech.     The  forms  of  such 
words,  therefore,  are  more  or  less  contracted,  usually 
by  omitting  the  awkward  junction  or  junctions  or  one 
or  more  of  the  unimportant  letters  or  the  endings  after 
writing  two  or  three  strokes.     All  such  words  when 
thus   written   are   called  Brevigraphs.     Brevigraphs, 
accordingly,  always  have  one  or  more  of  their  letters, 
whether  stems  or  attachments  omitted.     They  thus  dif- 
fer from  the  words  in  the  three  preceding  lists  which 
are  always  written  with  their  full  outlines. 

a.  From  paragraphs  362  and  405  the  learner  will 
understand  that  when  a  word  is  contracted  to  one  stem 
it  is,  if  it  is  a  frequent  one,  made  a  logograph,  but  if 
contracted  to  two  or  more  stems  it  is  made  a  brevi- 
graph. 

406.  Brevigraphs  are  not   vocalized.     Instead,  if 
distinction  is  desired  they  are  written  in  position  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  given  in  section  385.     Usually, 
however,  the  outlines  are  different  from  each  other  as 
well  as  from  all  other  words  and  can,  therefore,  be 
written  in  the  second  position  without  regard  to  their 
accented  vowel.     Each  one  thus  has  a  fixed  form  of  its' 
own  different  from  every  other  and  consequently  can 
everywhere  be  recognized  by  it. 

407.  A  brevigraph,  as  will  appear  from  the  follow- 
ing list,   usually  stands  also  for  the  principal  deriva- 
tives of  the  word  it  represents.      The  list  should  be 
thoroughly  memorized. 


342 

408. 


THE    riloXOCKAPHIC    MAXIMAL. 
LIST  OF  RltKVKHtAFHS. 


1 


\          \ 


N       X      V 


\  _  \ 

^       L 


\ 


L 


8 
9 

11 


"7    -7     Z 


L_ 


12  1 -y     7 

13  -\     *\ 
14 

15    /\  /^*  /\> 


r 


16 


A. 


\ 

/V 


^-^ 


1'HE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL  243 

409.  KEY  TO  LIST  OF  BREVIGRAPHS. 

1.  Purpose,  publie-ly-sh,  appointment,  peculiar- ly, 
episcopal,  perpetual-ate,  perpendicular-ly,  perf orm-ance. 

2.  Perhaps,    probable,    approximate-ly-tion,    pros- 
pect, prescribe,  proscribe,  apprehend,  comprehend. 

3.  Baptize-ist,    baptism,    obstruction,    abstraction, 
observation,    bishop,    bank,    substantial,     subscribe-r, 
subscription. 

4.  Attainable,    attainment,    atonement,   transcript, 
transcription,  transcribe. 

5.  Transgress,    transgression,    transfer,    transmis- 
sion, stranger,  strangely,  strength,   strengthen,  digni- 
fy-ity. 

6.  Destructive,     destruction,       declare,     discrimi- 
nate-ly-tion,  danger,  dangerous,  democrat-ic. 

7.  Cabinet,  capable,  expect-ation,  exchange,  eccen- 
tric, acknowledge,  acknowledged,  acknowledgment. 

8.  Correct-ly,     character,     characteristic,     collect, 
qualification,  example,  agriculture-al,  agriculturalist. 

9.  Congregate,    aggregate,    auspicious-ly-ness,    es- 
pecial, establish-ment,    astonish-ment,    esquire,    essen- 
tial. 

10.  Husbandman,   forward,   froward,    frantic,    fa- 
miliar-ly-ity,  theistic,  atheistic,  challenge. 

11.  Magazine,  machinery,  mortgage,  merchandize, 
mathematic,  antagonize-ist-ic-ism,  interest,  interested. 

12.  Notwithstanding,  intelligent,  intelligible,  intel- 
ligence, entertainment,  intellect-ual,  natural. 

13.  Independent-ly-ence,  indispensable,  nondescript, 
indiscriminate-ly-tion,   individual,  neglect,  influential, 
never. 

14.  Investigation,    nevertheless,    knowledge,    anx- 
ious, length-y,  lengthen,  lengthened. 

15.  Represent,    representative,   representation,   re- 
public-sh,  republican,  architect-ure-al,   aristocracy,   ir- 
regular-ly,  regular-ly. 


244  THE  PHOXOGRAPIIIC  MAXUAL. 

16.  Respect-ful,  respectable,  resembie-ance,   rever- 
ence, revenge,  orthodox-ly-y,  arithmetic. 

17.  Archbishop,      original,      arrangement,     legis- 
late-ure,  legislative,  legislation. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  FORMING  BREVIGRAPHS,   ETC. 

410.  In  forming  brevigraphs,  or  other  contracted 
words,  the  following  are  some  of  the  rules  usually 
adopted.  (See  also  sec.  344.) 

a.  Omit  initial  K  from  the  syllable  Ex  before  ini- 
tial hooks;  as  in  "extreme,  experiment,  explore"  or 
"exquisite,"  except  where  the  resulting  word  (if  not  a 
logograph)  would  consist  of  only  one  stem  as  in  "Exe- 
ter, extra,  expert"  or  "exploit."     (See  the  Vocabula- 
ry, sec.  418.) 

b.  Omit  final  K  before  Shun  when  it  occurs  after 
the  stem  F  or  the  double  consonant  Tr  or  the  treble 
one  Str  as  in  "purification,  protraction,  restriction." 
Also  omit  it  before  V  when  it  occurs  after  the  treble 
consonant  Str;  as  in  restrictive.     Furthermore  omit  it 
before  Ter  after  the  double  and  treble  consonants  Tr 
and  Str  as  in  "contractor,  protractor,  constructor,  re- 
strictor." 

c.  Omit  final  P  after  the  treble  consonant  Skr  and 
before  V  or  Shn;  as  in  "prescriptive,  proscription." 

d.  Omit  final  B  after  the  treble  consonant  Skr;  as 
in  "superscribe." 

e.  Omit  the  V  stem  after  upward  R  when  the  latter 
follows  the  S  circle;  as  in  "observation." 

f.  Omit  Shi  after  the  N  hook  or  stem;  as  in  "pru- 
dential, pestilential,  provincial,  provincialism." 

g.  Occasionally  the  F  hook,  particularly  in  words 
of  two  or  more  stems,  is  allowed  to  stand  for  the  final 
syllable  Ful  or  Fully  as  in  "powerf ul-ly. "     (See  also 
sees.  326  and  367.) 

h.      When  the  termination  Tively  occurs  in  a  brevi- 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  245 

graph  whose  primitive  is  written  with  the  F  hook, 
as  in  ' 'restrict! vely,  proscriptively, "  write  the  VI 
stem;  thus,  RsTrVl,  PrsKrVl.  (See  par.  band  also  sec. 
280.) 

1.  If  preferred,  however,  the  upward  L  stem  may 
be  then  written  disjoined  or  joined  after  the  F  hook; 
thus,  RsTrf'.L,  PrsKrfL. 

i  i.  Sometimes  an  N  hook  may  be  placed  within  a 
Ter  hook,  as  in  "determination,"  or  allowed  to  repre- 
sent "not"  after  a  halved  stem,  as  in  "whatnot." 

j.  Sometimes  a  word  is  expressed  by  intersecting 
two  of  its  stems,  as  in  "nevertheless,"  in  line  14  of  the 
preceding  list. 

k.  Usually  words  of  the  same  part  of  speech  should 
not  have  the  same  form. 

LOGOGRAPHS,   HOMOGRAPHS,  ETC., 
ARRANGED   ALPHABETICALLY. 

411.  The  following  list  contains  all  the  preceding 
five   lists;    namely,    logographs,'  homographs,    varia- 
graphs,     vocagraphs    and    brevigraphs,    arranged    in 
alphabetical  order  so  as  to  be  consulted  by  the  learner 
when    writing  phonography  should  an  outline  at  any 
time  be  forgotten. 

412.  LOGOGRAPHS,  HOMOGRAPHS,  ETC. 


A 

a,  Ktoid 

abandoned,  BnDnt 
abbey,  aB3 
aberration,  BRshn 
able,  Bl 
aboard,  Brt 
about,  Bt3 
above,  Bf 


abrasion,  Brshn 
absence,  Bs3Ns 
absolute,   Bs3Lt 
abstraction,  Bs3Trshn 
abundant,  BntNt 
accept,  KsPt3 
accession,  Kss/m 
accord-ing-ly,  Krt1 
accordance,  KrtJNs 


246 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


account,  Knt 
accurate,  Krt3 
accusation, 
ache,  aK 

acknowledge,  KJ1 
acknowleged,  KJt1 
acknowledgement,  KJ1- 

Mnt 

acquaint-ance,  Kwnt 
adamant,  D3Mnt 
adopt,  D3Pt 
add,  D3 
addition,  Dshn3 
adduce,  Ds3 
adieu,  D3u 
adjoin,  a-Jn1 
administrate,  D1MnsTrt 
administration,  D1Mns- 

Trshn 

admonish,  D3MnSh 
admonition,  D3MnShn 
adopt,  D'Pt 
advance,  Df3 
advantage,  J 
advantageous,  Js 
advertise-ment,  D3 
advice,  D3Vs 
afar,  aF3j?? 
affect,  F3KT 
affix,  F3Ks 
affluent,  Fl3Nt 
after,  Ft 
again,  Gn 
against,  Gnst 
age,  aJ 
agent,  JNT 


aggregate-d,  GrG 
ago,  G 

agriculture-al,  GrKl 
agriculturist,  GrKlst 
ague,  G-r 
ah,  Ptoid 
aid,  aD 
aim,  aM 
aimed,  aMt 
aliment,  L3Mnt 
all,  Ftoid1 
ally,  L1! 
almost,  Mst1 
alone,  Ln 
along,   Ng1 
already,  Wtoid1 
altitude,  LtTD 
am,  M 
amass,  Mas3 
amble,  Mpl3 
amelioration,  MIRshn3 
ammunition,  M3Xshu 
amount,  Mnt 
ample,  Mpl3 
an,  Ktoid 
and,  £Atoid 
anew,  NFtoid 
angel,  Jl 
anger-y,  Ngr3 
angle,  Ngl3 
angriest,  Ngrst3 
animal,  NM1 
anomalous,  NMLs1 
anomaly,  NML1 
anonymous,  KnJMs 
annual,  Nl3 
another,  Ntr 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


247 


antagonize-ist-ic-isrn, 

Nts€r 

anterior,  NT3RR 
antitheses,   NtThsSs 
antithesis,  NtThss 
anxious,  NgShs 
any,  N1 
apology,  PLJ 
apostle,  PsL 
apparition,  Prshn1 
appear,  Pr1 
appearance,  Prns1 
appertain,  Pr3Tn 
appetite,  P3Tt 
application,  Plshn3 
appliance,  Pins3 
apply,  PI3 
apportion,  P3Rshn 
appointment,  Pt1Mnt 
apposite,  Ps3T 
apposition,  aPs-s'Aw1 
apprehend,  Pr3ND 
approach,  PrC 
approbation,  Pr3Bshn 
appropriation',  PrPrshn 
appro ve-al,  Prf 3 
approximate-ly-ion  PrKs 
archbishop,  RGB 
architect-ure-al,  RKT 
are,  R 
area,  Ria 

aristocracy,  RsTKr. 
arithmetic,  RfTh 
arm,  R3M 
army,  R3Mi 
aroma,  R3oM 
arrangement,  RnJt 


array,  Ra 
arri ve-al,  Rf 1 
arrow,  Ro 
as,  s 

ascend,  Snt 
ascent,  Snt 
aspersion,  SPrshn 
aspiration,  SPRshn 
assent,  Snt 
asset,  St3 
assign,  Sn1 
assurance,  Shrns3 
assure,  Shr3 
aster,  Str3 
astern,  Strn 
astir,  Str3 
astonish-ment,  StJX 
at,  T3 

atheistic,  ThsK 
athirst,  Thrst3 
atone,  Tn3 
atonement,  T3Mnt 
attack,  aTK 
attainable,  TnB 
attainment,  TMnt 
attempt,  T3Mpt 
attest,  Tst3 
attract,  Tr3Kt 
attraction,  Trshn3 
audience,  Dns1 
audient,  Dnt1 
auditor,  Dt*R 
aught,  T1 

auspicious-ly-ness,  S1? 
author,  Thr1 
authority,  Thrt1 
authorize,   Thrs1 


248 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


authorized,   Thrst1 

available,  VLB1 

await,  Wt3 

aware,    wR3 

away,  W 

a\ve,  Ttoid 

awhile,  H70L1 

axes  (pi.  of  axis),  Kses3 

ay,  I1 

aye,  Ktoida 

azure,  Zhr 

B 

baby,  BBi 
balance,  Bins 
bank,  B3Ng 
baptism,  B3PsM 
baptize-st,  B3P 
baseness,  BsNs 
be,  B1 

beatify,  BTF 
beautify,  BtF 
because,    Ks1 
been,  Bn 
before,  R 
began,  Gn3 
begin-ning,  Gn1 
begins,  Gns1 
begun,  Gn 
behalf,  Bf3 
behind,  Bnt1 
belief- ve,  Blf 
belong-ed,  Bl1 
bestow,  BsTo 
better,  Btr 
between,  Twn1 
beyond,  Ynt1 


bird,  Brt 
birth,  BRTh 
bishop,  B'Sh 
board,   Brt 
bold,  Bit 
boquet,  BKa 
brand,  Brnt3 
breath,  BrTh 
brethren,  Brn3 
bright,  Brt1 
broad,  BrD 
brother,  Brtr 
brought,  Brt1 
brute,  Brt3 
build-ing,  Bit1 
built,  Bit1 
business,  Bss1 
businesses,  Bsss1 
but,  B 
buy,  B1 
by,  B1 


cabinet,  KB3 
cajole,  KJL 
call,  Kl1 

calumniate,  K1MNT 
can,  Kn 
canst,  Knst 
capable,  KB1 
care,  Kr 
careful,  Krf 
cart,  Krt3 
carve,  Krf3 
case,  Ks1 
cased,  Kst 
cast,  Kst3 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


249 


causation,  'Ksskn1 
cause,  Ks1 
cease,  Ss1 
ceased,  Sst1 
cent,  sNt 
certain-ly-ty,  sRt 
cessation,   Ssshn 
cession,  Sshn 
chair,  Cr 
chairman,  Crn 
challenge,  C1J 
character,  KrK 
characteristic,  KrKsK 
charity,  Crt 
chart,  Crt3 
cheer-y,  Cr1 
cheerful,  Crf1 
child,  Clt1 
children,  Cl 
christian-ity,  Kr1 
circumstantial,  sTn 
circumstance,  sTns 
circumstanced,  sTnst 
cistern,  ssTrn1 
citation,  sTshn1 
cithern,  Strn1 
cloud,  Kit3 
clue,  Kl3 
coal,  Kl 

coalition,  KLshn1 
coarse,  Krs 
cold,  Kit 
coldest,  Kltst 
collapse,  KLPs 
collation,   KLshn  i 
collect,  KPK 
collision,  Klshn1 


collusion,  KLshn3 
combine,  Bn1 
come,  K 


competition, 
comprehend,  PrND 
computation,  P3Tshn 
concern-ing,  sRn 
conclude,  Kit3 
concord,  Krt1 
condemnation,  DMNshn 
condition,  Dshn 
congregate,  Gr*G 
conquest,  Kwst1 
consider-able,  sDr 
consideration,  sDrshn 
considered-ate,  sDrt 
constituency,  stTn 
constituent,  stTnt1 
constitute,  stTt1 
constitution-al,  stTshn3 
construction,  sTrshn 
constructive,  sTrf 
constructor,  sTrtr 
contortion,  T^Rshn 
contraction,  Trshn 
contractor,  Trtr1 
contrition,  Trshn 
conversation,  Vrsshn 
copy,  KP' 
corporal,  KrPrL 
corporeal,  KrPrRl 
correct-ly,  Kr  '  K 
cost,  Kst1 
caused,  KsD1 
could,  Kt 
count,  Knt3 
county,  Knt 


250 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


country,  K 
countrymen,  Kn 
course,  Krs 
court,  Krt 
creation,  Krshn 
creature,  Krtr1 
credence,  KrDns 
creed,  Krt1 
croquet,  KrKa 
crowd,  Krt3 
cuckoo,  K3Kn 
cudgel,  KJ1 
culminate,  KIMnT 
cure,  Kr3 
curious,  Krs3 

D 

damnation,  D3MNshn 
danger,  DJr 
dangerous,  DJrs 
dark,  Dr  3 
darken,  Drn3 
darkens-ness,  Drns3 
daughter,  Dtr1 
dear,  Dr 
debtor,  Dtr 
declare,  D3K1 
deed,  Dt1 
defendant,  D 
defense,  DfNs 
defiance,  DFNs 
defined,  DFnt 
definite,  DfNt 
degree,  Gr1 
deliver-y,  Dl 
deliverance,  Dins 
demand,  DMnt 


democrat-ic,  DM 
demonstrate,  DMnsTrt 
demonstration,  DMns- 

Trshn 

denominate-ion,  Dn1 
depot,  DPo 
depute,  D3Prt 
deride,  Drt1 
derision,  Drshn1 
derive,  Drf1 
describe,  sKr1 
description,  sKrshn1 
descriptive,  sKrf1 
desolate,  DsLt 
desolation,  DsLshn 
destruction,  DsTrshn 
destructive,  DsTrf 
determine-ing,  Dtr 
determined-ly,  Dtrt 
deviate,  DVT 
deviation,  DV$An 
device,  DVs 
devotion,  DVshn 
diamond,  D^nt 
did,  Dt1 

differ-ence-ent-ly,  Df 
dignify-ty,  DJG 
dimension,  DMnShn 
diminish,  D1MnSh 
diminution,  D'MnShn 
director,  Drtr 
discriminate-ly-ion,  Ds- 

KrM 

dissolute,  Ds3Lt 
dissolution,  Ds3Lshn 
distinct-ly-ion,  Dst1 
divine,  Df1 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


251 


division, 
do,  D 

doctor,  Dr1 
doctrine,  Drn1 
dollar,  D1 

domination,  D1MNshn 
done,  Dn 
doubt,  Dt3 
doubter,  Dt3R 
down,  Dn3 
dread,  Drt 
dullness,  DLXs 
duration,  Drshn3 
during,  Dr3 
dwell-ing,   Dw 
dwelt,  Dwt 

E 

each,  C1 
ease-y,  Z1 
east,  St1 
Easter,  Str1 
eastern,  Strn1 
eccentric,  KsNtr 
echo,  Ko 
eclat,  Kla 
eclipse,  KIPs 
edge,  e-J 
edition,  Dshn1 
editor,  DtR 
educe,  Ds1 
efface,  eFs 
effect,  FKT 
effluent,  eFIXt 
effuse,  eFs! 
eh,  Ktoidfi 
either,  Dhr1 


elaborate,.  LBrT 
element,   LMnt 
eliminate,  L^MnT 
elimination,  L'MXshn 
else,  eLs 

emigration,  MGrshn 
eminent,  MnNt 
emission,  eMshn1 
emit,  gMt1 
emotion,  eMshn 
empire,  Mpr1 
endowed,  NDowt3 
endued,  NDnt3 
enemy,  eNM 
England,   Nglnt1 
English,  Ngl1 
Englishmen,  Ngln1 
entertainment,  NtTMnt 
entire,  Ntr1 
epic,  ePk 
episcopal,  Psk 
epistle,  PsJL 
equal,  Kl1 
equaled,  Kit1 
equator,  Kwtr1 
equivalent-ly,  Kwf1 
era,  R1^ 
especial,   Sp 
esquire,  SJK 
essence,  SNs 
essential,  SN 
establish-ment,  St3B 
Esther,  Str 
eternal,  Trn 
eternity,  Trn 
ether,  Thr1 
evangel,  JP 


2.")2 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


evangelist,  Jlst3 
evangelization,  Jlsshn3 
evangelize,  Jls3 
evangelized,  Jlst3 
even,  Vn1 
ever,  V1 
every,  Vr 
evil,  VI1 
exalt,  GsLt1 
examine,  sMn3 
examined,  sMnt3 
example,  GsMp 
except,  KsPt 
exchange,  KsCJ 
excoriate,  KsKRt 
execrate,  KsKrt 
expect-ation,  KsP 
experience,  sPrns 
experienced,  sPrnst 
expiate,  KsPT 
explain,  sPln 
explained,  sPlnt 
explode,  sPlt 
explosion,  Plshn 
express,  sPrs 
expressed,  sPrst 
expression,  sPrsshn 
extension,  KsTNshn 
extenuation,   KsTNShn 
external,  sTr 
externality,  sTr 
extract,  KsTr3Kt 
extricate,  KsTrKt 
exult, 'GsLt 
eye,  T1 
eyrie,  R'i 


F 

face,  Fs 

fact,  Ft3 

failing,  FZNg 

familiar-ly-ity,  F1M 

far,  F37? 

farther,  Frtr3 

favored,  FVrt 

favorite,  FVrT 

feeling,  F'ZNg 

fierce,  F7?s 

fill,  Fl1 

first,  Frst 

fix,  F'Ks 

flee,  Fl1 

flood,  Fit 

fluent,  FINt 

fly,   Fl'I 

focus,  FKs 

follow-ing,  Fl1 

for,  F 

form,  F7?M 

formula,  F^ML 

formulae,  F7?MLe 

forward,  F?#Rt 

frame,  FrM 

frantic,  Frt'K 

from,  Fr 

f reward,  FrRt  or  Fr  Wi 

full-y,  Fl 

further,  Frtr 

funeral,  FNrZ 

funerial,  FnRL  or  FNR1 

furious,  FRs 

fuse,  Fs3 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


253 


G 

garden,  GrtN 
garnet,  GRNt 
gather,  Gtr3 
gave,  Gf 
general,  Jn 
generalization,  Jnsshn 
generalize,  Jns 
generalized,  Jnst 
generation,  Jshn 
gentleman,  Jnt 
gentlemen,  Jnt1 
German,  JrMn 
germane,  JrMan 
Germania,  JrMNia 
Germany,  JrMN 
get,  Gt 

ghastly,  GsT3L 
ghostly,  GsTL 
giant,  J^Nt 
gird,  Grt 
girt,  Grt 
give-n,  G1 
glorious,  Gls 
glory-ied,  Gl 
glow,  Glo 

go,  G 
God,  Gt1 
gold,  Git 
good,  Gt 
gorge,  GRJ 
got,  Gt1 
govern-ment,  Gf 
granite,  GrNt 
great,  Grt 
greater,  Grtr 
grudge,  GrJ 


guard,  Grt3 
guardian,  GrDn 
guide,  GD1 
guilt-y,  Git1 
gulf,  Glf 

H 

ha,  Btoid 
had,  D3 
half,  F* 
halve,  Vs 
hand,  Nt3 
happen,  Pn3 
happiest,  Pst3 
happy,  P3 
has,  s 
hath,  Th3 
have,  V 
he,  He1 
heathen,  Dhn1 
heaven,  Vn 
hence,  Ns 
her,  R 
hers,  Rs 
herself,  Rs 
hew,  nY3 
hewn,  H5Tn3 
hie,  Hi1 
high,  Hi1 
higher,  ni-R1 
highest,  ni-St1 
highly,   HlL1 
highness,  m-Ns1 
highway,  Hi-W 
him,  M 
himself,  Ms 
his,  s1 


254 


TIIK   PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXfAI, 


ho,  Dtoid 
hoe,  Dtoid 
honest,  Nst1 
honesty,  NsT1 
honor,  Nr1 
hope,  P3 
hopeful,  Pf3 
hour,  R3 
how,  H 
however,  V3 
hue,  nY3 
humble,  Mpl 
humor,  Mr3 
humorist,  Mrst3 
humorous,  Mrs3 
hundred-th,  Nt 
hunger-y,  Ngr 
hungriest,  Ngrst 
husbandman,  ZBtMn 


I,  i1 

ice,  I-S1 

idea,  i-D1 

ideal,  l-D1!, 

identify,  iDntF 

identity,  iDntT 

idle,  Dl1 

idleness,  Dins1 

idol,  Dl1 

idolater,  Dltr1 

idyl,  Dl1 

if   F1 

illegal,  L'Gl 

illogical,  L'JKl 

illuminate,  L3MnT 

illumination,  L3MNshn 


imagine-ary-ation,  Jn3 
i  m  m  ater ial ,  MtrL 1 
immature,   MtR1 
immediate-ly,  Mt1 
immerse,  Mrs1 
immersed,  Mrst1 
immigration,  iM^rshn 
imminent,  MnJNt 
immoderate,  MtRt1 
immoral,  MrL1 
immortal,  MrtL1 
impassionate,  Mpshn  T3 
impassioned,  Mpshnt3 
impatient,  Mpshnt 
importance-ant,  Mp1 
impose,  Mps 
imposition,  Mpsshn 
impossibilities,  Mpss1 
impossible-ity,  Mps1 
improve-ment,  Mp 
in,  N1 

incision,  nsZshn1 
inconsiderable,  nsDr 
inconsidered-ate,  nsDrt 
indebted,  NtTt 
indefinite,  NDfNt 
independent-lv-ence,  Xt- 

Pnt 

indicate,  NtJKt 
indicted,  NtTt1 
indiscriminate-ly-ion,  Xts ' 

KM 

indispensable,  NtsPns 
individual,  NtVt1 
induct,  NtKt 
inevitable,  NVtBl 
inexperience,  nsPrns 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


inexperienced,   nsPrnst 
inexpressed,  nsPrst 
inexpressible,  nsPrs 
influence,  Ns1 
influenced,  Nst1 
influential,  NxS/d1 
information,  Nshn1 
ingenious,  NJNs 
ingenuous,  NJNS 
inn,  N1 
inner,   iNr1 
innoxious,  iNKShs 
innutrition,  iNTrshn1 
innutritious,  iNTr'Shs 
inscribe,  nsKr1 
inscription,  nsKrshn1 
inscriptive,  nsKrf1 
insecure,  nsKr1 
insight,  NslT1 
instruct,  nsTr 
instruction,  nsTrshn 
instructive,  nsTrf 
instructor,  nsTrtr 
insulate,  nsLT 
insult,  nsLt 
intellect-ual,  NtZ1 
intelligence,  NtJns 
intelligent,  NtJnt 
intelligible,  NtJBl 
interest,  NtsT 
interested,  NtsTt 
interior,  NTRR 
internal,  Tr1 
investigation,  NVss/m 
inviolable,  NVJLB1 
irrational,  Rshn1!^ 
irregular-ly,  R'G 


irresolute,  Rs'Lt 
irrelevant,  iRIVnt 
irritate,  R'Tt 
irritation,  R'Tshn 
is,  s1 

Isaac,  !-ZJK 
Isaiah,   I-Z 
issue,  Sh3 
it,  T 

item,  I-T'M 
its,  Ts 
itself,  Ts3 
ivy,  I-V1 


Jesus,  J 
join,  Jn1 
joy,  J1 
joyful,  Jf 

jurisdiction-al,  Jrsshn 
jurist,  Jrst3 
jury,  Jr3 
just,  Jst 
justification,   Js,s7m 

K 

keep,  KP 
kind,  Knt1 
kingdom,  K1 
knew,  NFtoid 
know,  N 
knowledge,  NJ1 
know,  Nn 

L 
labored,    LBrt 


256 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


lade,  LD 
laid,  LD 
language,  Ng 
large,  J3 
larger ,  Jr3 
largest,  Jst3 
largely,  Jl3 
latitude,  LtTt 
law,  L1 
learn,  Lrn 
learned,  Lrnt 
learn'ed,  LrNt 
learnt,  LrnT 
legal,  LGl 
legislate-ure,  LJ 
legislation,  LJshn 
legislative,  LJf 
length-y,  NgTh 
lengthen,  NgThn 
lengthened,  NgThnt 
less,  Ls 
let,   Lt 
letter,  Ltr 
liberty,  Br1 
logical,  LJK1 
lone,  Ln 
long,  Ng1 
longed,  Ngt1 
longer,  Ngr1 
longest,  Ngst1 
longhand,  iNgnt1 
lord,  Lrt1 
lye,  L> 

M 

machine,  MShn 
machinery,  MShR 


made,  Mt 
magazine,  M*G 
man,  Mn 
manner,  Nr 
map,  Mp3 
mathematic,  MfTh 
mate,  Mt 
material,  MtrL 
matter,  Mtr 
mature,  MtR3 
may,  M 
me,  M1 
measure,  Zhr3 
measured,  Zhrt3 
meet-ing,  Mt1 
melioration,  MIRshn1 
member,  Br 
men,  Mn1 
mention,  MNshn 
merchandize,  MrCts 
mercy-iful,  Mi- 
mere,  Mr1 
merest,  Mrst1 
met,  Mt 
mica,  M'Ka 
might,  Mt1 
migration,  M^rshn 
million-th,  Ml1 
mine,  Mn1 
Misses,  Mss1 
mission,  Mshn l 
moderate,  MtRt 
monarch,  MnRK 
monarchy,  MnRKi 
mood,  Mt3 
moon,  Mn3 
moot,  Mt3 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


257 


moral,  MrL 
more,  Mr 
mortal,  MrtL 
mortgage,  Mi^G 
most,  Mat 
motion,  Mshn 
movement,  Mnt3 
Mr.,  Mr1 
Mrs.,  MsZ 
much,  C3 
munition, 
must,  Mst 
my,  M1 
myself,  Ms1 


name,  NM 
nameless,  NMLs 
narration,  JSrslni 
nation,  JS;shn 
national,  NshnL 
natural,  Nt2Z 
nature,  Nt 
nay,  Nfi 
near,  Nr1 
neglect,  NG1K 
neither,  Ntr1 
nest,  Nst 
never,  NV 
nevertheless,  NfV 
new,  N  Ft  oid 
next,  Nst 
nigh,  N1! 
no,  N 

nondescript,  NtsKPl1 
nor,  Nr1 
norther,  Nrtr1 


northern,  Nrtrn1 

not,  Nt1 

notion,  Nshn3 

notional,  NshnL3 

notwithstanding,  NtsTnt1 

noxious,  NKShs 

now,  NCtoid 

number,  Br3 

nurse,  Nrs 

nutrition,  NTrshn 

nutritious,  NTrShs 

O 

O,  Ttoido 
oath,  Th 
obey,  Ba 
ode,  oD 
object,  B 
objection,  Bshn 
objective,  Bf 
observation,  BsRshn 
obsolete,  Bs:Lt 
obstruction,  BsTrhsn 
occupied,  Pt1 
occupy,  P1 
of,  Ptoid1 
offer,  Fr1 
often,  Fn1 
ogle,  oGl 
oh,  Ttoido 
oil,  oiLt1 
omen,  oMn 
omission,  oMshn1 
omit,  oMt1 
on,  Ttoid1 
once,  ^"ns 
one    ^Yn 


THE   PHONOGRAPHH     MANTAL. 


oneself,  Wns 
only,  Nl 
opaque,  PiiK 
operation,  P'Rshn 
operator,  P'Rtr 
opinion,  Nn1 
opportunity,  Prt3 
opposite,  Ps*T 
opposition,  Pss/m1 
oppression,  Prshn 
oppressor,  PrsR 
optic,  Pt'K 
or,  R1 

oration,  Rshn 
order,  Rtr1 
organ,  Gn1 
organist-ized,  Gnst1 
organization,  GnssAfi1 

C1  7 

organize,  Gns1 
origin,  R1Jn 
original,  R*J 
orthodox-ly-y,  RThD 
other,  u1 
others,  us1 
otherwise,  us1 
ought,  T1 
our,  R3 
ours,  Rs3 
ourself,  Rs3 
ourselves,  Rss3 
out,  T3 
oven,  Vn3 
over,  Vr1 
owe,  Ttoido 
own,  N3 
owner,  Nr3 


oyster,  Str1 
ozone,  oZn 


parson,  PRsN 
part,  Prt 

particular-ly-ity,  Prt1 
party,  P3 
passable,  Ps3Bl 
passionate,  Pshn3T 
patient,  Pshnt 
patron,  PTrn 
pattern,  PtRn 
peaceable,  Ps^l 
peculiar-ly,  P3K 
people-d,  PI 
per,  Pr 

perfect-ly-tion,  Prf1 
perform-ed-ance,  PRF 
perhaps,  PrPs 
permanent,  Pr3MnNt 
permission,  PrMshn 
permit,  PrMt 
perpendicular-ly,  PRPnt 
perpetual-ate,  PRPt 
persecute,  PRsKt 
Persia,  PRSh 
person,  PrsN 
personate,  PrsNT 
perspire,  PrsPR 
pertain,  PrTn 
peruser,  PRsR 
petition,  PTshn 
petrify,  PtRF 
phonography,  Fn 
piety,  PJT 
pity,  PT 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC -MANUAL. 


259 


plaintiff,  Pint 
play,  PI 
playful,  Plf 
pica,  PI1 
plead,  Pit1 
pleasure,  Zhr 
pledge,  P1J 
poetic,  PTK 
poor,  Pr! 
poorest,  Prst3 
porter,  PRtr 
portion,  PRshn 
position,  Pss/m 
possession,  Ps.9//;/3 
possible,  PsP)l 
potato,  PTT 
poverty,  Pf 
preach,  Pr]C 
predicate,  PrDKt 
predication,  PrDKshn 
predict,  Prt'Kt 
prediction,  Prt'Kshn 
preeminent,  PrMnNt 
prefer,  PrfR 
premise,  PrMs 
preparation,  PrPRshn 
prescribe,  Prs1!^ 
present,  PrsNt 
pride,  Prt1 
principle-al,  Pr 
pro,  Pro 
probable-y,  PrB 
probation,  PrBshn 
proffer,  Prf'R 
profit,  Prft1 
prohibition,  Pi^Bshn 
prominent,  Pr'MnNt 


promise,  Pi^Ms 
promote,  PrMt 
promotion,  Pr3Mshn 
proof-ve,  Prf 
proportion,  PrPshn 
proportionate,  PrPshnT 
proportioned,  PrPshn'.  D 
proscribe,  PrsK 
prosecute,  PrsKt 
prospect,  Prs*Pt 
prosper,  PrsPr 
protect,  PrtKt 
protection,   PrtKshn 
proud,  Prt3 
providence,  Dns3 
provident,  Dnt3 
providential,  Dn3 
prow,  Pr3ow 
Prussia,  PrSh 
public-ly-sh,  PB 
punish-ment,  Pn3 
pure,  P3R 
purest,  P3Rst 
purpose,  PPs 
pursuer,  PRSR 
put,  Pt3 
putrefy,  PTrF 

Q 

quaint,  Kwnt 
qualification,  KlFshn 
quarter,  Kwtr1 
quest,  Kwst 
question,  Kwn 
quite,  Kwt1 


260 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


R 

rail,  Rl 
rather,  Rtr3 
rational,  Rshn3L 
read,  R'D 
real,  Rl1 
realist,  Rlst1 
realization,  Rls-s'An1 
realize,  Rls1 
reassume,  RSM 
recession,  Rsskn 
recission,  ~Rsshnl 
region,  RJn 
regular-ly,  RG 
release,  Rls1 
relate-or,  Rltr 
relation,  Rlshn 
relevant,  RIVnt 
relief -ve,  Rlf1 
religion,  Jn1 
religionist,  Jnst1 
religious,  Js1 
rely,  Rl1 

remark-able-y,  Mr1 
remember,  Br 
remembrance,  Brns 
renewed,  R3ND 
reparation,  RPRshn 
repetition,  R1PTshn 
represent,  RP 
representation,  RPshn 
representative,  RPf 
repression,  RPrshn 
republic-sh,  RPB 
republican,  RPBn 
reputation,  R3PTshn 
resemble-ance,  RsM 


resolute,  RsLt 
respect-ful,  RsP 
respectable-y,  RsPBl 
resume,  RsM 
reveal,  Rf 
revelation,  Lshn 
revenge,  RVJ 
reverence,  RV 
revolution,  Lshn3 
revolve,  Rf3 
righteous,  R*Ts 
riotous,  R^TS 
role,  Rl 
roll,  Rl 
roseate,  RsiiT 
rotate,  RTt, 
rotation,  RTshn 
rue,  R3 
ruined,  R3Nt 
rule,  Rl3 
russet,  RsT 
rusty,  RsTi 

S 

said,  sD 

salutary,  sL3TR 
salvation,  sL3 
sanction,  sNgshn3 
sanctioned,   sNgshnt3 
sanguine,  sXgn3 
satisfaction,  sTsshn3 
satisfy,  sT3 
savior,  sV 
saw,  S1 
say,  S 
scale,  sKl 
scent,  sXt 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


2G1 


school,  sKl3 

science,  S*Ns 
scission,  sZhn1 
screen,  sKrn1 
scripture  al,  sKr1 
sea,  S1 

secession,  sShn 
second,  sKnt 
secret,  sKrt1 
secure,  sKr3 
secured,  sKrt3 
see,  S1 
seize,  S1 
seized,  Sst1 
self,  s 
selfish,  sSh 
selves,  ss 
send,  sNt 
sent,  sNt 
separate,  sPrt3 
separation,  sPrshn3 
session,  Sshn 
settee,  sTe 
several,  sV 
sew,  S 
shall,  Sh 
shalt,  Sht 
she,  ShT 
shelter,  Shltr 
short,  Shrt1 
shorter,  Shrti 
should,  Sht3 
shoulder,  Shlti 
shouldst,  Shtstv 
significance,  sGne>J 
signification,  sGshn1 
significative,  sGf1 


signify-icant,  sG1 
similar-ly-ity,  sM1 
simple-y-icity,  sMp1 
singular-ly-ity,  sNg1 
situation,  sTShn 
six-th,  sKs1 
size,  Ss1 
sized,  Sst1 
skill,  sKl1 
skillful,  sKlf 
smoother,  sMtr3 
snow,  sNo 
so,  S 

solitary,  sL'TR 
some,  sM 
somebody,  sMpt1 
somewhat,  sMt 
soon,  sN3 
sound,  sNt3 
sow,  S 

sow(n.),  S3ou 
speak,  sP  1 
special,  sP 
speech,  sP1 
spirit,  sPrt1 
spoke,  sP 
spoken,  sPn. 
spread,  sPrt 
squall,  sKwoL 
squawk, 
squeak,  sKw1 
squeal,  sKwL 
staid,  staD 
stamp,  stMp3 
state,  stT 
station,  stShn 
stayed,  staD 


262 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


steady,  stD 
stipend,  stPnt1 
"stone-y,  stN 
stow,  sTo 
strange-ness,  sTrn 
strangely,  sTrJl 
stranger,  sTrJr 
strongest,  sTrnst 
strength,  sTtrTh 
strengthen,  sTrThn 
strife-ve,  sTrf l 
stump,  stMp 
stupendous-ly-ness,  stPnt 
subject,  sB 
subjection,  sBshn 
subjective,  sBf 
subordinate,  sB1 
subordination,  sBshn1 
suqscribe-er,  sBsKr 
subscription,  sBsKrshn 
substantial,  sBsTn 
such,  sC 
sue,  S3 

suggest-ed,  sJst 
suit,  saT 
sulphate,  sLFT 
sulphite,  sL^Flt 
seen,  sN 
supply,  sPl1 
support,  sPRt 
suppress,  sPrs1 
suppressed,  sPrst1 
suppression,  sPrshn1 
sure,  Shr 
surprise,  sPrs3 
surprised,  sPrst3 


suspension,  ssPn 
system,  ssT 


taboo,  T3Ba 
Tartar,  T3Rtr 
telephone-y-ic-al,  Tlf 
telephoned,  Tlft 
tell,  Tl 
tempt,  TMpt 
than,  Dhn 
thank,  Th3 
that,  Dht3 
the,  +1      . 
thee,  Dh1 
their,  Dhr 
theirs,  Dhrs 
theistic,  Ths'K 
them,  Dh 
themselves,  Dhss 
then,  Dhn 
there,  Dhr 
therein,  Dhrn 
these,  Dhs1 
they,  Dh 
thine,  Dhn1 
thing,  Ng1 
think,  Th 
third,  Thrt 
thirst,  Thrst 
this,  Dhs 
those,  Z3 
thou,  Dh3 
though,  Dh3 
thought,  Tht1 
thousand-th,  Th3 
three,  Thr 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MAXTAL. 


263 


thrice,  Thrs1 

through,  Thr3 

throughout,  Thrt3 

thus,  Dhs3 

thy,  Dh1 

thyself,  Dhs1 

till,  Tl 

time,  T1 

to,  T 

together,  Gtr 

told,  Tit 

too,  T 

toward,   Trt 

tract,  TrKt 

trade,  Trt 

trader,  TrtR 

train,  Trn 

traitor,  Trtr 

transcribe,  TrsKB 

transcript,  TrsKPt 

transcription,   TrsKPshn 

transfer,  TrsFr 

transgress,  TrsGs 

transgression,    TrsGshn 

transmission,  TrsMshn 

true,  Tr3 

truly,  Tr3L 

truth,  Tr 

truthful,  Trf 

try,  Tr1 

turf,  Trf 

turn,  TRn 

twelve-th,  Twf 

U 

unanimous,  Nn3Ms 
unavailable,  NVLB1 


unavoidable,  NWB1 
undefined,  NDf 'Nt 
under,  Nt 
undoubted,  NtTt3 
union,  Nn3 
universe,  Vrs 
unless,  Ms 
unsealed,  nsKlt 
unschooled,  nsKlt3 
unscreened,  nsKrnt1 
unskilled,  nsKlt1 
unsuppressed,  nsPrst3 
until,  Tl3 
up,  P 
upon,  Pn 
upper,  uPr 
us,  S3 
use(n.),  S3 
use(v.),  Z3 
used,  Zt3 
usher,  Shr 
usual,  Zh 
utterly,  TrL 

V 

valiant,  V3Lnt 
valuation,  Vlshn3 
value,  VI3 
veracity,  VRsT 
very,  Vr 
violent,  V^Lnt 
virtue,  Vrt 
voluble,  V'LBl 
voracity,  VoRsT 
voter,  Vtr 


204 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


w 

wait,  Wt 
was,  Z 
watch,  C1 
watcher,  Cr1 
watchful,  Cf1 
water,  Wtr1 
way,  W 
we,  w1 

weather,    TFtr 
Aveigh,  W 
weighed,   TFb 
well,  wit 
went,  Wnt 
were,  ivR 
wert,  wRt 
what,  T1 
whatever,  Tf1 
when,  nW 
whence,  nWns 
where  n?cR 
wherein,  H?/>Rn 
whereof,  H?/:Rf 
whether,  H  IFtr 
which,  C 
whichever,  Cf 
while,  HM^L1 
whither,  H  TFtr1 
Avho,  HU 
whoever,  Vr3 
whom,  HU 
whose,  HUS 
why,  nW1 
wide,   TFt1 
wider,    TFtr1 
will,  L 
wilt,  Lt 


wish,  Sh1 
wished,  Sht1 
wisher,  Shr1 
with,  Dh1 
withal,  Dhl1 
wither,   TFtr1 
withheld,  Dhlt 
withhold,  Dhlt 
within,  Dhn1 
won,  Wn 
word,  u'Rt 
world,  Lt 
would,    TFt3 
write,  Rt1 
writer,  Rtr1 


yard, 


yea,  Y 
year,  yR1 
ves,  Ys 
yet,  Yt 
yield,  Ylt1 
you,  Y 
your,  yU 
yours,  7/Rs 
yourself, 
yourselves,  ?/Rss 
youth,  Th3 

Z 

zest,  Zst 
zither,  Ztr1 
zithern,  Ztrn1 
zone,  Zn 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  265 

LESSON  34. 
PREFATORY  REMARKS  ON  THE  VOCABULARY 

413.  The  following  vocabulary  contains  a  number 
of  semigraphs   (see  sec.  383)  and  other  words  in  ad- 
dition to  those  in  the  preceding  five  lists,  whose  forms 
might  not  readily  occur  to  the  learner.      Occasionally, 
also,  for  completeness,  a  word  from  one  of  these  lists 
is  included.     The  vocabulary  is  arranged  in  alphabeti- 
cal order  for  convenience  of  reference  when  writing. 
(See  sec.  411.) 

414.  As  the  past  tense  of  those  verbs  mentioned 
in  section  274,  and  of  verbs  like  those  in  the  first  part 
of  section  365  is  usually  written  with  the  same  form  as 
for  the    present  it  is    not   usually  given.     The  same 
course  is  pursued  with  the   past  tense  of  verbs  whose 
present  ends  in  a  circle  or  loop.     (See  see's.  125  and 
272.)     In  other  cases  generally  only  the  past  tense  of 
irregular  verbs  is  represented.      Again  adverbs  ending 
in  Ly  or  Y  of  the  same  nature  a>  those  in  section  367 
are  usually  omitted. 

415.  Where   two  forms  for  a  word  are  presented 
the  first  is  usually  preferred. 

416.  When  a  shorter  form  is  £iven  after  a  longer 

~  o 

one  it  generally  indicates  that  it  may  be  employed  if 
it  occurs  more  frequently  than  usual. 

417.  The  list  is  divided  into  six  parts,  the  first  part 
beginning  at  A,  and  the  others  at  D,  I,  M,  Q  and  U, 
respectively,  at  Lessons  35,   36,    37,   38  and   39.     It 
should    be   memorized   so  that   any   word  in  it  may 
usually  be    written   at  once   on    being    heard.     This 
should  bo  done  before  proceeding  to  the  next  chapter. 


THE  PHOXOUKAl'HJO  MANUAL. 


418. 


VOCABULARY. 


Aarhuus,  R3S 
abandon,  BnDn 
abandonment,   BnDMnt 
abed,  Bt 

abhor,  B'hR  or  BUI 
al)ility,  Bit1 
abject-ly,  BM 
ablative,  BltV 
al)olish,  BLSh 
abolished,    BLSht 
abolition,  BLshn 
abolitionism,  BLshnsM 
abolitionist,  BlshnSt 
abortive,  BRtV 
abortively,  BRtVl 
Abraham,  BruaM 
Abrarn,  BrM 
abroad,  Br'D  or  Brt1 
abscissa,  BsS 
absolute,  Bs3Lt 
absurd,  BsRt 
accommodate-d,    -MDt1 
accommodation,  -MDShn1 


accompany, 
accomplice,  -Pis1 
accomplish,   -PPSh 
accordance,  Krt  *  N  s 
accountability,  Knt8Bt 
accountable,  Knt2  B 
accouter,  Ktr3 
accumulate,  KMLt 
achievement,  Cf'.Mnt 
acme,  K3M 
acquiesce,  KwS 


acquire,  Kw1 
acquirement.  Kw J  Mnt 
acquisition,  K\vs.s7///] 
acquisitiveness,   KwsTfXs 
acute,  KT3 
ad.     (for    advertisement), 

a  I)3 

ade(|iiate,  D3Kvvt 
adhere,   I)1!* 
adhesive,  DsV 
adhibit,   D3Bt 
adhort,  D3Rt 
adhortatory,  D 3  RTtR 
adjourn,  Jrn 
adjournment,  JrMnt 
adjudge,  J3J 
adjust,  Jst 
adjustment,  JsMnt 
administer,  D^lNstr 
administrate,  D^MnsTrt 
administration,  I)1  MnsTr- 

shn 

administrative,  D1  MnsTrf 
administrator,    DMsH    or 

D'MnsTrtr 
administratrix,     DMnsKs 

or  D»MnsTrtKs 
admissable,  DMsB 
advancement,  Ds 3  Mnt 
advantageously,  JsL 
advantageousness,  JsNs 
adventure,  DfNtr 
adventurer,   DfNtrR 
adverb,  DVrB 
adverse,  D3Vrs 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


207 


advert,  D3Vrt 
advertiser,   L)s3R 
affectionate,  FKshnT 
affidavit,  Ft3Vt 
afore,  YJ? 
aforesaid,  FA'sl) 
afternoon,  FtNn 
afterward,  FtWrt 
agency,  JnS  or  JNS 
Aguinaldo,  GwnLD 
aha,  u^Hji 
Ahab,  AB 
ahead,  AD3 
ahem,  ahM 
ahoy,  aiW 
Aiken,  Kn 
Akenside,  KnsD 
akimbo,  -B1 
Alabama,  LBM 
Alabaman,  LBMn 
alarm,  LrM  or  Lr3 
Alaska,   LsK 
Alaskan,  LsKn 
alchemy,  LKM 
alcohol,  LKL 
alembic,  LMpK 
alert,  LRt 
Alger,  LJr 
Alhambra,  LMBr 
alien,  Ln 
alike,  aL^K 
alimentary,  L3MntR 
alkali,  L'KL 
all,  Ftoid1  or  L1 
alligator,  LGtr 
alhiight,  FtoidNt1 
all-wise,  LMVs 


Almighty,  LxMt  or  Ftoid 

Mt1 

alphabet,  LFBt 
already,  Wtoid1,  Lrt^Lr1 

or  LrD 
also,  L^ 
although,    FtoidDh3  or 

L'Dh 

altogether,  Gtr1  or  L^Gtr 
aluminium,  LMnM 
alway,  L1^ 
always,  L!Ws 
amanuensis,  MNNss 
amateur,  MTr 
ambassador,  MpsDr 
ambassadress,   MpsDrs 
amber,  Mpr3 
ambidexterous,  MpDKs- 

Trs 

ambient,  Mpnt3 
ambiguous,  MpGs 
ambition,  Mpshn1 
ambitious,  MpShs1 
Amboy,  Mp3 
ambrosia,  MBrZh 
ambrozial,  MBrZAL 
amen,  Mn 

amendment,   MntMnt 
America,  MrK 
American,  MrKn 
amiable,  MB! 
among,  MNg 
amongst,  MNgst 
amplification,  JSIplFshn3 
amplify,  M[>1F3 
amputate,  MpTt3 
anaconda,  N'D1 


268 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


analogy,  N1J 

analysis- es,  Nlss1 
analyze,  Nls1 
anarchist,  NrKst 
anarchy,  NrK 
ancestor,  NSstr 
ancestry,  NSsTr 
anchor,  NgKr 
anchoret,  NgKrT 
anchorite,  NgKrT1 
ancient,  Nshnt 
ancillary,  NsLR 
anew,  NFtoid 
angelic,  J1K 
angelical,  J1K1 
Anglo-Saxon,  Ngl3ssN 
anguish,  NgSh 
angular,  Ngl3R 
angularity,  NgPRT 
anhelation,  NhLshn 
anhydrous,  NhDrs 
anility,  NLT 
animadvert,  NMDVrt 
ankle,  NgKl 
annex,  N3Ks. 
annexation,  N3Ks-sA^ 
annexed,  N3Kst 
annihilate,  NhLt1,  NLt1 

or  Nit1 
annihilation,      NhLshn J , 

NLshn1  or  Nlshn1 
anniversary,  NVrsR 
announce,  Nns3 
announced,  N3Nst 
announcement,  N3NsMnt 
annoyance,  NaNs 
annul,  NZ 


annunciate,  NNSht 
annunciation,    NnssAw    or 

NNShshn 
answer,  NsR 
antarctic,  NtR3KK 
antecedent,  NtsDnt 
antedate,  NtDt 
anther,  Ntr3 
anthracite,  NtrsT 
anticipate,  NtsPt 
anticipation,  NtsPshn 
antidote,  NtDt3 
antipathy,  NtPTh 
antipode,  NtPd 
antique,  NtJK 
antiquity,  NtKwT1 
antiseptic,  NtsPtK 
anti-slavery,  NteLVr 
anybody,  NBt1 
anyhow,  N^HO^ 
any-one,  NJWn 
anything,  NJNG 
anyway,  NaW 
anywhere,  N 
apace,  Ps3 
apart,  Prt3 
apathy,  P3Th 
apathetic,  P3ThtK 
apathetical,  P3ThtKl 
apparition,       Prshn1     or 

aPxRshn 

appendage,  Pnt3J 
appertain,  Pr3Tn 
applicable,  P13K 
appreciate,   PrSht 
appreciation,   PrShn 
appreciative,   PrShtV 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


appreciatively,  PrShtVl 
appreciator,  PrShtr 
appreciatory,  PrShtR 
apprentice,  PrnTs 
approbative,  Pr3Bf 
approbati  veness,  Pr 3  Bf  Ns 
appropriate,  PrPrt 
April,  PrL 
arbiter,  RBtr 
arbitrarily,  RBtRRL 
arbitrary,  RBtRR 
arbitrate,  RBtRt 
arbitration,  RBtRshn 
arbitrator,  RBtRtr 
archangel,  RKJ1 
arctic,  R3KK 
ardor,  Rtr3 
arduous,  RDS 
Ariel,  RL 
arise,  aRs1 

aristocrat-ic-al,  RsTKrt 
arithmetical,  RfThL 
arithmetician,  RfThshn 
Arizona,  RZN 
Arizonan,  RZNn 
Arkansan,  R3'ZnorR3Zn 
Arkansas,  R3'Zs  or  R3Zs 
Arkansaw,  R3'S  or  R3S 
Arkansawan,     R3'SN    or 

i    R3SN 
Arlington,       RLNgt      or 

RINgt 

arrange,  RnJ 
arterial,  R3TR1 
arterialization,  R3TRlssA«, 
arterialize,  R3TRls 
artery,  R3TR 


artesian,  RJTshn 
Arthur,  Rtr1 
article,  RtKl 
articulate,  RtKlt 
artificial,  RtFtfAl 
artillerist,       RtLRst      or 

RtLrst 

artillery,  RtLR  or  RtLr 
artisan,  Rts3N 
artist,   Rtst3  or  RTst 
artistic,   RTsK 
artistical,  RTsKl 
asafetida,   Si  Ft 
ascend,  Snt 
ascendant,  SntNt 
ascension,  SNshn 
ascent,  Snt 
ascertain,  SRtN 
ascetic,  STK 
asceticism,  STssM 
ashore,  Shr3 
asleep,  SLP 
aspirate,  SPRt 
assail,  SL 
assailer,  SLR 
assay,  S 
assayed,  SD 
assay er,  SR 
assemble-y,  SMpl 
assent,  Snt 
assets,  STs 
asseverate,  SVrt 
associate,  SSht  or  SxS^t 
associated,  SShTt  or  StfATt 
association,       Ssshn        or 

SShshn 
assuage,  SJ 


270 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


assuager,  SJr 
assume,  S3M 
assumer,  S3Mr 
asteroid,  StrD 
asthma,  S3M 
Astor,  Str3 
Astoria,  STR 
astound,  St3Nt 
astragal,  StrGl 
astral,  StrL 
astringent,  StrNJnt 
astrolabe,  StrLB 
astrologer,  StrLJr 
astronomer,     StrNR      or 

StrR 

astronomical,  StrNKl 
astronomy-ic,  StrN 
atheism,  ThsM 
atheist,  Thst 
atheistic,  ThsK 
atheistical,  ThsKl 
athwart,  ThwRt 
Atlanta,  Tln3T  or  TLnT 
Atlantic,  Tlnt3KorTLntK 
atmosphere,  TMsFr 
attach,  T3C 
attain,  Tn 
attend,  Tnt3 
attendance,  Tnt3Ns 
attendant,  Tnt3Nt 
attention,  T3Nshn 
attentive,  Tnt3V 
attentively,  Tnt3VL 
attenuate,  T3XT 
attenuation,  T3NShn 
attitude,  T3iTt 
attorney,  TrN 


attractor,  Trtr3 
auditor-y,  DtJR 
August,  Gst1 
Aurora,  RR 
austere,  S^R 
austerity,  SaTrt 
authentic,  ThntK 
authenticity,  ThntSt 
auto,  T1 
autobiograph-y-ic-al,     T1- 

BG 

autobiographer,  T'BGr 
autobiographist,  TJBGst 
autograph-y-ic-al,  T5G   or 

T'Gf 

autographer,  T'Gr 
autographist,  T'Gst 
automobe,  TMp  or  TMB 
automobile,  TM  or  TMB1 
avenge,  VJ 
average,  VrJ 
avert,  Vrt3  or  aVrt.    (See 

vert) 

avocation,  V3Kshn 
avoid,  a-Vt1 
avouch,  a-V3C 
avow,  aAV3 
awed,  oD1 
awes,  os  or  oZ1 
awe-struck,  oisTrK 
awful,  Fl1 
awfulness,  FlaNs 
awing,  o-  or 
awning,  NJNg 
axis,  Kss3 
ayes,  as  or  aZ 
ays,  is1 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


271 


B 

Bahama,  BM 
bamboo,  B3Mp 
banana,  BNN 
banish,  BnSh 
bank,  B3Ng 
banker,  B3NgR 
bankrupt,  B3NgPt 
bankruptcy,  B3NgS 
barb,  BrB 
barbarian,  BrBrn 
barbarity,  BrBrt 
Barbary,  BrBR 
barbecue,  BrBK 
barber,  BrBr 
barely,  BRL 
bargain,  BrGn 
bark,  I>RK 
barley,  BRL 
barrel,  BR1 
battle,  Bt3L 
bdellium,  DIM 
beadle,  Bt'L 
l>eautiful,  Bt3Fl  or  B3Tf 
beautify,  Bt3F  or  B3TF 
beauty,  B3T 
became,  BKM 
become,  BK 
Bedouin,  BtWn 
beehive,  B!V 
beehouse,  B*S 
beetle,  Bt'L 

beforehand,  RNt  or  BfNt 
beginner,  Gn'R 
beginnings,  gn01 
Behan,  BN 
behave,  BV 


behavior,  BVR 
behead,  BD 
beheld,  BLt 
behemoth,  BMTh 
behest,  BhSt 
behindhand,  Bnt'Nt 
behold,  BLt 
beholden',  BLtN 
beholder,  BLtr 
behoof,  B3F 
behoove,   B3V 
being  BJNg 
benefaction,  BNfFshn 
benefactor,  BNfFtr 
benefactress,  BNfKs 
benefice,  BNFs 
beneficed,  BNFst 
beneficeless,  BNFsZs 
beneficence,  BfNs  or  BN- 

FsNs 
beneficent-ly,  BfNt  or  BN- 

FsNt 
beneficential,    BfNxS'/il  or 

BNFsN^Al 
beneficial,    BfL  or  BNF- 

Skl 
beneficialness,   BfLNs   or 


beneficiary,  BfR  or   BN- 

FShr 
jeneficiate,  BNFSht 
jeneficiation,     BNFShshn 
enefit,  BNFt 
)enefitter,  BNFtr 
jenevolent-ly-ence,  BNV 
)enight,  BJNt 
benign,  BNn 


272 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


benignant-ly-ity,  BNg 
Benjamin,  BnJ 
Bennett,  BNt 
beryl,  BR1 
beset,  BsT 
beside,  BsD 
bespeak,  BsP 
bespoke,  BsP 
bespoken,  BsPn 
bethel,  BThl 
better,  Btr  or  BtK 
betterment,  BtrMnt, 

BtriMnt  or  BtRMnt 
between,  Twn1  or  Bt*Wn 
betwixt,  B^Kwst 
bewail,  BwL  or  BwL 
be  weep,  B*WP 
bewilder,  B^Ltr  or  Bw1 

Ltr 

bewitch,  B^w-C 
bewitcher-y,  B^w-CR 
bewitchingly,  B^w-CNgl 
bias,  B1S 
biased,  B'St 
Bible,  BB1 
bijou,  B3Zh 
Bimbley,  BMB1 
binder,  BNtr 
bindery,  BntJR 
biograph-y-ic-al,  BJG 
biographer,   B*Gr 
biographize,  BJGrs 
boa,  B 

boaconstrictor,  B'sTrtr 
boastful,  BsFl 
bodiless, 
bodily, 


body,  B'D 

bohea,  B1 

Bohemia,  B1^! 

bois,  Bw1 

bolder,  Bltr  or  BltR 

bolt,  BLt 

bolter,  BLtr 

bombast,  BMpst 

bombastic,  BMpsK 

bombastical,  BMp.s'Kl 

Bombay,  B^lp 

bonnet,  BNt 

border,  BRtr 

bother,  Btr1  or  BDhr 

botheration,     BtrJShn  or 

BDhrshn 
bothersome,     Btr^M    or 

BDhrsM 
bottle,  Bt^ 
bountiful,  BnTf 
bountifulness,  BnTfNs 
bounty,  BnT 
brachygraph-y-ic-al,      Br- 

Kg 

brachygrapher,  BrKGr 
brachygraphist,  BrKGst 
brethren,  Brn3  or  Br3 
bribe,  Br!B 
briber-y,  Br^r 
bridewell,  Brt^L 
brighter,  Brtr1 
brightest,  Brtst1 
Britain-on,  BrTn 
Britannia,  BrTN 
British,  Br^Sh 
broader,  BrDr 
broadest,  BrDst 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


273 


Brompton,  BrMptN 
brotherhood,  BrtrD 
brother-in-law,  BrNl 
Buena  Vista,   BNVsT    or 

BwNVsT 

builder,  Bltr1  or  Bit1  R 
burden,  BrDn 
burdensome,  BrDsM 
Burlington,  BrLNgt 
busied,  B*Zt 
busier,  Bs*R 
busiest,  Bs^t 
busily,  BsaL 
business,  Bss1  or  Bs^s 
busy,  B'Z 
busybody,  Bs^t 
Butterick,  BtrK 
bystander,      B^TtR      or 

Bst'Ntr 
byway,  BJW 

C 

Caesar,  SsR 
Cahawba,  KB1 
Cahoone,  K3N 
calculate,  KlKlt 
calculi,  K1K1 
calculus,  KlKls 
calends,  KINts 
calendar  er,  KINtr 
Calhoun,  KIN 
California,  Klf1 
Calif ornian,  Klf'N 
cam,  KaM 
camber,  -Br3 
cambist,  -Bst3 
cambistry,  -Bs3Tr 


camblet,  -Bit3 
Cambo,  -B3 
Cambodia,  -BD 
camboge,  -B3J 
Cam  boy,  -B3 
Cambria,  -Br 
Cambrian,  -Brn 
cambric,  -BrK 
Cambridge,  -BrJ 
Cambyses,  -Bss1 
Camden,  -Dn3 
came,  KM 
camel,  KM1 
cameleon,  KMLn 
camellia,  KML 
camelopard,  KMlPrt 
cameo,  K3M 
camera,  KMR 
Cameron,  KMrn 
camis,  KMs 
camisade,  KMsD 
camisado,  KMsDo 
camlet,  -Lt3 
camomile,  KMML 
camp,  K3Mp 
campaign,  -Pn 
campaigner,  -PnR 
campaniform,  -PNF 
camper,  K3Mpr 
Camperdown,  -PrDn 
campestral,  -PsTrL 
campestrian,  -PsTrn 
cam'phene,  -Fn3 
camphine',  -Fn1 
camphor,  -Fr3 
camphorate,  -Fr3T 
camphoric,  -Fr3K 


27  I 


TIIE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANTAT.. 


Cumpi,  -P 
campion,  -Pn3 
Campo,  -P3 
campus,  -P3 
Canada,  KND 
Canadian,  KNDn 
canaille,  KXZ 
canakin,  KNKn 
canal,  KN1 
canard,  Kn3Rt 
canary,  KnR 
cancel,  -sL3 
cancellation,  -sLshn3 
cancer,  -sR3 
cancriform,  -KrF3 
cancrine,  -Krn3 
candelabra,  -DlBr 
candelabrum,    -DiBrM 
candent,  -Dnt3 
candid,  -Dt3 

candidacy,  DtS  or  KntDS 
candidate,     Dt,    DtiT    or 

KntDt 
candidateship,  Dt'.Sh,   Dtt 

TShorKntDttSh 
candidature,  DtTr,  DttTtr 

or  KntDtr 
candle,  -Dl3 
candle-light,    -DPLt 
candlemas,  -DPMs 
candle-stick,    -Dlst3K 
candor,  -Dr3 
candy,  -D3 
cane,  Kn 

canescent,  KNsNt 
Canfield,  -F'Zt 
canicnla,  KNKL 


canicular,  KXKLr 
canicule,  KNK1 
canine,  KNn 
canis,  KNs 
canister,  KNstr 
canker,    -Kr3 
cannel,   -Nl3 
cannibal,  -XB1 
Cannock,  -NK 
cannon,  -Nn 
cannonade,  -NND 
cannoneer,  -NnR 
cannonry,   -NnR 
cannular,  -NLr 
canny,    -N3 
canoe,  K3X 
canon,  KnN 
canonic,  KnXK 
canonical,  KnNKl 
Canopus,  KNPs 
canopv,  KNP 
Cantab,  -TB 
Cantabrian,  -TBrn 
Cantabrigian,  -TBrJn 
cantalever,  -TLVr 
cantaloupe,    -TLP 
cantata,  -TT 

cantatrice,  -TtrC  or  TTtrC 
canteen,  -Tn1 
canter,  .Tr3 
Canterbury,   Kt'.BR 
canthus,   -Ths3 
canticle,   -TK1 
can  tie,   -Tl3 
cantlet,    KntLt 
canto,   -T 
Can 'ton,  -Tn3 


THK  PHONOGRAPHIC!  MANUAL. 


Canton',    -TV 
cantoon,    -Tn3 
Canute,  K3Nt 
canvas,   Vs3 
canvass,  Vs3 
canvasser,  VsR 
cany,  KN 
canyon,   -Yn3 
canzone,  -ZN 
can/onet,  -ZXt 
capital-ol,  KPtL 
captain,  KPt3 
captaincy,    KP3tT 
captainry,  KPt3Nr 
captainship,  KPt3tSh 
captivate,   KPtVt 
captive,  KPf3  or  KPtV 
captivity,  KPft3   or  KPt- 

VT 

carefulness,  KrfNs 
caricature,  KrKTr 
carol,  KR1 
Carolina,  KrLN 
Carolinan,  KrLNn 
Caroline,  KrLn 
Carpenter,  KrPntR 
carriage,  KRJ 
casual,  KsL  or  KZhl 
casuality,  KsLT  or  KZhlT 
casuist,  KsSt  or  KZhst 
casuistic,  KsStK  or  KZhsK 
casuistry.  KsSTr  or  KZhs- 

Tr 

cathedral,  KThtrL 
catholic-ism,  KTh3 
cattle,  KtL3 
caudal,  KtL1 


caused,  KsD1  or  Kzd1 

cauter,  Ktr1 

cauterism,  Ktrs1^! 

cauterization,   Ktrsshn* 

cauterize,  Ktrs1 

cauterized,  KtrsD1 

cautery,  KtR1 

celestial,  sLsL 

celestial ize,  sLsLs 

centigrade,  sNtGrt  or  sNt 

central,  sNtrZ 

centralization,  sXtrZss/m 

century,  sNTR 

certificate,  sRtFt 

certification,  sRtFshn 

certify,  sRtF 

chairmanship,  CrnSh 
',  chamber,  CMpr 
i  chancel,    Cs3L    or    CNs/, 

chancellor,   Cs3LR 

chancery,  Cs3R     * 

change,  CJ  or  C 

changeable,  CJB1 

changer,  CJr 

chapter,  CPtr(C3Pin 
Bible  references.) 

char,  C3R 

characteristical,     KrKsKl 

characterization,  KrKs6'/m 

characterize,  KrKs 

characterizedv  KrKst 

charge,   CrJ  or  C3 

charger,  CrJr 
i  chargeable,  CrJBl 
•  charta,  KrT 

chartaceous,   KrTShs 
'  chart,  Crt3 


276 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


charter,  Crt3R 
charterer,   Crt3RR 
charter-party,  Crt3RP 
chartism,  Crt3sM 
chartist,  Crtst3 
chartometer,    Crt3Mtr 
chattel,  Ct3L 
Chauncy,  CnS 
Cheathet,  C'Tht 
cheerfulness,   Crf'Xs 
chemical,  KMK1 
Chicago,  ShKG 
Chihuahua,  OVW  or  C\v- 

W 

chill-y,  C'L 
choler,  KLr 
choyer,  C'R  or  ClvR 
churn,  CRn 
Cicero,  sSR 

circumstantiate,     sTn3Sht 
circumvent,  sR'Vnt 
cissoid,  SsD 
citator,  sTtr1 
cite,  sT1 
citizen,  sTn1 
citizenry,  sTnu.R 
citizenship,  sTnu.Sh 
city,  sT1 
cittern,  sTRn 
classification,  KIsFshn 
clearly,  K1RL  or  K1R1 
client,  Klnt1 
cling-y,  KPXg 
clinker,  KINgKr 
clothier,  Kltr 
Co.  (for  company),  K 
cognac,  -Y'K  , 


cognate,  K'GXl 
cognomen,  K'GNMn 
cognizable,  -Xsli1 
cognizance,   -Xs '  Xs 
cognizant,  -Xs'Xt 
cognizee,    -XZ1 
cognizor,   -XsR1 
cohasset,  KhSt 
coherent,  KhRnt 
cohesion,  KHf'Zhn 
cohesive,  Knf's\' 
cohort,  KhRt 
Cohoes,  KhZ 
colder,  Kltr  or  KltR 
collar,  KLr 
collateral,  KLtrL 
colleague,  Kl'G 
collectedness,  KPKXs 
collectible,  KIKBl 
collection,  Kl'Kshn 
collective,  KPKf 
collectively,  KPKfL 
collector,  Kl'Ktr 
collectorate,  KIKtrT 
collectorship,  KIKtrSh 
college,  KIJ 
collide,  KLt1 
collocation,  KIKshn 
Col.  (for  Colonel;,  Kl1 
colonel,  KrNl 
colony,  KPN 
Coloradan,  Kin3 
Colorado,  Kl3 
Coloradoan,  K13X' 
Columbia,  KIMp 
columbiad,   KIMpt 
Columbian,  KIMpn 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


277 


Columbus,  KIMps 
column,  Kl'M 
com,  K]M 
coma,  KM 
Comanche,   KJVlnC 
comatose,  KMTs 
comb,  KM 
combat,  -Bt1 
combative,  -B^V 
combatively,  -fit1  VI 
combination,  -l^Nshn 
comedian,  KMDn 
comedy,  KMD 
comely,  K'.L  or  KL 
comeliness,     KiLXs       or 

KLNs 

comer,  K'.R  or  KR 
comestible,  -StBl 
comet,  K'Mt 
cometh,  KtTh  or  KTh 
comfort,    -Frt 
comforter,  -Frtr 
comfrey,  -Fr 
comic,  KMK 
comity,  KMT 
comma,  -M1 
command,  -Mnt3 
commeasureable,   -MZhrB 

or  -Zhr'B 

oommemorable,  -MMBl 
commemorate,  -MMRt 
commemoration,  -MM- 

Rshn 
commemorative,        -MM- 

RtV 
commemorator,  -MMRtr 


commencement,   -MnsMnt 

or  -MnsiMnt 
commenced,  -MNst 
commences,     -MNss  (See 

sec.  and  eng.  202.) 
commend,  -Mnt 
comment,  -Mnt1 
commerce,   -Mrs 
commercial,  -MrShl 
commingle,  -M^gl 
commingled,    -M^Ngit 
commiserate,  -MsRt 
commiseration,  -MsRshn 
commissariat,  -MsRT 
commissary,  -MsR 
commission,  -Mshn1 
commissioner,  -Msh^R 
commissure,  -MShr 
commit,   -Mt1 
committee,  -Mt1  or  MT 
commix,    -MKs1 
commixed,  -M 
commixture,    - 
commodore,      -MDr      or 

•Mtr1 

common,  -Mn1 
commoner,  -MnR1 
commonest,  -M^st 
commonly,  -MnL1 
commonness,  -MnaNs 
commonplace,  -MNPls  or 

MnMPls 

commonwealth,  -MnL^Th 
commotion,  -Mshn 
communicate,  -M3NKt 
communication,'       -M3N- 

Kshn 


278 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


commute,  -Mt3 
commuter,  -Mtr3 
commutual,  -Mt3L 
companion,  -PnN 
company,  PX  (Sec  Co.) 
compare,  -Pr 
comparison,  -PrsN 
comparative,    -PrtV 
comparitively,    PrtVl 
compartment.  -PrtMnt 
compliment,  PIMnt 
complimentary,  PIMntR 
Compton,  KMptN 
comrade,  -Rt1 
Comstock,  -stK1 
con,  Kn1 
concave,  -Kf 
concavity,  -Kft 
conceal,  -sL1 
concenter,  •  sNtr 
concentrate,  -sNtrT 
concentration,  •  sXtrshn 
concentrative,   •  sNtrTf 
concentrativeaess,     •  sXtr- 

TfNs 

concentric,  -sNtrK 
concentrical,  -sXtrKl 
concentricity,  •  sNtrst 
concert,  •  sRt 
concession,  -Sshn 
conch,  KN^K 
concomitant,  -Tnt 
concomitantly,    --TtL    or 

••TnttL 
Conde,  -D1 
Condon,  -Dn1 
condor,  -Dr1 


cone,   Kn 

Conestoga,  KNsTG 
confer,  -F7? 
couferable,  -FRBl 
conferee,  -FR 
conference,,  FRns 
conferential,   -FRn 
Confucius,  -F*S7iS 
conge,  -J1 
conger,  -Gr1 
Congo,  -G1 
congress,  -Grs 
congressional,    -GrshnL 
Congreve,  .Grf1 
congruous,  -GrS 
conic,  KnK 
conical,  KnKL 
conjunction,    -JXgshn 
con' jure,  -Jr1 
conjure',  -Jr3 
Conkey,'  -K1 
Conk  ling,  -KlNg 
connascence,  -Xs3Xs 
connascent,  -Xs 3  X  t 
connate-ure,  -Xt 
connatural,  -X'tZ 
Connaught,  -X't1 
Connecticut,  -X'tKt 
Connecticutter,   -X^tKtr 
connect,  -XKt 
connection,  -X'Kshn 
Connell,  -XI1 
Connellsville,    NlsVZ    or 

NlsV 

Connelly,  -XZ1 
Conner,  -X'r1 
connex,    -XKs 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


279 


connive,  -XT1 
connoisseur,  -XsR 
connubial,  -NBL 
conodont,   KXDnt 
conoid,  Knl) 
conominee,  KXMX 
Conrad,  -Rt3 
Conroy,  -R1 
consequence,   sKns1 
consequent-ly,  "sKnt1 
consequential,  sKn1 
consertion,    •  sRshn 
conservable,  •  sRBl 
conservableness,  •  sRBlns 
eonservance,   -sRVns 
conservancy,  -sRtV 
conservant-ly,  •  sRVnt 
conservation,   -sR  or   -sR- 

Yshn 
conservational,     -sRL    or 

•sRVshnL 

conservatism,    -sRVteM 
conservative,      •  sRVt    or 

•sRVtV 

conservatively,  -sRVtVl 
conservativeness,    -sRVti- 

Vns 

conservator,  -sRVtr 
conservatory,  -sRftR 
conservatrix,  -sRtKs 
conserve,  •  sRf 
conserver,  -sRfR 
conservership,  -sRfRSh 
conservingly,   •  sRf XgZ 
consignment,  -sN'Mnt 
consist,  ssT1 
consistence,  ssTns1 


consistencies,  ssTnss1 
consistency,   ssTn1 
consistent-ly,  ssTnt1 
consonance,  -sN^'s 
consonant,    •  sN 1  Nt 
consort,  -sRt1 
conspicuous-ly-ness,  sP1  Ks 
constable,  -stBL 
constablery,  -stBLR 
constabulary,  -stB3LR 
constant,  -stNt3 
Constantinople,     stNtNPl 

orstXtPl 
constitutionality,  stTshn3- 

T  or  stTshnLT 
constriction,   -sTrshn1 
constrictor,    -sTrtr1 
construct,  sTrKt 
constructiveness,  •  sTrf Xs 
consuetude,       •  sT l  D     or 

•sWiTt 
consume,  sM3 
consumer,  sMR3 
consumptive,  -sMptV 
contend-t,  -Tnt 
contention,  -TXshn 
contentment,    -TtMnt 
continent,  Tn'Nt 
continental,  TnJNtZ 
continence,  TnJNs 
contingent,  -TnJnt 
continual,  TNZ 
continuance,  TNNs 
continuant,  TNNt 
continuation,  TXShn 
continue,  TX 
continuity,  T'.Xt 


280 


THE   PHOXOunArilU'    M. \\UAL. 


continuous,  TXs 
continuously,  TXsZ 
contort,  -T^Rt 
contortionist,  -T l  Rshn  St 
contra,  -Tr1 
contraband,  KtiBnt3 
con'tract,  Tr'Kt 
contract',  Tr3Kt 
contract'or,  Trtr3 
contradance,  Kt'.  Dns 
contradict,  KtiDKt 
contravene,  KtiVn1 
contravention,  EtfVNslin 
controversial,  VrShl 
controversialist,  VrShlst 
controversy,  VrS 
controvert,  KtiVrt 
convey,  -V 
conundrum,  KnXtrM 
convent,   -Vnt 
convention,    -VXshn 
conventionality,     -VXshn- 

LT 

convert,  -Vrt1 
convolve,  -V1V 
Conway,  •  W 
cook,  K3K 
cooperate,  KPrt1 
coral,  KR1 
v-orn,  Krn1 
cornelian,  KrNln 
corneous,  Ki^Ns 
corner,  KrnR1 
corner-stone,  KrnR^Tn 
cornice,  Ki^Xs 
corn-stalk,  Krn1sTK 
corona,  KRN 


coroner,  Kr3Xr  or  KRXr 
corps,  Kr 

correction,  Kr J  Ksh  n 
corrective,  Ki^KTf 
correctness,  Kr '  K Xs 
correspond,  Krs'Pnt 
corrupt,  Ki-1Pt 
coterie,  KtR 
council,    -sL3 
counsel,  -sL3 
countenance,    -Tn3X*s 
countenanced,  -Tu'Xst 
countenances,    -Tn3Xss 
counter,  -Tr3 
counteract,  Kt'.Kt3 
counterirritant,  KtiRTnt 
counter-man,  KttMn 
countersign,  KtisX1 
countersink,  KtisX^g1!^ 
countess,  KntS3 
countryman,  KMn 
countryseat,   K'sT 
county-court,  KntKt 
county-seat,  KntsT 
courage,  KrJ 
courteous,  KrTs 
courthouse,  Krt2S 
covenant,  KYnX't 
Covington,  KfX^gt 
cowherd,  K3hRt 
cowhide,  KD3 
create,  KrT 
creative,  KrTf 
creator,  KrTr 
credential,  KrDn 
creosote,  KrsT 
cricket,  KrKT1 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


281 


cricketer,  Kr'Ktr 
criminal-ate,  Ki^Mn 
critic-ique,  Kr'K  or  Krt1- 

<K 

critical,  Kr^Kl 
criticalness,  KrtJKlNs 
criticise,  Krt'sZ 
criticised,  Krt^sZt 
criticiser,  Krt1sZR 
criticism,  Krt^sZM 
cucumber,  K3KMpr 
cultivator,  KltVtr 
cumbent,  -Bnt 
cumber,  -Br 
Cumberland,  -BrLnt 
cumbersome,  -BrsM 
cumbrous,  -Brs 
cumin,  KMn 
Gumming,  -MXg 
cumulate,  KMLt 
cuneiform,  KNRffM 
cunning,  -NNg 
Cunningham,  -NNgM 
cute,  Kt3 
Cuyahoga,  KG 
cylinder-ic,  sLNtr 
cylindrical,  sLNtrKl 
cymbal,  sMpl1 

LESSON  35. 
D 

dahlia,  D1Y  or  DL'.v 
Dahomey,  DM 
Dakota,  DKT 
Dakotan,  DKTn 
Dalhousie,  D1Z 


dampen,  D3Mpn 
damper,  D3Mpr 
Danish,  DnSh 
dashed,  D3Sht 
dative,  DTf 
daughter-in-law,  D1]^! 
David,  DVt 
davit,  D3Vt 
debenture,  DB,  DBXtr  or 

DBntE 

decapitate-ion,  DKPt 
decease,  DSs 
deceased,  DSst 
December,    DsMp  or  Ds- 

MpR 

decipher,  D-s-Fr 
decisive,  Dss^ 
declaim,  DK1M 
declarable,  D3K1B1 
declaration,  D3Klshn 
declarative,  D3KlTf 
declaratory,  D3K1TR 
dedicate,  DtKt 
dedication,  DtKshn 
deduce,  DDs 
deduced,  DDst 
deducible,  DDsBl 
deduct,  DDKt 
deduction,  DDKshn 
defeat,  D^t 
defend,  DfNt 
defer,  DfR 
deference,  DfRns 
deferential,  DfKn 
deficience,  DFshns 
deficiency,  DFtSh 


282 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


deficient,    DFshnt   or    D:-' 

Fshnt 

defied,  D'Ft 
defier,  D'F^ 
defile,  DFZ 
defilement,  DFLMnt 
defiler,  DFLr 
defiling,  DFLNg 
define,  DFn 
definite,  'DfXt 
deforin-ity,  DFr 
deformation,  DFrshn 
defrav,  Dfr 
defiant,  D'FXt 
defy,  D'F 
degeneration,  DJshn 
dehiscence,  DsNs 
dehort,  D'Rt 
dehortatory,  DaRtTR 
deified,  D^Ft  or  D'FD 
deify,  D'F 

Delawaran,  DbrRn  or  Din 
Delaware,  DlwR  or  Dl 
delectable,  DIKtBl 
delegate,  DIGt 
delegation,  DIGshn 
deleterious,  DLtRs 
deliberate,  DIBrt 
delicate,  DIKt 
delicious,  DLShs 
delight,  Dlt1 
delinquency,      Dln:K     or 

DlntKw 

delinquent-ly,  DIKnt 
delirium,  D1RM 
delirious,  DIRs 
delude,  Dlt3 


delusion,  Dlshn3 
democracy',  DMS 
democratical,  DMK1 
demonstrative,  DMnsTrf 
Deneen,  DXn 
Denmark,  DMrK 
denote,  DNt 
denounce,  DXns 
denounced,  DXXst 
denouncement,    DXXsMnt 
dental,  DnTL 
denunciation,  DXns-v////   or 

DXn^Ashn 
dependency,      DPtD       or 

DPniD 
derange-ment,     DRnJ     or 

DrXJ 

derelict,  DRIKt 
dereliction,  DRlshn 
derivation,  Drf$An 
derivative,  Drft^V 
derivatively,  Drf t J  VL 
dervish,  DrfSh 
descriptiveness,  SKrf^'s 
desert,  DsRt 
desertion,  DsRshn 
deserve,  DsRf 
deservedly,  DsRftL 
deservedness,  DsRftX's 
deserver,  DsRfR 
designate-ion,  DsG 
desire-able,  DsR 
desirous,  DsRs 
desperate,  DsPrt 
despicable-ness,  DsPK 
despondency,     DsP:D     or 

DsPntD 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


283 


destination,  DstXshn 
destiny,  DstN 
destructiveness,  DsTrfNa 
desuetude,  DsTt  or  DsWt- 

Tt 

detach,  DtC 
detachment,  DtCMnt 
detail,  DTL 
detailed,  DTLt 
detain,  DTn 
detect,  DtKt 
detection,  DtKshn 
detector,  DtKtr 
detective,  DtKtV 
deter,  DtR 
deteriorate,  DtRRT 
determent,  DtRMnt 
determinahility,  DtrBt 
determinable,  DtrB 
determinableness,  DtrBns 
determinacy,  DtrS 
determinant,  DtrNt 
determinate,  DtrT 
determinately,  DtrTL 
determinateness,  DtrTns 
determination,      Dtrn     or 

DtrSh 

determinative,  DtrTf 
determinator-y,  DtrTR 
determine-ing,  Dtr 
determined-ly,  Dtrt 
determiner,  Dtr'.R 
determinism,     DtrZM     or 

DtrtsM 
determinist,  DtrsT  or  Dtr 

St 
detest,  DTst 


detestable,  DTsBl 
detestation,  DTsTshn 
detinue,  DtN 
detonate,  DtNt 
detour,  Dt3R 
detract,  DTrKt 
detractor,  DTrtr 
detraction,  DTrshn 
detractive,  DTrf 
detrimental,  DTrMntL 
develop-ment,  DfP 
deviate,  DVT 
devious,  DVs 
deviously,  DVfcZ 
devoid,  D'Vt 
devolve,  DV1 
devote,  DVt 
devotee,  DVT 
devotional,  DVshnL 
devour,  DfR 
devout,  D3Vt 
diadem,  DDM 
diagram,  DfG 
differentia,  DfSh  or  DfRn- 

Sh 
diflerentiable,     DfShB    or 

DfRnShB 

differential,  DfSh  or  DfRn 
differentiate-d,     DfSht    or 

DfRnSht 
differentiation,  DfShshn  or 

DfRnShshn 
differentiator,    DfShtr    or 

DfRnShtr 

difficult-y,  D1  Kit  or  Kit 
diffidence,  DFDns 
diffident,  DFDnt 


284 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


dignitary,  D'GTR 
dilapidale-ion,  DIP 
dilemma,  DIM 
diligent,  DUnt 
dilute,  D3Lt 
dilution,  D3Lshn 
diocese,  DSs 
diphthong,  DfThXg 
diplomat-ic,  DPIMt 
direct,  DrKt 
direction,  Drshn 
directory,  DrTr 
dirt,  DRt 
disadvantage,  DsJ 
disagree,  DVGr 
disappear,  Ds*Pr       ? 
disappointment,    DsPtMnt 
disapprove-al,  Ds3Prf 
disarm,  Ds3RM 
disarmament,    Ds'RMMnt 
disaster,  DsZtr 
disasters-ous,  DsZtrs 
discourage,  D-s-KrJ 
discourse,  DsKrs 
discourteous,  DsKrTs 
disco  ver-y,  DsKf 
discredit,  D.s-KrDt 
discreet,  DsKrt 
discrepant,  D-s-KrPnt 
discursive,  D-sKrsV 
disease,  Dss1  or  DsZ 
diseased,  DssD  or  DsZt 
disfranchise,  D.sFrnCs 
disfurnish,  D-sFrnSh 
disgorge,  D.sOrJ 
disgrace,  D*Grs 


dishearten,     Ds-hlvtX     or 

DsRtN 

dished,  D'Sht 
dishevel,  DShVl 
disinterested-ness.    DsNts- 

Tt 

dismember,  DsBr 
disorganization,  Ds1- 

Gnsshn 

disorganize,  Ds^ns 
disparage,  DsPrJ 
displeasure,  DsZhr 
disprove-al,  DsPrf 
disrespect,  DsRsP 
disrespectful,  DsRsPf 
dissatisfaction,  D3sTsshn 
dissatisfy,  D3sT 
dissever,  D«Vr 
dissimilarity,  DsMLrt 
dissimilar-ly,  DsM 
dissuade,  DsD 
dissuasion,  'Dsskn 
dissuasive,  DssV 
distemper,  DsTMpr 
distincti  ve-ly  Ds^V 
distinctiveness,  Dstu.Vs 
distinctness,  Dst1Xs 
distinguish,  DstNg 
distraction,  Ds3Trshn 
distribute,  DsTrBt 
district,  DsTrKt 
district  attorney,  DsTrX 
District  of  Columbia, 

DsKl 
District  of  Columbian, 

DsKln 
district  court,  DsKt 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


285 


disturb,  DstrB 
disuse,  Ds3S 
divers,  DfRs 
diverse,  DVrs 
divert,  DVrt 
divide,  D'Vt 
dividend,  D'VDnt 
divider,  DaVtr 
divination,  DWXshn 
diviner,  Df'R 
diviniest,  D^St 
divinity,    D'Vnt   or     I)1- 

<Vnt 

divinely,  Df*L  or  Df'.L 
divorce,  DVrs 
dolorous,  DLRs 
domestic,  DMsK 
dominion,  DMnN 
donate,  DXT 
Donohue,  DX 
door,  DR 
dot,  Dt1 
dotage,  DtJ 
dote,  Dt 

downcast,  Dn3Kst 
downfall,  Dn3FZ  or  D3F1 
downfallen,  D3FLn  or  D3- 

Fln 

downhearted,  D3Rt 
downright,  D3lSTrt 
downstairs,  Dnstrs3 
downtrod-den,  D3Trt 
downward,  Dn3  Wt  or  D3- 


dreadnaught,  DrtXt 
drum-head,  DrMD 
dutiful,   D3Tf 


dutifulness,  I)3TfXs 
duty,  D3T 
dyspepsia-tic,  DsPP 
dweller,  DwK, 
dwelling-house,  DwS 
dwelling-place,  DwPls 

E 

earl-y,  RL 
earlier,  RLr 
earliest,  RLst 
earnest,  RJXst 
earnestly,  R 
earnestness, 
earth,  RTh 
earthly,  RThL 
Easter-day,  Sti^D 
eastward,   St^Rtor  St1- 

Rt 

eccentrical,  KsXtrKl 
eccentricity,  KsNtrst 
economic-y,  KnM 
editorial,  DtRl 
efficacious-ly-ness,  FKuShs 
efficience,   Fshns1 
efficiency,  Fu.Sh 
efficient-ly,  Fshnt1 
eheu,  e-nY3 
Eichenbaum,  KnBM 
eight,  8 
elastic,  LsK 
elastical,  ZsKl 
elasticity,  LsTst 
elbow,  LBo 
Eldorado,  LDrD 
eleven,  11 
elector,   LKtr 


280 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXC.U. 


electric,  LK 
electrical,  LKK1 
electrician,  LKShn 
electricity,  LKTrst 
electrify,  LKF 
elegance,  LGns 
Elegancy,  LiG 
elegant,  LGNt 
elegantly,  LGNtZ       * 
elemental,  LMntL  or'LMt- 

L 

elementary,  LMntR 
elephant,  LFnt 
elevator,  LVtr 
Elihn,  Linr  or  LnY 
Ellsworth,  LsKTh 
elongate,  XgJGt 
elongation,  Ng'Gshn 
eloquent,  LKwnt 
elsewhere,  LsR 
embank,  MpXgK 
embankment,  MpXgKMnt 
embark,  MpRK 
embarrass,  MpRs 
embellish,   MpLSh 
ember,  ]\Ipr 
emblazon,  MBlsN 
emblem,  MB1M 
emblement,  MplMnt 
em  I  )odimentj  MpD '  Mnt 
embody,  MpD1 
emboss,  Mps1 
embossed,  Mpst1 
emerge,  Mr1,! 
emigrate,   MGrt 
empanel,  MpXl 
emperor,  MprR 


emphatic,   MFt 
empiric,  Mpr'K 
empirical,  Mpr'Kl 
empiricism,  Mpi^ssM 
employ-ee,  MP1 
employer,  MP1R 
empress,  MPrs 
emj)tion,  Mpshn 
empty,  MpT 
enclosure,  NKlsR 
encumber,  N'.Br 
endeavor,  NtVr 
endless,    Nt-Zs 
endlessly,  XtZsZ 
endorse,  XDrs 
endorsee,  NDrS 
endorser,  XDrsR 
energy,   NrJ 
English,  Ngl1  or  Ng1 
Englishman,    XglMn1    or 

Ng'Mn 
Englishmen,      Ngln1      or 

Xgn  ] 

enhance,  Xns 
enhanced,   XXst 
enhancement,  NNsMnt 
enlace,  Xls  or  XLs 
enlacement,     XlsMnt     or 

XLsMnt 
enlard,  'XTLrt3 
enlarge,  X'.P 
enlighten,  XlTn 
enlightenment,    X'lTMnt 
enlink,  XPX'gK 
enlist,  Xlst1  or  XLst1 
enlistment,  Xls1  Mnt,  Xls- 

T1  Mnt  or  XLs 'Mnt 


THE    PHONiHiKAPIlir    MANl   AL. 


enliven,  IS'lYn 
enlivener,  MVnR 
enrage,  NRJ 
Knriffht,  Nrt1,  NrT  or  N- 

Rt 

enrole,  NR1 
enslave,  nsLV 
ensnare,   NsNR 
entangle,   NtNgl 
en'terance,    Ntrns      (See 

en'trance  ) 
enterprise,  NtPrs 
entertain,  NtTn 
entertainment,   NtTmnt 
enthusiasm,  NThss3  or  X- 

ThZsM 
enthusiast.  XThss3T  or  N- 

Th  Zst 
enthusiastic-al,   NThss3  N- 

Thss3K  or  NThZsK 
en'trance,      JS'Trns      (This 

\vord  should  be  spelled  and 

pronounced      en'terance. 

See  en'terance  above.) 

entrance',  NTrns 
entwine,  NTwri1 
entwist,  NTwst1 
enunciate,  NNSht 
envelope,  TsVP 
episcopalian,  PsKn 
episcopalianism,    PsKnsM 
e[)itaph,  PtF 
epitome,  PtJM 
equality,  KIT1 


c(]iialize,  Kls1 
equalized,    Klst1     • 
equanimity,    K  \vnMT 


e<iuity,  KwT 

equivalence,  KwV 

erroneous,  RNs 

erfoneously,  RNsZ 

error,  RR 

erysipelas,  RsPLs 

escheat,  SOT 

escheator,  SCtr 

eschew,  S3C 

essay,  8 

essayed,  SD 

essay er,  SR 

essayist,  Sst 

estate,  8Tt 

esteem,  S^AI 

esthete,  8irriit 

esthetic,  SThtiK 
i  esthetical,  SThtKl 
;  estimate,  StMt 

estop,  St1!* 
i  estrange-ment,   STrn 
j  Ethiop-ia,  ThP 

Ethiopian,  ThPn 

euchre,  YKr 

Euclid,  YKlt 

Euclidian,  YKltN 

Eugene,  YJn 

eulogium,  YUM 

eulogy,  Y1J 

eupepsy,  Y-PPS 

euphony,  Y-F3N 

Euphrates,  FrTs  or  F-Fr 
Ts 

euphuism,   y-F*3M 

eureka,  yRK  or  YRK 

Europe,  //RP 
!  European,  //RPn 


288 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


eustachian,  Yst  Kn 
Euterpe,  y-TRP 
Euterpean,  Y-TRPn 
euthanasia,  Y-ThNZ 
evangelic,  J13K 
evangelical,  J13K1 
everlasting,  VJLst 
everlastingly,  V1LsL 
evermore,  V1Mr 
everybody,  VrBt 
everyday,  VrD 
everyone,  Vrn 
everything,  VrNg 
everywhere,   Vrnw?R 
evidence,  VtNs 
evident,  VtNt 
evolve,  V1V 
ewe,  Y3     (See  weigh.) 
ewer,  Y3R  (See  weigher. ) 
exacerbate,  GssRBt 
exact,  sKt3 
exacter,  sKtr3 
exaction,  sKshn3 
exactitude,  sKt3Tt 
exactly,  sKt3L 
exactness,  sKt3Ns 
examinable,  sMn3B 
examination,  sM3Nshn 
examinee,  sM3N 
examiner,  sMn3R 
exasperate,  GssPRT 
exchequer,  KsC 
execute,  KsKt 
executer,  KsKtr 
execution,  KsKshn 
executioner,  KsKshnR 
executive,  GsKf 


executor,  GsKtrorGsK 
executrix,  GsKKs 
exempt,  GsMpt 
exemption,  GsMpshn 
exercise,  KsRss 
exercised,  KsRssD 
Exeter,  KsTr 
exhale,  KsL 
exhaust,  GssT1 
exhibit,  GsBt1 
exhort,  GsRt1 
exhume,  Gs3M 
exist,  GssT 
exonerate,  Gs^rt  or  Gs 

NRt1 
exoneration,  Gs1Nrshn  or 

GsNRshn1 
exonerative,  Gs'XrtV  or 

GsNRt'V 
exonerator,     Gs^'rtr     or 

GsXRtr1 
exorcise,  KsRss1 
exorcised,  KsRss1  D 
expediency,  KsP'.D 
experiment,  sPrMnt 
expert,  KsPrt 
explicable,  sPlKBl 
explicit,  sPlsT 
exploit,  KsPlt1 
exploitation,  KsPPTshn 
explore,  sPIR 
expressage,  sPrsJ 
exquisite,  sKwsT     , 
extemporaneous-ly,     KsT- 

Mp 

extemporary,  KsTMpK  11 
extempore,  KsTMpR 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


289 


extemporise,  KsTMpRs 
exterminate,  sTrMXt 
extermination,  sTrMXshn 
exterminator,  sTrMXtr 
exterminatory,    sTrMXtR 
extinct-ness,  KsTXgKt 
extinction,  KsTXgshn 
extinguish,  KsTXg 
extinguishable,  KsTXgB 
extinguisher,  KsTXgR 
extra,  KsTr 
extraction,  sTrshn3 
extractor,  sTrtr3 
extraordinary-ly, 
extravagance,  sTrfGns 
extravagancy,  sTrfGnS 
extravagant-ly,  sTrfGnt 
extravagantness,   sTrfGnt- 

Ns 

extravaganza,  sTrfGnZ 
extreme,  sTrM 
extrinsic,  sTrsK 
extrinsical,  sTrsKl 
eyed,  1-D1 
eyeing,  I-1  or  Xg1 
eyes,  is1 
eyesight,  1-sT1 
eye-witness,    l-Wt1Xs     or 

I-T'Xs 


facer,  FsR 
facetious,  FsSh  or 
facetiously,    FsSh  or  Fs- 

ShsL* 
facetiousness,  Fs&Aor  Fs- 


facile,  FsZ 

"facility,  FsZt  or  F*LT 
factory,  FKTr 
Fahrenheit,  FRnT  or  F 
failure,  FLR 
falchion,    Flshn,1 

or  FICn 
falter,  Fltr1 
family,  FM1 
Farwell, 
farewell, 
Farmington,  F^MXgt 
farthing,  FrThNg 
farther,  Frtr3 
Fashoda, 
Fashoon, 
fastidious,  FsTD 
fastness,  Fs3Xs 
fatal,  FtZ 
fatalism,  FtLsM 
fatalist,  FtLst 
father-in-law,  FtrnaL 
fault,  Fit1 
faultily,  FPTL 
faultiness,   FPTNs 
faultless,  FltJLs 
faultlessly,  FltJLsL 
faulty,  FIJT 
favor,  FVr 
favorable,  FVrB 
favoritism,  FVrTsM 
February,  FB 
federal,  FtrZ 
federalism,  FtrLsM 
federalist,  FtrLst 
federate,  FtrT 
federation,  Ftrshn 


Till:    I'tlOXOORAl'IlIC    MAXl'AL. 


federative,  FtrTf 
feesimple,  F'.sMpL 
feller,  FLr  or  FLK 
female,  FML 
fencer,  FnsR 
fern,  FRn  or  F72n 
fern-leaf,  FRnLF  or 

LF 

ferrule,  FR1 
fettle,  FtZ 
fiasco,  F3sK 
fiddle,  Ft'Z 
fiddler,  Ft'Zr 
fidelity,  FDlt 
Filipino,  F1PN 
filter,  Fltr1 
filler,   Fl'R 
finance,  FnNs 
financial,  FnN 
financier,  FnNsR 
finish,  FnSh 
finite,  F'Nt 
firm,  F72M  or  FrM 
firmament,    F^MMnt   or 

FrMMnt 
firmamental,     F^?MMntL 

or  FrMMntL 
firman,  F7?Mn  or  FrMn 
firmer,  F^Mr  or  FrMr 
firmest,  F7?Mst  or  FrMst 
firmly,  F/?ML  or  FrML 
firmness,  F7?MNs  or  Fr.M- 

Ns 

firstborn,  FrsBRn 
first-day,  FrsD 
first-fruits,  FrsFrts 
first-hand,  FrsNt 


firstling,  FrsLXir 
firstly,  FrsL 
first-rate,   FrsRt 
first-thing,  FrsXg 
first-time,  FrsT 
fiscal,  FsKL 
fish-y,  YSk 
fished,  F'Sht 
fisher-y,  F'Shr 
fisherman-men,  F^hrnor 

F^hrMn 
fish-glue,  F'SAGl 
tishhawk,  F^'AK 
fishhook,  F3xS7*K 
fishiest,  FS 
fishiness,F1 
fishing-line,  F'X/,%Ln 
fish-joint,  F'AV/Jnt 
fish-kettle,  . 
fish-line,  F 
fishman-men,  F'Shnor  F1- 

ShMn 

fish-market,  F^V/MrKt 
fish-monger,  F'ShMNgr 
fish-shop,  F^^AShP 
fish-trowel,  F^hTrL 
fishwife,  F1  ^AF  or  WF 
fishwives,  F^AVs  or  }Y- 

Vs 
fishwoman-men,  FJ>S/m  or 

F^'/AVMn 

Fitzhugh,  FtsnY  or  FtS 
five,  5 

flambeau,  FIMp 
flash-house,  FLS'AS 
flashily,  F1SA1 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


U91 


flash-light,  FltfALt  or  Fl- 

ShLt 

Florida,  F^D 
Floridan,  FPDn 
florin,  FIRn 
Hurry,  FIR 
flush-board,  FIShBrt 
flushest,  Fl£Ast 
Fohi,  Foni  or  F 
fold,  FZt 
folder,  FLtr 
folio,  FL 

follower,  F1*R  or  F'LR 
foothold,  Ft3hLt 
footsoldier,  Ft3*LJr 
footsore,  Ft3sR 
footstep,  Ft3sTP 
footstool,  Ft'sTL 
forage,  FRJ 
forager,  FRJr 
forced,  FJ?st 
forceful,  FJ2sF 
forcible,  F7?sB 
forcibleness,  F7?sBns 
ford,  FRt 
fore,  FT? 
foreign,  FRn 
foreigner,  FRnR 
forever,  FV 
foretell, 
forewarn, 
forfeit,  F'Ft 
forfeiture,  F 
forgave,  FrGf 
forge,  F*J 
forger,  F^r 
forgery,  FUR 


forget,  FrGt 
forgive,  FrG 
forgot,  FrGt 
formal,  FJM1 
formality,  FJMlt 
formalism,  F1MlsM 
formalist,  F1Mlst 
former, 
formerly, 
fort,  FRt 
forth,  FRTh 
forthwith,  FRThDh 
fortune-ate-ly,  FJRt 
forum,  FRM 
fouler,  F3Lror  F3LR 
fountain,  FntX 
four,  4 

fowler,  F3Lr  or  F3LR 
Franklin,  Fr3Kln 
frantical,  Frt3Kl 
fraud,  Frt3 
fraudulent,  FrtJLnt 
fraternal,  FrtrL 
fraternity,   FrtrnT 
fraternize,  FrtrNs 
freedom,  Frt1  M 
freeheart,  FrUit 
Frelinghuysen,  FrLNgZn 
frequency,  FrKn 
frequent,  FrKnt 
freshen,  FrShN,  Frshn  or 

FrShn 

fresher,  FrShr 
freshet,  FrShT 
freshly,  FrShl 
Friday,  FrD 
friendly,  Frnt^L 


THE   PHOXo<;l;.U  UK'    MANUAL. 


friendship,  FrntSh 
frontispiece,  FrntsP 
fruition,    Fr3Shn   or 

Frshn3 

Fuente,  FwnT 
Fuerte,  FwRT 
fulfill,  F1F1 
fuller,  FIR 
fulsome,  FlsM 
fulsomely,  FlsML 
fumble,  FMpl 
function,  FNgshn 
functional,  FXgshnL 
functionary,  FNgshnR 
fundamental,  FntMntL 
furnish,  FrnSh 
furnisher,  FrnShR 
furniture,  FrNtr 
furthermore,  FrtrMr 
furtive,  FrTf 
furtively,  FrTVl 
fusil,  Fs3Z 
fusileer,  Fs3LR 
fusillade,  Fs3LD 
futurity,  Ftr3T 

G 

gag,  G3G 
gainsaid,  GnsD 
galaxy,  G1KS  or  GLKS 
gambit,  G3Mpt 
gamboge,  GMpJ 
gambol,  GMB1  or  GMpl 
garrulity,  GRlt 
garrulous,  GRls 
gaseous,  GSs3  or  Gss3 
•razette,  GsT 


Gehenna,  GN 
gendarme,  ZhtRM 
genteel,  JnTL 
gentile,  JnTL 
gentility,  JTlt 
gentle,  JtL  or  JntiL 
gentlemanly,  Jnt'.L 
gentleness,  JtLNs  or  Jnt- 

iLNs 

geography-ic-al,  JXG 
geographer,  JaGr 
geologer,  JUr 
geological,  JUKI 
geologist,  JUst 
geologize,  JUs 
geology,  J1J 
geometer,  JMtr 
geometrician,  JMtrshn 
geometry,  JMtR 
George-ia,  JrJ 
Georgian,  JrJn 
gerrymander,  JrMntR 
gesticulate,  JsTKlt 
gesture,  JsTr 
Gethsemane,  GTh*MN 
giraffe,  JRf 
Girard,  JRRD 
girder,  Grtr 
glimpse,  GPMps 
glorification,  GIFshn 
glorified,  GIFt 
glorify,  GIF 
governor,  GfR 
greater,  Grtr  or  GrtR 
Great  Britain,  Grt2Brt 
Greenwich,  GrnC 
grindstone,  GrntsTn 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


293 


gunsmith,  GnsMTH 
gunwale,  GnL 

H 

habeas    corpus,    BsK     or 

BsKPa 
habit,  Bt3 
habitant,  B3Tnt 
habitual,  Bt3L 
hacienda,  ThND 
halfway,  F3W 
halt,  hLt1 
halter,  hLtr1 
halyard,  hlYrt 
Hamlet,  hMLt3 
hamper,  Mpr3 
Hampton,  hMptN 
handle,  NtZ3 
handsome,  Nt3sM 
handwriting,      NtRt3      or 

Nrt3 

handy,  ND3 
hang,  Ng3 
hanger,  Ngr3 
hanger-on,  Ngrn3 
hanker,  Ng3Kr 
hap,  P3 
haphazard,  P3ZRc   or  P3- 

sRt 

hapless,  P3Ls 
haply,  P3L 
happier,  P3R 
happily,  P3L 
happiness,  P3N& 
harangue,  hR3N<.; 
harbinger,  hRBnJR 
harbor,  hRBr  or  RBr 


hard,  hRt3 

harder,  hRtr3 

hardware,  hRt3?/'R 

harlequin,  hRLKn 

Harold,  ARlt3  or  hR3Lt 

harm,  hR3M 

harp,  hR3P 

harpsichord,  hR3PsKrt 

hart,  hRt3 

Hartford,  hRtFrt 

hasp,  hS3P 

hast,  hSt3 

haste,  hSt 

hasten,  hSn 

hateful,  ATF1  or  ATf 

hautboy,  AoB1 

haw,  HO 

Hawaii,  hW'orhWl1 

hawing,  HO- 

hawings,  no0 

haw-haw,    HO'.  HO 

hawthorn,  hThn^or  ATH- 

Rn 

Hay  wood,  h  Tft3 
hazard,  Z3Rt 
hazardous,  Z3RDs 
head,  AD 
hear-re,  hR1 
hearer,  hR!R 
heart,  hRt3 
hearth,  hR3Th 
heather-y,  hDhr 
heaver,  AV1^ 
heavier,  AV7? 
heighho,  HIHO 
heinous,  ANs 
heinously,  ANsZ 


294 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


heinousness,  ANsNs 
held,  hLt 
heliogram,  hL^fG 
heliograph- y-ic-al,    hL'G 
heliographer,  hl/Gr 
heliographist,  hl/Gst 
hemisphere,  hMsFr 
hen,  AN 

henceforth,  NsFRTH 
henceforward,  NsFwRt 
Henry,  Nr  or  hNr 
herald,  ARlt  or  hRLt 
heraldic,     ARltK  or    hR- 

Lt<K 
heraldry,  hRltiR    or   hR- 

LtR 

here,  hR1 
hereabout,  bJR^Bt 
hereafter,  hR'Ft 
hereat,  hRt1 
hereby,  hR1^ 
herein,  hRaN 
hereinafter,  hRaNFt 
hereinbefore, 
hereinto, 
hereof,  hRf1  or 
hereon,  hRn1 
hereto,  hR1T 
heretofore, 
hereunto, 
hereupon,  hR^n 
herewith,  hRaDh 
heritage,  hRtJ 
Hesoid,  hS^ 
hesitate,  ZTt 
hesitancy,  ZTnS 
hew,  nY3  (See  whey.) 


hewed,  nTt3  (See  white.) 

hewer,  nY3R  (See  weigh- 
er.) 

Hewitt,  HY-T3 

hewn,  nYn3  (See  whine.) 

hey-day,  AaD 

hiatus,  />aTs 

Hiawatha,  hW'Th 

hied,  Hl-D1 

hieroglyph,  hRGlf 

hies,  His1 

high-born,  m-BRn 

high-bred,  Hl-Brt 

highland,  hLnt1  or  m- 
Lnt1 

Highlander,  hLnt'R  or  Hl- 
LntJR 

hight,  AT1 

highten,  ATn1 

hightened,  ATnt1 

highwayman,  m-WMn 

highwaymen,  Hl-W1Mn 

high  wrought,  Hi-Rt1 

Hillerman,  ALrJMn  or 
Lr^Mn 

hindmost,  Nt1Mst 

Hines,  ANs1 

history,  StJR 

historian,  StaRn 

hither,  Dhr1 

hitherto,  Dhr'T 

hither  ward,  DhrJRt 

hive,  AV1 

hoed,  AD  or  HoD 

hoeing,  HO -or  ANg 

hoes,  HOS  or  hZ 

hoho,  HoiHO 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


295 


hold,  hLt 
holder,  hLtr 
Holland,  hLnt1 
holster,  hLstr 
holy,  hL 
home,  hM 
homely,  hML 
homemade,  hMMt 
homeopathy,  MpTh 
Homer,  Mi- 
Homeric,  MrK 
homesick,  hMsK 
homespun,  hM2sPn 
homestead,  hM2sTt 
homeward,  hM/'-Rt 
homicide,   Ms  I) 
honestly,  NstJL  or  NsJZ 
hone,  AN 
hong,  7/Ng1 
Honolulu,  NLL 
honorable-y,  NrBl1 
honorary,  NrR1 
hoodwink,  AD3WNgK 
hopefulness,  Pf3Ns 
Horace,  hRs1 
horal,  hRL  or  AH1 
horary,  hRR 
horde,  hRt 

horologe-y,  hRLJ  or  AR1J 
hospitable,  SPtBl 
hospital,  SPtL 
hospitality,  SPtLT 
host,  hSt 
hostile-ly,  St1!^ 
hostility,  St'LT 
house,  hS3or  S3 
household,  hS3Lt  or  S3Lt 


householder,     hS3Ltr    or 

S3Ltr 
housekeeper,    hS3KPr    or 

S3KPr 

houses,  hZs3  or  Zs3 
Howard,  hRt3 
howbeit,  AB3T 
Howe,  HoiZ 

Howes,  (pi.  of  Howe),  Ho?7s 
Howel,  hL3 
howitzer,  ATsR 
hows,  (pi.  of  how),  Ho>7Z:i 
howsoever,  A3sVorno^sV 
hoy,  HOI 

Hoyer,  ky~Rl  or  H^/R1 
Hubert,  HYBrt  or  er-Brt3 

(See  huge.) 
hue,  H¥S  (See  hew. ) 
hued,   nTt3   (See  hewed.) 
huff-y,  AF 
huffish,  7<F£A 
huffishly 
huffishness, 
huge,  nY3J  or   HY-J3CSee 

Whedge. ) 
hugely,  nY3Jl  or  HY-J3L 

(See  Whedge.) 
Hugh,  hY3 
huh,  HU 

human,  Mn3  or  nY3Mn 
humanity,  nY3Mnt 
humane,  nYMn 
humanely,  nYMnL 
humanize,   M3Xs  or  nY;- 

MXs 
Hume,  HY3M  (Sec  \vhiin.; 


296 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


humid,   HY3Mt  or   r-Mt3 

(See  huge.) 
humidity,       nY3'.Mt      or 

r-MtT3  (See  huge.) 
humiliate,     nY3MLt      or 

r-MLt3  (See  huge.) 
humiliation,     HY3MLShn 

or       F-MLShn3     (See 

huge.) 
humility,      nY3MLt       or 

r-MLT3  (See  huge.) 
humpback,  hMpBK 
Hun,  N,  AN  or  nu-N 
hundred-weight,  NtWt 
hung,  Ng, 

Hungarian,  Ngrn  or  NgRn 
Hungary,  Ngr  or  NgR 
hunt,  Nt 
hunter,  Ntr 

huntress,  NtRs  or  NTrs 
huntsman,  NtsMn 
Huron,    nYRn  or   m/Rn3 

(See  Wharren.) 
hurl,  HRL 
hurricane,  h'RKn 
hussar,  hZ3R 
hustings,  hStNgs 
hustle,   hSL 
hustler,  hSLR 
hyacinth,  SnTh 
hyacinthine,  SnThn 
hying,    (see  hie),    Hi-1    or 

ANg1 

hypothecate,  FThKt 
hypothecation,   PThKshn 


LESSON  36. 


icicle,  I-S'Kl 
Idaho,  I-D1 
Idahoan,  1-Dn1 
identical,  DtaKl 
idlest,  Dlst1 
idolatry,  DPTr 
ignorant,  GJNrnt 
illegible,   L 
illegitimate, 
illiberal,  L'BrL 
Illinoi  LJN 
Illinoian,  L]Nn 
Illinois,  LaNs 
Illinoisan,  LJNsN 
imbecile,  MBsL 
imbue,  Mp3 
imitate,  MTt1 
imitation,  MTshn 
imitative,  MTTf 
imitator,  MTtr 
immeasurable,  MZhi^Bl 
immigrant,  IVPGrnt 
immigrate,  iM1Grt 
immobile,  MB11 
immobility,  MBit1 
impact,  Mp3Kt 
impair,  MpR 
impale,  MpL 
impanel,  MpNl 
impart,  Mprt3 
imparter,  Mprtr3 
impartial,  MPrShl 
impassion,  Mpshn3 
impeach,  MpC1 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


297 


impede,  Mpt1 
irnpeder,  Mptr1 
impediment,  MptMnt 
impel,  MpL 
impend,  Mpnt 
impenetrability,  MpntRBlt 

or  Mpnt 
impenetrable,  MpntRBl  or 

Mpnt 

impenetrableness,  MpntR- 
Bl ns  or  Mpnt 
imperative,  MprtV 
imperatively,  MprtVl 
imperatorial ,  Mprtr '  L 
imperatorian,  Mprtr  'N 
imperfect-ion,  MPrf1 
imperial,  Mpi!lL 
imperialism,  MprJLsM 
imperialist,  Mpr'Lst 
imperious,  Mpr'S 
imperiously,   Mpr 1 S  L 
imperil,  MpRl 
impersonal,  MPrsNl 
imperturbation,       MPrtr- 

Bshn 
imperturbability,    MPrtr- 

Bt 

imperturbable,  MPrtrB 
impetus-ous,  MpTs 
imponderability,     MpNtr- 

Blt 

imponderable,  MpNtrBl 
imponderableness,  MpNtr- 

Blns 

i ni ponderous,  Mp '  Mrs 
imponderousness,       Mp1- 

NtrsNs 


import,  Mprt1 
importer,  Mprtr1 
importune,  MpRtN 
impose,  Mps 
impost,  Mpst 
imposter,  Mpstr1 
imposture,  MpsTr 
impound,  Mpnt3 
impracticable,  MPrK 
impractical,   MPr3 
impregnable-ate-ion,      M- 

PrG 

improbable,  MPrB 
impugn,  Mpn3 
impulse,  MpLs 
impunity,  MpnT3  or  Mi- 

Pnt 

imputation,  MpTshn 
inalienable,  NLnB 
inarticulate,     NrTKlt    or 

NRTKlt 
inartificial,     NrtFxSAl     or 

NRtF^Al 
inasmuch,  NsC3 
incandescent,  N'DsNt 
incanescent,  NKNsNt 
incantation,  N'Tshn 
incapable,  NKB1 
incentive,  NsNtV 
inception,  NsPshn 
inceptor,  NsPtr 
incident-al,  NsDnt 
incessant,  NssNt 
income,  N1K  or  NJKM 
inconsistence,  NssTns1 
inconsistencies,  NssTnss 
inconsistency,  NssTn1 


298 


THE   PHOXOtiKAPHIC    MAXTAI.. 


inconsistent-ly    NssTnt1 
indeed,  NDt1 
indefatigable,  NtFt1 
indenture,  NtNtr 
independency,    NtPiD  or 

NtPniD 

indescribable,  NtsKBl 
index,  Nt*Ks 
India,  NDJ 
Indian,  Nt'N 
Indiana,  NtJN 
Indianan,  NtJNn 
Indianapolis,  N^NPls 
Indian   Territory,     Nt*N- 

TEt 

indication,  NtJKshn 
indict,  NtT1 
indictable,  NtT'Bl 
indictment,  NtT1  Mnt 
indifference-ent-ly,  NDf 
indigent,  NtJnt1 
indignant^ly-ty,  Nt*G 
indignation,  ISVGshn 
individuality,    NtVLT  or 

NtMVt 

indivisible,  NtVsBl 
induce,  NDs 
induction,  NDKshn 
indulge,  NtZJ 
indulged,  NtZJt 
indulgence,  NtZJns 
indulgency,  NtZ'.J 
indulgent-ly,  NtZJnt 
indulger,  NtZJr 
inefficacious-ly-ness,    NF- 

KaShs 
inefficient-ly,   NFshnt1 


inelastic,  NlsK  or  XlsTK 
inelasticity,  NlsTst 
infant,  NFnt 

infectious-ly-ness,IS"FK8hs 
infer,  NF^ 
inferable,  NFRB1 
inference,  NFRns 
inferences,  NFRnss 
inferential,  NFRn 
inferior,  NFRR 
infernal,  NFrXl 
intinite-ly,       XFnt1         or 


infinitude,  NFn'Tt' 
infinity,  KFnt1  or  X^Fnl 
infinitessimal,  NFn'TsM 
inform,  NF1 
informal,  NF'Ml 
informality,  NF'Mlt 
informer,  NFJMr 
ingle,  Ngl1 
inhabit,  NBt! 
inhabitant,   NB3Tnt 
inhale,  NhL 
inhere,  NhR1 
inherent,  NhRnt1 
inherently,  NhRnt1  L 
inherit,  NrT  or  NhRT 
inhibit,  NBt1 
iniquitous,  NKwTs 
iniquity,  NKwT 
initial,  N^/il 
injunction,   NJNgshn 
injure-y,  NJr 
ink-y,  Ng!K    v 
I  nk  e  r  man  ,  Nir  1  K  rMn 
inkle,  NgJKl 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


299 


inlace,  Nls  or  NLs 
inlaid,  Nit  or  NLt 
inland,  Nlnt  or  NLnt 
inlander,  NlntRorNLntR 
inlay,  Nl  or  NL 
inlayer,  Nlr  or  NLR 
inlet,  Nit  or  NLt 
inly,  NZ1 

innermost,  iNi^Mst 
inning,  NJNg 
innovation,  NVshn1 
innumerable,   NMrBl1 
inordinate,  Nrt*Nt 
inquire-y,  NJKw 
inroad,  NrD  or  NRt 
insatiability,  nsShBt 
insatiable,  nsShB 
insatiableness,  nsShBns 
insecurity,  nsKrT3 
inseparable,   nsPr3Bl 
insignificance,  N*sGns 
insignificant,  N*sG 
insist,  NssT1 
insistence,  NssTns1 
insistent,  NssTnt1 
insnare,  NsNR1 
inspect,  NsPKt 
inspection,    NsPKshn    or 

NsPshn 
inspector,  NsPKtr  or  Ns- 

Ptr 

inspiration,  nsPrshn1 
inspire,  nsPr1 
inst.  (for  instant),  Nst1 
instant,  NsTnt 
instantly,    NsTtL,    NsTnt 

or  NsTntiL 


instead,  NsTt 
instinct-ive-ly,  NsTNg 
institute,  NsTt1 
institution,  NsTshn1 
institutive,  NsT»Tf 
institutor,  NsT'Ttr 
instrument,  nsTrMnt 
instrumental,  nsTrMntL 
instrumentality,  nsTriMnt 
insubordinate,  NsB1 
insubordination,  NsBshn1 
insufferable,  nsFrBl 
insufficiency,  NsFshnS 
insufficient-ly,  NsFshnt 
insuperable,  nsPrBl 
insurance,  NShrns 
insure,  NShr 
insurrection,  NsRshn 
intangible-ness,  NTnJ 
integrity,  NtGrT 
intellectuality,  NtZ1  LT  or 

NtZ^Tlt 
intend-t,  NtNt 
intention,  NtNshn 
intercede,  NtsD 
intercept-eel,  NtsPt 
intercession,  NtssA?& 
intercessor,  NtSsR 
interfere,  NtF,ff 
interference,  NtFRns 
interim,  Ntr1M 
intermit,  NtMMt 
intermittent,  NtMMTnt 
intermission,  Nt1tMshn 
inter-ocean,  Ntrshn1 
inter-oceanic,  Ntrshn1  K 
;ntern-e,  Ntrn1 


300 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


interplead,  NtPlt 
interpleader,  NtPltr 
interpolate,  NtPLt 
interpret,  NtPrt 
interpreter,  NtPrtr 
interrogate-ory,  NtGt 
interrogation,  NtGshn 
interrogative,  NtGtV 
interrogatively,  NtGtVl 
interrogator,  NtGtr 
inter-state,  NtistT 
intertwine,  NttTwn1 
intervene,  NtVn 
interview,  NtV3 
intestate,  NTsTt 
intimate,  NtJMt 
intimation,  Nt1Mshn 
intimidate-ion,  NT1Mt 
into,  NT 
intolerable,      NtLrBl     or 

NT1RB1 

intolerance,  NtLrns 
intolerant,  JSTtLrnt 
intoleration,  NtLrshn 
intrench,  NTrnC 
intrepid,   NTrPt  or  NtrPt 
intrepidity,      NTr'.Pt     or 

NtriPt 

intricate,  Ntr*Kt 
intrigue,  Ntr*G 
intriguer,  Ntr1Gr 
intrinsic,        Ntrs1K        or 

NTraK 
intrinsical,    NTrs^l     or 

NTrsKl 

introduce,  NtDs 
introduction,  KtDshn 


introspection,     NtsPKshn 

or  NtsPshn 
introvert,  NtVrt 
intuition,  NTshn 
intuitional,  NTshnL 
intuitive,  NTTf 
intuitively,  NTTV1 
intwine,   NTwn1 
inutile,   N-Y-T3L 
invasion,  NVshn 
investigate,  NVsGt 
investigator,  NA'sGtr 
investment,       NVsT      or 

NVstiMnt 

involuntary,  XVlntR 
involve,  NV1 
Iowa,  l-W1 
lowan,  l-AVn1 
Ipswich,  PswC 
irascible,  Rs'B  or  RRsB 
Iroquoi,  RxKw 
Iroquois,  R^ws 
Irrawaddy,  RJwD 
irrecoverable,  RJKf 
irrespective,  R^Pf 
irrespectively,  RJsPVl 
irresponsible,   R^PnsB 
Irvington,  RVNgt 
Irwin,  RWn 
island,  i-Lnt1 
islet,  i-Lt1 
Israel,  ZRL 
Israelite-ic-ist,  ZRLt 
issuable,  Sh3B 
isthmus,  SMs 
Italian,  TLn 
Italy,  TJL 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


301 


iterate,  T'Rt 

itinerancy,  TNrS,    TNrnS 

or  TNrNS 
itinerant,  TNrnt 
luka,  Y3K 
Ivanhoe,  V'N 
izzard,  ZJRt 

J. 

jaguar,  JGwR 
jail,  JL 
jailor,  JLR 
janizary,  JNsR 
January,  J3N 
Japheth,  JfTh 
jasper,  JsPr 
Jefferson,    JFrsN   or    Jf- 

RsN 

Jeffries,  JFrs  or  Jf Rs 
Jehovah,  JV 
Jehu,   J1  (See   bohea  and 

boa.) 

jeremiad,  JrMt 
Jericho,  JrK 
Jesus  Christ,  JK  or  JssK 
jingo,  JaNg 
jointly,  JntML 
journalism,    JrNlsM      or 

JrsM 

journalist,  JrNlst 
journalistic,  JrNlsK 
Jouthet,  J3Tht 
joyf illness,  Jf^s 
joyous,  JaS(See  religious. ) 
joyously,  J1SL 
joyousness,  J1SNs 
judge,  JJ 


j  udicatory-ture,  JtKtr 

judicial,  JtShl  or  JtShl 

judiciary,  JtShr 

judicious,   JtShs 

July,  J!L 

jumble,   JMpl 

jumper,  JMpr 

junction,  JNgshn 

June,  Jn3 

jungle,  JNgl 

junior,  JNr 

junk,  JNgK 

jurat,  Jrt3 

jurisprudence,  Jrs3P 

juror,  Jr3R 

jury  box,  Jr3BKs  or  Jr3- 

Ks 

juryman,  Jr3Mn 
jury  mast,  Jr3Mst 
jurymen,  Jrn3 
jury-room,   Jr3RM  or  Jr- 

3M 

just,  Jst 
justice,  JsTs 
justification,    Jsshn  or  Js- 

Fshn 

justify,  JsF 
justly,  JsL 
juxtaposition,  JKsPss/m 

K 

kaiser,  KsR 
Kanawha,  KNW 
Kamchatka,  -Ct3K 
Kan-Choo,  -C3 
Kandhar,  -Dr3 
Kandiyohe,  -DY 


302 


TI1K    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXl'AL. 


Kaukakce,  -K3K 
Kankaree,  -KR3 
kangaroo,  -GR3 
Kansakee,  -sK 
Kansan,  -Zn3 
Kansas,   -Zs3 
Kan-Soo,   -S3 
Kehoe,  K  or  K-eno 
Kemble,  -Bl 
Kendall,    -Dl 
Kendrick,   -DrK 
Kennebeck,  -XBK 
Kennedy,  -XD 
kennel,    -XI 
Kenosha,  KXSh 
Kensett,  -sT 
Kensington,   -sXgt 
Kentuckian,  -TKn 
Kentucky,  -TK 
Kenwyn,   -Wn 
Kenyon,  -Yn 
kettle,  KtL 
keyhole,  IOL 
key-weight,  KJWt 
kilderkin,  Kltr^n 
Kimball,   -Bl1 
kimbo,  -B1 
kindle,  -Dl1 

kindergarden,  -DrGrtX 
kinetic,  KNtK 
king,  K'Xg 
kingly,  K»Ngl 
king-post,  KXgPst1 
kingship,  KX^gSh1 
Kingston,  KXgsTn1 
kink,  K'XgK 
Kinross,  -Rs1 


Kioway,  K1  \V 
knew,   XFtoid 
Kong,  K'Ng 
Kun-Hegyes  (Knn-Hed- 
yesh),  -ADSh      . 


laboratory,  LBrtR 
ladle,   LtL  or  LD1 
lamentable,  LMntB 
lampoon,  LMpn 
lampooned,  LMpnt 
lamprey,  LMPr 
lance,  Lns3 
lanced,  L3Nst 
lanceolate,  Lns3Lt 
lancer,  Lns3R 
lancet,   Lns3T 
land,  Lnt3 
landholder,  Lnt3Ltr 
landlord,  Lnt3Lt 
landsman,  Lnts3Mn 
landsmen,  Lnts^In 
Langdon,    LX'gtX^ 
languish,  L3XgSh 
lantern,  LXtrn 
Laramie,  LrM  or  LRM 
larboard,  LrBrt 
larceny,  Lrs3X" 
larch,  "Lr3C 
lard,  Lrt3 
larder,  Lrtr3 
largeness,  J3Ns 
largess,  LrJs 
lariat,  LRT  or  LRt 
larkr  LrK 
larrup,  LRP 


THE    PlION'OGRAI'llIC    MAXl'Af,. 


303 


larvae,  Lr'!V 
laryngeal,  LrnJL 
laryngitis,  LrnJTs 
laryngoscope,  LrNgsKP 
larynx,  LrXgKs 
lash,  L3Sh 
lashed,  L3Sht 
lastly,  Ls3L 
laundry,  LntJR 
laurel,  LR1 
lavendar,  LVNtr 
lavish,  LVSh 
lavished,  LVSht 
lavishly,  LV#/d 
lavishment,  LNShMnt 
lavishness,  LV/S'ANs 
Lawler.  LLr 
lawyer,   LJR  or  LJ//R 
learner,  LrnR 
leash,  LJSh 
leashed,  L^ht 
lecture,  LKtr 
leer,  Lr1 
leeward,  L^/jRt 
leeway,   L^W 
legendary,  LJtR 
Leghorn,  LGRn 
legible,  LJB1 
legislator,  LJR 
legitimate,  LJtMt 
Lehigh,  L1 
lene,  LJN 
lengthways,     NgThws    or 

NgThs 
lengthwise,  NgThws1  or 

NgThs1 
lesion,  Lshn1 


lessee,  LJS 
lesser,  LsR 
lesson,  LsN 
Lexington,  LKsNgt 
liar,  L^ 
liberal,  LBrL 
lieutenancy,  LTnNS 
lieutenant,  LTnNt 
like,  L^ 
likely,  L^l 
likewise,  L }  Kws  or  L J  Ks 
Lincoln,    LNgKn  or  Ln1 
limpet,  L1Mpt 
limpid,  L1Mpt 
liner,  LnaR 
lingo,  LJNg 
linguist,  LNgst 
linguistic,  LNgsK 
linguistical,  LNgsKl 
listen,  LsJN 
litho,  LJTh 

1  ithograph-y-ic-al,  L 1 TLG 
lithographer,  LirThGr 
lithographist,  L^fhGst 
little,  LtJL 
load,  Lt 
local,  LK1 
Lockhart,  LKRt 
locomobe,  LKMp 
locomobile,  LKMpl 
logograph,  L]GG 
London,  LntN 
longboat,  Ng^t 
longevity,  LnJft 
longitude-inal,  LnJt 
longsighted,  N 
looker-on,  L3Krn 


304 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


lordly,  Lrt'L 
lore,  Lr 
Lorenzo,  LrnZ 
lottery,  LtJR 
Louisiana,  LZN 
Louisianan,   LZNn 
lower,  LR 
lowest,  Lst 
Lucifer,  LsFr 
luckily,  LKL 
lumbago,  LMpG 
lumber,  LMpr 
lump-y  LMp 
lumped,  LMpt 
lumpiest,  LMpst 
lurch,  LrC 
lure,  Lr3 
lured,  Lrt3 
lurid,  L3Rt 
lurk,  LrK 
Lutheran,  Ltr3N 
luthern,  Ltrn3 
lyre,  Lr1 
lyric,  LraK 
lyrical,  Lr'Kl 

LESSON  37. 

M 

M.  (for  monsieur),  M1 
Mab,  Mp3  or  MB3 
Mable,  MB1 
Mabley,  MB1 
Macaulay,  MKL 
machinist,  MShst 
madam,  Mt3M 
madden,  Mt3N 


mademoiselle,  M3MsL 
Madison,  MtsN 
madonna,  MDN 
magisterial,  MJsRl 
magistracy,  MJsS 
magistral,  MJsTrL 
magistrate,  MJ 
Magna  Charta,  MiKr 
magnanimous-ly-ity,  M3G 

(or  as  in  eng.  302.) 
magnate,  MGNt 
magnese,  M]GNs 
magnesia,  MGNZh 
magnesian,  MGNZhn 
magnesite,  MGNsT 
magnesium,  MGNZbM 
magnet-ic-al,  MGnt 
magnets-ise,  MGnts 
magnetized,  MGntst 
magnetism,  MGntsM 
magnificent-ly-ce,  M*G  (or 

as  in  eng.  302.) 
magnifier,  MiF1^ 
magnify,  MiF1 
magnolia,  MGN1 
magniloquence,  M'.LKwns 
magniloquent,  M'LKwnt 
magniloquently .  Mi  LKwnt- 

L 

magnitude,  MiTt 
Magnus,  MGNs 
magnum,  MGNM 
maguey,  MGw 
mahogany,  MGN 
Mahomet,  MJMt 
Mahoney,  MN 
mail,  ML 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


305 


Maine,  Mn 
Mainer,  MnR 
maintain,  MnTn 
maintenance,     MnTns     or 

MnTnNs 
majesty,  MJ3 
majestic,  MJs3K 
majestical,  MJs3Kl 
majority,  MJrt 
male,  ML 
malicious,  MLSh 
malignancy,  MPG'N 
malignant-ly,  Ml'G 
malignity,  Ml'GT 
Manhattan,  MnTn3 
manhood,  MnD 
manlike,  MnLKor  MntLk 
manly,  MnL  or  Mn'L 
mannerly,  Nr8Z 
mansion,  MNshn 
manslaughter,  MsLtr3 
manufactory,  MnF 
manufactural,  MnFZ 
manufacture,  MNF 
manufacturer,  MNF7? 
manuscript,  MsKPt  orM- 

NsKPt 
map,  Mp3 
mapach,  MpC3 
maple,  MP1 
mapped,  Mpt3 
mappery,  Mp3R 
maraud,  MRt1 
March,  MrC 
marcher,  MrCr 
marchioness,  MrShNs 
marge,  MrJ 


margin,  MrJn 
maritime,  MrtM 
mark,  Mr3K 

markee,  Mr3K  or  Mr3K-e 
marker,  Mr3Kr 
market,  MrKtor  MrJKt 
marketer,  MrKtr  or  Mr1- 

Ktr 

marque,  Mr3K 
marquee, Mr 3K or  Mr3K-G 
married,  MR3D 
marsh-y,  MrSh 
marshal,  Mrshl 
mart,  MRt3 
mart3rr,  Mrtr3 
martyrdom,  MrtrD3M 
martyrize,  Mrtrs3 
Maryland,  MRlnt 
Mary  lander,  MRlnt  R 
mash,  MSh 
mashed,  MSht3 
Massachusetts,  MC3 
Massachusettsan,  MsCn3 
master,  Mstr3 
mater,  Mtr 
maternal,  MtrnL 
maternity,  MtrnT 
mathematical,  MfThL 
mathematician,  MfThshn 
mathematics,  MfThs 
matin,  M3Tn 
matinee,  MtN 
matron,  Mtrn 
matronage,  MtrnJ 
matronal,  MtrNl 
matron! xe,  MtrNs 
maturity,  MtR3T 


306 


TIIK    J'HOXOUIJAPIllr    MANUAL. 


maxim-a,   Ms3M 
maximum,  Ms3 MM 
May,  M 
mayhem,  MM 
may  hew,  M3 
Mayo,  M 

Mclntyre,  MKNtr 
meander,  M'Xtr 
meantime,  MnT1 
meanwhile,  MnwL1 
measureable-y,    Zhr3B 
measurer,  Zhr3R 
measurement,  Zhr3Mnt 
mechanic,  M3K 
mechanical,  M3K1 
mechanics,  M3Ks 
mechanism,  M3KnsM 
medal,  MtL 
meddle,  MtL 
median,  MDn1 
medicine,  MtsN 
meditate,  MtT 
meditation,  MtTshn 
Mediterranean,  MtTrnN 
medium,  MtJM 
melancholy,  M1KI  or  Ml- 

NK1 

membership,  Br'.Sh 
memento,  MMnT 
memorable,  MMB1 
memoranda,  MMD 
memorandum,  MMM 
memorial  MMR1 
memorize,  MMRs 
memorized,  MMRst 
memory,  MM 
mender,  MNtr 


menhir,  MnK 
mention,  MXshn 
mentionable,  MNshnB 
mentioned,  MX.shnt 
Mentor,  MNtr 
mercantile,    MrKntL     or 

MrKtL 
merchandixe,     MrCts     or 

MrCtZ 

merchant,  MrCnt 
merchantable,  MrCtBl 
merchantman,  MrCtMn 
merchantmen,  MrCt'.Mn 
mercifulness,  Mr:Fs 
merciless,  MrsLs 
merge,  MrJ 
merger,  MrJr 
merograj)h,  MrGrf 
mesh,  MSh 
meshed,  MSht 
Mess,    (for  Messrs. ),    Ms- 

or  MSh 

messenger,  MsJr 
Messiah,'  MS1 
messieurs,  MsRs1  or  MSh1 - 

Rs 

Messrs.,   MsRs  or  MShrs 
metal,  MtL 
meteor,  Mtr1 
meteoric,  Mtr1K 
meteorite,  MtrT1 
meteorolite,  MtrLt1 
meteorological,  MtrJ'Kl 
meteorologist,  MtrJst1 
meteorology,  MtrJ1 
methinks,  MThs1 
method-ic,  MTht 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


307 


methodical,  MThtKl 
Methodism,    MsM     or 

MThteM 

Methodist,  MThtst 
methodistic,  MThtsK 
methodistical,  MThtsKl 
methought,  MTht1 
Methuseleh,  MTh.vL 
metropolis,  MtrPls 
metropolitan,  MtrPlTn 
Mexican,  MsKn 
Mexico,  MsK 
Michigan,  MSh1 
Michiganer,  MShJR 
microscope-ic, 
microscopical,  M l  KrsKl 
midday,  Mt1!) 
middle,  Mt'L 
midnight,  Mt^Nt 
mighty,  MT1 
mignonette,  MnNT 
migrate,  M'Grt 
mile,  ML1 
mileage,  ML'J 
milch,  MIC 
military,  MLtR 
militia,  MLSh 
mill,  ML1  (or  M1  after  a 

figure. ) 

miller,  MLr1  or  ML'R 
millionaire,  MPR 
Milwaukee,  MLWK 
minaret,  MNRt 
mincer,  MNsR1 
minim,  Mn*M 
minima,  M'NM 
minimum,  Mn*MM 


minion,  MnN 
minister,  M'Nstr 
ministerial,  MaNsRL 
ministral,  M]NsRl 
ministrant,  MJNsRnt 
ministration, 
ministry,  M]NsR 
Minnehaha,  M3N 
Minnesota,  MNsT 
Minnesotan,  MNsTn 
minority,  M*Nrt 
minister,  M1Nstr 
minstrel,  MnsTrL 
minstrelsy,    MnsTrLS 
minuet,  MNT 
minute,  MnT 
minute,  (adj.),  MNT 
minutely,  MNTL 
minuteness,  MNTNs 
minuter,  MNtr 
minutest,  MNTst 
misdemeanor,  MsD 
misfortune,    MsFrt'N    or 

MsFrt1 
mishap,  MsP3 
Miss,  Ms1 
Misses,  Mss1 
missionary,  MshnJR 
Mississippi,  MssP 
Mississippian,  MssPn 
Missouri,  MsR 
Missourian,  MsRn        i 
mistake,  MsK 
mistaken,  MsKn 
mister,  Mstr1  (See  Mr.) 
mistook,  Ms3K 
mistress,  MsTrs  (See  Mrs. ) 


308 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


mitten,  Mt'N 
mittened,  Mt*Nt 
mixture,  JV^Kstr 
mob,  Mp1  or  MB1 
mobber,  Mp*R  or  MBr1 
Mobile,  MB1 
mobilization,  MBlssAn, 
mobilize,  MBls 
moderation,  Mtrshn1 
modern,  Mtrn1 
modest,  Mtst1 
modestly,  MtsL1 
modesty,  MtsT1 
modicum,  Mt*KM 
modification,  MtF'Kshn 
modifier,  MtF'T? 
modify,  MtF1 
mohair,  MR 
Mohammed,  MMt 
Mohammedan,  MMDn 
Mohammedanism,  MMDs- 

M 

Mohamrnedism,  MMtsM 
Mohawk,  M'K 
Mohegan,  M'Gn 
Mohican,  M*Kn 
Moho,  M 

monasterial,  MNsTRl 
monastery,  MNsTR 
monastic,  MNsTK 
monastical,  MNsTKl 
monasticism,  MNsTssM 
Monday,  MnD 
Monheimer,  MnMR 
monitor,  M'Ntr 
monitress,  M'XTrs 
monody,  MND 


Monon,  MnN 
Monongahela,  M'nXGl 
monopoly,  MnPL 
monosyllabic,  MX.yBK 
monosyllable,  MX.--LBI 
Monseigneur,  MyR1 
Monsieur,    MsR1    or    MS 

(SeeM.) 
monster,  MnsTr 
monstrosity,  MnsTrst 
monstrous,  MnsTrs 
monstrously,  MnsTr.sL 
Montana,  Mnt'N 
Montanan,  Mnt'Nn 
month,  MTh  or  MNTh 
monthly,    MThL  or  MN- 

ThL 

Montmorency,  MntMiR 
monumental,  MnMntL 
mop,  Mp1 
mope,  Mp 

Moplah,  MpL1  or  MP11 
moppet,  MpT1 
mopsey,  MpS1 
Mormon,  Mi^Mn 
Mormonism,  MrJMsM 
morn,  Mrn1 
morning,  MrnaXg 
morning-star,    Mrn '  X^gstr 
morning-stars,  M  rn 1  - 

Xgstrs 

morphine,  MRFn 
mortgagee,  MrGJ1 
mortgage r-or  MrGJr1 
mortification,  MrtFshn 
mortify,  MrtF 
mother-in-law,  MtrnL 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


309 


mountain,  Mnt3N 
mountaineer,  Mnt3NR 
mountebank,  MntB3Ng 
move,  MY3 
Mr.  (for  mister),  Mr1 
Mrs.  (for  Mistress),  MsS 
mulberry,  MlBr  or  ML- 

BR 

Mulholland,  MLLnt 
mullion,  MLn 
multiply,  MltPl 
multitude,  MltTt 
mump,  MMp 
mumper,  MMpr 
mundane,  MnDn 
mural,  MR1, 
murder,  Mrtr 
murderer,  MrtrR 
murderess,  MrtrS 
murderous,  Mrtrs 
murderously,  MrtrsL 
musical,  MsKl 
mustache,  JVIsSh3 
mutual,  MtL3 
mutuality,  MtL3T 
myrmidon,  MrMDn 
mystic,  Ms*K 
mystical,  M.^Kl 
mysticism,  Mss*M 
mystification,  MsFshn1 
mystify,  MsF1 
mythology,  MThlJ 
mythological,  MThlJKl 

N 

nadir,  Ntr 
Nahant,  N3Nt 


nailer,  NLr 
Nancy,  NnS  or  NNS 
narcissus,  NrSss 
nard,  Nrt3 
nardine,  Nrt3N 
narrate,  NrT  or  NRt3 
narration,  Nrshn  or  N- 

Rshn3 

narrative,  NrTf  orNRt3Y 
narratively,  NrTYl    or  N- 

Rt3Vl 

narrator,  Nrtr  or  NRtr3 
narrow,  NR 
narrowly,  NR1 
nasality,  NsZt  or  NsLT 
natant,  NTnt 
natatory,  JS'TtR 
nautical,  KtJKl 
nautilus,  NT^s 
naval,  NY1 
navigate-d,  NVG 
navigator,  NVGtr 
nay,  N 

Nazarine,  NsRn 
nearly,  NrZ 
neatly,  NtZ,  NetZ  or 

N-etZ 

Nebraska,  N3B  or  NBrsK 
Nebraskan,  N3Bn  or 

NBrsKn 
necessary,  NssR 
necessarily,  NssRl 
necessity,  NssT 
needle,  NtZ1 
needless,  NtZs1 
needlessly,  NtZs'Z 
neglect,  NGl  or  NG1K 


310 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


neglecter,  NGltr 
neglectful,  NGlf 
negligence,  NGlns 
negligent,  NGlnt 
Nehemia,  NhM  or  NM 
neigh,  N 
Nelson,  NlsN 
Neptune,  NPTn 
Nero,  NR1 
nervously,  NrVsZ 
nettle,  NtZ 
neuralgia,  NR1J 
Nevada,  NVt3  or  NVD 
Nevadan,  NVt3N  or  N  VDn 
new,  NFtoid 
New  England,  N3Nglnt 
New  Englander,  N3Nglnt- 

R 

newer,  NR3 
newest,  Nst3 
newish,  NSh3 
New  Hampshire,  NMpShr 
New  Hampshiran,    NMp- 

Shrn 

New  Hartford,  NhRtFrt 
New  Haven,  NVn 
New  Jersey,  NJZ 
New  Jerseyan,  NJZn 
Newland,  NZnt  or  NLnt 
newly,  NZ3 
New  Mexican,  NMsKn 
New  Mexico,  NMsK 
newness,  N3Ns 
New  Orleans,   NRlns3   or 

NR3Lns 

news,  Ns3  or  N3ns 
newspaper,  NsP3Pr 


New  Testament,  NTsMnt 

or  Ntst3 

New  Year,  NyR1 
New  Years,  NyRs1 
New  York,  NyR 
New  York  City,  NyRsT 
New    Yorker,    NyRR    or 

NyRKr 

New  York  State,  N^Rst 
Niagara,  N3Gr 
Nicaragua,  NKrG  or  X 

KrGw 

nicety,    NsT1 
nicknacks,  NJKnKs 
nickname,  NKNM 
nigh,  N1 
nigher,  NR1 
nighest,  Nst1 
nightly,  NtZ1 
nihilism,  NhLs^l  or 

NPsM 

nihilist,  NhLst1  or  Nlst1 
nine,  9 
niter,  Ntr1 
nitrate,  NtrT1 
nitric,  Ntr*K 
noes,  Ns 
Noah,  N 
nobody,  NBt 
nocturne,  NKTRn 
nocturnal,  NKTRnL 
nod,  ND1 
node,  ND 
nohow,  N-Hcm 
noiseless,  NsZs 
noiselessly,  NsZsZ 
noisiness,  NZNs 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


311 


noisily,  NZL 
noisy,  NZ1 
noisome,  NsM 
Nolan,  NZn  or  NLn 
nomad,  NMt 
nomenclature,  NMKltr 
nonce,  Nns1 

nonconformist,  Nn  'FMst 
nonconformity,  Nn  <FMT 
nondescript,  Nn1  i  DsKPt 
none,  Nn 
nonentity,  NnNtT 
nonsense,  NnsNs 
nonsuit,  NNsT3 
no-one,  N2Wn 
Norman,  Nr1Mn 
north,  Nrrrh 
North  America,  NrMrK 
North  Carolina,  NrlKr 
North  Carolinan,  Ni-1Krn 
North  Dakota,  NrDKt 
North  Dakotan,NrDKtN 
northeast,  NrSt1 
northeaster,  NrStr1 
northeasterly,  NrSti^L 
northeastern,  NrStrn1 
northern,  Nrtrn1 
northerner,  NrtrnR1 
northstar,  NrThstr3 
northward,  Nm'Rt1 
northwest,  NrWst 
northwester,  NrWstr 
northwesterly,  NrWsRL 
northwestern,  NrWsRn 
Norway,  NrW 
Xorwepfian,  XrJn 
Norwich,  NrC 


nosology,  NvLJ 

nostril,  N-s-TrL 

nostrum,  N-s-Tr^I 

notable,  NtBl 

notarial,  NtRl 

notary,  NtR 

nothing,  NTh  or  NThNg 

notification,  NtFshn 

notify,  NtF 

November,  NV 

novitiate,  NVSht 

now,  NCtoid 

nowadays,  N2Das 

noway,  N2W 

nows  (pi.  of  now),  Ns3  or 


numerable,  NMrBl 
nutritive,  NTrTf 
nutritiveness,  NTrTfNs 
nutshell.  NtShl 

O 


objectionable,  BshnB 
objectively,  BfiL 
objectiveness,  BfNs 
objectivity,  BfT 
objectless,  BLs 
objector,  BiR 
oblong,  BINg 
obscure,  BsKr 
obscurity,  BsKrt 
observable,  BsRBl 
observableness,  BsRBlns 
observance,  BsRVns 
oksei'vanev,  BsR'.V 
ohservanda,  BsRVnD 


312 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


observanclum,  BsRVnDM 
observant-ly,  BsRVnt 
Observantine,  BsRVntX 
observation,  BsR 
observational,  BsRL 
observative,  BsRVt  or 

BsRVtV 

observator,  BsRVtr 
observatory,  BsRftR 
observe,  BsRf 
observer,  BsRfR 
observership,  BsRfRSh 
observingly,  BsRfNgZ 
obsolete,  Bs'Lt 
obstructive,  BsTrf 
obstructor,  BsTrtr 
O'Connell,   -XI1  or  o'Xl1 
O'Connor,  -Xr1  or  o'Xr1 
occupy,  P1,  KPi1  or 

KfP 

oceanic,  ShXK 
October,  KtBr 
octoroon,  KTRn 
ocular,  KLr1 
off,  F1 
officer,  FsR 
official,  F£A1 
officiate,  F'Sht 
officious,  ~FShs 
officiously,  F/ShsL 
officiousness,  FxS'AsXs 
oft,  Ft1 
oftener,  Fn'R 
oftenest,  Fn*St 
oftentimes,  FntJMs 
ofttimes,   Ft1  Ms 
O'Hara,  ohR3  or  hR3 


Ohio,  o  or  OKI 

Ohioan,  om-N 

Oklahoma,  KIM 

Oklahoman,  KIMn 

old,  Lt  or  o-Lt 

older,  Ltr  or  o-Ltr 

oldest,  Ltst  or  G-Ltst 

Old  Testament,    LtTs^lnt 
or  Ltst 

olympiad,  LaMpt  or  L1- 
MpD 

Olympian,  LJMpn 

Olympus,  L^Mps 
Omaha,  ^l3 
omnipotence,  ]\IXPns 
omnipotency,  ]SIXPtT 
omnipotent-ly,  MXPt 
omnipresence-t.  MXPr 
omniscience,  MXShns 
omnisciency,    MXi  Sh 
omniscient-ly,  MXShnt 
onerary,  XRJR 
onerate,   XRt1 
oneration,  XRshn1 
onerous,  XTRsJ 
onerously,  X'Rs'L 
oneself,  Wns 
onion,  Xn 
onlooker,  Ttoid1  LKr  (See 

sec.  383.) 
onset,  TtoidsT 
onslaught,   Ttoid  J 
onto,  KtoidT 
onward,  Ttoid 1  ?6<Rt 
operate,  P'Rt 
operative,  PJRf 
operatively,  PJRfL 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


313 


opine,  Pn1 
opiniative,  Nnl4.Tf 
opinionated,  Nn'tTt 
opinionative,  Nnu.Tf 
opinioned,  Nnlc.D 
opinionist,  NnSt1 
Oppenheimer,   PnMR 
opportune,  Pr3Tn 
opportunely,  Pr3TNl 
opportuneness,    Pr  3TnNs 
opportunity,  Prt3  or  Pr3- 

Tnt 

oppression,  Prshn 
oral,  Rl 
orator,  R*Tr 
oratorial  ,  RirTrL 
oratorical,  R'Tr, 

orR'TRKl 
oratorio,  RlTRo 
oratory,  R'TR 
order,  Rtr1 
ordinal,  Rt'NZ 
ordinance,  R^Nns  or  R1- 

DnXs 

ordinary,  RtJNr 
ordnance,  Rt^ns 
Oregon,  RGn 
Oregonan,  RGNn 
Oregonian,  RGnN 
organic,  GnJK 
organical,  Gn^L 
organism,  GnasM 
Orleans,  RLns 
ornamental,   RnMntL 
orrery,  RJR 
orthoepist,  RThPst 
orthoepy,  RThP 


orthographer,  RThGr 
orthographist,  RThGst 
orthographize,  RThGs 
orthography-ic-al,     RThG 
Osage,    SJ 
Osawatomie,  SWtM 
Oscar,   SKr 
ostensible, 
ostler, 
ostracise,  StrSs 
ostrich,  StRC 
Otaheite,  oTT 
other,  u1  or  Dhr3 
others,  us1  or  Dhrs3 
other  ways,      u^Was     or 

DJir3Was 

otherwise,  us1  or  Dhr3Ws 
oust,  St3 
ouster,  Str3 
outdoors,  T3DRs 
outer,  Tr3 
outfit,  T3Ft 
outstretched,  T3sTrCt 
overalls,  Vr^s 
overboard,  VraBrt 
overseer,  Vr^R 
overtake,  Vr^K 
overture,  Vrtr1 
overwhelm, 
owed,  oD 
owes,  os  or  oZ 
owest,  oSt 
owing,  6-  or  Ng 
oyer,  yR 
oyes,  Ys 
oyez,  Y 


314 


THE   PHOXOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


pageantry,  PJtR 
paletot,  PLT 
pallet,  P3Lt 
palliate,  P3Lt 
palliative,  P3LtV 
pallid,  P3Lt 
pallor,  PLr  or  PLR 
panorama,  PNrM 
pantry,  PntR 
papal,  PP1 
paragram,  PrfG 
paragrammist,  PrfGst 
paragrammatist,  PrfGTst 
paragraph-ic-al,    PrG     or 

PrGf 

paragrapher,  PrGr 
paragraphist,  PrGst 
paragraphistical,    PrGsKl 
parallax,  PRIKs  or  PrLKs 
parallel,  P3R1 
paralleled,  P3Rlt 
paralytic,  PRltK 
paralyze,  PRls 
paralyzed,  PRlst 
parasol,  PRsL 
parcel,  PrsL 
Paris,  PRsorP'R 
Parisian,  PRsN  or  PRshn 
parliament-ary,  Pr3L 
parliamentarian,  Pr3Ln 
parlor,  PrLr  or  PrLR 
partial,  PrSM. 
participant,  PrtsPnt 
participate,  PrtsPt 
participation,   PrtsPshn 
participator,  PrtsPtr 


particle,  PrtKl 
partisan,  .P3RtsX 
partner,  PrtNr 
partnership,  PrtNrSh 
passenger,   PsJr 
passion,  Pshn3 
pastry,  PsTr 
pasture,  PsTR 
pasturage,  PsTRJ 
patent,  PTnt  or  Pt3 
patentable,  PTntB  or  Pt3- 

Bl 

patentee,  PTnT  or  Pt3T 
patent-office,     PTntFs    or 

Pt3Fs 
pater,  Ptr 

paternal,  PtrL  or  PtrNZ 
paternity,  PtrT  or  PtrNT 
pater-noster,  PtrNstr 
pathetic,   PThtK 
pathetical,  PThtKl 
patience,  Pshns 
patiently,  PshntL 
patois,  PTw 
patriot,  PTrt 
patriotic,  PTrtK 
patriotism,  PTrtsM 
patronymic,  PtrNMK 
peaceful,  Ps'Fl 
peanut,  PJNt 
pearl-y,  PrL 
peculiarity,  P3KLrt 
pecuniary-ly,  PKn 
pedal,  PtL 
pedantry,  PDtR 
peddle,  PtL 
penalty,  PX1T 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


315 


penance,  PnNs 
pencil,  PXsZ 
pendage,  PntJ 
penman,  PnMn 
penmen,  P^Mn 
pennant,  PnNt 
pennate,  PNt 
pennon,  PnN 
Pennsylvania,  PsV,  P,  Pn 

or'PN 
Pennsvlvanian,    PsVn     or 

PsVnN 

penurious,  PnRs 
penury,  PnR 
per,  Pr 

perannum,  PRNM 
percent,  PRsNt 
percentage,  PRsNtJ 
performer,   PRFMr 
perfunctor-y,  PrfNgtr 
peril,  PR1 
perilous,  PRls 
periphery,  PRfR 
perish,  PRSh 
perpendicularity,    PRPnt- 

«Lrt 

perpetuation,  PRPshn 
perpetuity,  PRPiTt 
perplex,  PrPLKs 
perplexed,  PrPLKst 
perplexedly,    PrPLKsDL 
perplexity,  PrPLKst 
persecution,  PRsKshn 
persecutor,  PRsKtr 
persevere,  PrsVr 
perseverance,  PrsVrns 
Persian,   PRShn 


persist,  PrssT 
persistency,  PrssiT 
persistent-ly,  PrssTnt 
personal,  PrsNl 
perspective,  PrsPf 
perspectively,  PrsPVl 
perspicuity,  PrsP'.Kt 
perspicuous-ly-ness,     Prs- 

PKs 

persuadable,  PrsDBl 
persuade,  PrsD 
persuader,  PrsDr 
persuasibility,  PrssBt 
persuasible,  PrssB 
persuasion,  Prs.s7m 
persuasive,  PrssV 
persuasory,  PrssR 
pertain,  PrTn 
perturb,  PrtrB 
perturbation,  PrtrBshn 
pervade,  PrVt 
pervert,  PrVrt 
pestilence,  PsLns 
pestilent,  PsLnt 
pestilential,  PsLn 
petal,  PtL 

petrifaction,  PtRFshu 
phenomena,  FnMN 
phenomenal,     FnMNl     or 

FnM 

phenomenon,  FnMNn 
Phi  la.  (for   Philadelphia), 

FJL 

Philadelphia,  FltF 
philanthropical,  FlnPL 
}>hilanthropist,  FlnPst 
philanthropy-ic,  FlnP 


316 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


philharmonic,  FlKMnK 
Phillip,  F1P 
Philippine,   FlPn 
Philistine,  FlsTn 
Philistinism,  FlsTsM 
philoproofenitiveness,  Flf  J 

orFlPrJNtiVs 
philter,  Fltr1 
phone,  Fn 
phonetic,  FXtK 
phonic,  FnK 
phono,  FN 
phonogram,  FXfG 
phonograph-y-ic-al,FnG  or 

FXG 
phonographer,     FnR      or 

FXGr 
phonographist,   FnGst   or 

FXGst 

phonoscript,  FnsK 
phonotype-y-ic-al,  FXtP 
photo,  FT 
photogram,  FTfG 
photograph-y-ic-al,  FTG 
photographer,  FTGr 
photographist,  FTGst 
photolithogram,  FtLThfG 

(or  FT) 
photolithograph-y-ic-al,  Ft- 

LThG 
photolithographer,    FtL- 

ThGr 
photolithographist,    FtL- 

ThGst 

phraseogram,  FrsfG 
1  >hraseo°:raph-y-ic-al,  FrsG 
physical,  FsKl 


picturesque,  PKtrsK 
pillar,  PLr  or  PLR 
Pindar,  P»Xtr 
pioneer,  PX'R 
pitiful,  PTf  or  Pt^l 
platform,  PltF  or  PltFr 
playfulness,  PlfXs 
pleasurable,  ZhrB 
pleasurableness,  ZhrBns 
plenipotentiary,  PlnP 
plenteous,  PlnTs 
plentiful,  PlnTf 
plentifulness,  PlnTfNs 
plenty,  PlnT 
Plimpton,  PIMptN 
polar,  PLr  or  PLR 
polish,  PLSh 
polished,  PLSht 
politic,  Plt'K 
political,  Pl^Kl 
politician,  Ph^Shn 
pomp,  P^Ip 
Pompey,  P:Mp 
poniard,  PnRt 
poorer,  Pr3R 
poorhouse,  Pr3hS  or  Pr3S 
poorly,  Pr3L 
poorness,  Pr3Xs 
poplar,  PPLr 
popular-ly,  PJP 
popularize,  PaPs  or   PJP- 

LRs 

port,  PRt 
portage,  PRtJ 
porterage,  PRtr  J 
Porto  Rican,  PrtRKn 
Porto  Rico,  PrtRK 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


317 


Porto  Ricoan,  PrtRKN 
positive,  PsTf 
positively,  PsTVl 
positiveness,  PsTfNs 
postmeridian,  PsMRt 
postmortem,  PsMtM 
postponement,  PsPMnt 
postscript,  PsKPt 
potage,  PtJJ 
potash,  Pt'Sh 
potential-ly-cy,  PTn 
potter,  Ptr1 
pottery,  Pt'R 
powder,  Ptr3 
Powderly,  Ptr3L 
power,  P3R 
powerful,  P3Rf 
powerfulness,  P3R'.Fs 
Powhattan,  PTn 
practicable,     Pr3KBl     or 

Prt3Bl 
practical,   Pr3Kl  or  Prt3- 

Kl 

practice,  Pr3K  or  Prts3 
practiced,  Pr3Kt  or  Prtst3 
practicer,     Pr3Kr     or 

Prts3R 
practitioner,    Prshn3R  or 

Prt3Shr 
precede,  Pr^D 
precedent,  Pr^Dnt 
precession,  Prashn* 
precise,  Prss1 
precisely,  Prss1!; 
precision,  Prsshn1 
predecessor,  PrDssR 
predestinarian,  PrDsNrn 


predistinate,  PrDstNt 
predestination,     PrDst- 

Nshn 

predestine,  PrDsTn 
preface,  PrFs 
prefix,  PrfKs 
prejudice,  PrJt 
prejudicial,  PrJtShl 
preliminarily,  PrLML 
preliminary,  PrLM 
prepare,  PrPR 
prependage,  PrPnJ  or 

PriPntJ 

preposition,  PrPsshn 
prerogative,  PrJRG 
presbyter,  PrsBtr 
Presbyterial,  PrsBtRl 
Presbyterian,  PrsBt 
Presbyterianism,  Prs 

BtsM 

presbytery,  PrsBtR 
prescription,  Pr^Krshn 
prescriptive,  Pr1sKrf 
prescript!  vely,  Pr^KrVl 
preservable-y,  PrsRBl 
preservation,  PrsR 
preservative,  PrsVt  or 

PrsRVtV 

preservatory,  PrsRftR 
preserve,  PrsRf 
preserver,  PrsRfR 
presidency,  Prs'.D 
president,  PrsDnt 
previously  PrVsZ 
princes,  Prnss1 
princess,  Prn^s 
privilege,  PrfJJ 


118 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    M.VXUAL. 


privileged,  PrfJJt 
probate,  PrBT 
procedure,  PrsDR 
proceed,  PrsD 
process,  Prss 
procession,  PrssAyi 
product,  Pr3DKt 
production,  Pr3Dshu 
productive,  Pr3Df 
profession,  PrFshn 
professional,  PrFshnL 
professor,  Prf  or  PrFsR 
proficience,  P^Fshns 
proficiency,  Pi^F'.Sh 
proficient-ly ,  Pr '  Fshnt 
profitable,  Prf tJB 
proti  tableness,  Pf  r  t  *  Bns 
profound,  PrFnt 
profundity,  PrFntT 
prohibit,  Pr'BT 
prohibitive,  Pi^Bf 
project,  PrJKt 
prolong,  PrJNg 
prolonged,  Pi^Ngt 
prompt,  Pr*Mpt 
promulgate,  PrMlGt 
pronoun,  PrXn 
pronounce,  PrNns 
pronounced,  PrNNst 
pronunciation, 

or  PrXn*S7<shn 
proper-ly-ty,  PrP 
prophesier,  PrfPJSR 
prophecy,  Prf*S 
prophet,  Prft1 
prophetess,  Prft1S 
prophetic, 


prophetical, 
propose,  PrPs 
proposed,  PrPst 
proprietary,  PrPrTR 
proprietor,  PrPrtr 
propriety,  PrPrT 
prorogue,  PrRG 
proscription,  PrsKrshn 
prescriptive,  PrsKrf 
proscriptively,  PrsKrVl 
prosecution,  Prs3Kshn 
prosecutor,  Prs3Ktr 
prospective,  Prs^f 
prospecti vely,  Prs'PVl 
prospectus,  Prs l  PTs 
prosperity,  PrsPrt 
prosperous,  PrsPrs 
prosperously,  PrsPrsL 
protective,  PrtKtV 
protector,  PrtKtr 
protest,  Prtst 
protestant,  PrtsTnt 
protestantism,  PrtsTtsM 
protestation,  PrtsTshn 
protested,  PrtstiD 
protester,  PrtstR 
prothonotary,  PrThntR 
protract,  PrTrKt 
protracter-or,  PrTrtr 
protraction,  PrTrshn 
protractive,  PrTrf 
protrude,  Pr'Trt 
protruder,  Pr3Trti 
protrusion,  Pr3Trshn 
provide,  PraVt 
provider,  PrJVtr 
province,  PrfXs 


provincial,  PrfX 
provincialism,  PrfXsM  or 

PrfXShlsM 
prudential,  PrDn 
prunella-o,  PrXZ 
pruner,  Prn3R 
Prussian,  PrShn 
publican,  PBn 
})ublication,  PBshn 
publicist,  PBssT 
publicity,  PBLst 
publisher,  PBShr 
Puebla-o,  PwBL  or  PwBl 
puerile,  P3R1 
puerility,  P3RIT 
punctuation,  PnsrTshn 
pupil,  P3P1 
purely,  P3RL 
purification,  P3RFshn 
purport,  PPRt 
purposed,  PPst 
pursuance,  PRSNs 
pursuant,  PRSXt 
pursue,  PRS 
pursued,  PRSt 
pursuer,  PRSR 
pursuit,  PRSt 
pursuivant,  PRsVnt 
purveyor,  PrVT? 
Putnam,  Pt'NM  or 

PTNM 

putrefaction,  PTrFshn 
putrefied,  PTrFt  or  PTrf  D 
pyramid-ic,  PrMt  or 

PRMt 
pyramidal,  PrMt  L  or 

PEMtL 


pyramidical,    PrMtKl    or 
PRMtKl 

LESSON  38. 

Q 

quadrangle,  KwtRNgl 
quadrangular,  KvvtRNglR 
quadrant,  KwtRnt 
quadrat,  KwtRt; 
quadrator,  Kvvt1Rtr 
quadrature,  KwtRtr 
quadrennial,  KwtRNZ 
quadrilateral,  KwtRltrL 
quadrille,  KwtRl 
quadrillion,  KwtRln 
quadroon,  KwtRn 
quadruman,    KwtR^n   or 

KtrMn 
quadrumana,  KwtRMX  or 

KtrMN 
quadruped,  KwtRPt  or 

KtrPt 

quadruple,  KwtRPl 
quaere,  KwR 
quagga,  KwG 
quahog,  Kw:G  orKw^G 
qualifiedly,  KlFtL 
qualify,  K\F 
qualitative,  KITTf 
quality,  KIT 
quantitative,  KwntTTf 
quantitive,  KwntTf 
quantity,  KwntT 
quantum,  Kwn^M 
quarantine,  K \\RntN 
quarrel,  K\vRl 


J20 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


quart,  KwRt 
quartered,  Kwtrt1 
quartermaster,  Kwtr  *  Mstr 
(quartern,  Kwtrn1 
quartet,  KwRTt 
quarto,  K\vRT 
quench,  KwnC 
question,  Kwn  or  Kn 
questionable,     KwnB     or 

KnB 

questioner,  KwnR  or  KnR 
quick-step,  Kw'KsTP 
quiet,  KwT 
quinine,  KwnN 
quinteroon,  KwntRn 
quitclaim,  Kwt1KlM 
quondam,  KwntM 
quorum,  KwRM  or  KwM 
quotient,  Kwshnt 

R 

racehorse,  RsRs  or  RshRs 
rafter,  RFtr 
rail,  Rl 
railer-y,  R1R 

railroad,  R1RD  or  Rl'.Rt 
railway,  RIAV 
rampage,  RMpJ 
rampant,  RMpnt 
rampart,  RMprt 
rancid,  RnsD 
Randall,  RnDL 
random,  RntM 
ranger,  RnJR  or  RnJr 
ransack,  RnsK 
ransom,  RnsM 
rapid,  RPt 


Rappahannock,  RPXK 
rarer,  RRR 
rasher,  RShr 
ratify,  Rt3F 
ratification,   Rt3Fshn 
rattle,  Rt3L 
rattler,  Rt3Lr 
read  (red),  Rt 
read,  R'D 
reader,  R'Dr 
realm,  RIM 
Reaumur,  RMr  or  R 
recessional,  Rs«sA?>Z 
recherche,  RShrSh 
recognize,  R'Xs 
recognition,  R'Xshn 
recognizance,    R'XsNs    or 

RfNsNs 

recollect,  RK1K  or  R1 
recollection,  RKlKshn  or 

Rshn1 
red,  Rt 

re-elect,  RIKt  or  RLKT 
re-establish-ment,  R3StB 
refer,  RR  or  Rf R 
referable,  RRB1  or  Rf  RBI 
referee,  RR-6  or  RfR-e 
reference,  RRns  or  RfRns 
references,  RRnss   or  Rf- 

Rnss 
referendum,  RRnM  or  Rf- 

RntM 

referential,  RRn  or  RfRn 
reflection,  RFlshn 
reform,  RF 
reformation,  RFshn 
reformative,  RFTf 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


321 


reformatory,  RFTR 
reformer,  RFMr 
refraction,  RFrshn 
regard,  R3Grt 
regeneration,  RJshn 
regenerative,  RJf 
regimental,  RJMntL 
regret,  RGrt 
rehear,  RhR 
reheard,  RhRt 
rehearsal,  RRsL  or  RhRsL 
rehearse,  RRs  or  RhRs 
rehearsed,  RRst  or  RhRst 
Rehmn,  RhM  or  RM 
relative,  RltV 
relatively,  RltVl 
relict,  R'lKt 

religious,  Js1  (See  joyous.) 
religiously,  JsaL 
religiousness,  JsaNs 
relinguish,  RlNgSh 
remainder,  RMntR 
reminder,  R'MntR 
remonstrate,  RMnsTrt 
remonstrance,    RMnsTrns 
remonstrator,     RMnsTrtr 
renew,  R3NFtoid 
renewable,  R3NB1 
renewal,   R3NZ 
renewed,  R3NtFtoid 
renewedly,  R3NDL 
renewer,  R3NR 
renounce,  RNns 
renounced,  RNNst 
renouncement,   RNNsMnt 
renown,  RNn 
Renshaw,  RnSh 


renunciation,  RNnss/m  or 

RNntfAshn 
replenish,  RPln 
reporter,  RPRtr 
repu  blicanis  m  ,  RPBsM 
repugnance-t-ly,  RPG 
repute,  R3Pt 
require,  R*Kw 
requite,  R*Kwt 
requiter,  R*Kwtr 
resentment,  RsNtMnt 
reservance,  RsRVns 
reservation,  RsR 
reservative,  RsRVTt  or  Rs- 

RVtV 

resevatory,  RsRftR 
reserve,  RsRf 
reservedly,  RsRftL 
reser  vedness,  RsRf  ti  Ns 
reservee,  RsRV 
reserver-or,  RsRfR 
reservist,  RsRVst 
reservoir,  RsRVT?  or  Rs- 


resignation-,  RsG 
respective,  RsPf 
respectively,  RsPVl 
responsible-y,  RsPnsB 
restful,  RsF  or  RsTFl 
restiveness,  RsTfNs 
restoration,  RsTRshn 
restorative,  RsTRTf 
restrict,  RsTrKt 
restriction,  RsTrshn 
restrictive,  RsTrf 
restrictively,  RsTrVl 
restrictor,  RsTrtr 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


resurrect,  RsRKt 
resurrection,  RsRshn 
resurrectionist,  RsRshn St, 
resurrectionize,     RsRshns 
retire,  RTR 
retract,  RTrKt 
retractor,  RTrtr 
retraction,  RTrshn 
retractive,  RTrf 
retrospect,  RTrsP 
retrospection,  RTrsPshn 
retrospective,  RTrsPf 
return,  RTRn 
Rev.    (for  reverend),  RV 

(See  reverend.) 
revengeful,  RVJf 
revenue,  RV 
reverend-t,      RfRnt    (See 

Rev.) 

reverential,  RfRn 
revert,  RVrt 
revivification,  RVVFshn 
revivify,  RVVF 
revolutionary,  Lshn3R 
revolve,  Rf  or  RV1 
revolver,  Rf  or  RVlVr 
reward,  RwRt 
re  weigh,  RW 
re  weighed,  R  TFt 
reweight,  RWt 
Reynolds,   RNlts  or    RN- 

Zts 

Rhenish,  RnSh 
rhetoric,  RtrK 
rhetorical,  RtrKl 
rhetorician,  Rtrn  or  Rtr- 

Shn 


Rhode  Island,  RtLnt 

Rhode    Islander,    RtLntR 

Richard,  RCrt 

richer,  R^Cr 

riddle,  Rt'L 

ritual,  Rt*L 

road,  Rt 

Roderick,  RtrK 

Roger,  RJr 

roller,  R1R 

Roman,  RMn 

Roman  Catholic-icism,  R- 

KTh 

Roman  Empire,  RMMpr 
Romanism,   RMsM 
romantic,  RMntK 
rotary,  RTR 
rotund,  RTnt 
rotundity,  RTntT 
roughness,  RfNs 
router,  Rtr3 
R.  R.  (for  railroad),  RR  or 

R'R 

rudimentary,  R3DMntR 
ruin,  R3N 
ruler,  R13R 
runaway,  RnW 
runic,  Rn3K 
runner,  RnR 
rural,  RR1 
R.W.  (for  railway),    RW 

or  RtW 

.S 

saddle,  sDl3 
safflower,  sFPR 
saffron,  sFrn3 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


32?, 


Sahara,  S3R 
sahib,  S3B 
Sambo,  sMp3 
sample,  sMpl 
sanctification,  sNgFshn3 
sanctify,  sXgF3 
sanctity,  sNgT3T 
sanctum,  sNgT3M 
sanctum  sanctorum,    sNg- 

T'MsNgtrM 
sandwich,  sNtC 
San  Francisco,  sNss1!^ 
Sanhedrim,  sNDrM  or  sN- 

hDrM 

Sanskrit,  sNsKrt  or  sNsKt 
sash,  sSh3 
sasher-y,  sShr 
Satan,  sTn3 
Satanic,  sTn3K 
satchel,  sCl3 
satin,  sTn3 
satinet,  sTn3T 
satire,  sTR 
satiric,  sTRK 
satirical,  sTRKl 
satirist,  sTRst 
satisfactorily,  sTs3RL 
satisfactory,  sTs3R 
satisfier,  sTs3F/i 
satrap,  sTrP 
saturate,  sTRt 
Saturday,  sTRD  or  sTrD 
Saturn,  sTRn 
said,  sD 
sawer,  S*R 
sawyer,  S1yR  or  S^R 
saying,  SNg 


scarf,  sKRf  or  sKrf 3 
scenery,  sN]R 
Schiller,  ShLR 
schism,  SsM 
Schlegel,  ShlGl 
scholar,  sKLr  or  sKIR 
schorl,  ShrL 

Schwab,  Sh!B  or    Sh'wB 
Schwartz,    Sh3Rts,    Shw- 

Rts  or  ShwRts 
Schweinfurth    ShnFRt  or 

ShwnFRt 
Schweinitz,     Sh^ts      or 

ShwNts 

Schwerin,  ShRn  or  ShwRn 
scientific,  S^t 
scientifical,  SJNtZ 
scoffer,  sKf!R 
score,  sKR 
scorn,  sKRn 
scorner,  sKRnR 
scornful,  sKRnF 
scoundrel,  sKtRl 
season,  SsN 
secede,  SsD 
secessionist,  sSshnSt 
secretary,  sKrtR 
security,  sKrT3 
sedan,  sDn3 
sedate,  sDt 

sedentary,  sDtR  or  sDntR 
seize,  Ss1 
seized,  SsJD 
seldom,  sLtM 
self,  s  or  sLF 
self-assertive,  sSRtV 
self-sacrifice,  ssKrFs 


Till-;    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


self-same,  ssM 

self-satisfied,  ssT3 

self -seeker,  ssKr1 

self -slaughter,  ssLtr1 

self-sufficient,  ssFshnt 

selves,  ss  or  sLVs 

senate,  sNt 

senator,  sNtr 

send,  sNt  or  sND 

senior,  sNR  or  sNyR  (See 

ST.) 
sensationalism,  sNs,s/mZs- 

M 

senselessly,  sNsZsZ 
sensible-y-ity,  sNsB 
sensitiveness,  sNsTfNs 
sent,  sNt1 
sentence,  sNtNs 
sentenced,  sNtNst 
sententious,  sNtNShs 
sentiment,  sNtMnt 
sentimental,  sNtMntL 
sentimentality,  sNtMntLT 
sentinel,  sNtNl 
sentry,  sNtR 
separable,  sPr3Bl 
separate,  sPrt3 
separately,  sPrt3L 
separateness,  sPrt3$Ns 
separation,  sPrshn3 
separatism,  sPrts3M 
separatist,  sPrtst3 
separator,  sPrtr3 
separatory,  sPrtr3R 
separatrix,  sPrtr3Ks 
September,  sPtMpr 
servant,  sRVnt 


serve,  sRf 

server,  sRfR 

servient,  sRVnt 

servitor,  sRVtr 

servitorship,  sRVtrSh 

servitude,  sRVTt 

serviture,  sR3Vtr 

sessional,  Sshni  L  or  SshnZ 

setoff,   sTf1 

settee  sTe1 

settle,  sTl 

settler,  sTIR 

seven,  7 

sever,  sVr 

severance,  sVrns, 

severe,  ,s 

severely, 

severer,  sV7?R 

severest,  sV^st 

sew,  S 

sewed,  sD 

sewn,  sN 

sewage,  S3J 

sewer,  S3R 

sewerage,  S3RJ 

Shaker,  ShKr 

Shakespeare,    ShKsPR  or 

ShsP 
Shakespearean,  ShKsPRn 

or  ShsPn 
shale-y,  Shi 
shaloon,  ShLn 
shallop,  ShLP 
shallot,  ShJLt 
shallow,  Sh3L 
shamble,  #AMpl  or  ShMpL 
shampoo,  Sh3Mp 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


325 


shapely,  ShPl  or  ShPL 
share,  Shr 
Sharzwood,  Shrs  Wi 
shaver,  ShVr  or  ShVT? 
shawl,  Shi1 
shear,  Shr1 
sheath,  ShJTh 
sheathe,  ShaDh 
sheather,  ShJDhr 
Sheehy,  Sh1 
Sheldon,  ShlDn 
Shelley,  ShL 
Shelbyville,  ShlBVl 
shelf,  ShlF 
shell,  Shi 
Shelton,  ShltN 
shelve,  ShlV 
Shency,  ShnS 
shepherd,  ShPrt 
sherry,  ShR 
shield,  Shit1 
shillalah,  ShLL 
shilling,  ShlNg 
shilly,  ShxL 
shimmer-y,  xSAMr  or  Sh- 

MR 

shire,  Shr1 
shoal,  Shi 
shore,  Shr 
shorn,  Shrn 
shorthand,  ShrtU^t 
shortsighted,  Shr^sTt 
short-time,  Shrt1M 
Shoshone,  ShShN  or  Sh- 


Shoyer,    SA*i/R,  Sh'R  or 


shrew,  Shr3 
shrewd,  Shrt3 
shrewdly,  Shrt3L 
shrill-y,  ShrL 
shriller,  ShrLR 
Shruble,  ShrBl 
shuttle,  ShtL  or  ShTl 
Sicily,  sSL 
sidle,  sDl1 
sierra,  SR  or  sR 
siesta,  SsT 
sigh,  S1 
sighed,  sD1 
sight,  sT1 
significancy, 
Sihor,  S*R 
simile,  sML1 
similitude,  s 
simmer,  sMr1 
simper,  sMpr1 
simpleness,  sMp1Ns 
simpler,  sMpR1 
simplest,  sMpst1 
simpleton,  sMpn1 
simplification,  sMpFshn1 
simplified,  sMpFt1 
simplify,  sMpF1 
single,  sXgl1 
singsong,  sNgasNg 
sinless,  sNls1  or  s 
sinlessly, 
sinlessness,    sNls1Ns    or 

s^ifLs 
sinner,  sNr1 
Sioux,  S3 
sir,  sR 
sire,  sR1 


326 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


Sisco,  ssK1 
Sismondi,  ssMnD 
Sissman,  ssMn1 
sister,  ssTr1 
sister-in-law,  ssT^Nl 
site,  sT1 
situate,  sT'T 
sixpence,  sKsPns 
sizzle,  SsL 
skillfulness,  sKlf  xNs 
slack-water,   sLKwtr    or 

sLKWtr 
slash,  sLSh 
slashed,  sLSht 
slavish, 
slavishly,  s 
slavishness, 
small,  sML 

smaller,  sMLr  or  sMLR 
smash,  sMSh 
smashed,  sMSht 
sociability,  sShBt 
sociable,  sShB 
sociableness,  sShBns 
social,  sShl 
sociality,  sShlT 
socialism,  sShlsM 
socialist-zed,  sShlst 
socialistic,  sShlsK 
socials-ize,  sShls 
society,  SsT 
Socinian,  sSuN 
Socinus,  sSNs 
soever,  SV 
Soho,  S 
sojourn,  sJrn 


soldier,    sLJr,    sLtr    (see 

sec.  70)  or  sJr 
solsticial,  sLsTShl 
somber,  sMpr1 
somehow,  sM-now 
something,  sMNg 
sometime,  sMtM 
somewhere,  sMn?/;R 
sonant,  sXXt 
son-in-law,  sNnL 
songstress,    sNgstrs1     or 

sNgsT'Rs 
sooner,  sNr3 
soonest,  sNst3 
Sorosjs,  sRss 
sorrel,  sRl1 
sorrily,  sR1!* 
sorrow-y,  sR1 
sorrowful,  sRf1 
South  Carolina,  sTh3Kr 
South  Carolinan,  sTh3Krn 
South  Dakota,  sThDKt 
South  Dakotan,  sThDKtN 
southeast,  sSt1 
southeaster,  sStr1 
southeastern,  sStrn1 
southerly,  sDhrL  or  sDhL 
southern,   sDhrn  or  sDhn 
southerner,      sDhrR      or 

sDhnR 
southward,  s?rRt3  or  sTh3- 

%'Rt 

southwest,  sWst3 
south  wester,  sWstr3 
southwestern,  sWs3Rn 
sow,  S 
sowed,  sD 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


327 


sown,  sN 
specialist,  s 
speciality,  sP-S 
specialization,  sPShlshn 
specialize,  sPA7/ls, 
specialty,  sPT  or  sP/6VtlT 
specification,  sPsFshn 
sphere,  sFT? 
sphericity,  sFRsT 
sport,  sPRt 
square-d,  sKw 
squarely,  sKwL 
squatter,  sKwtr1 
Sr.  (for  senior),  sR1 
stal)ility,  stBLT 
stable,  stBL 
Stacy,  stS 
staid,   staD  or  sTD   (See 

stayed. ) 

staidness,staDNs  or  stDNs 
stand,  stNt3 
standard,  stNtrD3  or  stNt- 

Rt3 

staple  stPL 
star-ry,  stR3 
starred,  stRt3 
start,  stRt3 
Staten,  stTn 
statesman,  stTsMn 
statesmen,  stTs1Mn 
station,   stShn 
stationary-ery-er,  stShR 
stationed,  stShnt 
statist,  stTst3 
statistic,  stTsK 
statistical,  stTsKl 


statistician,    stTsTshn    or 


statuary,  stT3R 
statue,  stT3 
statuesque,  stT3sK 
statuette,  stT3T 
stature,   stTr3  or  stT3K 
status,  stTs 
statute,  stTt3 
statutory,  stTt3R 
stay,  sT 
stayed,    stiiD  or  sTD(See 

staid.  ) 
stead-y,  stD 
steadiness,  stDNs 
steamboat,  stMpt 
stear,  stR1 
stearate,  stR'T 
stearic,  stR^ 
stearin,  stRn1 
steatite,  stT'T 
steed,  stD1 
steeple,  stP'L 
steno,  stN 

stenograph-y-ic-al,    stNG 
stenographer,    stNR     or 

st^Gr 

stenographist,  stNGst 
stenotype-y,  stNtP 
stentor,  stNtr 
stentorian,  stNtrn 
stereotype,  stRt1? 
stereotyper,  stRtaPr 
sterile,  stRL 
sterling,  stRLNg 
stern,  stRn 
stew,  sT3 


328 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


steward,  sT3Rt 

stewardess,  sT3RtS 

stewardship,  sT3RtSh 

Stewart,  sT3Rt 

stewed,  stD3 

stewish,  sT3Sh 

stied,  stD1 

stipple,  6tP*L 

stipulate,  stPLt 

stipulation,  stPLshn 

St  Loui,  stL   or    sNt  L3 

St  Louis,  stLs  or  sNt  Ls3 

stone,  stN 

stoned,  stNt 

stood,  stD3 

store-y,  stR 

storm,  stRM 

stout,  stT3 

stouter,  stTr3 

stoutest,  stTst3 

stove,  stV 

stow,  sT 

stowage,  sTJ 

stowed,  stD 

Stowell,  sTL 

stower,  sTR 

strain,  sTrn 

strangle,  sTrNgl 

strangled,  sTrNglt 

strangler,  sTrNglR 

stratagem,  sTrtJM 

strategist,  sTrtJst 

strategy,  sTrtJ 

stratification,    sTrTfKshn 

stratify,  sTrTF 

Streeter,  sTrtr1 

stringency,  sTriJ 


strong,  sTrNg 
stronger,  sTrNgr 
strongest,  sTrNgst 
stronghold,     sTrXglt     or 

sTrXghLt 
strongly,  sTrNgl 
structure,  sTrtr 
stub-by,  stB 
stubble,  stBL 
stubborn,  stBrn  or  stBRn 
stubbornly,      stBrnL     or 

stBRnL 
stubbornness,    stBrns     or 

stBRns 

student,  stDnt3 
study,  stD 
stutter,  stTr 
sty,  sT^See  stied.) 
Stygian,  stJn1 
suasible,  sWsB 
suasion,  sWshn 
suasive,  sWsV 
suasoiy,  sWsR 
suave,  sWV 
suavely,  sWVl 
suavity,  sWVT 
subaltern,  sBLtrn 
subjectively,  sBVl 
subjectiveness,  sBfNs 
subjectivity,  sBfT 
subject-matter,  sBMtr 
subpoena,  sPN 
subserve,  sBsRf 
subservience,  sBsRVns 
subserviency,  sBsRtV 
subservient-ly,  slisKVnt 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


329 


substantial,  sBsTn 
substantiate,  sBsTSht 
substantiation,  sBsTSh  or 

sBsTShn 
substitute,  sBsTt 
substitution,  sBsTshn 
subtracter,  sBTrtr 
subtraction,  sBTrshn 
success,  sKss 
successful,  sKssF 
succession,  sKssshn 
successive,  sKssV 
successively,  sKssVL 
sue,  S 
sued,  sD3 
Suez,  Ss3 
suffer,  sFr 
sufferance,  sFrns 
sufficience,  sFshns 
sufficiency,  sFiSh 
sufficient-ly,  sFshnt1 
suffragan,  sFrGn 
suffrage,  sFrJ 
sugar,  ShGr 
suggester,  sJstr 
suggestion,  sJn 
suggestive,  sJf 
suicide,  SsD 
suit,  sT3 
suitable-y,  st3Bl 
suite,  sWt* 
summer,  sMr 
snn,  sN 
Sunday,  sND 
sunder,  sXtr 
sundown,  sNDn3 
suntish,  sNFA'/> 


sunflower, 

sunless,  sNls  or  sNZs 

sunlight,  sNlt1,  sNLt1   or 

sNZt1 

sunlike,  sNUK 
sunlit,  sNlt1,     sNLt1     or 

sNZt1 

sunned,  sNt 
sunnier,  sNR 
sunniest,  sNst 
sunrise,   sNRs 
sunset,  sNsT 
sunshine,  sJsShn 
sunstroke,     sNsTrK     or 

sNstr 

superable,  sPrBl 
superficial,  sPrF 
superficies,  sPrF/SAs 
superintend-ent,    sPrNTnt 
superintendence,  sPrNTnt- 

Na 
superintendency,     sPrNT- 

iDor  sPrNTniD 
superior,  sPRR 
superscribe,  sPrsK 
superscription,    sPrsKshn 
supplant,  sPlnt3 
supplanter,  sPlnt3R 
supple,  sPl 
supplicate,  sPlKt 
supreme,  sPrM 
surely,  ShrL 
surmountable,  sRMntB 
surpass,  sRPs 
surrender,  sRNtr 
surround,  sRnt3 
surveyor, 


330 


THE   PHONOGUAPHIC   MANUAL. 


susceptible,  SsPt  or  SsPt- 

Bl 

suspect,  ssPKt 
suspend,  ssPnt 
suspicion,  ssPshn 
suspire,  ssPr1 
sustain,  ssTn 
sutler,  sTLR 
suttle,  sTl 
swage,  sJ  or  swj 
swale, 
swallow, 
swamp-y,  sWMp 
swash,  sir-Sh1 
swashed,  sVF-Sht1 
swath,  sw-Th1 
swathe,  sw-Dh 
sweat,  sWt 
sweater,  sWtr 
sweaty,  sw-T 
s  weati  ness,  sw-TNs 
Swede,  s  TFt1 
Sweden,  sTFi'N 
Swedenborg,  sTFt'NB 
Swedish,  sw-D'Sh  or  slFt1- 

'.Sh 

sweep,  sWP 
sweet,  sWt1 
sweetheart,  sWt'Rt 
sweetish,  sw-T 1  Sh  or  s Wt l  - 

iSh 

sweetly,  sWt*L 
swell,  mtjLi 
swelter,  s^«Ltr 
swift,    sWFt,    swFt1     or 

sFt1 


swifter,  sWFtr,  sw-Ftr1  or 

sFtr1 
swiftest,  sWFtst,  sw-Ftst1 

or  sFtst1 
swiftly,  sWFtL,   sw-Ft'L 

or  sFt'L 
swiftness,  s  WFtNs,  sw-Ft1- 

Ns  or  sFt'Ns 
swindle,  sWnt1 
swindler,      sWnt'R      or 

sWt'Lr 

swish,  sSh1  orsir-Sh1 
switch,  sC1   or  sw-C1 
switchman,  sC'Mn 
switchmen,  sCn1 
Switzerland,  sWtsRLnt 
swollen,  sv/'Ln 
symbol,  sMpL 
sympathetic,  sMpTht 
sympathetical,   sMpThtKl 
sympathy,  sMpTh 
symptom,  sAIpt'M 
synonym,  sNnM 
synonymous,  sXnMs 


tabernacle,  TBr 
tachygraph-y-ic-al,  TKG 
tachygrapher,  TKGr 
tachygraphist,  TKGst 
taffeta-y,  TfT 
Tahiti/  T»T 
talkativeness,  T^KtiVs 
Tallahassee,  TLS  or  T1S 
tallyho,  TL 
tano-ence,  TnJns 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


331 


tangent,  TnJnt 
tangential,  TnJn  or  TnJ- 

Shl 

tangible-ness,  TnJ 
tangle,  TNgl 
tannin,  TnN 
tantamount,     TTMnt     or 

TtMnt 

tariff,  TRf  or  Trf 3 
tarnish,  TrnSh 
tart,  T3Rt 
Tartar,  TsRtr 
tartarous-us,  T 3  RTRs 
Tartary,  T3RTR 
tasteful,  TsFl 
technic,  TK 
technical,  TK1 
technicality,  TKlt 
technics,  TKs 
technology,  TKN1J 
telegram,  TlfG 
telegram mic,  TlfGK 
telegraph-y-ic-al,  TIG 
telegrapher,  TIGr 
telegraphist,  TIGst 
telephoner,  TlfR 
telephonist,  Tll'St  or  Tlst 
temper,  TMpr 
tempered,  TMprt 
temperament,  TMprMnt 
temperance,  TMprns 
temperate,  TMprT 
temperature,  TMprtr 
tempest,  TMpst 
templar,  TMP1R 
temple,  TMpl 
temporal,  TMprL 


temptation,  TMpTshn 
tempter,  TMptr 
tenable,  TNB1 
tenant,  TnNt 

tendency,    TntS  or  TntNS 
tendon,  TntN 
tendonous,  TntNs 
tenement,  TNMnt 
tenemental,  TNMntL 
tenet,  TNt 

Tennessee,  TnS  or  TNS 
Tennesseean,  TnSn  or  TN- 

Sn 

tenon,  TnN 
tensile,  TNsL 
tentation,  TntShn 
tentative,  TntTf 
tentatively,  TntTVl 
term,  TrlVI 
terminal,  TrMNl  , 
terminate,  TrMNt 
termination,  TrMNshn 
terminator,  TrMNtr 
terminatory,  TrMNtR 
terminer,  TrMNr 
territory,  TRt 
territorial,  TRtRl 
terse,  TRs 
terser,  TRsR 
tersest,  TRssT 
tersely,  TRsL 
testament,  TsMnt 
testamentary,  TsMntK 
testification,   TsFshn 
testify,  TsF 
testimonial,  TsMKl 
i  testimony,    TsM  or  T«MN 


332 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXL'AL. 


tete,  Tt 

teteatete,  TtiTt 
Texan,  TssN  or  TKsX 
Texas,  Tss  or  TKss 
text,  TKst 
Thahash,  ThSh 
texture,  TKstr,  orTKsTr 
Thanet,  ThNT 
thankful,  Th3Fl  . 
thankless,  ThsLs 
thanksgiving,  Ths3G 
Thawler,  ThLr  or  ThLR 
thea,  Th1 
theater-ic,  Thtr1 
theatrical,  Thtr'Kl 
theism,  ThsOI 
theist,  Thst1 
theistic,  Ths1!^ 
theistical,  Ths^l 
thence,^Dhns 
thenceforth,  DhnsFTh 
thenceforward,  DhnsFwRt 
theology,  ThlJ 
theologian,  ThlJn 
theological,  ThlJKl 
theorem,  ThaRM 
theoretical,  Th^tKl 
theory,  Th1!* 
thereabout,  DhrBt 
thereafter,  DhrFt 
thereat,  Dhrt 
therefore,  DhrF 
therefrom,  DhrFr 
therein,  DhrN 
thereinto,  DhrNT 
thereof,  DhrPtoid 
thereon,  Dhrn 


thereout,  Dhrt3 

thereto,  DhrT 

theretofore,  DhrtFT? 

thereunto,  DhrnT 

thereupon,  DhrPn 

therewith,  DhrDh 

thes  (pi.  of  the),  Rtsoid1 
or  Dhs1 

these  (pro.),  Dhs1  or  Rts- 
oid1 (Upward  '  'the"tick 
and  S  circle  by  way  of 
license. ) 

thicket,  Th»Kt 

thill,  Thl1 

thiller,  ThlJR 

thinker,  ThiR  or  ThR 

thistle,  ThsZ 

thither,  Dhtr1 

thitherto,  Dhr1! 

thole,  Thl 

Thor,  Thr1 

thorn,  Thrn1 

thorner,  Thr1^^ 

thorniest,  Thi^Xst 

thornless,  Thrn^Ls 

thorny,  Thr^ 

thorough,  ThR 

thoroughly,  ThRl 

those,  Z3  or  Dhs3 

threshold,  ThrShltor  Thr- 
ShLt 

throttle,  ThrtL 

throughout,     Thrt3    or 
Thr3T 

thumbed,  ThMt 

thumped,  ThMpt 

Thursday,  ThrsD 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


thwack,  ThwK 
thwacked,  ThwKt 
thwaite,  Thwt 
thwart,  ThwRt 
thwarter,  ThwRtr 
thwite,  Thwt1 
thwittle,  Thwt1!, 
tidal,  Tt1!,      . 
tide,  Tt1 

tide-waiter,  Tt'Wtr 
tide-way,  TtlW 
tiffet,  T;iFt 
timber,  TxMpr 
timbre^  TMBrL 
timely,  T^.LjT1  Lor  TJM- 

L 

timid,  T»Mt 
title,.  Tt'L 
to-day,  TD 
to-do,  TD 
tomahawk,  TMK 
to-morrow,  TMR 
ton,  Tn 
tonic,  TnK 
tonical,  TnKL 
to-night,  TNt 
tonnage,  TnJ 
torment,  TrMnt 
tormenter-or,  TrMNtr 
torture,  TRtr 
total,  TtL 
township,  Tn3Sh 
townsman-men,  Ts3Mn 
traction,  Trshn 
trammel,  TrMl 
tranquil,  Tr'Ng 
tranquil! ty,  TrsNgKlt 


tranquilize,  Tr3Ngs 
transact,  Trs3Kt 
transaction,    Trs3Kshn  or 


transactor,  Trs3Ktr 
transatlantic,  TrsTlntK  or 

TrsTLntK 

transcend-ence.  TrsNt 
transcendency,  TrsNtS 
transcendent-ly-ness,    Trs- 

Nnt 

transcendental,  TrfN 
transcendentalism,  Trf  Nt 
transcendentalist,  TrfNst 
transcendentality,  TrfNT 
transept,  TrNsPt 
transfer,  TrsFr 
transform,  TrsF 
transformation,  TrsFshn 
transformer,  TrsFMr 
transfuse,  TrsFs 
tranship,  TrnShP 
transient,     TrsNt  or  Trn- 

Shnt 

transit,  Trs3T 
transition,  Trnsskn1 
transitive,  TrsTf 
transitory,  TrsTr 
translate,  TrsLt 
translucent,  TrsLsNt 
transmit,  TrsMt 
transmute,  Trs3Mt 
transom,  TrNsM 
transpire,  TrsPr 
transplant,  TrsPlnt 
transport,  TrsPRt 
transportation,  TrsPshn 


334 


TUE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAM  Al.. 


transporter,  TrsPtr 
transpose,  Trs3Ps 
transposition,  Trs3Ps.sAw 
transship,  TrsShP 
transubstantiate-ion.  TrsB 
transubstantiated,  TrsBt 
transverse,  TrsVrs 
treater,  Trtr1 
tremble,  TrMpl 
tremendous,  TrMnDs 
tremor,  TrMr 
trespass,  TrsPs 
trial,  Tr'L 
trimmer,  TrJMr 
trisect,  TrJsKt 
trisection,  Ti^sKshn 
trivet,  TrVt  or  TrfT 
trotter,  Trtr1 
trombone,  TrMpn 
truly,  Tr3L 
trumped,  TrMpt 
trumpet,  TrMpT 
trumpeted,  TrMpTt 
trumpeter,  TrMptr 
trustful,  TrsFl 
trustworthy,  TrswRDh 
truthfulness,  TrfNs 
tuckahoe,  TK 
Tuesday,  TsD 
tuition,  Tshn3  or  TShn 
tuitionary,  Tshn3R  or 

TShR 

tumble,  TMpl 
tumbler,  TMplR 
tutor,  Ttr3 
two,  2 
twofold,  2  FZt 


twoedged,  2  e-Jt 
twohanded,  2  NDt3 
twopenny,  2  PN 
twoply,  2  PI1 
tympan,  TMpn 
tympanum,  TMpnM 
Tyrrell,  TR1 

LESSON  39. 

U 

ubiquity,  BKwT 
ugh,  ui 

ult  (for  ultimo),  Lt 
ulterior,  LtRR 
ulteriorly,  LtRRL 
ultimate-ly,  LTMt 
ultimatum,  LTMtM 
ultimo,  LTM 
ululate,  LLt 
ululation,  LLshn 
Ulysses,  Lss1  or  YLss 
umbel,  Mpl 
umber,  Mpr 
umpire,  Mpr 
unalterable,  NLtraBl 
unanimity,  NnMT3 
uncial,  N-5A1 
uncivil,  nsVl1 
uncivilized,  nsVlst1 
uncommon,  Nl5Mn 
uncommonly,  N'MnL1 
unconstitutional,  NsTshn3 
unconstitutionality,  Ns- 

Tshn3T 

unction,  Ngshn 
unctuous,  NgTs 


THE    PHONVUiRAlMIK1    MANU'AL. 


underhand,  NtNt 
Underbill,  NthL 
undermine,  NtMn 
undermined,  NtMnt 
undersign,  NtsN 
undersigned,  NtsNt 
understand,  Nt3sTnt 
understood,   NtssTt     (See 

interested.) 
undertake,  Nt^TK 
undertook,  NtT3K 
underwrite,  NtRt 
underwriter,  NtRtr 
underwritten,  NtRtN 
unearthly,     NrThL     or 

NRThL 
uneasy,  NZ1 
unenlightened,  NNlTnt 
unequal,  NMK1 
unerring,  NRNg 
unexampled,  N3GsMp 
unexempt,  NGsMpt 
unexpectetl-ly,  NKsP 
unhoped,  NPt3 
unhorse,  NhRs 
unhurt,  NhRt 
unicorn,  NKrn 
uniform-ed-ly,  Yn3F 
uniformity,  Yn3Ft 
unify,  Y3NF 
unimportant,  N1Mp 
unimproved,  NMp 
uninfluenced,  N'Nst 
uninfluential,  N^JNShl 
uninteresting,  NNtsT 
unionist,  N3JS'st 
unique,  N1K 


unison,  N3sN 
unit,  Nt3  or  Y-Nt3 
Unitarian,  NT3Rn 
unite,  Y^t 
unity,  NT3 
United  States,  Nss 
universal,  VrsL 
university,  VrsT 
unlace,  Nls 
unlaced,  Nlst 
unlanched,  NINCt3 
unlatch,  NIC3 
unlawful,  N1F11 
unlearn,  NLrn 
unlettered,  NltrD 
unlike,  N1JK 
unlikely.  NPKl 
unlimber,  NIMpR 
unlimited,  NIMTt 
unload,  N1D 
unlock,  Nl'K 
unloose,  Nls3 
unloosed,  Nlst3 
unloosen,  Nls3N 
unlovely,  N1V1 
unluckier,  NIKr 
unluckiest,  NIKst 
unluckily,  N1KI 
unlucky,  NIK 
unmeasured,  NZhrt3 
unquestionable,  NKvvnB 
unransomed,  NRnstMt 
unread,  NRt 
unready,  NRD 
unreal,  NR11 
unreality,  NR11? 
unreasonable,  NRsNBl 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


X 

urireave,  NRf1 
unrecognized,  NR'Nst 
unrecompensed,  NR'Pnst 
unreconciled,  NR'sLt 
unrecorded,  NRKrt 
unrecumbent,  NR'Bnt 
unredeemed,  NRDMt 
unredressed,  NRDrst 
unregeneration,  NRJshn 
unregarded,  Nr3Gt 
unregretted,  NrGt 
unreined,  NRnt 
unrepentant,  NRPntNt 
unrepresented,  NRP 
unrest,  NRst 
unrestrained,  NRsTrnfc 
unrighteous,  NRTs1 
unripened,  NR*Pnt 
unrivaled,  NR^lt 
unroof,  NRf  s 
unsaddle,  nsDl3 
unsatchel,  nsCl3 
unsatisfactory,  NsTsR 
unscriptural,  nsKrxL 
unscrupulous,  nsKrPls 
unseasoned,  NSsNt 
unselfish,  nsSh 
unsequester,  nsKwstr 
unsettle,  nsTl 
unsociability,  nsShBt 
unsociable,  nsShB 
unsociableness,  nsShBns 
unsocial,  nsShl 
unsquare,  nsKw 
unsubstantial,  NsBsTn 
unsummoned,  nsMnt 
unsupplied,  nsPlt1 


unto, 

untold,  NTH 
untoward,  NTrt 
untwine,  NTwn 
untwist,  NTwst 
unusual,  NZh 
unwilling, 
unwritten, 
unyielding,  NYt-1  or 


upbraid,  PBrt 

uppermost,  uPrMst 

upright,  PRt 

uproot,  P3Rt 

upstairs,  Pstrs 

upward,  Pw?Rt 

Uranus,  yRNs 

Uriah,  yR1 

usage,  Z3J 

usable,  Z3B1 

useful,  S3F1 

useless,  S3Ls 

uselessly,  S3LsL 

usurer,  ZhRR 

usurious,  ZhRs 

usurp,  ZRP 

usurper,  ZRPr 

usury,  ZhR 

Utah,  Y-T3 

Utahan,  r-Tn3 

Utan,  Y-Tn3 

Ute,  Yt3 

utensil,  Y-TNsZ 

Utica,  Y-T3K 

utile,  Y-TL 

utilitarian,  Y-TLtrn 

utilitarianism,  Y-TLtrnsM 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


utility,  Y-TLT 
utilize,  Y-TLs 
utilized,  Y-TLst 
utmost,  TMst 
Utopia,  Y-TP 
Utopian,  Y-TPn 
utter,  Tr 
utterance,  Trns 
uttermost,  TrMst 
uva,  Y-V3 
uvate,  Y-Vt3 
uzcma,  Y-Z3M 


vacancy,  V;K 
vacant,  VKNt 
vacantly,  VKNtZ 
vacation,  VKshn 
vacillancy,  Vs;L 
vacillant,  VsLnt 
vacillate,  VsLt 
vacillation,  VsLshn 
Vanhoesan,  VnSn 
Vanhorn,  VnRn 
Vanhouten,  VnTn 
vanish,  VnSh 
vanquish,  VNgSh 
variety,  VRT 
varnish,  VrnSh 
vaseline,  VsLn 
Vashti,  VShT 
vassal,  Vs3Z 
vassalage,  Vs3LJ 
Vassar,  VsR 
vaulter,  Vltr1 
vegetable-ate,  VJt 
vegetation,  VJshn 


vegetative,  VJtV 
vehement,  VMnt 
vehicle,  VKl 
velocity,  VLst 
vengeance,  VJns 
venire,  Vn*R 
ventilate,  VntLt 
venture,  VNtr 
veracity,  VRst 
verd,  Vrt 
verdant,  VrtNt 
verdict,  VrtKt 
verdure,  Vrtr 
verge,  Vr  J 

verisimilitude,  VrsMLTt 
Vermont,  VrMnt 
Vermonter,  VrMntR 
versatile,  VrsTL 
versus,  Vrss 
vert,  Vrt 
vertant,  VrtNt 
vessel,  VsZ 
vestry,  VsTr 
vesture,  Vstr 
veteran,  Vtrn 
veterinarian,  VtrnRn 
veterinary,  VtrnR 
vexatious,  VKsShs 
via,  V1 

viceversa,  V^Vr  or  VVr 
vicious,  V6ViS 
viciously,  VShsL 
viciousness,  V -6VisXs 
victor,  VKtr 
victory,  VRTR 
victual,  Vt*Z 
victualer,  VtTLr 


338 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MAX  CAT.. 


vigil,  VJ1 
vineyard,  Vn'Rt 
Virginia,  VJJ 
Virginian,  V1  Jn 
visavis,  Vs*V 
vivavoce,  ViV  or  VVS 
vision,  Vshn1 
visionary,  Vshi^R 
visit,  Vs'T 
visitant,  VsirTnt 
visitation,  Vs^shn 
visitor,  Vs'TR 
visor,  VsR 
visual,  VZA1  or  VZhl 
visualize,  VZAls  or  VZbls 
vital,  Vt'Z 
vitativeness,  VTTfNs 
vitiation,  V/S/tshn 
vitiosity,  VShst  or  V£//sT 
vivi  fl  cation,  VVFshn 
vivify,  VVF 
Vladimir,  VltMr 
vocation,  VKshn 
void,  Vt1 
Volapuk,  V1PK 
volatile,  VLtL 
voracity,  VoRst 
votary,  VtR 
vouch,  V3C 
vow,  V3 
voyage,  VJJ 
voyager,  V^r 
voyageur,  V3Jr    or  Vw1- 

Zhr 

Vreeland,  Vi^Lnt 
vulture,  Vltr 


\\" 

waddle,    TJVL 
waft,  W3Ft 

vvafter,  W3Ftr  or  w-Ftr3 
wage,  w-J 

wager,  w-JR  or  w-Jr 
Wahabee,  AVB 
Wahoo,  W3 
wainscot,  WsKt 
Wakefield,  A\^KFlt 
wakeful,  WKf 
wakef ulness,  WKfNs 
wander,  W'Ntr 
wanderer,  ^\' '  XtrR 
ward, 
warder, 
warehouse,  ?rRS 
warren,  ^Rn1 
wary,  %'R 
wash,  TT-Sh1 
washed,  TF-Sht1 
washer,  Tr-Shr1 
Washington,  ShJNgt 
Washingtonian,  Sh'NgtNn 
washout,  ir-Sh1'! 
wast,  St  or  Wst1 
wasteful,  WsF  or  WsTF 
watchfulness,  Cf^s 
watchman,  C1Mn 
watchmen,  Cn1 
watery,  WtaR 
wattle,  Wt3L 
Wauwatosa,  WWtS 
wave,  "NVV 
waved,  AWt 
waver,  WVr 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


we,  w1  or  W 
NVwmler,  WLr  or  WLR 
wedge,  w-J 
Wednesday,  WnsD 
weed,    TFt1 
weedy,  w-D1 
Weehawken,  WKn 
weigher,  WR 
weight,  Wt 
weighed,    Wt 
weighty,  w-T 
welcome,  7/jLK 
Weller,  ™LR 
westerly,  WsRL 
western,  AYsRn 
West  Virginia,  WsVJ 
West  Virginian,  WsVJn 
westward,  WsRt 
wharf,  iitvlli  * 
wharfage,  n?^R1FJ 
wharf  ager,  HwR'FJr 
Avharf-boat,    m/'R'FBt  or 


wharfinger, 


Wharton,      H^RTn     (See 

Yharton.  ) 
whatnot,  Tnt1 
whatsoever,  T^V 
wheat,  nWt1 
Whedge,  nw-J 
whence  ver,    nWns'.V  (See 

sec.  383,  a.) 
whencesoever,      nWnsi  sV 

(See  whencever.  ) 
whenever,  nWV 
whensoever,  nWsV 


whereabout,  Hw>RBt 

whereas,  H?^Rs 

whereat,  H?/jRt 

whereby, 

wherefore, 

wherein, 

whereinto, 

whereof,  H?t'Rf 

whereon,  H?/jRn 

wheresoever, 

whereto,  m/jRT 

whereunto, 

whereupon,  H?/'RPn 

wherever,  HwRV 

whereout,  Hii/'Rt3 

wherewith,  ii^RDh 

wherewithal,  H</.'RDhL 

wherry, 

whey, 

whichsoever,  CsV 

Whidge,  Hw-J1 


whiff, 
whiff  ed-et,  HA\TlFt 
whiffety,  nW^T 
whilst,  H  TFLst1 
whilom,  m/'I/M 
whim,  HW1^!  (See  Hume.) 
whimsical,  nW^MsKl 
whine,  nWn1  (See  hewn.) 
Whipple,  nW1?! 
whirlwind,  Hw?RLnt 
whisker,  nWsKr 
white,  nWt1 
whiten,  nW^N 
Whitehouse,  HWt»S 
whitewash,  HWt1-iF-Sh 
whitey,  Hw1-!1 


340 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


whithersoever,  n  Wtr 1  s  V 
whitish,  HW-TShor  nWt1- 

iSh 

whom,  HU  or  M3 
whomsoever,      Hu2sV     or 

MsV3 
whose  ver,     Hus2iV     (See 

whencever. ) 
whosesoever,    Huss2V    or 

Hus2  <  sV  (See  whenceso- 

ever. ) 

whoso,  HU2S 
whosoever,  Hu2sV 
widow,  w-D1 
widowhood,  w-D*D 
width,  w-DTh 
Wilmington,  wLMXgt 
Winchell,  WnCL 
Winchester,  WnCstr 
winder,  WxXtr 
windrow,  Wnt*R 
Wington,  WNgtN 
winner,  Wn*R 
winter,  W*Xtr 
wintry,  Wnt*R 
Wisconsan,     WsKsN      or 

WsK 
Wisconsin,      WsKsN      or 

WrsK 
Wisconsiner,    WsKsNr  or 

WsKr 

wisdom,  Ws*M 
wistful,  Ws'F 
wit,  Wt1 
witch,  w-C1 

witchery,  w-OR  or  TF-Cr1 
withdraw,  DhJDr 


withdrew,  Dh3Dr 
withe-y,  w-Th1 
withholden,  DhlDn 
without,  Dht,  or  w-T3 
withstand,  Dh^Tnt 
witness,  Wt^'s  or  T'Ns 
witticism,  w-TssOI 
wittier,  w-^R 
wittiest,  w-Tst1 
wittily,  w-TJL 
wittiness,  w-T^Xs 
witty,  w-T1 
woman,  AVMn 
women,  WJMn 
wonder,  WXtr 
wonderful,  WXtrF 
wonderous,  WXtrs 
won't,  Wnt 
wood,   Wt3 
wooden,    Tft3X 
woodiness,  w-D3Xs 
woody,  w-D3 
woo,  W3 
wooed,   TFt3 

Woo-Hoo,  W3  or  W3    HU 
work,  %'R3 
worker,  wR3R 
work-house,  %'R3S 
working-class,  wR3'Kls 
working-man,  ?#R3'Mn 
working-men,  ioR1?Mn 
working-woman,    u'R3'W- 

Mn 
working- women,    //-R l '  W- 

Mn 

workman,  ^'Rri3 
workmanlike,  </jRn3K 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


341 


workmanly,  ?/_'Rn3L 
workmanship,  ?/jRn3Sh 
workmen,  wRai 
work-woman,  ?rR3WMn 
work-women,  ?/<R1WMn 
work-shop,  ?/-R3ShP 
world,  Lt  or  wRLt 
worldling,    LtLNg  or 


worldly,   LtL  or    ?rRLtL 
worrel,  WRi  or  u<RL 
worship,  ?rRSh 
worshipper,  ?rRShr 
Worthington,    wRDh'.Ngt 
write,  Rt1 
writer,  Rtr1 
written,  Rt*N 
Wyatt,  w-T1 
Wynal,  AVnL 
Wynly,  WnL 
Wyoming,  WaM  or  WM- 

Ng 
A\  yominger,  W1  Mr  or  AV- 

MNgr 

X 

Xagua,  AGw3 
Xalapa,  hR3P 
Xanthippe,  ZntP 
X;ivier,  ZVr 
Xenia,  Z1N 
Xenophon,  ZnFn 
Xerxes,  ZRKss 
Ximines,  hMNs 
xilophone,  ZLFn 
Xylander,  ZLNtr 
xyst,  Zst1 


xyster,  Zstr1 
Xystus,  Zs^ 


yacht,   Yt1 
yachter,  Ytr1 
yachtman,  Yt1Mn 
yachtsman,      YtsMn      or 

Y-Ts1Mn 
yager.  YGr 
yah,  Y3 
yahoo,  Y3 
Yak,  Y3K 
Yale,  Yl 
yam,  Y3M 
Yank-ee,  YNgK 
yanolite,  YNZt 
yaourt,  7/Rt3 
yap,  Y-P3 
yarage,  ?/RJ 
yardstick,   yRtsTK   or 

2/Rtst 
Yarmouth,     yRMTh      or 

yR3Th 
yarn,  7/Rn3 
Yarnell, 
yarrish,  y 

yarrow,  yii3  or  Y3R 
yataghan,  Y-TGn 
Yates,  Yts 
Yattaw,  Y-T3 
yaupon,  Y-Pn1 
yaw,  Y1 
yawl,  Yl1 
yawn,  Yn1 
yawp,  Y-P1 
Yazoo,   Y-Z3 


342 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


ycleped,  KIPt 

yearn,  yRn 

yeast,  Yst1 

yeasty,  Ys'T 

Yeauler,  YLr  or  YLR 

Yeddo,  Y-D 

Yeia,  Y*Y 

yelk,  Y1K 

yell,  Yl 

yelled,  Ylt 

yellow,  YL 

yelp,  YIP  or  F-LP 

yelper,  YIPr  or  F-LPr 

Yelverton,  YlVrtN 

yend,  Ynt 

yenite,  YNT 

yeoman,  YMn 

yeomanry,  YMnR 

yeomen,  Y1Mn 

yerk,  7/EK 

Yesso,  Y-S 

yester,  Ystr 

yesterday,  StRD 

yestereve,  YstrV 

yesterevening,   YstrVnNg 

yestern,  YstrN 

yesternight,  YstrNt 

yew,  Y3 

ye  wen,  Y3N 

Yharton,      HyRTn     (Pro. 

Hyarton.    See    Whar- 

ton). 

yielder,  Yltr1 
yieldingly,  Ylt  'Ngl 
yieldance,  Yl^Ns 
yodel,  TiL  or  Y-DL 
Yoder,  Ptr1 


yojan,   YJn 

yoke,  YK 

yokel,  YK1 

Yokohama,   YKM 

yolk,  Y1K  or  YK 

yon,  Yn1 

yonder,  Y*Ntr 

yore,  yR 

York,  yRK 

Yorktown,  yRKTn 

Yosel,  YsZ 

Yoselin,  YsZnor  Y-ZLn 

Yosely,YsZ  or  Y-ZL 

Yosemite,  Y-SMT 

you,  Y  or  Y3 

Youatt,  Y-T3 

young,  YNg  or  Y-Ng 

younger,  YNgr  or   Y-Ngr 

youngest,    YNgst     ?r 

Y-Ngst 
youngster,    YNgstr   or 

Y-Ngstr 
younker,  YNgKr  or  Y-Ng- 

Kr 

yowl,  Yl3 
yowler,  Y13R 
Ypsilanti,  PsLnT 
yttria,  Tr1 
yttrium,  TraM 
Yucatan,  YKTn 
yucca.  YK 
yuf ts,'  Y-Fts 
yulan,  YLn 
yule,  Yl3 
yunx,  YNgKs 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


Zachariah,  ZKR 
Zachary,  ZKr 
Zambezi,  ZMpZ 
/am  boo,  Z3Mp 
Zanzibar,  ZnZBr 
Zend,  Znt 
zenith,  ZNTh 
zephyr,  ZFr 
Zeus,  Zs3 
zigzag,  ZGsG 
Zion,  Z'N 
zizania,  ZZN 
zodiac,  ZtK  or  ZDK 


zoilean,   Z^n 
zoisite,  Z1sT 
zoological,   ZLJK1 
zoophagous,   ZFGs 
zoophyte,  ZFt 
zoozoo,  Z3Z 
Zoroaster,  ZRstr 
zouave,  Z3V  or  zW3V 
zoundz,  Znts3 
zoutch,  Z3C 
zuche,  Z3C 
zygomatic,  ZGMt 
zymotic,  ZMtK 
zythum,  ZThM 


344  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL, 


CHAPTER  X. 

PHEASEOGEAPHY. 


LESSON  40. 

419.  When  two  or  more  words  are  joined  without 
lifting  the  pen  the  combination  is  called  a  phrase. 
This  is  the  speediest  method  of  writing  from  the  fact 
that  the  words  follow  one  another  without  -an  interval 
the  same  as  when  spoken.  Thus  the  time  which  would 
otherwise  be  taken  in  lifting  up  and  putting  down  the 
pen  is  saved.  Phrases  are  usually  formed  of  words 
of  one  syllable,  and,  accordingly,  are  well  adapted  to 
writing  English,  which  is  largely  composed  of  such 
words.  The  first  word  of  a  phrase,  if  it  is  a  stem 
word,  is  generally  written  in  its  proper  position  and 
the  remaining  word  or  words  follow  without  regard  to 
position.  When,  however,  the  first  word  is  a  first  place 
horizontal  stem,  it  is,  if  necessary,  slightly  raised  or 
lowered  in  that  position  in  order  to  give  the  proper 
position  to  the  second  word.  (See  also  sec.  354.)  For 
the  same  reason  the  small  logographs  (see  sees.  377, 
378  and  381)  are  usually  written  initially  in  any  posi- 
tion. There  should  not  be  so  many  words  in  a  phrase 
as  to  cause  the  combination  to  run  too  far  above  or  be- 
low the  line  of  writing — say  more  than  the  length  of 
two  and  one-third  single  length  perpendicular  stems. 
Phrases,  even  in  the  swiftest  writing,  should  not  aver- 
age over  three  words,  monosyllabic  or  otherwise,  to  a 
phrase,  though  sometimes  four,  or  perhaps  five  Avords 
aro  joined,  but  mostly  only  two.  Phrases  should  not 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  345 

be  inconvenient  to  join,  or  be  liable  to  conflict  with 
words,  and  should  usually  be  natural;  that  is  they 
should  consist, of  words  that  are  naturally  thrown  to- 
gether into  phrases  in  speech. 

420.  They  are  written  in  two  ways,  first  by  join- 
ing the  words  together,  as  in  NDhsKs,  in  this  case;  is1, 
1  as;  which  is  on  the  same  principle  as  joining  words 
in  script  longhand,  and  second  by  writing  them  with 
one  stem  or  character,  simple  or  compound;  thus,  Ct, 
which  it;   Crft,   which  are  of   it;  st,  as  to.     Phrases 
written  in  the  second  manner  are  called  Phraseographs, 
while  those    made    in   the  first,  whether  the  separate 
characters  consist  each  of  one  word  or  are  phraseo- 
graphs,  are  termed  Joined  Phrases.     Again,  phraseo- 
graphs  which  contain  stems  are  called  Stem  Phraseo- 
graphs and  those  without  stems  Small  Phraseographs. 
(See  also  sec.  377.) 

a.  Besides  the  two  methods  above  given  in  which 
all  the  words  of  a  phrase  are  either  joined  or  written 
in  one  stroke  there  are  others  in  which  some  of  the 
words  as  well  as  syllables  are  indicated  by  omission  or 
position,  etc.  These  are  designated  by  the  general 
term  Constructed  Phrases  and  will  be  considered  here- 
after in  their  proper  order. 

b.      The  indication    of    phrases   by   the   different 
methods  explained  above  is  termed  Phraseography. 

TICKS,   CURVETS,   SEMICIRCLES,    ETC. 

421.  A   small    logograph     when     joined    initially 
usually  accommodates   itself    to    the    position  of  the 
following  word,  unless  this  is  another  small  logograph 
standing  alone,  in  which  case  the   method   is   usually 
reversed,  the  latter  accommodating  itself  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  former.      As  a  general  rule  second  place 
tick  logographs,  except  "a"  or  "an"  and  the  simi- 
larly positioned  alternative  ticks  for   "how,"  are  not 
joined. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   ilAXUAL. 

422.  In  all  cases  following  a  tick  is  written  initi- 
ally usually  only  when  it  is  inconvenient  to  write  it 
finally.     Furthermore,   a  tick  is  not  usually  prefixed 
to  an  initial  right  Sr  or  Ssr  circle  on  a  straight  stem, 
unless  it  is  in  a  line  with  the  latter.      Lastly  when  a 
logograph  has  two  or  more  forms  the  most  convenient 
one  is  generally  used. 

423.  Sometimes  a  light  tick  or  curvet  logograph 
is  shaded — the  former  throughout  and  the  latter  in  the 
middle — to  indicate  the  addition   of    "the*'    although 
the   word    the    logograph    represents     may    have    no 
aspirated  or  long  vowel  sound.      When  this  is  done  it 
is  l>y  way  of  license  for  the  sake  of  speed. 

424.  In  stenotypy   when  two  or  more  ticks,  cur- 
vets and  semicircles  are  joined  to  one  another — no  stem 
being  attached — the  figure  denoting  the  first  or  third 
position  is  placed  after  the  first  character;  thus,  Ptoid1 
Ktoid;  Ktoid1  Ptoid;  Ktoid  3Rtoid.      (See  also  the  first 
two  sentences  of  par.  421.) 

425.  "The,"  the  most  frequent  word  in  the  Eng- 
lish language  (see  sec.  382),  is  joined  initially,  finally, 
or  medially  by  Ctoid  or    Ktoid;   thus,    CtoidK1,    the 
kingdom;  CtoidR1,  the  ear;  CtoidK,  the  air;  CtoidK3, 
the  hour;    CtoidMn,   the  man;   CtoidMn3,  the  moon; 
Ctoid  W,  the  way;  CtoidS1,  the  sea;  CtoidSh,  the  show: 
CtoiclL1,  the  law;  CtoidPr,  the  principle-al;  CtoidTr1, 
the  tree;  CtoidCr,   the  chair;  CtoidDlns1,  the  idleness; 
CtoidJl3,   the  evangel;  CtoidThr,  the  three;  CtoidShr, 
the  sure;  CtoiclNr1,  the  near;  CtoidFl,  the  full,  Ctoid- 
ThlJ,  the  theology;  Ctoid Yi3,  the  yule;  CtoidsK1,  the 
sky;  CtoidsR1,  the  seer;  CtoidsJr,  the  sojer;  CtoidsShl, 
the  social;  CtoidsPl1,    the  supply;  RtoidB,  the   bay; 
RtoidD3,  the  due;  RtoidC1,  the  watch;  RtoidX1,  the 
inn,  RtoidXn,  the  known;  RtoidNn3,  the  noon-union; 
RtoidKr,  the  crow;  RtoidyR1,  the  year;  RtoidKI,  th(- 
clay;  RtoidPl3,  the  apple,  Rtoid/rR1,  the  Avar;  Rtoi<l- 
Mr,  the  more;  RtoidFr1,  the  free;  Rtonl//-L,  the  Avell; 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  347 

RtoidShlMr,  the  Shelmar;  RtoidsP1,  the  spy;  Rtoids- 
D1,  the  side;  RtoidsJ1,  the  siege;  RtoidsPrt1,  the 
spirit;  RtoidsTr1,  the  straw;  RtoidsFr1,  the  cipher; 
RtoidsThr,  the  Sthray,  RtoidsKl3,  the  school;  Rtoids?r- 
Rn,  the  sworn;  FCtoid,  for  the;  MnCtoid,  man  the; 
NsCtoid,  knows  the;  MRtoid,  may  the;  NnRtoid,  none 
the;  Ms3Rtoid,  mass  the;  FCtoidW,  for  the  way; 
nWRtoidNssT,  when  the  necessity.  Neither  tick  is  ever 
written  alone,  the  dot  for  "the"  then  being  employed 
instead.  (See,  however,  see's.  468,  494:  and  498.) 

426.  "He"  is  joined  initially,  finally  or  medi- 
ally by  Jtoid  or  Rtoid;  thus,  JtoidMt1,  he  might; 
JtoidM,  he  may;  JtoidMst3,  he  massed;  Jtoid  TFt3,  he 
would;  JtoidS1,  he  saw;  JtoidS,  he  so;  JtoidSh,  he 
shall;  JtoidSht3,  he  should;  JtoidL,  he  will;  JtoidRts1, 
he  writes;  JtoidRs,  he  rows;  JtoidRn3,  he  ran;  Rtoid- 
Tht1,  he  thought;  RtoidDhn,  he  then;  RtoidDht3,  he 
that;  RtoidNs,  he  knows;  RtoidNs3,  he  owns;  RtoidC1, 
he  each;  RtoidC3,  he  much;  RtoidD3,  he  had;  Rtoids- 
Tt,  he  stood;  RtoidsD,  he  said;  RtoidsPst,  he  supposed; 
Dh3  Jtoid,  though  he;  SRtoid,  so  he;  F JtoidM,  for  he 
may;  nWRtoidNFtoid,  when  he  knew.  Occasionally 
v.-hen  a  better  or  more  legible  junction  can  be  obtained 
than  with  the  ticks  the  logograph  may  be  joined  medi- 
ally; thus,  F^ne-D,  if  he  had;  F-ne-Ns,  for  he 
knows.  The  logograph  is  seldom  joined  finally. 

a.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  above  ticks  and 
those  for  downward  and  upward  H  are  the  same. 
They  are  stenotyped  as  above  because  they  represent 
a  word  in  accordance  with  section  372.  When,  how- 
ever, they  represent  downward,  or  upward  H  they  are 
stenotyped  h  and  h  in  accordance  with  section  27. 

1.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  upward  H  and  "the" 
ticks  are  the  same.  This,  however,  in  the  above  cases 
— as  well  as  in  others  hereafter — causes  no  difficulty 
since  the  words  are  such  as  do  not  conflict.  (See  also 
the  last  sentence  of  sec.  362.) 


348  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

b.  If  desired  "he"  may  be  represented  finally  and 
medially  by  Ctoid  instead  of  Jtoid.      In  which  case  it 
will  not  conflict  with  the   downward  tick    for  "the". 
(See  also  rem.  1.) 

c.  'When  a  phrase  containing  a  medial  semicircle 
logograph  is  indicated  in  stenotypy,  the  semicircle  is 
always  connected  by  a   hyphen  to  both  the  preceding 
and   the   following   stem,   as  in   the   phrase  "for  he 
knows"  in   paragraph   426.       If,  however,    a   circle 
precedes  or  follows  it,  the  hyphen  is  omitted.     The 
logograph  is  thus  indicated  the  same  as  in  the  Elemen- 
tary Style  when  it  occurs  as  a  vowel.     The  same  course 
is  pursued  with  the  small  W  and  Y  angles  wrhen  they 
occur  in  phrases.      (See  see's.  438,  439  and  440.) 

-4-27.  The  phrase  "of  the"  is  represented  alone  or 
initially  by  Btoid;  thus,  Btoid1,  of  the;  BtoidKs1  of 
the  cause;  BtoidKs,  of  the  case;  BtoidKs3  of  the 
cues;  BtoidT1,  of  the  time;  BtoidD,  of  the  day; 
BtoidF3,  of  the  few;  BtoidL1  of  the  law;  BtoidyR1, 
of  the  year;  BtoidR,  of  the  air;  BtoidR3,  of  the 
hour. 

428.  "How"  is  joined  initially  in  the  second  posi- 
tion by  DtoidorRtoid  (see  see's.  372,  27  and  421)  ac- 
cording   to    convenience;    thus,    DtoidR,    how    are; 
DtoidM,   how    may;    Rtoid^D,    how    do;    Rtoid2Xof, 
how  long.     It  is  also  joined  medially  by   these  char- 
acters and  Jtoid;  as  in  FDtoidC,  for  how  much;  Tl- 
RtoidNg,  tell  how  long;   FJtoidMN,  for  how  many; 
FJtoidNg,  for  how  long.     These  ticks  are  never  used 
finally  or  alone. 

429.  "On"  is  joined  initially  by  the  logograph  or 
by  Ktoid  when  the  logograph  will  not  join  well;  thus, 
TtoidM1,  on   my;  TtoidMs3,    on  alms;  TtoidWn,  on 
one;  TtoidZ3,   on  those;    TtoidDhr,  on   their;  Ttoid- 
Kl1,  on  call;  TtoidDht3,  on  that;  TtoidDh1,  on  thy; 
TtoidDh,  on  them;  KtoidT,  on  it;     KtoidX,   on   no; 
KtoidV3,   on   view;   KtoidSh,   on    show.      The  logo- 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  349 

graph  may  also  occasionally  be  joined  finally  or  med- 
ially; thus,  KTtoid,  come  on;  GTtoid,  goon;  KTtoid- 
KTtoid,  come  on,  come  on;  GTtoidGTtoid,  go  on, 
go  on. 

430.  The    phrase    "on  the"  is  indicated  alone  or 
initially  by  Dtoid,  or   by  Gtoid  when  the   former  will 
not   join    conveniently;  thus,   DtoidK1,  on    the    key; 
DtoidKs,  on  the  case;  DtoidRf3,  on  the  roof;  Dtoid- 
S1,  on  the  sea;  DtoidRTh,  on  the  earth;   DtoidLnt3, 
on  the  land;  DtoidPr,   on  the  principle-al;   DtoidTr, 
on  the  tray;  DtoidTr3,  on  the  true;  DtoidsTrt1,   on 
the   street;    DtoidKIM,   on  the  claim;  DtoidwR1,   on 
the   war,    DtoidNr1,    on  the   near;  GtoidT1,    on   the 
time;    GtoidD,    on    the    day;    GtoidDshn3,     on    the 
addition. 

431.  "A"  or  "an"  is  joined  finally  or  medially  by 
the  logograph  or  by  Ptoid,  the  preference  when    con- 
venient being  usually  given  to  the  latter.      It  is  also 
joined  by  Ttoid  after  Th  or  Dh  and  upward  L  without 
appendages;  thus,  PKtoid,  paya-an;  BKtoid,  but  a-an; 
MKtoid,  may  a-an ;  FPtoid,  for  a-an;  N1  Ptoid,  in  a-an; 
DPtoid,    do   a-an;    ThTtoid,    think    a-an,    Dh3Ttoid, 
though  a-an;  LTtoid,  lay  a-an;  PKtoidMn,  pay  a  man; 
nWPtoidGrt,    when    a    great;    N1PtofdMMnt,    in    a 
moment;  ThTtoidMn,    think   a   man.      Ktoid    should 
always    be  made  horizontally  and  Ttoid   perpendicu- 
larly, otherwise  in  rapid  writing  they  may  sometimes 
conflict  respectively  with  Rtoid  and  Ctoid  for  '  'the. ' ' 
Where  doubt  would   occur  they  should   be   omitted. 
"A"  or  "an"  is  also  joined  initially  by  the  logograph 
or  Ttoid,  the  latter  being  employed  when  the  former 
will  not  join  conveniently;    thus,  KtoidRf1,    a   reef; 
KtoidR,    a   ray;    KtoidR3,     an    hour;    Ktoid Mn1,    a 
mine;  KtoidMn,  a  man;  KtoidMn3,  a  moon;  KtoidSh, 
a  show;  KtoidL1,  a  law;  KtoidPl3,  an  apple;  Ktoid- 
Bw3,    a   bois;  KtoidsKr1,    a  seeker;  Ktoid&KrB1,    n 
scribe;    KtoidsT,    a    straw;    KtoidsMr,    a     summer; 


.°>.")0  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

KtoidsThr,  a  Sthray,  KtoidsNr1,  a  signer :  Ktoid- 
sXgr1,  a  singer;  KtoidsW,  a  sway;  KtoidsSK,  a  Cicero; 
KtoidsShB,  a  sociable;  TtoidK1,  a  key;  TtoidKs,  a 
case;  TtoidK3,  a  cow;  TtoidW1,  a  wee;  TtoidW,  a 
way;  TtoidS1,  a  sea;  Ttoid  £/<Mr,  a  Shoraer;  Ttoid- 
Dl1,  an  idle;  TtoiclClt1,  a  child;  TtoidFlt1,  a  flight; 
TtoidFwnTs,  a  Fuentes;  TtoidThlPss,  a  thlipsis; 
TtoidThwK,  a  thwack;  TtoidYl,  a  Yale;  TtoidYl3,  a 
yule;  TtoidsPl^a  supply;  TtoidsDl3,  a  saddle;  Ttoids- 
Cl3,  a  satchel;  TtoidsVl1,  a  civil;  TtoidsThl,  a  Sethel; 
TtoidsYl,  a  Syoi. 

a.  Ttoid  is  employed  initially  only   as   in    the  ex- 
amples just  given.      In  all  other  cases  Ktoid  is  written. 

b.  If  preferred  Ktoid  only  may  be  employed  in- 
itially for  "a"  or  "an''  —Ttoid  being  abolished. 

432.  "I"  is  joined  finally  or  medially  by  the  ticks 
for  "a"  or  "an"  above,  namely,  Ktoid,  Ptoid  and 
Ttoid  and  in  the  same  manner:  thus,  MKtoid,  may  I; 
BKtoid,  but  I;  F'Ptoid,  if  I;  ThTtoid,  think  I;  Dh3- 
Ttoid,  though  I;  LTtoid,  lo,  I;  nWKtoidN,  when  I 
know;  BKtoidM,  but  I  may;  FJPtoid^R,  if  I  were; 
ThTtoidM,  think  I  may.  "Ktoid  and  Ttoid  should 
always  be  made  horizontally  and  perpendicularly, 
otherwise  they  may  occasionally  conflict  with  Rtoid 
and  Jtoid  for  "he."  Where  doubt  might  occur  they 
should  be  omitted.  "I"  is  also  joined  initially  by  the 
logograph,  Ptoid,  Ttoid  or  Ktoid;  thus,  i-Knt1,  I  can 
not;  i-K,  I  come;  PtoidMt1,  I  might;  PtoidM,  I  am- 
may;  Ptoid  W,  I  weigh;  PtoidSh1,  I  wish;  PtoidSh, 
I  shall;  PtoidSht3,  I  should;  PtoidC3,  I  much;  Ptoid- 
RsV,  I  receive;  Ptoid V3,  I  view;  PtoidTh3,  I  thank; 
Ptoid Yt,  I  yet;  PtoidsTt1,  I  sighted;  PtoidsD,  I  said; 
PtoidsPst,  I  supposed;  Ptoid*-Pr3Xg,  I  sprang;  Ptoid- 
sTrK,  I  struck;  PtoidsK1^!,  I  scheme;  TtoidS1.  1 
see;  TtoidZ,  I  was;  KtoidP,  I  pay;  KtoidT1,  I  tie; 
KtoidD,  I  do;  KtoidD3,  I  had;  KtoidDt1,  I  did; 
KtoidN,  I  know,  KtoidN3,  I  own.  Occasionally  when 


THE    PHO.VOGUAPIIJC    MAXt'AL.  351 

a  better  or  more  legible  junction  can  be  obtained  than 
with  the  ticks  the  logograph  may  be  joined  medially; 
thus,  H  \Y-i-G,  when  I  go;  nW-i-sh,  when  I  shall. 
The  logograph  is  seldom  joined  finally. 

a.  Ttoid  is  usually  joined  initially  only  to  the  S 
stem  without  prependages. 

b.  If  preferred  the  logograph  may  be  used  before 
N,  S  and  Sh  instead  of  Ktoid,  Ttoid  and  Ptoid;  thus, 
i-N,  I  know;  i-N3,  I  own;  i-S1,  I  see;  i-Z,  I  was;  i-Sh1, 
I  wish;  i-Sh,  I  shall. 

433.  "And,"  the  second  most  frequent  word  in  the 
English  language  (see  also  sec.  425),  is  joined  initially 
by  the  logograph,   or  Shtoid;  thus   /SAtoidN1,  and  in; 
.S'AtoklN,  and  know;    xS'AtoidN3,    and  own;  /S'AtoidF1, 
and  if;   xS'AtoidF,    and  for;   /SAtoid'V*,    and  however; 
(SAtoidS1,  and  see;   tfMoidS,    and    so;  /S7/toidSh,  and 
shall;   AS'AtoidP,   and  up;  xS'AtoidC1,  and  each;   /67/toid- 
C,  and  which;   »S7<toidC3,  and  much;    /67/toid^/R,    and 
your;  xS'AtoidsF,  and  as  for;  ShtoidM1,  and  me;  Shtoid- 
M,  and  him;  ShtoidL,  and  will;  ShtoidK,  and  come. 
Neither  character  is  ever  joined  finally  or   medially. 
(See  also  see's.  492  and  498.) 

a.  If  desired   "and"  may  also  be  joined  medially 
and  finally  by  Ktoid,  Ttoid  and  Ptoid  the  same  as  "a" 
or  "an." 

b.  If  the  upward  alternative   tick  for   "a"  is  em- 
ployed to  represent  "and"  (see  sec.   371)  it  should  be 
joined  only  in  the  second   position    to  avoid  conflict 
with  the  upward  tick  for  '  'the. " 

434.  The  phrase  ''and  the"  is  indicated  alone  or 
initially  by  Zhtoid;  thus,   Zhtoid  and  the;    ZhtoidT1, 
and  the  time;  ZhtoidKss1,  and  the  causes;  ZhtoidKss, 
and  the  cases;  ZhtoidMs3,  and  the  moose. 

435.  "All  "  is  joined  initially  by  the  logograph  or 
by    upward    L,    the  latter  in   the   first    position  and 
usually   to    stems  only;  thus,  FtoidB,  all  be;  FtoidP, 
all  day;  FtoidC,  all  which;  FtoidSh,   all  shall;  Ftoid- 


352  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

Sht,  all  should;  FtoidX1,  all  annoy;  FtoidX,  all 
know;  FtoidXs3,  all  news;  FtoidXgs1,  all  things; 
FtoidDh1,  all  thy;  FtoidDh,  all  they;  FtoidDh3,  all 
thou;  FtoidY1,  all  ye;  FtoidYnt1,  all  beyond;  Ftoid- 
L1,  all  law;  FtoidwL1,  all  well;  LUitrs,  all  writers; 
L1^!,  all  my-inay;  L^Mn,  all  men;  L^VVs,  all  ways; 
LtS,  all  see-say. 

436.  The  phrase    "all  the"   is  indicated  alone  or 
initially,  by  Vtoid,;  thus,  Vtoid1,  all  the;  VtoidT1, 
all  the  time;  VtoidD,  all  the  day;  VtoidDs3,  all  the 
dues;  VtoidXs1,    all  the  influence;  VtoidXn,    all  the 
known;  VtoidXs3,  all  the  news. 

437.  The  phrase  "already  the"  may  be  represent- 
ed by  shading  the  logograph;  thus,    TFtoid1,  already 
the.     Both  the  logograph  and  phraseograph  are  usually 
written  alone. 

438.  "We"  is  joined  initially,   finally  or  medially 
by  the  logograph  or  the  alternative  form  w  (see  see's. 
60,  a  and  62);  thus  w-T1,  we  ought;  w-P,  we    pay; 
w-V,  we  have;   w-Th3,  we    thank;    TF-W,  we   weigh; 
TF-Rt1,  we  write;  w-S,  we  say;  PF-Sh1,  we  wish;  ir-M, 
we  may;   ir-X,  we  know;  TF-X3,  we  own;  D-w,  do  we; 
FMv,  if  we;  nW-vr,  when  we;  Dh-w-Th,    though  we 
think;  nW-ir-K,  when  we  come. 

439.  "You"  is  joined  initially,   finally  or  medially 
by  the  logograph  or  the  alternate  form  Y  (see  see's. 
60,  a  and  62);  thus,  Y-T,  you  ought;  Y-V,   you  have; 
Y-Th3,  you  thank;  Y-Yt,  you  yet;  Y-Sh1,    you  wish;  Y- 
"NV,  you  wreigh;  Y-S,  you  say;  Y-N,  you  know;  Y-X3, 
you  own;  F-Mt1,  you  might;   F-M,  you  may;   F-Rt1, 
you  write;  F-K,  you  come;  F-R,  you  are;  r-L,  you  will : 
X-Y,  know  you;  R-Y,  are  you;  M-F,  may  you;  S-F,  so 
you;  L-F,  will  you;  F^Y-Th,  if  you  think;  L-Y-Xt,  will 
you  not;R-Y-Xt,  are  you  noti  F^r-M,  if  you  may. 

a;     AVhen  "you"  occurs  medially   before  X  the  sec- 
ond tick  of  F  may,  by  wray  of  licence,  be  written  Ctoid; 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  353 

thus,  DRtoidCtoidN,  do  you  know;  Dt^RtoidCtoidNt, 
did  you  not. 

440.  "AVho"  or  "whom"  is  joined  initially,  finally 
or  medially  by  the  logograph  or  the  alternative  form 
u — the  initial  shading  for  the  aspirate  being  omitted 
(see  also  sec.  373);  thus,  nu-Tnt1,  who-m  ought  not; 
Hu-D,  who  do;    nu-D3,   who  had;   nu-Kn,   who   can; 
nu-NCtoid,  who  now;  Hu-Ns3,  who  owns;  -w-Mt1,  who 
might;  u-M,  who  may;  'w-Mst3,  who  massed;  ^-Rt1, 
who  write;  u-Rt,  who  wrote;  u-R3,  who-m  our;  Ftoid1- 
u,  all  who;  N-HU,  know  who-m;  MN-nu,  many  who; 
B-w,  but  who-m;  sM-w,  some  who;  F-Hu-Dhs,  for  who- 
m  this;     F-nusDhs,    far  who  is  this;   H  TFR-nu-Kn, 
where  who  can;  Dh-iZ-Kn,  they  who  can;  Dh-w-S,  they 
who  say;  S-iZ-Kn,  so  who-m  can;  B-wsDhr,  but  who  is 
their-re.     Sometimes  medially  between  a  downward 
straight  stem  or  right  curve  and  a  left  curve  the  right 
half  circle  may  be  changed  into  a  hook  on  the  convex 
side   of    the    latter;    thus,     B-iZ-Ns,   but   who    knows; 
DU-w-V,  did  who  have;  Ow-Ths,    which  who  thinks. 
The  logograph  is  not  often  joined  finally. 

441.  "Whose"  may  be  joined  in  the  same  manner 
as  "who-m,"    when  convenient;    thus,   HusT1,   whose 
time;   HusT,  whose  it;  HussT,  whose  is  it;   T3-ws,   at 
whose;    NMiusNM,   in  whose  name;   T-wsRKwst,  at 
whose  request,     us  is  not  usually  employed  initially 
since  it  would  then  bo  liable  to  conflict  Avith  tho  right 
N  curl.     (See  sec.  298.) 

442.  "Other"  is  joined  initially,  finally  or  medi- 
ally by  the  logograph  or  the  alternative  form  u\  thus, 
u-Ngs1,   other  things;  u-Ngs,   other  languages;  u-Ns3, 
other  news;  u-Kss1,  other  causes;  u-Kss,  other  cases; 
u-Ts1,   other  times;  u-Ds,    other    days;    u-Ds3,  other 
dues;  u-Ss1,   other  seas;  u-Shs3,  other  shoes;  -w-Mn1, 
other  men ;  i^-Mn,  other  man ;  w-Mn3 ,  other  moon ;  ><-Ls l , 
other   laws;  'w-W'Ks,    other  walks;  N^u  any    other; 
N-u,  no  other;  M1-^,  my  other;  Dh'-u,    with    other; 


3.">4  THK   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

C1-?;,  each  other;  Vr-w,  every  other;  NMi-Wn,  any 
other  one;  N8-u-Wn,  no  other  one;  Vr-u-Wn,  every 
other  one. 

443.  "Others"  or  "otherwise"  may,  when  con- 
venient, be  joined  finally;  thus,  MX-us,  many  others- 
otherwise;  sM-NS,  some  others-otherwise. 

44:4.  Each  of  the  preceding  small  logographs 
(see's.  425  to  443)  should  be  joined  only  when  it  will 
form  an  angle  with  the  preceding  or  following  wont. 
When  it  will  not  do  this  the  logograph  should  be 
Avritten  alone  in  its  proper  position  as  given  in  the 
list  in  section  381.  None  of  the  tick,  curvet  or  half 
circle  logographs  except  the  "and"  tick,  if  the  latter 
should  be  used  as  a  logograph  (see  sec.  371),  is  ever 
joined  to  a  vowel  word  of  two  or  more  syllables. 

a.  A  tick  will,  if  necessary,  join  at  the  same 
angle  to  any  letter  to  which  its  full  length  stem  will 
join.  If  at  any  time  words  which  are  represented  by 
the  same  character  should  be  in  danger  of  conflicting 
with  each  other,  one  of  them  should  be  written  alone 
with  the  logograph.  This,  however,  will  seldom  if 
ever  occur. 

LESSON  41. 
CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS. 


THE    S    CIRCLE. 

445.     The  S  circle  may  be  used: 

a.  Either  initially,  finally  or  both  to  represent 
either  of  the  logographs  "as,  has,  is"  or  "his;"  in 
which  case  it  usually  accommodates  itself  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  word  to  which  it  is  attached;  thus,  sDh1, 
as-is  thy;  sB3  as-has-is-his  to  be;  sTr3,  as-is  true,  syR, 
as-is  your;  s?rR,  as  were;  sFrnt,  his  friend;  sPtoid1, 
has-is  of;  sKtoid1,  is-his  a;  sKtoid,  as-has  a;  sCtoid, ' 
is-his  the;  sCtoid,  as-has  the;  sw1  (left  circle),  as  we; 


'I'll!-:    PHONOGRAPHIC    MAXl'AL. 


si'  (right  circle),  as  yon;  SHU,  as-has-is  who;  sPtoid'M, 
as  1  am-may;  slttoidD3,  as  I  had;  s-i-G,  as  I  go;  Ts,  it 
is-has;  Psss,  poses  his,  Jsts,  just  as;  Ptsoid1,  of  as-his; 
mis,  who  as-hus-is-his;  £Atsoid,  and  as-has-is-his;  ws1 
(left  circle),  we  as;  rs  (right  circle),  you  as;  sJtsoid, 
as  no.  has-is;  sGts,  as-is  good  as;  sGrts,  as-is  great  as. 
It  may  also  be  employed  medially  to  represent  the 
above  words;  thus,  TsBn,  it  has  been,  TsNt,  it  is  not; 
-V/itsoidXt,  and  is  not;  sJtsoid^n,  as  he  has  been; 
srsAl,  as  you  seem.  ''His"  should  be  used  after  verbs 
with  caution,  since  it  is  liable  to  conflict  in  some  in- 
stances with  another  form  of  the  verb;  as  "keep  his*' 
with  "keeps,  put  his"  with  "puts."  Where  doubt 
would  arise  the  circle  S  should  be  written  either  separ- 
ately or  initially  on  the  following  word. 

b.  Finally  to    represent    "us";   as  in  the   phrases 
Fs,  for  us;  Pns,  upon  us;  Bfs,  above  us;  Fts,  after  us; 
Gnsts,    against  us;    Ttsoid1,    on   us,    /S'Atsoid,  and  us; 
Ptsoid1,    of    us.      liUs"   like    "his"   (see  par.   a)  will 
sometimes  conflict  with  another  form  of  the  verb,  as 
''take  us"  with  "takes,  let  us"  with   "lets."     In  such 
cases  the  stem  S  should  be  written. 

c.  After  the  possessive  case   to  represent  "self" 
and  is  then  written  disjoined  under  or  after  the  middle 
of  the  preceding  stem;  thus,  Mnsts,  man's  self;  Wnsis, 
one's  self;  JrJsis,  George's  self;  JnsMs,  John's  self; 
JMis,  Jame's  self.    (For  the  manner  of  writing  "self" 
as  a  prelix  or  affix,  see  see's.  304  to  306  and  341.) 

d.  Finally  to    represent    "theirs"  in    combination 
with   the   Ter  hook  and  lengthening   principle.    (See 
see's.  457,  c  and  478,  e.) 

e.  Finally   to    represent    "ours"    and     "self"     in 
combination  with  an  R  or  X  hook.      (See  see's.  463, 
464  and  468,  f,  g. 

f.  Finally  to  represent  "one's"  or  "ones"  in  com- 
bination with  the  oS  hook.      (See  sec.  466.) 


THE   PHOXOGKAPHIC    MANUAL. 


g.  Finally  to  represent  "its*'  in  combination  with 
the  halving  principle.  (See  sec.  477.) 

446.  The  S   circle   may  also  usually  be   attached 
initially,    finally   or    both    to   any   other   phrases   or 
phraseographs  that  may  be  hereafter  mentioned  to  in- 
dicate either  of  the  words  in  paragraph  a  of  the  above 
section. 

1.  In  stenotypy  when  a  tick  logograph  is  followed 
by  a  circle  logograpfy  the  latter  is  written  before  the 
termination  Oid;  thus,  Ptsoid1,  of  his.  When  it  is 
followed  by  a  circle  that  begins  a  stem  word,  the  circle 
is  written  after  the  Oid;  thus,  CtoidsM,  the  same. 

THE    Ss    CIRCLE. 

447.  The  Ss,  or  double  size,  circle  may  be  used: 

a.  Alone  to  indicate  the  addition  of   "as,  has,  is, 
his"  or  '  'us"  to  the  logograph  represented  by  the  small 
circle;  thus,  ss1,  his  as,  his  has,  his  is,  is  as,   is  his; 
ss,  as  has,  as  his,  as  is,  has  as,  has  his,  has  us. 

b.  Initially  on  a  simple  stem  or  on  an  R  hooked 
straight  one    and  initially   or  finally  on  a  tick  logo- 
graph  and  sometimes  on  a  half  circle  one  to  indicate 
the  addition  of  any  of  the  phrases  in  the  above  para- 
graph, the  double  circle  usually  accommodating  itself 
to   the   position   of   the  following  word;  thus,  ssC3, 
has-is  as  much;  ssBn,  as  has  been;  ssGt,  is  as  good; 
ssF1,  is  as  if;  ssN3,  as-has-is-his  own;  ssXg1,  has-is  as 
long;    ssBr3,    as-has-is-his    number;    ssGrt,    has-is    as 
great;  ssPtoid1^!,  is  as  I  am-may;  ssRtoidTh,  is  as  I 
think;  ssKtoid,  is  as  a-an,  his  is  a-an,  etc.;  ssJtoid1, 
is  as  he;  ssCtoid1,  is  as  the,  etc.,  Jtssoid1,  he  is  as-his, 
etc.  ;  HUSS,  who  is  as-his,  etc. 

c.  Initially  or  finally  to   indicate   the   addition  of 
an  S  circle  logograph,  namely,  "as,  has,  is"  or  "his," 
to  a  stem  beginning  or  ending  with  the  small  circle; 
the  double  circle,  when  initial,  accommodating  itself  to 

O 

the  position  of  the  following  word;  thus,  ssC,  as-has-is 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  357 

such;  ssP1,  as-has-is-his  speech;  ssD,  as-has-is  said;  ss- 
Trf1 ,  as-has-is-his  strife;  ssDrshn,  as-has-is-his  considera- 
tion; ssM,  as-has-is  some;  ssN3,  as-is  soon;  Tss,  it  is  as- 
his;  Dhss,  this  as-has-is  his;  Pss,  pays  as-his;  Rss,  raise 
as-his;  Xss,  knows  as-has-is-his;  ssXs,  as  soon  as;  ssNss, 
us  soon  as  hi.s-is.  It  may  also  be  employed  medially 
as  above;  thus,  TssD,  it  is  said;  TssGts,  it  is  as  good 
'as;  PtssoidC3,  of  his  as  much;  HessC3  or  JtssoidC3,  he 
is  as  much. 

(1.  Finally  to  indicate  the  addition  of  "us"  to  a 
stem  ending  with  the  small  circle;  thus,  Pss,  pays  us; 
Rss,  raise  us;  Xss,  knows  us. 

e.  After  the  possessive  case  to  represent  '  'selves, " 
and  is  then  written  disjoined  under  or  near  the  middle 
of   the   preceding  word;  thus,  Mns^ss,  men's  selves; 
Bsu.ss,    boys'  selves.     (For   "selves"  as   an   affix   see 
sec.  341.) 

f.  Finally  to  represent    "selves"  in  combination 
with  an  R  or  X  hook.      (See  see's.  465  and  468,  h. ) 

448.  The  Ss  circle  may  also  usually  be  attached 
initially  or  finally  to  any  other  phrases  or  phraseo- 
graphs  that  may  be   hereafter  mentioned   to   indicate 
either  of   the    phraseographs   in    paragraph  a  of  the 
above  section. 

THE  ST  LOOP. 

449.  The  St  loop  made  downward  as  a  left  loop  in 
the  direction  of  Ch  may  be  used  alone  in  the  first  and 
second  positions  to  indicate   the  addition  of   "to"  or 
''too"  to  the  S  circle  logographs;  thus,   st1,  is-his  to- 
too;  st,  as-has  to-too.     The  S  circle  may  be  added  on 
the  inside  of  the  upper  end,   the  latter  forming  one 
side  of  it;  thus,  sts,  is  to  his-us,    his  too  is;  sts,    as  to 
his-us,  has  to  as.      These  forms  are  used  for   steno- 
graphic convenience   instead  of  the  S  circle  or  circles 
and  stem  T. 

450.  The  St  loopas  above  may  be  attached  initially 


358  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

to  a  horizontal  or  downward  tick,  left  curve  or  straight 
stem  without  an  initial  hook,  the  tick  or  stem  usually 
accommodating  itself  to  the  position  of  the  loop,  but 
starting  from  its  upper  end  and  continuing  clear  of  it; 
thus,  st'rKtoid,  is  to  a-an ;  st-Ktoid,  astoa-an;  st'-Ctoid, 
is  to  the;  st-Ctoid,  as  to  the;  st1-Dh,  is  to  them;  st2-Dh, 
as  to  them;  st'-T,  is  to  it;  st2-T,  as  to  it;  st-C1,  is  to 
each;  st-C,  is  to  which;  st2-C,  as  to  which;  stJ-K,  is  to 
come;  st^P,  is  to  pay;  st'-N,  is  to  know;  sts'-N,  is  to 
his  own;  sts2-N,  as  to  his  own;  sts^sN,  is  to  his  son; 
stss-sN,  as  to  his  son. 

a.  The  detached  form  of  the  St  loop  is  seldom  em- 
ployed medially  or  finally  in  connection  with  stemsonly. 

451.  The  St  loop  may  be  used  finally  in  the  ordi- 
nary manner: 

a.  On   the   stems  Dh  and  Dht  to   represent   the 
words    "wast"  and    "hast,"  or  St  in    "hadst;"   thus, 
Dhst1,    thou   wast;   Dhst3,    thou    hast;    Dhtst3,    thou 
hadst. 

b.  In  the  combination  Tlst  to  represent  St  in  the 
word  "least;"  thus,  Tlst3,  at  least. 

THE    STR    LOOP. 

452.  The  Str  loop  made  downward  as  a  left  loop 
in  the  direction  of  Ch  may  be  used  alone  to  indicate 
the  addition  of  ''their"  to  the  St  loopasin  section  415, 
the  S  circle  being  added  in  the  same  manner  as  to  the 
latter  to  indicate  the  possessive;  thus,  str1,  is  to  their; 
strs1,  is  to  theirs;  str,  as  to  their;  strs,   as  to  theirs. 
These  forms  are  used  instead  of  the  S  circle  or  circles 
arid  the  stem  T  with  the  Ter  hook. 

453.  The  Str  loop  may  be  joined  initially  to  the 
same  stems  as  the  St  loop  in  section  450  and  in  the 
same  manner. 

a.  The  detached  form  of  the  Str  loop  is  seldom 
employed  medially  or  finally  in  connection  with  .stems 
only. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


454.  The  Str  loop  may  bo  attached  finally  to  a  sin- 
gle or  double  length  stein  to  represent  the  word 
"store,"  the  S  circle  being  added  for  the  plural;  thus; 
7/Tstr3,  hat  store;  B3Kstr,  book  store;  Ntrstr,  another 
store;  DrGstr,  drug  store;  Fl/?str,  flower  store;  Shstr3, 
shoe  store;  Mstr1,  my  store;  Rstr3,  our  store;  yRstr, 
your  store;  Tstrs1,  tea  stores;  GrsRstrs,  grocery 
stores. 

LESSON  42. 

HOOKS,     ETC. 


5 


455.  "Are"  or  "our"  is  represented  by  the  R  hook 
and  "all"  or    "will"  by  the  L  hook  on  most  simple 
stem  logographs  which  represent  pronouns,   preposi- 
tions or  conjunctions  and  on  the  logograph  for  the 
adjective  "such;"  thus,  Br,   but  are-our;  Br1,  by  our; 
Or,  which  are-our;  sCr,  such  are;  Dhr,  they  are;  Nr1, 
in  our;  Bl1,  by  all;  Bl,  but  will;  Tl3,  at  all;  sTl,  as  it 
will;  Cl1,  each  will;  Cl,  which  will;sCl3,  as  much  will; 
sCl,  such  will;  Fl1,  if  all;  Fl,  for  all;  Dhl1,  with  all; 
Dhl,  they  will;  Nl1,  in  all;    Shi1,  she  will.     (See  also 
sec.  468,  a.)     These  hooks  are  not  usually  employed 
as  above  on  nouns  or  verbs. 

1.  When  "all"  and  "will"  can  both  be  written  on 
the  same  stem  by  the  L  hook,  "will"  is  given  the 
preference,  and  "all"  is  written  with  the  logograph, 
except  on  the  logographs  "for"  and  "at"  when  "all" 
is  given  the  preference. 

a.  '  'Were"  is  represented  by  the  R  hook  on  the 
logographs  "it,  which"  and  "such"  written  in  the 
third  position;  thus,  Tr3,  it  were;  sTr3,  as  it  were; 
Or3,  which  were;  sCr3,  such  were. 

456.  The    small   W    hook   sometimes    represents 
kt\vo,v  or  "with"  on  upward  R  and  "we"  on  upward  L, 
while  the  small  Y  hook  on   upward  R  sometimes  re- 
presents   "ye"  or   "you;"  thus,  ?/.'R,  Ave  are;  s>rR,  as 


360  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

we  are;  w?R3,  with  our;  w?L,  we  will;  yR1,  ye  are;  yR, 
you  are;  syR,  as  you  are. 

457.  "Their,  there"   or   "they  are"  is  added  to  a 
straight  stem  by  the  Ter  hook;  as  in  the  phrases  Btr1, 
by  their-there;  Btr,  but  their-there-they  are;  Btr3,  to 
be  their-there;  Ttr,  to  their;  Ttr1,  tie  their-there;  Pr1- 
Ctr,  preach  their-there.     (See  also  sec.  478.) 

a.  When  "there"  occurs  in  a  compound  word  in  a 
phrase,  it  is  usually  written  with  the  logograph  and 
not  with  the  Ter  hook;  thus,  D3DhrF,   had  therefore, 
and  not  Dtr3F.     (See  also  sec.  478,  c.) 

b.  The  Ter  hook  as  above  is  not  usually  written 
finally  after  nouns  and  is  never  employed  to  add  the 
word  "other."     (See  also  sec.  478,  d.) 

c.  "Theirs"  may  be  added  by  the  Ter  hook  and 
circleS  combined;  thus,  Btrs1,  by  theirs;  R^trs,  reap 
theirs. 

458.  The  Shun  hook  may  be  employed  to  indicate 
the  word  "ocean;"   thus,    TlntKshn  (or  TLntKshn), 
Atlantic   ocean;  PsFKshn,    Pacific   ocean;    RKKshn, 
Arctic  ocean,  NtRKKshn,  Antartic  ocean;  Nt1Xshn, 
Indian  ocean, 

459.  The  S  circle  and  Shun  curl  may  be  used  to 
represent  the  word  "session;"  thus,  DhsssAn,  this  ses- 
sion;  NssAw,  next   session;  NtrssA?i1,    entire  session; 
NtrssAw,  another  session;  W1Ntrs«A»l    winter  session; 

spring  session;  sMrssAw,  summer  session; 
,  autumn  session;  KsTrsshn,  extra  session. 

460.  The  N  final  hook  may  be  used  to  represent: 

a.  "Own,  one"  and  "in"  in  such  phrases  as  Rn3, 
our  own;  yRn3,  your  own;  Dhrn,   their   own;  sMn, 
some   one;   Ntrn,    another    one;   u-Rn1,    we   are    in. 
"Own"  may  also  be  added  to  the  Ter  hook  by  a  small 
N  hook  made  within  it;  thus,  Btrn1,  by  their  own; 
P^Ctrn,  preach  their  own. 

b.  "Than"    (after   adjectives   and  adverbs  in  the 
comparative   degree);    thus,    KwKrn1,   quicker   than; 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  361 

Frtrn,  further  than;  Fltrn1,  fleeter  than.  "Than" 
may  also  be  added  by  a  small  N  hook  written  on  the 
inside  of  theTer  hook;  thus,  Btrn,  better  than;  Rtrn, 
rather  than.  (See  also  sec.  467.) 

c.  "Been"  on  the  stem  V  when  the  latter  is   the 
logograph  representing  "have;"  thus,  Vn  have  been. 

d.  "Not"  in  combination  with  the  halving  princi- 
ple.    (See  sec.  474.) 

461.  The  initial  N  curl  (see  sec.  298)  may  be  em- 
ployed before  the  circle  S  to  represent  "in;"  thus,  ns- 
Drshn,   in    consideration;  nsM,    in  some;  nsMnt1,  in 
his  mind;  nsTlMnt,  in  settlement. 

462.  The  F  hook  may   be  used  for    "have"  and 
"of,"  and   sometimes   for   "to    have";  as   Cf,  which 
have-of;  Cf1,  each  of;  Cf3,  much  of ;  Df,  day  of ;  sCf, 
such  have-of;  Tlf,  it  will  have;  Plf1,  plea  of;  Brf3, 
number  of;  sTf,  stay  of;  stTf,  state  of;  L3Kf,  lack 
of'  WJKf,  week  of;  VRTf,  variety  of;  Tf1,  ought  to 
have;  Trf1,  try  to  have;  sDf,  said   of,  said  to   have; 
ssDf ,  is  said  of,  is  said  to  have. 

a.  The  F  hook  for  "of"  is  seldom  employed  and 
then  usually  only  medially  and  not  finally;  thus,  VR- 
TfKss,  variety  of  causes;  DfKshn,  day  of  action;  Cfs1, 
each  of  us. 

463.  "Ours"  may  be  added  to  a  stem  by  the  S  cir- 
cle and  R  hook  combined;  thus,  Brs1,  by  ours;  Nrs1, 
incurs;  Trs3,  at  ours.      (See  sec.  468,  f.) 

464.  "Self"  may  be  added  to  an  R  or  N  hooked 
stem  by  the  small  S  or  Ns  circle;  thus,  Brs1,  by  our- 
self;  Trs,  to  ourself;  Rns3,  our  own  self;  Brns1,  by 
our  own  self.     (See  sec.  468,  g.) 

465.  "Selves"  may  be  added  to  an  R  or  N'hooked 
stem  by   the  large  Ss   or   Nss  circle;  thus,  Brss1,  by 
ourselves;  Trss,  to  ourselves;  Rnss3,  our  own  selves; 
Brnss1,  by  our  own  selves.      (See  sec.  468,  h.) 

4<i<!.  "One's"  or  "ones"  may  be  added  by  the  Ns 
circle  on  single  or  double  length  straight  stems  or  the 


362  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MAXCAL. 

N  hook  and  S  circle  on  curved  ones.  Cns1,  each  one's; 
Frns,  from  one's;  Vns,  have  one's;  Ftrns3,  farther 
one's-oues. 

467.  "Than"  may   be   added  after  a  circle  on  a 
right  curve  by  the  stem  N;  thus,  MsX,  himself  than; 
MssX,  Moses  than;  WsX,  ways  than;   Ss1X,  seas  than, 
see  us  than:  ShsN,  shows  than;  L^X,  laws  than,  loss 
than;  Lss1X,  losses  than;  LsX,  less  than;  Ls3X,  allow 
us  than;  L'SsX,  lessees  than;  LsXthrn,  less  than  their 
own.     (See  also  sec.  460,  b.) 

HOOKS      AND      CIRCLES      ATTACHED      TO      THE    TICK     AND 
CURVET    LOGOGRAPHS. 

468.  The  small  hooks,  and  small  and  lanre  circles 
combined  with  them  may  sometimes  be  attached  to  the 
tick  and  curvet  logographs  "of,  all,  I"  (Ttoid),  "on,  he" 
and  "the";  the  attachments  proportioned  to  the  size 
of  these  characters  (see  also  see's.  89,  b  and  114,  a) 
to  represent  the  following  words: 

a.  "Are"  or  uour"  by  the  R  hook;  thus,  Prtoid1, 
of  our;  Trtoid1,  (or  Krtoid,  alternate),  on  our. 

b.  "All"  or  "will"  by  the  L  hook;  thus,  Pltoid1, 
of  all:  Bltoid1,  of  all   the;  Tltoid1   (or  Kltoid,  alter- 
nate), on  all;  Dltoid1  (or  Gltoid,  alternate),  6n  all  the; 
Fltoid1  all  will;  Vltoid1,  all  will  the. 

c.  "Have,  of"  or  "other"    by  the  F  hook;  thus, 
Tftoid1,  I  have;  Jftoid1,   he   have;  Trftoid1,  on  our 
other. 

d.  "Own"  or    "other"  by  the  X  hook;  thus,  Prn- 
toid1,  of  our  own;  Trntoid1,  on  our  own;  Tntoid1,  on 
other;  Dntoid1,  on  the  other;  Cntoid1,  the  other. 

e.  "As,  his,  us"  or  "others"  by  the  small  circle, 
but    only    finally;    thus,    Pltsoid1,    of   all    as-has-is- 
his;  Tltsoid1   (or  Kltsoid,   alternate),  on  all  as-has-is* 
his;    Tftsoid1.    I  have   as-his;    Tntsoid1,    on   others; 
Dntsoid1,  on  the  others;  Cntsoid1,  the  others. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  363 

f.  "Ours"   by  the  R  hook   and  small  circle  com- 
bined;   thus,    Prtsoid1,    of    ours;  Trtsoid1,    on   ours. 

g.  "Self"   by  the  small  circle;  thus,  Prtsoid1,  of 
ourself;  Prntsoid1,  of  our  own  self;  Trtsoid1,  on  our- 
self;  Trntsoid1,  on  our  own  self. 

h.  "Selves"  by  the  large  circle;  thus,  Prtssoid1, 
of  ourselves;  Prntssoid1,  of  our  own  selves;  Trtssoid, 
on  ourselves;  Trntssoid1,  on  our  own  selves. 

469.  The  above  phraseographs  (par's,  a  to  h)  are 
not  always  used.  Occasionally  the  words  are  written 
separately  or  joined  phrases  employed.  The  list  above 
is  complete,  no  other  phraseographs  than  those  given 
being  used. 

LESSON  43. 

HALVING. 

470.  "It,  had"  or  "would''  may  be  added  to  a 
stem  logograph  without  appendages  by  halving  it. 
"It"  may  also  be  added  in  the  same  manner  to  a  stem 
logograph  or  phraseograph  with  a  final  hook  and  "had"' 
furthermore  to  one  with  an  F  hook;  thus,  Bt,  but  it 
had-would;  Tt1,  ought  it,  what  it-had-would;  Knt, 
can  it;  Btrt,  better  it;  Bft,  above  it,  but  have  it-had, 
but  of  it;  Cft,  which  have  it-had;  Cft3,  much  of  it. 

471.  "Of  it"  may  be  indicated  by  halving  the  stem 
V  in  the  first  position;  thus,  Vt1,  of  it. 

472.  "It"  may  be  added  to  a  final  stem  without 
appendages  by  halving  it;  as  in    MKt,  make  it;  FCt, 
fetch  it:  K3Rt,  carry  it;  S3Mt,  assume  it;  R3  Vt,  re- 
view it;  Rt^'gt,  writing  it. 

473.  "To"   may    be  added  to  a  word  of    two  or 
more  stems    by  halving    its   final    stem;  as    in    LKlt, 
likely  to;  RMnt,  remain  to.      "To"  may  also  be  added 
to  the  word  "able"  by  halving  it;  thus,  Bit,  able  to. 

474.  "Not,    had    not"    or    "would    not"   may    bo 
added  by  the  N  hook  and  halving  principle  combined; 
thus,  Bnt1,  be-by    not;  Bnt,  but    not,    but    had-would 


364  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

not;  Dnt1,  did  not;  Dnt,  do  not;  Dnt3,  had  not; 
Dnts3,  had  not  his:  Cnt,  which  had-wouldnot;  nTTnt, 
when  not,  when  had- would  not;  TFnt3,  would  not; 
Mnt,  may  not. 

a.  "She  not,  she  had- would  not,   shall  not"    and 
''should    not"  may    also    be   written  as   above;  thus, 
Shnt1,    she  not,  she  bad-would  not;  Shnt,   shall  not; 
Shnt3,  should  not;  particularly  when  occurring  alone. 
Usually,  however,  they  are  written  with  the  stems  in 
all  cases  for  convenience;  thus,  Sl^Xt,  Sht'Xt,  ShXt, 
Sht3Xt.     The  same  course  is  pursued  with  "she  will 
not,"  which  is  usually  written  Sh^Xt. 

b.  When   "it"  occurs  after  the  verb  and  before 
"not"  as  in  "had  it  not,  do  it  not,"  the  phrase  is  not 
written  as    in  paragraph    474,   but    instead  the  stem 
representing  the  verb  is   halved  and  "not"'  added  by 
the  logograph,  except  after  the  past  tense  indicated  by 
halving,  when  "it   not"  is    represented  by  Tnt;  thus; 
Dt'Xt,  had  it  not;  DtXt,  do  it  not;  MtXt,  may  it  not, 
ShtXt,  shall  it  not;  ?/'RtXt,  were  it  not;  Bt1    Xt1,  be  it 
not;  KtTnt,    could    it   not;    Sht3Tnt,    should  it   not; 
?0Rt3Tnt,  ward  it  not;  Trt1    Tnt,  tried  it  not. 

475.  Z  halved  is  used,  alone  or  initially,  or  after 
an  S  circle  logograph  only,  to  represent  ' '  is-his-as-has 
it;"  thus,  Zt1,  is  it;  Zt'Nt,  is  it  not;  sZt1,  is  as  it, 
his  has  it;  Zt3,  as-has  it;  Zt3Xt,  has  it  not;  sZt3,  as  is- 
has  it;  sZt^Ip,  is  as  it  may  be.  (a.)  This  form  is  not 
generally  used  finally  or  medially  except  after  an  S 
circle  logograph  only,  as  just  stated.  Instead,  in  such 
cases,  the  circle  S  and  stem  T  are  usually  employed; 
thus,  Jtsoid^  or  Hes1^  he  is-has  it;  Rtsoid1^  and 
is-as-has  it;  BsT,  but  is-has  it;  BsTnt.  but  is-has  it  not; 
TsT,  it  is  it;  T1sT,  what  is-has  it;  BsTtr,  but  is-has  it 
their  re;  BsTrn,  but  is-has  it  their  own;  BssT,  but  is 
as  it;  DhssT,  this  is  it;  DhssTMp,  this  is  as  it  may  be. 

b.  Zt  as  above  is  not  used  to  indicate  the  addition 
of  "had"  or  "would,"  nor  is  the  N  hook  added  to  it, 


THE    PHOXOUKAPIIir    MANl/AL. 


as  in  Znt,  to  indicate  "not,"  as  in  "as  had-  would  not." 

In  such  cases  the  S  or  Ss  circle  and  the  stems  for 
"had"  or  "had  not"  and  "would"  or  "would  not" 
are  employed;  thus,  sD3,  is-his-as-has  had;  sDnt3,  as- 
his  had  not;  ssD3,  as  his  had,  his  has  had;  ssDnt3,  as 
his  had  not;  s  IFi3,  as-his  would;  slFnt3,  as-his  would 
not;  ssTFt3,  as  his  would;  ss  TFnt3  as  his  would  not. 
c.  Again,  Znt  as  above  is  not  employed  for  "is- 
has  not,"  etc;  but  instead  the  S  or  Ss  circle  and  the 
halved  N  stem  are  written;  thus,  sNt1,  is-as-has  not; 
ssXt1,  is-has-his  not,  his  is  not,  his  has  not.  Znt, 
however,  may  sometimes  be  employed  for  the  col- 
loquials  "isn't"  and  "has  n't."  (See  sec.  476  b.) 

476.  The  colloquial    phrases   "did  n't,  don't,  had 
n't,   would  n't,   should  n't,"  etc.,  are  usually  written 
the  same  as  "did  not,  do  not,"  etc.,  in  paragraph  474. 
If,  however,    particular    distinction    is    desired,  they 
may  be  vocalized;  thus,   Dint1,   did  n't;  Dont,  don't; 
HaDnt3,    had  n't;    ITu/nt,    would  n't;  Shu/nt3,  should 
n't,  etc. 

a.  The  remarks  above  also  apply  to  the  colloquial 
"  Shan't,''  except  that  it  is  written  with  the  stems  Sh- 
Nt  as  explained  in  section  474,  a;  thus,  ShaNt. 

b.  The  colloquial  phrases  "is  n't"  and  "has  n't" 
are  also  usually  written  the  same  as  the  formal  ones 
in  section  475,  c;  namely,   with  the  S  circle  and  halved 
N  stem.      But  when  particular   distinction  is  desired, 
they  may  be  represented  by  Z  halved  with  the  N  hook; 
thus,   iZnt1,    is  n't;    naZnt3,  has  n't.      If    preferred, 
however,  the  vocalization  may  be  omitted.     (See  also, 
par.  476.) 

477.  "Its  "  may  be  added  by  the  halving  principle 
and  circle  S  combined;  thus,  Tts1,   what  its;  Tts,  to 
its;  Tts3,  at  its;  Cts,  which  its;  Bfts,  above  its;  Pnts, 
upon  its;  Vts1,   of  its;  Nts1,  in  its;  KPts,    keep  its; 
S3Mts,  assume  its;  MNgts,   among  its. 

a.     The  word   '  '  itself  "  is  never  added  by  the  above 


3GO  TIIK    PHOMM  iUAPllir    MANTA1.. 

principle,  but  is  either  joined  with  the  logograph  or 
if  not,  it  is  written  disjoined  in  its  proper  position, 
usually  the  former;  thus,  BJTs,  by  itself. 

LENGTHENING. 

478.  "Their,  there"  or  "they  are"  is  added  to  a 
full  sized  curve  stem  by  doubling  its  length;  as  in  the 
phrases  Ftr,  for  their-there-they  are;  Vtr,  have  their- 
there;  Mtr,  may  their-there;  Dhrtr,  they  are  their  - 
there;  HtcRVtr,  wherever  their-there-they  are;  Thtr1, 
thaw  their-there;  Tr1  Mtr,  trim  their-there;  M^Ftr, 
modify  their.  (See  also  sec.  457.)  If  an  X  hook 
follows,  it  is  read  after  the  termination;  thus,  Ftrn,  for 
their  own;  Vtrn,  have  their  own,  have  their  been, 
Mtrn,  may  their  own;  Dhrtrn,  they  are  their  own, 
n//'KVtrn,  wherever  their  own;  Thtrn1,  thaw  their 
own;  IVMtrn,  trim  their  own;  Ait1  Ftrn,,  modify  their 
own.  (See  also  sec.  460.  a. ) 

a.  The  above  words  and  phrases  may  be  added  to 
a  double  length  curve  by  making  it  triple  the  length 
of  a  single  one,   the  extra  length  being  indicated  in 
stenotypy  by  an  additional  tr;  thus,    Frtrtr,  further 
their-there;  Frtrtrn,  further  their  own;  Shltrtr,  shelter 
their-there;  Shltrtrn,  shelter  their  own;  Mrtrtr,  mur- 
der their-there;    Mtrtrn,    murder  their  own;  Mrtrtr- 
RPTshns,  murder  their  reputations;  sXtrtrXrJs,  cen- 
ter their    energies:    XtrtrsRVs,   enter   their    service; 
TXtrtrsVss,   tender  their  services;  sRXtrtrPsts,   sur- 
render their  posts;  RXtrtrKnts,  render  their  accounts. 

b.  The  above  expedient  is  not  applied  to  double 
length  phraseographs,  such  phrases  as  "if  they  are  their- 
there,"  etc.,  being  written  with  the  double  length  stem 
and  the  logograph  for  "their"  or  "there;"  thus,  Ftr1- 
Dhr,  if  they  are  their-there;  Fti^Dhrn,    if  they  are 
their  own,  etc. 

c.  When  "there"  occurs  in  a  compound  word  in  a 
phrase  it  is  usually  written   with  the  logograph  and 


THE  PHONOGRAPH  ft'   MANUAL.  Ut'u 

not  indicated  by  lengthening;  thus,  PtoidMDhrF,  1  am 
therefore,  and  not  PtoidMtrF.      (See  also  sec.  457,  a.) 

d.  Lengthening  as   above   is  not  usually  written 
finally  after  nouns  and  is  never  employed  to  add  the 
word  "other/3     (See  also  sec.  457,  b.) 

e.  "Theirs"    may    be  added    by   the   lengthening 
principle  and  circle   S   combined;  thus,    Frtrs,   from 
theirs;  Dhtrs1,  with  theirs;  MNgtrs,  among  theirs. 

IRREGULAR     PHRASES. 

479.  There  is  a  class  of   very   frequent   phrases 
which  are  difficult  to  form  regularly  and  are  therefore 
written    irregularly.     These     are     called     Irregular 
Phrases.     Thus,  Mp,   may  be;  Tt3Ms,  at  times,   Tlt3- 
Ms,  at  all  times;  T3Nrt,  at  any  rate;  Dhrnt1,  on  either 
band;  B3,  to  be;  sB3,  as-has-is-his  to  be;  NrPl,  in  re- 
ply-to-the;  NrsP,  in  respect-to-the;  NrsPns,  inresponse- 
to-the;  Ni^Gt,  in  regard-to-the ;  NrF,   in  referring-to- 
the;   NrFs,   in  ref erence-to-the ;   irRRns  (or  wRfRns) 
with  ref  erence-to-the ;  ?/'RGrt,  with  regard-to-the;  u<- 
RR  (//'RfR),  we  refer;  wRGrt  we  regard;  Nrt1,  in  or- 
der-to; ]STlNgls,  anything  else;  NThNgls,  nothing  else; 
VrNgls,  everything  else. 

WORDS  IN  PHRASES    DISTINGUISHED  BY  VOCALIZATION  OR 
VARIATION    OF    OUTLINE. 

480.  In  phrase  writing  words  can  be  distinguished 
by  position  only  when  they  commence  phrases.      When 
they  occur  medially  or  finally,  therefore,    (whether  in. 
or  out  of  position)  and  would  be  liable  to  conflict  with 
other  words  of  similar  form,  they  may  be  vocalized, 
or  if  contracted,  written  with  their  full  outlines;  thus, 
T'uD,    to   aid;   TMe,    to  me;   yRs^M,    years  time; 
DhsTM,  this  time;  IS^CtoidKntR,  in  the  country. 

1.  It  is  not  usually  a  good  practice  to  vocalize 
words  medially  in  a  phrase,  except  in  the  case  of  voca- 
graphs  (see  sec.  3DD)  which  must  be  so  written  in  any 


368  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

event,  since  this  takes  more  time  than  to  write  them 
separately  in  their  proper  positions.  Thus  the  words 
"to  me,"  above,  are  more  quickly  written  T  M1. 

a.  When  "time"  is  written  alone  and  in  full  it 
should  usually  be  vocalized;  thus,  T^lM,  to  distinguish 
it  from  "autumn"  (TM1)  which  is  generally  written 
separately.  (See  sec.  459.) 

481.  Again,  occasionally,  where  a  word  as  ordina- 
rily written  will  not  make  a  good  joining  in  a  phrase  its 
form  may  be  either  varied  or  written  in  full;  thus,  MN- 
PRt,  my  own  part;  DhsPRt,  this  part;  NDm^sTt,  in  that 
state;  NgsFRNg,  long  suffering. 

"WHAT"  DISTINGUISHED. 

482.  "What"   in  phrases  is  usually  joined  only 
initially,  except  after  first  place  small  or  horizontal 
stem  logographs  (see  sec.  419);  thus,  Tl-Y,  what  you; 
T'-w^hat  we;  T'Dhs,  what  this;  T*T,  what  at-ought; 
Tl'B,  what  will  be;  sT1,  is  what;  PtoidT1,  of  what; 
KtoidT1,    on   what;    NT1,    in   what;    KsT1,    because 
what. 

a.  "What"  is  written  as  above   to   distinguish  it 
from    "it,"    which,    being  a  more  frequent  word,  is 
joined  finally  or  medially  as  well  as  initially.      "What" 
is  thus  written  the  same  as  any  other  logograph  that 
occasionally    requires   distinction    from   another  and 
more  frequent  one  of  similar  form  in  another  position; 
as,  for  example,  "each"  and  "at"  from  "which"  and 
"to." 

b.  If  it  should  ever  be  desired  to  particularly  dis- 
tinguish "what, "the  small  HW  character  may  be  in- 
serted disjoined;  thus,  nwT1.      (See  sec.  360.)     This, 
however,  will  seldom  or  never  be  necessary. 

OUGHT. 

483.  "Ought"  may  usually  be  joined  everywhere 
in  phrases  when  convenient,   except  when  it  precedes 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  3CU 

"what"  (see  sec.  482);  thus,  FtoidT1,  all  ought;  BT, 
but  ought;  TT,  it  ought;  DhsTfBn,  this  ought  to 
have  been;  DhTnt,  they  ought  not;  CTnt,  which  ought 
not;  T'-r,  ought  you;  T^hs,  ought  this;  Tnt'Dh, 
ought  not  they;  Tft'Dht,  ought  to  have  it  that;  TirT, 
ought  at-to;  f '  T1,  ought  what. 

OR. 

484.  When    "or"    is   written    medially   before   a 
number  the  logograph  is  usually  joined  to  it  but  not  to 
the  preceding  number  or  word;  thus  2    R*4,  two  or 
four;  5    RJ7,  five   or  seven;    Dh  R1!,  they  or  one; 
Ftoid   R1 11,  all  or  eleven. 

LESSON  44. 

OMISSIONS. 

485.  T  may  sometimes  be  omitted  for  the  sake  of 
speed  in  words  ordinarily  written  with  the  St  loop  by 
changing  the  latter  to  the  circle  S;  thus,  MsLkl,  most 
likely;  MsB,  must  be;  TrsDht,  trust  that. 

486.  The  N  hook    may  be  omitted,  if   preferred; 
thus,  P-Y,  upon  you. 

487.  Occasionally  in  a  phrase,  one  or  more  conso- 
nants or  a  breath  letter  may  be  omitted;  thus,  BsLt- 
NssR,    absolutely  necessary;  GrtsTnt,    great   extent; 
Mn3F(or  nY3MnF),    human  life;  TrnF,    eternal  life", 
sPKF,    spelling    reform;    Mn3StR,     human    history; 
stTS,  state  house. 

488.  The  word   "well"  is  always   represented  by 
the  iogograph  except  when  it  is  inconvenient  to  form 
the  W  hook — which  is  medially  or  finally  after  a  stem 
with  appendages  on  the  T,  Ch,  S  and  Sh  stems  with- 
out them — in  which  cases  it  is  represented  by  the  stem 
L  only,  the  W  hook  being  omitted;  thus,  sL,  as  well; 
sLs,  as  well  as;  ssL,  is  as-as  is  well;  ssLNn,  is  as-as  is 
well  known;  TsL,  it  is  well;  TssL,  it  is  as  well;  MsL, 


370  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

may  as  well;  JssL,  just  as  well;  KnL,  can  well;  DL, 
do  well;  sCL,  such  well;  SL,  so  well;  ShL,  shall  well. 

489.  A  or  An,  And,  By,  etc.      Such  words  as  "a" 
or  "an,  and,  by,  of,  of  the,  or,  the,  to,  to  the,"  and 
occasionally  a   syllable,  may   be  omitted   medially  or 
finally  from  the  main  words  of  the  phrase    in  which 
they  occur;  as  in  the  phrases  sCn,  such    a  one;  FNs- 
Tnt,  for  an  instant,  GnGn,  again  and  again;  sD^D, 
side  by  side ;  MtrMp,  matter  of  importance ;  FsK,  for 
the  sake-of ;  WnBst,  one  of  the  best;  MrLs,  more  or 
less;  CtoidTrR,  on  the  contrary;  Krt1,  according  to- 
to  the;  FsTns,  for  instance. 

JUXTAPOSITIONS. 

490.  When    "you,    of   the"    and    "to"  or    "too" 
(preposition  and   adverb)  occur  medially  in  a  phrase 
they  may  be  indicated  by  juxtaposition,  or  writing  the 
words  between  which  they  occur  very  close  together, 
each  in  its  proper  position.     This  expedient  is  used 
only  between  stem  words;  thus,  DtMS,  did  you  say; 
DiS^M,  do  you  say  you  saw  him;  KntstT,  can  you 
state;  Kn:K,  can  you  come;  nWiKn,  when  you  can; 
Dhn:KnK,  then  you  can  come;  sRFsiRTh,  surface  of 
the  earth;  LsMM1,   loss  to  me;  KMiT,  came   to  it; 
KM'.Ts,  came  to  its;  KMiTs3,  came  to  itself;  KMiV, 
came  to  have;  C3'.D,  much  to  do;  Z:Dt,  was  to  do  it; 
Gn'iD,  began  today;  ThsiC3,  thinks  too  much.     It  is 
never  employed  between  words  which  do  not  contain 
stems,  or  between  these  and   stem   words.     In  such 
cases   write  the  words  "you,   of  the,    to"  or  "too"; 
thus,  Ftoid1- r   Dtoid,  all  you  hoe;  Ftoid-Y-V,  all  you 
have;  Ftoid1    Btoid1    I,  all  of  the  eye ;  KLr   Btoid1    I, 
color  of  the  eye;  ShP   Btoid   e,  shape  of  the  o;  PrOIt 
TRtoid   MnT,  prompt   to  the  minute;  Mns1    TPtoid 
Nt,  means  to  an  end;  sPn   T   Ttoid1,  spoken  to  on;  R1 
T-r,  or  to  you;  KM   Ts   SsTns,  came  to  his  assistance; 
Ftoid1    TRtoid,  all  to  thee;  Ftoid1    Tt,  all  to  it;  Ftoid1 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  371 

Tts,  all  to  its;  Ftoid1    TTs,  all  to  itself;  Ftoid1    TD, 
all  to  do,  or  all  to-day;  Ftoid1    TD   T;  all  to  do  it. 

a.  Juxtaposition   as   explained   in   the    preceding 
paragraph  is  used  only  between  stem  words,  since  if  it 
were  employed   in     connection   with   words   without 
stems  the  latter  would  be  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  the 
vocalization  of  the  stems  near  which  they  were  placed, 
or  when  no   stems  were  employed,  for   two  or  more 
small  characters  without  the  words  "you,  of  the,"  etc., 
between  them. 

b.  The   learner  is  instructed  that   when  writing  at 
ordinary  speed  he  need  not  indicate  "of  the"  by  juxta- 
position  unless   he   prefers   to   do  so.     Again,  it   is 
usually   better  to  write  "of  the  "  when  the  words  be- 
tween which  they   occur  would    make  sense  without 
them;  as  in  the  sentence  "many  of  the  ships"  which 
could  also  be  read  "many  ships."     Still  there  will  be 
no  danger  of  incorrect  reading  if  the  words  between 
which  "of  the"  occur  are  always  written  very  close 
together. 

c.  As  to  "you"  and   the  preposition   and  adverb 
"to"  and    "too,"  it   is    better  for  the  learner  to  get 
accustomed  to  indicating  them  by  juxtaposition  from 
the   start,  particularly  "to."     The   usual   manner  of 
writing  the  noun  or  adjective  '  'two"  (the  number)  is 
with  the  figure  2  as  will  be  more   fully   explained  in 
the  next  chapter. 

d.  When  "you,  to"  or  "too"  commences  a  sentence, 
or  a  phrase  in  the  middle  of  one,  the  letters  are  usually 
written;  thus,  Y-D,  you  do;   F-M,  you  may;  TRtoid, 
to  the;  except  before  B  in  the  phrase  "to  be,"  which 
is  usually  written  with  B  in  the  third  position;  thus, 
B3,  to  be. 

e.  When  "of  the"  occur  between  stem  words  and 
a  number,  they  may  be  indicated  by  juxtaposition,  but 
must   be    written    when    they    occur    between    small 
characters  and  a    number,  or  between  two  numbers; 


372  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

thus,  Dhr1'^,  either  of  the  two;  *2:Mst,  t\vo  of  the 
most;  Ftoid1  Btoid1  5,  all  of  the  five;  2  Btoicl  4, 
two  of  the  four. 

491.  From— "to".      <  'From"  and  "to"  may  be  in- 
dicated by  writing  the  main  words  of  the  phrase  close 
together;  as   in  the   phrases   DtD,  from   day  to  day; 
T^T1,  from  time  to  time;  R3'.R3,  from  hour  to  hour. 

492.  Ing.      In  connected  writing  the  final  syllable 
Ing  may  be  indicated  either  with  the  stem  Ng  or  with 
the  dot  according  to  the  rules  given  in  sections  317 
to  321,  or  by  writing  a  following  tick,  half  circle  or 
circle  word  or  the  beginning  of  any  following  stem 
word  or  figure  in   the   place  which  would  otherwise 
be  occupied  by  the  Ing  dot,  as  explained  in  the  case  of 
compound  words  (see  sec.  321);  thus,  P'Ktoid,  paying 
a-an;  sK^'Ktoid,  seeking  a-an;  G^/SAtoid,  giving  and; 
ssTlVPtoid,  consisting  of;  ssT1 'PtoidCtoid,   consisting 
of  the;  D'Ftoid,  doing  all;  D'u,  doing  other;  D'Dhr. 
doing  their-re;  Grr,  giving  you;  Dtoid's  hoeing  his; 
G17s,   giving  self;  G'T,    going   to;  K'R,    coming  or; 
Pt3'Bt,     putting    about;    Wna'MN,     winning    many; 
Trs'sRFs,  tracing  surface;  G'7,  going  seven.    This  ex- 
pedient     should  not  be  employed  if  it  will  take  the 
writing  too  far  below  the  line.      In  such  cases  write 
the  stem  Xg  or  the  Ing  dot  and  place  the  following 
word  in  its  proper  position.    (See,  however,  sec.  41'-'!.  ) 

493.  In  the  case  of  verbs  from  which,  as  explained 
in  section  320,  the  Ng  stem  and  Ing  dot  may  usually 
be  omitted — the  context  determining  the  meaning — the 
indication-  of   the  final  syllable  Ing    by  juxtaposition 
may  also  usually  be  omitted  and  the  first  part  of  the 
outline  of  the  word  written  alone;  thus,  Dh//-R   TRn   W, 
they  were  turning  away;  JtoidZ    MV    F?/*Rt,  he  was 
moving  forward.     Generally,  however,  when  a  word 
follows,  it  is  speedier  to  write  the  latter  in  juxtaposi- 
tion than  to  write  it  in  its    proper  position,    because 
the  hand  does  not  have  to  travel  so  far.     But  when  it 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  373 

would  take  the  writing  too  far  below  the  line  it  should ' 
be  written  alone  as  just  stated.      (See  also  the  latter 
part  of  the  last  paragraph.) 

494.  Ing  the.      When  the  word  "the"  follows  the 
final  syllable  Ing  and  juxtaposition  is  employed,  "the" 
is   written  with  the  downward   tick;  thus,   sVCtoid, 
saving  the;  Mn1?Ctoid,  meaning  the;  in  which  case  a 
word  following  the  tick  may  sometimes  be  joined  to 
it;  thus,  Tr^CtoidsM,  trying  the  same.     If,  however, 
juxtaposition  is  not  employed,    "the"  is  written  with 
the  dot  in  its  proper  position,  if  the  preceding  word 
is  not  written  with  the  stem  Ng  (see  see's.  317  to  320) 
whether  the  dot  for  Ing  is  written  or  not;  thus,  Pst- 
+  1  or  Pst    +1,  posting  the.    (See  sec.   493.)     If  the 
word  preceding   "the"  is  one  written  with  the  stem 
Ng,  as  for  example,   the  word  "meaning"  just  given, 
the   final   tick   "the"    instead  of   the   dot   is    usually 
written;  thus,  M^NgCtoid,  meaning  the. 

a.  When  the  phrases  ''the  other-s"  follow  Ing  they 
are  written  as  usual;  thus,  Gl5Cntoid,  giving  the  other; 
sK1 'Cntsoid,  seeking  the  others. 

495.  When  a  word  containing  the  final  syllable  Ing 
ends   a   sentence   the  stem  Ng  or  the  dot  is   usually 
written  if  it  is  a  noun  or  adjective  and  omitted  if  it 
is  a  verb  (see  sec.  493);  thus,  s-DrRtoid   Sl^PNG,  con- 
sider the  shipping;  S'Rtoid   Frst-1,  see  the  frosting;  but 
Dh?/-R   Trs,  they  were  tracing;     JtoidZ  Rst,   he    was 
resting. 

496.  Cm,  Cn,  Km  or  Kn.     In   connected  writing 
the  initial  Cm,  Cn,  Km  or  Kn  syllables,  as  in  section 
293,  may  be  indicated  either  with  the  Con  dot  as  there 
explained  or  by  writing  the  remainder  of  the  word  so 
that  a  preceding  tick,  half  circle  or  circle  word  or  the 
end  of  a  preceding  stem  word  or  figure  shall  stand  in 
the  place  of  the  Con  dot;  on  the  same  principle  as  in- 
dicating these    syllables    medially  in  words  (see   sec. 
293);    thus,    Ftoid'Plt1,  all    complied;    i'NKts,   i  con- 


374  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

nects;  s'Plt1,  is  complete;  s'sT1,  his  conceit;  ss'Plt, 
as-has  complied;  s'Nst,  as-has  commenced;  ss'sDt,  as  is 
conceded;  Cntoid'Mt1,  the  other  committee;  B^Trst, 
by  contrast;  Dhs'Tns,  this  contains;  Dh'Krt,  they  con- 
quered; Jgt'Plnt,  just  complained;  TRtoid'DKt,  to  the 
conduct;  BsRf's'TrKt,  observing  his  contract;  s'Pn, 
his  compaign;  Dhs'Vs,  this  canvass;  Z'Brs,  was  cum- 
brous; sa'sL,  his  counsel;  T'MDt,  to  accommodate; 
Dhs1  R3M'B,  with  his  arm  akimbo;  2'Mts1,  two  com- 
mittees; Ds'sRt,  does  concert.  (See  "tracting  sur- 
face," the  last  phrase  but  one  of  par.  492,  in  which 
the  initial  circle  of  the  second  word  is  placed  under 
the  end  of  the  previous  stem,  whereas  in  "does  con- 
cert" it  is  written  after  and  slightly  above  it.  (See  also 
"disconcert,"  eng.  293,  line  8.)  This  expedient  should 
not  be  employed  if  it  will  take  the  writing  too  far  be- 
low the  line.  In  such  cases  write  the  word  in  its 
proper  position  with. the  Con  dot  prefixed.  (See,  how- 
ever, sec.  497.) 

497.  In  the  case  of  those  frequent  words  whose  re- 
maining outlines  are  sufficiently  suggestive  and  from 
which  the  Con  dot  is  consequently  omitted  as  explained 
in  section  293,  d,  the  indication  of  the  initial  Cm,  etc., 
syllables  by  juxtaposition  may  also  be  omitted  and  the 
remainders  of  the  outlines  written  alone;  thus,  -f- 1    Vrs- 
shn,  the  conversation;  s1    sRn,  his  concern;  C3    FDus, 
much  confidence.     It  is,  however,  usually  more  speedy 
to  write  them  in  juxtaposition  for  the  reason  given  in 
section  493,  in  the  case  of  the  syllable  Ing. 

498.  When  a  small  logograph  occurs  before  a  word 
beginning  with  Cm,  etc. ,  it  accommodates  itself  to  the 
position  of  the  latter  (see  also  sec.  421),  in  the  case  of 
"the"    the    downward    tick    being   employed;    thus, 
Ktoid'Tst1,     a    contest;     Ktoid'DsNt,     a    candescent; 
Ktoid'TNshn,  a  contention;  Ktoid'Tshn3,  a  contusion; 
Ktoid'Mt1,  a  committee;  Ktoid'sXt,  a  consent;  Ktoid1- 
Kft,    a   concavity;    Ktoid'sL1    (s  over  the  center  of 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL..  liT.") 

Ktoid)  a  consul;  Ktoid'sRfR,  a  conserver;  Ktoid'- 
sLshn3,  a  cancellation;  /SV/toid'Trf l,  and  contrive; 
.s'/>toid'V,  and  convey;  ^Atoid'Fshn, 3,  and  confusion; 
>'/?toid'Ft3,  and  confute;  ^'Atoid'Jr1  (Jr  under  the 
center  of  *S7ttoid)  and  conjure;  xSAtoid'Tnt,  and  is  con- 
tent; -S'/ctoid'sKnt1,  and  consequent-ly;  /SAtoid'sXt,  and 
consent;  AS'Atoid'Kr,  and  concur;  /S'Atoid'Kr3,  and 
canker;  xSVitoid'sL1,  and  conceal;  iVAtoid'sRf,  and  con- 
serve; /kS'Atoid'ssLt,  and  consult;  /tf/ftoid'sL3,  and  cancel- 
council-counsel;  u'sL3  (s  above  the  u),  other  counsel; 
s'sL3,  as-has-is-his  counsel;  Ftoid'sLt3,  all  counselled; 
Ptoid'Mnt3,  of  command;  Ctoid'V1,  the  convoy: 
Ctoid'TMpt,  the  contempt;  Ctoid'Fshn3,  the  confu- 
sion; Ctoid' JrUi,  the  conjurer;  Ctoid'sRf  tR  (s  opposite 
the  center  of  Ctoid)  the  conservator;  Ctoid'Mt1,  the 
committee;  Ctokl'sNt,  the  consent;  Ctoid'Mnt3,  the 
command;  Ctoid'sMR3,  the  consumer;  Ctoid'sL3, 
(s  opposite  the  center  of  Ctoid)  the  council-counsel. 

1.  If  the  dot  for  "the"  is  written  the  Con  dot 
should  always  be  inserted,  since  juxtaposition  can  not 
be  legibly  employed  with  a  dot;  thus  -(-1  -Mt1,  the 
committee.  This  rule  of  course  does  not  apply  to 
those  words  whose  remaining  outlines  are  sufficiently 
suggestive  without  the  Con  dot  and  which  are  written 
separately,  as  in  the  phrase  "the  conversation,"  in 
section  497. 

499.  In  such  phrases  as    "as,    has,  is"  and  "his" 
followed  by  Cm,  etc.,  the  S  circle  may  if  necessary  be 
shaded  to  distinguish  it  from  those  containing  '  'self" 
followed  by  the  same  syllables;    thus,  z'Trl,    as-has-is- 
his  control;  s'Trl,    self:control.     This,  however,   will 
seldom  be  necessary  and  then  usually  only  with  "his." 

500.  When  a  vowel  containing  initial  Cm,  etc.,  be- 
gins a  sentence  the  Con  dot  is  inserted  unless   the  re- 
mainder of  the  word,   as  stated  in  section  293,  d,   is 
sufficiently   suggestive,    otherwise  a  double   meaning 


376  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MAN'UAL. 

may  result;  thus,  -Tst    CtoidKs,  contest  the  case;  but 
sTrKtCtoid,  construct  the. 

501.  The  Con  dot  is  also  inserted  when  the  word 
in  which  it  occurs  follows  "of  the"  indicated  by  juxta- 
position (sec  sec.  490)  unless,  as  stated  in  section  293, 
d,  the  remainder  of  the  outline  is  sufficiently  suggest- 
ive; thus,    DtKshn'-Plt1,    detection  of  the    complot; 
but  ?/?LTh'sRn,  wealth  of  the  concern. 

502.  It  is  also  inserted  when  the  word  to  which  it 
belongs  is  written  in  juxtaposition  to  a  preceding  word 
containing  the  final  syllable  Ing  unless,   as  explained 
in  section    293,    d,    the    remaining    outline    is   suffi- 
ciently suggestive;    thus,    P'-TrKt,    paying   contract; 
but  Gr'FDnt,  growing  confident. 

503.  Can  and  Come.      The     words      "can"     and 
"come"  may  be  represented  medially  by  juxtaposition 
in  the  same  manner  as  Cm,  etc. ;  thus,  r'K,  you  can 
come;  i'St1,   I  can    see   it;    H\V'r,    when    can   you; 
wl5G,  we  can  go;  L-r'BK,    will  you  come  back. 

LESSON  45. 

THE    FOURTH    POSITION. 

504.  When  a  word  is  written  below  and  touching 
(or  in  the  case  of  a  horizontal  straight  character — see 
sec.  4 — nearly  touching)  the  line  of  writing,  or  with 
its  first  perpendicular  or  inclined  stem ,  whether  initial 
or  not  (see  see's.  352  to  358),  below  and  touching  it, 
it  is  in  what  is  called  the  fourth  position  and  indicates 
that  the  word   "and"  precedes  it;  thus,  +,4,  and  the; 
H4,  and  how;  a4,  and  a;  Hu4,  and  who;  w4,  and  we; 
y4,  and  you;  s4,  and  as-has-is-his ;  st4,  and  is-his-as-has 
to-too;   str4,    and   is-as  to   their;    /SY<toid4,    and   and; 
Ttoid4,  and  on;  He4,  and  he;  i4,  and  I;  Ptoid4,  and  of; 
Ftoid4,  and  all;  Vtoid4,  and  all  the;  Ftsoid4,  and  all  as- 
has-is-his;  64anu,  and  Oahu;  G4,  and  go;  K4M,   and 
game;  R4Plt,  and  replied  ?/-R4Dh,  and  worthy;  sL4Tr, 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  377 

and  sultry;  JtoidM4,  and  home;  KtoidMn4,  and  a  man; 
JtoidM4,  and  he  may;  sM4,  and  some,  and  is  my; 
s4Rtr,  and  is  rather;  Ktoid4D,  and  I  do;  Ktoid4R,  and 
a  ray;  Ktoid4RPt,  and  a  rapid;  Gt4RTRn,  and  good 
return;  Ls4L,  and  lastly;  MR  T4Ms  Jn4  C1  Rt 
Ps4Tt  KtoidLtr,  Mary  and  Thomas  and  John  each 
wrote  and  posted  a  letter;  JMs  s4Mtr  L4R  z#Rtr, 
James  and  his  mother  and  Laura  were  there;  w?L4M 
Pit  KIR4  sNg3,  and  William  played  and  Clara  sang; 
B  o4  R1RD,  B.  &  O.  Railroad;  i  i  i4  R1RD,  I.  I.  & 
I.  Railroad;  swR4M'Psts  stR4Ms'P,  and  swarming 
pests  and  storms  come  up;  RtoidVLn  Ztr4,  the  violin 
and  zither. 

1.  From  the  above  it  will  be  perceived  that  words 
containing  only  horizontal  stems  and  which  belong  to 
the  third  position,  are,  when  written  in  the  fourth, 
raised  half  a  T  length  (see  sec.  352)  since  the  fourth 
position  for  them  lies  between  the  second  and  third. 

a.  When  a  double  length  upward  letter  is  written 
in  the  fourth  position  it  is  begun  at  the  same  point  as 
its  single  length  (see  sec.  353);  thus,  Ltr4,  and  letter; 
R4R,  and  roar;  s4Ltr,  and  his  letter;  Ktoid4?#LtrNs, 
and  a  wilderness;  Ttoid4KLtrn,   and  a  caldron;  Grt4- 
sLtr,  and  great  slaughter;  Ktoid4GrtsLtr,  and  a  great 
slaughter. 

b.  Stem  words  which  might  conflict  from  having 
the   same   form  -and    representing  the  same  part  of 
speech  should  not  be  written  in  the  fourth  position  if 
there  would  be  danger   of  such   conflict,    unless  the 
least  frequent   word   is    vocalized.      Experience    will 
soon  teach  the  learner  when  to  omit  such  words  from 
the  fourth  position  or  to  vocalize  them.     (See  also  sec. 
410,  k.)     Frequently  the  fact  that  a  word  is  written 
in  the  fourth   position  gives  a  clue  to  its  meaning, 
which  would  not  be  the  case  otherwise. 

c.  Words  consisting  of  two  or  more  stems,  either 
or  both  of  which  are  compound,  or  those  of  three  or 


378  THE   PHOX<x;::.',PHir    MANUAL. 

more,  can  usuall}'  be  written  in  any  position  without 
danger  of  conflict.     (See  par.  385.) 

505.  A  figure  may  be  written  in  the  fourth  posi- 
tion; thus,  Dh    -i4,    they  and   four;   5     74,   five  and 
seven. 

506.  If  desired  the  words  "he,  a"  and   "an"  may 
be  indicated  initially  by  the  fourth  position  in  addition 
to  the  word  "and;"  thus,  s4,  he  as-has-is;  Z4,  he  was; 
D4,    he  had;   sNt4,    he  sent;  Tlt4M    IFt4,  he  told  mt- 
he  would;  R4Plt  Dnt4X,  he  replied   he  did  n't  know; 
sD4    Tht4    Mt4,  he  said  he  thought  he  might  ;P>t4    P4C 
PI4    KtoidPl4M,  he  bought  a  peach,    an  apple  and  a 
plum. 

507.  If  preferred  the  fourth  position  need  not  be 
employed  for  "and,"  or  any  of  the  other  words  above, 
but  instead  the  logographs,  ticks  and  curvets  may  be 
joined  initially.      In  which    case  this   position  would 
become  the  third  for  horizontal   and  small  character 
words  and  the  third  position  half  a  T  length  below  the 
line  (see  sec.  352)  would  be  abolished.      (See  also  sec. 
433,  a.) 

THE    ZERO    POSITION. 

508.  When  a  word  is  written  on  the  upper  line  (see 
sec.    352)   or  with-  its  first  perpendicular  or  inclined 
stem,    whether    initial    or   not,   resting  on  it,   it  is  in 
what   is    called    the    Zero  position  and  indicates   that 
either  of  the  words  "of"  or  "I"  precedes  it — the  con- 
text determining  which;  thus,  -f-°,  of  the;  a°,  of  a-an; 
a°,  of  a;  Ftoid0,  of  all;  r°,  of   you;    s°,   of   as-his-us; 
M°,  of  my  or  I  am;  KtoidD0,  of  a  dollar;  TtoidKD°M, 
of  an  academy;  KtoidDt0,  of  a  debt;  Ktoid  XTt°,  of  a 
noted;  KtoidBt°Fl,  of  a  beautiful;  GrtJ°  of  great  ad- 
vantage;   KtoidKltD0,    of    a  cold  day;  Th°    S°Ktoid 
XssT   Gn°'T,  I  think  I  see  the  necessity  of  beginning 
it;  RtoidXs1    Ktoid D°L    XsPPr,     Hie    influence    of   a 
daily  newspaper:    Xt°'13Dn,    I  know  it  can  be  done; 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  379 

KtoidMn  KrJ°,  a  man  of  courage;  .RtoidwRt  Ntr°, 
the  word  of  another;  NtrD°,  of  another  day;  Ktoid- 
LVr  Ltr°Tr,  a  lover  of  literature. 

a.  When  a  double  length  downward  letter  is  writ- 
ten in  the  zero  position  it  is   begun  at  the  same  point 
as  its  single  length  (see  sec.  353);  thus,  Ftr°,  of  future; 
D°T,  of  duty;  KtoidYtr0,  of  a  yachter;  KtoidKrFtr0, 
of  a  crofter ;  GtShltr0,  of  good  shelter;  TtoidGrtShltr0, 
of  a  good  shelter. 

b.  Stem    words    of   the    same   form    and    part  of 
speech  should  not  be  written  in  the  zero  position,  if 
there  would    be   danger  of    conflict,  unless  the    least 
frequent  word  is  vocalized;  the  same  as  in  the    case 
of  the  fourth  position.      (See  sec.  504,  b. ) 

c.  Words  like  those  explained  in  section  504,0  can 
usually  be  written  in  any  position  without  danger  of 
conflict. 

509.  A  figure  may  be  written  in  the  zero  position; 
thus,  S    4°,  so  of  four;  5     7°,  five  of  seven. 

510.  If  preferred  the    zero  position  need  not  be 
employed  for    "of"    and    "I,"    but  instead  the  logo- 
graphs  and  ticks  in  sections  381  and  432  may  be  joined 
initially.      (See  also  sec.  507.) 

CAUTION    IN    REGARD    TO    WRITING    IN    THE    THIRD,    ZERO 
AND    FIRST    POSITIONS. 

511.  When  writing  in  the  third  or  zero  position 
the  words  should  not  be  written  so  far  below  or  above 
the  line  as  to  occupy  the  zero  position  of  the  line  be- 
low or  the  third  position  of  the  one  above.     Likewise 
when  writing  in  the  first   position  the  words  should 
not  be  placed  so  high  above  the   line  as  to  be  in  the 
zero  position.     (See  also  sec.  359.)    All  that  is  needed 
for    distinction    in    each    case    is     merely  a     half   T 
length  elevation  or  drop  of  perpendicular  or  inclined 
stem  words  and  the  same  or  about  a  quarter  length 
of  all  other  words. 


380  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

a.  When  writing  on  unruled  paper  the  above 
method  is  followed  in  regard  to  where  the  line  of 
writing  would  be  if  traced. 


THE    OR    SPACE    AND    POSITION. 

512.  "Or"    is  indicated  medially  in  a  phrase  by 
a  space  about  as  long  as  a  double  length  K,  the  word 
or  number  following   the    "or"'   being  written  in  the 
first  position  and  that  preceding  it  in  its  proper  or  the 
second  position,  the  space  being  designated  in  steno- 
typy  by  two   single    opposite   quotation  points;  thus, 
Y   '  '    i1,    you  or  I;  K    <  '    G1,  come  or  go;  F3    <  ' 
M*X,    few   or   many;  JMs    l  '    Jn1,  James  or  John; 
Jn1    '  '    tPMs,     John   or   James;  i1    '  '   Nn1,    I   or 
none;  Y°    l  '    M1,   of  you   or  me-him;    Dh    '  '    151, 
they  or  fifteen;  4    '   '   Mr1,  four  or  more;  7    '  '    81, 
seven  or  eight;   Dh    '  '    SMMst,  they  or  two  of  the 
most. 

a.  Small  logographs  or  horizontal  stems,  or  both, 
accommodate  themselves  in  the  or  position  to  the  fol- 
lowing downward  stem  the  same  as  when  in  the  zero 
position  (see  examples  in  sec.    508);  thus,    Ktoid?/-Rt 
1  '    KtoidFrs1,  a  word  or  a  phrase;  sMX    '  '    sC^K, 
his  money  or  his  check;  sSsR    4  '    sKT1,  as  Cicero  or 
as   Cato;    JtoidSRts    '  '    sKrDt1,    he    asserts    or    is 
credited;  sVLn    '  '    sZtr1,  his  violin  or  his  zither. 

b.  The  observations  in  paragraphs  b  and  c,  section 
504,  in  reference  to  the  fourth  position  apply  also  to 
the  or  space  and  position. 

c.  When  "or"  occurs  initially  it  is  represented  by 
the  logograph  the  same  as   "to"  and   "too"  (see  sec. 
400,    d)    which    are    also    indicated    by  the    opposite 
method  to    "or",   namely,  by  a  narrow  instead  of  a 
wide  space. 

513.  If  preferred  the  or  space  and  position  need 
not  be  employed,  but  instead  the  logograph  may  be 
written. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.  381 

THE    TO    SPACE    BETWEEN    FIGURES. 

514.  "To"   is    represented   between    figures    by  a 
space  about  as  long  as  a  double  length   K,  the  num- 
ber after  it  being  written  in  the  second  position.      If 
the  number  before  it  is  preceded  by  the  word   "from" 
it  is  placed    in  the  first  position,  but  if  not,  in  the 
second;  thus,  21     '  '    4,  from  two  to  four ;  141    '  '    15, 
from    fourteen    to    fifteen;     5    '  '    8,    five    to    eight; 
21    '  '    22,  twenty-one  to  twenty-two. 

a.  When  "or"  occurs  between  two  groups  of  the 
last  examples  it  is  expressed  with  the  logograph; 
thus,  2  <  '  4  R1  4  <  '  8,  two  to  four  or  four  to 
eight. 

THE    BY    SPACE    BETWEEN    FIGURES. 

515.  "By"    is   represented  between    figures    by  a 
space  about  as  long  as  a  double  length  K,  the  num- 
ber following  it  being  written  in  the   third   position 
and  the  one  preceding  it  in  the  second ;  thus,  2    '  '    43, 
two  by  four;  15    '  '    18 3,  fifteen  by  eighteen. 

a.  "By"  may  be  written  with  the  logograph,  if 
preferred;  thus,  2  B1  4;  15  B1  18. 

CAUTION    IN    REGARD    TO    PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

516.  The  learner  should  not  employ  phraseography 
to  excess  since  it  then  renders  the  writing  somewhat 
involved  and  hence  difficult  to  read.     Accordingly  it 
should  be  used  only  enough  to  ensure  speed.      Its  full 
limit  is  not  necessary  in  ordinary  or  private  writing, 
but  only  in  the  swiftest  reporting.      As  a  general  rule 
only  the  most  frequent  and  simple  phrases  of  two  and 
three   words    each    (usually    the    former)    should    be 
employed.    (See  sec.  419.)    If  the   learner  will   take 
care  of  these,  the  long  phrases  will  take  care  of  them- 
selves no  matter  how  swif t  the  writing  may  be.     Prac- 
tice will  soon  teach  the  proper  forms.      Furthermore, 


•  >M  TUB    PHOXOORAPHIC    MAXfAf.. 

joining  "the"'  (see  sec.  425)  medially  when  convenient, 
very  greatly  enchances  speed,  lint  it  should  not  be 
thus  joined  if  the  legibility  of  the  following  -word 
would  suffer  by  reason  of  being  written  out  of  its 
proper  position  or  modifying  its  form.  Words  like 
those  in  section  385,  however,  can  usually  be  so  joined. 

LESSON  46. 

SPECIAL,    PHRASES,    LOGOGRAPHS    AND    BREVIGRAPHS. 

517.  The  preceding  portions  of  this  chapter  are 
devoted  to  what  are  called  General  Phrases,  that  is 
phrases  which  may  be  employed  in  general  writing. 
There  are,  however,  many  others,  such  as  Business, 
Law,  Medicine,  Military,  Political,  Scientific,  Theo- 
logical, etc.,  special  or  technical  in  their  nature,  which 
are  known  as  Special  or  Technical  phrases  or,  simply, 
Techniphrases  and  may  be  indicated  by  the  phono- 
grapher  when  engaged  in  such  writing.  The  same  is 
true  of  Logographs  (see  sec.  379)  and  Brevigraphs, 
which  are  then  called  Special  Logographs  or  Bre- 
vigraphs or,  simply,  Technigraphs.  Thus,  for  ex- 
ample, in  business  the  frequently  occurring  names  of 
firms,  railroad  companies,  or  other  corporations,  etc., 
or  of  certain  articles  of  merchandise,  can  be  abbre- 
viated by  the  writer  to  suit  his  own  convenience.  The 
learner  should,  however,  understand  that  in  special 
writing  phrases  and  contractions  can  be  used  which 
would  not,  as  a  rule  (see  sec.  519),  be  admissible  in 
general  writing,  because  there  special  phrases  and 
terms  occur  so  seldom  that  they  must  be  written  either 
in  full  or  according  to  the  ordinary  rules  of  abbrevi- 
ation, otherwise  they  will  be  apt  to  be  illegible.  On 
the  other  hand  in  special  wyriting  the  phrases  and  words 
peculiar  to  the  business  or  subject  recur  continually, 
and  thus  the  special  forms  invented  to  represent  them 
soon  become  familiarized  and  consequently  easily  read 


THE  PUON'OGR  \P11U1   MANUAL.  383 

by  the  writer  though  they  may  be  mostly  illegible  to 
another  phonographer  not  engaged  in  the  same  line  of 
writing. 

518.  It  will  therefore  be  seen  that  while  a  person 
may  be  a  good  general  phonographer  he  may  not  be  a 
good  special  one,  and  vice  versa.     Also  that  a  special 
writer    who    may    be  familiar  with  the    phrases    and 
terms  in  one  business  or  profession  may  not  be  so  with 
those  in  another.      Accordingly  in  order  to  succeed  in 
any  particular  kind  of  writing,  special  attention  should 
be  given  to  it.      Books  have  been  published  containing 
full  lists  of  the  phrases  and  words  pertaining  to  each 
kind — business,  legal,  political,  etc.,  which  the  learner 
should  obtain  if  he  desires  to  follow  either    of  them 
specially.      Most  of  the  outlines  in  each  can  easily  be 
adapted  to  any  system  of  phonography;  and  where  they 
can  not  other  outlines  may  be  invented  instead. 

519.  Sometimes,  even  in  general  writing,  a  phrase 
or  word  of  inconvenient  length  of  outline,  or  a  proper 
name,   occurs  very   frequently.      In    such  a    case  the 
writer  may,  after  writing  it  the  first  time,  or  perhaps 
oftener,  in  full — vocalizing  it  if  it  is  a  proper  nanivi— 
invent  an  abbreviation  for  it,  usually  a  suggestive  one, 
or  omit  the  vocalization. 

INTERSECTED    PHRASES. 

520.  Official  titles,  the  names  of  firms,  corporations, 
public  bodies  and  any  phrases  that  can  not  be  briefly 
or  satisfactorily  written  otherwise,  may   be  indicated 
by  intersecting;  that  is  by  crossing  a  prominent  stem 
by  a   following  one  or  writing    it  across  a    preceding 
stem,  after  the  principle    explained  in  section  410,  j. 
When  this  can  not    be  done   because  of  two  straight 
strokes  lying  in  the  same  direction,  the  second  stroke 
should   be  placed  close  to  or  under  the  preceding  one 
with  its  beginning  opposite  the  middle  of    the  latter. 
Thus.    ,'ii*TLR,  Gen.  Taylor;  JntShrAIn,  Gen.   Sher- 


384  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

man;  KlfDKsX,  Col.  Dixon;  MtJns,  Maj.  Jones; 
KfRXlts,  Ca[)t.  Reynolds;  KtKKsTn,  Capt.  Caxton, 
D3fsMpsX,  Admiral  Sampson;  D3iD,  Admiral  Dewey; 
PrfTMsX,  Prof.  Thompson;  K2fPn,  capital  punish- 
ment. 

a.  The   words    "Society,  Association,    Committee 
and  Department"  are  represented  respectively  by  the 
strokes    S,  Sh,    Mt  and  D,  while   "Party"  is    written 
with   the   logograph  P;    thus,    TMpfS,    Temperance 
Society;  FXtKfS,  Phonetic  Society;  Blt'fSh,   Build- 
ing Association;  Ki^fSh,    Christian  Association;  Tr- 
ZhrfD,  Treasury  Department;   mR^fD,  War   Depart- 
ment; stT'.D,  State  Department;  S3fMt,  House  Com- 
mittee;    FnXs'.Mt,     Finance    Committee;     KIMsiMt, 
Claims   Committee;  RfP,    Republican  Party;  DIP  or 
DMfP,   Democratic  Party;  LBrLfP,   Liberal   Party; 
LBrtP,  Labor  Party;  PraBshniP,  Prohibition  Party 

b.  The   abbreviation    "Co.,"  for   "Company,"  is 
always  written  with  K,  while  the  word  *  'Company"  is 
always  written  in  full.      (See  Vocabulary.)     Further- 
more the  former  is  seldom  intersected,  but  is  usually 
joined  or  disjoined  according  to  convenience.     Thus, 
RRK,  R.   R.   Co.;  R1RDK,  Railroad  Co.;  RYTK,  R. 
AY.  Co. ;  R1WK,  Railway  Co. ;  sPrsK,    Express   Co. ; 
BKsK,  Box  Co.;  BrKK  or  BrK'.K,  Brick  Co.;  stXtr- 
D3LK  or  stXtrD3LiK,  Standard  Oil  Co.;  sMTh   K>, 
Smith  &  Co.;  sPrs'PN,  Express  Company;  stXtrD3- 
L'PX,  Standard  Oil  Company;  XVPX,    Xews  Com- 
pany; Brn3    P4X,  Brown  &  Company. 

1.  The  word  "Company"  (PX)  above,  as  in  Ex- 
press Company,  is  written  is  juxtaposition  according 
to  section  496  for  the  sake  of  speed.  (See  sec.  497.) 
But  it  may,  if  preferred,  be  written  separately  in  its 
proper  position,  namely,  the  second,  since  its  outline 
is  sufficiently  suggestive  without  the  aid  of  juxtapo- 
sition. 

c.  The  syllable  Con,  in  the  word  "connection"  and 


THIS  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  .'IH5 

its  derivatives,  may  be  indicated  by  intersecting  the 
previous  stem  with  the  K  stem  simple  or  compound; 
thus,  N^Kshn,  in  connection;  M^fKshn,  my  con- 
nection; DhsfKshn,  this  connection;  Rn^Kshn,  or  in 
connection;  DhfKt,  they  connect. 

LESSON  47. 
STEM  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 

521.  The  following  list  of  stem  phraseographs  (see 
sec.  420)  is  formed  mostly  from  single  length  stem 
logographs  without  appendages.    (See  sec.  381.)    Usu- 
ally no   circle   logographs  or   possessives   are   added 
or  included  since  these  can  easily  be  attached  or  form- 
ed from  the  others   when   necessary.      Examples   of 
other  phraseographs  not  contained  in  the  list  will  be 

,  found  under  their  respective  headings  in  the  preceding 
portions  of  this  chapter. 

522.  The    list   is  arranged  in  phonetic  order  for 
convenience  of  reference  when  reading  phonography. 
It  is  divided  into  two  parts,   the  first  part  beginning 
at  P  and  the  second  at  Ch,  at  Lesson  48,  and  should 
be  thoroughly  memorized. 

523.  LIST    OF    STEM    PHRASEOGRAPHS. 


Pf 

Ptr 

Ptrn 

Prtr 

Pltr 

Pltrn 

sPtr 

sPtrn  .  .  .  . 
sPss/m.  .  . 
sPltr.  . 


3  hope  to  have 

1  occupy  their-re    2  up  there    3  hope  their- 

re-they  are 
1  occupy  their  own    3  hope  their  own 

1  appear  there 

2  play  their-re    3  apply  their-re 

2  play  their  own    3  apply  their  own 
1  speak  their-re    2  spoke  their-re 

1  speak  their  own    2  spoke  their  own 

2  special  session 
1  supply  their 


380 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


sPltrn ....  1  supply  their  own 

nsPrshn .  .  1  in  suppression    2  in  expression    3  in  sep- 
aration 

Pt 1  occupy  it   3  hope  it 

Pnt 2  upon  it 

sPlt 1  supply  it 

sPlnt  ....  2  explain  it 

nsPrt ....  3  in  separate 

B 

B 3  to  be 

Bf 1  be  of   2  but  have-of 

Btr 1  be-by  their-re   2  but  their-re-they  are    3  to 

be  their-re 
Btrn 1  be-by  their  own   2  but  their  own,  better 

than    3  to  be  their  own 

Br 1  by  our   2  but  are-our 

Brn 1  by  our  own 

Brf 3  number  of 

Brtr 2  but  are  there    2  remember  their-re-they 

are 
Brtrn ....   2  but  are  their  own 

Bl 1  by  all   2  but  will 

Blf 1  by  all  of   2  but  will  have 

Bltr 1  belong-ed  there,  by  all  their-re-they  are 

2  but  will  their-re 
Bltrn  ...     1  by  all  their  own    2  but  will  their  own 

Bt 1  be-by-buy  it   2  but  it-had-would 

Bnt 1  be-by  not   2  but  not,  but  had- would  not 

Bf t 1  be  of  it   2  above  it,  but  have  it-had,  but 

of  it 

Btrt 2  better  it 

Brnt 2  but  are  not 

Brft 3  number  of  it 

Bit 2  able  to,  but  will  it 

Bint 2  but  will  not 

Blf  t 2  believe  it,  but  will  have  it 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 


387 


Tn 1  ought-what  one    3  at  one 

Tns 1  at  once 

Tf 1  ought  of-to  have,  what  of-to  have  2  to 

have  3  out  of 

Ttr 1  ought  I  heir-re,  what  their-re-they  are  2  to- 

it  their-re  3  at-out  their-re 

Ttrn 1  ought-what  their  own  2  to-it  their  own 

3  at-out  their  own 

Tr 1  what  are-our    2  to  our    3  at  our,  it  were 

Trn 1  what  our  own    2  to  our  own    3  at  our  own 

Trf 1  try  to  have    3  it  were  of-to  have 

Trtr 1  try  their-re,  what  are  their-re  3  it  were 

their-re 

Trtrn.  ...  1  try  their  own,  what  are  their  own  2  it 
were  their  own 

Tl 1  what  will    2  to  all,  it  will   3  at  all 

Tlst 3  at  least 

Tin 3  at  length 

Tlf 1  what  will  have  2  to  all  of,  it  will  have 

3  at  all  of 

Tltr 1  what  all  their-re-they  are,  what  will  their- 
re  2  to  all  their-re-they  are,  till  their- 
re-they  are,  tell  their-re  3  until  their- 
re-they  are,  at  all  their-re 

Tltrn  ....  1  what  all  their  own  2  to  all  their  own,  till- 
tell  their  own  3  until-at  all  their 
own 

sTtr 3  satisf y-ied  their-re 

sTtrn  ....   3  satisf  y-ied  their  own 

sir 3  as  it  were 

stTf 2  state  of 

stTtr 2  state  their 

nsTr 2  in  constructing 

nsTrtr..  .  .  j  2  instruct  their-re,  in  constructing  their-re 

nsTrtrn  . .  2  instruct  their  own,  in  constructing  their 
own 


888 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


nsTrshn . .   2  in  construction 

Tt 1  ought  it,   what  it-had-would    2  to  it,   it 

had-would    3  at  it 
Tnt 1  ought-what   not,  what  had-would  not    2  to 

not,  it  not,,  it  had-would  not,  at  hand 
Tft 1  ought  to  have  it-had,  what  have  it-had, 

what  of  it    2  to  have  it-had    3  out 

of  it     (See  sec.  527.) 

Trt 1  try  it 

Trnt 1  try  not    3  it  were  not 

Trf t 1  try  to  have  it    3  it  were  to  have  it 

Tit  ....        1  what  will  it    2  till-tell  it    3  until  it 

Tint; 1  what  will  not    2  it  will  not 

Tlft 1  what  will  have  it    2  it  will  have  it 

stTt 2  state  it 

D 

Df 3  had  to  have     (Alone  or  initially.) 

Dtr 2  do  their-re    3  add-had-advertise  their-re 

Dtrn 2  do  their  own    3  add-had-advertise   their 

own 

Drtr 1  doctor  their    3  during  their 

Drtrn.  ...  1  doctor  their  own    3  during  their  own 

Dltr 1  idle  their-re    2  deliver-ed  their-re 

Dltrn  ....  1  idle  their  own    2  deliver-ed  their  own 

Dwtr  ....  2  dwell-ed  there 

sDf 2  said  of -to  have 

sDtr 2  said  their-re-they  are 

sDrtr  ....  2  consider  there       ' 

sDrtrn  ...  2  consider  their  own 

ssDrshn  .  .  2  his  consideration 

nsDrshn  . .  2  in  consideration 

Dt 2  do  it    3  add  it,  had  it-had 

Dnt 1  did  not    2  do  not    3  had  not 

Df  t 3  had  to  have  it   (Alone  or  initially. ) 

Drt 3  during  it 

Dlt .          .2  deliver  it 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


389 


sDt  j 

2 

said  it 

sDft 
sDrt  

2 

2 

said  of-to  haye  it    3  has  had  to  have  it 
consider  it 

Ktr  

2 

K 

come  their-re 

Ktrn  
Krtr 

2 
3 

come  their  own 
cure  their-re               < 

Krtrn  .... 

3 

cure  their  own 

Kltr  

1 

call  their-re    2  cool  their-re  3  clew 

their-re 

Kltrn  .... 

1 

call  their  own    2  coal  their  own    3  clew 

their  own 

Kwtrss/m* 
sKrtr  

1 

1 

quarter  sessions 
describe-d  their    3  secure  their-re 

sKrtrn  .  .  . 

1 

describe  their  own    2  secure  their  own 

sKltr  .... 

2 

scale  their    3  school  their 

sKltrn  .  .  . 

2 

scale  their  own    3  school  their  own 

nsKr  
nsKrn.  .  .  . 
nsKrf..  .. 
nsKrtr  .  .  . 

1 
1 
1 
1 

in  scripture,  in  describing    3  in  securing 
in  screening 
in  descriptive 
inscribe  their 

nsKrshn  .  . 
Knt. 

1 
1 

in  description 
can  not    2  can  it 

Krt  

1 

according  to-to  the    3  cure  it 

Kit  

1 

o 

call  it    2  coal  it    3  clew  it 

sKrt  

3 

secure  it 

sKrnt  .... 

1 

screen  it 

sKlt    .... 

2 

scale  it 

nsKrt  .... 

1 

in  secret 

nsKrts*7m. 

1 

in  secret  session 

Gtr  

G 

giv-tr-n  their-re    2  go  their-re 

Gtrn  
Grtrn  .... 
sGtr 

1 

2 
1 

give-n  their  own    2  go  their  own 
greater  than 
siffnifv  their-re 

390 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


sGtrn  ....  1  signify  their  own 

Gf t 2  gave  it 

Gtrt 3  gather  it 

sGts 1  has  got  his-us    2  is-as  good  as 

ssGts  ....  2  is  as  good  as 

sGrts  . .  . .  2  is-as  great  as 

ssGrts  ....  2  is  as  great  as 

S 
Str 1  see-saw  their-re    2  so-say  their-re-they  are, 

sow-sew  their-re    3  us  their-re,  sue 

their-re 
Strn 1  see-saw  their  own    2'  so-say-sow-sew  their 

own    3  us-sue  their  own 
St 1  see-saw  it   2  so-so w-sew  it,  Sat,  say  it,  so 

had- would    3  use  it 
Snt 1  assign  it    2  so  had-would  not 

Z 

Ztr 1  is  their-re  2  was  their-re  3  as  their-re- 
they  are,  has  their-re,  use  their, 
those  their-re-they  are 

Ztrn 1  is  their  own-one  2  was  their  own-one 

3  as-has  their  own,  use  their  own, 
those  their  own 

Zt 1  is  it  (See  sec.  475,  a.)  3  as-has  it  (see 

sec.  475,  a),  use  it 

F 

Fn 1  if  one 

Frn 2  from  one 

Yi'sshn  ...   2  first  session 

Fl 1  if  all    2  f  or  all 

Ftr 1  if  their-re-they  are    2  for  their-re-they  are 

3  half  their-re 
Ftrn 1  if  their  own    2  for  their  own    3  half  their 

own 
Frtr 1  offer  their-re    2  from  their-re 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


391 


Thrn. 
Thtr . 

Thtrn 


Frtrn  ....    1  offer  their  own    2  from  their  own,  further 

than    3  farther  than 
Fltr 1  if  all  their- re,  follow-fill  their-re    2  for  all 

their-re 
Fltrn  ....    1  if  all  their  own,  follow-fill  their  own    3  for 

all  their  own 

Frtrtr  ....    2  further  their-re-they  are 
Frtrtrn.  .  .   2  further  their  own 

Ft 1  if  it    2  for  it 

Fnt 1  if  not    2  for  not 

Frt 1  offer  it   2  from  it 

Fit 1  if  all  it,  follow-fill  it    2  for  all  it 

V 

Vn 2  have  one,  have  been.     (See  sec.  460,   c. ) 

Vrn 2  every  one 

Vtr 1  of  their-re,  ever  their-re-they  are    2  have 

their-re    3  however  their-re-tbey  are, 

halve  their 
Vtrn 1  of-ever  their  own    2  have  their  own,  have 

there  been     3  however   their   own, 

halve  their  own 

Vrtr 1  over  their-re    3  whoever  their-re-they  are 

Vrtrn  ....    1  over  their  own    3  whoever  their  own 

Vltr 1  of  all  their-re    3  value  their-re 

Vltrn  ....    1  of  all  their  own    3  value  their  own 

Vt 1  of  it    2  have  it-had    3  however-halve  it 

Vnt 2  have  not,  have  been  it 

Vrt 1  over  it    3  whoever  it 

Vlt 1  of  all  it    3  value  it 

Vlts  .  1  of  all  its 


Th 

3  through  one 

2  think  their-re-they  are    3  thank-hath  their- 
re 
2  think  their  own    3  thank-hath  their  own 


392 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MAXCAL. 


Thrtr . 
Thrtrn 
Tht... 

Thnt.  . 
Thrt.  . 


Cn 
Cf. 

Ctr. 


Dhst 

1 

Dhsshn.  .  . 

2 

Dhr. 

2 

Dhrn  

1 

Dhl  

1 

Dhtr  

1 

Dhtrn..  .. 

1 

Dhrtr.  .  .  . 

1 

Dhrtrn.  .  . 

1 

Dhltr  .... 

1 

Dhitrn.  .. 

1 

Dht  

1 

Dhtst  

3 

Dhnt  

1 

Dhrt.  ..  .. 

2 

Dhrnt  

1 

Dhlt  

3 

Dhlnt..  . 

2 

3  through  their-re 
3  through  their  own 
2  think  it    3  thank  it 

2  think  not 

3  through  it 

Dh 

thou  wast    3  thou  hast 
2  this  session 
2  they  are 
either  one     2  their    own,    they    are    in 

3  other  one-than 
with  all   2  they  will 

thee  their-re-with  their  2  them  their-re 
3  though  their-re- they  are 

C  v 

thee-with  their  own  2  them  their  own 
3  though  their  own 

either  their-re-they  are  2  they  are  their- 
re 

either  their  own    2  they  are  their  own 

with  all  their-re 

with  all  their  own 

with  it   2  they  had-would 


thou  hadst 


3  though  it 


within  it   2  than-then  it,  they  not,  they 

had-would  not 
2  there  it-had-woul  J 

on  either  hand    2  they  are  not,  there  had- 
would  not 
thou  wilt 
2  they  will  not    3  thou  wilt  not 

LESSON  48. 

Ch 

1  each  one    2  which  one 
1  each  of    2  which  have-of    3  much  cf 
1  watch  their-ro    2  which  their-re 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


393 


Ctrn  

1 

Cr  

2 

Crn  

2 

Crf  .  . 

9, 

Crtr. 

1 

Crtrn.. 

1 

Cl. 

1 

Clf  

1 

Cltr  

9, 

sCn  

2 

sCf. 

2 

sCtr  

1 

sCtrn.  .. 

1 

sCr  

2 

sCrf  ...    . 

2 

sCrtr  

2 

sCrtrn.  .  .  . 

2 

sCl  

1 

sClf  

1 

sCltr  

2 

Ct  

1 

Cnt...... 

1 

Cf  t  

9 

Crts  

2 

Crnt  

2 

Oft  

2 

Clt 

9 

watch  their  own  2  which  their  own 

which  are-our    3  which  were 

which  are  in,  which  our  own    3  which 

were  in 
which  are  of-to  have    3  which  were  of-to 

have 
cheer    their-re     2   which     are     their-re 

3  which  were  their-re 
cheer  their  own    2  which  are  their  own 

3  which  were  their  own 
each  will    2  which  will    3  much  will 
each  will  have    2  which  will  have    3  much 

will  have 
which  will  there 
such  a  one 
such  have-of 

switch  their-re    2  such  their-re-they  are 
switch  their  own    2  such  their  own 
such  are    3  such  were 
such  are  of-to  have    3  such    were   of-to 

have 

such  are  their-re    3  such  were  their-re 
such  are  their  own    3  such  were  their  own 
as  each  will   2  such  will    3  as  much  will 
as  each  will  have    2  such  will  have    3  as 

much  will  have 
such  will  there 
each  had-would,  watch  it  2  which  it-had- 

would 
each  had-would  not    2  which  had-would 

not 

which  have  it-had    3  much  of  it 
which  are  its    3  which  were  its 
which  are  not    3  which  were  not 
Avhich  tiro  of  it-to  have  it    3  which  were 

of  it-to  have  it 
which  will  it    3  much  will  it 


394 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


Clnt 


Gift.. 

sCt.. 
sCnt. 
sCft. 
sCrts 
sCrnt 
sCrft 

sClt. . 
sClnt 
sClft. 


1    each  will  not    2  which  will  not    2  much 

will  not 
1  each  will  have  it-had    2  which  will  have 

it-had 

1  switch  it    2  such  it 

2  such  had- would  not 
2  such  have  it 

2  such  are  its    3  such  were  its 

2  such  are  not    3  such  were  not 

2  such  are  of  it-to  have  it   3  such  were  of 

it-to  have  it 
2  such  will  it 
2  such  will  not 
2  such  will  have  it 


Jrn |  3  larger  than 


Shi. 
Shtr 


Shtrn .  . 
Shrtr  . . 
Shrtrn  . 

Shltrtr . 
Shltrtrn 
Sht.... 
Shnt. 


Shrt.  .. 
Shlnt .  . 


Sh 

1  she  will 

1  wish   theii-re    2  shall   their-re    3   issue 
their-re 

1  wish  their  own    2  shall  their  own 

3  issue  their  own 

2  sure  their-re-they  are,  usher  their-re 

3  assure  their-re 

1  shorter  than    2  sure-usher  their  own 

3  assure  their  own 

2  shelter  their-re    3  shoulder  their-re 

2  shelter-their  own    3  shoulder  their  own 

1  she  had-would,  wish  it    2  shall  it    3  issue  it 
(For  "she  not,  she  had-would  not,  shall 
not"  and  "should  not,"  see  sec. 
474,  a.) 

3  assure  it 

(For  "she  will  not"  see  sec.  474,  a.) 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


395 


Zhtr .  . 
Zhtrn . 
Zhrtr  . 
Zhrtrn 
Zhrt .  . 
nsZh .  , 


Mrn. 
sMn  . 
Mtr.. 


Mtrn  .  .  . 

Mrtr.  . .  . 
Mrtrn .  . 
sMtr.  .  .  . 
sMtrn . .  , 

Mt 

Mnt 

sMnt.  . . 

Mp 

Mpn.  . .  . 
Mptr  . .  . 

Mptrn  .  . 

Mpltr .  .  . 
stMptr . . 
st Mptrn , 
Mptrtr . . 
Mptrtrn, 
Mpt.  .. 
Mpnt  .. 
stMpt.  .  , 


Zh 
2  usually  their-re-they  are 

2  usually  their  own 

3  measure  their 

3  measure  their  own 
3  measure  it 
2  in  his  usual 

M 

2  more  than 

2  some  one 

1  my  dear,  me  their-re    2  am-him-may  their- 

their-re 
1  me  their  own    2  am-him-may  their 

own 
1  remark  their-re    3  humor  their-re 

1  remark  their  own    3  humor  their  own 

2  some  their-re 

2  some  their  own    3  smoother  than 
2  may  it 

2  may-am  not 

3  examine  it 
2  may  be 

2  may  be  one 

2  may  be  their-re-they  are,  improve  their 
3  map  their-re 

2  may  be  their  own,   improve  their  own 

3  map  their  own 

3  humble  their-re 

2  stump  their-re    3  stamp  their-re 

2  stump  their  own    3  stamp  their  own 

2  may  be  they  are  their-re 

2  may  be  they  are  their  own 

2  may  be  it,  improve  it    3  map  it 

2  may  be  not 

2  stump  it    3  stamp  it 


396 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


Ns 2  no,  sir 

Xss/m   ...  2  next  session 

Nr 1  in  our 

Nrn 1  in  our  own 

Nl 1  in  all 

ssX 2  as-is  soon 

ssNs 2  as  soon  as,  is  as  soon  as 

Ntr 1  in  their-re  2  know  their-re-they  are  3  own 

their-re 

Xtrn  ....  1  in  their  own,  neither  one  2  know  their 
own,  another  one  3  own  their  own 

Xtrs/m.  .  .  1  entire  session    2  another  session 

Xrtr 1  near-nor-honor  their-re 

Xrtrn  ....  1  near-nor-honor  their  own 

Xltr 1  in  all  their-re    2  only  their-re 

Xltrn  ....  1  in  all  their  own    2  only  their  own 

sXtr 3  soon  their-re-they  are 

sXltr  ....  3  sooner  or  later 

Xtrtr 1  neither  their-re-they  are  2  another  their- 
re 

Xtrtrn  ...  1  neither  their  own    2  another  their  own 

Nt 1  in  it    2  know  it    3  own  it 

Nrt 1  honor  it,  in  order-to 

Ng 

Ngr 1  along  our 

Xgrn  ....  1  along  our  own,  longer  than 

Xgl 1  along  all 

Xgls 1  thing  else 

Xgtr  ....  1  along  their-re,  long  there 

Xgtrn  ...  1  along  their  own,  long  their  own 

Xgrtr.  ...  1  longer  their-re    3  anger  their-re 

Xgrtrn ...  1  longer  their  own    3  anger  their  own 

Xgltr  ....  1  along  all  their    3  angle  their-re 

Xgltrn.  .  .  1  along  all  their  own    3  angle  their  own 

Xgrtrtr  .  .  1  longer  they  are  their-re 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


397 


R 

Rn 1  or  in  2  are  in  3  our  own 

Rf 1  or  have-of-to  have  2  are  of -to  have  3  hour 

of 

Rtr lor  their-re-they  are  2  her-are-their-re,  be- 
fore their-re-they  are  3  rue  their 

Rtrn  ....  1  or  their  own,  writer-order  than  2  her-are- 
before  their  own  3  rue  their  own, 
rather  than 

Rltr 2  roll  their-re    3  rule  their-re 

Rltrn  ....   2  roil  their  own    3  rule  their  own 

1  with  or    2  with  her,  we  are    3  with  our 
%'Rn 1  were  in,  we  are  in,  with  her  own    3  with 

our  own 

2  were  of -to  have,  we  are  of -to  have    3  aware 

of 

2  were  their-re,  we  are  their-re 
2  where  their-re-they  are 
u'Rtrn  ...   2  were  their  own,  we  are  their  own 
H?/?Rtrn  . .   2  where  their  own 
1  ye  are   2  you  are 

?/Rn 1  ye  are  in    2  you  are  in    3  your  own 

1  ye  are- of -to  have,  year  of    2  you  are  of- 
to  have 

1  ye  are  their-re    2  you  are  their-re 
yRtrn  ....  1  ye  are  their  own    2  you  are  their  own 

Rt 1  or  it-had-would    2  before  it   3  rue  it 

Rnt 1  or  not   2  are  not 

Rf  t 1  or  have-of  it   2  are  of  it 

Rtrt 1  order  it    3  rather  it 

2  were  it 

2  where  it-had-would 

2  were  not,  we  are  not 

2  where  not,  where  had-would  not 

2  were  to  have  it,  we  are  to  have  it   3  aware 

of  it 
2  where  to  have  it 


398 

yRnt  .  . 
z/Rnts.  . 
yRf  t .  .  . 


TilK    PHONOGRAPHIC   MAM'AL. 


Ltr  ... 
Ltrn  .  . 
mrLtr . . 
HJi'Ltrn 

Lt 

Lnt.  . .  . 
Lrnt  .  . 
HwLt . 


H  //'Lnt  . 


1  ye  are  not    2  you  are  not    3  your  hand 
3  your  hands 

1  ye  are  to  have  it    2  you  are  to  have  it. 

L 

2  we  will 

1  all-their-re-they  are    2  will  their-re 

1  all  their  own    2  will  their  own 

1  while  their-re-they  are 

1  while  their  own 

1  all  it-had-wouid    2  will  it 

1  all  had-would  not   2  will  not 

2  learn  it 

1  while  it 

2  we  will  not 
1  while  not 


W 

nWn  .... 

1 

why  one   2  when  one 

Wtr 

-2 

Aveigh  their-re 

nWtr  .... 

I 

why  their-re-they  are    2  when  their-re- 

they  are 

Wtrn  .  .  . 

2 

weigh  their  own 

nWtrn    .  . 

1 

why  their  own    2  when  their  own 

Wtrn  .... 

1 

wider  than 

Wtrtr  .... 

1 

water  their 

Wtrtrn.  .  . 

1 

water  their  own 

Wtrtr  ..  .. 

1 

wither  their    2  weather  their-re 

H  Wtrtr  .  . 

1 

whither  their-re-they  are    2  whether  their- 

re  they  are 

Wtrtrn  .  .  . 

1 

wither  their  own    2  weather  their  own 

H  Wtrtrn  . 

1 

whither  their  own    2  whether  their  own 

Wt  

2 

weigh  it,  we  had-would 

Wnt  

a 

we  had-would  not 

nWt  .... 

i 

why  it-had  would    2  when  it-had-would 

nWnt  .  .  . 

i 

why  not,  why  had-would  not    2  when  not, 

when  had-would  not 

Wnt  . 

3 

would  not 

THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


399 


Yss. 
Yl  . 
Ytr. 


Ytrn  . 

HYtr  . 
nYtrn 

Yt  . .  . 
nYt  .  . 
Ynt  . 


Ylnt 


2  yes,  sir 
1  ye  will 

1  ye  their-re   2  yea  their-re-they  are    3  you 

their-re 
.  1  ye  their  own    2  yea  their  own    3  you 

their  own 

3  hew  their-re 

3  hew  their  own 

1  ye  had-would   3  you  had-would 
3  hew  it 

1  ye  not,  ye  had-would  not   3  you  had- 
would  not 
1  ye  will  not 

SMALL  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 


524.  The  following  list  of  small  phraseographs 
has  already  been  given  in  sections  427,  430,  436,  437, 
447  to  450,  452,  453  and  468,  but  is  presented  here  for 
convenience  of  reference.  It  should  be  thoroughly 
memorized. 


525. 


ss. 

St.. 


str  .. 
strs . . 


Prtoid  .  .  . 
Prtsoid. .  . 
Prtssoid .  . 
Prntoid  . 


LIST   OF    SMALL    PHRASEOGRAPHS. 
CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS. 

1  is  as-his,  his  is-as-has    2  as  is-his-has,  has 

as-his-us 

1  is-his  to-too    2  as  to,  has  to-too 
1  is  to  his-us,  his  too  is    2  as  to  his-us,  has 

to  as 

1  is  to  their    2  as  to  their 
1  is  to  theirs    2  as  to  theirs 

TICKS  AND  CURVETS. 

1  of  our 

1  of  ours-ourself 
1  of  ourselves 
1  of  our  own 


400 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


Prntsoid. . 
Prntssoid . 

Pltoid 

Pltsoid  .. 

Btoid 

Bltoid.  . . . 
Tntoid .  . . 
Tntsoid  . .' 
Tftoid  . .  . 
Tftsoid  .. 
Trtoid  .  . . 
Trtsoid . . . 
Trtssoid  . . 
Trntoid  . . 
Trntsoid . . 
Trntssoid . 
Trftoid. . . 
Tltoid.  . .  . 
Tltsoid .  . . 
Tlntoid.  . . 

Dtoid 

Dltoid  .  . . 
Dlntoid  . . 
Dntoid . . . 
Dntsoid  . . 

Fltoid 

Vtoid.... 
Vltoid  . . . 
Cntoid  .  . . 
Cntsoid  . . 

Jftoid 

TTtx)id . , 


1  of  our  own  self 

1  of  our  own  selves 

1  of  all 

1  of  all  is-his-as-has 

1  of  the 

1  of  all  the 

1  on  other 

1  on  others 

1  I  have 

1  I  have  as-his 

1  on  our 

1  on  ours-ourself 

1  on  ourselves 

1  on  our  own 

1  on  our  own  self 

1  on  our  own  selves 

1  on  our  other 

1  on  all  (Kltoid,  alternate) 

1  on  all  as-has-is-his  (Kltsoid,  alternate) 

1  on  all  other 

1  on  the 

1  on  all  the  (Gltoid,  alternate) ' 

1  on  all  the  other 

1  on  the  other 

1  on  the  others 

1  all  will 

1  all  the 

1  all  will  the,  all  the  will 

1  the  other 

1  the  others,  the  other  is-his-as-has 

1  he  have-of 

1  already  the 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANt'AL. 


401 


LESSOX  49. 
JOINED   AND  CONSTRUCTED   PHRASES. 

526.  The  following  list  of  joined  and  constructed 
phrases  (see  sec.  420,  a)  consists  mostly  of  forms  which 
might  not  readily  occur  to  the  learner.      It  is  divided 
into  two  parts;  one  part  beginning  at  A  and  the  other 
at     O,    at   Lesson     50,    and    should     be     memorised 
thoroughly  before  proceeding  to  the  next  chapter. 

527.  LIST  OF  JOINED  AND  CONSTRUCTED  PHRASES. 


A 

about  which  there,  Bt3Ctr 
absolutely    necessary,   Bs- 

LtXssR 
acknowledge  receipt,  KJ'- 

RsT 
act  of  Congress,  KtGrs 

"   "  Parliament,  KtPrl3 
acts  of  Congress,  KtsGrs 

"    ' ;  Parliament,  KtsPrl3 
again  and  again.  (inGn 
all  bo,  FtoidB 

"  her,  L'E 

"     "     own,  L'Rn 

«  night,  FtoidXt1  or'L1- 
Xt 

u  over,  FtoidVr1 

"      "     the  world,  Ftoid- 
Vr1 Lt 

"  right,  L'Rt 

"  sorts,     FtoidsRts1,    or 
L'sRts 

"  such,  FtoidsC 

"  the  world,  VtoidLt1 

"  ways,  L1  Ws 

"  who,  Ftoid'-nu 


all  your,  FtoidyR1  or  L1- 

yR 
u  your  own,    FtoidyRn1 

or  L^Rn 

along  side  of,  XgsDf J 
although    there    may    be, 

FtoidDhtrMp 
always  was,  LWsZ 
American  citizen,    Mr2K- 

sTn 

"        city,  Mr2KsT 
"        people,  Mr2  KP1 
"        state,  Mr*KsTt 
among  it,  MNgt 
"      its,  MXgts 
"      their,  MXgtr 
"  "    own,  MXgtrn 

"      theirs,  MXgtrs 
&c. ,  s4  or  >S'//tsoid 
and  so  forth,  SHF  or  x9/<- 

toid  SfF 
:'    the    contrary,  C'toid4- 

TrR  or  ZhtoidTrR 
another  word,  Xtr//-Rt 
any  other,  X1-!! 
"        "       one,  X'-u-Wn 


402 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


:iny  time,   XT1 
anything  else,  XlXgls 
"  "    than,      X1- 

XglsDhn 
are  our,  RR 

"     "     own,  RRn 

"    we,   R-w 

"     "     not,  R-w-Nt 

"  you,   R-Y 

"     "     not,  R-v-Nt 
as  far  as  possible,  sF3sPs 
"     c<  "  you  are,  sF3syR 
"    it  had,  Zt3D 
"     "      "    not,  Zt3Dnt 
"    •"  ought,  Zt3T 
"     "       "      not,  Zt3Tnt 
"     "  was,  Zt3Z 
"     «     "     not,  Zt3ZXt 
"     "  would,  Zt3lPt 
"     "       "      not,  Zt3IFnt 
"  soon  as  possible,  ssXs-- 

Ps 

"     "     "  they,    ssNs2Dh 
"  there  is  nothing,  Ztrs3- 

XTh 

"  to  a-an,  st-Ktoid 
"  "  the,  s^Ctoid 
"  we,    sw1  or  sw  (Alter- 
nate. ) 

"  well  as  the,  sLsRtoid 
"  who,  SHU 
"  you,  SF 
"     "      seem,  sFsM 
at  all  events,  Tlf  3Xts 
"   "  of  which,  Tlf3C 
"   "  times,  Tit3 Ms 
«  any,  THX 


at  anv  rate,  T:jXrt 

"     "     time,  T3fXT 

"  first,  T3Frst 

"  last,  T3Lst 

"  length,    Tin3  or  T3X<j- 

Th 

"  night,  T3Xt 
"       "      time,  T3XtT 
"  no,  T3X 
"     "    time,  T3XT 
"  one     "      Tn3T 
"  or  about,  T3RBt 
"  some  time,  T3sMt 
"  that       "     T3fM 
"  the  first,  T3RtoidFrst 
"     "  same  time,  T3sMtM 
"     "  time,  T3RtoidT 
"  times,  Tt3M> 
"  what,  T3    T1 
"       "      time,  T3    TJT 
"        "         "      Avere     you 

there,  T3    T'Ttr 
attorney  at  law,  TrXTL 
Attorney  General,  TrXJn 
autumn  session,   T1MwA»j 

B 

before  another,  RXtr 
"      or  after,  RRFt 
"      you,  R-Y 
best  of  you,  B.sv/R 
between  it  and  that,  Twnt1- 

Dht 

Board  of  Trade,  BrtTrt 
but  we,  B-w  or  B-ir   (Al- 
ternate. ) 
"  your,  Ei/li 


THK   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


by  any,  B'fN 

"     "     means,  B'fNMns 
."  means  of,  B'MnsPtoid 

"day,  B'D 

"     "     time,  B'DtM 

"  night,  B*Nt 

"      "     time,  B'NtT 

"  no  means,  B1NMns 

"  return  mail,  BrttML 

"  your,  B'y/R 

C 

call  attention,  Kl'TNshn 
"    your   attention,    Kl1- 

2/RTNshn 
came   to    the    conclusion, 

KMKlshn 

can  not  account,  Kn^Knt 
Catholic  church,  KCC 
cause  of  action,  Ks1Kshn 
causes"        "      Kss^shn 
certain  extent,  sRteTnt 
Chamber    of     Commerce, 

CMprMrs 
circumstances  of  the  case. 

sTssKs 
circumstantial      evidence, 

sTnVt 
civilized    world,   sVls^Lt 

or  sVlsV'RLt 
C.O.  D.  (for  collect  on  de- 
livery), K-ofD 
collect  on    delivery,  KIK- 

Dl 
come    to    the    conclusion, 

KKlslm 


comes  to  the    conclusion, 

KsKlshn 
common  law,  Mn5L 

"       Pleas,    MPls1    or 


"        spelling,  -MnsP 
Constitution  of  the  U.  S., 

stTshn3Ns 
Court  of  Chancery,  Krt2- 

CsR 
"      "   Common    Pleas, 

Krt8MPls 
"      "  General  Sessions, 


"      "  justice,  KrtMsTs 
"      "  Quarter  Sessions, 

Krt2Kwtrs.s-/^,s- 
"      "   Sessions,      Krt- 

ashns 
"      "   Special  Sessions, 


Cross-examine,  Krss'Mn 
"    examination.  Krsshn* 
or  Krss^INshn 

D 

danger  of,  DJrf 
day  time,  DtM 

"  of  the  week,  DfWK 
dear  sir,  DrsR 
defendant's  counsel,  DsK 
depend  upon  you,DPntP-F 
did  you  know,  Dtn.N  or 
DL'RtoidCtoidX 

"      "    notDtMNtorDt1- 
RtoidCtoidNt 


•HM 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 


direct  examination.  I)iWi/< 

or  DrsMXshn 
do  their  duty,  DtrDT 
"  you  know,  D'N  or  D- 

RtoidCtoidN 

"     "    mean    to   say,    D- 

iMnSorD-y-MnS 

«     "    not,    DiXt   or    D- 

RtoidCtoidXt 
"     "    remember,     D'.Br 

or  D-r-Br 
does  not,  DsNt 
dry  woods  store,  Dr'fGtst 

or  Dr'GtssT 
«    •   «     stores,  DrHGt- 
sts  or  Dr'GtssTs 

E 

each  other,   Cl-u 

"     others,  C^-us- 
east  and  west,  St*Wst 
eastern  cities,  Str^Ts 

"      states,  Str^Tts 
English  language,  Ngl1  Xg 
enlarge  their,  NJtr* 
etc  ,  Ts 

et  cetera,  TsTR 
eternal  life,  TrnF 
ever  since,  V'sNs 
everlasting    life, 

or  V'-LsLF 
evening  train,  Vn 
every  other,  Vr-u 

"          "     one,  Vr-?/-AVn 
everything  else,  VrXgls 
"  "     than,'  Vr- 

NglsDhn 


extra  session,  Ksl'rs.v//// 


face  of  the  deep,  FsDP 

"    to  face,  FsFs 
fellow  citizens,  FIsTns 
for  a  long  time,  FXgT 
"  an  instant,  FsTnt 
"  ever,  FV 

"      "     and  ever,  FVV 
"  his  sake,  FssK 
"  how    long   a  time,    F- 

DtoidNgT 
"  instance,  FsTns 
"  my  part,  FMPrt 
"    "  own  part,  FMNPrt 
('  several,  FsV 
"  some  time,  F*Mt 
"  the   first  time,  FFrsT 

or  FFsT 
"     "     most    part,   FMs- 

Prt 

"     "     purpose  of,  FPPs 
"     "      sake  of,  FsK 
"  they  are  their-rc,     Ftr- 

Dhr 
"      "      "  their  own.  Ftr- 

Dhrn 
from  first  to  last,    Frst- 

tLst3 
from  other,  Fr-M 

"     your     own     knowl- 
edge, FryRnXJ 

G 

gentlemanof  the  jury.  JtJr 
!  gentlemen"  "      "    JtMr 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


405 


gentlemen  of  the  conven- 
tion, JntVn 
give-n  it,  G1T 
'   "       "  their-re,    G1  Ttr 
"    their  attention, Gtr1- 
TXshn 

good  deal,  Gt2DL 
grand  jury,  Grt*Jr 
great  deal,  Grt3DL 
"    extent,  GrtsTnt 
"    number -of,  GrtBrf 
"    while,  Grt/m'L 
greater  and  greater,    Grt- 

Grtr 

"       or  less,GrtLs 
"        "     "   degree,  Grt- 
LsGr 

II 

tufd  had,  D3D 
"    it  not,  D3Xt  (See 

474,  b.) 

"    there  been,  Dtr3Bn 
"       "     not  been,  Dtr3 
NtBn 

half  an  hour,  F3PtoidR 

hand  in  hand,  Xt3Xt 

has  it  a,  Zt3Ptoid 
"   "  had,  Zt3l) 
"   "  riot,  Zt3Xt 
"  "     "   been,  Zt3XtBn 
"   "  that,  Zt3Dht 
"   "  the,  Zt:iRtoid 
"   "  there,  Zt3Dhr 
"    u  to  be,  Zt:3B 
u  there  not,  Ztr3Xt 

he  supposed,  RtsoidPst 


Hon.  gentleman,  XrJnt 
"      gentlemen,  XTrJnt1 
"      member,  XrBr 
"      senator,  XrsXtr 
House  of  Commons,S3Mns 
"     "  Congress,  S3Grs 
"     "  God,  S3Gt 
"     "  Lords,  S3Lts 
"     "  Parliament,     S3- 

PrL 

"      "  Representitives, 
S3RPS 

Houses  of  Congress,  Ss3Gs 
how  are  you,  DtoidR-Y 
' '    could  you,  DtoidKt-r 
"    long,  RtoidXg 
"    many  of  them,  Dtoid- 

MXDh 
human  life,  Mn3F 

I 

I  did,  Dt° 

"   "    not,  KtoidDnt1 

"  have  been,  TftoidBn  or 

Vn° 
"     "      not,  TftoidXt1   or 

Vnt° 

if  it  be  not,  Ft1  But 
"  "  is     "     Fts^t 
"  possible,  F!Ps 
' '  they  are  their-re,     Ftr J  - 

Dhr 
"     "      "   thei  r  own,  Ftr1- 

Dhrn 

"  you  know,  F-r-X 
ifs  and  ands,  Fs1    Rtsoid4 


400 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


n 


accordance-with, 

or  N'KrtNs 
all  cases,  NlJKss 

"    other   cases, 
Kss 

«        "       respects, 
u-R'sPs 

"    parts,  NIPrts1 

"    respects, 
any,  N'N 

"     case,  N 
conclusion,  N^Klshn 
connection-with-with 

the,  N'fKshn 
consequence-of, 
effect,  NFKT 
eitner,  NDhr1 

"      case 
fact,  NFt1 
full,  NF1 
hand,  N*Nt 
like  manner,  NlJKNr 
my  opinion,  NaMNn 
or  about,  NR^t 
order  that,  NrtDht1 
other,  N 


M- 


cases,  N^u-Kss 


N-u-Ws 

"     words,  N-u- 
our  own  house, 

u    store,  Nrstr1 
point  of  fact,  NPn^Ft 
reading,  NrDaNg 
receipt,  NrsT 
reference-to-to  the,  Nr- 

Fs 
regard-to-to  the,  Nr1Gt 


in  relation-to-to  the,  NR1- 

shn1 

"  reply-to-to  the,  NrPl 
"  respect-to-to  the,  NrsP 
"  response-to-to  the,  Nrs- 

Pns 

"  return,  NrTRn 
"  settlement,  nsTlMnt 
"  so  far  as,  NSFs 
"  such,  NsC 

*'       "     a  manner,  NsCXr 
"  that  city,  NDhtJsT 
"     "    state,  NDht^Tt 
"  the  course,  N^CtoidKrs 
"     "  first,  NFrst 
"     "     u    instance,  NFrs- 

NsTns 

"  "  "  part,  NFrsPrt 
"  "  "  party,  NFrsP 
"  "  "  place,  NFrP  or 

NFP1 
"     "   habit-of,  NBt2  or 

N^toidBt 
"     "   last  place,  NCtoid 

L'Pl 

"     "  meantime,  NMnT 
11     "  meanwhile,      NM- 


"     "  midst  of  life,  NCt- 

oidMsL^F 

"     "   next  place,  NNP1 
"     "   one       "     NWPL 
"     "  providence  of  God, 

NDs3Gt 

"     k'   second,  N^Knt 
•'     "        "     place,  NsKt- 

Pl 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


407 


in  the  sight    of     God,    X- 
sT'Gt 

"  "  street,  nsTrt1 
"  "  third,  NThrt2 
"  "  "  place,  XThrt2- 

Pl  or  NThPls 
"     "   United  States,    X1- 

Xss 
"     "   word    of   God,     X- 

v/'Rt'Gt 
"     "   world,  NCtoidLt1 

or  XLt1 
"  their  own    right,   Xtrn- 

Rt1 

"      "     place,  XtrPls 
«      "     words,    XtrwRts1 
"  this  city,  XDhssT 
"      "    connection,  XDhsf 

Kshn 

"     "    court,  XDhsKt 
"     "    state,  XDhssTt 
"  your  opinion,  XyRXn 
"     "      reply,  X//RRP1 
"  writing,  Xrt'Xg 
inasmuch  as,  XsCs3 
Indian  ocean,  XtXShn 
into  their,  XTtr 

"        "     own,  XTtrn 
is  it  a,  Zt^toid 
"  "  not,  Zt'Xt 
"  u     "  better,    ZtJXtBtr 
"  "  the,  Zt^toid 
"  "  their-re,  Zt^hr 
u  «     a   own,  ZtJDhrn 
"  "  to  be,  Zt1!* 
"  there  anybody,  Ztr'NBt 
"      "    anyone,  Zti^XWn 


is  there  anything,    Ztr'X- 

Xg 

"  to  a-an,  stJ-Ktoid 
"  "  the,  st^Ctoid 
it  had  not  been,  Tnt3Bn 
"  is  impossible,  TsMps 
"  "  many,  TsMX 
"  u  most  important,    Ts- 


"  my  opinion,   TsMXn 

"  said,  TssD 

"  sure,  TsShr 

"  surely,  TsShrL 

'"  well  known,  TsLXn 

ought  not,  T   Tnt1 

seems  impossible,  TsMs- 

Mps 
"      to  me,'TsMsM 

was,  TZ 
"    not,  TZXt 

will   be,  TIB 

•"     have    it,    TlfT    or 

Tlft 
"     not  be,  TlntB 

would  have,Tt    V 

"          "    been.Tt  Vn 
"          "    had,  Tt    Vt 
"         "    it,  Tt   Vt 
"      not  be,  TntB 


joint  stock,  JtasK 
"          "     co.,  Jt^KK 
"          "     company,   Jt1- 
sK'PX 

just  as  fast,  JssFst 
«    «     "as,  JssFsis 


408 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC 


just  as  fast  as  possible, 
JssP"ssPs 

"    "  good,  JssGt 

"    "  long,  JssNG 

"    "  much,  JssC 

"    u  soon,  JsssN 

"    "  well,  JssL 

"  been,  JsBn 

"  now,  JsNCtoid 

"  received,  JsRsVt 
justice  of  the  peace,  JsPs 
justices  "    "       "     JssPs 

K 

kingdom    of   Christ,    K1- 

Krst 

kingdom  o^  heaven,  KVn1 
"         "  the  world, 
KLt1 

know  about,  NBt 
"     as  well,  NsL 
"      "  much,  N2sC 


ladies  and  gentlemen,  LDs- 

Jnt 
last  night,  Ls3Nt  or  Lst3- 

Nt 
"    will    and    testament, 

Ls3LTsMnt 
latter  part-of,  Ltr3Prt 
legislative  session,  LJs-sAw 
less  than,    LsN   (see   sec. 

467) 

let  us  have,  Lts2V 
"    "       "it,  Lts'Vt 


liber tv  of  the  press,  Br1- 

Prs 

life  estate,  L]FsTt 
long  side  of,  XgsDf l 

"     suffering,   NgsFRXjj 

"•     time,  NgT1 

"       "     ago,  NgT^G 

"       "     before,  Xg'PR 

"       "     since,  NgTJsNa 

"     while,  N 

u        "    ago, 


many  circumstances,    MX- 

sTnss 

"   instances, ]\!XNsTnss 
matter  of  fact,  MtrFt 
"       "  importance,  Mtr- 
Mp 

may  as  well,  MsL 
* '    it  please  the  Court.Mt- 
PlsKrt   (See  sec. 
189.) 
"    "    please  your  Honor, 

MtPlsXr 
member  of  Congress,   Br- 

Grs 
11        of  Parliament,  Br 

PrL 
"        of  society,  BrfS 

or  Brf-fS 

"         of  the  bar,  BrBr 
"           "    "  board,  Br- 

Brt 

"         of  the  church, 
BrCrC 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


409 


member  of  the  House,  BrS 
it      a    a   Legislature, 

BrLJ 

' '       of  the  Senate,  BrsNt 
members  of  Congress,  Brs- 

Grs 

"         of  the   Senate, 
BrssNt 
Methodist  church,  MThts- 

CC 

"        Episcopal 
church,  MThtsPsCC 
might  not,  Mt'Nt 
more  and  more,  MrMr 

"     or   less,   MrLs 
morning  train, MrnJNgtrn 
most  important,  MsMp 
"     likely,  MsLKl 
"     luckily,  MsLKL 
Mr.  Chairman,  MrCrn 
"    President,  MrPrs 
"  "       and  Gentle- 

men of  the  Conven- 
tion, MrPrsJntVn 
"     Speaker,  MrsP 
much  more,  C3Mr 
must  not,  MsXt 
my  brethren,  MBrn3 
"  brother,  MBrtr 
' '  dear  brethren, MtrBrn3 
"       "  brother,  MtrBrtr 
"       "  friend,    MtrFrnt 
"       "  sir,  MtrsR 
"  other,  M1-^ 
"       "    friend,  M-u-Frnt1 
"  own,  MJN 
"      "    opinion,  MJNNn 


my  text,  M^Kst 

N 

night  time,  NtT1 
no  doubt,  NfDt  or  NDt 
"   fact,  N1Ft 
11   other,  N-u 
"       "      one,  N8-u-Wn 
"    time,  N2T 
north  and  south,  NrsTh1 
northeastern  cities,  NrStr ]  - 

sTs 

' '          states,    Nr- 
Str 'sTts 
northern  cities,  NrtrsTs1 

"       states,  NrtrsTts1 
northwestern  cities,  Nr- 
WsRsTs 

' '  states,   Nr- 

WsRsTts 

not  at  that  time,  NtT3fM 
"    only,  NtJM 
nothing  else,  NThNgls 
"         "      than    NTh- 
NglsDhn 

"        less,  NThLs 
"          "      than,    NTh- 
LsN 
notwithstanding  it,  NfTT 

"  u    had- 

would,  NfTt 
notwithstanding      the, 

NfTRtoid 
notwithstanding  the  fact, 

NfTRtoidFt 
notwithstanding     their, 
NfTtr 


410 


THE   PHOXO  ;i:APllIC   .MANUAL 


LESSON  50. 

O 

objected  to,  BT 
objection  sustained,  BssTnt 
of  course  it  is,  PtoidKrsTs 
"  great  advantage,   Ptoid 

GrtJ 

"  her,  PtoidR 
"  your,  Ptoid^R 
offered  in  evidence,  Frt^N- 

Vt 

on  a-an,  Ttoid'Ktoid 
"  account,  Ttoid'Knt 
"  board,  TtokPBrt 
"  his  own,  TtsoidN1 
"    "      "     account,  Tts- 
oidN 1Knt 
"  it,  KtoidT 
"  more  than  one  occasion, 

TtoidMrnWnKshn 
"  my  part,    Ttoid^Prt 
"  one  hand,   TtoidWnXt 
"     "  occasion,  TtoidWn- 

Kshn 

"  or  about,  TtoidiRBt 
"   "  before,  Ttoid'RR 
"  the  contrary,  DtoidTrR 
"    "  first,  DtoidFrst 
"     "  "      instant,  Dtoid- 

FrsNsTnt 
"   "one  hand,Dtoid\Vnt 

or  DtoidWnNt 
"    u  other  hand,  Dntoid1- 

Nt 

"    "  part-of,  DtoidPrt 
"    "  i>resent,  DtoidPrsNt 


on  their  own,  TtoidDhrn 
"  their  part, TtoidDhrPrt 
"  this  action,  TtoidDhs3- 

Kshn 
"     "    motion,  TtoidDhs- 

Mshn 
"     "    occasion,     Ttoid- 

DhsKshn 
"     "    part,  TtoidDhsPrt 

or  TtoidDhPrt 
"      "    subject,    Ttoid- 

DhssB 

"  those,  TtoidZ3 
"  what,  KtoidT1 
u  whom,  Ktoid1Hu 
"  your  part,  KtoidyRPrt 
once  again,  WsGn 
"     have,     WnsV.     (See 

whencever. ) 

"    in  a  while,  WsXii'/-L 
"    more,   AYsMr 
u     or  twice,   WnsTs 
one  of  the  best,   WnBst 
:    "     "      "  most,  WnMst 
one's  sell,  W ns:s 

9 

other  cases,  u-Kss 

"     causes,  u-Kss1 

"      day,  u-D 

"     hand,  u-Xt3 

"     than  u-l)hn 

"     times,  u-Ts1 

"     ways,  u-\Vs 

"     words,  u-? 
oiiffht  it  not, 

"     not  it-to,  Tn^T 
"       "    to  be,  Tnt1B 
ought  to,  T'T 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


411 


ought  to  be,  TaB 

"       "    "    donejT'BDn 
"       "have  been,  Tf'Bn 
"      "     "     had,  Tf'D 
n      «     «       «  itjTf'Dt 
"     we,    T'-w  or  T'-TF 
(Alternate.) 
our  own  time,  Rn3T 

"    text,  Rt3Kst 
out  of  doors,  Tf  3DRs 
"     "it,  Df3TorTfts 
"     "  the  way,  Tf 3W 
over  and  over,  "WVr 
"       "       "       again,  Vr1- 

VrGn 
"      the  world,  Vi^Lt 


part  of  their,  Prt2Vtr 
party  measure,  P3Zhr 
"     of  the  first  part,  P3- 

FrsPrt 
"      u     "    second    part, 

P3sKtPrt 
peculiar    circumstances, 

P3KsTnss 
peculiar  circumstances  of 

the  case,  P3KsTssKs 
perhaps  your  Honor,  Pr- 

PsNr 

personal  estate,    PrsNlsTt 
petit  jury,  PtJr 
phonetic  spelling,  FNtKsP 
place  of  business,    PlsBss 

or  PlsBsNs 

plaintiff's  counsel,  PltsK 
point  of  view, 


Postmaster  General,  PsMs- 

Jn 

postage  stamp,  PsJsMp 
postal  card,  PsLKrt 
Presbyterian  church,  PrsfC 
present  circumstances,  Prs- 
NtsTnss 

"       state,  PrsNtsTt 
President  of   the  U.    S. , 

PrsNss  or  PrsDntXss 
President's  message,  Prs  M 

or  PrsMsJ 

prima  facie  case,PrFAS7^Ks 

Prime  Minister,  PrMXstr 

Protestant  church,  PrtsCC 

"         faith,  PrtsFTh 

u         religion,  PrtsJn 

Q 

Quarter    Sessions    Court, 

Kwtrs-s'A/w1  Kt 
quite  certain,  Kwt^sRt 
"    sure  they  are,  Kwt1- 

Shrtr 
quo  warranto,  Kw?/?Rnt 

R 

rather  be,  Rtr3B 
"      give,  Rtr3G 
"      have,  Rtr3V 
real  estate,  R^sTt 
registered  letter,  RJsLtr 
recross-examination.RKrs- 

shn  or  RKrsMNshn 
redirect  examination,  RI)r- 
sftkn    or   RDrsMNshn 
Reformed  church,  RFCC 


412 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 


render    themselves,  RXtr- 

Dhss 

Rev.  Dr.,  RVDr 
"     Mr.,  RVMr 
revised  statutes,   RVssTts 
Roman    Catholic    church, 

RKCC 


saw  him  there,  S'Mtr 
"    you     "       S'jDhr  or 

S'-r-Dhr 

season  of  the  year,  SsXyR 
Secretary  of  Agriculture, 

sKrtGr 
"          of  State,    sKrt- 

sTt 
"          of  the  Interior, 

sKrtNtr 
"          of   the  Navy, 

sKrtX 
"          of  the   Treasr 

ury,  sKrtTr 
"          ofWar.sKrt?^R 
seems  to  be,  sMsB 

"     "  have,  sMsV 
Senate  of  the  IT.  S. ,  sXtNss 
senator  of  the  U.  S. ,  sXtr- 

NBS 

see  him  there,  S*Mtr 
"  you      "      S'iDhr    or 

S'-r-Dhr 
set  forth,  sTfRTh 
shall  be,  ShB 
"       "    able,  ShBBl 
«     have,  ShV 
"      have  been,  ShVn 


shall  not,  ShXt  (See  sec. 

474,  a.) 

"       "  be,  ShXtB 
"        "    "    able,  ShXtB- 

Bl 

"       "  have,  ShXtV 
"       "      "     been,ShXt- 

Vn 

she  had  been,  Sh^Bn 
"     "    not,  Sh^Xt    (See 
sec.  474,  a.  ) 
"       "    "    been,  Sht^t- 

Bn 
"  will    "    ShPXt    (See 

sec.  474,  a.) 
"  would  be,  ShVB 


sec.  474,  a.) 
"        "     not  be,Sht'XtB 
should  be,  Sht3B 

"       "    able,  Sht3BBl 
"      have,  Sht3V 
"          "    been,  Sht3Vn 
"      not,Sht3Xt(Sees;ec. 

474,  a.) 

"       "  be,Sht3XtB 
"        "     u  able,Sht3- 

XtBBl 

"        "  have,Sht3XtV 
"        "     "     been,Sht3- 
XtVn 

side  by  side,  sD^D 
so  as  possible,  SsPs 
"   "  to  be,  SsB 
"  far,  SF 
"     "as,  SFs 
i  "     "  from,  SFFr 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL.. 


413 


so  long  affo,  SNg*G 
"  much,  S   C3  or  SMC 
"  well-will,  SL 
"     "     known,  SLNn 
some   other    session,    sM- 

usxhn 

something  like,  sMNglK 
sometime  ago,  sMtMG 
southeastern  cities,  sStr1- 

sTs 

"  states,  sStr1- 

sTts 
southern  cities,   sDhrsTs 

or  sDhsTs 

"         states,  sDhrsTts 
or  sDhsTts 
southwestern  cities, 

sW3sRsTs 
1 '  states, 

sW3sRsTts 
special  court,  sPKrt 
"      jury,  sPJr 
"      rates,  sPRts 
"      term,  sPTrM 
spring  session,  sPrNgs.s/m 
State  House,  stTS 

"     of  facts,  stTfKts 
step  by   step,  stPsTP    or 

stPsP 

Sunday  school,  sNDsKl 
Superior  Court,  sPRKrt 
Supreme  Court,  sPrKrt 
«  "      of  the 

State,  sPrKrtsTt 
Supreme     Court    of     the 
U.  S.,  sPrKrtXss 


Supreme    Court    of    this 

state,  sPrKrtDhssTt 
supreme  power,  sPrPR 
surely  their-re,  ShrLtr 
"         "    own,    ShrLtrn 

T 

take  care  of,  TKKrf 
"     action,  TK    Kshn3 
"    occassion,    TKKshn 
"    pleasure,  TKZhr 
"    your  own,  TK?/Rn 

takes  action,  TKs   Kshn3 
"     occasion,  TKsKshn 

telegraphic  dispatch,  TIG- 
sC  or  TlsC 

tell  how  long,  TIRtoidNg 

testimony  of  the   defend- 
ant, TsMD 
u         of  the  plaintiff, 
TsMPlnt 

that  are,  Dht3R 
"    have,  Tht3V 
"       "      been,  Dht'Vn 
"    is  all,  Dhts3Ftoid 
"    "   "    the,Dhts3Vtoid 
"    "it,  Dhts3T 
"    "to  say,  Dhts3S 
"    that,  Dht3Dht 
"    they,  Dht3Dh 
"       "     are,  Dht3Dhr 
"    was,  Dht3Z 
"    would,  Dht3  IFt 
"         "       not,  Dht3  TTnt 

the  first,  RtoidFrst 
"      "   day,  RtoidFrsD 
"      "    one,  RtoidFrsWn 


414 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 


the  first  part,  RtoidFrsPit 
"      "    time,  RtoidFrsT 
"    other  day,   CntoidD 
•'     "     night,  CntoidNt1 
"     "     one,  CntoidWn 
"     "     part,  CntoidP3Rt 
"     "     party,  CntoidP3 
"     "     shall,  CntoidSh 
"     "     should,  Cntoid- 

Sht3 

•<     "     thing,  CntoidNg1 
"     "     time,  CntoidT1 
".     "     way,  CntoidW 

their  words,  DhrRts 

there  always  mustbe,Dhr- 

LWsMsB 

( i     must  always  be,  Dhr- 
MsLWsB 

these  numbers,  Dhs1Brs 

they  are  rather,  DhrRtr 
."'    have,  DhV 
"     have  been,  DhVn 
"     would  have,  DhtV 
"          "         "      been, 

DhtVn 
"     would  have  had,  Dht 

Vt 
"     would  have  it,  DhtVt 

this  action,  Dhs   Kshn3 
"  matter,  DhsMtr 
"  meaning,  DhsMnNg 
"  morn,  DhsMn 
"  morning,  DhsMn 
"  number,  DhsBr 
"  occasion,  DhsKshn 

those  are,  Z3R 

"      "    not,  Z3Rnt 


those  circumstances,     Z3- 

sTnss 
"     numbers,  Z'Brs 

to  a  certain  extent,  TsRt- 
sTnt 

"  all  intents,  TlnNnts 

"  be  sure,  B3Shr 

"  "   there,  Btr3 

"'  "   able  to,  B3Blt 

"  become,  B3K 

"  itself,  TTs 

"  night,  TNtorNt1  in  jux- 
taposition. 

"  the,  TRtoid 

"     "     end,  TRtoidNt 

"     "     world,    TLt     or 
TRtoidLt 

"  you,  T-r 

true  bill,  Tr3Bl 

truly  yours,  TrLyRs  (Tr- 
yRs,  subscript.) 

trust  funds,  TrsFnts 

U 

under  the  circumstances, 

NtsTnss 

' '     the   necessity, 
NtNssT 

until  one,  Tl3Wn 

U.  S.  of  America,  NssMK 
"    Senate,  NssNt 
u    senator,  NssNtr 
"    Territory,  NssTRt 

upon  the  face,  PnFs 
"     "  subject,  PnsB 
"     "         "       of,PnsBf 
"     you,  P-F 


THK  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANCAL. 


V 

variety  of  causes,  VRTfKss 
verdict  for  the  defendant, 

VrtKtD 
'  '        for  the    plaintiff, 

VrtKtPlnt 

"        of  the  jury,  Vrt- 
KtJr 

very  likely,  VrLKl 
«    respectfully,  VrRsP 

(VtR,  subscript.) 
u    respectfully     vours, 


subscript.  ) 
"    seldom,  VrsLtM 
"    truly,  VrTrL   (VT, 

subscript.) 

"    truly   yours,  VrTrL- 
yRs(  VT//Rs,  subscript.  ) 
vice-president,  VsPs 

W 

was  it,  ZT 
"      "  not,  ZTnt 
"     "  their-re,  ZTtr 
"      "      "     own,  ZTtrn 
"      "  therefore,  ZTDhr- 

F 

was  its,  ZTs 
"    not,  ZNt 
"    said,  ZsD 
"    that,  ZDht 
"    there  anybody,   ZtrN- 

Bt 

"        "      anyone,     ZtrX- 
Wn 


was  there  anything,     Ztr- 

NNg 
"        "      anything    said, 

ZtrNNgsD 
"        "      nobody,  Ztr    N- 

Bt 
"       "     no  one,  Ztr   N2- 

Wn 

ways  and  means,  WsMns 
"    of  the  world,  AVsLt 
we  are  in  receipt,  -?t'RnRsT 
41     "  rather,  toRRtr 
"     "  ready,  wERD 
"  as,  ws1 
"  believe,  w-Blf 
"  do,  w-D 
"     "    not,  w-Dnt 
"  have  been,  w-Vn 
"  laugh,  vL3F 
u  like,  w'LJK 
"  live,  trW 
"  love,  ?/'LV 
11  may  be,  ir-Mp 
"     "     not  be,  ir-Mnt2B 
"  might  " 
u  refer,  ?/jRR  or 
"  regard,  ?/jR3Grt 
"  regret, 
"  remain, 
"  remember,  w-Bi- 
"  were,  w-?rR 
"       "     there,   w^rRlr 
"  yet,  w-Yt 
were  there  not,  ?/;RtrXt 
"    they  there,  wRDhtr 
"    we,  ?rR-w 
"    yet,  w 


41(1 


TIIK    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 


were  you,  //'R-v 

"       "    not,  ?/-R-Y-Xt 
"       "    there, 

or  ?/'RDhr 
western  cities,  WsRsTs 

"        states,    WsRsTts 
what  are  ye,  Tr1  Y 
"     "   you,  Tr1-!- 
"   at,   T'T 

"  connection,  T^fKshn 
"  did  you,  T1    Dt'-Y 
"do     "      T1D-Y 
"  has-is  it,  T^T 
"  of   that,  TfJDht 
"  sorU>f, 
"  time, 
"      "     were  you  there, 

T'Ttr 

"  took  place,  T^Pls 
"  were,  TlwR 
"  ye,  T»Y 
"  yet,  T!Yt 
"  you,  T^r 
when  they  are  their  -  re, 

nWtrDhr 

"        "    are  their  own, 
nWtrDhrn 
whence  have,  nWnsV  (See 

once  have) 
whenever  their-re-they  are, 

nWVtr 

"         there     is      any- 
thing, nWVtrsXNg 
where  are  they,   H?/jRRDh 
"        "we     H?6'RR-w 


do  you  live, 


or 


where  do  you  reside,  Ji/"Ii- 

sD  or  H//-RRsD 
"     there    has     been, 

HyRtrsBn 

"     we,  H//-R-W 

"     werethev, 

Dh 


you,  H^- 
"     will,  H?/-RL 
"       "     you,  H?/.'RL-r 
"     you,  H//-R-Y 
wherever  their-re-they  are, 


"        there  is    any- 
thing, H?/-RVtrsXXg 
whether  or  not,  H  ITtrRnt 
"       you  are,  H  ITtn/R 
or  H  trtr-r-R 
which  are  likely,  CrLKl 
"        "        "        to  have. 

CrLKlf 

"     would  have,  CtV 
"          "        '"     been, 

CtVn 
"     would  have  had, 

CtVt 

"     would  have  it,  CtVt 
while  the,   H^-L^toid 
"    they  are  their  -re, 
HwLtr1Dhr 
"        "    are  their  own, 

HwLtr^hrn 
"     we,  H^/'L'-w 
"     you  are,  H/rL^R 
who  have,  HU-V 
"    of,    HU    Ptoid1  or 
HuPtoid 


THE    PHOXfKlUAJ'llIC    MANUAL. 


417 


will  the,  LRtoid 
"    we,  L-w 
"    you,  L-r 
"       "     look,  L-r-LK 
i<       "     not,  L-Y-Nt 
winter  session, 
with  all  that,  DbPDht 
"    or    without, 

or  icR^Dht 
"    other,  Dh1^ 
"    reference-to-to  the, 

u'RRns  or  mRfRns 
"    regard-to-to  the,  wR3- 

Grt 

"    regret,  ?/?RGrt 
"    relation-to-tothejDh1- 

Rlshn 
"    respect-  to-to  the, 


"    them,  DhJDh 

"    this,  Dh'Dhs 

u    which  their-re-they 

are,  Dh^tr 
witness  stand,  WtaNssTnt 

or  T1NssTnt 
word  of  God,  wRtGt 
words  of  his  text,?/'RtssTst 
"       "  my  text,     ?oRts- 

MtKst 
"       "  our  text,    ?6'Rts- 

RtKst 

"       "  the  text,  mRtsTst 
"       "  your  text,  wRts- 
yRtKst 

world  without  end,  LtDht 
'.Nt  (the  center  of  Nt 
under  the  end  of  Dht.  ) 


would  be, 

"       have,  Trt3V 
"         "      had,   TR3Vt 
"         "      it,   irt3Vt 
"         "      been,  TTWn 
'<         "      to   be,     Trt3- 
VB 

would  their-re,  TFt3Dhr 
"      we,   Wi3-w 
"      ye,    TOY 
"      yet,    TFt3Yt 
"      you,   Trt3r 

writing  it,  RtaNgt 


ye  shall,  Y'Sh 

"      "     not, 
yea,   more,  YMr 
years  ago,  yRs'G 
4 '     and  years,   yRs } 
"      "       "     ago,yEs»- 

2/RsG 

"     before,  7/RsR 
' '     of  age,  yRs J 
"     old,  yRsLt 
yes,  sir,  Yss,  Yss3  orYssR 
yesterday  afternoon,    StR- 

DftNn 

"      eve,  StRDV 
"      evening,  StRDVn 
you  are,  yR  or  F-R 
"      ''    not,yRnt  or  Y-Rnt 
"     as,  YS 
"     believe,  Y-Blf 
"     have,  Y-V 
"       "      been,  Y-Vn 
"       "      had-it,  Y-Vt 


418 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANTA1.. 


you  have  their,  Y-Vtr 
"     knew,  Y-NFtoid 
"     know,  y-N 
"     must  satisfy,  Y-MssT 
"     remember,  F-Br 
"     will,  r-L 
your  favor,  yRF 
"    Honor,  yRNr 
"    last  letter,  yRLsLtr 
u    opinion,  yRXn 
"     reference,     yRRRns 

or  yRRfRns 
"    references,  yRRRnss 

or  j/RRfRnss 
"    statement. 
"    very,  yRVr 
"        "    esteemed, 
VrsMt 


your  very  esteemed  favor, 

7/RVrsMtfF 
yours  &c.  ,   yRss   or   //Rs- 


"    and  so  forth,   yRsTh 

"    etc.,  yRsTs 

"    et  cetera,  yRsTsT  or 

yRsTsTR 

"  faithfully,  yRsFTh 
"  respectfully,  yRsKsl1 
"  truly,  yRsTrL  (//Hs- 

T,  subscript.) 
"    verv      respectfully, 
yRsVrRsP    (yRs- 
VfR,  subscript.) 
"    very   truly,    yRsVr- 
TrL      (yRsVT,     sub- 
script. ) 


THE  PHONOUKAPHIC  MANUAL.  419 


CHAPTER  XI. 

VARIOUS  EXPEDIENTS. 


LESSON  51. 

FIGURES,    ETC. 

528.  Most  of  the  Arabic  figures,  that  is  to  say  the 
nine  digits  and  cipher,  cannot  be  written  as  swiftly  as 
rapid  speech.  Many  attempts  have  been  made  by 
shorthand  writers  to  invent  briefer  forms  than  the 
Arabic  ones  and  still  retain  the  legibility  of  the  latter, 
but  all  such  endeavors  have  been  and  are  useless  since 
such  forms  do  not  exist  in  nature.  The  Arabic  figures, 
therefore,  are  at  once  the  briefest  and  most  legible 
that  can  be  devised.  Again  other  attempts  have  been 
made  to  utilize  the  shorthand  letters  themselves  as 
figures,  but  this  has  been  found  objectionable  from  the 
fact  that  they  resemble  the  other  writing  about  them 
and  are  thus  difficult  to  distinguish  and  so  can  not  be 
readily  referred  to  when  necessary.  Moreover  they 
are  easily  mistaken  for  each  other,  besides  having  two 
meanings  attached  to  the  same  form,  and  as  the  greatest 
exactitude  is  needed  when  dealing  with  figures  these 
are  most  important  considerations.  Although,  there- 
fore, the  shorthand  forms  are  briefer  than  the  Arabic 
ones,  none  of  the  above  objections  apply  to  the  latter, 
which  are  accordingly  far  preferable.  Besides  the 
preceding,  still  other  attempts  have  been  made  to  utilize 
the  shorthand  names  of  the  digits,  that  is  to  employ 
the  words  "one,  two,  three,"  etc.,  everywhere  for 


420  THE  pHoxoiiKAi'inr  MANUAL. 

figures;  but  an  objection  given  above  applies  here  also, 
namely,  that  two  meanings  sometimes  attach  to  the 
same  form.  Thus  although  we  can  and  do  write  the 
names  of  the  digits  when  alone,  as  "one,  three,  six," 
etc.,  no  confusion  results  because  the  name  of  the 
digit  and  that  of  the  number  are  the  same.  But  if  we 
employ  the  digits  together  as  "one  three"  (13)  or 
"three  one"  (31)  for  "thirteen"  or  "thirty-one,"  con- 
flict ensues  because  the  names  of  the  digits  and  number 
are  different.  The  shorthand  names  of  the  digits, 
therefore,  can  not  safely  be  employed  as  figures  which 
must  have  but  one  meaning  and  this  is  given  them 
only  by  the  Arabic  forms. 

529.  The  foregoing  observations  are  made  in  order 
that  the  learner  may  not  waste  his  time  in  endeavoring 
to  invent  the  impossible.  If  better  figures  could  be 
invented  than  the  Arabic  ones  they  would  be  used  in 
place  of  the  latter;  which  had  it  been  possible  would 
have  been  done  long  since.  The  conclusion  thus  is 
irresistible  that  the  Arabic  figures  are  the  best  that  can 
be  obtained.  Finally,  even  if  it  were  possible  to  invent 
briefer  forms  as  above  for  the  nine  digits  and  cipher 
it  would  still  be  impossible  to  write  with  them  such 
numbers  as  one  million,  etc.,  swiftly  enough  for  report- 
ing purposes  since  six  or  more  ciphers  would  have  to 
be  used.  Thus,  in  that  respect,  no  practical  advantage 
would  be  gained.  The  learner  is,  accordingly,  most 
earnestly  advised  to  pay  no  attention  to  so  called  sub- 
stitutes for  the  Arabic  characters  to  be  employed  in 
shorthand,  but  to  confine  his  efforts  to  representing 
numbers  without  them.  There  are  various  ways  in 
which  this  can  be  done  by  employing  the  shorthand, 
the  Arabic  figures  and  certain  arbitraries;  the  best 
methods  of  doing  which,  in  order  to  obtain  the  greatest 
rapidity,  will  next  be  considered.  Before  proceeding, 
however,  it  is  proper  to  remark  that  wherever  the 
Arabic  figures  cannot  be  written  as  swifty  as  rapid 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  421 

speech  and  yet  are  necessary  to  be  made,  the  learner 
must  write  them  as  swiftly  as  possible  and  depend  on 
the  speed  of  the  shorthand  to  keep  up  with  the  flow  of 
words. 

530.  In  order  to  render  the  subject  clearer  so  that 
the  learner  will  know  just  what  is  possible  in  the  way 
of  writing  numbers  speedily  with  the  Arabic  characters 
when  the  latter  are  employed  exclusively  he  is  informed 
that 

a.  The  digits,  except  1,  6  and  7,   can  not  not  be 
written  as  swiftly  as   rapid  speech  with  the  Arabic 
numerals. 

b.  The  cipher  can  not  be  so  written. 

c.  Any  number  of  two  figures   which  contains  a 
cipher,  or  any  number  or  group  of  three  or  four  figures 
with  two  ciphers  can  not  be  so  written. 

d.  Any  number  of  two  or  more  figures  which  does 
not  contain  a  cipher  or  any  number  or  group  of  three 
or  four  figures  containing  but  one  cipher  can  usually 
be  so  written. 

531.  From  the  preceding  it  will  be  understood  that 
numbers  are  most  quickly  written  by  never  employing 
a  cipher  in  a  number  of  two  figures  or  more  than  one 
in  any  number  or  group  of  three  or  four  figures. 

532.  The   above    being    premised    the    following 
method  of  representing  numbers  has  been  adopted  in 
this  system. 

THE  NUMBERS  ONI.,  THREE,   SIX  AND  TWELVE  OCCURRING 

ALONE. 

533.  As  the  Arabic  numerals  "one"  and  "six"  are 
liable  to  conflict  with  the  shorthand  characters  when 
standing  alone — that  is  disconnected  from  other  figures 
—they  are  then  usually  represented  by  the  logographs. 
Also  "three""  and   "twelve"   aro  then  usually  written 
with  the  logographs  for  the  sake  of  speed. 


422  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

NUMBERS    BEFORE    THE    WORDS    HUNDREDS,     THOUSANDS, 
ETC.,    AND    MONEY. 

534.  When  a  number  occurs  before  either  the  sin- 
gular or  plural  of  the  words    "hundred,    thousand," 
etc.,  "dollars,  cents,  pounds  (money),    '-shillings''  or 
"pence"    it  is  written  with  the   Arabic  characters — 
except  "one,  three,  six"  and  "twelve"'  as  explained  in 
the  last  section.     In  such  cases: 

535.  "Hundreds"' and  "thousands"  are  represented 
by  the  logographs;  thus,  WnXt,  loo;  2 N't.  L"><>:  L>:>Nt. 
2,500;     ThrTh,     3,000;     125Th3,     125,000;    4-XtTh, 
4( Hi, 000;  sKs'XtTh,    600,000;   TwfNtTh,    1,200,000; 
16NtTh,  1,600,000. 

536.  If  the  writer  following  a  speaker  very  closely 
writes  a  denominational  logograph  and  finds  that  other 
figures  follow  he  can,  instead  of  erasing  the  logograph, 
write  them  after  it  in  the  second  position.     This,  how- 
ever, will  occur  but  comparatively  seldom  and  when  it 
does  will  be  more  liable  to  happen  after   "thousands" 
than  "hundreds."     These  logographs  are  mostly  em- 
ployed to  indicate  round  numbers,    as  400,  4-000,  or 
those  of  four  figures  which  contain   two   ciphers   as 
4005,4500.     (See  sees.  530  and  531.)     They  should, 
accordingly,    be  written  as  nearly  as  possible  only  in 
such  cases.     The  learner,  therefore,  should  write  405 
or  425;  and  405,642  or  425,648  rather  than  4Nt5  or 
4Nt25;  and  405Th3642  or  425Th3<J48.      When  a  logo- 
graph  is  once  written,  however,  it  should  not  be  erased. 

537.  Again  if  a  numerical  logograph  should  happen 
to  be  written  instead  of  a  figure  it  also  should  not  be 

o 

erased.  For  example,  if  105  or  125  and  105,042  or 
125,648  should  be  made  in  any  one  of  the  following 
ways  it  should  be  allowed  to  remain;  thus,  WnNtr>  o 
WnNt25;  and  WnXt5Th3642  or  WnXt25Th3(U<v  or 
Wn<>5  or  Wn25;  and  Wn05Th3642  or  Wn25Th V,4  s; 
or  \Vn05, 642  or  Wn25,648;  or  Wn05,sKs142.  In  othei 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  4U3 

words  a  numerical  logograph  should  generally  be 
allowed  to  stand,  when  once  written,  whether  employed 
as  a  word  or  symbol.  Nevertheless  the  learner  should 
usually  endeavor  to  write  the  logographs  only  when 
their  numbers  occur  alone  and  the  Arabic  numerals 
in  connection  with  each  other  as  in  the  preceding 
and  following  examples. 

538.  "Millions"   are  also  expressed  by  the  logo- 
graph,  while  higher  denominations  are  usually  written 
in  full;  thus,  Wn    Ml1;  2M11;  ThrNtMl;  4BLn;  5Tr- 
Ln:    sKs'KwtRln,  etc. ;    Wn    MP424Th3,  1,424,000; 
i'BLn    ThrNtMl    SNtTh    sKs'Nt,    2,300,500,600:  2B- 
Ln   ThrM4    SOTh3    sKs1,   2,003,056,006;  907M1'524 
Th3205,  907,524,205. 

a.  The  last  number,  it  will  be  perceived,  is  more 
quickly  written  without  than  with  the  denominational 
logographs.  Accordingly,  when  possible,  and  no  con- 
fusion would  result,  the  logographs  should  be  omitted. 
(See  sec.  530,  d  and  also  sec.  536.) 

539.  "Dollars"  are  represented    by  a   dot  by  the 
side  of  the  center  of  the  number,  logograph  or  word 
to  which  it  belongs,  "cents"  by  a  horizontal  straight 
stroke  or  dash  about  as  long  as  a  half    length  K  in  a 
like  position  and  "mills"  by    M  in  the  first  position. 
After  "six,  hundreds"  and  "millions"  the  dot  or  dash 
is  placed  under  the  center  of   the  logograph.     After 
"one,  three,   twelve,   thousands,   billions,"    etc.  .it    is 
written  alongside  of    the   logograph  or  word;  this  be- 
cause the  first  three  are  horizontal   forms  and  the  oth- 
ers are  not;  thus,  2-,  $2.00;  Wn-,  $1.00;.  Thr-,  $3.00; 
sKs1,    $6.00;  Twf-,   $12.00;  Wn-,. 01;  sKsVOG;   5-, 
.05;  25-,. 25;  Thr    M1,  3   mills;  3-5-,   $3.05;  4-25-, 
$4.25;  7- 8-    2Ml,7d.8c.  2m. or  $7.08^;  sKs1  5-  sKs1- 
M,  <!d.    5c.   6m.  or  $6.05f;  WnNt,   $100.00;  WnTh-, 
$1,000.00;  WnNtTh-,   $100,000*. 00;    ThrNtTh    sKs1, 
$.'300,006.00;   TwfNtTh-,    $1,200,000.00;    4MP,  '*(, 
000,000. 00;  oBLn-,  $5, 000,000, 000. 00;  sKsBLn3-75-, 


424  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

$6,000,000,003.75;  WnNt,  100  cents;  2Th3-,  2000 
cents;  ThrMl,  3,000,000  cents;  8BLn-,  8,000,000,000 
cents;  TtoidWn-  Rt,  a  one  cent  rate;  KtoidThr-  Mtr, 
a  three  dollar  matter;  Ktoid  5-  GltPs,  a  five  dollar 
gold  piece. 

a.  The  observations  in  section  537  in  regard  to 
logographs,  apply  also  to  paragraph  539.  Thus,  for 
example,  if  $3.05  should  happen  to  be  written  Thr-5-, 
the  logograph  should  not  be  erased. 

540.  "Pound"  or   "pounds"  (money)  are  written 
in  full  with  Pnt  or  Pnts  in  the  third  position.     "Shill- 
ings" are   indicated  by   Sh  in   the   first   positon,  and 
"pence"  by  P  in  the  second.     Any  of  the  characters 
may  be  joined  after  a  logograph  or  word  if  convenient; 
thus,   2Pnts3,  £2;  WnPnt,  £1;  ThrPnts,  £3;  4Sh\  4 
shillings;  ThrSh,  3  shillings,  sKsSh,  6  shillings;  Tvvf- 
Sh,  12  shillings;  2P,  2  pence;  WnP,  1  penny;  TwfP, 
12  pence;  sKsPnts   WnSh   sKsP,  £6.  Is.  6d.;TwfPnta 
4Sh!    ThrP,£12  4s.  3d. ;  7Pnts3    2Shl    4P,  £7  2s.  4d. ; 
2M11    Pnts3 ,  £2, 000, 000 ;  WnBLnPnts,  £1,000, 000, 000. 

541.  When  writing  numbers  as  above  the  comma 
may  be  employed  as  a  separatrix  point  as  nsnal;  thus, 
48,548-,   $48,548.00;  64,689-75-   $64,689.75.     Gen- 
erally, however,  it  is  speedier  to  indicate  the  separation 
by  a  small  space  equal  to  that  taken  up  when  the  com- 
ma  is  employed;  thus,  48  548;  907  524  205;  64  689- 
75-,  $64,689.75. 

a.  One  advantage  of  the   above  method  of  repre- 
senting money  is  that  the  written  language  is  the  same 
as  the  spoken.      Another  is  that  when  lower  denomi- 
nations follow  higher  ones  the  dot  or  denominational 
logographs  may  be  considered  as  dividing  marks  after 
the  ordinary  manner.     Still  another  advantage  is  that 
the  denominations  can   be  written   separately  with  as 
much  distinctness  as  when  expressed  together. 

b.  If  any  time  the  digits  1  and  6  should  be    sep- 
rated   from  other    figures,  they    may  be   extra  distin- 


THE  PHOXOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  425 

gtiished  if  desired  by  drawing  through  the  stem  of 
each  a  horizontal  straight  stroke  about  as  long  as  a 
double  length  K. 

LESSON  52 

NUMBERS      BEFORE      OTHER      WORDS     THAN      HUNDREDS, 
THOUSANDS,     ETC.,    AND    MONEY. 

542.  When    a    number    occurs   before  any  other 
words  than   those  in  section  534,  it  is  still  written  as 
above    explained    except  that    "one,  three,   six"  and 
'•twelve"  are  in  a  few  instances,  which  will    appear 
hereafter,   made    with   the    Arabic    characters;    thus, 
4PrsXs,    four    persons;    5Pnts3,    five    (or    5)    pounds 
(weight);  TPXs,   7    pennies;  WnsNTR,    one   century; 
ThrMn1  three  men;  sKs^IThs,  six  months;  TwfPlss, 
twelve  places. 

THE    NUMBERS    TEN,    TWENTY,     THIRTY,    ETC. 

543.  When  a  number  over  "nine"  and  under  "one 
hundred,"  of  one  cipher  (see  sec.  530,  c)  as  10,  20,  30, 
40,  etc.,  occurs  alone   it  is  written  with  the  Arabic 
digit  with  a  straight  stroke  added  to  the  figure  in  the 
direction  of  R  or  Ch  so  that  the  former  will  end  twice 
the  length  of  the  figure  above  the  line  of  writing  and  the 
latter  half  this  distance  below  it;  the  characters  in  con- 
sequence all  being  of  the  same  length;  thus, 


a.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  added  strokes  above 
take  the  place  of    the  ordinary   ciphers.     They  are, 
accordingly,  alternative  forms  and  are  termed  Alter- 
native or  Straight  Ciphers,  the  others  being  Round  or 
Elliptical  ones. 

b.  In  stenotypy  the  alternative  figures  are  the  same 
as  above  except  that  the  straight  cipher  is  represented 


426  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC1    MANUAL. 

by  the  light  grave  accent;  thus,  T,  2\  3\  4\  5\  6\  7\ 
8V,  9\ 

544.  Besides  being  written  alone  the  above  char- 
acters are  employed  in  connection  with  other  figures, 
that  is  in  numbers  over  one  hundred,  or  in  any  connec- 
tion; thus,  H\  110;  12\  120;  24\    240;  12T  (or  1-J 
Ntlx),  1210;  153X  (or  15Nt3v),  1530;  4876X  (or  48TV 
76'),  48,760;  T01  (or  Tl  or'rNtl),  1001;  T25  (or  I1 
Kt25),  1025;  T^  (or  lxNt5x),  1050;  3-T-,  $3.10;  5.7V-, 
$5.70;  8'-,  .80;  9\   $90.00;  4'   Pnts3,£40:3x  //Rs1, 
30  years. 

a.  When  a  numerical  denomination  occurs  alone 
after  an  alternative  figure  as  above,  it  may,  if  desired, 
be  joined  to  an  upward  cipher;  thus,  IVNt,  1000:  ir- 
Th,  20,000;  3^-Ml,  30,000,000;  5VBLn,  50,000,000, 
000. 

545.  If  preferred  the  numbers  10,  20,  30  and  60, 
when  alone  or  before  other  words  than  those  in  section 
534,  may,  the  same  as  1,  3,  6  and  12  in  section  542  be 
written  in   shorthand  instead  of  with  the  alternative 
figures  given  in  section  543;  thus,  Tn,  TwT,  ThrT, 
sKsT. 

CARDINAL    AND     ORDINAL     NUMBERS. 

546.  The  plural  of  cardinal  numbers  is  written  by 
adding  the  S  circle  to  the  latter  part  of  the   digit  or 
to  the  logograph  or  to  the  last  figure  of  the  number 
or  to  the  straight  cipher. 

a.  In  the  case  of  the  figure  ''six"  the  plural  is 
added  by  the  small  imperfect  circle  described  in  sec- 
tion 111;  thus,  Yshns-s. 

1.  If  preferred,  the  plural  of  cardinal  numbers  may 
be  written  with  the  stem  Z  placed  alongside  the  figure 
in  the  first  position,  instead  of  as  in  paragraph  r»4<>, 
except  in  the  case  of  the  alternatives  with  straight 
ciphers  whose  plurals  are  always  written  with  the  S 
circle. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  427 

547.  The  S  circle  may  also  be  added  to  the  logo- 
oraphs   or    words   denoting   the  denominations;  thus, 
WnNts,  ThrThs3,  4M1S1,  5BLns. 

548.  The  ordinal  numbers    "first,    second,  third, 
sixth"  and  "twelfth"  are  usually  written  in  shorthand 
except  when  they  occur  after  the  name  of  a  month 
and  before  the  number  of  a  year  at  the  heading  of  let- 
ters (or  in  Bible  references,  etc.,  to  be  explained  pres- 
ently) in  which  cases  they  are  made  with  the  Arabic 
figures  in  the  same  manner  as  are  the  cardinal  num- 
bers, namely,  without  the  letters  St,  D  or  Th  attached; 
thus,  RtoidFrst  sKnt    '  '  Thrt1   D   '  '    CtoidsKs1  '  ' 
Twf '    AV'K,  the  first,  second  or  third  day  or  the  sixth 
or  twelfth  week;  Jtoid^K    TtoidMrC    Frst   '  '    Prl1 
sKs1,  he  will  come  on  March  1st  or  April  6th;  ShKG 
JN   1  00;  Chicago,  January  1st,  1900;  sTLs  FB   6  00; 
St.  Louis,  February  6th  1900. 

549.  All  the  ordinal  numbers  are  everywhere  writ- 
ten with  Arabic  figures  in  the  same  manner  as  are  the 
cardinal  ones;  thus,  +1    4   MTh    FtCtoid  5  yR1,the 
fourth  month  after  the  fifth  year;  -j-1    29    Xst1,  the 
29th  instant;  +1    lv    W'K,  the  10th  week. 

550.  The  terminals  St,  D  and  Th  may  be  added  to 
the  Arabic  figures  when  standing  for  ordinal  numbers, 
if  desired,   in  which  case  they  are  written  alongside 
the   figures  in  the  first  position,  St  with  the  S  stem 
halved  after  1,  D  with  the  stem  D  after  2  and  3,  and 
Th   with  the  stem  Th  after  all  other  figures;   thus, 
ISt1,  2D1,  3D1,  4Th%  21st1,  22D>,  23D1,  25Th] 

a.  After  straight  ciphers  the  Th  may  be  joined  to 
the  upward  forms  and  disjoined  near  the  end  in  the 
case  of  the  others — or  they  may  be  joined,  if  preferred. 

551.  The  plural  of  ordinal  numbers  when  written 
with  Arabic  figures   is  expressed   by.  attach  ing  the  S 
circle  to  the  terminals  St,  D  and  Th  as  given  in  the 
preceding  section. 

552.  Usually,  however,  the  ordinal  plurals  "firsts, 


428  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

seconds,  thirds,  sixths''  and  "twelfths"  are  written 
with  the  S  circle  attached  to  the  logographs  for  the 
singular  as  given  in  section  548;  thus,  Frsts,  sKnts, 
Thrts,  sKsThs,  TwfThs. 

553.  If  there  would  be  danger  (which  will  be  sel- 
dom) of  an  ordinal  number  being  mistaken  for  a  car- 
dinal one,  the  former  should  have  the  termination  St,  D 
or  Th  (or  the  plurals)  added. 

PECIMAI,  FRACTIONS  AND  MIXED  NUMBERS. 

554.  When  decimals  are  written  the  denominations 
are  placed  under  the  last  figure  of  the  numbers   to 
which  they  belong;   "tenths"   being  indicated   by  the 
alternative  figure  given  in  section  543  and  all  other 
denominations  by  the  logographs  or  outlines  for  the 
ordinary  ones,  the  under-placing  being  represented  in 
stenotypy  by  an  inverted  double  semicolon.     When 
"ten-hundredths,  ten-thousandths,  ten-millionths,  ten- 
billionths,"   etc.,    occur  the   alternative   symbol   for 
"ten"  is  usually  prefixed  to  the  other  denominations; 
thus,  liiT,  one  tenth  (.1);    2<«r,  two  tenths  (.2);  Hi 
Nt,   one  hundredth   (.01;;    3i'Nts,   three    hundredths 
(.03);  14<<Nts    (Nts  under  the  4),  fourteen  hundredths 
(.14);  IS'.tNts,    fifteen  hundredths  dollars  ($0.15  or 
$0TVo);  1'iTh,  one  thousandth  (.001);  4^Ths,    four 
thousandths    (.004);    5ttl'-Nts,     five    ten-hundredths 
(.005);  12'.iThs  (Ths  under  the  2),  twelve  thousandths 
(.012);  5iax-Ths,  five  ten-thousandths  (,0005);  6iiNt 
Ths,  six  hundred  thousandths  (.00006;  Tt'Mls,    seven 
millionths  (,000007);  H'lVMl,  one  ten  millionth  (.00 
00001;  SttBLns,  eight  billionths  (.000000008);  2iiT- 
BLns,  two  ten-bill ionths  (.0000000002). 

555.  When  a  mixed  number  is  expressed  in  deci- 
mals the  decimal  is  written  after  and  a  little  above  the 
integer;  thus,  l'.2'.il\  one  and  two  tenths  (1.2);  2il'.i 
1\  two  and  one  tenth  (2.1);  l''.6iil\  ten  and  six  tenths 
(10.6);  21'.8<<NtThs,    twenty-one    and   eight   hundred 


THK  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  429 

thousandths  (21.00008);  liliiMl1,  one  and  one  mil- 
lionth (1.000001);  32t5t'.BLns,  thirty-two  and  five 
•billionths  (32.000000005);  3il416iilv-Ths,  three  and 
fourteen  hundred  and  sixteen  ten-thousandths  (3.1416); 
3: 14  159  265PlsiiNtMls  (Nt  under  the  five),  three  and 
fourteen  million,  one  hundred  and  fifty-nine  thou- 
sand, two  hundred  and  sixty-five  plus  hundred  rail- 
lionths  (3. 14159265 -f);  5<WnBLn  ThrMl  56Th36i'.lv- 
BLns,  five  and  one  billion,  three  million,  fifty-six 
thousand  and  six  ten-billionths  (5.1003056006). 

LESSON  53. 

COMMON  FRACTIONS  AND  MIXED  NUMBERS. 

556.  AVhen  common  fractions  occur  alone  they  are 
written  in  the  ordinary  way,   except  that  the  dividing 
line  is  omitted;  thus,  J;  2V,  \\. 

557.  The  same    course    is    followed    with    mixed 
numbers     except    those    containing    "twelfths"    and 
"eighths;"  thus,  1J;  3a59  6{*. 

558.  "When    mixed    numbers    occur  in  which    the 
fractions  of  the  unit  consist  of  "twelfths"  or  "eighths" 
the  integer   is  written  as  usual  but  the  fractions  are 
indicated  by  a  horizontal  straight  stroke  with  one  or 
two  hooks  attached  and  placed  above  or  below  the 
last  figure  of  the  integer — the  stroke  being  about  as 
long  as  a  single  or  half  length  K,  according  as  the  in- 
teger consists  of  one  or  more  figures;  thus, 

11  15  17  111  11  15  11  12 

J-IS}       J-Tfj       J-TTj       Ml  J-Tj  L7,          •»•¥»          *-~5 

If    "T     t3     *T         T^l^T3 
11,  •  11,    11,     II         If,     If,     II 
cL     _L     cL     A,          J-      ^     -Lj 

UTV,        111!,       211,       112* 
U  llT          21  112 

c-  -, 


430  THE    I  IIDNOIIKAIMIIC    MANL'AL. 

:i.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  ternary  characters 
are  placed  above  the  integers,  and  the  binary  ones 
below  them.  Also  that  fractions  of  the  same  denomi- 
nation begin  or  end  with  hooks  on  the  same  side  of 
the  stem  while  those  in  each  series  whose  numerators 
are  "five"'  and  ; 'seven"  are  alike  or  end  alike.  Fin- 
ally that  the  quickest  spoken  fractions,  namely,  those 
with  "one"  for  the  numerator  have  the  speediest  forms, 
possessing  but  one  hook — two  of  the  latter  also  rep- 
resenting "five-twelfths"  and  "five-eighths." 

559.  If  in  mixed  numbers,    "one  twenty-fourth" 
or    "one   sixteenth"    (the   half   of  the    "twelfth"  or 
"eighth")  is  mentioned  the  former  is  represented  by 
two  and  the  latter  by  one  dot  placed  under  the  fig- 
ure or  arbitrary;  thus,   1,  1J2  and  /4;  2,  2,\  and  .2\ ; 
J.  ,  1|  and  T*,;  ^,  4|  andTV 

560.  If    the    "twenty-fourth"    or    "sixteenth"    is 
mentioned  in  connection  with  integers  only,  or  with 
other   fractions    Avithout    integers  the    dots   are   still 
written  beneath  the  figures  the  same  as  just  explained; 
thus,  1,  1^;  2,  2?y,  15,  Ufa   ,',,   ^  and  fa   1,  lf'6; 
3,  3^;  18.  18Ty,  i,  |andTy 

561.  The  plural  of   fractions  is  written  in  the  same 
manner  as  that  of  whole  numbers.    (See  see's.  546  and 
551.) 

FEET  AND  INCHES,  ARC,   TEMPERATURE,   TIME,    ETC. 

562.  "Feet"   and    "inches"  are  distinguished    by 
writing  the  denominations  in  shorthand,  the  fractions 
and    mixed    numbers   being   expressed  as  in  sections 
556  to  561  preceding,  thus,  WnFt    WnNC,  1  ft.  1  in. ; 
2Ft'    4NCS1,  2  ft.  4  in.;  ThrFt  J^NCs1,  3  ft.5|  in.; 

^Ft1    6  NCs1,  4. ft.  6|  and  -fr  in.;   8  NCs1,  8TV  in. ; 

INC1  |  andTV  in.- 

563.  "Degrees,  minutes"  and  "seconds  of  arc"  are 
written  with  the  ordinary  signs  after  and  near  the  top 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  431 

of  the  number  as  usual;   thus,   2°  3'  4",  two  degrees, 
three  minutes  and  four  seconds. 

564.  "Degrees  of  temperature"  are  indicated  by 
the  same  sign  as  degrees  of  arc,  the  words  "Fahren- 
heit, Centigrade,   Reaumur,"  etc.,  if  used,  being  ex- 
pressed by  logographs  or  initials  just  after  the  com- 
bination; thus,  7°,  7  degrees;  8°F3,  8  degrees  Fahren- 
heit; 14°sNt,  14  degrees  Centigrade;  21°R,  21  degrees 
Reaumur. 

565.  "Hours,  minutes"  and  "seconds"  are  written, 
the  first  by  two  dots  one  above  the  other  after  the 
number  to  which  they  belong  and  the  second  and  third 
by  the  same  signs  and  in  the  same  manner  as  those  for 
minutes  and  seconds  of  arc;  thus,  3:  14'  28",  3  hr.  14 
min.  28  sec. 

5(>().  Such  expressions  as  "one-fifteen,  two-twen- 
ty," etc.,  designating  money,  time,  extent  or  other 
measure  may  be  indicated  by  separating  the  words  and 
figures,  or  figures,  denoting  the  units  and  parts  by  a 
horizontal  straight  stroke  about  as  long  as  a  double 
length  K,  the  words  being  written  in  their  proper 
position  and  the  stroke  and  figures  on  the  line;  thus, 

Wn—  —15,  one-fifteen;  sKs1—  — 3\  six-thirty;  2 

25,  two-twenty-five. 

LESSON  54. 

BIBLE    REFERENCES. 

567.  In  reporting  sermons,  etc.,  Bible  references, 
if  ordinal  numbers  are  used,  are  indicated  by  placing 
the  figure  for  the  book  above  the  line  of  writing,  that 
for  the  chapter  on  it,  and  that  for  the  verse  through  it 
(or,  if  unruled  paper  is  used,  where  the  line  would  be 
if  drawn)  or  in  the  first,  second  and  third  positions, 
respectively.  By  this  means  the  book,  chapter  and 
verse  may  be  written  in  any  order  with  the  figures 
only  and  without  danger  of  ambiguity.  If  the  num- 


432  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

ber  of  the  book  occurs  before  its  name  the  word 
"book,"  if  uttered,  is  written,  otherwise  not;  thus, 
KrThns  1  2  ...5...,  Corinthians  I,  ii. ,  5,  Corinthians, 

first  book,  second  chapter,  fifth  verse;  1  B3K  KrThns 
2  ...5...,  first  book  of  Corinthians,  second  chapter, 

fifth  verse;  ...5...   2     1    B3K   KrThns,  fifth  verse  of  the 

second  chapter  of  the  first  book  of  Corinthians;  1  Kr- 
Thns 2  ...5...,  I  Corinthians,  ii.,  5,  first  Corinthians, 

second  chapter,  fifth  verse;  ...5...  2  1  KrThns,  fifth 
verse  of  the  second  chapter  of  first  Corinthians;  JMs 
4  ...14...,  James  iv,  14,  James,  fourth  chapter,  four- 
teenth verse;  M^Kst  sFrRtoid,  ...14...  4  JMs,  my 
text  is  from  the  fourteenth  verse  of  the  fourth 
chapter  of  James. 

568.  If  cardinal  numbers  are  used  they  are  placed 
the  same  as  the  ordinal  ones,  but  the  words  "book, 
chapter"  and  "verse"  must  be  written  in  shorthand; 

thus,  KrThns  B3K  1  C3P  2  Vrs...5...,  Corinthians, 
book  one,  chapter  two,  verse  five;  Vrs..-5...  C3P  2 
B3K  1  KrThns,  verse  five,  chapter  two,  book  one  of 
Corinthians.  If  preferred,  however,  the  numbers 
may  all  be  written  on  the  line. 

569  Should  ordinal  and  cardinal  numbers  be  used 
together  both  are  written  as  usual  and  will  always  be 
easily  distinguishable  from  each  other  from  the  fact 
that  the  words  "book,  chapter"  and  "verse"  are  uttered 
after  the  former  and  before  the  latter;  thus,  KrThns  1 
C3P  2  Vrs..-5...,  Corinthians,  first  book,  chapter  two, 

verse  five;  KrThns  B3K  1  2  ...5...,  Corinthians,  book 
one,  second  chapter,  fifth  verse;  ...5...  2  B3K  1  Kr- 
Thns, fifth  verse,  second  chapter,  book  one  of  Cor- 
inthians. 

570.     If   in   any   instance   the  word    "epistle"    is 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  433 

uttered  instead  of  the  word  "book"  it  is  always  writ- 
ten. Also  if  the  word  "and''  occurs  it  is  expressed 
with  the  logograph;  thus,  1  B3K  KrThns  2  xSVitoid 
...5...,  first  book  of  Corinthians,  second  chapter  and 
fifth  verse. 

NUMERICAL,    AND    OTHER    DENOMINATIONS. 

571.  Whenever  a  numerical,  money  or  other  de- 
nomination occurs  without  a  number  preceding  it,  it  is 
written  in  shorthand,  except  when  the  word  "cents"  or 
"dollars,"  singular  or  plural,  follows  the  singular  or 
plural  of  the  words  "hundreds,  thousands,"  etc.,  when 
it  is  expressed  with  the  dash  or  dot,  as  usual;  thus, 
Nts  Pl°,  hundreds  of  people  ;Ktoid  sNt  '  '  2  %  a  cent 
or  two;  KtoidL)1,  a  dollar;  MnTs  '  '  sKnts1,  minutes 
or  seconds;  KtoidNt,  a  hundred  cents;  KtoidTh3-, 
a  thousand  cents;  KtoidNt,  a  hundred  dollars;  Ktoid- 
Th3 •,  a  thousand  dollars;  KtoidNt  Kwn,  a  hundred 
cent  question;  KtoidTh3-  hRs1,  a  thousand  dollar 
horse. 


434  THE  IMloXo.iUAPrilC  MANUAL. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SIGNIFICANT  MARKS,   ETC.     REPORTING  TRIALS, 
HEARINGS,    ETC. 


LESSON  55. 
SIGNIFICANT  MARKS,   ETC. 

572.  In  reporting   a    speech,    etc.,    if  a   word    is 
omitted  from  not  having  been   heard,  a  character  like 
RtoidsCC,   the   down    stroke    being    somewhat  longer 
than  a  double  length  Ch,   is  written,    instead  of  the 
word,    to    denote  its  omission.      If  several  words  are 
thus  omitted  the  same  mark,  which  is  called  the  Omis- 
sion Mark,  is  made  in  the  middle  of  a  space  left  pro- 
portionate to  the  number  of  words  omitted.      Should 
the  omission  extend  to  the  end  of  the  sentence,  a  period 
is  also  written  just  before  the  beginning  of  the  next 
sentence. 

573.  When  there  is  a  doubt  whether  a   word   or 
phrase  has  been  distinctly  heard  or  accurately  under- 
stood a  waved  line  should  be  drawn  under  it. 

574.  If  a  quotation  is  made  which  is  known  to  the 
reporter,  or  if  not,  is  easily  obtained,  he  may  omit  all 
except  the  commencing  and  concluding    words,    indi- 
cating  the   omission    by   a  phonographic   dash    about 
twice  as  long  as  usual.     (See  sec.  138.) 

575.  Wfren  two  or  more  words  are  repeated  they 
may,  after  being  written  once,   or  perhaps  oftener,  be 
indicated  by  a  horizontal  straight  stroke  a  little  longer 
than  a  double  length  K,   as  in  the  sentence,    "They 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  435 

called  last  week,    -  -  yesterday to-day." 

(See  also  sec.  519.) 

576.  Indications  of  approval  or  disapproval,  etc., 
coming  from  the  audience  or  from  any  other  source, 
or  running  explanations  or  comments,   etc. ,  made  by 
the  reporter  should  be  described  or  given  in  shorthand 
with  the  proper  words  enclosed  in  parentheses  (see 
sec.  139),  for  which  there  will  usually  be  ample  time 
while  the  speaker  is  interrupted;  thus,  Crs1,  cheers; 
Pis1,    applause;    L3Ftr,    laughter;    JtoidSs1,   hisses; 
N,  no;  NN,    no,    no;  sNsskn   PRR,  sensation,  uproar; 
Crs1  Pis,   cheers,   applause;  GTtoidGTtoid,  go  on,  go 
on;   Crs1  Pis   JtoidSs  ^Ftr,  cheers,    applause,   hisses, 
laughter;  ABB   KsTMnt   -Fshn3,  hubbub,  excitement, 
confusion ;  nWsLNg   JtoidSs1    MKCrs1    Grns4,  whist- 
ling, hisses,  mock-cheers  and  groans;  Vs1,  a  voice;  Cr, 
chair;  Mn   Nr1    PltF,  man  near  platform. 

577.  If  but  one  adjective  is  employed  it  is  usually 
written  before  the  noun;  thus,  Grt  Pis,  great  applause; 
TrMnDs   CrxNg,  tremendous  cheering. 

578.  If  two  or  more  adjectives  are  used  the  first  is 
generally  written  before  and  the  others  after  the  noun 
in  the  shorthand  notes;   thus,   Lt3Pls    TND,  loud  ap- 
plause,    continued;    Lt3    L3Ftr    hLRs    Ng1,     "loud 
laughter,   hilarious,   long;"   the  reason  for   which   is 
that  the  reporter  can  not  know  the  second  or  third 
characteristics  until  the  applause,  etc. ,   has  lasted  for 
some  time.     In  transcribing,   however,  the  adjectives 
are  usually  placed  before  the  noun;  thus,   (loud  and 
continued  applause,)  (loud,    long  and  hilarious  laugh- 
ter.)    Again,  in  transcribing,  a  description    may    be 
extended  or  made   more   definite  than  in  the    notes. 
Thus  the  words   "man  near  platform"  in  section  576 
above,  may   be  written:   (At  this  moment  a  very  tall 
man  near  the  platform  waved   his  hat  and    shouted, 
"Hurrah  for  the  navy!") 

579.  The  location  of  various  matters  in  the  report 


43<)  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC'    MANUAL. 

of  a  speech,  etc.,   may   be  indicated  by  the  following- 
reference  marks  or  signs: 

a  A  simple  vertical  line  drawn  in  the  margin  at 
the  left  of  the  space  written  upon,  calls  attention  for 
some  reason  not  necessary  to  be  specified,  or  which 
the  writer  has  no  time  to  specify,  to  the  part  opposite. 
(See  also  Prologue,  page  24.)  • 

b.  The  logograph  for  "important"   written  before 
this  line  near  the   middle  indicates  an  important  sen- 
tence or  paragraph. 

c.  The  several  headings  may  be  designated  by  the 
capital  script  letters  A,  B,  C1,  etc. ,    placed  before  the 

.  line. 

d.  The  different  sections,   paragraphs,    etc.,   may 
be  distinguished  by  figures  and  small  script  letters  or 
by  the  mark  for  the  break   (see  sees.    145  to   147)   in 
the  same  position. 

e.  In  addition  to  the  above  other  marks  may  be 
made  before  the  line  if  they  are  found  necessary. 

f.  Two  or  .more  different  marks  may   be  written 
before  the  line.     Thus,  if  it  has  before  it  the  figure  2 
and  under  the  latter  the  logograph  for    "important, " 
the  combination  reads  "Section  (or  remark)  2,  impor- 
tant."    If  quotation  marks    (see   sec.    140)   are   also 
struck  underneath  the  other  two  signs  the  word  "quo- 
tation" is  included  in  the  reading;  and  so  on  for  any 
other  marks  or  signs  that  may  be  added. 

g.  If  for  any  reason  after  a  complete  report   is 
taken  it  is  found  that  only  a  condensed  one  will  be 
needed,    the   various  parts   to    be  condensed  may  be 
indicated  by  some  suitable  mark  or  sign  placed  before 
the  line,  and  those  to  be  excerpted  by  a  different  one 
similarly  placed.      If  the  part  to  be  marked  is  already 
distinguished    by  other   marks    the  sign   for  conden- 
sation or  excerption  may  be  placed  before  them — its 
line  being  omitted. 

1.      It  is  not  necessary  that  the  line  should  always 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  437 

be  drawn  except  in  the  first  instance  explained  above. 
(See  par.  a).  In  all  other  instances  it  may  be  omitted 
iind  the  marks  or  signs  written  alone  if  the  part  to 
which  reference  is  made  is  not  too  long. 

TRANSCRIPTION  OF  A  SPEECH,  ETC. 

580.  In  transcribing  a  speech  or  remarks  delivered 
extemporaneously,  if  any  ordinary  grammatical  errors 
have  been  made  they  should  be  corrected.     The  cor- 
rections, however,   should  be   confined   only  to   such 
errors   and    not  extend  beyond   them.     Likewise,   if 
there  are  any  patent  mis-statements  which  the  speaker 
clearly  did  not  intend  to  make,   these  also  should  be 
corrected.     In  all  other  respects  the  wording  should 
remain  unchanged.     (See  also  sec.  588.) 

LESSON  56. 
REPORTING  TRIALS,  HEARINGS,   ETC. 

581.  Different  works  have  been  published  explain- 
ing all  the  details  of  reporting  trials,   hearings,   etc; 
one  or  more  of  which  the  learner  should  procure  if  he 
desires  to  investigate  this  subject  thoroughly.      Only 
the  writing  of  the  examination  and  testimony  will  be 
considered  here. 

OM^.  There  are  several  methods  of  writing  the 
examination  and  testimony  employed  by  reporters. 
The  method  which  the  author  regards  as  usually  the 
best  is  to  separate  the  questions  and  answers  into  para- 
graphs by  commencing  the  former  at  the  left  of  the 
space  written  upon  and  the  latter  on  the  next  line 
below  to  the  right  of  the  commencing  point  of  the 
questions,  at  the  regular  distance;  namely,  twice  as 
long  as  the  space  period  (see  sec.  136),  the  interrogation 
point  and  period  at  the  end  both  being  omitted;  thus, 
Where  do  you  live 

In  Chicago 


438  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

Do  you  remember  what  persons  were  present  at  the 
time  this  agreement  was  written  and  if  anything  was 
said  in  regard  to  it 

There  were  several  persons  present  but 
I  do  not  recollect  how  many  or  what 
was  said 

583.  Both    questions    and   answers,     when    long 
enough,   extend  to  the.  right  side  of  the  space  written 
upon.      If  either  consists  of  two  or  more  lines  each 
succeeding  line  begins  immediately  under  the  commenc- 
ing point  of  its  predecessor.      If  two  or  more  sentences 
are  contained  in  a  questioner  answer,  they  are  separated 
by  periods — the  space  being  used.     (See  sec.    136.) 
In  which  case,  if  a  sentence  should  happen  to  end  at  or 
near  the  right  side  of   the  space  written    upon,   the 
next  sentence,   if   it  is  part  of  a  question,   begins  as 
usual  on  the  line  below  the  distance  of  a  period  to  the 
right  of  a  point  under  the  commencing  one  of  the  first 
sentence.      If  the  sentence  is  part  of  an  answer  it  begins 
at  the  same  distance  to  the  right  of  a  point  under  the 
commencing  one  of  the  first  sentence  of  the  latter. 
If  the  writer  prefers,   however,  and  there  is  sufficient 
time,  he  may  write  the  periods  when  they  occur  in  the 
middle  of  a  question  or  answer  instead  of  leaving  the 
spaces.     The  remaining  marks  of  punctuation  are  usu- 
ally omitted  intermedially  from  questions  and  answers. 
The  parentheses,  however,  are  employed  to  enclose  any 
explanatory  remarks  interjected  or  added  by  the    re- 
porter. 

584.  By  writing  the  examination  and  testimony  as 
in  section  582,  the  answers  appear  in  separate  columns 
and  can  thus  always  be  easily  referred  to.     This  mode 
should  not  be  employed  on  the  full  width  of  a  page  of 
the  size  of  foolscap,  etc.,  but  only  on  half  of  it,  other- 
wise it  will  take  up  too  much  paper  when  the  questions 
and  answers  are  short.      Pages  of  the  size  of  foolscap, 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  430 

etc.,  should,  therefore,  be  ruled  with  three  vertical 
lines  from  top  to  bottom,  one  line  at  the  middle,  an- 
other half  an  inch  to  the  right  of  it,  and  another  the 
same  distance  to  the  right  of  the  left  edge.  If  desired, 
however,  books  may  be  used  ruled  in  the  same  manner. 
Both  the  paper  and  books  may  be  obtained  at  or  through 
most  bookstores  or  stationers. 

585.  When  an  ordinary  sized  note  book  is  employed 
this  method  can   not   be    written   with  two    columns 
owing  to  the  narrowness  of  the  book.      Therefore  only 
one  column  is  used,  the  writing  extending  clear  across 
the  page,  the  vertical  line  at  the  left  being  half  an  inch 
from  the  edge  as  usual. 

586.  The  half  inch  margin  is  ruled  off  as  above, 
both  when  single  and  double  columns  are  used,  so  that 
any  reference  marks  (see  sec.    579)  may  be  placed  in 
it  either  during  the  writing  of  the  notes  or  afterwards. 
The  name  of  the  person  opening  the  direct  examination 
is  also  written  in  it  either  wholly  or  in  part  as  there 
may  be  room.      In  it  are  also  indicated  the  beginning 
of  the  cross  examination,  etc.,  or  of  any  remarks  made 
by  the  presiding  officer.      Finally,  the  marginal  line  is 
used  as  a  starting  place  for  the  questions  which  are 
commenced   close  to  the  right  of  it.      Some  writers, 
however,   do  not  use  the  marginal  line  in  narrow  note 
books  but  simply  commence  the  questions  at  or  about 
where  the  line  would  be  if  drawn.     It  is  here  recom- 
mended, however,  that  the  marginal  line  be  used  since 
the  reference   marks, etc.,   are  much  more  easily  dis- 
tinguished if  separated  by  it  from  the  body  of  the  notes 
than  if  the  line  is  omitted. 

5*7.  Sometimes  when  the  questions  and  answers 
are  very  short  the  latter  may,  in  order  to  save  paper, 
bo  written  on  the  same  line  with  the  former,  but  sep- 
arated by  about  a  double  length  space  period.  This 
is  termed  "running  in  tlio  answers."  A  question, 
however,  should  never  commence  after  #uch  an  answer 


440  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

on  the  same  line,  but  should  begin  at  the  usual  place 
on  the  line  following.  If  the  answer  should  turn  out 
to  be  a  long  one,  its  continuation  should  commence  on 
the  following  line  at  the  usual  place  the  same  as  when 
regularly  written. 

TRANSCRIBING  TRIALS,  HEARINGS,  ETC. 

588.  There  are  several    methods    of  transcribing 
the  examination  and  testimony  in  all  of  which  the 
proper  punctuation  marks  are  inserted  both  medially 
and  at  the  end  of  the  questions  and  answers.      Only 
two — those  which  the  author  considers  as  usually  the 
best — will   be   given   here.     In  the  first  method   the 
questions  and^  answers  are  written   in  script  or  type- 
written in  the  manner  explained  in  section  582  in  the 
case  of  the  short  hand  notes,   the  questions  beginning 
at  the  left  edge  of  the  space  written  upon  and  the  an- 
swers indented  the  length  of  a  shorthand  space  para- 
graph to  the  right  of  it.      When  printed,  however,  the 
indentation  of  the  answers  is,  at  the  farthest,  only  about 
three-eighths  of  an  inch;  thus, 

Where  do  you  live? 

In  Chicago. 

Do  you  remember  what  persons  were  present  at  the 
time  this  agreement  was  written,  and  if  anything  was 
said  in  regard  to  it  ? 

There  were  several  persons  present,  but  I  do  not 
recollect  how  many,  or  what  was  said. 
1.  The   answers  should  never  be  "run  inv    in  the 
transcript  as  explained  in  section  587  for  the  short- 
hand notes. 

589.  In  the  second  method  the  capital  letters  Q.  and 
A.,  the  initials  of  the  words  question  and  answer,  are 
placed  before  the  questions  and  answers  themselves. 
The  beginning  of  each  is  then  indented  at  the  left  of 
the  page  the  same  as  are  the   beginnings  of  the  para- 
graphs in  ordinary  script  and  print;  thus, 


THE  PIION'OGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  441 

Q.      What  is  your  business  ? 

A.      Dry  goods  and  notions. 

Q.  Were  you  ever  engaged  in  any  other  business 
and  if  so  what  and  where  was  it  ? 

A.  I  followed  the  shoe  business  for  a  while  a  littje 
farther  up  the  street,  but  finally  sold  out  and  went 
into  my  present  line — dry  goods  and  notions. 

500.  Of  the  two  methods  above  the  first  takes  up 
a  little  more  paper  than  the  second  but  is  preferred  for 
the  following  reasons.  In  the  first  place  it  saves  the 
time  and  expense  of  writing  and  printing  the  initials 
Q.  and  A.,  which  are  considerable,  and  are  also  sur- 
plusages, since  the  interrogation  point  and  period  are 
written  after  the  questions  and  answers  in  any  event. 
In  the  next  place  it  is  a  counterpart  of  the  shorthand 
notes  so  that  the  questions  and  answers  can  be  referred 
one  to  the  other  with  the  greatest  ease,  and  enables 
any  particular  answer  to  be  found  much  more  quickly 
than  does  the  second  method.  Thus,  on  the  whole, 
there  is  a  very  great  gain.  Finally,  the  questions 
and  answers  are  as  certainly  distinguished  as  in  the 
second  method,  since  in  the  shorthand  notes  from 
which  the  transcript  is  taken  and  on  which  it  depends, 
they  are  distinguished  in  the  same  manner.  The 
learner,  however,  can  adopt  either  method  he  chooses. 


REPORTING  EXERCISES. 

591.  In  the  following  reporting  exercises  the  en- 
graved portions  are  reading  and  the  printed  ones  writ- 
ing    exercises — the     latter     being     a    key    to     the 
former — the  same  as  exemplified    in   the    preceding 
pages. 

592.  The  learner  should  study  the  first   engraved 
exercise  until  it  becomes  sofamilar  as  to  be  read  with- 
out hesitation.      He  should  then  write  it  from   mem- 


44lj  THK   r-HOXUGHAPHIC    MANUAL. 

ory,  using  the  key,  until  the  notes  can  be  made  accu- 
rately, always  keeping  the  characters  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible of  the  same  size  as  those  in  the  engraving,  as 
explained  in  the  Prologue,  page  26.  Only  a  few  re- 
petions  in  each  case  will  be  necessary.  He  should 
then  take  it  from  dictation,  that  is  from  another's 
reading,  until  he  can  write  it  neatly  at  about  125 
words  a  minute,  which  is  the  average  rate  of  speech, 
and  read  the  notes  without  hesitation.  After  master- 
ing the  first  exercise  in  this  manner  he  should  pursue 
the  same  course  with  each  subsequent  one. 


REPORTING  STYLE  READING  EXERCISES. 


THE  RIGHT  OF  FREE  DISCUSSION. 


\ 


i 


<\ 

y 


\ 

( 


A 


JL  . 


, 

'X 

j  h 


L 


C  3 


C       C 


144 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


WEALTH  AND  ITS  MEASUREMENT. 

I.  /     <     .- 


L 


L    X 


!± 


v 


0  *"\      ^  fA    C 

*•      "     t £-J 7^- 


-J— t- 


/-p  l^  /rr 


/ ^L 


\       > 

V    o  U  J 


V 


1 


\ 


/-T. 


^, 

l  C 


N 


-1- 


3 ^ 

i      <T      J^ 

L"    N   ^ 


.X 


N  J 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


445 


N      ^        *     V 


440 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


Y 


rt: 


t 


T^ 


rU- 


IZLL 


i 


v 


Vk 


^  .i-v 


x/i  i  ^r  ^  n 


<v 


lv 


{  \ 


/°      «/v^  "^  \  ^~—  r 


V 


- 


A, 


THE  PUOXOCJEAI'IiH'   MANUAL. 


447 


^ 


/ 


LETTERS. 


\r 


\ 


A. 


448 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


MAN'S  MASTERY  OVER  NATURE. 


\ 


r 


.  r* 


\ 


\ 


•v^/<r      $ 


V7 


\ 


-  •> 


- . 


,A 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC)  MANUAL. 


4411 


OPPORTUNITY  AND  THE  TRUE  REFORMER. 


\ 
\ 


V    / 
\/ 


*ss — ov~ 


V 


—  I 


•  r 


( Vl  %1(  /.  _ 

*  Y  l»   ^        /  — 


\ 


L. 


z      ^\ 


^-i 

I 


J 

1  ) 

~" 


THE  rilONOCKAPHU:   MANUAL. 


V 


k  -  '• 


^  _ 


V.  ^ 


THE  SUN'S  ENERGY. 
V 


^— t" 


L       V   /( 


V7 


v 


Till-:  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


451 


r 


/  3  \r 


./     L  "  \ 


/L" 


.A. 


-f 


NT" 


I    L  I  1 


V 


x 


< 


V- 


.   ^     , 


i 

V- 


-1 


A 


S 


!      I 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANTAL 


t~  1 


-V 


\ 


X 


\ 


X.  V 


A 


VT 


V 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


453 


"X 


J  ~ 


V   ^|V 


y\> 


^v 


x 


I  \t  n 


!\ 


v 
\ 


THE  GREAT  NORTHWESTERN  SNOWFALL. 


454 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


v 

n 


v 


\ 


\ 


N 


X 


X 


>*/•'      "-*  /  L. 


I  X  U 


A 


L       I  /t 


> 


L 


M 


\7 


L. 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


455 


>     \x    /\_  to 

://  V^  >>   o 


TRUTH. 


% 


XZ^ ^ 


^ 


V 


J> 


MEN  ALWAYS  FIT  FOR  FREEDOM. 


r_ 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


V 


/  x-  1   )' 


,  p  f  ^  t 

7-^    —^> — t- 


1 


rJ-  \- 


N  X 


FIDELITY  TO  THE  CONSTITUTION. 


-M 


\ 


•H 


EARLY  RISING. 
V 


L 


I 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 


457 


H   «t 


NO    „ 


•\ 


r 


•t 


\ 


t 


^=\ 


SELF-CULTURE. 


/  A. 


458 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


JJ_t         v^_ 


/"   ) 


N/  \i 


"\ 

v 


.  >  ) 


\       / tf         X^ 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


459 


SELF-RESPECT. 


°A 


r 


v 

V. 


A. 


LL 


V 


.  A, 


A 


/ 3_ 


r 

/t 


\ 


r^ 

THE  KNOCKING  AT  THE  GATE  IN  MACBETH. 

/ — X     \ 

_r^V 


S 


\ 


U^X 


I  (.  "-    "U  /|  I  ^-  .  ' •  V 


Kid 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


X/k 


V 


\ 


/TV  -* 


V 


u 


l/H/T 


V     Q 


.  V 


«, 


-i   I 


-y0 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 


\ 


N,  ^  .u 


^  V* 


r 


L 


\ 


V/ 


"V 


^ 


V  *""- 


— ~»  / 

Jy-  .  ^  v        S  /  A^ 


\ 


462 


TliK   PIIOXOUKAPHIC   JIAXUAL. 


\ 


PHONOGRAPHERS  AND  PHONETIC  SPELLING. 


\ 


vy 


\ 


THE  PHOXOSCRIPT  AND  PHONOTYPIC  ALPHABETS. 


/v 


C 


c-t 


V 


REPORTING  STYLE  WRITING  EXERCISES. 

(KEY  TO  READING  EXERCISES.) 


THE  RIGHT  OF  FREE  DISCUSSION. 

Important  as  I  deem  it  to  discuss  on  all  proper 
occasions  the  policy  of  the  measures  at  present  pur- 
sued, it  is  still  more  important  to  maintain  the  right 
of  such  discussion  in  its  full  and  just  extent.  Senti- 
ments lately  sprung  up  and  now  growing  fashionable 
make  it  necessary  to  be  explicit  on  this  point.  The 
more  I  perceive  a  disposition  to  check  the  freedom  of 
inquiry  by  extravagant  and  unconstitutional  pretenses 
the  firmer  shall  be  the  tone  in  which  I  shall  assert  and 
the  freer  the  manner  in  which  I  shall  exercise  it. 

It  is  the  ancient  and  undoubted  prerogative  of  this 
people  to  canvass  public  measures  and  the  merits  of 
public  men.  It  is  a  home-bred  right,  a  fire-side  priv- 
ilege. It  hath  ever  been  enjoyed  in  every  house,  cot- 
tage and  cabin  in  the  nation.  It  is  not  to  be  drawn 
into  controversy.  It  is  as  undoubted  as  the  right  of 
breathing  the  air  or  walking  on  the  earth.  Belonging 
to  private  life  as  a  right,  it  belongs  to  public  life  as  a 
duty  and  it  is  the  last  duty  which  those  whose  repre- 
sentative I  am  shall  find  me  to  abandon.  Aiming  at 
all  times  to  be  courteous  and  temperate  in  its  use  ex- 
cept when  the  right  itself  shall  be  questioned,  I  shall 
then  carry  it  to  its  extent.  I  shall  place  myself  on 
the  extreme  boundary  of  my  right,  and  bid  defiance  to 
any  arm  that  would  move  me  from  my  ground. 

This  high,  constitutional  privilege  I  shall  defend 
and  exercise  within  this  house,  and  without  this  house, 
and  in  all  places;  in  time  of  peace  and  in  all  times. 


4G4  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL. 

Living,  I  shall  assert  it,  and  should  I  leave  no  other 
inheritance  to  my  children,  by  the  blessing  of  God,  I 
will  leave  them  the  inheritance  of  free  principles  and 
the  example  of  a  manly,  independent  and  constitutional 
defense  of  them. — Daniel  AVebster. 


WEALTH  AND  ITS  MEASUREMENT. 

Wealth  comprises  ail  things  having  value,  such  as 
houses,  lands,  cattle,  furniture,  goods,  money,  etc.,  in 
short,  all  objects  possessing  inherent  power  to  com- 
mand other  objects  in  exchange.  Value,  which  is  the 
chief  quality  and  requisite  of  wealth,  and  the  universal 
name  for  power  in  exchange,  is  the  ratio  existing  be- 
tween different  commodities  with  reference  to  such 
exchange.  If  a  bushel  of  wheat  will  bring  in  exchange 
two  bushels  of  corn,  the  value  of  wheat,  expressed  in 
corn,  is  as  two  to  one,  that  is,  wheat  is  worth  twice  as 
much  as  corn;  and  the  value  of  .corn  expressed  in 
wheat  is  as  one  to  two,  or  one  half  to  one,  that  is, 
corn  is  worth  one  half  as  much  as  wheat. 

A  chief  requisite  to  the  rating  of  wealth  is  that  its 
value  should  be  susceptible  of  measurement — not  mere- 
ly that  kind  of  measurement  which  compares  one  article 
or  commodity  with  another,  but  a  measurement  which 
may  be  generally  stated  in  figures,  and  to  which  all  val- 
uable things  shall  alike  be  subject.  For,  while  it  would 
be  possible  to  make  an  equitable  exchange  of  two  com- 
modities, as  in  the  case  of  wheat  and  corn  above  given, 
such  a  basis  would  not  be  generally  effective  in  the 
extended  relations  required  by  commerce.  What  is 
requisite  to  know,  is  not  merely  the  value  of  wheat  in 
corn,  but  the  value  of  wheat  or  of  corn,  in  any  one  of 
a  thousand  different  commodities;  and  this  can  be  done 
only  by  the  use  of  an  arbitrary  measurement  or  stand- 
ard which  shall  apply  equally  to  all  values,  just  as 
the  bushel  measure  applies  equally  to  the  quantity  or 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL..  40.") 

bulk  of  wheat,  or  of  corn,  or  of  any  other  measurable 
commodity  which  it  may  contain. 

Let  us  adopt  such  an  arbitrary  measure  of  value 
and  call  it  Dollar;  and  then  let  us  suppose  that  a 
bushel  of  wheat  is  equal  in  value,  or  is  measured  as 
to  its  value,  by  the  unit  of  this  standard.  It  will  then 
occur  that  a  bushel  of  wheat  will  be  worth  a  dollar 
and  a  dollar  will  be  worth  two  bushels  of  corn.  Now 
make  the  dollar  the  measurer  in  both  cases  and  we 
have  one  bushel  of  wheat  or  two  bushels  of  corn  equal 
in  value  to  one  dollar.  Suppose,  further,  that  a 
bushel  of  wheat  is  exchangeable  for  three  bushels  of 
potatoes.  This  fixes  the  value  of  potatoes,  as  ex- 
pressed in  wheat,  at  one  third  (that  is,  a  bushel  of 
potatoes  is  worth  a  third  of  a  bushel  of  wheat)  and 
the  value  of  wheat,  as  expressed  in  potatoes,  at  three. 
We  have  now  another  measure  of  value,  or  another 
article  sustaining  a  known  relation  to  wheat,  and  con- 
sequently to  corn,  and  we  are  enabled  on  this  basis  to 
promote  a  general  exchange  in  the  three  articles  with- 
out the  intervention  of  an  arbitrary  measure,  and  yet 
the  advantage  of  an  extrinsic  standard  is  positive, 
even  in  these  limited  relations;  for  if  we  make  the 
dollar  the  measurer  again,  we  have  not  only  one 
bushel  of  wheat,  or  two  bushels  of  corn,  but  also  three 
bushels  of  potatoes  equal  in  value  to  one  dollar. 

The  advantage  of  the  dollar  measurement,  as  above 
shown,  lies  in  the  facility  it  gives  for  adjusting  the 
value  of  unity  of  any  commodity.  And  the  value  of 
unity  being  fixed,  the  value  of  any  number  of  units 
of  one  commodity  in  any  number  of  units  of  another 
is  readily  computed. 

To  meet  the  best  conditions  of  exchange,  the  meas- 
urer of  value  should  be  itself  a  representative  of  the 
value  it  measures  and  capable  of  going  from  hand  to 
hand  in  exchange  for  the  thing  measured.  Though 
not  in  itself  the  thing  ultimately  desired  in  exchange, 


K!l)  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

it  must  be  capable  of  commanding  that  thing  when- 
ever it  is  wanted.  It  should,  therefore,  be  something 
which  all  holders  of  commodities  will  unhesitatingly 
accept.  To  fill  these  requisites,  it  should  be: 

1.  Imperishable,  or  as  nearly  so  as  possible,  that 
it  may  continue  in  use  without  sensible  loss  or  depre- 
ciation. 

2.  Portable,  containing  great  value  in  small  bulk. 

3.  Divisible  to  the  farthest  practicable  extent,  that 
the  smallest  values  may  be  suitably  represented. 

4.  Uniform  in  quality  and  such  that  it  may    be 
easily  tested. 

5.  Untarnishable  and  pleasant  to  handle,    that  it 
may  be  appreciated  and  desired  to  be  held  in  posses- 
sion. 

6.  Malleable,  that  it  may  be  wrought  into  conve- 
nient shapes  and  easily  impressed. 

7.  Rare  and  difficult  to  obtain,   that  its  relation  to 
other  commodities  may  not  be  suddenly  changed  by 
overproduction. 

8.  Sufficiently  plentiful,  that  the  quality  accessible 
may  be  readily  adjusted  to  the   healthy  demands  of 
trade. 

All  these  qualities  inhere  in  gold  and  silver  metal  and 
for  this  reason  they  have  gradually  become  to  be  the 
material  out  of  which  money  is  made.  It  will  be  said 
that  gold  and  silver,  being  useful  commodities  and 
having  an  intrinsic  value  as  such,  are  liable  to  fluctu- 
ation, the  same  as  other  commodities,  and  on  this  ac- 
count will  become  unreliable  as  a  standard  of  measure- 
ment. This  would  be  true  were  it  not  that  their  uni- 
versal recognition  as  the  measure  of  value  gives 
them  an  exceptional  position  among  commodities,  and 
arrests  the  natural  tendency  to  respond  at  once  to  the 
influences  which  affect  other  commodities  through  the 
law  of  supply  and  demand.  And,  again,  the  increase 
or  diminution  of  gold  and  silver,  even  under  extra- 


THE    PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL  467 

ordinary  circumstances,  daring  any  reasonably  limited 
period,  is  so  gradual,  as  to  create  no  apprehension  of 
sudden  disturbances  from  readjustments. 

The  difficulty,  however,  of  maintaining  as  equal 
measures  of  value,  two  metals  having  distinct  commer- 
cial values  and  liable  to  constant  variation  relatively  to 
each  other,  is  one  that  cannot  be  overlooked.  It  is  a 
recognized  law  of  commerce  as  well  as  of  finance  that 
commodities  always  seek  the  best  market.  Hence, 
•when  the  relative  value  between  gold  and  silver  as 
money  is  such  that  either  is  worth  more  in  the  open 
market,  it  will  seek  the  more  profitable  field  and  cease 
to  circulate  in  the  less  profitable.  To  meet  this  diffi- 
culty it  is  found  necessary  to  recognize  one  metal  as 
the  real  standard,  and  by  proper  restrictions  in  coin- 
age and  legal  tender  attributes  to  keep  the  other  in 
fixed  relations,  thereto. — Packard  and  Bryant. 


LETTERS. 

Mr.  J.  W.  Smith, 

San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Dear  Sir:  In  compliance  with  yours  of  the  2d  inst. 
we  this  day  ship  your  order  per  American  Express. 
Please  notify  us  by  telegraph  if  the  goods  do  not  ar- 
rive within  a  reasonable  time. 

Hoping  that  you  will  favor  us  again  when  in  need 
of  anything  in  our  line,  we  are, 

Very  respectfully,  &c., 

Mess.  Hatfield  &  Jackson, 
Cincinnati,  O. 

Gentlemen:  AVe  are  in  receipt  of  your  favor  of  the 
29th  ult.  containing  draft  for  One  hundred  and  fifty 
and  jVu  Dollars  (*15<'iVo )  and  have  placed  the  same  to 
your  credit. 

AVith  thanks  for  the  remittance  and  soliciting  a  con- 


468  THE   PHOXOCiUAPHIC    MAXUAL. 

tinuance  of  your  orders,  which   shall   always  have  our 
prompt  attention,  we  remain, 

Very  truly,  etc., 

Mess.  Wilson  &  Taylor, 
Waco,  Texas. 

Gentlemen:  Your  favor  of  the  8th  instant  request- 
ing quotations  is  at  hand.  In  reply  wre  will  say  that 
we  will  furnish  you  the  articles  mentioned  in  the  cata- 
logue herewith  and  marked  in  red  ink  at  30  percent 
discount  from  the  list  price.  These  rates  are  consid- 
erably lower  than  the  regular  ones  and  we  make  them 
in  order  to  introduce  our  goods  in  your  district. 
Those  checked  in  black  ink  are  net,  while  the  remain- 
der are  liable  to  fluctuate  according  to  the  market. 

We  hope  that  3-011  will  find  these  quotations  satis- 
factory and  that  we  may  receive  an  order  from  you  at 
an  early  date. 

Yours  very  truly, 

MAN'S  MASTERY  OVER  NATURE. 

The  mastery  of  man  over  nature!  This  is  an  in- 
spiring truth  which  we  must  not  suffer  from  its  famili- 
arity to  lose  its  force.  By  the  might  of  his  intellect, 
man  has  not  merely  made  the  elephant  his  drudge,  the 
lion  his  diversion,  the  whale  his  magazine,  but  even 
the  subtlest  and  most  terrible  of  the  elements  is  the 
submissive  instrument  of  his  will.  He  turns  aside,  or 
garners  up,  the  lightning;  the  rivers  toil  in  his  work- 
shop; the  tides  of  ocean  bear  his  burdens;  the  hurricane 
rages  for  his  use  and  profit. 

Fire  and  water  struggle  together  that  he  may  be 
whisked  over  hill  and  valley  with  the  celerity  of  the 
sunbeam.  The  stillness  of  the  forest  midnight  is 
broken  bv  the  snort  of  the  iron  horse  as  he  drair-i  the 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  469 

long  train  from  lakes  to  ocean  with  a  slave's  docility, 
a  giant's  strength.  Up  the  long  hill  he  labors;  by  the 
<leep  glen  he  skims,  the  tops  of  the  tall  trees  swaying 
below  his  path;  his  sharp,  quick  breathing  bespeaks 
his  impetuous  progress;  a  stream  of  fire  reflects  his 
course;  on  dashes  the  tireless  steed,  and  the  morrow's 
sun  shall  find  him  standing  in  some  far  mart  of  com- 
merce and  the  partakers  of  his  wizard  journey  scattered 
to  their  vocations  of  trade  or  pleasure,  unthinking  of 
their  night's  adventure.  What  had  old  Romance 
wherewith  to  match  the  every-day  realities  of  the 
nineteenth  century! — Horace  Greeley. 

OPPORTUNITY  AND  THE  TRUE  REFORMER. 

To  the  rightly  constituted  mind,  to  the  truly  devel- 
oped man,  there  always  is,  there  always  must  be, 
opportunity — opportunity  to  be  and  to  learn,  nobly  to 
do  and  to  endure;  and  what  matter  whether  with  pomp 
and  eclat,  with  sound  of  trumpets  and  shout  of  ap- 
plauding thousands,  or  in  silence  and  seclusion,  be- 
neath the  calm,  discerning  gaze  of  heaven?  No  station 
can  be  humble  on  which  that  gaze  is  approvingly  bent; 
no  work  can  be  ignoble  which  is  performed  uprightly 
and  not  impelled  by  sordid  and  selfish  aims. 

Not  from  among  the  children  of  monarchs,  ushered 
into  being  with  boom  of  cannon  and  shouts  of  revelling 
millions,  but  from  amid  the  sons  of  obscurity  and  toil, 
cradeled  in  peril  and  ignominy,  from  the  bulrushes 
and  the  manger,  come  forth  the  benefactors  and  sa- 
viors of  mankind.  So  when  all  the  babble  and  glare  of 
our  age  shall  have  passed  into  fitting  oblivion,  when 
those  who  have  enjoyed  rare  opportunities  and  swayed 
vast  empires  and  been  borne  through  life  on  the 
shoulders  of  shouting  multitudes,  shall  have  been  laid 
at  last  to  rest  in  golden  coffins,  to  molder  forgotten, 
the  stately  marble  their  only  monuments,  it  will  be 


470  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

found  that  some  humble  youth  who  hewed  out  his  op- 
portunities, has  uttered  the  thought  which  shall  render 
the  age  memorable  by  extending  the  means  of  enlight- 
enment and  blessing  to  our  race. 

The  great  struggle  for  human  progress  and  eleva- 
tion proceeds  noiselessly,  often  unnoted,  often  checked 
and  apparently  baffled  amid  the  clamorous  and  debas- 
ing strifes  of  greedy  selfishness  and  low  ambition.  In 
that  struggle  maintained  by  the  wise  and  good  of  all 
ages  bear  ye  the  part  of  men.  Heed  the  lofty  sum- 
mons and  with  souls  serene  and  constant  prepare  to 
tread  boldly  in  the  path  of  highest  duty.  So  shall  life 
be  to  you  truly  exalted  and  heroic;  so  shall  death  bo  ;i 
transition  neither  sought  nor  dreaded;  so  shall  your 
memory,  though  cherished  at  first  but  by  a  few 
humble,  loving  hearts,  linger  long  and  gratefully  in 
human  remembrance,  a  watchword  to  the  faithful  and 
an  incitement  to  generous  endeavor;  freshened  by  the 
proud  tears  of  admiring  affection  and  fragrant  with  the 
odors  of  heaven. — Horace  Greeley. 

THE  SUN'S  ENERGY. 

Let  us  consider  this  energy  in  its  familiar  form  of 
the  heat  by  which  we  live.  How  great  is  it?  How 
hot  is  iU 

Before  examining  the  degree  of  the  sun's  heat,  let 
us  look  a  little  into  its  amount.  The  sunheat  falling 
on  one  square  mile  corresponds  to  over  750  tons  of 
wrater  raised  every  minute  from  the  freezing  to  the 
boiling  point.  But  there  are  49  million  square  miles 
in  the  cross-section  of  the  earth  exposed  to  the  sun 
and  therefore  in  each  minute  its  heat  falling  on  tho 

~ 

earth  would  raise  to  the  boiling  point  37  billion  tons 
of  Avater. 

We  may  express  this  in  other  ways:  as  by  the 
quantity  of  ice  it  would  melt.  And  as  the  whole  sur- 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  471 

face  of  the  earth,  including  the  night  side,  is  four 
times  the  cross-section  exposed  to  the  sun,  we  find,  by 
taking  520, (KM)  minutes  to  a  year,  that  the  sun's  rays 
would  melt  in  a  year,  a  coating  of  ice  over  the  whole 
earth  more  than  160  feet  thick. 

The  amount  of  heat,  therefore,  which  the  sun  sends 
the  earth  in  order  to  warm  its  oceans  and  make  green 
its  continents  is  almost  incomprehensible.  But  how 
little  this  is  to  what  passes  vis  by!  The  earth  as  it 
moves  on  in  its  annual  path  continually  comes  into  new 
regions,  where  it  finds  the  same  amount  of  heat  pour- 
ing forth  and  which  still  continues  to  fall  into  the 
empty  space  it  has  just  quitted  where  it  goes  on  in 
what  seems  utter  waste.  If  then,  the  whole  annual 
orbit  were  set  close  with  globes  like  ours,  each  would 
receive  the  same  enormous  amount  the  earth  does  now. 
But  this  is  not  all;  for  not  only  along  the  orbit,  but 
above  and  below  it  does  the  sun  set  forth  its  heat,  the 
final  amount  being  expressible  in  the  number  of  worlds 
'like  ours  that  it  could  warm  in  the  same  manner, 
which  is  two  billion  two  hundred  millions. 

These  numbers  are,  perhaps,  too  great  to  convey  a 
clear  idea  to  the  mind,  but  let  us,  before  leaving  them, 
try  to  give  an  illustration  of  their  significance  in  con- 
nection with  this  stupendous  outflow  of  the  solar  heat. 

Let  us  suppose  that  we  could  gather  up  from  the 
earth  all  the  ice  and  snow  on  its  surface,  including  the 
accumulations  on  its  Arctic  and  Antarctic  poles,  and 
build  with  it  a  tower  fifteen  miles  in  diameter  and  high 
enough  to  exhaust  our  store.  Imagine  that  it  could 
be  preserved  untouched  by  the  sun's  rays  while  we 
built  on  writh  the  accumulations  of  successive  winters 
until  it  stretched  240,000  miles  into  space,  forming  an 
ice  bridge  to  the  moon,  and  that  we  then  concentrated 
on  it  the  sun's  whole  radiation  such  as  it  emits  con- 
tinually. In  one  second  the  whole  would  be  gone — 
melted,  boiled,  dissipated  in  vapor. 


472  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

Again,  the  state  of  Pennsylvania  is  underlaid  by 
one  of  the  richest  coal  fields  of  the  world,  capable  of 
supplying  the  consumption  of  the  whole  country  at 
its  present  rate  for  more  than  a  thousand  years  to 
come.  If  the  source  of  the  solar  heat  were  withdrawn 
and  we  could  carry  this  coal  to  the  solar  furnace 
and  shoot  it  in  fast  enough  to  keep  up  the  present 
heat  and  radiation,  the  whole  would  be  used  up  in 
rather  less  than  the  one-thousandth  of  a  second!  Fur- 
thermore, if  the  sun  itself  had  originally  been  one 
solid  block  of  coal  it  would  have  burnt  out  completely 
in  less  time  than  that  in  which  man  has  occupied  the 
earth.  Yet  during  historic  times  there  has  been  no 
noticeable  diminution  of  the  sun's  heat,  for  the  olive 
and  the  vine  grow  to-day  just  as  they  did  three 
thousand  years  ago. 

Having  considered  the  amount  of  the  sun's  heat,  let 
us  next  examine  the  degree  of  its  temperature.  That 
is,  How  hot  is  it  2  We  can  make  the  comparison  be- 
tween the  heat  from  some  artificially  heated  object  and 
that  given  out  from  an  equal  area  of  the  sun's  face, 
so  that  we  choose  for  comparison  the  hottest  thine:  we 
can  find  on  a  scale  large  enough  for  the  experiment. 

Perhaps  the  highest  temperature  we  can  get  on  a 
large  scale  in  the  arts  is  that  of  molten  steel  in  the 
Bessemer  converter.  The  converter  is  an  enormous 
iron  pot,  lined  with  fire-brick  and  capable  of  holding 
fifteen  or  twenty  tons  of  melted  metal.  It  is  swung 
on  trunnions  so  that  it  can  be  raised  by  machinery  to 
a  vertical  position  or  lowered  to  pour  its  contents  into 
a  caldron.  First  the  empty  converter  is  inclined  and 
seven  tons  and  a  half  of  fluid  iron  streams  down  into 
its  mouth  from  an  adjacent  furnace.  It  is  then  lifted 
into  an  erect  position  and  an  air-blast  from  a  blowing- 
engine  is  forced  in  at  the  bottom  through  the  liquid 
iron  which  has  combined  with  it  nearly  half  a  ton  of 
silicon  and  carbon — -materials  which  with  the  oxygen 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  473 

of  the  blast,  create  a  heat  which  leaves  that  of  the 
already  melted  iron  far  behind.  After  some  time  the 
converter  is  tipped  forward  and  three-quarters  of  a 
ton  more  of  melted  iron  is  added  to  that  already  in  it. 
What  the  temperature  of  this  last  is,  may  be  judged 
from  the  fact  that  although  ordinary  melted  iron  is 
dazzlingly  bright,  the  molten  metal  in  the  converter  is 
so  much  brighter  still  that  the  entering  stream  is,  as  it 
were,  dark  brown  by  comparison,  presenting  a  contrast 
something  like  that  of  chocolate  emptied  into  a  white 
cup.  Looking  now,  from  the  front  down  into  the  in- 
clined vessel,  we  see  the  almost  blindingly  bright  inte- 
rior dripping  with  the  drainage  of  the  metal  down  its 
side  while  the  circular  mouth,  which  is  twenty-four 
inches  in  diameter,  presents  the  effect  of  a  disk  of 
molten  metal  of  that  size.  The  contents  are  now  no 
longer  iron,  but  liquid  steel,  ready  for  pouring  into 
the  caldron,  which  is  done  immediately;  the  stream  of 
falling  metal,  which  continues  nearly  a  minute,  pre- 
senting with  its  scintillations  and  intense  brilliancy, 
the  appearance  of  a  cataract  of  sunlight. 

The  pour  is  preceded  by  a  shower  of  sparks  of  the 
molten  steel  projected  fully  a  hundred  feet  straight 
from  the  open  mouth  of  the  converter.  In  the  line  of 
this  an  apparatus  was  stationed  in  an  open  window,  at 
a  place  whence  its  view  could  be  directed  down  into  the 
converter  on  one  side  and  up  at  the  sun  on  the  other. 
This  apparatus  consisted  of  a  long  photometer  box 
with  a  -  "porte-lumiere"  at  one  end.  The  mirror  of  this 
reflected  the  sun's  rays  through  the  box  and  then  on  to 
the  pouring  steel,  tracing  their  way  to  it  by  a  beam  of 
light  visible  through  the  dusty  air.  In  the  path  of 
this  beam  was  placed  the  measuring  apparatus,  both 
for  heat  and  light,  arranged  in  such  a  manner  that  the 
effect  (except  for  the  absorption  of  its  beams  by  the 
atmosphere  on  the  way)  was  independent  of  the  size 
or  distance  of  the  sun  and  depended  on  its  absolute 


474  THE  PHOM>',:::APHIC  MANUAL. 

initial  radiation,  being  equivalent  to  aking  a  sample 
piece  of  the  sun's  face  of  equal  size  with  the  fluid 
metal,  bringing  them  opposite  each  other  and  seeing 
which  was  the  hotter  and  brighter.  The  comparison, 
however,  was  not  impartial  so  far  as  the  sun  was  con- 
cerned, since  its  rays  were  to  a  certain  extent  absorbed, 
as  was  said,  by  the  atmosphere  on  the  way.  while  those 
of  the  furnace  were  not.  Nevertheless,  under  these 
circumstances  the  heat  from  any  single  square  foot  of 
the  sun's  surface  was  found  to  be  at  least  eighty-seven 
times  that .  from  a  square  foot  of  the  molten  steel, 
while  the  light  from  the  sun  was  proved  to  be,  foot  for 
foot,  over  five  thousand  times  that  from  the  steel, 
though  the  latter  separately  considered,  seemed  to  be 
of  equal  brilliancy. 

We  must  not  conclude  from  this  that  the  teinp';r<nnr,- 
of  the  sun  was  five  thousand  times  that  of  the  steel, 
but  we  may  be  certain  that  it  was  a  great  deal  the 
higher  of  the  two.  It  is  probable  from  all  experi- 
ments made  up  to  this  date,  that  the  solar  temperature 
is  not  less  than  3,000  nor  more  than  30, 000  degrees  of 
the  centigrade  thermometer. — S.  P.  Langley. 

THE  GREAT  NORTHWESTERN  SNOWFALL. 

The  soil  of  the  wheat  belt  region  receives  no  tonic 
and  stimulant  of  vegetation  equal  in  power  to  the  peri- 
odic snowfalls  of  the  winter  season.  The  artificial 
fertilizers  of  the  farms  and  from  the  nitrate  markets 
are  of  far  less  value  than  the  snows  which  cover  the 
ground  and  mantle  the  sources  of  vegetable  growth. 

Even  a  good  and  prolonged  rain  is  less  serviceable 
than  a  fall  of  snow  in  fertilizing  the  soil.  The  atmos- 
phere contains  iu  dust  particles,  in  the  floating  remains 
of  pulverulent  organic  substances,  in  gases  exhaled 
from  the  earth  or  formed  in  the  invisible  laboratories 


THE  PHOXOGKAP11IC  MANUAL.  475 

of    nature    fructifying    elements   which    are    brought 


*e 


down  in  showers  of  rain  and  aid  vegetable 
growths. 

But  the  rain  is  much  less  effectual  than  the  snow 
in  bringing  the  fertilizers  in  the  atmosphere  to  the 
ground.  Through  the  descending  columns  of  a  sum- 
mer shower  the  spaces  not  covered  by  watery  spray 
permit  the  escape  of  a  vast  proportion  of  the  matter 
floating  in  the  air.  Especially  the  volatile  gases, 
probably  the  most  valuable  part  of  the  fertilizing 
elements  in  the  air,  escape  between  the  falling  rain 
drops  and  reascend  to  the  upper  atmospheric  heights. 

The  snowfall  descends  like  a  blanket.  It  brings  to 
the  earth  all  foreign  elements  in  the  air — the  dust,  the 
gases,  the  insect  life,  the  floating  drift  of  smoky  par- 
ticles from  all  the  centers  of  industrial  activity — and 
nothing  escapes  the  comprehensive  visitation.  When 
all  this  enormous  wealth  of  fertilization  is  brought  to 
the  earth  under  the  snow,  it  remains  there,  sinking 
into  the  crevices  and  pores  of  the  soil,  to  form  res- 
ervoirs of  fertility  for  the  spring  and  summer  to 
follow. 

This  constitutes  the  value  of  the  snowfall  in  the 
belts  where  wheat  and  other  grain  products  of  the 
temperate  zone  are  cultivated.  It  covers  the  earth  and 
mantles  its  treasures  of  fecundity.  It  is  a  promise 
of  the  appearance  of  the  harvest  at  the  appointed 
time.  The  winter  snows  are  an  assurance  against  the 
most  deleterious  effects  of  the  summer  drouths.  They 
are  the  prophecy  of  the  harvest  and  foretell  the  abund- 
ance of  its  fulfilment. — The  Chicago  Chronicle. 

TRUTH. 

Force  of  thought  may  be  put  forth  to  weave  a  web 
of  sophistry,  to  make  the  Avorse  appear  the  better 
cause.  But  energy  of  thought  so  employed  is  sui- 


•iTtj  .  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

cidal.  The  intellect  becomes  not  only  degraded  but 
diseased  and  loses  the  capacity  of  distinguishing  truth 
from  falsehood,  good  from  evil,  right  from  wrong. 
Woe  to  that  mind  which  wants  the  love  of  truth !  For 
want  of  this  genius  has  been  a  scourge  to  the  world; 
its  breath  a  poisonous  exhalation;  its  brightness  a  de- 
coy into  the  paths  of  pestilence  and  death.  Truth  is 
the  light  of  the  Infinite  mind  and  the  image  of  God  in 
his  creatures.  Nothing  endures  but  truth.  The  dreams, 
fictions,  theories  which  men  would  substitute  for  it, 
soon  die.  Without  its  guidance,  effort  is  vain  and 
hope  baseless.  Accordingly,  the  love  of  truth,  a  de- 
liberate purpose  to  seek  it  and  hold  it  fast,  may  be 
considered  as  the  very  foundation  of  human  culture 
and  dignity.  Precious  as  thought  is.,  the  love  of  truth 
is  still  more  precious;  for  without  it  thought  wanders 
and  wastes  itself  and  precipitates  men  into  misery.  — 
Channing. 


MEN  ALWAYS  FIT  FOR  FREEDOM. 

There  is  only  one  cure  for  the  evils  which  newly  ac- 
quired freedom  produces — and  that  cure  is  freedom! 
When  a  prisoner  leaves  his  cell,  he  can  not  bear  the 
light  of  day;  he  is  unable  to  discriminate  colors  or 
recognize  faces;  but  the  remedy  is  not  to  remand  him 
into  his  dungeon,  but  to  accustom  him  to  the  rays  of 
the  sun.  The  blaze  of  truth  and  liberty  may  at  first 
dazzle  and  bewilder  nations  which  have  become  half 
blind  in  the  house  of  bondage;  but  let  them  gaze  on 
and  they  will  soon  be  able  to  bear  it.  In  a  few  years 
men  learn  to  reason;  the  extreme  violence  of  opinion 
subsides;  hostile  theories  correct  each  other;  the  scat- 
tered elements  of  truth  cease  to  conflict  and  begin  to 
coalesce;  and,  at  length,  a  system  of  justice  and  order 
is  educed  out  of  the  chaos.  Many  politicians  of  our 
time  are  in  the  habit  of  laying  it  down  as  a  self-evident 


THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL  177 

proposition,  that  no  people  ought  to  be  free  till  they 
are  lit  to  use  their  freedom.  The  maxim  is  worthy  of 
the  person  in  the  story,  who  resolved  not  to  go  into 
the  water  till  he  had  learned  to  swim.  If  men  are  to 
wait  for  liberty  till  they  become  wise  and  good  in 
slavery,  they  may,  indeed,  wait  forever.—  Macaulay. 

FIDELITY  TO  THE  CONSTITUTION. 

If  an  honest,  and  I  may  truly  affirm,  a  laborious  zeal 
for  the  public  service  has  given  me  any  weight  in  your 
esteem,  let  me  exhort  and  conjure  you  never  to  suffer 
an  invasion  of  your  political  constitution,  however 
minute  the  instance  may  appear,  to  pass  by  without 
a  determined,  persevering  resistance.  One  precedent 
creates  another.  They  soon  accumulate  and  constitute 
law.  What  yesterday  was  fact,  to-day  is  doctrine. 
Examples  are  supposed  to  justify  the  most  dangerous 
measures;  and  where  they  do  not  suit  exactly,  the  de- 
fect is  supplied  by  analogy.  Be  assured,  that  the  laws 
which  protect  us  in  our  civil  rights  grow  out  of  the 
constitution,  and  that  they  must  fall  or  flourish  with 
it. — Junius. 

EARLY  RISING. 

Early  rising  is  considered  by  some  to  be  a  vulgar 
practice.  Those  who  say  so  have  perused  the  bio- 
graphies of  great  men  with  little  attention.  It  is  in- 
disputable that  few  ever  lived  to  a  great  age,  and 
fewer  still  ever  became  distinguished  who  were  not  in 
the  habit  of  early  rising.  You  rise  late  and  of  course 
get  about  your  business  at  a  late  hour  and  everything 
goes  wrong  all  day.  Franklin  sayc  that '  'He  who  rises 
late  must  run  all  day  and  not  overtake  his  business  at 
night."  Dean  Swift  avers  that  he  never  knew  a  man 
come  to  greatness  and  eminence  who  lay  in  bed  in  the 


US  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL 

morning.  We  believe  that  with  other  degenerations 
of  our  days,  history  will  prove  that  late  rising  is  a 
very  prominent  one.  There  seems  to  be  no\v  a  ten- 
dency among  certain  persons  to  turn  day  into  night — 
to  breakfast  late,  dine  late  and  go  to  bed  late  and  con- 
sequently to  rise  late.  To  a  certain  extent  people 
must  do  as  others  do;  nevertheless,  every  one  is  more 
or  less  able  to  act  with  something  like  independence  of 
principle;  the  young — those  who  have  everything  to 
learn — can  at  least  act  upon  a  plan — rising  at  an  early 
hour. 

In  order  to  rise  early  we  would  recommend  an  early 
'hour  for  retiring.  There  are  many  other  reasons  for 
this;  neither  your  eyes  nor  health  are  so  likely  to  be 
injured.  Let  it  be  a  rule  with  you,  and  if  possible 
adhered  to,  that  you  will  be  at  home  and  have  your  light 
extinguished  by  a  quarter  to  ten  o'clock  in  the  evening. 
You  may  then  rise  at  six  and  have  eight  hours  sleep, 
which  is  about  what  nature  requires.  It  may  be  most 
confidently  affirmed  that  he  who  from  his  youth  is  in 
the  habit  of  rising  early,  will  be  much  more  likely  to 
live  to  old  age,  more  likely  to  be  a  distinguished  and 
useful  man  and  more  likely  to  pass  a  life  that  is  pleas- 
ant.— Chamber's  Miscellany. 

SELF-CULTURE. 

"Every  person  has  two  educations:  one  •which  he  receives 
from  others,  and  one,  more  important,  which  he  gives  to  him- 
self."— Gibbon. 

It  is  astonishing  how  much  may  be  accomplished  in 
self-culture  by  the  energetic  and  persevering  who  are 
careful  to  avail  themselves  of  opportunities,  and  use 
up  the  fragments  of  spare  time  which  the  idle  permit 
to  run  to  waste.  Thus  Ferguson  learned  astronomy 
from  the  heavens  while  tending  sheep  on  the  highland 
hills;  Stone  learned  mathematics  while  working  us  a 


Till"    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL.  479 

journey-man  gardener;  Drew  studied  the  highest  philos- 
ophy in  the  intervals  of  cobbling  shoes  and  Hugh  Mil- 
ler taught  himself  geology  while  working  as  a  day 
laborer  in  a  quarry,  liy  bringing  their  minds  to  bear 
upon  knowledge  in  its  various  aspects,  and  carefully 
using  up  the  very  odds  and  ends  of  their  time,  men 
such  as  these  reached  the  highest  culture,  and  acquired 
honorable  distinction  among  their  fellow  men. 

Sir  Joshua  Reynolds  was  an  earnest  believer  in  the 
power  of  industry  and  held  that  all  men  might  achieve 
excellence  if  they  would  but  exercise  the  power  of  assid- 
uous and  patient  working.  He  held  that  drudgery  was 
on  the  road  to  genius  and  that  there  were  hardly  any 
limits  to  the  proficiency  of  an  artist  except  the  limits 
of  his  own  painstaking.  He  would  not  believe  in  con- 
tinual inspiration  but  mostly  in  study  and  labor.  '  'Ex- 
cellence,'' he  said,  "is  seldom  granted  to  a  man  but  as 
the  reward  of  labor.  Whether  you  have  great  or 
moderate  abilities  industry  will  improve  them."  Sir 
Fowell  Buxton,  who  labored  in  a  different  field,  was  an 
equal  believer  in  the  power  of  study  and  placed  his 
greatest  confidence  in  extraordinary  application.  And 
it  is  unquestionably  true  that  the  men  of  the  highest 
genius  have  invariably  been  found  to  be  among  the 
most  plodding,  hard-working  and  intent  men — their 
chief  characteristic  apparently  consisting  simply  in 
their  power  of  laboring  more  intensely  and  efficiently 
than  others. — -Samuel  Smiles. 


SELF-RESPECT. 

Self-discipline  and  self-control  are  the  beginnings  of 
practical  wisdom  and  these  must  have  their  root  in 
self-respect.  Hope  springs  from  it — hope,  which  is 
the  companion  of  power  and  the  mother  of  success. 
Every  one  may  say  "To  respect  myself,  to  develop 
myself  this  is  my  true  duty  in  life.  An  integral  and 


480  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL 

responsible  part  of  the  great  system  of  society,  I  owe 
to  society  and  to  its  Author  not  to  degrade  nor  destroy 
my  body,  mind  nor  instincts.  On  the  contrary,  I  am 
bound  to  the  best  of  my  power  to  give  those  parts  of 
my  nature  the  highest  degree  of  perfection  possible. 
And  as  I  respect  my  own  nature  so  am  I  equally  bound 
to  respect  others,  as  they  on  their  part  are  bound  to 
respect  me. " 

Self-respect  is  the  noblest  garment  with  which  a 
man  may  clothe  himself — the  most  elevating  feeling 
with  which  the  mind  can  be  inspired.  This  sentiment 
carried  into  daily  life  will  be  found  at  the  root  of  all 
the  virtues.  "The  just  honoring  of  ourselves,"  said 
Milton,  "may  be  thought  the  fountain  head  from 
whence  every  worthy  enterprise  issues  forth. "  Every 
one  may  be  sustained  by  the  proper  indulgence  of 
this  feeling  and  be  lifted  and  lighted  up  by  it.— 
Samuel  Smiles. 


THE  KNOCKING  AT  THE  GATE  IN  MACBETH. 

From  my  boyish  days  I  had  always  felt  a  great  per- 
plexity on  one  point  in  Macbeth.  It  was  this:  the 
knocking  at  the  gate,  which  succeeds  to  the  murder  of 
Duncan,  produced  to  my  feelings  an  effect  for  which 
I  never  could  account.  The  effect  was,  that  it  reflected 
back  upon  the  murder  a  peculiar  awfulnessand  a  depth 
of  solemnity;  yet,  however  obstinately  I  endeavored 
with  my  understanding  to  comprehend  this,  for  many 
years  I  never  could  see  why  it  should  produce  such  an 
effect. 

Here  I  pause  for  one  moment  to  exnort  the  reader 
never  to  pay  any  attention  to  his  understanding,  when 
it  places  itself  in  opposition  to  any  other  faculty  of 
his  mind.  The  mere  understanding,  however  useful 
and  indispensible,  is  the  meanest  faculty  we  have  and 
the  most  to  be  distrusted;  and  yet  the  great  majority 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  481 

of  people  trust  to  nothing  else;  which  may  do  for  or- 
dinary life,  but  not  for  philosophy. 

But  to  return  from  this  digression,  my  understand- 
ing could  furnish  no  reason  why  the  knocking  at  the 
gate  should  produce  any  effect  direct  or  reflected.  In 
fact,  my  understanding  said  positively  that  it  could 
'not  produce  any  effect.  But  I  knew  better;  I  felt  that 
it  did;  and  I  waited  and  clung  to  the  problem  until 
further  knowledge  should  enable  me  to  solve  the  inci- 
dent which  the  genius  of  Shakespeare  has  invented 
and  I  at  length  did  so  to  my  own  satisfaction,  and  my 
solution  is  this: 

In  Macbeth,  with  his  enormous  and  teeming  faculty 
of  creation,  Shakespeare  has  introduced  two  murderers 
—Macbeth  and  his  wife.  Furthermore,  we  have  the 
unoffending  nature  of  the  victim,  'the  gracious  Dun- 
can'- —and  with  this  'the  deep  damnation  of  his  taking 
off;'  and  immediately  afterward  comes  the  expedient 
under  consideration — to  which  I  now  solicit  the 
reader's  attention. 

At  no  moment  is  the  sense  of  the  complete  suspen- 
sion and  pause  in  ordinary  human  concerns  so  full  and 
affecting  as  at  that  moment  when  suspension  ceases 
and  the  goings-on  of  the  ordinary  human  life  are  sud- 
denly resumed.  All  action  in  any  direction  is  best 
expounded,  measured  and  made  apprehensible  by  reac- 
tion. Now  apply  this  to  the  case  of  Macbeth.  Here 
another  world  has  stepped  in  and  we  are  made  sensible 
that  the  world  of  ordinary  life  is  suddenly  arrested — 
laid  asleep — tranced — racked  into  a  dread  armistice 
—withdrawn  into  a  deep  syncope  and  suspension. 
Hence  it  is  that  when  the  deed  is  done,  when  the  work 
of  darkness  is  perfect,  then  the  knocking  at  the  gale 
is  heard;  and  it  makes  known  audibly  that  the  reaction 
has  commenced;  the  pulses  of  life  are  beginning  to 
beat  again;  and  the  re-establishment  of  the  goings-on 


482  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC   MANUAL. 

of  the  ordinary  world  first  makes  us  profoundly  sen- 
sible of  the  awful  parenthesis  that  had  suspended 
them. 

O,  mighty  poet!  Thy  works  are  not  as  those  of 
other  men,  simply  and  merely  great  works  of  art;  but 
are  also  like  the  phenomena  of  nature,  like  the  sun 
and  the  sea,  the  stars  and  the  flowers — like  frost  and 
snow,  rain  and  dew,  hail-storm  and  thunder,  which 
are  to  he  studied  in  the  perfect  faith  that  in  them 
there  can  be  no  too  much  or  too  little,  nothing  useless 
or  inert — but  that,  the  further  we  press  in  our  discov- 
eries, the  more  we  shall  see  proofs  of  design  and  self- 
supporting  arrangement  where  the  careless  eye  had 
seen  nothing  but  accident  and  confusion. — De  Quincey. 

PHONETIC  SPELLING  AND  THE  COMMON 
SPELLING. 

If  we  draw  a  comparison  between  phonetic  spelling 
and  the  common  spelling,  we  find  that  the  two  points  in 
which  they  agree  are  in  the  endeavor  to  express  the 
sounds  of  our  language  by  certain  signs.  But  here 
the  parallelism  ceases,  for  in  regard  to  nearly  every- 
thing else  there  is  a  total  inequality  between  them. 
For  while  phonetic  spelling  investigates  the  elementary 
sounds  of  the  language  and  gives  a  distinct  sign  for 
each  sound  the  other  employs  the  few  characters  used 
by  our  ancestors.  Hence  much  confusion  is  produced 
by  using  the  same  sign  for  several  different  sounds. 
As  a  result  years  are  required  to  learn  what  utterance 
is  called  for  in  a  particular  letter. 

They  who  have  toiled  through  years  of  labor  in  sim- 
ply learning  to  spell  may  well  complain  of  their  tribu- 
lations. Phonographers,  however,  perceive  that  the 
time  is  near  when  the  intricacies  of  the  common  spell- 
ing shall  be  abandoned  for  the  simplicity  of  the  pho- 
netic one.  Phonography  and  its  sister  arts  phonoscript 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  48'.} 

and  phonotypy  are  thus  destined  to  take  the  place  of 
the  former.  We  shall  then  see  words  always  written 
in  accordance  with  their  pronunciation  so  that  no  one 
need  consult-  a  dictionary  to  ascertain  how  a  word  is 
spelled.  If  phonographers  are  firm  in  pressing  the 
claims  of  phonography,  phonoscript  and  phonotypy  upon 
the  consideration  of  the  public  these  arts  will  soon  be- 
come universal — the  more  so  as  they  are  not  experi- 
ments but  practical  methods  which  must  be  adopted  just 
as  soon  as  they  become  known.  — Adapted  from  James 
C.  Booth. 


PHONOGRAPHERS  AND  PHONETIC  SPELLING. 

Every  phonographer  should  be  able  to  write  and  read 
phonoscript  and- phonotypy  with  the  same  facility  as 
the  ordinary  script  and  print.  To  do  this  all  that  is 
necessary  is  to  master  the  phonoscript  and  phonotypic 
alphabets  ( which  can  be  done  by  any  phonographer  in 
from  a  few  minutes  to  half  an  hour)  and  follow  the 
rules  for  phonetic  spelling  presented  in  the  preceding 
pages  of  this  book.  He  will  then  possess  an  accom- 
plishment which,  while  it  cost  him  but  little  effort,  will 
ever  after  be  invaluable. 


[The  following-  paragraph  contains  all  the  sounds  of  the  Eng- 
lish language  and  is  from  the  example  in  phonetic  spelling  in 
"A  System  of  Phonoscript  and  Phonotypv,"  page  91.  (See  page 

28.)] 

THE   PHONOSCRIPT    AND    PHONOTYPIC 
ALPHABETS. 

By  the  phonoscript  and  phonotypic  alphabets  any 
person,  old  or  young,  may  be  taught  to  write  and  read 
in  three  months — ay,  often  in  forty  hours  instruction — 
tasks  which  are  seldom  accomplished  in  three  years  of 


484  THE   PHONOGRAPHIC    MANTAT.. 

great  toil  by  the  old  alphabets.  Every  person,  there- 
fore, who  is  interested  in  the  acquisition  and  diffusion 
of  knowledge,  should  not  fail  to  employ  these  alphabets 
at  once. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  ATTAINING  SPEED. 

593.  When  the  learner  has  mastered  the  preceding 
reporting  exercises,  as  directed  in  section  592,  he  should 
rewrite  them  from  dictation  until  they  can  lie  taken  at 
an  average  of  about  150  words  a  minute.     He  should 
then  take  extracts  from  a  newspaper  or  book.      Should 
he  now  meet  with  a  strange  word  or  one  for  which  he 
does  not  remember  the  contraction  he  should  not  stop 
to  deliberate  but  simply  write  it  in  full  and  look  up  the 
proper  form,  if  necessary,  afterwards.      When  he  can 
write  about  150  words  a  minute  from  new  matter  and 
read  his  notes  correctly  he  will  be  prepared  to  begin 
general  reporting. 

594.  The  learner  will  at  first  find  it  somewhat  diffi- 
cult to  read  phonography  because  he  has  been  giving 
his  attention  more  to  writing  than  reading.      If,  how- 
ever, he  frequently  reviews  what  he  writes  this  diffi- 
culty will  soon  disappear.      Finally  the  learner  is  ad- 
vised that  speed  will  gradually  increase  with   expe- 
rience.    Great  manual  dexterity  is,  of  course,  the  result 
of  great  practice  and  can  be  attained  only  by  writing 
from  dictation  or  speech.     (See  also  sec.   516. )     To 
gain  speed  it  is  better  to  write  one  article  fifty  times 
than  fifty  articles  once  each.     The  same  remark  applies 
to  reading.    Furthermore,  both  the  writing  and  reading 
should  mostly  be  from  matter  pertaining  to  the  line  of 
business  or  pursuit  in  which  the  learner  intends  to  de- 
vote his  efforts.      When  he   has  arrived  at  the    full 
limit  of  his  speed  he  will  be  able  to  write,  when  neces- 
sary, at  an  average  of  about  200  words  a  minute,  and 
in  spurts  anywhere  above  that  rate  to  275  and  over. 


THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL.  485 

595.  In  conclusion,  the  learner  is  reminded  (see 
sec.  518)  that  only  experience  in  any  kind  of  report- 
ing will  render  him  proficient  in  it,  no  matter  what  his 
speed  may  be  in  other  respects.  Thus,  for  example, 
he  might  be  able  to  write  two  or  three  hundred  words 
a  minute  from  dictation  and  yet  break  down  com- 
pletely in  actual  examination  and  testimony  or  a  speech 
or  debate  running  at  less  than  half  that  speed.  No- 
thing but  experience  in  such  proceedings,  therefore,  will 
ever  make  him  skilled  in  them.  The  same  remark 
applies  to  every  other  branch  of  reporting.  Neverthe- 
less the  learner  will  reach  the  goal  much  sooner  if  he 
has  proper  preparation  beforehand,  as  directed  above, 
than  if  he  enters  on  actual  reporting  without  it. 

STENOTYPIC   CONNECTED  MATTER. 

5 Dti.  Phonographic  connected  matter,  with  or  with- 
out vowels,  may  be  indicated  in  stenotypy,  in  which 
case  the  following  rules  are  adopted: 

a.  Small  logographs  and  their  alternates  are  spelled 
oat,  their  positions  being  unmarked  unless  they  are 
Avritten  in  the  zero  or  fourth  position. 

b.  When  a  vowel  or  word  has  two  or  more  signs 
the  regular  form  is  in  roman  and  the  alternates,  ex- 
cept I  and  i  (Ptoid  and  Ttoid),  in  italic;  thus,  a  (Ktoid); 
ft  (Rtoid);  the  (Ctoid);  the  (Rtoid);  He  (left  semicircle); 
he  ( Jtoidi;  lie  (Rtoid);  i  (right  semicircle);  I  (Ptoid); 
i  (Ttoid);  /  (Ktoid);  on  (Ttoid),  on  (tf/itoid);  all  (Ftoid); 
////  (L). 

c.  The  Ptoid  sign  for  "a"  is  represented  by  a  and 
the  Ttoid  one  by  a. 

d.  The  dot  sign  for  "the"  is  spelled  in  small  caps: 
THE. 

e.  The  words  unew,  anew,  knew"  and  "now"  are 
spelled  out. 

f.  Figures   are  written   and  denominations  abbre- 


486  THE    PHONOGRAPHIC    MANUAL. 

viated  as  usual;  thus,  40d.,  20c.,  lOOp.,  10s., 
5°  4'  15". 

g.  Stem  logographs,  and  also  semigraphs  and 
brevigraphs,  are  un vocalized. 

h.  In  all  other  respects  the  stenotypy  is  the  same 
as  when  unconnected. 

597.  In  the  Vocalized  Style  of  phonographic  (and 
thus  of  stenotypic)  connected  matter,  all  words   are 
vocalized  except   logographs,   semigraphs   and    brevi- 
graphs.    Also  usually  no  phrases  are  employed. '   Ac- 
cordingly the  Ing  and  Con  dots  and  Ing  stem  are  usu- 
ally inserted. 

598.  In   the   Unvocalized  or  Keporting  Style  all 
words  are  unvocalized  except  vocagraphs  and  words 
needing  special  distinction;  phrasing  being  employed 
and  the  Ing  and  Con  dots  and  Ing  stem  being  usually 
omitted. 

599.  In  all  cases  punctuation  marks  are  the  same 
as  in  regular  print  except  when  they  might  interfere 
with    the    stenotypy.       Emphasis    is    denoted    by   a 
straight  line  under  the  letter  or  word  to  be  empha- 
sized. 

600.  The  following  is  an  example  of  the  Unvocal- 
ized or  Reporting  Style  of  stenotypy  and  represents 
the  first  paragraph  on  page  463. 

THE  EIGHT  OF  FREE  DISCUSSION. 

601.  Mp1  as-z-D'Mt'DsKs  on-all  PrP  Kshns    the- 
PLS'.Zhrs3    T3PrsNt   PRSt    Ts  stL'MrMp'MnTn-the 
Rt1  sC°  DsKshn  Nts1   Fl  Jst4  KsTnt,     sNtMnts  LtL 
sPrXg  P  now4  Gr'FshnB  MKt  NssR  B3  sPlsT  o/i-Dhs- 
Pnt.     the-Mr  Pr'sV-a  DsPss/mi  CK-the  Frt'M  NK\\ •" 
B1  sTrfGnt  NsTshn4  PrTnss,  Me-F^Mr  ShB-the  Tn 
NC  Sh°  SRt  ^-Fr4R-the  Nr  NC  Sh°  KsRss  T. 


INDEX. 


SECTION. 

Accent 1 42 

Affixes 314-344 

Alphabet,  Phonographic.  ..page    17 
Angles  at  which  the  letters  are 

made page    26 

Appendages 226 

Attachments 224 


Bible  References 567-570 

Breathings,  page 

11,    26-29,    39,  49,  66  71,  197,  198,  361 
Brevigraphs,  389,  405-407,  411,  518,  519 
Directions  for  form- 
ing     410 

Lists  of 408,409,  412 

By  space  between  figures 515 


Capitals 134,  137,  144 

Ch  and  upward  R 17 

Circle,  Ns  or  Nss 201,  204 

••       S    ...82  92,  111,  127,  172,  184-198 

"       Ss  initial 103108,194,   195 

••  final  or  medial  109-1 17,277,a 
Colloquial  phrases,  "did  n't,"  etc  476 
Compound  words  beginning  with 

S 105 

Consonants  and  Vowels,  Nature 

of.... 55 

R  and  L  double. .  .159,  160 

"        single 161 

Rough 2 

S  double 90 

S  treble,  etc 188-193 

Smooth 1 

W  and  Y  dou- 
ble   159,  172-177 

Z  double 82,  90,  a,  93 

Curl,  N 298,  299 

"      Shun 217,219,246 

Curvet,  Lene 27,  a,  39,  76,  81 


Decimals 554,  555 

Degrees   563,  564 

Derivatives 104,  106,  107,  344,  369 

Diphthongs,  Rough  37 

Smooth 34 

Distinction  (see  Emphasis) ....  144,  a 

Dot,  Long  Vowel 39 

pots,  Breath  26,  39,  49 


E 

SECTION. 

Emphasis  (see  Distinction) 144,  b 

Exercises,  Lessons  and. ...  page    23 

"          "   Directions 
for  learning. .  .page    25 
"  Lessons  and,  Elemen- 

tary style  reading. .p  133 
"          Lessons  and,  Elemen- 
tary style  writing.,  p  171 

Reporting 591 

"          style  read- 
ing  p.  443 

style  writ- 
ing   page  463 

F 

Feet  and  inches 562 

Figures,  etc 528-532 

Foreign  consonants 25 

"        vowels, 56 

Fourth  position, 504 

H 

Half  lengths  not  written  or  join- 
ed in  certain  cases, 267-269 

Halved    curved    letters    without 

angles,  Junctions  of. . .  265 

Mp 251 

Ng 252 

"          T  or  D  not  joined  to  VV, 

Fr,  T  or  Y 273 

Halved,  W  and  Y .• 253 

Halving,  Final  syllable  Ed. . .  .270-274 
"         Present  and  past  tenses 
usually  written   with 
the  same  form  in  cer- 
tain cases 274 

"         principle 244  280 

"         S  halved  after  a  hook 

on  a  halved  curve 277 

"         St     and      Nst      loops 

added 275,  276 

"         T    or    D    added    indis- 
criminately by 244  247 

Homographs, 389,  391,  411 

Lists  of 393,394,  412 

Hook   F 206-208 

Large  W 172-177 

"      N, 199-205 

"       Shun 214  216 

"      Ss  and  St  prefixed   to  R 

hook  on  straight  stems. .  194 


487 


488 


INDEX. 


SECTION. 

Hook    Ss  prefixed  to  L  hook  on 

final  upward  R 195 

"      Ter 209-213 

Hooks  Downward  R  and  L  final. 

etc 221 

"       generally    written    medi- 
ally when  possible  —    228 
"        H  ticks  joined  to  initial 

hook  stems 196,  197 

Imperfect  initial,  etc 183 

on  tick  logographs  —  4rt8,  469 

RandL 151-170 

"    ••     "  hooks  on  M.   .161,  170 
"    "     "      "        "  Mp  and 

Ng 157,  158,  169",  170 

S  prefixed  to  initial...  184.  187 

Small  Wand  Y 178-183 

Hours 565 


Ington 323 

Initials  of  proper  names 134,  135 

Italics 137,  144 

Itself 477,  a 


L.  Downward  and  up- 
ward   12.  15,  16,  229,  235-239 

"  Final  or  medial,  halved 260-262 

"  Lone  or  initial,  halved .. 257 -259,  262 

"  Upward,  after  final  hooks 240 

Legibility  of  print,   script,   and 

phonography page     30 

Lengthened  W  and  Y 285 

Lengthening,  Present  and  past 
tenses  usu  ally 
written  with 
the  same  forms  .  287 

principle 282-292 

Words    ending    in 

Ntr  or  Ndr 286 

Lesson,  1,  29;  2,  30;  3.  32;  4,  34;  5, 
39;  6,  48;  7,58;  8,60;  9,64;  10,67; 
11,68;  12,79;  13,  87;  14.  91;  15,  93; 
16,  9*;  17,  98;  18,  100;  19,  102;  20, 
106:21,  107;  22,  112;  23,  116;  24, 
121;  25,  124;  26,  125;  27,  1:29;  28, 
207;  29,  222;  30,  230;  31,  236;  32, 
238;  33,  241;  31,  265;  35,  281;  36, 
296;  37,  304;  38,  319;  39.  334;  40, 
344;  41,354;  42,  359;  4:{,  363;  44, 
369;  45,  376;  46,  3*2;  47,  385;  48, 
3U2:  49,  401;  50,  410;  51,  419;  52, 
425;  53,  429;  54,  431;  55,  434;  56,  437 

Lessons  and  exercises page    23 

"          "  "  Directions 

for  learning. .     .    page    25 
"        and  exercises,  Element- 
ary style  reading p  133 

"        and  exercises,  Element- 
ary style  writing 171 

Logographs 362-380,  41 1 

"  General 379 

Lists  of 381,  412 

Special 517-519 

Long  and  short  outlines 292 


SECTION. 

Loop,  Final  or  medial 

St 125-129,  275.  279 

"      Final  or  medial  Sir.     ..130-133 

"      Initial  St 122-124.194 

"      NstorNstr..203,204,276,  278,  279 
•'•     St  written  alone 355 

Ly,   Termination   in   certain   art- 
verbs ....  367,  390 

M 

Materials  for  writing page    24 

Method    of    holding   the    pen  or 
pencil page    25 

Mp  halved 251 

"    Double  length 2*3 

"    not  followed  by  R  or  L 171 

Minutes 563,  565 

N 

Negatives 345 

Nghalved 252 

"    Double  length 283,  a 

"    Single       "       53 

Numbers  before  other  words  than 
hundreds,   etc.,    and 

money 542 

"          before  the  words  hun- 
dreds,    etc.,      and 

money 534-541 

"          Cardinal       and      ordi- 
nal  546-553 

"          Common  fractions  and 

mixed 556-561 

"          Decimal  fractions  and 

mixed 554 

"          One,     three,    six     and 
twelve     occurring 

alone 533 

"          Ten,     twenty,      thirty, 

etc 543-545 

Numerical  and  other  denomina- 
tions    571 

O 
Omissions,    60,     b,     293,     d,    320, 

344,a.  348. 350.485-489,  497 
of    medial    T.   K    or 

G,  Nand  W 348 

"             of  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs   350 

Or  space  and  position 512 

Ought 483 

Outlines,  Best 108,  292 


Phonetic  Spelling. p  27,  97,  pp  482.  483 

Phraseography %. .  419-527 

can  and  come —  5U3 
Caution    in    re- 
gard to 511,  516 

•'  Colloquials,   "did 

n't,"  etc 476 

"  Cm,    Cn,    Km    or 

Kn 496-502 

"  defined 420.  b 


INDEX. 


489 


SECTION. 
Phraseography  Fourth  position.  504 

From— to 491 

Halving 470-477 

Hooks   and     cir- 
cles attached  to 
tick     1  o  g  o  - 
graphs.    ...468.  469 
"  Hooks,  etc ...  .45.1-469 

'•  Ing 492-495 

"  Intersect  ed 

phrases —          520 
"              Irregular     phra- 
ses   479 

"  Joined  and  con- 
structed phra- 
ses   526 

"  Joined  and  con- 
structed phra- 
ses. List  of 527 

"               Juxtaposi- 
tion  490-503 

"  Lengthening 478 

"  Of  the        490 

Omissions  .  .485-489 
Or     space    and 

position, 484 

Ought 483 

"  Phraseo- 

graph8 521,  522 

"  Phraseographs 

List  of 523 

8  circle 445,  446 

Special  phrases, 
log  ogr  aphs 
and  brevi- 

graphs 517-519 

Ss  circle 447,448 

"  St  loop 449-451 

8tr    "     452-454 

Techniphrases 
and      techni- 

graphs 517-519 

"Than"  after 
circles  on 
right  curves. . .  467 
Ticks,     semicir- 
cles, etc.... 421-444 

"  To  or  too 490 

"  Well 488 

"What"  distin- 
guished    482 

Words    distin- 
guished by  vo- 
calization     or 
variation  ..480,  481 
"                Zero  posi- 
tion  508,  509 

Phraseographs,  Small 524 

"     List  of....  525 

Stem 521,  522 

"    List  of 683 

Phrases,  General 517 

"         Intersected 520 

"         Joined  and  constructed  526 

List  of 527 

Special 517-619 


SECTION. 

Plurals 814,  368,  546-553 

PoBition  ...4,7,44,284,351-359,  384-3S8 
"  Caution  in  regard  to 

writing  in 359.  51 1 

Possessive 368 

Prefixes 293-3H 

Prependages 226 

Punctuation  and  other 

marks 136-150 

R 

R,  Downward  and  up- 
ward   12,  17,  229-234 

"  Final  or  medial,  halved...  .260-262 
"  Lone  or  inital,  halved,  257-259,  262 

"  Upward,  after  final  hooks 233 

"         "         joined    to   a    follow- 
ing M 22 

Reporting  trials,  hearings, 
etc 581-587 

S 

S  halved  and  written  upward 254 

'•  When  to  use  the  stem 118-120 

Seconds 563,  565 

Self  or  selves,  304-306,  341,    464, 

465 468,  g,h 

Semigraphs 383 

Sh,  Downward  and  up- 
ward  18,  229,  240-243 

Sh,     Downward     and     upward, 

halved 263-264 

Significant  marks,  etc 572-579 

Size  of  the  phonographic  let- 
ters  page  26,  31,  136 

Sound  of  o  in  odd 54,  a 

Speed,  Directions  for  attain- 
ing   693-595 

Spirit! page    1 1 

Stems  joined  without  angles 21 

"      standing  alone  or  joined..      4 

"      written  on  the  line 4 

Stenoscript  and  steuotypy.  .p.  23,  97 
Stenotypic  connected  mat- 
ter  , 596-601 

Straight  and  curved  stems  joined 

at  right  angles 20 

Superiors 46,  149,  357 


T,  Stem  used  after  two  vowels. . .  249 
Table  of  punctuation  and  other 

marks .- 137 

Techniphrases  and  techni- 

graphs 517  519 

Tenses,  Present  and  past  usually 
written  with  same  form  in  cer- 
tain cases 274.  287,  365,  390 

Ticks,  Breath 27,  28,  76-81, 196-198 

"      in  phrases 421-444 

Tive  or  lively,  Words  ending  in..  280 

Tl  and  Dl,  Words  ending  in 281 

To  space  between  figures 514 

Transcribing  trials,  hearings, 
etc 588-590 


4JMI 


INDEX. 


SECTION. 

Transcription  of  a  speech,  etc.,  580 
Type,  Heavy  face page  23,  144,  a 


Variaerraphs, 389,  395,  39«,  41 1 

Lists  of 397,398,  412 

Various  expedients 478-571 

Vocabulary ..  418 

"  Prefatory      remarks 

on  the  413-417 

Vocagraphs 389,  399-402,  41 1 

403,404,  412 

Vocalization 45 

«'  of  stems   having    S 

circle 98-102 

"            of     the     large     cir- 
cle,   103,  .1  109 

"  of    the    R     and     L 

hooked  stems 164-167 

Vowel,  protean 166 

scale 351 

Vowels,  alternati  ve  forms 32 

"       and  consonants,  Nature 

of 5i 

Vowels,  Joined 41 

"        Rough 36 

"       Smooth 30 

"        Written  in  position 355 

"  "        on  the  line ...  44,  355 


SECTION. 

W  halved 253 

'•  lengthened  285 

"  Nature  of 29 

"  Semivowel  or  semiconsonant,     57 
••  Small   alternative  form 

for 60-62,  360 

•'  used  f or  K 11-14 

"  "Well" 488 

•'  "What"  distinguished 482 


Y  and  upward  L 15 

"  halved   ...  253 

"  lengi hened 2£5 

"  Nature  of 29 

••  Semivowel  or  semioonsonant,     5" 
"  Small  alternative  form 

for 60-62,  360 

"  used  for  L 11-14 

"  before  u  employed  only  after 
labials  and  back  linguals 63 


Z. When  louse  the  stem 121 

"   Initial   circle    employed   In    Z 

double  consonants 82,  90,  a,  93 

Zero  position 508,  50V 


"Phonetic  spelling  when  it  comes  will  coine  like  the  deluge." — Anonymous. 

A   SYSTEM:   OK 

PHONOSCRIPT  AND  PHONOTYPY. 

BY     CHARLES     MORRELL,. 


Contains  (in  addition  to  the  explanatory  text  in  common  print)  tne 
pbonoscript  and  phonotypic  alphabets  and  14  pages  of  phonoscript  and 
phonotypic  examples,  by  means  of  which  any  one  can,  in  a  few  hours,  learn 
to  write  and  read  phonetically  with  the  same  facility  as  in  the  ordinary 
orthography. 

The  spelling  is  the  same  as  in  phonography.  Every  phonographer  and 
spelling  reformer,  therefore,  should  be  acquainted  with  this  work.  Fourth 
edition,  108  pages.  Paper.  Price,  .25;  postpaid.  .28. 


who  are  already  acquainted  with  the  above  pamphlet  may, 
if  they  prefer,  write  all  communications  to  the  Ve  on  any  subject  in  phono- 
script  —  including  the  address  on  the  envelope.  If,  however,  the  address  of 
the  sender  is  very  peculiar  it  should  be  in  the  ordinary  spelling. 

"To  satisfy  myself  how  easy  the  system  is  to  write  I  have,  as  you  see, 
written  this  letter  in  'it.  What  impresses  me  most  favorably  is  that  it  is  so 
practical."—  A.  B.  Lennox,  a  superior  stenographer. 

THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  MANUAL 

BY     CHARLES     IVLORRELL. 


Comprises  both  the  Elementary  and  Reporting  Styles  with  many  im- 
provements. Also  solves  the  Aspirate  Problem.  Adapted  to  the  use  of 
schools  and  to  self-instruction.  490  pages  including  an  extensive  vocabu- 
lary and  numerous  engraved  exercises  with  key.  Elegantly  bound  in  cloth 
wuh  gilt  side-title.  Price,  $2.00;  postpaid,  &J.10. 

Liberal  discount  to  teachers  and  schools.     Circulars  free. 

Address,  THE    /WORRELL   VE, 

CHICAGO,  ILL. 


